ALLEN & .SPIER. 
 Union Book Store, 
 148 Clay st. 
 £an Francisco, i 
 
 
 v&imji *% %M&A<>Tt4%£ 
 
 
 
 
 LIBRARY 
 
 OF THE 
 
 University of California. 
 
 GIFT OK 
 
 Mrs. SARAH P. WALSWORTH. 
 
 Received Oct obey, i8g4. 
 ^Accessions No.Qfp o 13 • Class No. 
 
 
 
 
 


NOTES 
 
 EXPLANATORY AND PRACTICAL, 
 
 SECOND EPISTLE TO THE CORINTHIANS 
 
 AND THE 
 
 EPISTLE TO THE GALATIANS. 
 
 P^ ( 
 
 BY ALBERT BARNES. 
 
 It 
 
 NEW YORK: 
 HARPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS, 
 
 82 CLIFF STREET. 
 
 1851. 
 

 -3$ 
 1 
 
 SIS!? 
 
 Entered according to Act of Congress, in tlie year 1839, by 
 
 Albert Barnes, 
 
 in the Office of the Clerk of the District Court of the Eastern District 
 
 of Pennsylvania. 
 
INTRODUCTION 
 
 § 1. The Design of the Second Epistle to the Corinthians, 
 
 Its the Introduction to the first Epistle to the Corinthians, the situation and 
 character of the city of Corinth, the history of the church there, and the design 
 which Paul had in view in writing to them at first, have been fully stated. In 
 order to a full understanding of the design of this epistle, those facts should be 
 borne in distinct remembrance, and the reader is referred to the statement there 
 made as material to a correct understanding of this epistle. It was shown there 
 that an important part of Paul's design at that time was to reprove the irregu- 
 larities which existed in the church at Corinth. This he had done with great 
 fidelity. He had not only answered the inquiries which they proposed to him, 
 but he had gone with great particularity into an examination of the gross disor- 
 ders of which he had learned by some members of the family of Chloe. A large 
 part of the epistle, therefore, was the language of severe reproof. Paul felt its 
 necessity ; and he had employed that language with unwavering fidelity to his 
 Master. 
 
 Yet it was natural that he should feel great solicitude in regard to the recep- 
 tion of that letter, and to its influence in accomplishing what he wished. That 
 letter had been sent from Ephesus, where Paul proposed to remain until after the 
 succeeding Pentecost (1 Cor.xvi. 8); evidently hoping by that time to hear from 
 them, and to learn what had been the manner of the reception of his epistle. 
 He proposed then to go to Macedonia, and from that place to go again to Co- 
 rinth (1 Cor. xvi. 5 — 7); but he was evidently desirous to learn in what manner his 
 first epistle had been received, and what was its effect, before he visited them. He 
 sent Timothy and Erastus before him to Macedonia and Achaia (Acts xix. 22. 
 1 Cor. xvi. 10), intending that they should visit Corinth, and commissioned 
 Timothy to regulate the disordered affairs in the church there. It would appear 
 also that he sent Titus to the church there in order to observe the effect which his 
 epistle would produce, and to return and report to him. 2 Cor. ii. 13; vii. 6 — 16. 
 Evidently Paul felt much solicitude on the subject; and the manner in which 
 they received his admonitions would do much to regulate his own future move- 
 ments. An important case of discipline ; his authority as an apostle ; and the 
 interests of religion in an important city, and in a church which he had himself 
 founded, were all at stake. In this state of mind he himself left Ephesus, and went 
 to Troas on his way to Macedonia, where it appears he had appointed Titus to meet 
 him, and to report to him the manner in which his first epistle had been received. 
 See Note on ch. ii. 13. Then his mind was greatly agitated and distressed because 
 he did not meet Titus as he had expected, and in this state of mind he went for- 
 ward to Macedonia. There he had a direct interview with Titus (ch. vii. 
 5, 6), and learned from him that his first epistle had accomplished all which he 
 had desired, ch. vii. 7 — 16. The act of discipline which he had directed had 
 been performed ; the abuses had been in a great measure corrected, and the Corin- 
 thians had been brought to a state of true repentance for their former irregulari- 
 ties and disorders. The heart of Paul was greatly comforted by this intelligence, 
 
 in 
 
IT INTRODUCTION. 
 
 and by the signal success which had attended this effort to produce reform. In 
 this state of mind he wrote to them this second letter. 
 
 Titus had spent some time in Corinth. He had had $m opportunity of learn- 
 ing the views of the parties, and of ascertaining the true condition of the church. 
 This epistle is designed to meet some of the prevailing views of the party 
 which was opposed to him there, and to refute some of the prevailing slanders 
 in regard to himself. The epistle, therefore, is occupied to a considerable extent 
 in refuting the slanders which had been heaped upon him, and in vindicating 
 his own character. This letter also he sent by the hands of Titus, by whom the 
 former had been sent, and he designed doubtless that the presence of Titus should 
 aid in accomplishing the objects which he had in view in the epistle. See 2 Cor. 
 viii. 17, 18. 
 
 § 2. The Subjects treated of in this Epistle. 
 
 It has been generally admitted that this epistle is written without much definite 
 arrangement or plan. It tieats on a variety of topics mainly as they occurred to 
 the mind of the apostle at the time, and perhaps without having formed any defi- 
 nite arrangement before he commenced writing it. Those subjects are all impor- 
 tant, and are all treated in the usual manner of Paul, and are all useful and in 
 teresting to the church at large ; but we shall not find in this epistle the same 
 systematic arrangement which is apparent in the epistle to the Romans, or which 
 occurs in the first epistle to the Corinthians. Some of the subjects of which it 
 treats are the following. 
 
 (1.) He mentions his own sufferings, and particularly his late trials in Asia. 
 For deliverance from these trials, he expresses his gratitude to God ; and states the 
 design for which God called him to endure such trials to have heen, that he might 
 be better qualified to comfort others who might be afflicted in a similar manner, 
 ch. i. 1—12. 
 
 (2.) He vindicates himself from one of the accusations which his enemies had 
 brought against him, that he was unstable and fickle-minded. He had promised 
 to visit them ; and he had not yet fulfilled his promise. They took occasion, 
 therefore, to say that he was unstable, and that he was afraid to visit them. He 
 shows to them, in reply, the true reason why he had not come to them, and that 
 his real object in not doing it, had been " to spare" them. ch. i. 13 — 24. 
 
 (3.) The case of the unhappy individual who had been guilty of incest, had 
 deeply affected his mind. In the first epistle, he had treated of this case at large, 
 and had directed that disoipline should be exercised. He had felt deep solicitude 
 in regard to the manner in which his commands on that subject should be received, 
 and had judged it not best to visit them until he should be informed of the man- 
 ner in which they had complied with his directions. Since they had obeyed him, 
 and had inflicted discipline on him, he now exhorts them to forgive the unhappy 
 man, and to receive him again to their fellowship, ch. ii. 1 — 11. 
 
 (4.) He mentions the deep solicitude which he had on this subject, and his 
 disappointment when he came to Troas and did not meet with Titus as he had 
 expected, and had not been informed as he hoped to have been of the manner in 
 which his former epistle had been received, ch. ii. 12 — 17. In view of the man- 
 ner in which they had received his former epistle, and of the success of his efforts, 
 which he learned when he reached Macedonia, he gives thanks to God that all his 
 efforts to promote the welfare of the church had been successful, ch. ii. 14 — 17. 
 
 (5.) Paul vindicates his character, and his claims to be regarded as an apostle. 
 He assures them that he does not need letters of commendation to them, since 
 they were fully acquainted with his character, ch. iii. 1 — 6. This subject leads 
 him into an examination of the nature of the ministry and its importance, which 
 
INTRODUCTION. y 
 
 he illustrates by showing the comparative obscurity of the Mosaic ministrations, 
 and the greater dignity, and permanency of the gospel, ch. iii. 7 — 18. 
 
 (6.) In chs. iv. v. he states the principles by which he was actuated in the 
 ministry. He and the other apostles were greatly afflicted, and were subjected to 
 great and peculiar trials, but they had also great and peculiar consolations. They 
 were sustained with the hope of heaven, and with the assurance that there was 
 a world of glory. They acted in view of that world, and had gone forth in view 
 of it to entreat men to be reconciled to God. 
 
 (7.) Having referred in ch. v. to the nature and objects of the Christian minis- 
 try, he expatiates with great beauty on the temper with which he and his bre 
 thren, in the midst of great trials and afflictions, executed this important work 
 ch. vi. 1—10. 
 
 (8.) Having in this manner pursued a course of remark that was calculated to 
 conciliate their regard, and to show his affection for them, he exhorts them (ch. 
 vi. 11 — 18), to avoid those connexions which would injure their piety, and which 
 were inconsistent with the gospel which they professed to love. The connexions 
 to which he particularly referred were, improper marriages and ruinous alliances 
 with idolaters, to which they were particularly exposed. 
 
 (9.) In ch. vii. he again makes a transition to Titus, and to the joy which he 
 had brought him in the intelligence which he gave of the manner in which the 
 commands of Paul in the first epistle had been received, and of its happy effect on 
 the minds of the Corinthians. 
 
 (10.) In chs. viii. and ix. Paul refers to, and discusses the subject on which his 
 neart was so much set — the collection for the poor and afflicted Christians in 
 Judea. He had commenced the collection in Macedonia, and had boasted to 
 them that the Corinthians would aid largely in that benevolent work, and he now 
 sent Titus to complete it in Corinth. 
 
 (11.) In ch. x. he enters upon a vindication of himself, and of his apostolic 
 authority against the accusation of his enemies ; and pursues the subject through 
 ch. xi. by a comparison of himself with others, and in ch. xii. by an argument di- 
 rectly in favour of his apostolic authority from the favours which God had bestowed 
 on him, and the evidence which he had given of his having been commissioned 
 by God. This subject he pursues also in various illustrations to the end of the 
 epistle. 
 
 The objects of this epistle, therefore, and subjects discussed, are various. They 
 are, to show his deep interest in their welfare — to express his gratitude that his 
 former letter had been so well received, and had so effectually accomplished what 
 he wished to accomplish — to carry forward the work of reformation among them 
 which had been so auspiciously commenced — to vindicate his authority as an 
 apostle from the objections which he had learned through Titus they had con- 
 tinued to make — to secure the collection for the poor saints in Judea, on which 
 his heart had been so much set — and to assure them of his intention to come and 
 visit them according to his repeated promises. The epistle is substantially of the 
 same character as the first. It was written to a church where great dissensions 
 and other evils prevailed; it was designed to promote a reformation ; and is a 
 model of the manner in which evils are to be corrected in a church. In con- 
 nexion with the first epistle, it shows the manner in which offenders in the 
 church are to be dealt with, and the spirit and design with which the work of 
 discipline should be entered on and pursued. Though these were local evils, 
 yet great principles are involved here of use to the church in all ages ; and to 
 these epistles the church must refer at all times, as an illustration of the proper 
 manner of administering discipline, and of silencing the calumnies of enemies. 
 
 1* 
 
VI INTRODUCTION. 
 
 § 3. The time and place in which the Epistle was written. 
 
 It is manifest that this epistle was written from Macedonia (see ch. viii. 1 — 14, 
 and ix. 2), and was sent by Titus to the church at Corinth. If so, it was writ- 
 ten probably about a year after the former epistle. Paul was on his way to Co- 
 rinth, and was expecting to go there soon. He had left Ephesus, where he was 
 when he wrote the first epistle, and had gone to Troas, and from thence to Mace- 
 donia, where he had met with Titus, and had from him learned what was the 
 effect of his first epistle. In the overflowing of his heart with gratitude for the 
 success of that letter, and with a desire to carry forward the work of reformation 
 in the church, and completely to remove all the objections which had been made 
 to his apostolic authority, and to prepare for his own welcome reception when he 
 went there, he wrote this letter — a letter which we cannot doubt was as kindly 
 received as the former, and which like that accomplished the objects which he had 
 

 ^W5« 
 
 THE SECOND 
 
 EPISTLE TO THE COM 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 TDAUL, an apostle a of Jesus 
 L Christ by the will of God, 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 This chapter consists of the following 
 parts, or subjects : 
 
 1. The usual salutation and benedic- 
 tion in the introduction of the epistle, ver. 
 1. 2. This is found in all the epistles of 
 Paul, and was at once an affectionate 
 salutation and an appropriate expression 
 of his interest in their welfare, and also 
 an appropriate mode of commencing an 
 address to them by one who claimed to 
 be inspired and sent from God. 
 
 2. He refers to the consolation which 
 he had had in his heavy trials, and 
 praises God for that consolation, and 
 declares that the reason for which he 
 was comforted was, that he might be 
 qualified to administer consolation to 
 others in the same or in similar circum- 
 stances, ver. 3 — 7. 
 
 3. He informs them of the heavy 
 trials which he was called to experience 
 when he was in Ephesus, and of his 
 merciful deliverance from those trials, 
 ver. 8 — 12. He had been exposed to 
 death, and had despaired of life, (ver. 8, 
 9); yet he had been delivered (ver. 10); 
 he desired them to unite with him in 
 thanksgiving on account of it (ver. 11); 
 and in all this he had endeavoured to 
 keep a good conscience, and had that 
 testimony that he had endeavoured to 
 maintain such a conscience toward all, 
 and especially toward them. ver. 12. 
 
 4. He refers to the design which he 
 had in writing the former letter to them, 
 ver. 13. 14. He had written to them 
 only such things as they admitted to be 
 true and proper ; and such as he was 
 persuaded they would always admit. 
 They had always received his instruc- 
 
 and Timothy our brother, unto 
 the church of God which is at 
 
 al&2Ti.l. 1. 
 
 tions favourably and kindly ; and he had 
 always sought their welfare. 
 
 5. In this state of mind, Paul had 
 designed to have paid them a second 
 visit, ver. 15, 16. But he had not done 
 it yet, and it appears that his enemies 
 had taken occasion from this to say that 
 he was inconstant and fickle-minded. 
 He, therefore, takes occasion to vindi- 
 cate himself, and to convince them that he 
 was not faithless to his word and pur- 
 poses, and to show them the true reason 
 why he had not visited them. ver. 17 — 
 24. He states, therefore, that his real 
 intentions had been to visit them (ver. 
 15, 16); that his failure to do so had not 
 proceeded from either levity or false- 
 hood (ver. 17) ; as they might have 
 known from the uniform doctrine which 
 he had taught them, in which he had 
 inculcated the necessity of a strict ad- 
 herence to promises, from the veracity 
 of Jesus Christ his great example (ver. 
 1 8—20); and from the fact that God had 
 given to him the Holy Spirit, and 
 anointed him (ver. 21,22); and he states, 
 therefore, that the true reason why he 
 had not come to them was, that he 
 wished to spare them (ver. 23, 24) ; he 
 was willing to remain away from them 
 until they should have time to correct 
 the evils which existed in their church, 
 and prevent the necessity of severe dis- 
 cipline when he should come. 
 
 1. Paul an apostle, &c. See Notes 
 on Rom. i. 1, and 1 Cor. i. 1. ^ By 
 the will of God. Through, or agreea- 
 bly to the will of God. Note, 1 Cor. i. 1. 
 •f And Timothy our brother. Paul was 
 accustomed to associate some other per- 
 son or persons with him in writing his 
 7 
 
II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 Corinth, with all the saints a 
 which are in all Achaia : 
 
 2 Grace * be to you, and 
 peace, from God our Father, and 
 from the Lord Jesus Christ. 
 
 epistles. Thus in the first epistle to the 
 Corinthians, Sosthenes was associated 
 with him. For the reasons of this, see 
 Note on 1 Cor. i. 1. The name of 
 Timothy is associated with his in the 
 epistles to the Philippians and Colos- 
 sians. From the former epistle to the 
 Corinthians (ch. xvi. 10), we learn that 
 Paul had sent Timothy to the church at 
 Corinth, or that he expected that he 
 would visit them. Paul had sent him 
 into Macedonia in company with Eras- 
 tus (Acts xix. 21, 22), intending him- 
 self to follow them, and expecting that 
 they would visit Achaia. From the 
 passage before us, it appears that Timo- 
 thy had returned from this expedition, 
 and was now with Paul. The reason why 
 Paul joined Timothy with him in writ- 
 ing this epistle may have been the fol- 
 lowing: (1.) Timothy had been re- 
 cently with them, and they had become 
 acquainted with him, and it was not 
 only natural that he should express his 
 friendly salutations, but his name and 
 influence among them might serve in 
 some degree to confirm what Paul 
 wished to say to them. Comp. Note, 1 
 Cor. i. 1. (2.) Paul may have wished 
 to give as much influence as possible to 
 Timothy. He designed that he should 
 be his fellow-labourer ; and as Timothy 
 was much younger than himself, he 
 doubtless expected that he would sur- 
 vive him, and that he would in some 
 sense succeed him in the care of the 
 churches. He was desirous, therefore, 
 of securing for him all the authority 
 which he could, and of letting it be 
 known that he regarded him as abun- 
 dantly qualified for the great work with 
 which he was intrusted. (3.) The in- 
 fluence and name of Timothy might be 
 supposed to have weight with the party 
 In the church that had slandered Paul, 
 by accusing him of insincerity or in- 
 stability in regard to his purposed visit 
 
 3 Blessed be God, even the 
 Father of our Lord Jesus Christ, 
 the Father of mercies, and the 
 God of all comfort ; 
 
 a Ph. 1.1. 6Ro. 1.7. cEp. 1. 3. 
 
 to them. Paul had designed to go to 
 them directly from Ephesus, but he had 
 changed his mind, and the testimony of 
 Timothy might be important to prove 
 that it was done from motives purely 
 conscientious. Timothy was doubtless 
 acquainted with the reasons ; and his 
 testimony might meet and rebut a 
 part of the charges against him. See 
 ch. i. ver. 13 — 16. Tf Unto the church 
 of God, &c. See Note 1 Cor. i. 2. 
 f With all the saints which are in all 
 Achaia. Achaia, in the largest sense, 
 included the whole of Greece. Achaia 
 proper, however, was the district or pro- 
 vince of which Corinth was the capital. 
 It comprehended the part of Greece 
 lying between Thessaly and the south- 
 ern part of the Peloponnesus, embrac- 
 ing the whole western part of the Pelo 
 ponnesus. It is probable that there were 
 not a few Christians scattered in Achaia, 
 and not improbably some small churches 
 that had been established by the labours 
 of Paul or of others. From Rom. xvi. 
 1, we know that there was a church at 
 Cenchrea, the eastern port of Corinth, 
 and it is by no means improbable that 
 there were other churches in that region. 
 Paul doubtless designed that copies of 
 this epistle should be circulated among 
 them. 
 
 2. Grace be to you, &c. This is the 
 usual Christian salutation. See Note 
 Rom. i. 7. 1 Cor. i. 3. 
 
 3. Blessed be God. This is the com- 
 mencement properly of the epistle, and 
 it is the language of a heart that is full 
 of joy, and that bursts forth with grati- 
 tude in view of mercy. It may have 
 been excited by the recollection that he 
 had formerly written to them, and that 
 during the interval which had elapsed 
 between the time when the former 
 epistle was written and when this was 
 penned, he had been called to a most 
 severe trial, and that from that trial he 
 
K.D. 60. J 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 4 Who comforteth us in all 
 our tribulation, that we may be 
 
 had been mercifully delivered. With 
 a heart full of gratitude and joy for 
 this merciful interposition, he com- 
 mences this epistle. It is remarked by 
 Doddridge, that eleven out cf the thir- 
 teen epistles of Paul, begin with excla- 
 mations of praise, joy, and thanksgiv- 
 ing. Paul had been afflicted, but he 
 had also been favoured with remarkable 
 consolations, and it was not unnatural 
 that he should allow himself to give 
 expression to his joy and praise in view 
 of all the mercies which God had con- 
 ferred on him. This entire passage is 
 one that is exceedingly valuable, as 
 showing that there may be elevated joy 
 in the midst of deep affliction, and as 
 showing what is the reason why God 
 visits his servants with trials. The 
 phrase " blessed be God," is equivalent 
 to ' praised be God,' or is an expres- 
 sion of thanksgiving. It is the usual 
 formula of praise (comp. Eph. i. 3) ; 
 and shows his entire confidence in God, 
 and his joy in him, and his gratitude for 
 his mercies. It is one of innumerable 
 instances which show that it is possible 
 and proper to bless God in view of the 
 trials with which he visits his people, 
 and of the consolations which he causes 
 to abound, f The Father of our Lord 
 Jesus Christ. God is mentioned here 
 in the relation of the " Father of the 
 Lord Jesus," doubtless because it was 
 through the Lord Jesus, and him alone, 
 that He had imparted the consolation 
 which he had experienced, ver. 5. Paul 
 knew no other God than the ' Father of 
 the Lord Jesus;' he knew no other 
 source of consolation than the gospel ; 
 he knew of no way in which God im- 
 parted comfort except through his 
 Son. That is genuine Christian con- 
 solation which acknowledges the Lord 
 Jesus as the medium by whom it is im- 
 parted ; that is proper thanksgiving to 
 God which is offered through the Re- 
 deemer ; that only is the proper acknow- 
 ledgment of God which recognises 
 him as the ' Father of the Lord Jesus.' 
 1 The Father of mercies. This is a 
 
 able to comfort them which are 
 in any trouble, by the comfort 
 
 Hebrew mode of expression, where a 
 noun performs the place of an adjective, 
 and the phrase is synonymous nearly 
 with ' merciful Father.' The expression 
 has however somewhat more energy and 
 spirit than the simple phrase « merciful 
 Father.' The Hebrews used the word 
 fa/her often to denote the author, or 
 source of any thing ; and the idea in 
 phraseology like this is, that mercy pro- 
 ceeds from God, that he is the source 
 of it, and that it is his nature to impart 
 mercy and compassion, as if he origi- 
 nated it ; or was the source and foun- 
 tain of it — sustaining a relation to all 
 true consolation analogous to that which 
 a father sustains to his offspring. God 
 has the paternity of all true joy. 
 It is one of his peculiar and glorious 
 attributes that he thus produces conso- 
 lation and mercy. <{And the God of all 
 comfort. The source of all consolation. 
 Paul delighted, as all should do, to trace 
 all his comforts to God ; and Paul, as all 
 Christians have, had sufficient reason to 
 regard God as the source of true conso- 
 lation. There is no other real source 
 of happiness but God ; and he is able 
 abundantly, and willing to impart con 
 solation to his people. 
 
 4. Who comforteth us. Paul here 
 doubtless refers primarily to himself 
 and his fellow apostles as having been 
 filled with comfort in their trials ; to the 
 support which the promises of God 
 gave ; to the influences of the Holy 
 Spirit, the Comforter ; and to the hopes 
 of eternal life through the gospel of the 
 Redeemer. «[ That- we may be able to 
 comfort, &c. Paul does not say that 
 this was the only design which God had 
 in comforting them that they might be 
 able to impart comfort to others ; but 
 he does say that this is an important 
 and main purpose. It is an object 
 which he seeks, that his people in their 
 afflictions should be supported and com- 
 forted ; and for this purpose he fills the 
 hearts of his ministers with consolation ; 
 gives them personal experience of the 
 sustaining power of grace in their trials; 
 
10 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 
 wherewith we ourselves are com- 
 forted of God 
 
 5 For as the sufferings a of 
 Christ ahound in us, so our 
 consolation also aboundeth by 
 Christ. 
 
 a Col. 1. 24. 
 
 and enables them to speak of what fhey 
 have felt in regard to the consolations of 
 the gospel of the Lord Jesus, f By the 
 comfort, &c. By the same topics of 
 consolation ; by the same sources of joy 
 which have sustained us. They would 
 have experience; and by that expe- 
 rience they would be able to minister 
 consolation to those who were in any 
 manner afflicted. It is only by personal 
 experience that we are able to impart 
 consolation to others. Paul refers here 
 undoubtedly to the consolations which 
 are produced by the evidence of the 
 pardon of sin, and of acceptance with 
 God, and the hope of eternal life. These 
 consolations abounded in him and his 
 fellow apostles richly ; and sustained by 
 them he was able also to impart like 
 consolation to others who were in simi- 
 lar circumstances of trial. 
 
 5. For as the sufferings of Christ 
 abound in us. As we are called to expe- 
 rience the same sufferings which Christ 
 endured ; as we are called to suffer in 
 his cause, and in the promotion of the 
 same object. The sufferings which 
 they endured were in the cause of Christ 
 and his gospel ; were endured in endea- 
 vouring to advance the same object 
 which Christ sought to promote ; and 
 were substantially of the same nature. 
 They arose from opposition, contempt, 
 persecution, trial, and want, and were 
 the same as the Lord Jesus was him- 
 self subjected to during the whole of his 
 public life. Comp. Col. i. 24. Thus 
 Peter says (1 Pet. iv. 13) of Christians, 
 that they were " partakers of Christ's 
 sufferings." % So our consolation also 
 aboundeth by Christ. By means of 
 Christ, or through Christ, consolation is 
 abundantly imparted to us. Paul re- 
 garded the Lord Jesus as the source of 
 consolation, and felt that the comfort 
 
 6 And whether we be afflicted, 
 it is for a your consolation and 
 salvation, which is x effectual in 
 the enduring of the same suffer- 
 ings, which we also suffer : or 
 whether we be comforted, it is 
 
 a c. 4. 15. * or wrought. 
 
 which he imparted, or which was im- 
 parted through him, was more than 
 sufficient to overbalance all the trials 
 which he endured in his cause. The 
 comforts which he derived from Christ 
 were those, doubtless, which arose from 
 his presence, his supporting grace, from 
 his love shed abroad in the heart ; from 
 the success which he gave to his gos- 
 pel, and from the hope of reward which 
 was held out to him by the Redeemer, 
 as the result of all his sufferings. And 
 it may be observed as an universal truth, 
 that if we suffer in the cause of Christ, 
 if we are persecuted, oppressed, and 
 calumniated on his account, he will take 
 care that our hearts shall be filled with 
 consolation. 
 
 6. And whether we be afflicted. If 
 we are afflicted ; or, our affliction is for 
 this purpose. This verse is designed 
 to show one of the reasons of the suf- 
 ferings which the apostles had endured ; 
 and it is a happy specimen of Paul's 
 skill in his epistles. He shows that all 
 his trials were for their welfare and 
 would turn to their benefit. He suf- 
 fered that they might be comforted ; he 
 was afflicted for their advantage. This 
 assurance would tend to conciliate their 
 favour, and strengthen their affection for 
 him, as it would show them that he was 
 disinterested. We are under the deepest 
 obligations of gratitude to one who suf- 
 fers for us; and there is nothing that 
 will bind us more tenderly to any one 
 than the fact that ne has been subjected to 
 great calamity and trial on our account. 
 This is one of the reasons why the 
 Christian feels so tenderly his obligation 
 to the Lord Jesus Christ, f It is for 
 your consolation and salvation. It will 
 be useful for your consolation ; or it is 
 endured in order to secure your com- 
 fort, and promote your salvation. Paul 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 11 
 
 for your consolation and salva- 
 tion. 
 
 7 And our hope of you is 
 steadfast, knowing that as a ye 
 
 alto. 8. 17. 
 
 had suffered in Ephesus, and it is to this 
 that he here particularly refers. He 
 does not mean to say that his sufferings 
 there were particularly for the comfort 
 oi the Corinthians ; but that they had 
 been endured in the general purpose of 
 promoting the salvation of men, and 
 that they, together with others, would 
 reap the benefit of his trials. He en- 
 dured them in order to spread the true 
 religion, and they would be benefited 
 by that, and besides, he would be the 
 better able by his trials to administer to 
 them the true consolations of the gospel 
 in their sufferings ; and his example, 
 and experience, and counsel, would ena- 
 ble them to bear up under their own 
 trials in a proper manner, f Which is 
 effectual, <&c. Margin, wrought. The 
 Greek word hi^youfAm; denotes here 
 efficacious, operating to, producing; 
 and the phrase denotes that their salva- 
 tion would be effected, wrought out, or 
 secured by the patient endurance of 
 such sufferings. Those sufferings were 
 necessary ; and a patient endurance 
 of them would tend to promote their 
 salvation. The doctrine that the pa- 
 tient endurance of affliction tends to pro- 
 mote salvation, is everywhere taught in 
 the Bible. See Notes on Rom. v. 3 — 5. 
 Tf In the enduring. By your endur- 
 ing ; or by your patience in such suf- 
 ferings. You are called to endure the 
 same kind of sufferings ; and patience 
 in such trials will tend to promote your 
 salvation, t Or whether we be com- 
 forted, &c. One design of our being 
 comforted is, that we may be able to 
 impart consolation to you in the times 
 of similar trial and calamity. See ver. 4. 
 The sentiment of the whole passage is, 
 that their eternal welfare would be pro- 
 moted by the example of the apostles 
 in their trials, and by the consolations 
 which they would be able to impart as 
 the result of their afflictions. 
 
 7. And our hope of you is steadfast. 
 
 are partakers of the sufferings so 
 shallye be also of the consolation. 
 8 For we would not, bre- 
 thren, have you ignorant of our 
 
 We have a firm and unshaken hepe in 
 regard" to you ; we have a confident ex- 
 pectation that you will be saved. We 
 believe that you will be enabled so to bear 
 trial as to show that you are sustained 
 by the Christian hope ; and so as to ad- 
 vance your own piety, and confirm your 
 prospect of heaven. ^ As ye are par- 
 takers of the sufferings. It is evident 
 from this, that the Corinthians had been 
 subjected to trials similar to those which 
 the apostle had endured. It is not 
 known to what afflictions they were 
 then subjected ; but it is not improbable 
 that they were exposed to some kind of 
 persecution and opposition. Such trials 
 were common in all the early churches; 
 and they served to unite all the friends of 
 the Redeemer in common bonds, and to 
 make them feel that they were one. 
 They had united sorrows ; and they had 
 united joys ; and they felt they were 
 tending to the same heaven of glory. 
 United sorrows and united consolations 
 tend more than any thing else to bind 
 people together. We always have a 
 brotherly feeling for one who suffers as 
 we do ; or who has the same kind of 
 joy which we have. 
 
 8. For we would not have you igno- 
 rant. We wish you to be fully in- 
 formed. See Note, 1 Cor. x. 1 ; xii. 1. 
 The object of Paul here is, to give a 
 full explanation of the nature of his 
 trials, to which he had referred in ver. 4. 
 He presumed that the Corinthians would 
 feel a deep interest in him and in his 
 trials ; that they would sympathize with 
 him, and would pray that those suffer- 
 ings, and that this deliverance might be 
 attended with a blessing (ver. 11); and 
 perhaps he wished also to conciliate 
 their kindness towards himself by men- 
 tioning more at length the nature of the 
 trials which he had been called to en- 
 dure on account of the Christian reli- 
 gion, of which they were reaping so 
 material benefits. \ Of our trouble 
 
12 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 
 trouble* which came to us in 
 Asia, that we were pressed out 
 
 a Ac. 19. 23. 
 
 which came to us in Asia. The term 
 Asia is often used to denote that part of 
 Asia Minor of which Ephesus was the 
 capital. See Note, Acts ii. 9. There has 
 been considerable diversity of opinion as 
 to the " troubles" to which Paul here 
 refers. Some have supposed that he 
 refers to the persecutions at Lystra 
 (Acts xiv. 6. 19. 20), from which he 
 had been recovered as it were by mira- 
 cle ; but as that happened so long before 
 this, it seems improbable that he should 
 here refer to it. There is every mark 
 of freshness and reccniness about this 
 event ; and Paul evidently referred to 
 some danger from which he had been 
 lately delivered, and which made a deep 
 impression on his mind when he wrote 
 this epistle. Semler supposes that he 
 refers to the lying in wait of the Jews 
 for him when he was about to go to 
 Macedonia, mentioned in Acts xx. 3. 
 Most commentators have supposed that 
 he refers to the disturbances which were 
 made at Ephesus by Demetrius and his 
 friends, mentioned in Acts xix., and by 
 reason of which he was compelled to 
 leave the city. The only objection to 
 this is, that which is mentioned by 
 Whitby and Macknight, that as Paul 
 did not go into the theatre there (Acts 
 xix. 31), he incurred no such risk of his 
 life as to justify the strong expressions 
 mentioned in ver. 9 and 10. They 
 suppose, therefore, that he refers to the 
 danger to which he was exposed in 
 Ephesus on another occasion, when he 
 was compelled to fight there with wild 
 beasts. See 1 Cor. xv. 32. But nearly 
 all these opinions may be reconciled, per- 
 haps, by supposing that he refers to the 
 group of calamities to which he had 
 been exposed in Asia, and from which 
 he had just escaped by going to Mace- 
 donia — referring perhaps more particu- 
 larly to the conflict which he had been 
 compelled to have with the wild beasts 
 there. There was the riot excited by 
 
 of measure, above strength, in- 
 somuch that we despaired even 
 of life : 
 
 Demetrius (Acts xix.), in which his life 
 had been endangered, and from which 
 he had just escaped; and there had been 
 the conflict with the wild beasts at 
 Ephesus (see Note 1 Cor. xv. 32), 
 which perhaps had occurred but just be- 
 fore ; and there were the plots of the 
 Jews against him (Acts xx. 3), from 
 which, also, he had just been delivered. 
 By these trials, his life had been endan- 
 gered, perhaps, more than once, and he 
 had been called to look death calmly in 
 the face, and to anticipate the proba- 
 bility that he might soon die. Of these 
 trials ; of all these trials, he would not 
 have the Corinthians ignorant; but de- 
 sired that they should be fully apprized 
 of them, that they might sympathize 
 with him, and that through their prayers 
 they might be turned to his benefit. 
 ^j That we were pressed out of measure. 
 See Acts xix. We were borne down, 
 or weighed down by calamity (f/S^S-e- 
 ju;v) exceedingly (x.a.& Mng/3cx>r), super- 
 eminently. The expression denotes 
 excess, eminence, or intensity. It is 
 one of Paul's common and very strong 
 expressions to denote any thing that is 
 intensive or great. See Rom. vii. 13. 
 Gal. i. 13. 2 Cor. iv. 17. 1 Above 
 strength. Beyond our strength. More 
 than in ourselves we were able to bear. 
 1 Insomuch that we despaired even (fife. 
 Either expecting to be destroyed by the 
 wild beasts with which he had to con- 
 tend, or to be destroyed by the people. 
 This was one of the instances undoubt- 
 edly to which he refers in ch. xi. 23, 
 where he says he had been " in death 
 oft." And this was one of the many 
 cases in which Paul was called on to 
 contemplate death as near. It was 
 doubtless one cause of his fidelity, and 
 of his great success in his work, that 
 he was thus called to regard death as 
 near at hand, and that to use the some- 
 what unpoetical, but deeply affecting 
 1 lines of Baxter, expressing a sentiment 
 
A. D 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER 1. 
 
 13 
 
 9 But we had the * sentence 
 of death in ourselves, that we 
 should not trust a in ourselves, 
 
 » Or answer. a Je. 17. 5,7. 
 
 which guided all his ministry, and which 
 was one source of his eminent success, 
 
 He preachM as though he ne'er would preach 
 
 asain, 
 As a dying man to dying men. 
 
 9. But we had the sentence of death 
 in ourselves. Marg. " answer." The 
 word rendered " sentence" (a.7roKgi/ux) 
 means properly an answer, judicial re- 
 sponse, or sentence ; and is here syno- 
 nymous with verdict. It means that 
 Paul felt that he was condemned to die ; 
 that he felt as if he were under sentence 
 of death and with no hope of acquittal ; 
 he was called to contemplate the hour 
 of death as just before him. The words 
 " in ourselves," mean, against ourselves ; 
 or, we expected certainly to die. This 
 seems as if he had been condemned to 
 die, and may either refer to some in- 
 stance when the popular fury was so 
 great that he felt it was determined he 
 should die ; or more probably to a judi- 
 cial sentence that he should be cast to 
 the wild beasts, with the certain ex- 
 pectation that he would be destroyed, as 
 was always the case with those who 
 were subjected to the execution of such 
 a sentence, t That we should not 
 trust in ourselves. This is an exceed- 
 ingly beautiful and important sentiment. 
 It teaches that in the time to which Paul 
 refers, he was in so great danger, and 
 had so certain a prospect of death, that 
 he could put no reliance on himself. 
 He felt that he must die ; and that hu- 
 man aid was vain. According to every 
 probability he would die ; and all that 
 he could do was to cast himself on the 
 protection of that God who had power 
 to save him even then, if he chose, and 
 who, if he did it, would exert power 
 similar to that which is put forth when 
 the dead are raised. The effect, there- 
 fore, of the near prospect of death was 
 to lead him to put increased confidence 
 in God. He felt that God only could 
 
 but in God which raiseth the 
 dead : 
 
 10 Who delivered a us from 
 
 a2Pe.2. 9. 
 
 save him ; or that God only could sua 
 tain him if he should die. Perhaps also 
 he means to say that the effect of this 
 was to lead him to put increased con- 
 fidence in God after his deliverance ; not 
 to trust in his own plans, or to confide 
 in his own strength ; but to feel that all 
 that he had was entirely in the hands of 
 God. This is a common, and a happy 
 effect of the near prospect of death to a 
 Christian ; and it is well to contemplate 
 the effect on such a mind as that of Paul 
 in the near prospect of dying, and to 
 see how instinctively then it clings to 
 God. A true Christian in such cir- 
 cumstances will rush to His arms and 
 feel that there he is safe. T But in God 
 which raiseth the dead. Intimating 
 that a rescue in such circumstances 
 would be like raising the dead. It is 
 probable that on this occasion Paul was 
 near dying; that he had given up all 
 hope of life — perhaps, as at Lystra 
 (Acts xiv. 19), he was supposed to be 
 dead. He felt, therefore, that he was 
 raised up by the immediate power of 
 God, and regarded it as an exertion of 
 the same power by which the dead are 
 raised. Paul means to intimate that so 
 far as depended on any power of his 
 own, he was dead. He had no power 
 to recover himself, and but for the gra- 
 cious interposition of God he would have 
 died. 
 
 10. WJio delivered us from so great 
 a death. From a death so terrible, and 
 from a prospect so alarming. It is in- 
 timated here by the word which Paul 
 uses, that the death which he appre- 
 hended was one of a character peculiarly 
 terrific — probably a death by wild 
 beasts. Note, ver. 8. He was near to 
 death ; he had no hope of rescue ; and 
 the manner of the death which was 
 threatened was peculiarly frightful. 
 Paul regarded rescue from such a death 
 as a kind of resurrection ,- and felt that 
 
14 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 so great a death, and doth de- 
 liver : m whom we trust that he 
 will yet deliver us $ 
 
 he owed his life to God as if he had 
 raised him from the dead. All deliver- 
 ance from imminent peril, and from 
 dangerous sickness, whether of ourselves 
 or our friends, should be regarded as a 
 kind of resurrection from the dead. 
 God could with infinite ease have taken 
 away our breath, and it is only by his 
 merciful interposition that we live. 
 1 And doth deliver. Continues yet to 
 deliver us ; or preserve us — intimating 
 perhaps that danger had continued to 
 follow him after the signal deliverance 
 to which he particularly refers, and that 
 he had continued to be in similar peril 
 of his life. Paul was daily exposed to 
 danger ; and was constantly preserved 
 by the good providence of God. In 
 what manner he was rescued from the 
 peril to which he was exposed he has no- 
 where intimated. It is implied, how- 
 ever, that it was by a remarkable divine 
 interposition ; but whether by miracle, 
 or by the ordinary course of providence, 
 he nowhere intimates. Whatever was 
 the mode, however, Paul regarded God 
 as the source of the deliverance, and 
 felt that his obligations were due to him 
 as his kind Preserver. Tf In whom we 
 trust that he will yet deliver us. That 
 he will continue to preserve us. We 
 hope ; we are accustomed to cherish the 
 expectation that he will continue to de- 
 fend us in the perils which we shall yet 
 encounter. Paul felt that he was still 
 exposed to danger. Everywhere he 
 was liable to be persecuted (comp. Note, 
 Acts xx. 23), and everywhere he felt 
 that his life was in peril. Yet he had 
 been thus far preserved in a most re- 
 markable manner ; and he felt assured 
 that God would continue to interpose 
 in his behalf, until his great purpose in 
 regard to him should be fully accom- 
 plished, so that at the close of life he 
 could look to God as his Deliverer, and 
 feel that all along his perilous journey 
 he had been his great Protector. 
 
 1 1 Ye also helping- a together 
 by prayer for us, that for the 
 gift bestowed upon us by the 
 
 alto. 15 30. Ph. 1. 19. Ja. 5. 16— 18. 
 
 11. Ye also helping together by 
 prayer for us. Tindal renders this in 
 connexion with the close of the previous 
 verse ; " we trust that yet hereafter he 
 will deliver us, by the help of your 
 prayer for us." The word rendered 
 ' helping together,' means co-operating, 
 aiding, assisting ; and the idea is, that 
 Paul felt that his trials might be turned 
 to good account, and give occasion for 
 thanksgiving ; and that this was to be 
 accomplished by the aid of the prayers 
 of his fellow Christians. He felt that 
 the church was one, and that Christians 
 should sympathize with one another. 
 He evinced deep humility and tender re- 
 gard for the Corinthians when he called 
 on them to aid him by their prayers. 
 Nothing would be better calculated 
 to excite their tender affection and re- 
 gard than thus to call on them to sym- 
 pathize with him in his trials, and to 
 pray that those trials might result in 
 thanksgiving throughout the churches. 
 1 That for the gift bestowed upon us. 
 The sentence which occurs here is very 
 perplexing in the original, and the con- 
 struction is difficult. But the main idea 
 is not difficult to be seen. The " gift" 
 here referred to (to ^agta-jua) means 
 doubtless the favour shown to him in Iris 
 rescue from so imminent a peril ; and he 
 felt that this was owing to the prayers 
 of many persons on his behalf. He 
 believed that he had been remembered 
 in the petitions of his friends and 
 fellow Christians, and that his deliver- 
 ance was owing to their supplications. 
 f By the means of many persons. 
 Probably meaning that the favour refer- 
 red to had been imparted by means of the 
 prayers of many individuals who had 
 taken a deep interest in his welfare. 
 But it may also imply perhaps that he 
 had been directly assisted, and had 
 been rescued from the impending danger 
 by the interposition of many friends 
 who had come to his relief. The usual 
 
A.D.60.] 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 15 
 
 means of many persons, thanks 
 may be given by many on our 
 behalf. 
 
 interpretation is, however, that it was 
 by the prayers of many in his behalf. 
 ^f Thanks may be given by many on 
 our behalf. Many may be induced also 
 to render thanks for my deliverance. 
 The idea is, that as he had been deli- 
 vered from great peril by the prayers of 
 many persons, it was proper also that 
 thanksgiving should be offered by as 
 many in his behalf, or on account of 
 his deliverance. " Mercies that have 
 been obtained by prayer should be 
 acknowledged by praise." — Doddridge. 
 God had mercifully interposed in answer 
 to the prayers of his people ; and it was 
 proper that his mercy should be as ex- 
 tensively acknowledged. Paul was de- 
 sirous that God should not be forgotten ; 
 and that those who had sought his de- 
 liverance should render praise to God : 
 perhaps intimating here that those who 
 had obtained mercies by prayer are 
 prone to forget their obligation to return 
 thanks to God for his gracious and mer- 
 ciful interposition. 
 
 12. For our rejoicing is this. The 
 source or cause of- our rejoicing. ' I 
 have a just cause of rejoicing, and it is, 
 that I have endeavoured to live a life of 
 simplicity and godly sincerity, and have 
 not been actuated by the principles of 
 worldly wisdom.' The connexion here 
 is not very obvious, and it is not quite 
 easy to trace it. Most expositors, as 
 Doddridge, Locke, Macknight, Bloom- 
 field, «fcc, suppose that he mentions the 
 purity of his life as a reason why he 
 had a right to expect their prayers, as 
 he had requested in ver. 11. They 
 would not doubt, it is supposed, that 
 his life had been characterized by great 
 simplicity and sincerity, and would feel, 
 therefore, a deep interest in his welfare, 
 and be disposed to render thanks that 
 he had been preserved in the day of 
 peril. But the whole context and the 
 scope of the passage is rather to be 
 taken into view. Paul had been ex- 
 posed to death. He had no hope of life 
 
 12 For our rejoicing is this, 
 the testimony of our conscience, 
 that in simplicity and godly sin- 
 
 Then the ground of his rejoicing, and 
 of his confidence, was that he had lived 
 a holy life. He had not been actuated 
 by " fleshly wisdom," but he had been 
 animated and guided by " the grace of 
 God." His aim had been simple, his 
 purpose holy, and he had the testimony 
 of his conscience that his motives had 
 been right, and he had, therefore, no 
 concern about the result. A good con- 
 science, a holy life through Jesus Christ, 
 will enable a man always to look calm- 
 ly on death. What has a Christian to 
 fear in death ] Paul had kept a good 
 conscience towards all ; but he says that 
 he had special and peculiar joy that he had 
 done it towards the Corinthians. This 
 he says, because many there had accused 
 him of fickleness, and of disregard for 
 their interests. He declares, therefore, that 
 even in the prospect of death he had a 
 consciousness of rectitude towards them, 
 and proceeds to show (v. 13 — 23) that 
 the charge against him was not well 
 founded. I regard this passage, there- 
 fore, as designed to express the fact that 
 Paul, in view of sudden death, had a 
 consciousness of a life of piety, and was 
 comforted with the reflection that he 
 had not been actuated by the " fleshly 
 wisdom" of the world, t The testimo- 
 ny of our conscience. An approving 
 conscience. It does not condemn me 
 on the subject. Though others might 
 accuse him, though his name might be 
 calumniated, yet he had comfort in the 
 approval which his own conscience gave 
 to his course. Paul's conscience was 
 enlightened, and its decisions were cor- 
 rect. Whatever others might charge 
 him with, he knew what had been the 
 aim and purpose of his life ; and the 
 consciousness of upright aims, and of 
 such plans as the ' grace of God' would 
 prompt to, sustained him. An approv- 
 ing conscience is of inestimable value 
 when we are calumniated ; — and, when 
 we draw near to death, t That in 
 simplicity (iv d;rA0T»T/). Tindal renders 
 
16 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 
 cerity, not "with fleshly wis- 
 dom, but by the grace of b God, 
 
 a 1 Co. 2. 4, 13. b 1 Co. 15, 10. 
 
 we have had our conversation 
 in the world, and more abun- 
 dantly to you-ward. 
 
 this forcibly "without doubleness." 
 The word means sincerity, candour, pro- 
 bity, plain-heartedness, Christian sim- 
 plicity, frankness, integrity. See 2 Cor. 
 xi. 3. It stands opposed to double- 
 dealings and purposes ; to deceitful ap- 
 pearances, and crafty plans ; to mere 
 policy, and craftiness in accomplishing 
 an object. A man under the influence 
 of this, is straight-forward, candid, open, 
 frank ; and he expects to accomplish 
 his purpose by integrity and fair-deal- 
 ing, and not by stratagem and cunning. 
 Policy, craft, artful plans, and deep-laid 
 schemes of deceit belong to the world ; 
 simplicity of aim and purpose are the 
 true characteristics of a real Christian. 
 If And godly sincerity. Gr. " sincerity 
 of God." This may be a Hebrew 
 idiom, by which the superlative degree 
 is indicated, when, in order to express 
 the highest degree, they added the name 
 of God, as in the phrases ■ mountains 
 of God,' signifying the highest moun- 
 tains,' or 'cedars of God,' denoting 
 lofty cedars. Or it may mean such 
 sincerity as God manifests and approves ; 
 such as he, by his grace, would produce 
 in the heart ; such as the religion of the 
 gospelis fitted to produce. The word used 
 here, nms£W<^ and rendered sincerity, 
 denotes, properly, clearness, such as is 
 judged of or discerned in sunshine (from 
 iiKu and Kgiva), and thence pureness, in- 
 tegrity. It is most probable that the 
 phrase here denotes that sincerity which 
 God produces and approves; and the 
 sentiment is, that pure religion, the re- 
 ligion of God, produces entire sincerity 
 in the heart. Its purposes and aims are 
 open and manifest, as if seen in the 
 wnshine. The plans of the world are 
 obscure, deceitful, and dark, as if 
 M the night. 1 Not with fleshly wis- 
 uom. Not with the wisdom which is 
 manifested by the men of this world ; 
 not by the principles of cunning, and 
 mere policy, and expediency, which 
 often characterize them. The phrase 
 
 here stands opposed to simplicity and 
 sincerity, to openness and straight-for- 
 wardness. And Paul means to disclaim 
 for himself, and for his fellow-labourers, 
 all that carnal policy which distinguishes 
 the mere men of the world. And if 
 Paul deemed such policy improper for 
 him, we should deem it improper for 
 us ; if he had no plans which he wished 
 to advance by it, we should have none ; 
 if he would not employ it in the pro- 
 motion of good plans, neither should 
 we. It has been the curse of the church 
 and the bane of religion ; and it is to 
 this day exerting a withering and blight- 
 ing influence on the church. The mo- 
 ment that such plans are resorted to, it 
 is proof that the vitality of religion is 
 gone, and any man who feels that his 
 purposes cannot be accomplished but 
 by such carnal policy, should set it 
 down as full demonstration that his 
 plans are wrong, and that his purpose 
 should be abandoned. Tf But by the 
 grace of God. This phrase stands op- 
 posed, evidently, to " fleshly wisdom." 
 It means that Paul had been influenced 
 by such sentiments and principles as 
 would be suggested or prompted by the 
 influence of his grace. Locke renders 
 it, " by the favour of God directing me." 
 God had shown him favour; God 
 had directed him ; and he had kept him 
 from the crooked and devious ways of 
 mere worldly policy. The idea seems 
 to be not merely that he had pursued a 
 correct and upright course of life, but 
 that he was indebted for this to the 
 mere grace and favour of God, an idea 
 which Paul omitted no opportunity of 
 acknowledging. ^ We have had our 
 conversation. We have conducted our 
 selves (uV5t(TTga'p»//sv). The word here 
 used means literally, to turn up, to over- 
 turn ; then to turn back, to return, and 
 in the middle voice, to turn one's self 
 around, to turn one's self to any thing, 
 and, also, to move about in, to live in, 
 to be conversant with, to conduct one's 
 
A. D. 60. J 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 17 
 
 13 For we write none other 
 things unto you than what ye 
 
 self. In this sense it seems to be used 
 here. Gomp. Heb. x. 33 ; xiii. 18. 1 
 Tim iii. 15. 1 Pet. i. 17. The word 
 conversation, we usually apply to oral 
 discourse, but in the Scriptures, it means 
 conduct, and the sense of the passage 
 is, that Paul had conducted himself in 
 accordance with the principles of the 
 grace of God, and had been influenced 
 by that, f In the world. Everywhere ; 
 wherever I have been. This does not 
 mean in the world as contradistinguish- 
 ed from the church, but in the world at 
 large, or wherever he had been, as con- 
 tradistinguished from the church at Co- 
 rinth. It had been his common and 
 universal practice. ^ And more abun- 
 dantly to you-ward. Especially towards 
 you. This was added doubtless because 
 there had been charges against him in 
 Corinth, that he had been crafty, cun- 
 ning, deceitful, and especially that he 
 had deceived them (see ver. 17), in not 
 visiting them as he had promised. He 
 affirms, therefore, that in all things he 
 had acted in the manner to which the 
 grace of God prompted, and that his 
 conduct, in all respects, had been that of 
 entire simplicity and sincerity. 
 
 13. For we write none otlur things, 
 Sec. There has been much variety in 
 the interpretation of this passage; and 
 much difficulty felt in determining what 
 it means. The sense seems to me to be 
 this. Paul had just declared that he 
 had been actuated by pure intentions 
 and by entire sincerity, and had in all 
 things been influenced by the grace of 
 God. This he had shown everywhere, 
 out more particularly among them' at 
 Corinth. That they fully knew. In 
 making this affirmation they had full 
 evidence from what they had known of 
 him in former times that such had been 
 his course of life ; and he trusted that 
 they would be able to acknowledge the 
 same thing to the end, and that they 
 would never have any occasion to form 
 2* 
 
 read or acknowledge ; and I 
 trust ye shall acknowledge even 
 to the end ; 
 
 a different opinion of him. It will be 
 recollected that it is probable that some 
 at Corinth had charged him with insin- 
 cerity ; and some had accused him of 
 fickleness in having promised to come 
 to Corinth and then changing his mind, 
 or had charged him with never having 
 intended to come to them. His object 
 in this verse is to refute such slanders, 
 and he says, therefore, that all that he 
 affirmed in his writings about the sin- 
 cerity and simplicity of his aims, were 
 such as they knew from their past ac- 
 quaintance with him to be true ; and 
 that they knew that he was a man who 
 would keep his promises. It is an in- 
 stance of a minister who was able to 
 appeal to the people among whom he 
 had lived and laboured in regard to the 
 general sincerity and uprightness of his 
 character — such an appeal as every mi- 
 nister oug ht to be able to make to refute 
 all slanders ; and such as he will be 
 able to make successfully, if his life, 
 like that of Paul, is such as to warrant 
 it. Such seems to me to be the sense 
 of the passage. Beza, however, renders 
 it, "I write no other things than what 
 ye read, or may understand," and so 
 Rosenmuller, Wetstein, Macknight, and 
 some others interpret it and they ex- 
 plain it as meaning, '1 write nothing 
 secretly, nothing ambiguously, but I 
 express myself clearly, openly, plainly, 
 so that I may be read and understood by 
 all.' Macknight supposes that they 
 had charged him witli using ambiguous 
 language, that he might afterwards in« 
 terpret it to suit his own purpose. The 
 objection to this is, that Paul never ad- 
 verts to the obscurity or perspicuity of 
 his own language. It was his conduct 
 that was the main subject on which ho 
 was writing, and the connexion seems 
 to demand that we understand nirn as 
 affirming that they had abund tfit evi- 
 dence that what he affirmec oi his 
 simplicity of aim, and integrit) of life. 
 
18 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 
 14 As also ye have acknow- 
 ledged us in part, that a we 
 are your rejoicing, even as ye 
 
 a Ph. 4. 1. 
 
 was true. t Than what ye read (dv*- 
 yivS><niiTi). This word properly means 
 to know accurately ,- to distinguish ; 
 and in the New Testament usually to 
 know by reading. Doddridge remarks, 
 that the word is ambiguous, and may 
 signify either to acknowledge, to know, 
 or to read. He regards it as here used 
 in the sense of knowing. It is probably 
 used here in the sense of knowing ac- 
 curately, or surely ; of recognising from 
 their former acquaintance with him. 
 They would see that the sentiments 
 which he now expressed were such as 
 accorded with his character and uni- 
 form course of life. ^ Or acknowledge 
 QmyivSjo-KirTt). The proposition vri in 
 composition here is intensive, and the 
 word denotes to know fully ; to receive 
 full knowledge of; to know well ; or to 
 recognise. It here means that they 
 would fully recognise, or know entirely 
 to their satisfaction, that the sentiments 
 which he here expressed were such as 
 accorded with his general manner of 
 life. From what they knew of him, 
 they could not but admit that he had 
 been influenced by the principles stated. 
 1f And I trust ye shall acknow- 
 ledge. I trust that my conduct will be 
 such as to convince you always that I 
 am actuated by such principles. I 
 trust you will never witness any de- 
 parture from them — the language of a 
 man of settled principle, and of fixed 
 aims and honesty of life. An honest 
 man can always use such language re- 
 specting himself. \ Even to the end. 
 To the end of life ; always. " We 
 trust that you will never have occasion 
 to think dishonourably of us; or to re- 
 flect on any inconsistency in our be- 
 haviour." — Doddridge. 
 
 14. As also ye have acknowledged us. 
 You have had occasion to admit my 
 singleness of aim, and purity of inten- 
 tion and of life by your former acquaint- 
 
 also are ours in the day of the 
 Lord Jesus. 
 
 15 And in this confidence I 
 
 ance with me ; and you have cheerfully 
 done it. f Inpart(a.7ro/u^cvq). Tindal 
 renders this, " as ye have found us part- 
 ly." The sense seems to be, ' as part 
 of you acknowledge ;' meaning that a 
 portion of the church was ready to con- 
 cede to him the praise of consistency 
 and uprightness, though there was a 
 faction, or a part that denied it. % That 
 we are your rejoicing. That we are 
 your joy, and your boasting. That is, 
 you admit me to be an apostle. You 
 regard me as your teacher, and guide. 
 You recognise my authority, and ac- 
 knowledge the benefits which you have 
 received through me. If Even as ye also 
 are ours. Or, as you will be our re- 
 joicing in the day when the Lord Jesus 
 shall come to gather his people to him- 
 self. Then it will be seen that you 
 were saved by our ministry ; and then 
 it will be an occasion of abundant and 
 eternal thanksgiving to God that you 
 were converted by our labours. And as 
 you now regard it as a matter of con- 
 gratulation and thanksgiving that you 
 have such teachers as we are, so shall 
 we regard it as a matter of congratula- 
 tion and thanksgiving — as our chief 
 joy — that we were the instruments of 
 saving such a people. The expression 
 implies that there was mutual confi- 
 dence, mutual love, and mutual cause of 
 rejoicing. It is well when ministers 
 and people have such confidence in each 
 other, and have occasion to regard their 
 connexion as a mutual cause of rejoic* 
 ing and of Knxi^ii^a. or boasting. 
 
 15. And in this confidence. In this 
 confidence of my integrity, and that you 
 had this favourable opinion of me, and 
 appreciated the principles of my con- 
 duct. I did not doubt that you would 
 receive me kindly, and would give me 
 again the tokens of your affection and 
 regard. In this Paul shows that how 
 ever some of them might regard him 
 
A. D. 60 J 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 19 
 
 was minded to come unto you 
 before, that ye might have a 
 second * benefit ; 
 
 16 And to pass by .you into 
 
 * Or, grace. 
 
 yet that he had no doubt that the ma- 
 jority of the church there would receive 
 him kindly, t I was minded. I 
 willed (ificuMpuiv) ; it was my intention. 
 ^ To come unto you before. Tindal 
 renders this, "the other time." Paul 
 refers doubtless to the time when he 
 wrote his former epistle, and when it 
 was his serious purpose, as it was his 
 earnest wish, to visit them again. See 
 1 Cor. xvi. 5. In this purpose he had 
 been disappointed, and he now proceeds 
 to state the reasons why he had not 
 visited them as he had purposed, and to 
 show that it did not arise from any 
 fickleness of mind. His purpose had 
 been at first to pass through Corinth on 
 his way to Macedonia, and to remain 
 some time with them. See ver. 16. 
 Comp. 1 Cor. xvi. 5, 6. This purpose 
 he had now changed ; and instead of 
 passing through Corinth on his way to 
 Macedonia, he had gone to Macedonia by 
 the way of Troas (ch. 11, 12) ; and 
 the Corinthians having, as it would 
 seem, become acquainted with this fact, 
 had charged him with insincerity in 
 the promise, or fickleness in regard to 
 his plans. Probably it had , been said 
 by some of his enemies that he had 
 never intended to visit them. ^ That 
 ye might have a second benefit. Marg. 
 grace. The word here used (;£<*§«) * s 
 that which is commonly rendered grace, 
 and means probably favour, kindness, 
 good-will, beneficence ; and especially 
 favour to the undeserving. Here, it is 
 evidently used in the sense of gratifica- 
 tion, or pleasure. And the idea is, that 
 they had been formerly gratified and 
 benefited by his residence among them ; 
 he had been the means of conferring 
 important favours on them, and he was 
 desirous of being again with them, in 
 order to gratify them by his presence, and 
 that he might b« the means of imparting 
 
 Macedonia, and to come again 
 out of Macedonia unto you, and 
 of you to be brought on my a way 
 toward Judea. 
 
 a Ac. 21. 5. 
 
 to them other favours. Paul presumed 
 that his presence with them would be 
 to them a source of pleasure, and that 
 his coming would do them good. It is 
 the language of a man who felt assured 
 that he enjoyed, after all, the confidence 
 of the mass of the church there, and that 
 they would regard his being with them 
 as a favour. He had been with them 
 formerly almost two years. His resi- 
 dence there had been pleasant to them 
 and to him ; and had been the occasion 
 of important benefits to them. He did 
 not doubt that it would be so again. 
 Tindal renders this, "that ye might 
 have had a double pleasure." It may 
 be remarked here that several MSS. 
 instead of xdyv, grace, read X*£<iv,joy. 
 
 16. And to pass by you. Through 
 (JV) you ; that is, through your city, or 
 province ; or to take them, as we say, 
 in his way. His design was to pass 
 through Corinth and Achaia on his 
 journey. This was not the direct way 
 from Ephesus to Macedonia. An in- 
 spection of a map (see the map of Asia 
 Minor prefixed to the Notes on the 
 Acts of the Apostles) will show at one 
 view that the direct way was that which 
 he concluded finally to take — that by 
 Troas. Yet he had designed to go out 
 of his way in order to make them a 
 visit; and intended also, perhaps, to 
 make them also a longer visit on his 
 return. The former part of the plan 
 he had been induced to abandon. 
 % Into Macedonia. A part of Greece 
 having Thrace on the north, Thessaly 
 south, Epirus west, and the -.-Egean Sea 
 east. See Note, Acts xvi. 9. t And 
 of you to be brought on my way. By 
 you. See Note, 1 Cor. xvi. 6. 
 t Toward Judea. His object in going 
 to Judea was to convey the collection 
 for the poor saints which he had been at 
 so much pains to collect throughout the 
 
20 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 17 When I therefore was thus j purpose according a to the flesh, 
 
 minded, did I use lightness ? or 
 the things that I purpose, do I 
 
 dc. 10. 2. 
 
 churches of the Gentiles. See Notes, 
 Rom. xv. 25, 26. Comp. 1 Cor. xvi. 3, 4. 
 17. When I therefore was thus 
 minded. When I formed this purpose ; 
 when I willed this, and expressed this 
 intention, f Did I use lightness? 
 The word tKaxpyu. (from ja*o§o?) means 
 properly lightness in weight. Here it 
 is used in reference to the mind ; and 
 in a sense similar to our word levity, as 
 denoting lightness of temper or conduct ; 
 inconstancy, changeableness, or fickle- 
 ness. This charge had been probably 
 made that he had made the promise 
 without any due consideration, or 
 without any real purpose of performing 
 it ; or that he had made it in a trifling 
 and thoughtless manner. By the inter- 
 rogative form here, he sharply denies 
 that it was a purpose formed in a light 
 and trifling manner. *|f Do I purpose 
 according to the flesh. In such a man- 
 ner as may suit my own convenience 
 and carnal interest. Do I form plans 
 adapted only to promote my own ease 
 and gratification, and to be abandoned 
 when they are attended with incon- 
 venience 1 The phrase " according to 
 the flesh" here seems to mean ' in such 
 a \v;iy as to promote my own ease and 
 gratification ; in a manner such as the 
 men of the world form ; such as would 
 he formed under the influence of earthly 
 passions and desires, and to be forsaken 
 when those plans would interfere with 
 such gratifications.' Paul denies in a 
 positive manner that he formed such 
 plans ; and they should have known 
 enough of his manner of life to be as- 
 sured that that was not the nature of 
 the schemes which he had devised? 
 Probably no man ever lived who formed 
 his plans of life less for the gratification 
 of the flesh than Paul. 1 That with 
 me there should be yea, yea, and nay, 
 nay ? There has been a great variety 
 in the interpretation of this passage. 
 
 that with me there should be 
 yea, yea, and nay, nay? 
 
 18 But as God is true, our 
 
 See Bloomfield, Grit. Dig. m loco. The 
 meaning seems to be, ' that there should 
 be such inconstancy and uncertainty in 
 my counsels and actions, that no one 
 could depend on me, or know what 
 they had to expect from me.' Bloom- 
 field supposes that the phrase is a pro- 
 verbial one, and denotes a headstrong, 
 self-willed spirit which will either do 
 things, or not do them as pleases, 
 without giving any reasons. He sup- 
 poses that the repetition of the words 
 yea and nay is designed to denote 
 positiveness of assertion — such posi- 
 tiveness as is commonly shown by 
 such persons, as in the phrases, 'what 
 I have written I have written,' ' what I 
 have done I have done.' It seems more 
 probable, however, that the phrase is 
 designed to denote the ready compliance 
 which an inconstant and unsettled man 
 is accustomed to make with the wishes 
 of others ; his expressing a ready assent 
 to what they propose ; falling in with 
 their views ; readily making promises ; 
 and instantly, through some whim, or 
 caprice, or wish of others, saying ' yea, 
 nay,' to the same thing ; that is, chang- 
 ing his mind, and altering his purpose 
 without stay good reason, or in accord- 
 ance with any fixed principle or settled 
 rule of action. Paul says that this was 
 not his character. He did not affirm a 
 thing at one time and deny it at another ; 
 he did not promise to do a thing ono 
 moment and refuse to do it the next. 
 
 18. But as God is true. Tindal 
 renders this, in accordance more literally 
 with the Greek, " God is faithful ; for 
 our preaching unto you was not yea 
 and nay." The phrase seems to Lave 
 the form of an oath, or to be a solemn 
 appeal to God as a witness, and to be 
 equivalent to the expression ' the Lord 
 liveth,' or 'as the Lord liveth.' The 
 idea is, ' God is faithful and true. He 
 never deceives; never promises thai 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 21 
 
 1 word toward you was not 
 yea a and nay. 
 
 » Or, preaching. a Mat. 5. 37. 
 
 which he does not perform. So true 
 is it that I am not fickle and changing 
 in my purposes/ This idea of the 
 faithfulness of God is the argument 
 which Paul urges why he felt himself 
 bound to be faithful also. That faithful 
 God he regarded as a witness, and to 
 that God he could appeal on the occa- 
 sion, t Our word. Marg. preaching 
 (o xoya). This may refer either to his 
 preaching, to his promises of visiting 
 them, or his declarations to them in ge- 
 neral on any subject. The particular 
 subject under discussion was the promise 
 which he had made to visit them. But 
 he here seems to make his affirmation 
 general, and to say universally of his 
 promises, and his teaching, and of all 
 his communications to them, whether 
 orally or in writing, that they were not 
 characterized by inconstancy and 
 changeableness. It was not his cha- 
 racter to be fickle, unsettled, and vacil- 
 lating. 
 
 19. For the Son of God. In this 
 verse, and the following, Paul states j 
 that he felt himself bound to maintain j 
 the strictest veracity for two reasons ; I 
 the one, that Jesus Christ always j 
 evinced the strictest veracity (ver. 19) ; 
 the other, God was always true to all the ; 
 promises that he made (ver. 20) ; and 
 as he felt himself to be the servant of 
 the Saviour and of God, he was bound j 
 by the most sacred obligations also to j 
 maintain a character irreproachable in i 
 regard to veracity. On the meaning 
 of the phrase " Son of God," see Note, \ 
 Rom. i. 4. 1[ Jesus Christ. It is j 
 agreed, says Bloomfield, by the best | 
 commentators, ancient and modern, that 
 by Jesus Christ is here meant his doc- 
 trine. The sense is, that the preaching 
 respecting Jesus Christ, did not repre- 
 sent him as fickle, and changeable ; as 
 unsettled, and as unfaithful ; but as 
 true, consistent, and faithful. As that 
 had been the regular and constant re- 
 
 19 For the Son a of God, 
 Jesus Christ who was preached 
 among you by us, even by me 
 
 a Mar. 1. 1. 
 
 presentation of Paul and his fellow- 
 labourers in regard to the Master whom 
 they served, it was to be inferred that 
 they felt themselves bound sacredly to 
 observe the strictest constancy and ve- 
 racity. 1 By us, &c. Silvanus, here 
 mentioned, is the same person who in 
 the Acts of the Apostles is called Silas. 
 He was with Paul at Philippi, and was 
 imprisoned there with him (Acts xvi), 
 and was afterwards with Paul and 
 Timothy at Corinth when he first vi- 
 sited that city. Acts xviii. 5. - Paul 
 was so much attached to him, and had 
 so much confidence in him, that he 
 joined his name with his own in several 
 of his epistles. 1 Thess. i. I. 2 Thess. 
 i. 1. 1 Was not yea and nay. Our 
 representation of him was not that he 
 was fickle and changeable, f But in 
 him was yea. Was not one thing at 
 one time, and another at another. He 
 is the same, yesterday, to-day, and for- 
 ever. All that he says is true ; all the 
 promises that he makes are firm ; all his 
 declarations are faithful. Paul may 
 refer to the fact that the Lord Jesus 
 when on earth was eminently charac- 
 terized by truth. Nothing was more 
 striking than his veracity. He called 
 himself " the truth," as being eminently 
 true in all his declarations. " I am the 
 way, and the truth, and the life." 
 John xiv. 6. Comp. Rev. iii. 7. And 
 thus (Rev. iii. 14) he is called "the 
 faithful and true witness." In all his 
 life he was eminently distinguished 
 for that. His declarations were simple 
 truth ; his narratives were simple, un- 
 varnished, uncoloured, unexaggerated 
 statements of what actually occurred. 
 He never disguised the truth ; never 
 prevaricated ; never ;iad any mental re- 
 servation ; never dveived ; never used 
 any word, or threw in any circumstance, 
 that was fitted to lead the mind astray. 
 He himself said that this was the great 
 object which he had in view in coming 
 
n. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 and Silvanus and Timotheus, 
 was not yea and nay, but in him 
 was yea. 
 
 20 For all the promises of 
 
 into the world. " To this end was I 
 born and for this cause came I into the 
 world, that I should bear witness unto 
 the truth." John xviii. 37. As Jesus 
 Christ was thus distinguished for simple 
 truth, Paul felt that he was under sa- 
 cred obligations to imitate him, and 
 always to evince the same inviolable 
 fidelity. The most deeply felt obliga- 
 tion on earth is that which the Christian 
 feels to imitate the Redeemer. 
 
 20. For all the promises of God in 
 him. All the promises which God has 
 made through him. This is another 
 reason why Paul felt himself bound to 
 maintain a character of the strictest 
 veracity. The reason was, that God 
 always evinced that ; and that as none 
 of his promises failed, he felt himself 
 sacredly bound to imitate him, and to 
 adhere to all his. The promises of 
 God which are made through Christ, 
 relate to the pardon of sin to the peni- 
 tent ; the sanctification of his people ; 
 support in temptation and trial ; guid- 
 ance in perplexity ; peace in death, and 
 eternal glory beyond the grave. All of 
 these are made through a Redeemer, 
 and none of these shall fail. *| Are 
 yea. Shall all be certainly fulfilled. 
 There shall be no vacillation on the 
 part of God ; no fickleness ; no aban- 
 doning of his gracious intention. 
 1 And in him amen. In Rev. iii. 14, 
 the Lord Jesus is called the " Amen." 
 The word means true, faithful, certain. 
 And the expression here means that all 
 the promises which are made to men 
 through a Redeemer shall be certainly 
 fulfilled. They are promises which are 
 confirmed and established, and which 
 shall by no means fail. ^ Unto the 
 glory of God by us. Either by us mi- 
 nisters and apostles ; or by us who are 
 Christians. The latter, I think, is the 
 meaning ; and Paul means to say, that 
 the fulfilment of all the promises which 
 
 God in ° him are yea, and in him 
 amen, unto the glory of God by 
 us. 
 
 21 Now he which stablisheth 
 
 oRo. 15. 8,9. He. 13. 8. 
 
 God has made to his people shall result 
 in his glory and praise as a God of con- 
 descension and veracity. The fact that 
 he has made such promises is an act 
 that tends to his own glory — since it 
 was of his mere grace that they were 
 made ; and the fulfilment of these pro- 
 mises in and through the church, shall 
 also tend to produce elevated views of 
 his fidelity and goodness. 
 
 21. Now he which stablisheth us. 
 He who makes us firm (o @i%-JuZv »/uas) ; 
 that is, he who has confirmed us in 
 the hopes of the gospel, and who gives 
 us grace to be faithful, and firm in our 
 promises. The object of this is to trace 
 all to God, and to prevent the appear- 
 ance of self-confidence, or of boasting. 
 Paul had dwelt at length on his own 
 fidelity and veracity. He had taken 
 pains to prove that he was not incon- 
 stant and fickle-minded. He here says, 
 that this was not to be traced to himself, 
 or to any native goodness, but was all 
 to be traced to God. It was God who 
 had given them all confident hope in 
 Christ ; and it was God who had given 
 him grace to adhere to his promises, and 
 to maintain a character for veracity. 
 The first • us,' in this verse refers pro- 
 bably to Paul himself; the second in- 
 cludes also the Corinthians, as being 
 also anointed and sealed. 1 And hath 
 anointed us. Us who are Christians. 
 It was customary to anoint kings, 
 prophets, and priests on their entering 
 on their office as a part of the ceremony 
 of inauguration. The word anoint is 
 applied to a priest, Ex. xxviii. 41 ; xl. 
 15; to a prophet, 1 Kings xix. 16. Isa. 
 lxi. 1 ; to a king, 1 Sam. x. 1 ; xv. 1. 
 2 Sam. ii. 4. 1 Kings i. 34. It is ap- 
 plied often to the Messiah as being set 
 apart, or consecrated to his office as 
 prophet, priest, and king — i. e. as ap- 
 pointed by God to the highest office ever 
 held in the world. It is applied also to 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 • us with you in Christ, and hath 
 anointed b us, is God ; 
 
 o2Th 
 
 CHAPTER .. 23 
 
 22 Who hath also sealed c us, 
 
 8. 1 Pe. 5. 10. 
 
 Christians as being consecrated, or set 
 apart to the service of God by the Holy 
 Spirit — a use of the word which is de- 
 rived from the sense of consecrating, or 
 setting apart to the service of God. 
 Thus in 1 John ii. 20, it is said, " But 
 ye have an unction from the Holy One 
 and know all things." So in ver. 27, 
 " But the anointing which ye have re- 
 ceived abideth in you," &c. The 
 anointing which was used in the con- 
 secration of prophets, priests, and kings, 
 seems to have been designed to be em- 
 blematic of the influences of the Holy 
 Spirit, who is often represented as 
 poured upon those who are under his 
 influence (Prov. i. 23. Isa. xliii. 4. Joel 
 ii. 28, 29. Zech. xii. 10. Acts x. 45), 
 in the same way as water or oil is 
 poured out. And as Christians are 
 everywhere represented as being under 
 the influence of the Holy Spirit, as being 
 those on whom the Holy Spirit is 
 poured, they are represented as u anoint- 
 ed." They are in this manner solemn- 
 ly set apart, and consecrated to the 
 service of God. 1 Is God. God has 
 done it. All is to be traced to him. It 
 is not by any native goodness which we 
 have, or any inclination which we have 
 by nature to his service. This is one 
 of the instances which abound so much 
 in the writings of Paul, where he de- 
 lights to trace all good influences to 
 God. 
 
 22. Who hath also sealed us. The 
 word used here (from o-p£*yi£a>) means 
 to seal up ; to close and make fast with 
 a seal, or signet ; as, e.g., books, letters, 
 &c. that they may not be read. It is 
 also used in the sense of setting a mark 
 on any thing, or a seal, to denote that it 
 is genuine, authentic, confirmed, or 
 approved, as when a deed, compact, or 
 agreement is sealed. It is thus made 
 sure; and is confirmed or established. 
 Hence it is applied to persons, as de- 
 noting that they are approved, as in 
 Rev. vii. 3: "Hurt not the earth, 
 
 b 1 Jno.2.20,27. Re. 3. 18. 
 
 c Ep.l. 13, 14; 4.30. 2 Ti. 2. 19 
 
 neither the sea, nor the trees, till wc 
 have sealed the servants of our God in 
 their foreheads." Comp. Ezek. ix. 4. 
 See Note, John vi. 27, where it is 
 said of the Saviour, " for him hath God 
 the Father sealed. ,, Comp. John iii. 33. 
 In a similar manner Christians are said 
 to be sealed ; to be sealed by the Holy 
 Spirit (Eph. i. 13 ; iv. 30) ; that is, the 
 Holy Spirit is given to them to confirm 
 them as belonging to God. He grants 
 them his Spirit. He renews and sancti- 
 fies them. He produces in their hearts 
 those feelings, hopes, and desires which 
 are an evidence that they are approved 
 by God ; that they are regarded as his 
 adopted children; that their hope is 
 genuine, and that their redemption and 
 salvation are sure — in the same way as 
 a seal makes a will or an agreement 
 sure. God grants to them his Holy 
 Spirit as the certain pledge that they 
 are his, and shall be approved and saved 
 in the last day. In this there is nothing 
 miraculous, or in the nature of direct 
 revelation. It consists of the ordinary 
 operations of the Spirit on the heart, 
 producing repentance, faith, hope, joy, 
 conformity to God, the love of prayer 
 and praise, and the Christian virtues 
 generally ; and these things are the 
 evidences that the Holy Spirit has re- 
 newed the heart, and that the Christian 
 is sealed for the day of redemption. 
 1 And given the earnest of the Spirit. 
 The word here used («$a#j# from the 
 Heb. pan]?) means properly a pledge 
 given to ratify a contract ; a part of the 
 price, or purchase money ; a first pay- 
 ment ; that which confirms the bargain, 
 and which is regarded as a pledge that 
 all the price will be paid. The word 
 occurs in the Septuagint and Hebrew, 
 in Gen. xxxviii. 17, 18 ; xxxviii. 20. 
 In the New Testament it occurs only 
 in this place, and in ch. v. 5, and Eph. 
 i. 14, in each place in the same con- 
 nexion as applied to the Holy Spirit, 
 and his influences on the heart. It re- 
 
24 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 
 and given the earnest of the 
 Spirit a in our hearts. 
 
 a Ro. 8. 0, 14—16. 
 
 fers to those influences as a pledge of 
 the future glories which await Christians 
 in heaven. In regard to the " earnest," 
 or the part of a price which was paid 
 in a contract, it may he remarked, (1.) 
 That it was of the same nature as the full 
 price, being regarded as a part of it ; 
 (2.) It was regarded as a pledge or 
 assurance that the full price would be 
 paid. So the ' earnest of the Spirit,' de- 
 notes that God gives to his people the 
 influences of his Spirit; his operation on 
 the heart as a part or pledge that all the 
 blessings of the covenant of redemption 
 shall be given to them. And it implies, 
 (1.) That the comforts of the Christian 
 here are of the same nature as they 
 will be in heaven. Heaven will consist 
 of like comforts ; of love, and peace, 
 and joy, and purity begun here, and 
 simply expanded there to complete and 
 eternal perfection. The joys of heaven 
 differ only in degree, not in kind, from 
 those of the Christian on earth. That 
 which is begun here is perfected there ; 
 and the feelings and views which the 
 Christian has here, if expanded and 
 carried out, would constitute heaven. 
 (2.) These comforts, these influences 
 of the Spirit, are a pledge of heaven. 
 They are the security which God gives 
 us that we shall be saved. If we are 
 brought under the renewing influences 
 of the Spirit here ; if we are made 
 meek, and humble, and prayerful by 
 his agency ; if we are made to partake 
 of the joys which result from pardoned 
 sin; if we are filled with the hope of 
 heaven, it is all produced by the Holy 
 Spirit, and is a pledge, or earnest of our 
 future inheritance ; — as the first sheaves 
 of a harvest are a pledge of a harvest; 
 or the first payment under a contract a 
 pledge that all will be payed. God thus 
 gives to his people the assurance that 
 they shall be saved ; and by this ' pledge' 
 makes their title to eternal life sure. 
 
 23. Moreover, I call God for a re- 
 cord upon my soul. It is well remarked 
 
 23 Moreover I call God for a 
 record upon my soul, that, to 
 
 by Rosenmiiller, that the second chapter 
 should have commenced here, since 
 there is here a transition in the subject 
 more distinct than where the second 
 chapter is actually made to begin. 
 Here Tindal commences the second 
 chapter. This verse, with the subse- 
 quent statements, is designed to show 
 them the true reason why he had 
 changed his purpose, and had not vi- 
 sited them according to his first propo- 
 sal. And that reason was not that he 
 was fickle and inconstant ; but it was 
 that he apprehended that if he should 
 go to them in their irregular and disor- 
 derly state, he would be under a neces- 
 sity of resorting to harsh measures, and 
 to a severity of discipline that would be 
 alike painful to then, and to him. Dr. 
 Paley has shown with great plausibili:y, 
 if not with moral certainty, that Paul's 
 change of purpose about visiting them 
 was made before he wrote his first epis- 
 tle ; that he had at first resolved to visit 
 them, but that on subsequent reflection, 
 he thought it would be better to try the 
 effect of a faithful letter to them, admo- 
 nishing them of their errors, and en- 
 treating them to exercise proper disci- 
 pline themselves on the principal 
 offender ; that with this feeling he wrote 
 his first epistle, in which he does not 
 state to them as yet his change of pur- 
 pose, or the reason of it ; but that now 
 after he had written that letter, and after 
 it had had all the effect which he desired, 
 he states the true reason why he had 
 not visited them. It was now proper 
 to do it ; and that reason was, that he 
 desired to spare them the severity of 
 discipline, and had resorted to the more 
 mild and affectionate measure of sending 
 them a letter, and thus not making it 
 necessary personally to administer disci- 
 pline. See Paley 's Horae Paulinse, on 
 2 Cor. Nos. iv. and v. The phrase, 
 " I call God for a record upon my soul," 
 is in the Greek, "I call God for a wit- 
 ness against my soul." It is a solemn 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 25 
 
 spare you, I came not as yet un- 
 to Corinth. 
 
 24 Not for that we have a do- 
 
 a 1 Co. 3. 5. I Pe. 5. 3. 
 
 oath, or appeal to God ; and implies, 
 that if he did not in that case declare 
 the truth, he desired that God would be 
 a witness against him, and would pu- 
 nish him accordingly. The reason why 
 he made this solemn appeal to God was, 
 the importance of his vindicating his 
 own character before the church, from 
 the charges which had been brought 
 against him. 1 That to spare you. 
 To avoid the necessity of inflicting pu- 
 nishment on you ; of exercis-ing severe 
 and painful discipline. If he went 
 among them in the state of irregularity 
 and disorder which prevailed there, he 
 would feel it to be necessary to exert 
 his authority as an apostle, and remove 
 at once the offending members from the 
 church. He expected to avoid the ne- 
 cessity of these painful acts of disci- 
 pline, by sending to them a faithful and 
 affectionate epistle, and thus inducing 
 them to reform, and to avoid the neces- 
 sity of a resort to that which would 
 have been so trying to him and to them. 
 It was not, then, a disregard for them, 
 or a want of attachment to them, which 
 had led him to change his purpose, but 
 it was the result of tender affection. 
 This cause of the change of his purpose, 
 of course, he would not make known 
 to them in his first epistle, but now 
 that that letter had accomplished all he 
 had desired, it was proper that they 
 should be apprized of the reason why 
 he had resorted to this instead of visit- 
 ing them personalty. 
 
 24. Not for that we have dominion, 
 &c. The sense of this passage I take 
 to be this : ' The course which we 
 have pursued has been chosen not be- 
 cause we wish to lord it over your faith, 
 to control your belief, but because we 
 desired to promote your happiness. Had 
 the former been our object, had we 
 wished to set up a lordship or dominion 
 over you, we should have come to you 
 with our apostolical authority, and in 
 3 
 
 minion over your faith, but are 
 helpers of your joy: for by b faith 
 ye stand. 
 
 b Ro. 11. 20. 1 Co. 15. l. 
 
 the severity of apostolic discipline. We 
 had power to command obedience, and 
 to control your faith. But we chose not 
 to do it. Our object was to promote 
 your highest happiness. We, there- 
 fore, chose the mildest and gentlest 
 manner possible ; we did not exercise 
 authority in discipline, we sent an af- 
 fectionate and tender letter.' While 
 the apostles had the right to prescribe 
 the articles of belief, and to propound 
 the doctrines of God, yet they would 
 not do even that in such a manner as to 
 seem to " lord it over God's heritage" 
 (obx. K'j^tivc/u(v) ; they did not set up ab- 
 solute authority, or prescribe the things 
 to be believed in a lordly and impe- 
 rative manner; nor would they make 
 use of the severity of power to enforce 
 what they taught. They appealed to 
 reason ; they employed persuasion ; 
 they made use of light and love to ac- 
 complish their desires, % Are helpers 
 of your joy. This is our main object, 
 to promote your joy. This object we 
 have pursued in our plans, and in order 
 to secure this, we forbore to come to 
 you, when, if we did come at that time, 
 we should have given occasion perhaps 
 to the charge that we sought to lord it 
 over your faith. •} For by faith ye 
 stand. See Note, 1 Cor. xv. 1. This 
 seems to be a kind of proverbial expres- 
 sion, stating a general truth, that it was 
 by faith that Christians were to be es- 
 tablished or confirmed. The connexion 
 here requires us to understand this as a 
 reason why he would not attempt to 
 lord it over their faith ; or to exercise 
 dominion over them. That reason was, 
 that thus far they had stood firm, in the 
 main, in the faith (1 Cor. xv. 1) ; they 
 had adhered to the truths of the gospel, 
 and in a special manner now, in yield- 
 ing obedience to the commands and en- 
 treaties of Paul in the first epistle, they 
 had showed that they were in the faith, 
 and firm in the faith. It was not no» 
 
96 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. CO. 
 
 cessary or proper, therefore, for him to 
 attempt to exercise lordship over their 
 belief, but all that was needful was to 
 help forward their joy, for they were 
 firm in the faith. We may observe, (1.) 
 That it is a part of the duty of minis- 
 ters to help forward the joy of Chris- 
 tians. (2.) This should be the object 
 even in administering discipline and re- 
 proof. (3.) If even Paul would not 
 attempt to lord it over the faith of Chris- 
 tians, to establish a domination over 
 their belief, how absurd and wicked is it 
 for uninspired ministers now, for indi- 
 vidual ministers, for conferences, conven- 
 tions, presbyteries, synods, councils, or 
 for the pope, to attempt to establish a spi- 
 ritual dominion in controlli?ig the faith 
 of men. The great evils in the church 
 have arisen from their attempting to do 
 what Paul would not do ; from attempt- 
 ing to establish a dominion which Paul 
 never sought, and which Paul would 
 have abhorred. Faith must be free, and 
 religion must be free, or they cannot 
 exist at all. 
 
 nEMAllKS. 
 
 In view of this chapter we may re- 
 mark, 
 
 1st. God is the only true and real 
 source of comfort in times of trial, ver. 
 3. It is from him that all real consola- 
 tion must come, and he only can meet 
 and sustain the soul when it is borne 
 down with calamity. All persons are 
 subjected to trial, and at some periods 
 of their lives, to severe trial. Sickness 
 is a trial ; the death of a friend is a trial ; 
 the loss of property or health, disap- 
 pointment, and reproach, and slander, 
 and poverty, and want, are trials to 
 which we are all more or less exposed. 
 In these trials, it is natural to look to some 
 source of consolation ; some way in 
 which they may be borne. Some seek 
 consolation in philosophy, and endea- 
 vour to blunt their feelings and destroy 
 their sensibilities, as the ancient stoics 
 did. But " to destroy sensibility is not 
 to produce comfort." — Dr. Mason. Some 
 plunge deep into pleasures, and endea- 
 vour to drown their soirows in the in- 
 toxicating draught ; but this is not to 
 
 produce comfort to the soul, even were 
 it possible in such pleasures to forget 
 their sorrows. Such were the ancient 
 epicureans. Some seek consolation in 
 their surviving friends, and look to them 
 to comfort and sustain the sinking heart. 
 But the arm of an earthly friend is fee- 
 ble, when God lays his hand upon us 
 It is only the hand that smites that car, 
 heal ; only the God that sends the af 
 fliction, that can bind up the broken 
 spirit. He is the " Father of mercies," 
 and he " the God of all consolation ;" 
 and in affliction there is no true comfort 
 but in him. 
 
 (2.) This consolation in God is de- 
 rived from many sources, (a) He is 
 the " Father of mercies," and we may 
 be assured, therefore, that he does no- 
 thing inconsistent with mehct. (b) 
 We may be assured that he is right — 
 always right, and that he does nothing 
 but right. We may not be able to see 
 the reason of his doings, but we may 
 have the assurance that it is all right and 
 will yet be seen to be right, (c) There 
 is comfort in the fact, that our afflictions 
 are ordered by an intelligent Being, by 
 one who is all-wise, and all-knowing. 
 They are not the result of blind chance ; 
 but they are ordered by one who is wise 
 to know what ought to be done ; and 
 who is so just that he will do nothing 
 wrong. There could be no consolation 
 in the feeling that mere chance directed 
 our trials ; nor can there be consolation 
 except in the feeling that a being of in- 
 telligence and goodness directs and or- 
 ders all. The true comfort, therefore, is 
 to be found in religion, not in atheism 
 and philosophy. 
 
 (3.) It is possible to bless God in the 
 midst of trials, and as the result of trial. 
 It is possible so clearly to see his hand, 
 and to be so fully satisfied with the wis- 
 dom and goodness of his dealingu, even 
 when we are severely afflicted, as to see 
 that he is worthy of our highest confi- 
 dence and most exalted praise, ver. 3. 
 God may be seen, then, to be the " Fa- 
 ther of mercies ;" and he may impart, 
 even then, a consolation which we never 
 experience in the days of prosperity. 
 Some of the purest and most elevated 
 
A.. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 joys known upon earth, are experienced 
 in the very midst of outward calamities, 
 and the most sincere and elevated thanks- 
 givings which are offered to God, are 
 often those which are the result of sanc- 
 tified afflictions. It is when we are 
 Drought out from such trials, where we 
 have experienced the rich consolations 
 and the sustaining power of the gospel, 
 that we are most disposed to say with 
 Paul, " Blessed be God ;" and can most 
 clearly see that he is the " Father of 
 mercies." No Christian will ever have 
 occasion to regret the trials through 
 which God has brought him. I never 
 knew a sincere Christian who was not 
 finally benefited by trials. 
 
 (4.) Christian joy is not apathy, it 
 is comfort, ver. 4, 5. It is not insensi- 
 bility to suffering ; it is not stoical indif- 
 ference. The Christianyeds his suffer- 
 ings as keenly as others. The Lord 
 Jesus was as sensitive to suffering as 
 any one of the human family ever was ; 
 he was as susceptible of emotion from 
 reproach, contempt, and scorn, and he as 
 keenly felt the pain of the scourge, the 
 nails, and the cross, as any one could. 
 But there is positive joy, there is true 
 and solid comfort. There is substantial, 
 pure, and elevated happiness. Religion 
 does not blunt the feelings, or de- 
 stroy the sensibility, but it brings in 
 consolations which enable us to bear 
 our pains, and to endure persecution 
 without murmuring. In this, religion 
 differs from all systems of philosophy. 
 The one attempts to blunt and destroy 
 our sensibilities to suffering ; the other, 
 while it makes us more delicate and 
 tender in our feelings, gives consolation 
 adapted to that delicate sensibility, and 
 fitted to sustain the soul, notwithstand- 
 ing the acuteness of its sufferings. 
 
 (5.) Ministers of the gospel may ex- 
 pect to be peculiarly tried and afflicted, 
 ver. 5. So it was with Paul and his 
 fellow-apostles; and so it has been since. 
 They are the special objects of the 
 hatred of sinners, as they stand in the 
 way cf he sinful pursuits and plea- 
 sures of the world ; and they are, like 
 their Master, especially hated by the 
 enemy of souls. Besides, they are by 
 
 their office, required to minister conso- 
 lation to others who are afflicted ; and 
 it is so ordered in the providence of 
 God, that they are subjected to peculiar 
 trials often, in order that they may be 
 able to impart peculiar consolations. 
 They are to be the examples and the 
 guides of the church of God ; and God 
 takes care that they shall be permitted 
 to show by their example, as well as by 
 their preaching, the supporting power 
 of the gospel in times of trial. 
 
 (6.) If we suffer much in the cause of 
 the Redeemer, we may also expect much 
 consolation, ver. 5. Christ will take 
 care that our hearts shall be filled with 
 joy and peace. As our trials in his 
 cause are, so shall our consolations be. 
 If we suffer much, we shall enjoy much; 
 if we are persecuted much, we shall 
 have much support ; if our names are 
 cast out among men for his sake, we 
 shall have increasing evidence that they 
 are written in his book of life. There 
 are things in the Christian religion 
 which can be learned only in the fur- 
 nace of affliction ; and he who has ne- 
 ver been afflicted on account of his at- 
 tachment to Christ, is a stranger yet to 
 much, very much of the fulness and 
 beauty of that system of religion which 
 has been appointed by the Redeemer, 
 and to much, very much, of the beauty 
 and power of the promises of the Bible. 
 No man will ever understand all the 
 Bible wh.> is not favoured with much 
 persecution and many trials. 
 
 (7.) We should be willing to suffer, 
 ver. 3 — 5. If we are willing to be 
 happy, we should also be willing to 
 suffer. If we desire to be happy in re- 
 ligion, we should be willing to suffer. 
 If we expect to be happy, we should also 
 he willing to endure much. Trials fit 
 us for enjoyment here, as well as for 
 heaven hereafter. 
 
 (8.) One great design of the conso- 
 lation which is imparted to Christiana 
 in the time of affliction is, that they may 
 be able to impart consolation also to 
 others, ver. 4, 6, 7. God designs that 
 we should thus be mutual aids. And 
 he comforts a pastor in his trials, that 
 he may, by his own experience, be able 
 
II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. GO. 
 
 to minister consolation to the people of 
 his eharge ; he comforts a parent, that 
 he may administer consolation to his 
 children ; a friend, that he may comfort 
 a friend. He who attempts to adminis- 
 ter consolation should be able to speak 
 fiom experience; and God, therefore, 
 afflicts and comforts all his people, that 
 they may know how to administer con- 
 solation to those with whom they are 
 connected. 
 
 (9.) If we have experienced peculiar 
 consolations ourselves in times of trial, 
 we are under obligations to seek out 
 and comfort others who are afflicted. 
 So Paul felt. We should feel that God 
 has qualified us fortius work; and having 
 qualified us for it, that he calls on us 
 to do it. The consolation which God 
 gives in affliction is a rich treasure 
 which we are bound to impart to others ; 
 the experience which we have of the 
 true sources of consolation is an inesti- 
 mable talent which we are to use for the 
 promotion of his glory. No man has a 
 talent for doing more direct good than 
 he who can go to the afflicted, and bear 
 testimony, from his own experience, to 
 the goodness of God. And every man 
 who can testify that God is good, and 
 is able to support the soul in times of 
 trial, — and what Christian cannot do it 
 who has ever been afflicted? — should 
 regard himself as favoured with a pecu- 
 liar talent for doing good, and should 
 rejoice in the privilege of using it to 
 the glory of God. For there is no ta- 
 lent more honourable than that of being 
 able to promote the divine glory, to 
 comfort the afflicted, or to be able, from 
 personal experience, to testify that God 
 is good — always good. * The power 
 of doing good, always implies an obli- 
 gation to do it." — Cotton Mather. 
 
 (10.) In this chapter, we have a case 
 of a near contemplation of death, ver. 
 8, 9. Paul expected soon to die. He 
 nad the sentence of death in himself. 
 He saw no human probability of escape. 
 He was called, therefore, calmly to look 
 death in the face, and to contemplate it 
 as an event certain and near. Such a 
 condition is deeply interesting, it is the 
 important crisis of life. And yet it is 
 
 an event which all must soon contem- 
 plate. We all, in a short period, each 
 one for himself, must look upon death 
 as certain, and as near to us ; as an 
 event in which we are personally inter- 
 ested, and from which we cannot es- 
 cape. Much as we may turn away 
 from it in health, and unanxious as we 
 may be then in regard to it, yet by no 
 possibility can we long avert our minds 
 from the subject. It is interesting, then, 
 to inquire how Paul felt when he looked 
 at death ; how we should feel ; and how 
 we actually shall feel when we come to 
 die. 
 
 (11.) A contemplation of death as 
 near and certain, is fitted to lead us to 
 trust in God. This was the effect in 
 the case of Paul. ver. 9. He had learn- 
 ed in health to put his trust in him, and 
 now, when the trial was apparently 
 near, he had nowhere else to go, and 
 he confided in him alone. He felt that 
 if he was rescued, it could be only by 
 the interposition of God ; and that there 
 was none but God who could sustain 
 him if he should die. And what event 
 can there be that is so well fitted to lead 
 us to trust in God as death! And 
 where else can we go in view of that 
 dark, hour 1 For, (a) We know not what 
 death is. We have not tried it ; nor do 
 we know what grace may be necessary 
 for us in those unknown pangs and suf- 
 ferings ; in that deep darkness, and that 
 sad gloom, (b) Our friends cannot aid 
 us then. They will, they must, then, 
 give us the parting hand ; and as we en- 
 ter the shades of the dark valley, they 
 must bid us farewell. The skill of the 
 physician then will fail. Our worldly 
 friends will forsake us when we come to 
 die. They do not love to be in the 
 room of death, and they can give us no 
 consolation if they are there. Our pious 
 friends cannot attend us far in the dark 
 valley. They may pray, and commend 
 us to God, but even they must leave us 
 to die alone. Who but G»d can attenJ 
 usl Who but he can Support us then : 
 (c) God only knows what is beyond 
 death. How do we know the way to 
 his bar, to his presence, to his heaven ? 
 How can we direct our own steps in 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 29 
 
 that dark and unknown world 1 None 
 but God our Saviour can guide us 
 there ; none else can conduct us to his 
 abode, (d) None but God can sustain 
 us in the pain, the anguish, the fee- 
 bleness, the sinking of the powers of 
 body and of mind in that distressing 
 hour. He can uphold us then; and it 
 is an unspeakable privilege to be per- 
 mitted then, " when heart and flesh 
 faint," to say of him, " God is the 
 strength of" our "heart, and" our 
 " portion forever." Ps. lxxiii. 26. 
 
 (12.) We should regard a restoration 
 from dangerous sickness, and from im- 
 minent peril of death as a kind of resur- 
 rection. So Paul regarded it. ver. 9. 
 We should remember how easy it 
 would have been for God to have re- 
 moved us ; how rapidly we were tending 
 to the grave ; how certainly we should 
 have descended there but for his inter- 
 position. We should feel, therefore, 
 that we owe our lives to him as really 
 and entirely as though we had been 
 raised up from the dead ; and that the 
 same kind of power and goodness have 
 been evinced as would have been had 
 God given us life anew. Life is God's 
 gift; and every instance of recovery 
 from peril, or from dangerous illness, is 
 as really an interposition of his mercy 
 as though we had been raised up from 
 the dead. 
 
 (13.) We should, in like manner, 
 regard a restoration of our friends from 
 dangerous sickness, or peril of any kind, 
 as a species of resurrection from the 
 dead. When a parent, a husband, a 
 wife or a child has been dangerously ill, 
 or exposed to some imminent danger, 
 and has been recovered, we cannot but 
 feel that the recovery is entirely owing 
 to the interposition of God. With in- 
 finite ease he could have consigned 
 them to the grave; and had he not 
 mercifully interposed, they would have 
 died. As they were originally his gift 
 to us, so we should regard each interpo- 
 sition of that kind as a new gift, and 
 receive the recovered and restored friend 
 as a fresh gift from his hand. 
 
 (14.) We should feel that lives thus 
 preserved and thus recovered from dan- 
 3* 
 
 I ger, belong to God. He has preserved 
 I them. In the most absolute sense they 
 belong to him, and to him they should 
 be consecrated. So Paul felt ; and his 
 whole life shows how entirely he re- 
 garded himself as bound to devote a life 
 often preserved in the midst of peril, to 
 the service of his kind Benefactor. 
 There is no claim more absolute than 
 that which God has on those whom ho 
 has preserved from dangerous situations, 
 or whom he has raised up from the 
 borders of the grave. All the strength 
 which he has imparted, all the talent, 
 learning, skill, which he has thus pre- 
 served, should be regarded in the most 
 absolute sense as his, and should be 
 honestly and entirely consecrated to 
 him. But for him we should have died ; 
 and he has a right to our services and 
 obedience which is entire, and which 
 should be felt to be perpetual. And it 
 may be added, that the right is not less 
 clear and strong to the service of those 
 whom he keeps without their being ex- 
 posed to such peril, or raised up from 
 such beds of sickness. A very few only 
 of the interpositions of God in our be- 
 half are seen by us. A small part of 
 the perils to which we may be really 
 exposed are seen. And it is no less 
 owing to his preserving care that we 
 are kept in health, and strength, and in 
 the enjoyment of reason, than it is that 
 we are raised up from dangerous sick- 
 ness. Man is as much bound to devote 
 himself to God for preserving him from 
 sickness and danger, as he is for raising 
 him up when he has been sick, and de- 
 fending him in danger. 
 
 (15.) We have here an instance of the 
 principle on which Paul acted, ver. 12. 
 In his aims, and in the manner of ac- 
 complishing his aims he was guided 
 only by the principles of simplicity and 
 sincerity, and by the grace of God. He 
 had no sinister and worldly purpose ; 
 he had no crooked and subtle policy by 
 which to accomplish his purposes. He 
 sought simply the glory of God and tho 
 salvation of man ; and he sought this 
 in a manner plain, direct, honest, and 
 straight-forward. He admitted none of 
 the principles of worldly policy which 
 
so 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 have been so often acted on since in the 
 church; he knew nothing of "pious 
 frauds," which have so often disgraced 
 the professed friends of the Redeemer ; 
 he admitted no form of deception and 
 delusion, even for the promotion of 
 objects which were great, and good, and 
 desirable. He knew that all that ought 
 to be done could be accomplished by 
 straight-forward and simple-hearted 
 purposes ; and that a cause which de- 
 pended on the carnal and crooked policy 
 of the world was a bad cause ; and that 
 such policy would ultimately ruin the 
 best of causes. How happy would it 
 have been if these views had always 
 prevailed in the church ! 
 
 (16.) We see the value of a good con- 
 science, ver. 12. Paul had the testi- 
 mony of an enlightened conscience to 
 the correctness and uprightness of his 
 course of life everywhere. He felt 
 assured that his aims had been right ; 
 and that he had endeavoured in all sim- 
 plicity and sincerity to pursue a course 
 of life which such a conscience would 
 approve. Such a testimony, such an 
 approving conscience is of inestimable 
 value. It is worth more than gold, and 
 crowns, and all that the earth can give. 
 When like Paul we are exposed to 
 peril, or trial, or calamity, it matters 
 little, if we have an approving con- 
 science. When like him we are per- 
 secuted, it matters little if we have the 
 testimony of our own minds that we 
 have pursued an upright and an honest 
 course of life. When like him we look 
 death in the face, and feel that we 
 "have the sentence of death in our- 
 selves," of what inestimable value then 
 will be an approving conscience ! How 
 unspeakable the consolation if we 
 can look back then on a life spent 
 in conscious integrity; a life spent 
 in endeavouring to promote the 
 glory of God and the salvation of the 
 world ! 
 
 (17.) Every Christian should feel 
 himself sacredly bound to maintain a 
 character of veracity, ver. 19, 20. Christ 
 was always true to his word ; and all 
 that God has promised shall be certainly 
 fulfilled. And as a Christian is a pro- 
 
 fessed follower of him who was " the 
 Amen and the true witness," he should 
 feel himself bound by the most sacred 
 obligations to adhere to all his promises, 
 and to fulfil al) his word. No man can 
 do any good who is not a man of truth ; 
 and in no way can Christians more 
 dishonour their profession, and injure 
 the cause of the Redeemer, than by a 
 want of character for unimpeachable 
 veracity. If they make promises which 
 are never fulfilled ; if they state that as 
 true which is not true ; if they overload 
 their narratives with circumstances 
 which had no existence ; if they de- 
 ceive, and defraud others ; and if they 
 are so loose in their statements that no 
 one believes them, it is impossible for 
 them to do good in their Christian 
 profession. Every Christian should 
 have — as he easily may have — such a 
 character for veracity that every man 
 shall put implicit confidence in all his 
 promises and statements ; so implicit 
 that they shall deem his word as good 
 as an oath ; and his promise as certain 
 as though it were secured by notes and 
 bonds in the most solemn manner. 
 The word of a Christian should need no 
 strengthening by oaths and bonds; it 
 should be such that it could really not 
 be strengthened by any thing that notes 
 and bonds could add to it. 
 
 (18.) All Christians should regard 
 themselves as consecrated to God. ver. 
 21. They have been anointed, or set 
 apart to his service. They should feel 
 that they are as really set apart to his 
 service as the ancient prophets, priests, 
 and kings were to their appropriate 
 offices by the ceremony of anointing. 
 They belong to God, and are under 
 every sacred and solemn obligation to 
 live to him, and him alone. 
 
 (19.) It is an inestimable privilege to 
 be a Christian, ver. 21, 22. It is re- 
 garded as a privilege to be an heir to an 
 estate, and to have an assurance that it 
 will be ours. But the Christian has 
 an " earnest," a pledge that heaven ie 
 his. He is anointed of God; he is 
 sealed for heaven. Heaven is his 
 home; and God is giving to him daily 
 evidence in his own experience that he 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 31 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 OUT I determined this with 
 -^myself, that I would not 
 
 vrill soon be admitted to its pure and 
 blissful abodes. 
 
 (20.) The joys of the Christian on 
 earth are of the same nature as the 
 joys of heaven. These comforts are an 
 " earnest" of the future inheritance ; a 
 part of that which the Christian is to 
 enjoy forever. His joys on earth are 
 " heaven begun ;" and all that is needful 
 to constitute heaven is that these joys 
 should be expanded and perpetuated. 
 There will be no other heaven than 
 that which would be constituted by the 
 expanded joys of a Christian. 
 
 (21.) No one is a Christian, no one 
 is fitted for heaven, who has not such 
 principles and joys as being fully ex- 
 panded and developed would constitute 
 heaven. The joys of heaven are not 
 to be created for us as some new thing ; 
 they are not to be such as we have had 
 no foretaste, no conception of; but 
 they are to be such as will be produced 
 of necessity by removing imperfection 
 from the joys and feelings of the be- 
 liever, and carrying them out without 
 alloy, and without interruption, and 
 without end. The man, therefore, who 
 has such a character, that if fairly de- 
 veloped would not constitute the joys of 
 heaven, is not a Christian. He has no evi- 
 dence that he has been born again ; and 
 all his joys are fancied and delusive. 
 
 (22.) Christians should be careful 
 not to grieve the Holy Spirit. Comp. 
 Eph. iv. 30. It is by that Spirit that 
 they are " anointed" and "sealed," and 
 it is by his influences that they have 
 the earnest of their future inheritance. 
 All good influences on their minds pro- 
 ceed from that Spirit ; and it should be 
 their high and constant aim not to 
 grieve him. By no course of conduct, 
 by no conversation, by no impure 
 thought, should they drive that Spirit 
 from their minds. All their peace and 
 joy is dependent on their cherishing his 
 sacred influences; and by all the means 
 in their power they should strive to 
 secure his constant agency on their souls. 
 
 come again to you in heavi- 
 ness. a 
 
 a c. 1.23. 12.20,21. 13.10. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 In this chapter Paul continues the 
 discussion of the subject which had 
 been introduced in the previous chapter. 
 At the close of that chapter, he had 
 stated the reasons why he had not vis- 
 ited the church at Corinth. See Notes 
 on ch. i. 23, 24. The main reason 
 was, that instead of coming to them in 
 that disordered, and irregular state, he 
 had preferred to send them an affec- 
 tionate letter. Had he come to them 
 personally he would have felt himself 
 called on to exercise the severity of dis- 
 cipline. He chose, therefore, to try 
 what the effect would be of a faithful 
 and kind epistle. In this chapter, he 
 prosecutes the same subject. He states, 
 therefore, more at length, the reason 
 why he had not come to them. ver. 1 — 5. 
 The reason was, that he resolved not to 
 come to them, if he could avoid it, with 
 severity ; that his heart was pained 
 even with the necessity of sending such 
 a letter; that he wrote it with much 
 anguish of spirit ; yet that he cherished 
 towards them the most tender love. 
 In his former epistle (ch. v.) he had di- 
 rected them to exercise discipline on the 
 offending person in the church. This 
 had been done according to his direc- 
 tion ; and the offender had been suita- 
 bly punished for his offence. He had 
 been excommunicated ; and it would 
 seem that the effect on him had been to 
 induce him to forsake his sin, and pro- 
 bably to put away his father's wife, and 
 he had become a sincere penitent. Paul, 
 therefore, in the next place (ver. 6 — 1 1 ), 
 exhorts them to receive him again into 
 fellowship with the church. The pun 
 ishment he says had been sufficient 
 (ver. 6) ; they ought now to be kind 
 and forgiving to him lest he should be 
 overwhelmed with his sorrow (ver. 7) ; 
 he says, that he had forgiven him, so 
 far as he was concerned, and he entreat- 
 ed them to do the same (ver. 10) ; and 
 says that they ou^ht, by all means, to 
 
32 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 2 For if I make 
 who is he then that 
 
 you sorry, 
 maketh me 
 
 pursue such a course that Satan could 
 get no advantage of them. ver. 11. 
 Paul then states the disappointment 
 which he had had at Troas in not seeing 
 Titus, from whom he had expected to 
 learn what was the state of the church 
 at Corinth, and what was the reception 
 of kS letter there ; but that not seeing 
 him there, he had gone on to Macedonia, 
 ver. 12, 13. There, it would seem, he 
 met Titus, and learned that his letter 
 had had all the success which he could 
 have desired. It had been kindly re- 
 ceived ; and all that he had wished in 
 regard to discipline had been performed, 
 ver. 14. The hearing of this success 
 gives him occasion to thank God for it, 
 as one among many instances in which 
 his efforts to advance his cause had been 
 crowned with success. God had made 
 him everywhere successful; and had 
 made him triumph in Christ in every 
 place. This fact gives him occasion 
 (ver. 15, 16) to state the general effect 
 of his preaching and his labours. His 
 efforts, he says, were always acceptable 
 to God — though he could not be igno- 
 rant that in some cases the gospel 
 which he preached was the occasion of 
 the aggravated condemnation of those 
 who heard and rejected it. Yet he had 
 the consolation of reflecting that it was 
 by no fault of his. ver. 17. It was not 
 because he had corrupted the word of 
 God ; it was not because he was un- 
 faithful ; it was not because he was not 
 sincere. He had a good conscience — a 
 conscience which assured him that he 
 spoke in sincerity, and as in the sight 
 of God — though the unhappy effect 
 might be that many would perish from 
 under his ministry. 
 
 1. But I determined this with my- 
 self. I made up my mind on this 
 point ; I formed this resolution in re- 
 gard to my course. ^ That I would 
 not come again to you with heaviness. 
 In grief (iv\v?rti). 'I would not come, if 
 I could avoid it, in circumstances which 
 must have grieved both me and you. 
 
 glad, but the same which 
 made sorry by me ? 
 
 13 
 
 I would not come while there existed 
 among you such irregularities as must 
 have pained my heart, and as must have 
 compelled me to resort to such acts of 
 discipline as would be painful to you. 
 I resolved, therefore, to endeavour to 
 remove these evils before I came, that 
 when I did come, my visit might be 
 mutually agreeable to us both. For 
 that reason I changed my purpose 
 about visiting you, when I heard of 
 those disorders, and resolved to send an 
 epistle. If that should be successful, 
 then the way would be open for an 
 agreeable visit to you.' This verse, 
 therefore, contains the statement of the 
 principal reason why he had not come 
 to them as he had at first proposed. It 
 was really from no fickleness, but it 
 was from love to them, and a de- 
 sire that his visit should be mutually 
 agreeable. Comp. Notes, ch. i. 23. 
 
 2. For if I made you sorry. • If 
 when I should come among you, I 
 should be called on to inflict sorrow by 
 punishing your offending brethren by 
 an act of severe discipline as soon as I 
 came, who would there be to give me 
 comfort but those very persons whom 
 I had affected with grief 1 How little 
 prepared would they be to make me 
 happy, and to comfort me, amidst the 
 deep sorrow which I should have caused 
 by an act of severe discipline. After 
 such an act — an act that would spread 
 sorrow through the whole church, how 
 could I expect that comfort which I 
 should desire to find among you. The 
 whole church would be affected with 
 grief; and though I might be sustained 
 by the sound part of the church, yet my 
 visit would be attended with painful 
 circumstances. I resolved, therefore, to 
 remove all cause of difficulty, if possible, 
 before I came, that my visit might be 
 pleasant to us all.' The idea is, that 
 there was such a sympathy between 
 him and them ; that he was so attached 
 to them, that he could not expect to be 
 happy unless they were happy ; that 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 3 And I wrote this same un- 
 to you, lest, when I came, I 
 fhould have sorrow from them 
 of whom I ought to rejoice ; 
 
 though he might be conscious he was 
 only discharging a duty, and that God 
 would sustain him in it, yet that it 
 would mar the pleasure of his visit, and 
 destroy all his anticipated happiness by 
 the general grief. 
 
 3. And I wrote this same unto you. 
 The words "this same" (tow-to ttbro) refer 
 to what he had written to them in the 
 former epistle, particularly to what he 
 had written in regard to the incestuous 
 person, requiring them to excommuni- 
 cate him. Probably the expression 
 also includes the commands in his for- 
 mer epistle to reform their conduct in 
 general, and to put away the abuses and 
 evil practices which prevailed in the 
 church there. If Lest when I come, &c. 
 Lest I should be obliged if I came per- 
 sonally to exercise the severity of disci- 
 pline, and thus to diffuse sorrow 
 throughout the entire church. % I 
 should have sorrow from them of whom 
 I ought to rejoice. Lest I should have 
 grief in the church. Lest the conduct 
 of the church, and the abuses which 
 prevail in it should give me sorrow. I 
 should be grieved with the existence of 
 these evils ; and I should be obliged to 
 resort to measures which would be 
 painful to me, and to the whole church. 
 Paul sought to avoid this by persuading 
 them before he came to exercise the 
 discipline themselves, and to put away 
 the evil practices which prevailed among 
 them. 1 Having confidence in you all. 
 Having confidence that this is your 
 general character, that whatever adds to 
 my joy, or promotes my happiness, 
 would give joy to you all. Paul had 
 enemies in Corinth ; he knew that there 
 were some there whose minds were 
 alieniated from him, and who were en- 
 deavouring to do him injury. Yet he 
 did not doubt that it was the general 
 character of the church that they wished 
 him well, and would desire to make 
 _im happy ; that what would tend to 
 
 having confidence in you all, 
 
 that my joy is the joy of you all. 
 
 4 For out of much affliction 
 
 and anguish of heart I wrote un- 
 
 promote his happiness would also pro- 
 mote theirs ; and therefore, that they 
 would be willing to do any thing that 
 would make his visit agreeable to him 
 when he came among them. He was, 
 therefore, persuaded that if he wrote 
 them an affectionate letter, they would 
 listen to his injunctions, that thus all 
 that was painful might be avoided when 
 he came among them. 
 
 4. For out of much affliction. Pos- 
 sibly Paul's enemies had charged him 
 with being harsh and overbearing. They 
 may have said that there was much 
 needless severity in his letter. He here 
 meets that, and says, that it was with 
 much pain and many tears that he was 
 constrained to write as he did. He was 
 pained at their conduct, and at the ne- 
 cessity which existed for such an epis- 
 tle. This is an eminently beautiful in- 
 stance of Paul's kindness of heart, and 
 his susceptibility to tender impressions. 
 The evil conduct of others gives pain to 
 a good man ; and the necessity of admi- 
 nistering reproof and discipline is often 
 as painful to him who does it, as it is to 
 those who are the subjects of it. | And 
 anguish of heart. The word rendered 
 " anguish" (<rwv^«) means, properly, a 
 holding together or shutting up; and 
 then, pressure, distress, anguish — an af- 
 fliction of the heart by which one feels 
 tightened or constrained ; such a pres- 
 sure as great grief causes at the heart. 
 t / wrote unto you with many tears. 
 With much weeping and grief that I 
 was constrained to write such a letter. 
 This was an instance of Paul's great 
 tenderness of heart — a trait of charac- 
 ter which he uniformly evinced. With 
 all his strength of mind, and all his 
 courage and readiness to face danger, 
 Paul was not ashamsd to weep; and 
 I especially if he had any occasion of 
 ; censuring his Christian brethren, or ad- 
 ministering discipline. Comp. Phil. iiL 
 I 88. Acts xx. 31. This is also a speci- 
 
34 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 
 to you with many tears ; not that 
 ye should be grieved, but that 
 ye might know the love a which 
 I have more abundantly unto 
 you. 
 
 (tell. 2. 
 
 men of the manner in which Paul met 
 the faults of his Christian brethren. It 
 was not with bitter denunciation. It 
 was not with sarcasm and ridicule. It 
 was not Ly blazoning those faults abroad 
 to others. It was not with the spirit of 
 rejoicing that they had committed errors, 
 and had been guilty of sin. It was not 
 as if he was glad of the opportunity of 
 administering rebuke, and took pleasure 
 in denunciation and in the language of 
 reproof. All this is often done by 
 others ; but Paul pursued a different 
 course. He sent an affectionate letter 
 to the offenders themselves ; and he did 
 it with many tears. It was done 
 weeping. Admonition would always 
 be done right if it was done with tears. 
 Discipline would always be right, and 
 would be effectual, if it were adminis- 
 tered with tears. Any man will receive 
 an admonition kindly, if he who admi- 
 nisters it does it weeping ; and the heart 
 of an offender will be melted, if he who 
 attempts to reprove him comes to him 
 with tears. How happy would it be if 
 all who attempt to reprove should do it 
 with Paul's spirit. How happy, if all 
 discipline should be administered in the 
 church in his manner. But, we may 
 add, how seldom is this done ! How 
 few are there who feel themselves called 
 on to reprove an offending brother, or to 
 charge a brother with heresy or crime, 
 that do it with tears ! J Not tlmt ye 
 should be grieved. It was not my ob- 
 ject to give you pain, f But that ye 
 might know the love, &c. This was 
 one of the best evidences of his great 
 love to them which he could possibly 
 give. It is proof of genuine friendship 
 for another, when we faithfully and af- 
 fectionately admonish him of the error 
 of his course ; it is the highest proof of 
 affection when we do it with tears. It 
 « cruelty to suffer a brother to remain 
 
 5 But if * any have caused 
 grief, he hath not grieved me, 
 c but in part: that I may not 
 overcharge you all. 
 
 6 Sufficient to such a man it 
 
 5Ga. 5. 10. cGa. 4. 12. 
 
 in sin un admonished ; it is cruel to ad- 
 monish him of it in a harsh, severe, and 
 authoritative tone; but it is proof of 
 tender attachment when we go to 
 him with tears, and entreat him to re- 
 pent and reform. No man gives higher 
 proof of attachment to another than he 
 who affectionately admonishes him of 
 his sin and danger. 
 
 5. If any have caused grief. There 
 is doubtless here an allusion to the in- 
 cestuous person. But it is very deli- 
 cately done. He does not mention him 
 by name. There is not anywhere an 
 allusion to his name; nor is it possible 
 now to know it. Is this not a proof that 
 the names of the offending brethren in 
 a church should not be put on the re- 
 cords of sessions, and churches, and 
 presbyteries, to be handed down to pos- 
 terity 1 Paul does not here either ex- 
 pressly refer to such a person. He 
 makes his remark general, that it might 
 be as tender and kind to the offending 
 brother as possible. They would know 
 whom he meant, but they had already 
 punished him, as Paul supposed,enough, 
 and now all that he said in regard to 
 him was as tender as possible, and fitted, 
 as much as possible, to conciliate his 
 feelings and allay his grief. He did not 
 harshly charge him with sin ; he did 
 not use any abusive or severe epithets ; 
 but he gently insinuates that he " had 
 caused grief;" he had pained the hearts 
 of his brethren. ^ He hath not grieved 
 me, but in part. He has not particu- 
 larly offended or grieved me. He has 
 grieved me only in common with others, 
 and as a part of the church of Christ. 
 All have common cause of grief; and I 
 have no interest in it which is not com- 
 mon to you all. I am but one of a 
 great number who have felt the deepest 
 concern on account of his conduct. 
 1 That I may not overcharge you all. 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 35 
 
 this * punishment, which was in- 
 flicted °of many. 
 
 That I may not bear hard (imBu^Z) on 
 you all ; that I may not accuse you all 
 of having caused me grief. The sense 
 is, ' Grief has been produced. I, in 
 common with the church, have been 
 pained, and deeply pained, with the 
 conduct of the individual referred to ; 
 and with that of his abettors and friends. 
 But I would not charge the whole 
 church with it ; or seem to bear hard on 
 them, or overcharge them with want of 
 zeal for their purity, or unwillingness to 
 remove the evil.' They had shown their 
 willingness to correct the evil by prompt- 
 ly removing the offender when he had 
 directed it. The sense of this verse 
 should be connected with the verse that 
 follows ; and the idea is, that they had 
 promptly administered sufficient disci- 
 pline, and that they were not now to 
 be charged severely with having neglect- 
 ed it. Even while Paul said he had 
 been pained and grieved, he had seen 
 occasion not to bear hard on the whole 
 church, but to be ready to commend 
 them for their promptness in removing 
 the cause of the offence. 
 
 6. Sufficient to such a man. The 
 incestuous person that had been by 
 Paul's direction removed from the 
 church. The object of Paul here is to 
 have him again restored. For that pur- 
 pose he says that the punishment which 
 they had inflicted on him was " suffi- 
 cient." It was, (1.) A sufficient expres- 
 sion of the evil of the offence, and of 
 the readiness of the church to preserve 
 itself pure ; and, (2.) It was a sufficient 
 punishment to the offender. It had ac- 
 complished all that he had desired. It 
 had humbled him, and brought him to 
 repentance; and doubtless led him to 
 put away his wife. Comp. Note, 1 Cor. 
 v. 1. As that had been done, it was pro- 
 per now that he should be again restored 
 to the privileges of the church. No 
 evil would result from such a restora- 
 tion, and their duty to their penitent 
 brother demanded it. Mr. Locke has 
 remarked that Paul conducts this sub- 
 
 7 So ' that contrariwise ye 
 
 » or. censure. a 1 Co. 5. 4, 5. 1 Ti. 5. 20. 
 bGa. «5. 1. 
 
 ject here with very great tenderness 
 and delicacy. The entire passage from 
 ver. 5 to ver. 10 relates solely to this 
 offending brother, yet he never once 
 mentions his name, nor does he men- 
 tion his crime. He speaks of him only 
 in the soft terms of " such a one" and 
 " any one :" nor does he use an epithet 
 which would be calculated to wound 
 his feelings, or to transmit his name 
 to posterity, or to communicate it to 
 other churches. So that though this 
 epistle should be read, as Paul doubt- 
 less intended, by other churches, and be 
 transmitted to future times, yet no one 
 would ever be acquainted with the name 
 of the individual. How different this 
 from the temper of those who would 
 blazon abroad the names of offenders, 
 or make a permanent record to car- 
 ry them down with dishonour to poste- 
 rity ! ^ Which was inflicted of many. 
 By the church in its collective capacity. 
 See Note on 1 Cor. v. 4. Paul had re- 
 quired the church to administer this act 
 of discipline, and they had promptly- 
 done it. It is evident that the whole 
 church was concerned in the adminis- 
 tration of the act of discipline ; as 
 the words " of many" (can rZv vhtiawv) 
 are not applicable either to a single 
 " bishop," or a single minister, or a 
 presbytery, or a bench of elders; nor 
 can they be so regarded, except by a 
 forced and unnatural construction. Paul 
 had directed it to be done by the assem- 
 bled church (1 Cor. v. 4), and this 
 phrase shows that they had followed his 
 instructions. Locke supposes that the 
 phrase means, " by the majority ;" 
 Macknight renders it, " by the greater 
 number;" Bloomfield supposes that it 
 means that the " punishment was car- 
 ried into effect by all." Doddridge para- 
 phrases it, " by the whole body of your 
 society." The expression proves be- 
 yond a doubt that the whole body 
 of the society was concerned in the 
 act of the excommunication, and that 
 that is a proper way of administering 
 
36 
 
 H. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 ought rather to forgive him, and 
 comfort him, lest perhaps such 
 
 discipline. Whether it proves, how- 
 ever, that that is the mode which is to 
 be observed in all instances, may admit 
 of a d)ubt, as the example of the early 
 churches, in a particular case, does not 
 prove that that mode has the force of a 
 binding rule on all. 
 
 7. So that contrariwise. On the 
 other hand : on the contrary. That is, 
 instead of continuing the punishment. 
 Since the punishment was sufficient, 
 and has answered all the purpose of 
 bearing your testimony against the of- 
 fence, and of bringing him to repentance, 
 you ought again to admit him to your 
 communion. 1 Ye ought rather to for- 
 give him. Rather than continue the 
 pain and disgrace of excommunication. 
 It follows from this, (1.) That the pro- 
 per time for restoring an offender is only 
 when the punishment has answered the 
 purpose for which it was designed ; 
 i. e. has shown the just abhorrence of 
 the church against the sin, and has 
 reformed the offender ; and, (2.) That 
 when that is done the church ought to 
 forgive the offending brother, and ad- 
 mit him again to their fellowsbip. When 
 it can be ascertained that the punish- 
 ment has been effectual in reforming 
 him, may depend somewhat on the na- 
 ture of the offence. In this case, it 
 was sufficiently shown by his putting 
 away his wife, and by the manifestations 
 of sorrow. So in other cases, it may be 
 shown by a man's abandoning a course 
 of sin, and reforming his life. If he has 
 been unjust, by his repairing the evil ; 
 if he has been pursuing an unlawful bu- 
 siness, by abandoning it ; if he has pur- 
 sued a course of vice, by his forsaking it, 
 and by giving satisfactory evidences of 
 sorrow and of reformation, for a period 
 sufficiently long to show his sincerity. 
 The time which will be required in each 
 case, must depend, of course, somewhat 
 on the nature of the offence, the pre- 
 vious character of the individual, the 
 temptations to which he may be ex- 
 posed, and the disgrace which he may 
 have brought on his Christian calling. 
 
 a one should be swallowed up 
 with overmuch sorrow. 
 
 It is to be observed, also, that then his 
 restoration is to be regarded as an act 
 of forgiveness, a favour (%*,>i<rA<rd-*t t 
 i. e. x^Z^i favour, grace) on the part of 
 the church. It is not a matter of jus- 
 tice, or of claim on his part, for having 
 once dishonoured his calling, he has for- 
 feited his right to a good standing 
 among Christians ; but it is a matter of 
 favour, and he should be willing to 
 humble himself before the church, and 
 make suitable acknowledgment for his 
 offences, ^ And comfort him. There 
 is every reason to think that this man 
 became a sincere penitent. If so, he 
 must have been deeply pained at the re- 
 membrance of his sin, and the disho- 
 nour which he had brought on his pro- 
 fession, as well as at the consequences 
 in which he had been involved. In this 
 deep distress, Paul tells them that they 
 ought to comfort him. They should 
 receive him kindly, as God receives to 
 his favour a penitent sinner. They 
 should not cast out his name as evil ; 
 they should not reproach him for his 
 sins; they should not harrow up his re- 
 collection of the offence by often refer- 
 ring to it ; they should be willing to 
 bury it in lasting forgetfulnesss, and 
 treat him now as a brother. It is a 
 duty of a church to treat with kindness 
 a true penitent, and receive him to their 
 affectionate embrace. The offence should 
 be forgiven and forgotten. The conso- 
 lations of the gospel, adapted to the 
 condition of penitents, should be freely 
 administered ; and all should be done 
 that can be, to make the offender, when 
 penitent, happy and useful in the com- 
 munity. *|[ Lest perhaps such a one. 
 Still forbearing to mention his name ; 
 still showing towards him the utmost 
 tenderness and delicacy. <{ Should be 
 swallowed up, &c. Should be over- 
 come with grief; and should be render- 
 ed incapable of usefulness by his ex- 
 cessive sorrow. This is a strong expres- 
 sion, denoting intensity of grief. We 
 speak of a man's being drowned in 
 sorrow ; or overwhelmed with grief , of 
 
4. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 37 
 
 8 Wherefore I beseech you 
 that ye would confirm your love 
 toward him. 
 
 9 For to this end also did I 
 
 grief preying upon him. The figure 
 here is probably taken from deep waters, 
 or from a whirlpool which seems to 
 swallow up any thing that comes within 
 reach. Excessive grief or calamity, in 
 the Scriptures, is often compared to 
 such waters. See Ps. cxxiv. 2 — 5. 
 u If it had not been the Lord who was 
 on our side when men rose up against 
 us, then they had swallowed us up 
 quick, when their wrath was kindled 
 against us ; then the waters had over- 
 whelmed us,the stream had gone over our 
 soul ; then the proud waters had gone 
 over our soul." See Ps. Ixix. 1. " Save 
 me, O God, for the waters are come into 
 my soul." Paul apprehended that by 
 excessive grief, the offending brother 
 would be destroyed. His life would 
 waste away under the effect of his ex- 
 communication and disgrace, and the 
 remembrance of his offence would 
 prey upon him, and sink him to the 
 grave. 
 
 8. Wherefore I beseech you that ye 
 would confirm your love toward him. 
 The word here rendered confirm 
 (xwgwo-au) occurs in the New Testament 
 only here and in Gal. hi. 15. It means 
 to give authority, to establish as valid, 
 to confirm ; and here means that they 
 should give strong expressions and as- 
 surances of their love to him ; that they 
 should pursue such a course as would 
 leave no room for doubt in regard to it. 
 Tindal has well rendered it, "Wherefore 
 I exhort you that love may have strength 
 over him." Paul referred, doubtless, 
 here to some public act of the church 
 by which the sentence of excommuni- 
 cation might be removed, and by which 
 the offender might have a public assu- 
 rance of their favour. 
 
 9. For to this end did I write. The 
 apostle did not say that this was the 
 only purpose of his writing, to induce 
 them to excommunicate the offender. 
 He does not say that he wished in an 
 
 write, that I might know the proof 
 of you, whether ye be obedient 
 in all things. 
 
 10 To whom ye forgive any 
 
 arbitrary manner to test their willingness 
 to obey him, or to induce them to do a 
 thing in itself wrong, in order to try 
 their obedience. But the meaning is 
 this : This was the main reason why he 
 wrote to them, rather than to come per- 
 sonally among them. The thing ought 
 to have been done ; the offender ought 
 to be punished ; and Paul says that he 
 adopted the method of writing to them, 
 rather than of coming among them in 
 person, in order to give them an oppor- 
 tunity to show whether they were dis- 
 posed to be obedient. And the sense is, 
 1 You may now forgive him. He has 
 not only been sufficiently punished, and 
 he has not only evinced suitable peni- 
 tence, but also another object which I 
 had in view has been accomplished. I 
 desired to see whether you were, as a 
 church, disposed to be obedient. That 
 object, also, has been accomplished. 
 And now, since every thing aimed at in 
 the case of discipline has been secured, 
 you may forgive him, and should, 
 without hesitation, again receive him to 
 the bosom of the church.' 
 
 10. To whom ye forgive any thing. 
 The sense here is, ' I have confidence 
 in you as a Christian society, and such 
 confidence, that if you forgive an of- 
 fence in one of your members, I shall 
 approve the act, and shall also be ready 
 to forgive.' He refers, doubtless, to this 
 particular case ; but he makes his re- 
 mark general. It is implied here, I think, 
 that the Corinthians were disposed to 
 forgive the offending brother ; and Paul 
 here assures them that they had his 
 hearty assent to this, and that if they 
 did forgive him, he was ready to join 
 them in the act, and to forgive him also. 
 t For if I forgave any thing. If I 
 forgive any thing ; if I remit any of the 
 punishments which have been inflicted 
 by my authority. % For your sakes. 
 It is not on account of the offendei 
 alone ; it is in order to promote the hap- 
 
38 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 fA. D. W. 
 
 thing, I forgive also : for if I 
 forgave any thing, to whom I for- 
 gave it, for your sakes forgave 
 I it in the * person of Christ ; 
 
 i or, sight. 
 
 piness and purity of the church. \ In 
 the person of Christ. Locke para- 
 phrases this, "By the authority, and in 
 the name of Christ." Doddridge, " As 
 in the person of Christ, and by the high 
 authority with which he has been 
 pleased to invest me." Tindal, " In the 
 room of Christ." The word rendered 
 person (Marg. sight, 7rgia-oe^rcv, from 
 ■rreJK and Zj-\.~), means properly the part to- 
 wards, at, and around the eye. — Robin- 
 son. Then it means the face, visage, 
 countenance ; then the presence, person, 
 &c. Here it probably means, in the 
 presence of Christ ; with his eye upon 
 me, and conscious that I am acting be- 
 fore him, and must give account to him. 
 It implies, undoubtedly, that Paul acted 
 by his authority, and felt that he was 
 doing that which Christ would approve. 
 11. Lest Satan. The devil. The 
 name Satan denotes an adversary, an 
 accuser, an enemy. It is the usual pro- 
 per name which is given to the devil, 
 the great adversary of God and man. 
 1 Should get an advantage of us. The 
 literal translation of the Greek would 
 be, ' That we may not be defrauded by 
 Satan' ( c Iv* /u» irAKvsn-aS-w^usv Ctto tov 
 <ru.ra.va.). The verb here used denotes 
 to have more than another,- then to 
 gain, to take advantage of one, to de- 
 fraud. And the idea is, that they should 
 at once readmit the penitent offender to 
 their communion, lest if they did not 
 do it, Satan would take advantage of it 
 to do injury to him and them. It is a 
 reason given by Paul why they should 
 lose no time in restoring him to the 
 church. What the advantage was which 
 Satan might gain, Paul does not specify. 
 It might be this: That under pretence 
 of duty, and seeking the purity of the 
 church, Satan would tempt them to 
 harsh measures ; to needless severity of 
 discipline ; to an unkind and unforgiving 
 spirit ; and thus, at the same time, in- 
 
 11 Lest Satan should get an 
 advantage of us : for we are not 
 ignorant of his devices. 
 
 12 Furthermore, when a i 
 
 b Ac. 16. 8. 
 
 jure the cause of religion, and ruin him 
 who had been the subject of discipline. 
 If For we are not ignorant of his de- 
 vices. We know his plans, his thoughts, 
 his cunning, his skill. We are not ig- 
 norant of the great number of stratagems 
 which he is constantly using to injure 
 us, and to destroy the souls of men. 
 He is full of wiles ; and Paul had had 
 abundant occasion to be acquainted with 
 the means which he had used to defeat 
 his plans and to destroy the church. 
 The church, at all times, has been sub- 
 jected to the influence of those wiles, 
 as well as individual Christians. And 
 the church, therefore, as well as indivi- 
 dual Christians, should be constantly on 
 its guard against those snares. Even 
 the best and purest efforts of the church 
 are often perverted, as in the case of ad- 
 ministering discipline, to the worst re- 
 sults; and by the imprudence and want 
 of wisdom; by the rashness or over- 
 heated zeal ; by the pretensions to great 
 purity and love of truth ; and by a 
 harsh, severe, and censorious spirit, Sa- 
 tan often takes advantage of the church, 
 and advances his own dark and mis- 
 chievous designs. 
 
 12. Furthermore. But (ih). This 
 particle is properly adversative ; but 
 frequently denotes transition, and serves 
 to introduce something else, whether op- 
 posite to what precedes, or simply ew- 
 tinuative or explanatory. Here, it is 
 designed to continue or explain the 
 statement before made of his deep affec- 
 tion for the church, and his interest in 
 its affairs. He therefore tells them tha 
 when he came to Troas, and was fa- 
 voured there with great success, and 
 was engaged in a manner most likely 
 of all others to interest his feelings and 
 to give him joy, yet he was deeply dis- 
 tressed because he had not heard, as he 
 expected, from them ; but so deep waa 
 his anxiety that he left Troas and wenJ 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 came to Troas to preach Christ's 
 gospel, and a tt door was opened 
 unto me of the Lord, 
 
 13 1 had no rest 6 in my spirit, 
 
 a 1 Co. 16. 9. 6 c. 7. 5, 6. 
 
 into Macedonia. % When I came to 
 Troas. This was a city of Phrygia, or 
 Mysia, on the Hellespont, between Troy 
 on the north, and Assos on the south. 
 See Note on Acts xvi. 8. It was on 
 the regular route from Ephesus to Ma- 
 cedonia. Paul took that route because 
 on his journey to Macedonia he had re- 
 solved, for the reasons above stated, not 
 to go to Corinth, ^ To preach Christ's 
 gospel. Greek. ' For (si?) the gospel 
 of Christ;' that is, on account of his 
 gospel; or to promote it. Why he 
 selected Troas, or the region of the 
 Troad (Note, Acts xvi. 8), as the field 
 of his labours, he does not say. It is 
 probable that he was waiting there to 
 hear from Corinth by Titus, and while 
 there he resolved not to be idle, but to 
 make known as much as possible the 
 gospel, ^ And a door was opened unto 
 me. See Note, 1 Cor. xvi. 9. There 
 was an opportunity of doing good, and 
 the people were disposed to hear the 
 gospel. This was a work in which 
 Paul delighted to engage, and in which 
 he usually found his highest comfort. 
 It was of all things the most adapted to 
 promote his happiness. 
 
 13. I had no rest in my spirit. I 
 was disappointed, sad, deeply anxious. 
 Though the work in which I was en- 
 gaged was that which usually gives me 
 my highest joy, yet such was my anxie- 
 ty to learn the state of things in Corinth, 
 and the success of my letter, and to see 
 Titus, whom I was expecting, that I 
 had comparatively no peace, and no 
 comfort. % But taking my leave of 
 them. Though so many considerations 
 urged me to stay; though there was 
 such a promising field of labour, yet 
 such was my anxiety to hear from you, 
 that I left them. % I went from thence 
 into Macedonia. See Note, Acts xvi. 9. 
 I went over where I expected to find 
 Titus, and to learn the state of your 
 
 because I found not Titus my 
 brother : but taking my leave of 
 them, I went from thence into 
 Macedonia. 
 
 14 Now thanks be unto God, 
 
 affairs. This is one of the few instances 
 in which Paul left an inviting field of 
 labour, and where there was a prospect 
 of signal success, to go to another place. 
 It is adduced here to show the deep in- 
 terest which he had in the church at 
 Corinth, and his anxiety to learn what 
 was their condition. It shows that 
 there may be cases where it is proper 
 for ministers to leave a field of great 
 and inviting usefulness, to go to another 
 field, and to engage in another part of 
 the great vineyard. 
 
 14. Now thanks be unto God, Sec. 
 There seem to have been several sources 
 of Paul's joy on this occasion. The 
 principal was, his constant and uniform 
 success in endeavouring to advance the 
 interests of the kingdom of the Re- 
 deemer. But in particular he rejoiced, 
 (1.) Because Titus had come to him 
 there, and had removed his distress. 
 Comp. ver. 13. (2.) Because he 
 learned from him that his efforts in re- 
 gard to the church at Corinth had been 
 successful, and that they had hearkened 
 to his counsels in his first letter ; and, 
 (3.) Because he was favoured with 
 signal success in Macedonia. His be- 
 ing compelled, therefore, to remove from 
 Troas and to go to Macedonia had been 
 to him ultimately the cause of great joy 
 and consolation. These instances of 
 success Paul regarded as occasions of 
 gratitude to God. f Which always 
 causeth us. Whatever may be our 
 efforts, and wherever we are. Whether 
 it is in endeavouring to remove the 
 errors and evils existing in a particular 
 church, or whether it be in preaching 
 the gospel in places where it has been 
 unknown, still success crowns our 
 efforts, and we have the constant evi- 
 dence of divine approbation. This waa 
 Paul's consolation in the midst of his 
 many trials ; and it proves that, what- 
 ever may be the external circumstance* 
 
40 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 • which always causeth us to tri- 
 umph in Christ, and maketh 
 
 aRo.8.37. 
 
 of a minister, whether poverty, want, 
 persecution, or distress, he will have 
 abundant occasion to give thanks to 
 God if his efforts as a minister are 
 crowned with success. % To triumph 
 in Christ. To triumph through the 
 aid of Christ, or in promoting the cause 
 of Christ. Paul had no joy which was 
 not connected with Christ, and he had 
 / no success which he did not trace to 
 him. The word which is here render* 
 ed triumph (d-£u./xfiajzvrt from Gyctu- 
 @iua>) occurs in no other place in the 
 New Testament, except in Col. ii. 15. 
 It is there rendered " triumphing over 
 them in it." that is, triumphing over 
 the principalities and powers which he 
 had spoiled, or plundered ; and it there 
 means that Christ led them in triumph 
 after the manner of a conqueror. The 
 word is here used in a causative sense — 
 the sense of the Hebrew Hiphil conju- 
 gation. It properly refers to a triumph ; 
 or a triumphal procession. Originally 
 the word B-^isL/u^zc meant a hymn which 
 was sung in honour of Bacchus; then 
 the tumultuous and noisy procession 
 which constituted the worship of the 
 god of wine ; and then any procession 
 of a similar kind. — Passow. It was 
 particularly applied among both the 
 Greeks and the Romans to a public and 
 solemn honour conferred on a victorious 
 general on a return from a successful 
 war in which he was allowed a mag- 
 nificent entrance into the capital. In 
 these triumphs, the victorious com- 
 mander was usually preceded or at- 
 tended by the spoils of war; by the most 
 valuable and magnificent articles which 
 he had captured ; and by the princes, 
 nobles, generals, or people whom he 
 had subduedr The victor was drawn 
 in a magnificent chariot, usually by two 
 white horses. Other animals were 
 sometimes used. " When Pompey tri- 
 umphed over Africa, his chariot was 
 drawn by elephants; that of Mark 
 Antony by lions ; that of Heliogabalus 
 
 manifest the savour b of his 
 knowledge by us in every place. 
 
 b Ca. 1. 3. 
 
 by tigers; and that of Aurelius by 
 deer." — Clark. The people of Corinth 
 were not unacquainted with the nature 
 of a triumph. About one hundred and 
 forty-seven years before Christ, Lucius 
 Mummius, the Roman consul, had 
 conquered all Achaia, and had destroy- 
 ed Corinth, Thebes, and Colchis, and 
 by order of the Roman senate was fa- 
 voured with a triumph, and was sur- 
 named Achaious. Tindal renders this 
 place, " Thanks be unto God which 
 always giveth us the victory in Christ." 
 Paul refers here to a victory which he 
 had, and a triumph with which he was 
 favoured by the Redeemer. It was a 
 victory over the enemies of the gospel ; 
 it was success in advancing the interests 
 of the kingdom of Christ ; and he re- 
 joiced in that victory, and in that suc- 
 cess, with more solid and substantial 
 joy than a Roman victor ever felt on re- 
 turning from his conquests over nations, 
 even when attended with the richest 
 spoils of victory, and by humbled 
 princes and kings in chains, and when 
 the assembled thousands shouted Io 
 triumphe! % And maketh manifest. 
 Makes known; spreads abroad — as a 
 pleasant fragrance is diffused through 
 the air. ^ The savour (zcr/uh). The 
 smell ; the fragrance. The word in the 
 New Testament is used to denote a 
 pleasant or fragrant odour, as of incense, 
 or aromatics. John xii. 3. See Eph. v. 
 2. Phil. iv. 18. There is an allusion 
 here doubtless to the fact that in the 
 triumphal processions fragrant odours 
 were diffused around; flowers, diffusing 
 a grateful smell, were scattered in the 
 way ; and on the altars of the gods in- 
 cense was burned during the procession, 
 and sacrifices offered, and the whole city 
 was filled with the smoke of sacrifices, 
 and with perfumes. So Paul speaks of 
 knowledge — the knowledge of Christ. 
 In his triumphings, the knowledge of 
 the Redeemer was diffused abroad, like 
 the odours which were diffused in the 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 41 
 
 15 For we are unto God a | a that are saved, and in them that 
 sweet savour of Christ, in them perish: 
 
 • a 1 Co. 1. 13. 
 
 triumphal march of the conqueror. 
 And that odour or savour was acceptable 
 to God — as the fragrance of aromatics 
 and of incense was pleasant in the 
 triumphal procession of the returning 
 victor. The phrase " makes manifest 
 the savour of his knowledge," therefore, 
 means, that the knowledge of Christ 
 was diffused everywhere by Paul, as 
 the grateful smell of aromatics was 
 diffused all around the triumphing war- 
 rior and victor. The effect of Paul's 
 conquests everywhere was to diffuse the 
 knowledge of the Saviour — and this was 
 acceptable and pleasant to God — though 
 there might be many who would not 
 avail themselves of it, and would perish. 
 See ver. 15. 
 
 15. For we are unto God. We who 
 are his ministers, and who thus triumph. 
 It is implied here that Paul felt that 
 ministers were labouring for God, and 
 felt assured that their labours would be 
 acceptable to him. — The object of Paul 
 in the statement, in this and in the fol- 
 lowing verses, is undoubtedly to meet 
 the charges of his detractors and ene- 
 mies, lie says, therefore, that what- 
 ever was the result of his labours in 
 regard to the future salvation of men ; 
 yet, that his well-meant endeavours, and 
 labours, and self-denials in preaching the 
 gospel, were acceptable to God. The 
 measure of God's approbation in the 
 case was not his success, but his fidelity, 
 his zeal, his self-denial, whatever might 
 be the reception of the gospel among 
 those who heard it. f A sweet savour. 
 Like the smell of pleasant incense, or 
 of grateful aromatics, such as were 
 burned in the triumphal processions of 
 returning conquerors. The meaning 
 is, that their labours were acceptable to 
 God ; he was pleased with them, and 
 would bestow on them the smiles and 
 proofs of his approbation. The word 
 here rendered " sweet savour" («W/*) 
 occurs only in this place, and in Eph. 
 v. 2. Phil. iv. 18 ; and is applied to per- 
 sons or things well-pleasing to God. It 
 4* 
 
 properly means good odour, or fragrance, 
 and in the Septuagint it is frequently 
 applied to the incense that was burnt 
 in the public worship of God and to 
 sacrifices in general. Gen. viii. 21. Ex 
 xxix. 18. 25. 41. Lev. i. 9. 13. 17 ; ii 
 2. 9. 12; iii. 5. 16 ; iv. 31, &c. &c. 
 Here it means that the services of Paul 
 and the other ministers of religion were 
 as grateful to God as sweet incense, or 
 acceptable sacrifices, f Of Christ. 
 That is, we are Christ's sweet savour 
 to God : we are that which he has ap- 
 pointed, and which he has devoted and 
 consecrated to God ; we are the offering, 
 so to speak, which he is continually 
 making to God. % In them that are 
 saved. In regard to them who believe 
 the gospel through our ministry and 
 who are saved. Our labour in carrying 
 the gospel to them, and in bringing 
 them to the knowledge of the truth, is 
 acceptable to God. Their salvation is 
 an object of his highest desire, and he 
 is gratified with our fidelity, and with 
 our success. This reason why their 
 work was acceptable to God is more 
 fully stated in the following verse, where 
 it is said that in reference to them they 
 were the " savour of life unto life." The 
 word "saved" here refers to all who be- 
 come Christians, and who enter heaven; 
 and as the salvation of men is an objecf 
 of such desire to God, it cannot but be 
 that all who bear the gospel to men art 
 engaged in an acceptable service, and 
 that all their efforts will be pleasing to 
 him, and approved in his sight. In re- 
 gard to this part of Paul's statement 
 there can be no difficulty. 1 Andin them 
 that perish. In reference to them who 
 reject the gospel, and who are finally 
 lost. — It is implied here, ( 1 .) That some 
 would reject the gospel and perish- 
 with whatever fidelity and self-denial 
 the ministers of religion might labour. 
 (2.) That though this would be the 
 result, yet the labours of the ministers 
 of religion would be acceptable to God. 
 This is a fearful and awful declaration, 
 
42 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 and nas been thought by many to be 
 attended with difficulty. A few re- 
 marks may present the true sense of the 
 passage, and remove the difficulty from 
 it. (1.) It is not affirmed or implied 
 here that the destruction of those who 
 would reject the gospel, and who would 
 perish, was desired by God or would 
 be pleasing to him. This is nowhere 
 affirmed or implied in the Bible. (2.) 
 It is affirmed only that the labours of 
 the ministers of religion in endeavour- 
 ing to save them would be acceptable 
 and pleasing to God. Their labours 
 would be in order to save them, not to 
 destroy them. Their desire was to 
 bring all to heaven — and this was ac- 
 ceptable to God. Whatever might be 
 the result, whether successful or not, 
 yet God would be pleased with self- 
 denial, and toil, and prayer that was 
 honestly and zealously put forth to save 
 others from death. They would be ap- 
 proved by God in proportion to the 
 amount of labour, zeal, and fidelity 
 which they evinced. (3.) It would be 
 by no fault of faithful ministers that 
 men would perish. Their efforts would 
 be to save them, and those efforts would 
 be pleasing to God. (4.) It would be 
 by no fault of the gospel that men 
 would perish. The regular and proper 
 tendency of the gospel is to save, not to 
 destroy men ; as the tendency of medi- 
 cine is to heal them, of food to support 
 the body, of air to give vitality, of light 
 to give pleasure to the eye, &c. It is 
 provided for all, and is adapted to all. 
 There is a sufficiency in the gospel for 
 all men, and in its nature it is as really 
 fitted to save one as another. Whafr- 
 ever may be the manner in which it is 
 received, it is always in itself the same 
 pure and glorious system ; full of be- 
 nevolence and mercy. The bitterest 
 enemy of the gospel cannot point to 
 one of its provisions that is adapted or 
 designed to make men miserable, and 
 to destroy them. All its provisions are 
 adapted to salvation; all its arrange- 
 ments are those of benevolence ; all the 
 powers and influences which it origi- 
 nates, are those which are fitted to save, 
 not to destroy men. The gospel is what it 
 
 is in itself — a pure, holy, and benevo- 
 lent system, and is answerable only for 
 effects which a pure, holy, and benevo- 
 lent system is fitted to produce. To 
 use the beautiful language of Theo- 
 doret, as quoted by Bloomfield, "We 
 indeed bear the sweet odour of Christ's 
 gospel to all,- but all who participate in 
 it do not experience its salutiferous ef- 
 fects. Thus to diseased eyes even the 
 light of heaven is noxious ; yet the sun 
 does not bring the injury. And to those 
 in a fever, honey is bitter ; yet it is sweet 
 nevertheless. Vultures too, it is said, 
 fly from sweet odours of myrrh ; yet 
 myrrh is myrrh though the vultures 
 avoid it. Thus, if some be saved, though 
 others perish, the gospel retains its own 
 virtue, and we the preachers of it remain 
 just as we are ; and the gospel retains 
 its odorous and salutiferous properties, 
 though some may disbelieve and abuse 
 it, and perish." Yet, (5.) It is implied 
 that the gospel would be the occasion 
 of heavier condemnation to some, and 
 that they would sink into deeper ruin 
 in consequence of its being preached 
 to them. This is implied in the ex- 
 pression in ver. 16. "to the one we are 
 a savour of death unto death." In the 
 explanation of this, we may observe, (a) 
 That those who perish would have pe- 
 rished at any rate. All were under 
 condemnation whether the gospel had 
 come to them or not. None will 
 perish in consequence of the gospel's 
 having been sent to them who would 
 not have perished had it been unknown. 
 Men do not perish because the gospel 
 is sent to them, but for their own sins. 
 
 (b) It is in fact by their own fault that 
 men reject the gospel, and that they are 
 lost They are voluntary in this ; and, 
 whatever is their final destiny, they 
 are not under compulsion. The 
 gospel compels no one against his 
 will either to go to heaven, or to hell. 
 
 (c) Men under the gospel sin against 
 greater light than they do without it 
 They have more to answer for. It in- 
 creases their responsibility. If, there- 
 fore, they reject it, and go down to 
 eternal death, they go from higher pri- 
 vileges ; and they go, of course, to meet 
 
A. D. GO.] 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 43 
 
 16 To ■ the one we are the 
 savour of death unto death ; and 
 
 a Jno. 9.39. lPe.2. 7,8. 
 
 a more aggravated condemnation. For 
 condemnation will always be in exact 
 proportion to guilt ; and guilt is in pro- 
 portion to abused light and privileges. 
 (d) The preaching of the gospel, and 
 the offers of life, are often the occasion 
 ol the deeper guilt of the sinner. Often 
 he becomes enraged. He gives vent to 
 the deep malignity of his soul. He op- 
 poses the gospel with malice and infu- 
 riated anger. His eye kindles with in- 
 dignation, and his lip curls with pride 
 and scorn. He is profane and blas- 
 phemous ; and the offering of the gospel 
 to him is the occasion of exciting deep 
 and malignant passions against God, 
 against the Saviour, against the minis- 
 ters of religion. Against the gospel, 
 men often manifest the same malignity 
 and scorn which they did against the 
 Saviour himself. Yet this is not the 
 fault of the gospel, nor of the ministers 
 of religion. It is the fault of sinners 
 themselves ; and while there can be no 
 doubt that such a rejection of the gospel 
 will produce their deeper condemnation, 
 and that it is a savour of death unto 
 death unto them; still the gospel is 
 good and benevolent, and still God will 
 be pleased with those who faithfully 
 offer its provisions, and who urge it on 
 the attention of men. 
 
 1 6. To the one. To those who perish. 
 % We are the savour of death unto death. 
 We are the occasion of deepening their 
 condemnation, and of sinking them 
 lower into ruin. The expression here 
 used means literally, ' to the one class 
 we bear a death-conveying odour lead- 
 ing to their death' — a savour, a smell 
 which, under the circumstances, is de- 
 structive to life, and which leads to 
 death. Mr. Locke renders this, "To 
 the one my preaching is of ill savour, 
 unacceptable and offensive, by their re- 
 jecting whereof they draw death on 
 themselves." Grateful as their labours 
 were to God, and acceptable as would 
 
 to the other the savour of life 
 unto life. And who b is suffi- 
 cient for these things ? 
 
 be 3.5,6. 
 
 be their efforts, whatever might be the 
 results, yet Paul could not be ignorant 
 that the gospel would in fact be the 
 means of greater condemnation to 
 many. See Notes on ver. 15. It was in- 
 deed by their own fault ; yet wherever 
 the gospel was preached, it would to 
 many have this result. It is probable 
 that the language here used is borrowed 
 from similar expressions which were 
 common among the Jews. Thus in 
 .Debar im Rabba, sec. 1, fol. 248, it is 
 said, "As the bee brings home honey to 
 the owner, but stings others, so it is 
 with the words of the law." " They 
 (the words of the law) are a savour of 
 life to Israel, but a savour of death to 
 the people of this world." Thus in 
 Taarieth, fol. 7, 1, "Whoever gives 
 attention to the law on account of the 
 law itself, to him it becomes an aroma- 
 tic of life (o^n dd), but to him who does 
 not attend to the law on account of the 
 law itself, to him it becomes an aroma- 
 tic of death (did cd)" — the idea of which 
 is, that as medicines skilfully applied 
 will heal, but if unskilfully applied will 
 aggravate a disease, so it is with the 
 words of the law. Again, " The word 
 of the law which proceeds out of the 
 mouth of God is an odour of life to the 
 Israelites, but an odour of death to the 
 Gentiles." See Rosenmuller, and 
 Bloomfield. The sense of the passage 
 is plain, that the gospel, by the wilful 
 rejection of it, becomes the means of 
 the increased guilt and condemnation 
 of many of those who hear it. 1 And 
 to the other. To those who embrace it, 
 and are saved. 1 The savour of life. 
 An odour, or fragrance producing life, 
 or tending to life. It is a living, or 
 life-giving savour. It is in itself grate- 
 ful and pleasant, t Unto life. Tend- 
 ing to life; or adapted to produce life. 
 The word life here, as often elsewhere, 
 is used to denote salvation. It is ( 1 .) Life 
 in opposition to the death in sin in which 
 
44 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS 
 
 17 For we are not as many, 
 which corrupt * the word of 
 God : but as of sincerity, but as 
 
 * or, deal deceitfully with. c. 4. 2. 
 
 all are by nature ; (2.) In opposition to 
 death in the grave — as it leads to a 
 glorious resurrection ; (3.) In opposition 
 to eternal death ; to the second dying, 
 as it leads to life and peace and joy in 
 heaven. See the words "life" and 
 "death" explained in the Notes on 
 Rom. vi. 23. The gospel is " the sa- 
 vour of life unto life," because, (1.) It is 
 its nature and tendency to produce life 
 and salvation. It is adapted to that ; 
 and is designed to that end. (2.) Be-, 
 cause it actually results in the life and 
 salvation of those who embrace it. It 
 is the immediate and direct cause of 
 their salvation ; of their recovery from 
 sin ; of their glorious resurrection ; of 
 their eternal life in heaven. ^ And 
 who is sufficient for these things? For 
 the arduous and responsible work of 
 the ministry ; for a work whose influ- 
 ence must be felt either in the eternal 
 salvation, or the eternal ruin of the 
 soul. Who is worthy of so important 
 •a charge? Who can undertake it 
 without trembling? Who can engage 
 in it without feeling that he is in him- 
 self unfit for it, and that he needs con- 
 stant divine grace ? This is an excla- 
 mation which any one may well make 
 in view of the responsibilities of the 
 work of the ministry. And we may 
 remark, (1.) If Paul felt this, assuredly 
 others should feel it also. If, with all 
 the divine assistance which he had ; all 
 the proofs of the peculiar presence of 
 God, and all the mighty miraculous 
 powers conferred on him, Paul had such 
 a sense of unfitness for this great work, 
 then a consciousness of unfitness, and a 
 deep sense of responsibility, may well 
 rest on all others. (2.) It was this 
 sense of the responsibility of the minis- 
 try which contributed much to Paul's 
 success. It was a conviction that the 
 results of his work must be seen in the 
 joys of heaven, or the woes of hell, that 
 led him to look to God for aid, and to 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 
 of God, in the sight a of God, 
 speak we 2 in Christ. 
 
 a He. 11. 27. « or, of. 
 
 devote himself so entirely to his great 
 work. Men will not feel much concern 
 unless they have a deep sense of the 
 magnitude and responsibility of their 
 work. Men who feel as they should 
 about the ministry will look to God for 
 aid, and will feel that he alone can sus- 
 tain them in their arduous duties. 
 
 17. For we are not as many. This 
 refers doubtless to the false teachers at 
 Corinth ; and to all who mingled 
 human philosophy or tradition with the 
 pure word of truth. Paul's design in 
 the statement in this verse seems to be 
 to affirm that he had such a deep sense 
 of the responsibility of the ministerial 
 office, and of its necessary influence on 
 the eternal destiny of man, that it led 
 him to preach the simple gospel, the 
 pure word of God. He did not dare to 
 dilute it with any human mixture. He 
 did not dare to preach philosophy, or 
 human wisdom. He did not dare to 
 mingle with it the crude conceptions of 
 man. He sought to exhibit the simple 
 truth as it was in Jesus ; and so deep 
 was his sense of the responsibility of 
 the office, and so great was his desire on 
 the subject, that he had been enabled to 
 do it, and to triumph always in Christ. 
 So that, although he was conscious that 
 he was in himself unfit for these things, 
 yet by the grace of God he had been 
 able always to exhibit the simple truth, 
 and his labours had been crowned with 
 constant and signal success. 1[ Which 
 corrupt the word of God. Margin, 
 "deal deceitfully with." The word 
 here used (x.a.7nt\svcvri;) occurs nowhere 
 else in the New Testament, and does 
 not occur in the Septuagint. The word 
 is derived from kutthko;, which signifies 
 properly a huckster, or a retailer of 
 wine, a petty chapman ; a man who 
 buys up articles for the purpose of 
 selling them again. It also means 
 sometimes a vintner, or an innkeeper 
 The proper idea is that of a small dealei 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 45 
 
 and especially in wine. Such persons 
 were notorious, as they are now, for 
 diluting their wines with water (comp. 
 Sept. in Isa. i. 22) ; and for compound- 
 ing wines of other substances than the 
 juice of the grape for purposes of gain. 
 Wine, of all substances in trade, perhaps, 
 affords the greatest facilities for such 
 dishonest tricks; and accordingly the 
 dealers in that article have generally 
 been most distinguished for fraudulent 
 practices and corrupt and diluted mix- 
 tures. Hence the word comes to de- 
 note to adulterate ; to corrupt, &c. It 
 is here applied to those who adulterated 
 or corrupted the pure word of God in 
 any way, and for any purpose. It 
 probably has particular reference to those 
 who did it either by Judaizing opinions, 
 or by the mixtures of a false and de- 
 ceitful philosophy. The latter mode 
 would be likely to prevail among the 
 subtle and philosophizing Greeks. It is 
 in such ways that the gospel has been 
 usually corrupted. (1.) It is done by 
 attempting to attach a philosophical 
 explanation to the facts of revelation, 
 and making the theory as important 
 as the fact. (2.) By attempting to 
 explain away the offensive points of 
 revelation by the aid of philosophy. 
 (3.) By attempting to make the facts 
 of Scripture accord with the prevalent 
 notions of philosophy, and by apply- 
 ing a mode of interpretation to the 
 Bible which would fritter away its 
 meaning, and make it mean any thing 
 or nothing at pleasure. In these, and 
 in various other ways, men have cor- 
 rupted the; word of God; and of all 
 the evils which Christianity has ever 
 sustained in this world, the worst have 
 been those which it has received from 
 philosophy, and from those teachers who 
 have corrupted the word of God. The 
 fires of persecution it could meet, and 
 still be pure; the utmost efforts of 
 princes, and monarchs, and of Satan to 
 destroy it, it has outlived, and has shone 
 purely and brightly amidst all these 
 efforts; but, when corrupted by phi- 
 losophy, and by " science falsely so 
 called," it has been dimmed in its lus- 
 tre, paralyzed in its aims, and shorn of 
 
 its power, and has ceased to be mighty 
 in pulling down the strong holds of 
 Satan's kingdom. Accordingly, the 
 enemy of God has ceased to excite per- 
 secution, and now aims in various ways 
 to corrupt the gospel by the admixture 
 of philosophy, and of human opinions. 
 Tindal renders this passage, " For we 
 are not as many are which choppe and 
 chaunge with the word of God" — an 
 idea which is important and beautiful — 
 but this is one of the few instances in 
 which he mistook the sense of the 
 original text. In general, the accuracy 
 of his translation and his acquaintance 
 with the true sense of the Greek text are 
 very remarkable. 1 But as of sincerity. 
 Sincerely ; actuated by unmingled ho- 
 nesty and simplicity of aim. See Note 
 on ch. i, 12. f As of God. As influ- 
 enced by him ; as under his control 
 and direction ; as having been sent by 
 him ; as acting by his command. See 
 Note, ch. i. 12. 1 In the sight of God. 
 As if we felt that his eye was always 
 on us. Nothing is better fitted to make 
 a man' sincere and honest, than this. 
 *f Speak we in Christ. In the name, 
 and in the service of Christ. We de- 
 jer our message with a deep con- 
 sciousness that the eye of the all-seeing 
 God is on us; that we can conceal 
 nothing from him ; and that we must 
 soon give up our account to him. 
 
 nEMAKKS. 
 
 1. In this chapter, and in the ma- 
 nagement of the whole case to which 
 Paul here refers, we have an instance 
 of his tenderness in administering dis- 
 cipline. This tenderness was mani- 
 fested in many ways. (1.) He did 
 nothing to wound the feelings of the 
 offending party. (2.) He did nothing 
 in the way of punishment which a 
 stern sense of duty did not demand. 
 (3.) He did it all with many tears. 
 He wept at the necessity of adminis- 
 tering discipline at all. He wept over 
 the remissness of the church. He wept 
 over the fall of the offending brother. 
 (4.) He did not mention even the name 
 of the offender. He did not blazon his 
 fault* abroad ; nor has he left any clue 
 
46 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 by which it can be known ; nor did he 
 take any measures which were fitted to 
 pain, unnecessarily, the feelings of his 
 friends. If all discipline in the church 
 were conducted in this manner, it would 
 probably always be effectual and suc- 
 cessful, ver. 1 — 10. 
 
 5*. We ought cordially to receive and 
 forgive an offending brother, as soon as 
 he gives evidence of repentance. We 
 should harbour no malice against him ; 
 and if, by repentance, he has put away 
 his sins, we should hasten to forgive 
 him. This we should do as individuals, 
 and as churches. God cheerfully for- 
 gives us, and receives us into favour 
 on our repentance ; and we should hail 
 the privilege of treating all our offend- 
 ing brethren in the same manner, ver. 
 7,8. 
 
 3. Churches should be careful that 
 Satan should not get an advantage over 
 them. ver. 11. In every way possible 
 he will attempt it ; and perhaps in few 
 modes is it more often done than in ad- 
 ministering discipline. In such a case, 
 Satan gains an advantage over a church 
 in the following ways. (1.) In inducing 
 it to neglect discipline. This occurs 
 often because an offender is rich, or ta- 
 lented, or is connected with influential 
 families; because there is a fear of driv- 
 ing off such families from the church ; 
 because the individual is of elevated rank, 
 and the church suffers him to remain in 
 her bosom. The laws of the church, 
 like other laws, are often like cobwebs : 
 Great flies break through, and the small- 
 er ones are caught. The consequence 
 is, that Satan gains an immense advan- 
 tage. Rich and influential offenders re- 
 main in the church; discipline is re- 
 laxed ; the cause of Christ is scanda- 
 lized ; and the church at large feels the 
 influence, and the work of God declines. 
 (2.) Satan gains an advantage in dis- 
 cipline, sometimes, by too great severity 
 of discipline. If he cannot induce a 
 church to relax altogether, and to suffer 
 offenders to remain, then he excites them 
 to improper and needless severity. He 
 drives them on to harsh discipline for 
 small offences. He excites a spirit of 
 persecution. He enkindles a false zeal 
 
 on account of the Shibboleth of doctrine. 
 He excites a spirit of party, and causes 
 the church to mistake it for zeal for 
 truth. He excites a spirit of persecu- 
 tion against some of the best men in 
 the church, on account of pretended er- 
 rors in doctrine, and kindles the flames 
 of intestine war ; and breaks the church 
 up into parties and fragments. Or he 
 urges on the church, even in cases 
 where discipline is proper, to needless 
 and inappropriate severity ; drives the 
 offender from its bosom ; breaks his 
 spirit; and prevents ever-onward his 
 usefulness, his return, and his happi- 
 ness. One of the chief arts of Satan 
 has been to cause the church, in cases 
 of discipline to use severity instead of 
 kindness ,- to excite a spirit of persecu- 
 tion instead of love. Almost all the 
 evils which grow out of attempts at dis- 
 cipline might have been prevented by a 
 spirit of love. (3.) Satan gains an 
 advantage in cases of discipline, when 
 the church is unwilling to re-admit to 
 fellowship an offending but a penitent 
 member. His spirit is broken ; his use- 
 fulness is destroyed. The world usually 
 takes sides with him against the church, 
 and the cause of religion bleeds. 
 
 4. Individual Christicms, as well as 
 churches, should be careful that Satan 
 does not get an advantage over them. ver. 
 1 1. Among the ways in which he does 
 this are the following : (1.) By inducing 
 them to conform to the world. This 
 is done under the plea that religion is 
 not gloomy, and morose, and ascetic. 
 Thence he often leads professors into 
 all the gayeties, and amusements, and 
 follies of which the world partake. Sa- 
 tan gains an immense advantage to his 
 cause when this is done — for all the in- 
 fluence of the professed Christian is 
 with him (2.) By producing laxness 
 of opinion in regard to doctrine. Christ 
 intends that his cause shall advance by 
 the influence of truth ; and that his 
 church shal be the witness of the truth. 
 The cause of Satan advances by error 
 and falsehood; and when professed 
 Christians embrace falsehood, or are in- 
 different to truth, their whole influence 
 is on the side of Satan, and his advan- 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 47 
 
 tage is immense when they become the 
 advocates of error. (3.) By producing 
 among Christians despondency, melan- 
 choly, and despair. Some of the best 
 men are often thus afflicted and thrown 
 into darkness, as Job was. Job xxiii. 
 8 — 9. Indeed, it is commonly the best 
 members of a church that have doubts 
 in this manner, and that fall into tempta- 
 tion, and that are left to the buffetings 
 of Satan. Your gay, and worldly, and 
 fashionable Christians have usually no 
 such troubles — except when they lie on 
 a bed of death. They are not in the 
 way of Satan. They do not oppose 
 him, and he will not trouble them. It 
 is your humble, praying, self-denying 
 Christians that he dreads and hates ; 
 and it is these that he is suffered to 
 tempt, and to make sad, and to fill with 
 gloom and doubt. And when this is 
 done, it is an immense advantage to his 
 cause. It produces the impression that 
 religion is nothing but gloom and me- 
 lancholy, and the people of the world are 
 easily led to hate and avoid it. Chris- 
 tians, therefore, should be cheerful, and 
 benevolent, and happy — as they may 
 be — lest Satan should get an advantage 
 over them. (4.) By fanaticism. For 
 when Satan finds that he can get no 
 advantage over Christians by inducing 
 them to do nothing, or to do any thing 
 positively wrong or immoral, he drives 
 them on with over-heated and ill-timed 
 zeal ; he makes them unreasonably 
 strenuous for some single opinion or 
 measure ; he disposes them to oppose 
 and persecute all who do not fall into 
 their views, and feel as they feel. (5.) 
 By contentions and strifes. Satan often 
 gets an advantage in that way. No 
 matter what the cause may be, whether 
 it be for doctrines, or for any other 
 cause, yet the very fact that there are 
 contentions among the professed follow- 
 ers of " the Prince of peace" does in- 
 jury, and gives Satan an advantage. 
 No small part of his efforts, therefore, 
 have been to excite contentions among 
 Christians, an effort in which he has 
 been, and is still, eminently success- 
 ful. 
 
 5. Satan gets an advantage over sin- 
 
 ners, and they should be on their guard. 
 He does it, (I.) By producing a sense 
 of security in their present condition ; 
 and by leading them to indifference in 
 regard to their eternal condition. In 
 this he is eminently successful; and 
 when this is gained, all is gained that 
 his cause demands. It is impossible to 
 conceive of greater success in any thing 
 than Satan has in producing a state of 
 indifference to the subject of religion 
 among men. (2.) By inducing them to 
 defer attention to religion to some future 
 time. This is an advantage, because, (a) 
 It accomplishes all he wishes at present ; 
 (b) Because it is usually successful 
 altogether. It is usually the same thing 
 as resolving not to attend to religion at 
 all. (3.) By producing false views of 
 religion. He represents it at one time 
 as gloomy, sad, and melancholy ; at an- 
 other, as so easy, that it may be ob- 
 tained whenever they please ; at another, 
 by persuading them that their sins are 
 so great that they cannot be forgiven. 
 One great object of Satan is to blind 
 the minds of sinners to the true nature 
 of religion ; and in this he is usually 
 successful. (4.) He deludes the aged 
 by telling them it is too late ; and the 
 young by telling them that now is the 
 time for mirth and pleasure, and that reli- 
 gion may be attended to at some future 
 period of life. (5.) He gains an advan- 
 tage by plunging the sinner deeper and 
 deeper in sin ; inducing him to listen to 
 the voice of temptation ; by making him 
 the companion of the wicked ; and by 
 deluding him with the promises of plea- 
 sure, honour, and gain in this world 
 until it is too late, and he dies. 
 
 6.« Ministers of the gospel may have 
 occasion to triumph in the success of 
 their work. Paul always met with 
 success of some kind ; always had some 
 cause of triumph. In all his trials, he 
 had occasion of rejoicing, and always 
 was assured that he was pursuing that 
 course which would lead him ultimately 
 to triumph, ver. 14. 
 
 7. The gospel may be so preached 
 as to be successful, ver. 14. In the 
 hands of Paul it was successful. So it 
 was with the other apostles. So it was 
 
48 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 with Luther, Knox, Calvin. So it was 
 with Whitefield, Edwards, Wesley, and 
 Payson. If ministers are not successful, 
 it is not the fault of the gospel. It is 
 adapted to do good, and to save men ; 
 and it may be so preached as to accom- 
 plish those great ends. If all ministers 
 were as self-denying, and laborious, and 
 prayerful as were these men, the gospel 
 would be as successful now as it has 
 ever been. 
 
 8. Much of the work of the ministry 
 is pleasant and delightful. It is the 
 savour of life unto life. ver. 15, 16. 
 There is no joy on earth of a higher 
 and purer character than that which 
 the ministers of the gospel have in the 
 success of their work. There is no 
 work more pleasant than that of im- 
 parting the consolations of religion to 
 the sick, and the afflicted ; than that of 
 directing inquiring sinners to the Lamb 
 of God ; no joy on earth so pure and 
 elevated as that which a pastor has in a 
 revival ot religion. In the evidence 
 that God accepts his labours, and that 
 to many his message is a savour of life 
 unto life, there is a joy which no other 
 pursuit can furnish; a joy, even on 
 earth, which is more than a compensa- 
 tion for all the toils, self-denials, and 
 trials of the ministry. 
 
 9. In view of the happy and saving 
 results of the work of the ministry, we 
 see the importance of the work. Those 
 results are to be seen in heaven. They 
 are to enter into the eternal destiny of 
 the righteous. They are to be seen in 
 the felicity and holiness of those who 
 shall be redeemed from death. The 
 very happiness of heaven, therefore, is 
 dependent on the fidelity and success of 
 the ministry. This work stretches be- 
 yond the grave. It reaches into eternity. 
 It is to be seen in heaven. Other plans and 
 labours of men terminate at death. But 
 the work of the ministry reaches in its 
 results into the skies ; and is to be seen 
 ever onward in eternity. Well might 
 the apostle ask, " Who is sufficient for 
 these things V 
 
 10. The ministers of the gospel will 
 be accepted of God, if faithful, whatever 
 may be the result of their labours; 
 
 whether seen in the salvation, or the 
 augmented condemnation of those who 
 hear them. ver. 15. They are a sweet 
 savour to God. Their acceptance with 
 him depends not on the measure of their 
 success ; but on their fidelity. If men 
 reject the gospel, and make it the occa- 
 sion of their greater condemnation, the 
 fault is not that of ministers, but is their 
 own. If men are faithful, God accepts 
 their efforts; and even if many reject 
 the message and perish, still a faithful 
 ministry will not be to blame. That 
 such results should follow from their 
 ministry, indeed, increases their respon 
 sibility, and makes their office more 
 awful, but it will not render them less 
 acceptable in their labours in the sight 
 of God. 
 
 11. We are to anticipate that the 
 ministry will be the means of the deeper 
 condemnation of many who hear the 
 gospel, ver. 16. The gospel is to them 
 a savour of death unto death. We are 
 to expect that many will reject and 
 despise the message, and sink into 
 deeper pin, and condemnation, and wo. 
 We are not to be disappointed, there- 
 fore, when we see such effects follow, 
 and when the sinner sinks into a deeper 
 hell from under the ministry of the 
 gospel. It always has been the case, 
 and we have reason to suppose it 
 always will be. And painful as is the 
 fact, yet ministers must make up their 
 minds to witness this deeply painful 
 result of their work. 
 
 12. The ministry is a deeply and aw- 
 fully responsible work. ver. 16. It is 
 connected with the everlasting happi- 
 ness, or the deep and eternal condemna- 
 tion of all those who hear the gospel. 
 Every sermon that is preached is mak- 
 ing an impression that will never be 
 obliterated, and producing an effect that 
 will never terminate. Its effects will 
 never all be seen until the day of judg- 
 ment, and in the awful solemnities of 
 the eternal world. Well might Paul ask, 
 " Who is sufficient for these things V 
 
 13. It is a solemn thing to hear the 
 gospel. If it is solemn for a minister 
 to dispense it, it is not less solemn to 
 hear it It is connected with the eter 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 49 
 
 nal welfare of those who hear. And 
 thoughtless as are multitudes who hear 
 it, yet it is deeply to affect them hereafter. 
 If they ever embrace it, they will owe 
 their eternal salvation to it ; if they con- 
 tinue to neglect it, it will sink them deep 
 and forever in the world of wo. Every 
 individual, therefore, who hears the gos- 
 pel dispensed, no matter by whom, 
 should remember that he is listening to 
 God's solemn message to men; and that 
 it will and must exert a deep influence 
 on his eternal doom. 
 
 14. A people should pray much for 
 a minister. Paul often entreated the 
 churches to which he wrote to pray for 
 him. If Paul needed the prayers of 
 Christians, assuredly Christians now do. 
 Prayer for a minister is demanded be- 
 cause, (1.) He has the same infirmities, 
 conflicts, and temptations which other 
 Christians have. (2.) He has those 
 which are peculiar, and which grow out 
 of the very nature of his office ; for the 
 warfare of Satan is earned on mainly 
 with the leaders of the army of God. 
 (3.) He is engaged in a great and most 
 responsible work — the greatest work 
 ever committed to mortal man. (4.) 
 His success will be generally in propor- 
 tion as a people pray for him. The 
 welfare of a people, therefore, is identi- 
 fied with their praying for their minister. 
 He will preach better, and they will 
 hear better, just in proportion as they 
 pray for him. His preaching will be 
 dull, dry, heavy ; will be without unc- 
 tion, spirituality and life, unless they 
 pray for him ; and their hearing will be 
 dull, lifeless, and uninterested, unless 
 they pray for him. No people will 
 hear the gospel to much advantage who 
 do not feel anxiety enough about it to 
 pray for their minister. 
 
 15. The interview between a minis- 
 ter and his people in the day of judg- 
 ment will be a very solemn one. Then 
 the effect of his ministry will be seen. 
 Then it will be known to whom it was 
 a savour of life unto life, and to whom 
 it was a savour of death unto death. 
 Then the eternal destiny of all will be 
 
 5 
 
 settled. Then the faithful minister 
 will be attended to heaven by all to 
 whom his ministry has been a savour 
 of life unto life ; and then he will part 
 forever with all whom he so often 
 warned and entreated in vain. In dis- 
 tant worlds — worlds forever separated — 
 shall be experienced the result of his 
 labours. O ! how solemn must be the 
 scene when he must give up his account 
 for the manner in which he has preach- 
 ed ; and they, for the manner in which 
 they attended on his ministry ! 
 
 16. Let all ministers, then, be care- 
 ful that they do not corrupt the word 
 of God. ver. 17. Let them preach it in 
 simplicity and in truth. Let them not 
 preach philosophy, or metaphysics, or 
 their own fancy, or the tradition of men, 
 or the teaching of the schools, but the 
 simple truth as it is in Jesus. Let 
 them preach as sent by God ; as in the 
 sight of God ; as commissioned by Christ 
 to deliver a simple, plain, pure message 
 to mankind, whether they will hear or 
 forbear. Their success will be in pro- 
 portion to the simplicity and purity of 
 the gospel which they present; their 
 peace and joy in death and in heaven 
 will be just as they sha.ll have evidence 
 then that in simplicity and sincerity 
 they have endeavoured to present every- 
 where, and to all, the pure and simple 
 gospel of Jesus Christ. As ministers, 
 therefore, desire acceptance with God 
 and success in the work, let them preach 
 the pure gospel; not adulterating it 
 with foreign admixtures; not endea- 
 vouring to change it so as to be pala- 
 table to the carnal mind ; not substitut- 
 ing philosophy for the gospel, and not 
 withholding any thing in the gospel be- 
 cause men do not love it; and let the 
 people of God everywhere sustain the 
 ministry by their prayers, and aid them 
 in their work by daily commending 
 them to the God of grace. So shall 
 they be able to perform the solemn 
 functions of their office to divine accept- 
 ance ; and so shall ministers and people 
 find the gospel to be " a savour of lifo 
 unto life." 
 
50 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 
 D 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 O we begin again to com- 
 mend ° ourselves ? or need 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 This chapter is closely connected in 
 its design with the preceding. Paul 
 had said in that chapter (ver. 14), that 
 he had always occasion to triumph in 
 the success which he had, and that God 
 always blessed his labours ; and espe- 
 cially had spoken, in the close of the 
 previous chapter (ver. 17), of his sin- 
 cerity as contrasted with the conduct 
 of some who corrupted the word of God. 
 This might appear to some as if he de- 
 signed to commend himself to them, or 
 that he had said this for the purpose of 
 securing their favour. It is probable 
 also, that the false teachers at Corinth 
 had been introduced there by letters of 
 recommendation, perhaps from Judea. 
 In reply to this, Paul intimates (ver. 1) 
 that this was not his design ; (ver. 2) 
 that he had no need of letters of recom- 
 mendation to them, since (ver. 2, 3) 
 they were his commendatory epistle; 
 they were themselves the best evidence 
 of his zeal, fidelity, and success in his 
 labours. He could appeal to them as 
 the best proof that he was qualified for 
 the apostolic office. His success among 
 them, he says (ver. 4), was a ground 
 of his trusting in God, an evidence of 
 his acceptance. Yet, as if he should 
 seem to rely on his own strength, and 
 to boast of what he had done, he says 
 (ver. 5) that his success was not owing 
 to any strength which he had, or to any 
 skill of his own, but entirely to the aid 
 which he had received from God. It 
 was God, he says (ver. 6), who had 
 qualified him to preach, and had given 
 him grace to be an able minister of the 
 New Testament. 
 
 It is not improbable that the false 
 teachers, being of Jewish origin, in Co- 
 rinth, had commended the laws and in- 
 stitutions of Moses as being of superior 
 clearness, and even as excelling the gos- 
 pel of Cferist. Paul takes occasion, 
 therefore (ver. 7 — 11), to show that the 
 laws and institutions of Moses were far 
 
 we, as some others, epistles h of 
 commendation to you, or let- 
 
 a c. 5. 12. 
 
 b Ac. 18. 27. 
 
 inferior in this respect to the gospel. 
 His was a ministration of death (ver. 
 7) ; though glorious it was to be done 
 away (ver. 7) ; the ministration of the 
 Spirit was therefore to be presumed to 
 be far more glorious (ver. 8) ; the one 
 was a ministration to condemnation, the 
 other of righteousness (ver. 9) ; the one 
 had comparatively no glory, being so 
 much surpassed by the other (ver. 10); 
 and the former was to be done away, 
 while the latter was to remain, and was 
 therefore far more glorious, ver. 1 1 . 
 
 This statement of the important dif- 
 ference between the laws of Moses and 
 the gospel, is further illustrated by show- 
 ing the effect which the institutions of 
 Moses had had on the Jews themselves, 
 ver. 12 — 15. That effect was to blind 
 them. Moses had put a veil over his 
 face (ver. 13), and the effect had been 
 that the nation was blinded in reading 
 the Old Testament, and had no just 
 views of the true meaning of their own 
 Scriptures, ver. 14, 15. 
 
 Yet, Paul says, that that veil should 
 be taken away. ver. 16 — 18. It was the 
 intention of God that it should be re- 
 moved. When that people should turn 
 again to the Lord, it should be taken 
 away. ver. 16. It was done where the 
 Spirit of the Lord was. ver. 17. It was 
 done in fact in regard to all true Chris- 
 tians, ver. 18. They were permitted to 
 behold the glory of the Lord as in a 
 glass, and they were changed into the 
 same image. The same subject is con- 
 tinued in ch. iv., where Paul illustrates 
 the effect of this clear revelation of the 
 gospel, as compared with the institutions 
 of Moses, on the Christian ministry. 
 
 1. Do we begin again. This is de- 
 signed evidently to meet an objection. 
 He had been speaking of his triumph 
 in the ministry (ch. ii. 14), and of his 
 sincerity and honesty, as contrasted 
 with the conduct of many who corrupt 
 ed the word of God. ch. ii. 17. It 
 might be objected that he was magnify 
 
A. D.60.J 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 51 
 
 ters of commendation from you ? 
 
 ing himself in these statements, and 
 designed to commend himself in this 
 manner to the Corinthians. To this he 
 replies in the following verses, f To 
 commend ourselves? To recommend 
 ourselves ; do we speak this in our own 
 praise, in order to obtain your favour. 
 T Or need we, as some others. Probably 
 some who had brought letters of recom- 
 mendation to them from Judea. The 
 false teachers at Corinth had been ori- 
 ginally introduced there by commend- 
 atory letters from abroad. These were 
 letters of introduction, and were com- 
 mon among the Greeks, the Romans, 
 and the Jews, as they are now. They 
 were usually given to persons who were 
 about to travel, as there were no inns, 
 and as travellers were dependent on the 
 hospitality of those among whom they 
 travelled, f Of commendation from 
 you. To other churches. It is im- 
 plied here by Paul, that he sought no 
 such letters ; that he travelled without 
 them ; and that he depended on his zeal, 
 and self-denial, and success to make him 
 known, and to give him the affections 
 of those to whom he ministered — a much 
 better recommendation than mere in- 
 troductory letters. Such letters were, 
 however, sometimes given by Chris- 
 tians, and are by no means improper. 
 Acts xviii. 27. Yet, they do not ap- 
 pear to have been sought or used by the 
 apostles generally. They depended on 
 their miraculous endowments, and on 
 the attending grace of God to make 
 them known. 
 
 2. Ye are our epistle. Comp. 1 Cor. 
 ix. 2. This is a most beautiful and 
 happy turn given to the whole subject. 
 The sense is plain. It is, that the con- 
 version of the Corinthians, under the 
 faithful labours of the apostle, was a 
 better testimonial of his character and 
 fidelity than any letters could be. To ! 
 see the force of this, it must be remem- ! 
 bered, (1.) That Corinth was an ex- 
 ceedingly dissolute and abandoned place ' 
 (see the Introduction to the first epistle) ; ' 
 (2.) That a large number of them had j 
 
 2 Ye a are our epistle, writ- 
 
 a 1 Co. 9. 2. 
 
 been converted, and a church organized ; 
 (3.) That their conversion, and the or- 
 ganization of a church in suck a city 
 were events that would be known 
 abroad ; and, (4.) That it had been ac 
 complished entirely under the labour oj 
 Paul and his companions. To their 
 knowledge of him, therefore, and to his 
 success there, he could confidently ap„ 
 peal as a testimonial of his character. 
 The characteristics of this commendato- 
 ry epistle, he proceeds immediately to 
 state. The general sense is, that they 
 were the letter of recommendation which 
 God had given to him ; and that their 
 conversion under his ministry was the 
 public testimonial of his character which 
 all might see and read. "J Written in 
 our hearts. A few MSS. and versions 
 read thus, "your hearts;" and Dod- 
 dridge has adopted this reading, and 
 supposes that it means that the change 
 produced not only in their external 
 conduct, but in their inward temper, was 
 so great, that all must see that it was an 
 unanswerable attestation to his ministry. 
 But there is not sufficient authority for 
 changing the text ; nor is it necessary. 
 The sense is, probably, that this letter 
 was, as it were, written on his heart. 
 It was not merely that Paul had a ten 
 der affection for them, as Clarke sup 
 poses ; nor was it that he regarded 
 them as " a copy of the letter of recom- 
 mendation from Christ written in his 
 heart," according to the fanciful conceit 
 of Macknight ; but Paul's idea seems to 
 have been this. He is speaking of the 
 testimonial which he had from God. 
 That testimonial consisted in the con- 
 version of the Corinthians. This he 
 says was written on his heart. It was 
 not a cold letter of introduction, but it 
 was such as, while it left him no room 
 to doubt that God had sent him, also 
 affected his feelings, and was engraven 
 on his soul. It was to him, therefore, 
 far more valuable than any mere letter 
 of commendation or of introduction 
 could be. It was a direct testimonial 
 from God to his own heart of his ap- 
 
52 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 ten in our hearts, known and 
 read of all men : 
 
 3 Forasmuch as ye are mani- 
 
 probation, and of his having appointed 
 him to the apostolic office. All the 
 difficulty, therefore, which has been felt 
 by commentators in this passage, may 
 be obviated by supposing that Paul 
 here speaks of this testimonial or epis- 
 tle as addressed to himself, and as sa- 
 tisfactory to him. In the other charac- 
 teristics which he enumerates, he speaks 
 of it, as fitted to be a letter commenda- 
 tory of himself to others. T Known 
 and read of all men. Corinth was a 
 large, splendid, and dissipated city. 
 Their conversion, therefore, would be 
 known afar. All men would hear of 
 it ; and their reformation, their subse- 
 quent life under the instruction of Paul, 
 and the attestation which God had given 
 among them to his labours, was a suffi- 
 cient testimonial to the world at large, 
 that God had called him to the apostolic 
 office. 
 
 3. Forasmuch as ye are manifestly 
 declared. You are made manifest as 
 the epistle of Christ ; or you, being made 
 manifest, are the epistle, &c. They had 
 been made manifest to be such by their 
 conversion. The sense is, it is plain, 
 or evident, that ye are the epistle of 
 Christ. 1 To be the epistle of Christ. 
 That which Christ has sent to be our 
 testimonial. He has given this letter 
 of recommendation. He has converted 
 you by our ministry, and that is the 
 best evidence which we can have that 
 we have been sent by him, and that our 
 labour is accepted by him. Your con- 
 version is his work, and it is his public 
 attestation to our fidelity in his cause. 
 If Ministered by us. The idea here is, 
 that Christ had employed their ministry 
 in accomplishing this. They were 
 Christ's letter, but it had been prepared 
 by the instrumentality of the apostles. 
 It had not been prepared by him inde- 
 pendently of their labours, but in con- 
 nexion with, and as the result of those 
 labours. Christ, in writing this epistle, I 
 so to speak, has used our aid ; or em- j 
 
 festly declared to be the epistle of 
 Christ ministered by us, written 
 not with ink, but with the Spirit 
 
 ployed us as amanuenses, f Written 
 not with ink. Paul continues and va- 
 ries the image in regard to this " epistle," 
 so that he may make the testimony 
 borne to his fidelity and success more 
 striking and emphatic. He says, there- 
 fore, that it was not written as letters of 
 introduction are, with ink — by traces 
 drawn on a lifeless substance, and in 
 lines that easily fade, or that may be- 
 come easily illegible, or that can be 
 read only by a few, or that may be soon 
 destroyed. ^ But with the Spirit of 
 the living God. In strong contrast 
 thus with letters written with ink. By 
 the Spirit of God moving on the heart, 
 and producing that variety of graces 
 which constitute so striking and so 
 beautiful an evidence of your conver- 
 sion. If written by the Spirit of the 
 living God, it was far more valuable, 
 and precious, and permanent than any 
 record which could be made by ink. 
 Every trace of the Spirit's influences on 
 the heart was an undoubted proof that 
 God had sent the apostles ; and was a 
 proof which they would much more 
 sensibly and tenderly feel than they 
 could any letter of recommendation 
 written in ink. ^ Not in tables of stone. 
 It is generally admitted that Paul here 
 refers to the evidences of the divine mis- 
 sion of Moses which was given by the 
 law engraven on tablets of stone. Comp. 
 ver. 7. Probably those who were false 
 teachers among the Corinthians were 
 Jews, and had insisted much on the 
 divine origin and permanency of the 
 Mosaic institutions. The law had 
 been engraven on stone by the hand of 
 God himself; and had thus the strongest 
 proofs of divine origin, and the divine 
 attestation to its pure and holy nature. 
 To this fact the friends of the law, and 
 the advocates for the permanency of 
 the Jewish institutions, would appeal. 
 Paul says, on the other hand, that the 
 testimonials of the divine favour through 
 him were not on tablets of stone. 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 53 
 
 of the living God ; not in tables 
 of stone, a but h in fleshly tables 
 of the heart. 
 
 a Ex. 24. 12. b Je. 31. 33. Eze. 11. 19. 
 
 They were frail, and easily broken. 
 There was no life in them (comp. ver. 
 6 and 7) ; and valuable and important 
 as they were, yet they could not be 
 compared with the testimonials which 
 God had given to those who successfully 
 preached the gospel, f But in jletUy 
 tables of the heart. In truths engraven 
 on the heart. This testimonial was of 
 more value than an inscription on stone, 
 because, (1.) No hand but that of God 
 could reach the heart, and inscribe these 
 truths there. (2.) Because it would be 
 attended with a life-giving and living 
 influence. It was not a mere dead 
 letter. (3.) Because it would be per- 
 manent. Stones, even where laws were 
 engraven by the finger of God, would 
 moulder and decay, and the inscription 
 made there would be destroyed. But 
 not so with that which was made on 
 the heart. It would live forever. It 
 would abide in other worlds. It would 
 send its influence into all the relations 
 of life ; into all future scenes in this 
 world; and that influence would be 
 seen and felt in the world that shall 
 never end. By all these considerations, 
 therefore, the testimonials which Paul 
 had of the divine approbation were more 
 valuable than any mere letters of intro- 
 duction, or human commendation could 
 have been ; and more valuable even 
 than the attestation which was given to 
 the divine mission of Moses himself. 
 
 4. And such trust have we. Such 
 confidence have we that we are ap- 
 pointed by God, and that he accepts our 
 work. Such evidence have we in the 
 success of our labours ; such irrefragable 
 proof that God blesses us; that we have 
 trust, or confidence that we are sent by 
 God, and are owned by him in our mi- 
 nistry. His confidence did not rest on 
 letters of introduction from men, but in 
 the evidence of the divine presence, and 
 the divine acceptance of his work. 
 ^ Through Christ. By the agency of 
 5* 
 
 4 And such trust have we 
 through Christ to God-ward : 
 
 5 Not that we are sufficient 
 
 Christ. Paul had no success whicr be 
 did not trace to him ; he had no joy of 
 which he was not the source ; he had 
 no confidence, or trust in God of which 
 Christ was not the author; he had no 
 hope of success in his ministry which 
 did not depend on him. % To God- 
 ward. Toward God ; in regard to God 
 (?rgc$ rov Qiov). Our confidence relates 
 to God. It is confidence that he has ap- 
 pointed us, and sent us forth ; and con- 
 fidence that he will still continue to own 
 and to bless us. 
 
 5. Not that we are sufficient of our- 
 selves. This is evidently designed to 
 guard against the appearance of boast- 
 ing, or of self-confidence. He had 
 spoken of his confidence ; of his tri- 
 umph ; of his success ; of his undoubt- 
 ed evidence that God had sent him. 
 He here says, that he did not mean to 
 be understood as affirming that any of 
 his success came from himself, or that 
 he was able by his own strength to 
 accomplish the great things which had 
 been effected by his ministry. He well 
 knew that he had no such self-sufficiency; 
 and he would not insinuate, in the 
 slightest manner, that he believed him- 
 self to be invested with any such power. 
 Comp. Note on John xv. 5. f To 
 think any thing (KciyitrxxrS-ni n). The 
 word here used means properly to rea- 
 son, think, consider ; and then to reckon, 
 count to, or impute to any one. It is 
 the word which is commonly rendered 
 impute. See it explained more fully 
 in the Note on Rom. iv. 5. Robinsor. 
 (Lexicon) renders it in this place, " tf 
 reason out, to think out, to find out \ry 
 thinking." Doddridge renders it, " to 
 reckon upon any thing as from our- 
 selves." Whitby renders it, " to reason ;" 
 as if the apostle had said, We are un- 
 able by any reasoning of our own to 
 bring men to conversion. Macknight 
 gives a similar sense. Locke renders it, 
 " Not as if I were sufficient of myself, 
 
54 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 of a ourselves to think any thing, 
 as of ourselves, but b our suffi- 
 ciency is of God ; 
 
 oJno. 15. 5. 6 1 Co. 15.10. Ph. 2.13. 
 
 6 Who also hath made us 
 able a ministers of the New * 
 
 a Ep. 3. 7. 1 Ti. 1. 12. 
 
 b Mat. 26. 28. He. 8. 6—10. 
 
 to reckon upon any thing as from my- 
 self;" and explains it to mean that Paul 
 was not sufficient of himself by any 
 strength of natural parts to attain the 
 knowledge of the gospel truths which 
 he preached. The word may be ren- 
 dered here, to reckon, reason, think, &c; 
 but it should be confined to the imme- 
 diate subject under consideration. It 
 does not refer to thinking in general ; or 
 to the power of thought on any, and on 
 all subjects — however true it may be in 
 itself — but to the preaching the gospel. 
 And the expression may be regarded as 
 referring to the following points, which 
 are immediately under discussion. (1.) 
 Paul did not feel that he was sufficient 
 of himself to have reasoned or thought 
 out the truths of the gospel. They 
 were communicated by God. (2.) He 
 had no power by reasoning to convince 
 or convert sinners. That was all of 
 God. (3.) He had no right to reckon 
 on success by any strength of his own. 
 All success was to be traced to God. 
 It is, however, also true, that all our 
 powers of thinking and reasoning are 
 from God ; and that we have no ability 
 to think clearly, to reason calmly, close- 
 ly, and correctly, unless he shall preside 
 over our minds and give us clearness of 
 thought. How easy is it for God to 
 disarrange all our faculties, and produce 
 insanity ! How easy to suffer our 
 minds to become unsettled, bewildered, 
 and distracted with a multiplicity of 
 thoughts ! How easy to cause every 
 thing to appear cloudy, and dark, and 
 misty ! How easy to affect our bodies 
 with weakness, languor, disease, and 
 through them to destroy all power of 
 close and consecutive thought ! No one 
 who considers on how many things 
 the power of close thinking depends, 
 can doubt that all our sufficiency in 
 this is from God; and that we owe to 
 him every clear idea on the subjects of 
 common life, and on scientific subjects, 
 no less certainly than we do in the. 
 
 truths of religion. Comp. the case of 
 Bezaleel and Aholiab in common arts. 
 Ex. xxxi. 1 — 6, and Job xxxii. 8. 
 
 6. W7io also hath made us able mi- 
 nisters, &c. This translation does not 
 quite meet the force of the original. It 
 would seem to imply that Paul regarded 
 himself and his fellow-labourers as men 
 of talents, and of signal ability ; and that 
 he was inclined to boast of it. But this is 
 not the meaning. It refers properly to 
 his sense of the responsibility and dif- 
 ficulty of the work of the ministry ; and 
 to the fact that he did not esteem him- 
 self to be sufficient for this work in his 
 own strength (ch. ii. 16; iii. 5) ; and he 
 here says that God had made him suffi- 
 cient : not able, talented, learned, but 
 sufficient (iitdvcixrtv »/uuc) ; he has sup- 
 plied our deficiency ; he has rendered us 
 competent, or fit ; — if a word ma} r be 
 coined after the manner of the Greek 
 here, 'he has sufficienced us for this 
 work.' There is no assertion, therefore, 
 here, that they were men of talents, or 
 peculiar ability, but only that God had 
 qualified them for their work, and made 
 them by his grace sufficient to meet 
 the toils and responsibilities of this 
 arduous office. ^ Of the New Testa- 
 ment. Of the new covenant (Note, 
 Matt. xxv. 28), in contradistinction 
 from the old covenant, which was es- 
 tablished through Moses. They were 
 appointed to go forth and make the pro- 
 visions of that new covenant known to 
 a dying uorld. T Not of the letter 
 Not of the literal, or verbal meaning, in 
 contradistinction from the Spirit. See 
 Notes on Rom. ii. 27, 29 ; vii. 6. This 
 is said, doubtless, in opposition to the 
 Jews, and Jewish teachers. They 
 insisted much on the letter of the law, 
 but entered little into its real meaning. 
 They did not seek out the true spiritual 
 sense of the Old Testament; and hence 
 they rested on the mere literal observ- 
 ance of the rites and ceremonies of reli- 
 gion, without understanding their true 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 55 
 
 Testament ; not of the letter, ° 
 but of the spirit : for the b letter 
 killeth, but c the spirit * giveth 
 life. 
 
 a Ro. 2. 28, 29. b Ro. 4. 15. 7. 9, 10. 
 c Jno. 6. 63. Ro. 8. 2. » ot, quickeneth. 
 
 nature and design. Their service, 
 though in many respects conformed to 
 the letter of the law, yet became cold, 
 formal, and hypocritical ; abounding in 
 mere ceremonies, and where the heart 
 had little to do. Hence there was little 
 pure spiritual worship offered to God ; 
 and hence also they rejected the Mes- 
 siah whom the old covenant prefi- 
 gured, and was designed to set forth. 
 t For the letter killeth. Comp. Notes 
 on Rom. iv. 15 ; vii. 9, 10. The mere 
 letter of the law of Moses. The effect 
 of it was merely to produce condemna- 
 tion ; to produce a sense of guilt, and 
 danger, and not to produce pardon, re- 
 lief, and joy. The law denounced 
 death; condemned sin in all forms; 
 and the effect of it was to produce a 
 sense of guilt and condemnation. 
 1 But the spirit giveth life. The 
 spirit, in contradistinction from the 
 mere literal interpretation of the Scrip- 
 tures. The Spirit, that is, Christ, says 
 Locke. Comp. ver. 17. The spirit 
 here means, says Bloomfield, that new 
 spiritual system, the gospel. The 
 spirit of God speaking in us, says Dod- 
 dridge. The spirit here seems to refer 
 to the New Testament, or the new dis- 
 pensation in contradistinction from the 
 old. That was characterized mainly 
 by its strictness of law, and by its bur- 
 densome rites, and by the severe tone 
 of its denunciation for sin. It did not 
 in itself provide a way of pardon and 
 peace. Law condemns ; it does not 
 speak of forgiveness. On the contrary, 
 the gospel, a spiritual system, is de- 
 signed to impart life and comfort to the 
 soul. It speaks peace. It comes not to 
 condemn, but to save. It discloses a 
 way of mercy, and it invites all to par- 
 take and live. It is called " spirit," 
 probably because its consolations are 
 imparted and secured by the Spirit of 
 
 7 But if the ministration of 
 death, written and engraven in 
 stones, was glorious, so that the 
 children of Israel could not 
 stedfastly behold the face of 
 
 God — the source of all true life to the 
 soul. It is the dispensation of the Spirit ; 
 and it demands a spiritual service — a 
 service that is free, and elevated, and 
 tending eminently to purify the heart, 
 and to save the soul. See Note on ver. 
 17. 
 
 7. But if the ministration of death. 
 In the previous verses, Paul had referred 
 incidentally to the institutions of Moses, 
 and to the superiority of the gospel. 
 He had said that the former were en- 
 graven on stones, but the latter on the 
 heart (ver. 3) ; that the letter of the 
 former tended to death, but the latter to 
 life (ver. 6). This sentiment he pro- 
 ceeds further to illustrate, by showing 
 in what the superior glory of the gos- 
 pel consisted. The design of the whole 
 is, to illustrate the nature, and to show 
 the importance of the ministerial office ; 
 and the manner in which the duties of 
 that office were to be performed. That 
 the phrase " ministration of death" re- 
 fers to the Mosaic institutions, the con- 
 nexion sufficiently indicates, ver. 13 
 — 15. The word "ministration" 
 (StmtovU) means, properly, ministry; 
 the office of ministering in divine 
 things. It is usually applied to the 
 officers of the church in the New Tes- 
 tament. Acts i. 17. 25. Rom. xi. 13. 
 1 Cor. xii. 5. The word here, however, 
 seems to refer to the whole arrangement 
 under the Mosaic economy, by which 
 his laws were promulgated, and per- 
 petuated. The expression " a minis- 
 tration — written and engraven on 
 stone," is somewhat harsh; but the 
 sense evidently is, the ministration of a 
 covenant, or of laws written on stones. 
 The word "ministration" there refers 
 to the arrangement, office, &c. by which 
 the knowledge of these laws was main- 
 tained; the ministering under a sys- 
 tem like that of the Jewish ; or, more 
 
56 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 
 Moses for a the glory of his 
 
 o Ex. 34. 1, 29—35. 
 
 strictly, the act and occasion on which 
 Moses himself ministered, or promul- 
 gated that system to the Jews, and 
 when the glory of the work was 
 irradiated even from his countenance. 
 And the purpose of the apostle is to 
 show that the ministry of the gospel is 
 more glorious than even the ministry of 
 Moses, when he was admitted near to 
 God on the holy mount; and when 
 such a glory attended his receiving and 
 promulgating the law. It is called the 
 " ministration of death," because it 
 tended to condemnation ; it did not 
 speak of pardon ; it was fitted only to 
 deepen the sense of sin, and to produce 
 alarm and dread. See Note on ver. 
 6. 1 Written and engraven in stones. 
 The ten commandments — the substance 
 of all the Mosaic institutes, and the 
 principal laws of his economy— were 
 written, or engraven on tables of stone. 
 ^ Was glorious. Was attended with 
 magnificence and splendour. The glory 
 here referred to, consisted in the cir- 
 cumstance of sublimity and grandeur in 
 which the law of Moses was given. It 
 was, (1.) The glory of God as he was 
 manifested on Mount Sinai, as the Law- 
 giver and Ruler of the people. (2.) 
 The glory of the attending circum- 
 stances, of thunder, fire, &c. in which 
 God appeared. The law was given in 
 these circumstances. Its giving — 
 called here the "ministration" — was 
 amidst such displays of the glory of 
 God. It was, (3.) A high honour and 
 glory for Moses to be permitted to ap- 
 proach so near to God; to commune 
 with him ; and to receive at his hand 
 the law for his people, and for the 
 world. These were circumstances of 
 imposing majesty and grandeur, which, 
 however, Paul says were eclipsed and 
 surpassed by the ministry of the gospel. 
 ^ So that the children of Israel, &c. 
 In Ex. xxxiv. 29, 30, it is said, that 
 " When Moses came down from Mount 
 Sinai with the two tables of testimony 
 in Moses' hand, when he came down 
 
 countenance ; which glory was 
 to be done away ; 
 
 from the mount, that Moses wist not 
 that the skin of his face shone, while 
 He talked with him. And when Aaron 
 and all the children of Israel saw Moses, 
 behold, the skin of his face shone ; and 
 they were afraid to come nigh him." 
 The word rendered " stedfastly behold" 
 (ar&/i<rcu), means" to gaze intently 
 upon; to look steadily, or constantly, 
 or fixedly. See Note on Acts i. 10. 
 There was a dazzling splendour, an ir- 
 radiation ; a diffusion of light, such that 
 they could not look intently and steadily 
 upon it — as we cannot look steadily at 
 the sun. How this was produced, is 
 not known. It cannot be accounted 
 for from natural causes, and was doubt- 
 less designed to be to the Israelites an 
 attestation that Moses had been with 
 God, and was commissioned by him. 
 They would see, (1.) That it was un- 
 natural, such as no known cause could 
 produce; and, (2.) Not improbably 
 they would recognise a resemblance to 
 the manner in which God usually ap- 
 peared — the glory of the Shechinah in 
 which he so frequently manifested him- 
 self to them. It would be to them, there- 
 fore, a demonstration that Moses had 
 been with God. ^ Which glory was to 
 be done away. The splendour of that 
 scene was transitory. It did not last. It 
 was soon destroyed (t«v x.i.rdLgyw/ji.ivw}. 
 It was not adapted or designed long to 
 continue. This does not mean, as Dod- 
 dridge supposes, " soon to be abolished 
 in death ;" or, as others, " ceasing with 
 youth ;" but it means, that the shining 
 or the splendour was transitory ; it was 
 soon to cease ; it was not designed to 
 be permanent. Neither the wonderful 
 scenes accompanying the giving of the 
 law on Sinai, nor the shining on the 
 countenance of Moses, was designed to 
 abide. The thunders of Sinai would 
 cease to roll ; the lightnings to play ; 
 the visible manifestations of the presence 
 of God would all be gone; and the 
 supernatural illumination of the face of 
 Moses also would soon cease — perhaps, 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 57 
 
 8 How shall not the ministra- 
 tion of the Spirit be rather glo- 
 
 ss Macknight, Bloomfield, and others 
 suppose, as a prefiguration of the abro- 
 gation of the glory of the whole system 
 of the Levitical law. Paul certainly 
 means to say, that the glory of Moses, 
 and of his dispensation, was a fading 
 glory ; but that the glory of the gospel 
 would be permanent, and increasing 
 forever. 
 
 8. How shall not the ministration 
 of the Spirit. This is an argument 
 from the less to the greater. Several 
 things in it are worthy of notice. (1.) 
 The proper contrast to the " ministra- 
 tion of death" (ver. 7), would have been 
 ' ministration of life.' But Paul chose 
 rather to call it the • ministration of the 
 Spirit ;' as the source of life ; or as con- 
 ferring higher dignity on the gospel 
 than to have called it simply the minis- 
 tration of life. (2.) By the " Spirit" 
 here is manifestly meant the Holy 
 Spirit; and the whole phrase denotes 
 the gospel, or the preaching of the gos- 
 pel, by which eminently the Holy 
 Spirit is imparted. (3.) It is the high 
 honour of the gospel ministry, that it is 
 the means by which the Holy Spirit is 
 imparted to men. It is designed to se- 
 cure the salvation of men by his 
 agency ; and it is through the ministry 
 that the Holy Spirit is imparted, the 
 heart renewed, and the soul saved. 
 Th,e work of the ministry is, therefore, 
 the most important and honourable in 
 which man can engage, t Be rather 
 glorious. (1.) Because that of Moses 
 tended to death ; this to life. (2.) Be- 
 cause that was engraven on stone ; this 
 is engraved on the heart. (3.) Be- 
 cause that was the mere giving of a 
 law j this is connected with the renovat- 
 ing influences of the Holy Spirit. (4.) 
 Because that was soon to pass away. 
 All the magnificence of the scene was 
 soon to vanish. But this is to remain. 
 Its influence and effect are to be ever- 
 lasting. It is to stretch into eternity ; 
 and its main glory is to be witnessed in 
 
 9 For if the ministration 
 of condemnation be glory, 
 much more doth the ministration 
 
 souls renewed and saved ; and amidst 
 the splendours of heaven. " The work 
 of the Spirit of God on the heart of a 
 rational being, is much more important 
 than any dead characters which can be 
 engraved on insensible stones." — Dod- 
 dridge. 
 
 9. For if the ministration of condem- 
 nation. Of Moses in giving the law, 
 the effect of which is to produce con- 
 demnation. — Law condemns the guilty ; 
 it does not save them. It denounces 
 punishment; it contains no provisions 
 of pardon. To pardon is to depart 
 from the law ; and must be done under 
 the operation of another system — since 
 a law which contains a provision for the 
 pardon of offenders, and permits them 
 to escape, would be a burlesque in 
 legislation. The tendency of the Mo- 
 saic institutions, therefore, was to pro- 
 duce a sense of condemnation. And 
 so it will be found by all who attempt 
 to be justified by the law. It will tend 
 to, and result in, their condemnation. 
 t Be glory. Be glorious ; or be glory 
 itself. — It was glorious as a manifesta- 
 tion of the holiness and justice of God ; 
 and glorious in the attending circum- 
 stances. No event in our world has 
 been more magnificent in the circum- 
 stances of external majesty and splen 
 dour than the giving of the law on 
 Mount Sinai, f The ministration of 
 righteousness. The gospel ; the pro- 
 mulgation of the plan of mercy. It is 
 called " the ministration of righteous- 
 ness," in contradistinction from the law 
 of Moses, which was a " ministration 
 of condemnation." The word " right- 
 eousness," however, does not exactly 
 express the force of the original word. 
 That word is tauuo&fac, and it stands 
 directly opposed to the word xa/r*- 
 jc£/3-8&>?, condemnation. It should be 
 rendered 'the ministration of justifica- 
 tion /' the plan by which God justifies 
 men. See Note, Rom, i. 17. The law 
 of Moses condemns; the gospel is the 
 
58 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 of righteousness exceed in 
 glory. 
 
 10 For even that which was 
 made glorious had no glory in 
 
 plan by which man is justified. And 
 if that which condemns could be glo- 
 rious, much more must that be by which 
 men can be justified, acquitted, and 
 saved. The superior glory of the gos- 
 pel, therefore, consists in the fact that 
 it is a scheme to justify and save lost 
 sinners. And this glory consists, (1.) 
 In the fad that it can be done when all 
 law condemns. (2.) In the showing 
 forth of the divine character while it is 
 done, as just, and merciful, and bene- 
 volent in doing it — blending all his 
 great and glorious attributes together — 
 while the law disclosed only one of his 
 attributes — his justice. (3.) In the 
 manner in which it is done. It is by 
 the incarnation of the Son of God — a 
 far more glorious manifestation of deity 
 than was made on Mount Sinai. It 
 is by the toils, and sufferings, and death 
 of him who made the atonement, and 
 by the circumstances of awful and im- 
 posing grandeur which attended his 
 death, when the sun was darkened, and 
 the rocks were rent — far more grand and 
 awful scenes than occurred when the 
 law was given. It is by the resurrec- 
 tion, and ascension of the Redeemer — 
 scenes far more sublime than all the ex- 
 ternal glories of Sinai when the law 
 was given. (4.) In the effects, or re- 
 sults. The one condemns; the other 
 justifies and saves. The effect of the 
 one is seen in the convictions of con- 
 science, in alarm, in a sense of guilt, 
 in the conscious desert of condemnation, 
 and in the apprehension of eternal pun- 
 ishment. The other is seen in sins 
 forgiven ; in peace of conscience ; in the 
 joy of pardon ; in the hope of heaven ; 
 in comfort and triumph on the bed of 
 death, and amidst the glories of heaven. 
 1<0, For even that which was made 
 glorious {to StS-.^ntr/jLivtv). That was 
 splendid, excellent, or glorious. This 
 refers doubtless, to the laws and insti- 
 tutions of Moses, especially to the »ri- 
 
 this respect, by reason of the 
 glory that excelleth. 
 
 1 1 For if a that which is done 
 
 a Ro. 5. 20, 21. 
 
 mary giving of the law. Paul does not 
 deny that it had an honour and majesty 
 such, in some respects, as the Jews 
 claimed for it. It was glorious in the 
 manner in which it was given ; it was 
 glorious in the purity of the law itself; 
 and it was glorious, or splendid in the 
 magnificent and imposing ritual in 
 which the worship of God was cele- 
 brated. But all this was surpassed in 
 the brighter glory of the gospel, t Had 
 no glory. Gr. Was not glorious, or 
 splendid {chit Stfo^sLcrrsu). Had com- 
 paratively no glory, or splendour. Its 
 glory was all eclipsed. It was like the 
 splendour of the moon and stars com- 
 pared with the bright light of the sun. 
 1 By reason of the glory that excelleth. 
 In the gospel ; in the incarnation, life, 
 sufferings, death, and resurrection of 
 the Lord Jesus ; in the pardon of sin ; 
 in the peace and joy of the believer ; and 
 in the glories of the heavenly world to 
 which the gospel elevates dying men. 
 
 1 1. For if that which is done away, 
 &c. The splendour that attended the 
 giving of the law ; the bright shining 
 of the face of Moses; and the ritual 
 institutions of his religion. It was to be 
 done away. It was never designed to 
 be permanent. Every thing in it had 
 a transient existence, and was so de- 
 signed. Yet it was attended, P^ul 
 admits, with much that was magnifi- 
 cent and splendid. He had, in the pre- 
 vious verses, stated several important 
 differences between the law and the 
 gospel. He here states another. The 
 law he calls (to x.a.ra.gy,v[jLiv<.v) the thing 
 which was to be made to cease , to be 
 put an end to ; to be done away with ; 
 to be abolished. It had no permanency ; 
 and it was designed to have none. Ita 
 glory, therefore, great as in many 
 respects it might be, could not be com- 
 pared with that which was to be per- 
 manent — as the light of the stars fades 
 away at the rising sun. It is implied 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 59 
 
 away was glorious, much more 
 that which remaineth is glorious. 
 
 here, that it was originally designed 
 that the Mosaic institutions should not 
 be permanent; that they should be 
 mere shadows and types of better 
 things ; and that when the things 
 which they adumbrated should appear, 
 the shadows would vanish of course. 
 This idea is one which prevails every- 
 where in the New Testament, and 
 which the sacred writers are often at 
 great pains to demonstrate, f Was 
 glorious. Gr. By glory (Jtaiofys). That 
 is, it was attended by glory ; it was in- 
 troduced by glory, it was encompassed 
 with glory when it was established. 
 The idea here is, not that it was glori- 
 ous in itself, but that it was accom- 
 panied with splendour and majesty. 
 Tf That which remaineth. The gos- 
 pel (to fxivw). The thing that is to re- 
 main ; that is permanent, abiding, per- 
 petual ; that has no principle of decay, 
 and whose characteristic it is, that it is 
 everlasting. The gospel is permanent, 
 or abiding, (1.) Because it is designed 
 to remain immutable through the re- 
 motest ages. It is not to be superseded 
 by any new economy, or institution. 
 It is the dispensation under which the 
 affairs of the world are to be wound 
 up, and under which the world is to 
 close. See Note, 1 Cor. xv. 51. (2.) 
 Its effects on the heart are permanent. 
 It is complete in itself. It is not to be 
 succeeded by any other system, and it 
 looks to no other system in order to 
 complete or perfect its operations on 
 the soul. (3.) Its effects are to abide 
 forever. They will exist in heaven. 
 They are to be seen in the soul that 
 shall be recovered from sin, and that 
 shall be glorious in the bosom of God 
 forever and ever. The Mosaic system 
 — glorious as it was — shall be remem- 
 bered as introducing the gospel; the 
 gospel shall be remembered as directly 
 fitting for heaven. Its most great and 
 glorious results shall be seen in the 
 permanent and eternal joys of heaven. 
 The gospel contemplates a great, per- 
 
 12 Seeing then that we have 
 
 manent, and eternal good, adapted to 
 all ages, all climes, all people, and all 
 worlds. It is, therefore, so much more 
 glorious than the limited, temporary, 
 and partial good of the Mosaic system, 
 that that may be said in comparison to 
 have had no glory. 
 
 12. Seeing then that we have such 
 hope. Hope properly is a compound 
 emotion, made up of a desire for an 
 object, and an expectation of obtaining 
 it. If there is no desire for it ; or if 
 the object is not pleasant and agreeable, 
 there is no hope, though there may be 
 expectation — as in the expectation of 
 the pestilence, of famine, or sickness, 
 or death. If there is no expectation of 
 it, but a strong desire, there is no hope, 
 as in cases where there is a strong de- 
 sire of wealth, or fame, or pleasure ; or 
 where a man is condemned for murder, 
 and has a strong desire but no prospect 
 of pardon ; or where a man is ship- 
 wrecked, and has a strong desire, but 
 no expectation of again seeing his fa- 
 mily and friends. In such cases, de- 
 spondency or despair are the results. It 
 is the union of the two feelings in pro- 
 per proportions which constitutes hope. 
 There has been considerable variety of 
 views among expositors in regard to 
 the proper meaning of the word in this 
 place. Mr. Locke supposes that Paul 
 here means the honourable employment 
 of an apostle and minister of the gospel, 
 or the glory belonging to the ministry 
 in the gospel ; and that his calling it 
 " hope" instead of " glory" which the 
 connexion would seem to demand, is 
 the language of modesty. Rosenmuller 
 understands it of the hope of the per- 
 petual continuance of the gospel dis- 
 pensation. Macknight renders it " per- 
 suasion," and explains it as meaning the 
 full persuasion or assurance that the 
 gospel excels the law in the manner ot 
 its introduction ^ its permanency, &c 
 A few remarks may, perhaps, make it 
 clear, (l.) It refers primarily to Paui, 
 and the other ministers of the gospel. 
 
60 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 such hope, we use great ' plain- 
 ness of speech : 
 
 or, boldness. 
 
 It is not properly the Christian hope as 
 such to which he refers, but it is that 
 which the ministers of the gospel had. 
 (2.) It refers to all that he had said be- 
 fore about the superiority of the gospel 
 to the law ; and is designed to express 
 the result of all that on his mind, and 
 on the minds of his fellow-labourers. 
 (3.) It refers to theprospect, confidence, 
 persuasion, anticipation which he had 
 as the effect of what he had just said. 
 It is the prospect of eternal life ; the 
 clear expectation of acceptance, and the 
 anticipation of heaven, based on the 
 fact that this was a ministry of the 
 Spirit (ver. 8) ; that it was a ministry 
 showing the way of justification (ver. 
 9) ; and that it was never to be done 
 away, but to abide forever, ver. 11. 
 On all these this strong hope was 
 founded ; and in view of these, Paul 
 expressed himself clearly, not enig- 
 matically ; and not in types and figures, 
 as Moses did. Every thing about the 
 gospel was clear and plain; and this 
 led to the confident expectation and 
 assurance of heaven. The word hope, 
 therefore, in this place will express the 
 effect on the mind of Paul in regard to 
 the work of the ministry, produced by 
 the group of considerations which he 
 had suggested, showing that the gospel 
 was superior to the law ; and that it 
 was the ground of more clear and cer- 
 tain confidence and hope than any 
 thing which the law could furnish. 
 ^ We use. We employ ; we are ac- 
 customed to. He refers to the manner 
 in which he preached the gospel. 
 1 Great plainness of speech. Marg. 
 boldness. We use the word "plain- 
 ness" as applied to speech chiefly in two 
 senses, (1.) To denote boldness, faithful- 
 ness, candour; in opposition to trimming, 
 timidity, and unfaithfulness ; and, (2.) 
 To denote clearness, intelligibleness, and 
 simplicity, in opposition to obscurity, 
 mist, and highly-wrought and laboured 
 forms of expression. The connexion 
 here shows that the latter is the sense 
 
 13 And not as Moses, which 
 put a vail over his face, that the 
 
 in which the phrase here is to be un- 
 derstood. See ver. 13. It denotes 
 openness, simplicity, freedom from the 
 obscurity which arises from enigmatical, 
 and parabolical, and typical modes of 
 speaking. This stands in opposition to 
 figure, metaphor, and allegory — to an 
 affected and laboured concealment of 
 the idea in the manner which was com- 
 mon among the Jewish doctors and 
 heathen philosophers, where their mean- 
 ing was carefully concealed from the 
 vulgar, and from all except the iniliated. 
 It stands opposed also to the necessary 
 obscurity arising from typical institu- 
 tions like those of Moses. And the 
 doctrine of the passage is, that such is 
 the clearness and fulness of the Chris- 
 tian revelation, arising from the fact, 
 that it is the last economy, and that it 
 does not look to the future, that its mi- 
 nisters may and should use clear and 
 intelligible language. They should not 
 use language abounding in metaphoi 
 and allegory. They should not usi 
 unusual terms. They should not draw 
 their words and illustrations from sci 
 ence. They should not use mere 
 technical language. They should not 
 attempt to vail, or cloak their meaning. 
 They should not seek a refined and 
 overwrought style. They should use 
 expressions which other men use ; and 
 express themselves as far as possible in 
 the language of common life. What 
 is preaching worth that is not under- 
 stood ] Why should a man talk at all 
 unless he is intelligible] Who was 
 ever more plain and simple in his words 
 and illustrations than the Lord Jesus 1 
 13. And not as Moses. Our conduct 
 is not like that of Moses. We make 
 no attempt to conceal any thing in re- 
 gard to the nature, design, and duration 
 of the gospel. We leave nothing de- 
 signedly in mystery. If Which put a 
 vail over his face. That is, when he 
 came down from Mount Sinai, and 
 when his face shone. Ex. xxxiv. 33. 
 "And till Moses had done speaking 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 81 
 
 children of Israel could not 
 
 aRo. 10.4. 
 
 with them, he put a vail on his face." 
 This vail he put off when he went to 
 speak with God, but put on again when 
 he delivered his commands to the peo- 
 ple. What was the design of this, 
 Moses has not himself declared. The 
 statement which he makes in Exodus 
 would lead us to suppose that it was on 
 account of the exceeding brightness 
 and dazzling splendour which shone 
 around him, and which made it difficult 
 to look intently upon him; and that 
 this was in part the reason, even Paul 
 himself seems to intimate in ver. 7. 
 He, however, in this verse intimates that 
 there was another design, which was 
 that he might be, as Doddridge ex- 
 presses it, "a kind of type and figure 
 of his own dispensation." ^ That the 
 children of Israel. Mr. Locke under- 
 stands this of the apostles, and supposes 
 that it means, " We do not vail the 
 light, so that the obscurity of what we 
 deliver should hinder the children of 
 Israel from seeing in the law which 
 was to be done away, Christ who is 
 the end of the law." But this interpre- 
 tation is forced and unnatural. The 
 phrase rendered "that" (7x^3? to) evi- 
 dently connects what is affirmed here 
 <vith the statement about Moses ; and 
 shows that the apostle means to say 
 that Moses put the vail on his face in 
 wder that the children of Israel should 
 not be able to see to the end of his in- 
 stitutions. That Moses had such a 
 design, and that the putting on of the 
 vail was emblematic of the nature of 
 \hs institutions, Paul here distinctly 
 affirms. No one can prove that this 
 was not his design ; and in a land and 
 time when types, and emblems, and al- 
 legorical modes of speech were much 
 used, it is highly probable that Moses 
 meant to intirftite that the end and full 
 purpose of his institutions were design- 
 edly concealed. If Could not stead- 
 fastly look. Could not gaze intently 
 upon (anviT&i). See Note on ver. 7. 
 They could not clearly discern it; there 
 
 stedfastly look to the end a of 
 that which is abolished : 
 
 was obscurity arising from the fact of 
 the designed concealment. He did not 
 intend that they should clearly see the 
 full purport, and design of the institu- 
 tions which he established, f To the 
 end (ik ro t£\o?). Unto the end, pur- 
 pose, design, or ultimate result of the 
 law which he established. A great 
 many different interpretations have been 
 proposed of this. The meaning seems 
 to me to be this: There was a glory 
 and splendour in that which the insti- 
 tutions of Moses typified, which the 
 children of Israel were not permitted 
 then to behold. There was a splendour 
 and lustre in the face of Moses, which 
 they could not gaze upon, and therefore 
 he put a vail over it to diminish its 
 intense brightness. In like manner 
 there was a glory and splendour in 
 the ultimate design and scope of his 
 institutions, in that to which they re- 
 ferred, which they were not then able, 
 i. e. prepared to look on, and the ex- 
 ceeding brightness of which he of de- 
 sign concealed. This was done by 
 obscure types and figures, that re- 
 sembled a vail thrown over a dazzling 
 and splendid object. The word " end," 
 then, I suppose, does not refer to termi- 
 nation, or close, but to the design, 
 scope, or purpose of the Mosaic institu- 
 tions ; to that which they were intend- 
 ed to introduce and adumbrate. That 
 end was the Messiah, and the glory of 
 his institutions. See Note on Rom. x. 
 " Christ is the end of the law." And 
 the meaning of Paul, I take to be, is, 
 that there was a splendour and a glory 
 in the gospel which the Mosaic institu- 
 tions were designed to typify, which was 
 so great that the children of Israel were 
 not fully prepared to see it, and that he 
 designedly threw over that glory the 
 vail of obscure types and figures ; as he 
 threw over his face a vail that partially 
 concealed its splendour. Thus inter- 
 preted there is a consistency in the en- 
 tire passage, and very great beauty. 
 Paul, in the following verses, proceeds 
 
63 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. CO 
 
 14 But their minds were 
 blinded : a for until this day re- 
 mained! the same vail untaken 
 
 a Ro. 11. 7, 8, 25. 
 
 to state that the vail to the view of the 
 Jews of his time was not removed ; that 
 th?y still looked to the obscure types 
 and institutions of the Mosaic law rather 
 than on the glory which they were de- 
 signed to adumbrate ; as if they should 
 choose to look on the vail on the face 
 of Moses rather than on the splendour 
 which it concealed. ^ Of that ivhich 
 is abolished. Or rather to be abolished 
 (tou x.'j.rct^ywy.tvcu') , whose nature, de- 
 sign, and intention it was that it should 
 be abolished. It was never designed to 
 be permanent; and Paul speaks of it 
 here as a thing that was known and in- 
 disputable that the Mosaic institutions 
 were designed to be abolished. 
 
 14. But their minds were blinded. 
 The word here used (pmctmi means 
 rather to harden; to make hard like 
 stone ; and then to make dull or stupid. 
 It is applied to the heart, in Mark vi. 52 ; 
 viii. 17 ; to persons, in Rom. xi. 7; and 
 to the eyes, in Job xvii. 7. Paul refers 
 here to the fact that the understandings 
 of the Jews were stupid, dull, and in- 
 sensible, so that they did not see clearly 
 the design and end of their own insti- 
 tutions. He states simply the fact ; he 
 does not refer to the cause of it. The 
 fact that the Jews were thus stupid and 
 dull is often affirmed in the New Tes- 
 tament. % For until this day, &c. 
 The sense of this is, that even to the 
 time when Paul wrote, it was a charac- 
 teristic of the great mass of the Jewish 
 people, that they did not understand the 
 true sense of their own Scriptures. 
 They did not understand its doctrines 
 in regard to the Messiah. A vail seems 
 to be thrown over the Old Testament 
 when they read it, as there was over 
 the face of Moses, so that the glory of 
 their own Scriptures is concealed from 
 their view, as the glory of the face of 
 Moses was hidden. ^ Of the Old Tes- 
 tament. Greek, " of the old covenant." i 
 See this word " testament," or covenant, | 
 
 away in the reading of the Old 
 Testament ; which vail is done 
 away in Christ. 
 
 15 But even unto this day, 
 
 explained in the Notes on 1 Cor. xi. 25. 
 This, I believe, is the only instance in 
 which the Scriptures of the Jews are 
 called the "Old Testament," or covenant, 
 in the Bible. It was, of course, not a 
 name which they used, or would use ; 
 but it is now with Christians the com- 
 mon appellation. No doubt can be en- 
 tertained but that Paul uses the terms 
 in the same manner in which we now 
 do, and refers to all the inspired writ- 
 ings of the Jews. 1 Which vail is done 
 away in Christ. In the manifestation, 
 or appearance of Jesus the Messiah, 
 the vail is removed. The obscurity 
 which rested on the prophecies and types 
 of the former dispensation is withdrawn ; 
 and as the face of Moses could have 
 been distinctly seen if the vail on his 
 face had been removed, so it is in regard 
 to the true meaning of the Old Testa- 
 ment by the coming of the Messiah. 
 What was obscure is now made clear ; 
 and the prophecies are so completely 
 fulfilled in him, that his coming has re- 
 moved the covering, and shed a clear 
 light over them all. Many of the pro- 
 phecies, for example, until the Messiah 
 actually appeared, appeared obscure, 
 and almost contradictory. Those which 
 spoke of him, for illustration, as man 
 and as God ; as suffering, and yet 
 reigning ; as dying, and yet as ever- 
 living ; as a mighty Prince, a conquer- 
 or, and a king, and yet as a man of 
 sorrows ; as humble, and yet glorious : 
 all seemed difficult to be reconciled until 
 they were seen to harmonize in Jesus 
 of Nazareth. Then they were plain, 
 and the vail was taken away. Christ 
 is seen to answer all the previous 
 descriptions of him in the Old Testa- 
 ment ; and his coming casts a clear 
 light on all which was before obscure. 
 
 1 5. But even unto this day. To the 
 time when Paul wrote this epistle, about 
 thirty years after Christ was put to 
 death. But it is still as true as it was 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER HI. 
 
 63 
 
 when Moses is read, the vail is 
 upon their heart. 
 
 1 6 Nevertheless, when it shall 
 
 in the time of Paul ; and the character 
 and conduct of the Jews now so entirely 
 accords with the description which he 
 gives of them in his time, as to show 
 that he drew from nature, and as to 
 constitute one of the strong incidental 
 proofs that the account in the New 
 Testament is true. Of no other people 
 on earth, probably, would a description 
 be accurate eighteen hundred years 
 after it was made. \ When Moses is 
 read. When the five books of Moses 
 are read, as they were regularly and 
 constantly in their synagogues. See 
 Note on Luke iv. 16. ^ The vail is 
 upon their heart. They do not see the 
 true meaning and beauty of their own 
 Scriptures — a description as applicable 
 to the Jews now as it was to those in 
 the time of Paul. 
 
 16. Nevertheless. This is not always 
 to continue. The time is coming when 
 they shall understand their own Scrip- 
 tures, and see their true beauty. 
 «f When it shall turn to the Lord. 
 When the Jewish people shall be con- 
 verted. The word "it" here refers un- 
 doubtedly to "Israel" in ver. 13; and 
 the sense is, that their blindness is not 
 always to remain ; there is to be a pe- 
 riod when they shall turn to God, and 
 shall understand his promises, and be- 
 come acquainted with the true nature 
 of their own religion. This subject the 
 apostle has discussed at much greater 
 length in the eleventh chapter of the 
 epistle to the Romans. See Notes on 
 that chapter, f The vail shall be taken 
 away. They shall then understand the 
 true meaning of the prophecies, and the 
 true nature of their own institutions. 
 They shall see that they refer to the 
 Lord Jesus, the incarnate Son of God, 
 and the true Messiah. The genuine 
 sense of their sacred oracles shall break 
 upon their view with full and irresist- 
 ible light There may be an allusion 
 in the language here to the declaration 
 
 turn to the Lord, the vail shall 
 be taken away. a 
 
 17 Now the Lord a is that 
 
 a Is. 25. 7. a 1 Co. 15. 45 
 
 in Isa. xxv. 7: "And he will destroy 
 in this mountain the face of the cover- 
 ing cast over all people, and the vail that 
 is spread over all nations." This verse 
 teaches, (1.) That the time will come 
 when the Jews shall be converted to 
 Christianity ; expressed here by their 
 turning unto the Lord, that is, the Lord 
 Jesus. See Note, Acts i. 24. (2.) It seems 
 to be implied that their conversion will be 
 a conversion of the people at large ; a 
 conversion that shall be nearly simulta- 
 neous ; a conversion en masse. Such a 
 conversion we have reason to anticipate 
 of the Jewish nation. (3.) The effect 
 of this will be to make them acquainted 
 with the true sense of their own Scrip- 
 tures, and the light, and beauty of the 
 sayings of their own prophets. Now 
 they are in deep darkness on the sub- 
 ject; then they will see how entirely 
 they meet and harmonize in the Lord 
 Jesus. (4.) The true and only way of 
 having a correct and full meaning of 
 the Bible is by turning unto God. 
 Love to him, and a disposition to do his 
 will, is the best means of interpreting 
 the Bible. 
 
 17. Now the Lord is that Spirit. 
 The word " Lord" here evidently refers 
 to the Lord Jesus. See ver. 16. It 
 may be observed in general in regard to 
 this word, that where it occurs in the 
 New Testament unless the connexion 
 require us to understand it of God, 
 it refers to the Lord Jesus. It was the 
 common name by which he was known. 
 See John xx. 13 ; xxi. 7. 12. Eph. iv. I. 
 5. The design of Paul in this verse 
 seems to be to account for the " liberty" 
 which he and the other apostles had, or 
 for the boldness, openness, and plain- 
 ness (ver. 12) which they evinced in 
 contradistinction from the Jews, who so 
 little understood the nature of their in- 
 stitutions. He had said (ver. 6), that 
 he was a minister " not of the letter, 
 but of the Spirit;" and he had stated 
 
61 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 
 
 60. 
 
 Spirit: and where the ° Spirit 
 of the Lord is, there it liberty. 
 
 a Ro. 8. 2. 
 
 that the Old Testament was not under- 
 stood by the Jews who adhered to the 
 literal interpretation of the Scriptures. 
 He here says, that the Lord Jesus was 
 " the Spirit" to which he referred, and 
 by which he was enabled to understand 
 the Old Testament so as to speak plain- 
 ly, and without obscurity. The sense 
 is, that Christ was the Spirit; i. e. the 
 sum, the substance of the Old Testa- 
 ment. The figures, types, prophecies, 
 &c. all centered in him, and he was the 
 end of all those institutions. If con- 
 templated as having reference to him, it 
 was easy to understand them. This I 
 take to be the sentiment of the passage, 
 though expositors have been greatly 
 divided in regard to its meaning. Thus 
 explained, it does not mean absolutely 
 and abstractly that the Lord Jesus was 
 " a Spirit," but that he was the sum, 
 the essence, the end, and the purport of 
 the Mosaic rites the spirit of which 
 Paul had spoken in ver. 6, as contra- 
 distinguished from the letter of the law. 
 K And where the Spirit of the Lord is, 
 there is liberty. This is a general truth 
 designed to illustrate the particular sen- 
 timent which he had just advanced. 
 The word "liberty" here (i\ivd-t^iu) 
 refers, I think, to freedom in speaking ; 
 the power of speaking openly, and 
 freely, as in ver. 12. It states the 
 general truth, that the effect of the 
 Spirit of God was to give light and 
 clearness of view ; to remove obscurity 
 from a subject, and to enable one to see 
 it plainly. This would be a truth that 
 could not be denied by the Jews, who 
 held to the doctrine that the Spirit of 
 God revealed truth, and it must be ad- 
 mitted by all. Under the influence of 
 that Spirit, therefore, Paul says, that he 
 was able to speak with openness, and 
 boldness; that he had a clear view of 
 truth, which the mass of the Jews had 
 not; and that the system of religion 
 which he preached was open, plain, and 
 clear. The word "freedom," would 
 
 18 But we all, with open 
 face beholding as in a glass a the 
 
 a 1 Co. 13. 12. 
 
 perhaps, better convey the idea. 'There 
 is freedom from the dark and obscure 
 views of the Jews ; freedom from their 
 prejudices, and their superstitions ; 
 freedom from the slavery and bondage 
 of sin ; the freedom of the children of 
 God, who have clear views of him as 
 their Father and Redeemer, and who 
 are enabled to express those views 
 openly and boldly to the world.' 
 
 18. But we all. All Christians. 
 The discussion in the chapter has re- 
 lated mainly to the apostles ; but this 
 declaration seems evidently to refer to 
 all Christians, as distinguished from the 
 Jews. Tf With open face. Comp. 
 Note on 1 Cor. xiii. 12. Tindal ren- 
 ders this, " and now the Lord's glory 
 appeareth in us all as in a glass." The 
 sense is, " with unvailed face," alluding 
 to the fact (ver. 13) that the face of 
 Moses was vailed, so that the children 
 of Israel could not steadfastly look on 
 it. In contradistinction from that, Paul 
 says that Christians are enabled to look 
 upon the glory of the Lord in the gos- 
 pel without a vail — without any obscure 
 intervening medium. 1 Beholding as 
 in a glass. On the word glass, and the 
 sense in which it is used in the New 
 Testament, see note on 1 Cor. xiii. 12. 
 The word here used (kxtottt^-, juiva) 
 has been very variously rendered. 
 Macknight renders it, "we all reflecting 
 as mirrors the glory of the Lord." 
 Doddridge, " beholding as by a glass." 
 Locke, "with open countenances as 
 mirrors, reflecting the glory of the 
 Lord." The word K*.ri7rrgi£as occurs 
 nowhere else in the New Testament. 
 It properly means to look in a mirror • 
 to behold as in a mirror. The mirrors 
 of the ancients were made of burnished 
 metal, and they reflected images with 
 great brilliancy and distinctness. AnJ 
 the meaning is, that the gospel reflected 
 the glory of the Lord; it was, so f 
 speak, the mirror — the polished, bur 
 nished substance in which the glory o* 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 65 
 
 glory of the Lord, are changed 
 into the same * image from b glory 
 
 a Ro. 8. 29. b Ps. 84. 7. 
 
 the Lord shone, and where that glory 
 was irradiated and reflected so that it 
 might be seen by Christians. There 
 was no vail over it ; no obscurity ; no- 
 thing to break its dazzling splendour, or 
 to prevent its meeting the eye. Chris- 
 tians, by looking on the gospel, could 
 see the glorious perfections and plans 
 of God as bright, and clear, and bril- 
 liant as they could see a light reflected 
 from the burnished surface of the 
 mirror. So to speak, the glorious per- 
 fections of God shone from heaven ; 
 beamed upon the gospel, and were 
 thence reflected to the eye and the 
 heart of the Christian, and had the ef- 
 fect of transforming them into the same 
 image. This passage is one of great 
 beauty, and is designed to set forth the 
 gospel as being the reflection of the infi- 
 nite glories of God to the minds and 
 hearts of men. % The glory of the Lord. 
 The splendour, majesty, and holiness 
 of God as manifested in the gospel, or 
 of the Lord as incarnate. The idea is, 
 that God was clearly and distinctly seen 
 in the gospel. There was no obscurity, 
 no vail, as in the case of Moses. In 
 the gospel they were permitted to look 
 on the full splendour of the divine per- 
 fections — the justice, goodness, mercy, 
 and benevolence of God — to see him as 
 he is with undimmed and unvailed 
 glory. The idea is, that the perfections 
 of God shine forth with splendour and 
 beauty in the gospel, and that we are 
 permitted to look on them clearly and 
 openly, t Are changed into the same 
 image. It is possible that there may be 
 an allusion here to the effect which was 
 produced by looking into an ancient 
 mirror. Such mirrors were made of 
 burnished metal, and the reflection from 
 them would be intense. If a strong 
 light were thrown on them, the rays 
 would be cast by reflection on the face 
 of him who looked on the mirror, and 
 it would be strongly illuminated. And 
 the idea may be, that the glory of God, 
 6* 
 
 to glory even as ■ by the Spirit 
 of the Lord. 
 
 i or, of the Lord the Spirit. 
 
 the splendour of the divine perfections, 
 was thrown on the gospel, so to speak, 
 like a bright light on a polished mirror ; 
 and that that glory was reflected from 
 the gospel on him who contemplated it, 
 so that he appeared to be transformed 
 into the same image. Locke renders it, 
 " We are changed into his very image 
 by a continued succession of glory, as it 
 were, streaming upon us from the 
 Lord." The figure is one of great 
 beauty ; and the idea is, that by placing 
 ourselves within the light of the gospel ; 
 by contemplating the glory that shines 
 there, we become changed into the like- 
 ness of the same glory, and conformed 
 to that which shines there with so much 
 splendour. By contemplating the 
 resplendent face of the blessed Re- 
 deemer, we are changed into something 
 of the same image. It is a law of our 
 nature that we are moulded, in our 
 moral feelings, by the persons with 
 whom we associate, and by the objects 
 which we contemplate. We become 
 insensibly assimilated to those with 
 whom we have intercourse, and to the 
 objects with which we are familiar. We 
 imbibe the opinions, we copy the 
 habits, we imitate the manners, we fall 
 into the customs of those with whom 
 we have daily conversation, and whom 
 we make our companions and friends. 
 Their sentiments insensibly become our 
 sentiments, and their ways our ways. 
 It is thus with the books with which we 
 are familiar. We are insensibly, but 
 certainly moulded into conformity to 
 the opinions, maxims, and feelings 
 which are there expressed. Our own 
 sentiments undergo a gradual change, 
 and we are likened to those with which 
 in this manner we are conversant. So it 
 is in regard to the opinions and feelings 
 which from any cause we are in the 
 habit of bringing before our minds. It 
 is the way by which men become cor- 
 rupted in their sentiments and feelings 
 in their contact with the world ; it is the 
 
66 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 way in which amusements, and the com- 
 pany of the gay and the dissipated 
 possess so much power ; it is the way 
 in which the young and inexperienced 
 are heguiled and ruined ; and it is the 
 way in which Christians dim the lustre 
 of their piety, and obscure the bright- 
 ness of their religion by their contact 
 with the gay and fashionable world. — 
 And it is on the same great principle 
 that Paul says that by contemplating 
 the glory of God in the gospel, we be- 
 come insensibly, but certainly conform- 
 ed to the same image, and made like 
 the Redeemer. His image will be re- 
 flected on us. We shall imbibe his 
 sentiments, catch his feelings, and be 
 moulded into the image of his own 
 purity. Such is the great and wise law 
 of our nature ; and it is on this prin- 
 ciple, and by this means, that God de- 
 signs we should be made pure on earth, 
 and kept pure in heaven forever. 
 1 From glory to glory. From one 
 degree of glory to another. " The more 
 we behold this brilliant and glorious 
 light, the more do we reflect back its 
 rays ; that is, the more we contemplate 
 the great truths of the Christian re- 
 ligion, the more do our minds become 
 imbued with its spirit." — Bloomfield. 
 This is said in contradistinction pro- 
 bably to Moses. The splendour on his 
 face gradually died away. But not so 
 with the light reflected from the gospel. 
 It becomes deeper and brighter con- 
 stantly. — This sentiment is parallel to 
 that expressed by the psalmist : " They 
 go from strength to strength" (Ps. 
 lxxxiv. 7) ; i. e. they go from one degree 
 of strength to another, or one degree of 
 holiness to another, until they come to 
 the full vision of God himself in heaven. 
 The idea in the phrase before us is, 
 that there is a continual increase of 
 moral purity and holiness under the 
 gospel until it results in the perfect 
 glory of heaven. The doctrine is, that 
 Christians advance in piety ; and that 
 this is done by the contemplation of the 
 glory of God as it is revealed in the 
 gospel. Tf As by the Spirit of the Lord. 
 Marg. "Of the Lord of the Spirit." 
 Gr. "As frorr the Lord the Spirit." 
 
 So Beza, Locke, Wolf, Rosenmiiller, 
 and Doddridge render it. The idea is, 
 that it is by the Lord Jesus Christ the 
 spirit of the law, the spirit referred to 
 by Paul above, ver. 6. 17. It is done 
 by the Holy Spirit procured or impart- 
 ed by the Lord Jesus. This sentiment 
 is in accordance with that which pre- 
 vails everywhere in the Bible, that it is 
 by the Holy Spirit alone that the heart is 
 changed and purified. And the object 
 of the statement here is, doubtless, to 
 prevent the supposition that the change 
 from " glory to glory" was produced in 
 any sense by the mere contemplation 
 of truth, or by any physical operation 
 of such contemplation on the mind. It 
 was by the Spirit of God alone that the 
 heart was changed even under the gos- 
 pel, and amidst the full blaze of its 
 truth. Were it not for his agency, even 
 the contemplation of the glorious truths 
 of the gospel would be in vain, and 
 would produce no saving effect on the 
 human heart. 
 
 REMARKS. 
 
 1. The best of all evidences of a call to 
 the office of the ministry is the divine 
 blessing resting on our labours, ver. 1, 2. 
 If sinners are converted; if souls are 
 sanctified ; if the interests of pure reli- 
 gion are advanced ; if by humble, zeal 
 ous, and self-denying efforts, a man is 
 enabled so to preach as that the divine 
 blessing shall rest constantly on his la- 
 bours, it is among the best of all evi- 
 dences that he is called of God, and is 
 approved by him. And though it may 
 be true, and is true, that men who are 
 self-deceived, or are hypocrites are some- 
 times the means of doing good, yet it is 
 still true, as a general rule, that eminent, 
 and long-continued success in the mi- 
 nistry is an evidence of God's accept- 
 ance, and that he has called a minister 
 to this office. Paul felt this, and often 
 appealed to it ; and why may not others 
 also? 
 
 2. A minister may appeal to the effect 
 of the gospel among his own people as 
 a proof that it is from God. ver. 2, 3. 
 Nothing else would produce such effects 
 as were produced at Corinth, but the 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 67 
 
 power of God. If the wicKed are re- 
 claimed ; if the intemperate and licen- 
 tious are made temperate and pure ; if 
 .he dishonest are made honest ; and the 
 *coffer learns to pray, under the gospel, 
 »t proves that it is from God. To such 
 effects a minister may appeal as proof 
 lhat the gospel which he preaches is 
 from heaven. A system which will pro- 
 duce these effects must be true. 
 
 3. A minister should so live among 
 a people as to be able to appeal to them 
 with the utmost confidence in regard to 
 the purity and integrity of his own 
 character, ver. 1, 2. He should so live, 
 and preach, and act, that he will be un- 
 der no necessity of adducing testimonials 
 from abroad in regard to his character. 
 The effect of his gospel, and the tenor 
 of his life, should be his best testimonial ; 
 and to that he should be able to appeal. 
 A man who is under a necessity, con- 
 stantly, or often, of defending his own 
 character ; of bolstering it up by testi- 
 monials from abroad; who is obliged 
 to spend much of his time in defending 
 his reputation, or who chooses to spend 
 much of his time in defending it, has 
 usually a character and reputation not 
 Worth defending. Let a man live as 
 he ought to, and he will, in the end, 
 have a good reputation. Let him strive 
 to do the will of God, and save souls, 
 and he will have all the reputation 
 which he ought to have. God will take 
 care of his character ; and will give him 
 just as much reputation as it is desirable 
 that he should have. See Ps. xxxvii. 
 5, 6. 
 
 4. The church is, as it were, an 
 epistle sent by the Lord Jesus, to show 
 his character and will. ver. 3. It is his 
 representative on earth. It holds his 
 truth. It is to imitate his example. It 
 is to show how he lived. And it is to 
 accomplish that which he would ac- 
 complish were he personally on earth, 
 and present among men — as a letter is 
 designed to accomplish some important 
 purpose of the writer when absent. 
 The church, therefore, should be such 
 as shall appropriately express the will 
 and desire of the Lord Jesus. It should 
 resemble him. It should hold his 
 
 truth ; and it should devote itself with 
 untiring diligence to the great purpose 
 of advancing his designs, and spread- 
 ing his gospel around the world. 
 
 5. Religion has its seat in the heart. 
 ver. 3. It is engraven there. It is 
 written not with ink, or engraven on 
 stone, but it is written by the Spirit of 
 God on the heart. That professed reli- 
 gion, therefore, which does not reach 
 the heart, and which is not felt there, is 
 false and delusive. There is no true 
 religion which does not reach and affect 
 the heart. 
 
 6. We should feel our dependence 
 on God in all things, ver. 5. We are 
 dependent on him, (1.) For revelation 
 itself. Man had no power of originating 
 the truths which constitute revelation. 
 They are the free and pure gift of God. 
 (2.) For success in saving souls. God 
 only can change the heart. It is not 
 done by human reasoning; by any 
 power of man ; by any eloquence of 
 persuasion. It is by the power of God ; 
 and if a minister of religion meets with 
 any success, it will be by the presence 
 and by the power of God alone. 
 (3.) We are dependent on him for the 
 power of thought at all ; for clearness 
 of intellect ; for such a state of bodily 
 health as to permit us to think; for bright 
 conceptions; for ability to arrange oui 
 thoughts ; for the power of expressing 
 them clearly ; for such a state of mind 
 as shall be free from vain fancies, and 
 vagaries, and eccentricities; and for 
 such a state as shall mark our plans as 
 those of common sense and prudence. 
 On such plans much of the comfort of 
 life depends ; and on such plans depends 
 also nearly all the success which men 
 ever meet with in amy virtuous and 
 honourable calling. And if men felt, 
 as they should do, how much they are 
 dependent on God for the power of 
 clear thinking, and for the character- 
 istics of sound sense in their schemes, 
 they would pray for it more than they 
 do; and would be more grateful that 
 such a rich blessing is so extensively 
 conferred on men. 
 
 7. Religion has a living power, ver. 6. 
 It is not the letter, but the spirt. It is 
 
68 
 
 II. CORINTHIAxNS 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 
 not made up of forms and ceremonies. 
 It does not consist in»cold, external rites, 
 however regular they may be ; nor in 
 formal prayer, or in stated seasons of 
 devotion. All these will be dead and 
 vain unless the heart is given to God, 
 and to his service. If these are all, 
 there is no religion. And if we have 
 no better religion than that, we should 
 at once abandon our hopes, and seek 
 for that which does not kill, but which 
 makes alive. 
 
 8. The office of the ministers of the 
 gospel is glorious, and most honourable, 
 ver. 7 — 9. It is far more honourable 
 than was the office of Moses; and their 
 work is far more glorious than was his. 
 His consisted in giving the law on ta- 
 bles of stone ; in the external splendour 
 which attended its promulgation ; and 
 in introducing a system which must be 
 soon done away. His was a ministry 
 " of death" and of " condemnation." 
 Theirs is a ministration by which the 
 Holy Spirit is communicated to men — 
 through them as channels, or organs 
 by which the saving grace of that Spirit 
 is imparted ; it is a work by which men 
 are made righteous, justified, and accept- 
 ed ; it is a work whose effects are never to 
 fade away, but which are to live amidst 
 the splendours of heaven. 
 
 9. The responsibility and solemnity 
 of the work of the ministry. It was a 
 solemn and responsible work for Moses 
 to give the law amidst the thunders of 
 Sinai to the children of Israel. It is 
 much more solemn to be the medium 
 by which the eternal truths of the gos- 
 pel are made known to men. The one, 
 imposing as it was, was designed to be 
 temporary, and was soon to pass away. 
 The other is to be eternal in its effects, 
 and is to enter vitally and deeply into 
 the eternal destiny of man. The one 
 pertained to laws written on stone ; the 
 other to influences that are deeply and 
 forever to affect the heart. No work 
 can be more solemn and responsible 
 than that through which the Holy 
 Spirit, with renewing and sanctifying 
 power, is conveyed to man ; that which 
 is connected with the justification of 
 sinners ; and that which in its effects is 
 
 to be permanent as the soul itself, and 
 to endure as long as God shall exist. 
 
 10. We see the folly of attempting 
 to be justified by the law. ver. 7. 9. 
 It is the ministration of death and of 
 condemnation. It speaks only to con- 
 demn. Law knows nothing of pardon. 
 It is not given for that purpose ; and 
 no perfect law can contain within itself 
 provisions for pardon. Besides, no one 
 has ever complied with all the demands 
 of the law; no one ever will. All 
 have sinned. But if all the demands 
 of the law be not complied with, it 
 speaks only to condemn. James ii. 10. 
 If a man in other respects has been 
 ever so good a citizen, and yet has com- 
 mitted murder, he must die. So says 
 the law. If a man has been ever so 
 valiant, and fought ever so bravely, and 
 yet is guilty of an act of treason, he 
 must die. The question is not what he 
 has been in other respects, or what else 
 he may, or may not have done, but has 
 he committed this offence 1 If he has, 
 the law knows no forgiveness ; and 
 pronounces his condemnation. If par- 
 doned, it must be by some other system 
 than by the regular operation of law. 
 So with the sinner against God. If the 
 law is violated, it speaks only to con- 
 demn. If he is pardoned, it can be 
 only by the gospel of Jesus Christ. 
 
 11. The danger of grieving the Holy 
 Spirit, ver. 8. The gospel is the field 
 of the operations of the Holy Spirit in 
 our world. It is the ministration of 
 the Spirit. It is the channel by which 
 his influences descend on man. To 
 reject that gospel is to reject Him, 
 and to cut off the soul from all possi- 
 bility of being brought under his sav- 
 ing influence and power forever. He 
 strives with men only in connexion 
 with the gospel ; and all hope, there- 
 fore, of being brought under his saving 
 power, is in attending to that gospel, 
 and embracing its provisions. The 
 multitudes, therefore, who are rejecting 
 or neglecting that gospel, are throwing 
 themselves beyond his saving influences ; 
 and placing themselves beyond the possi- 
 bility of salvation. 
 
 12. We see the guilt of neglecting 
 
A P. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 69 
 
 or rejecting the gospel. It is the scheme, 
 and the only scheme for pardon, ver. 
 8 — 10. It is a far more glorious mani- 
 festation of the goodness of God than 
 the law of Moses. It is the glorious 
 and benevolent manifestation of God 
 through the incarnation, the sufferings, 
 and the death of his Son. It is the only 
 plan of pardoning mercy that has been, 
 or that will be revealed. If men are 
 not pardoned through that, they are not 
 pardoned at all. If they are not saved 
 by that, they must die forever. What 
 guilt is there, therefore, in neglecting 
 and despising it ! What folly is there 
 in turning away from its provisions of 
 mercy, and neglecting to secure an in- 
 terest in what it provides ! 
 
 13. The gospel is to spread around 
 the world, and endure to the end of 
 time. ver. 11. It is not like the insti- 
 tutions of Moses, to endure for a limited 
 period, and then to be done away. The 
 cloud and tempest; the thunder "and 
 lightning on Mount Sinai which attend- 
 ed the giving of the law, soon disap- 
 peared. The unusual and unnatural 
 splendour on the countenance of Moses 
 soon vanished away. All the magnifi- 
 cence of the Mosaic ritual also soon 
 faded away. But not so the gospel. 
 That abides. That is the last dispensa- 
 tion ; the permanent economy ; that 
 under which the affairs of the world are 
 to be brought to an end. That is to 
 pervade all lands ; to bless all people ; 
 to survive all revolutions ; to outlive all 
 the magnificence of courts, and all the 
 splendour of mighty dynasties, and is 
 to endure till this world shall come to 
 an end, and live in its glorious effects for- 
 ever and ever. It is, therefore, to be 
 the fixed principle on which all Chris- 
 tians are to act, that the gospel is to be 
 permanent, and is to spread over all 
 lands, and yet fill all nations with joy. 
 And if so, how fervent and unceasing 
 should be their prayers and efforts to 
 accomplish this great and glorious re- 
 sult! 
 
 14 We learn from this chapter the 
 duty of preaching in a plain, simple, in- 
 telligible manner, ver. 12. Preaching 
 should always be characterized indeed 
 
 by good sense, and ministers should 
 show that they are not fools, and their 
 preaching should be such as to interest 
 thinking men — for there is no folly or 
 nonsense in the Bible. But their preach- 
 ing should not be obscure, metaphysical, 
 enigmatical, and abstruse. It should be 
 so simple that the unlettered may learn 
 the plan of salvation ; so plain that no 
 one shall mistake it except by his own 
 fault. The hopes of the gospel are so 
 clear that there is no need of ambiguity 
 or enigma ; no need of abstruse meta- 
 physical reasoning in the pulpit. Nor 
 should there be an %ttempt to appear 
 wise or profound, by studying a dry, 
 abstruse, and cold style and manner. 
 The preacher should be open, plain, 
 simple, sincere ; he should testify what 
 he feels; should be able to speak as 
 himself animated by hope, and to tell 
 of a world of glory to which he is him- 
 self looking forward with unspeakable 
 
 j°y- 
 
 15. It is the privilege of the Christian 
 to look on the unvailed and unclouded 
 glory of the gospel, ver. 12, 13. He 
 does not look at it through types and 
 shadows. He does not contemplate it 
 when a vail of obscurity is drawn de- 
 signedly over it. He sees it in its true 
 beauty and splendour. The Messiah 
 has come, and he may contemplate 
 openly and plainly his glory, and the 
 grandeur of his work. The Jews look- 
 ed upon it in the light of prophecy ,• to 
 us it is history. They saw it only 
 through obscure shadows, types, and 
 figures ; we see it in open day, may 
 survey at leisure its full beauty, and 
 contemplate in the fulness of its splen- 
 dour the gospel of the blessed God. 
 For this we cannot be too thankful; 
 nor can we be too anxious lest we un- 
 dervalue our privileges, and abuse the 
 mercies that we enjoy. 
 
 16. In reading the Old Testament, 
 we see the importance of suffering the 
 reflected light of the New Testament to 
 be thrown upon it, in order correctly to 
 understand it. ver. 13, 14. It is our 
 privilege to know what the institutions 
 of Moses meant ; to see the end which 
 he contemplated. And it is our privi- 
 
70 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 lege to see what they referred to, and 
 how they prefigured the Messiah, and 
 his gospel. In reading the Old Testa- 
 ment, therefore, there is no reason why 
 we should not take with us the know- 
 ledge which we have derived from the 
 New, respecting the character, work, 
 and doctrines of the Messiah; and to 
 suffer them to influence our understand- 
 ing of the laws and institutions of 
 Moses. Thus shall we treat the Bible 
 as a whole, and allow one part to throw 
 light on another — a privilege which we 
 always concede to any book. There is 
 no reason why Ghristians in reading 
 the Old Testament should remain in 
 the same darkness as the ancient, or the 
 modern Jews. 
 
 17. Thus read, the Old Testament 
 will be to us of inestimable value, ver. 
 14. It is of value not only as intro- 
 ducing the gospel ; as furnishing pre- 
 dictions whose fulfilment are full 
 demonstration of the truth of religion ; 
 as containing specimens of the sub- 
 limest and purest poetry in the world ; 
 but it is of value as embodying, though 
 amidst many types and shadows and 
 much obscurity, all the great doctrines 
 of the true religion. Though to the 
 Jews, and to the world, there is a vail 
 cast over it; yet to the Christian there 
 is a beauty and splendour on all its 
 pages — for the coming of Christ has 
 removed that vail, and the sense of those 
 ancient writings is now fully seen. 
 True piety will value the Old Testa- 
 ment, and will find there, in the sweetest 
 poetry in the world, the expression of 
 feelings which the religion of the Mes- 
 siah only can produce ; and pure and 
 elevated thoughts which could have 
 been originated by nothing but his an- 
 ticipated coming. It is no mark of 
 piety or of wisdom to disparage the 
 Jewish Scriptures. But the higher the 
 attainments in Christian feeling, the 
 more will the writings of Moses and the 
 prophets be loved. 
 
 18. Men may have the Bible, and 
 may read it long, and much, and yet 
 not understand it. ver. 1 5. So it was, 
 and is with the Jews. The Scriptures 
 were attentively read by them, and yet 
 
 they did not understand them. So it is 
 still. There is a vail on their heart, 
 and they are blinded. So it is often 
 now with others. Men often read the 
 Bible, and see little beauty in it. They 
 read, and they do not understand it. 
 The reason is, the heart is not right. 
 There should be a correspondence of 
 feeling between the heart and the Bible, 
 or a congeniality of view in order to 
 appreciate its value and its truth. No 
 man can understand or appreciate 
 Milton or Cowper who has not a taste 
 like theirs. No man can understand 
 and appreciate a poem or an e^say on 
 patriotism, who is not a lover of his 
 country ; or on chastity, who is impure ; 
 or on temperance, who is intemperate ; 
 or on virtue in general, who is a stranger 
 to virtue in every form. And so in 
 reading the Bible. To appreciate and 
 understand fully the writings of David, 
 Isaiah, Paul, or John, we must have 
 their feelings; our hearts must glow 
 with their love to God and the Re- 
 deemer; we must feel as they did the 
 guilt and burden of sin ; and we must 
 rejoice as they did in the hope of deli- 
 verance, and in the prospect of heaven. 
 Till men have these feelings, they are 
 not to wonder that the Bible is to them 
 a dead letter, or a sealed book, and that 
 they do not understand it, or see any 
 beauty in its pages. 
 
 19. This chapter furnishes an argu- 
 ment for the fidelity and truth of the 
 statement of Paul. ver. 15. The argu- 
 ment is, that his description is as ap- 
 plicable to the Jews now as it was in 
 his own time — and that, therefore, it 
 must have been drawn from nature. 
 The same vail is on their hearts now as 
 in his time ; there is the same blindness 
 and darkness in regard to the true mean- 
 ing of their Scriptures. The language 
 of Paul will accurately express that 
 blindness now; and his description 
 therefore is not drawn from fancy, but 
 from fact. It is true now in regard to 
 that singular people, and it was true in 
 his own time ; and the lapse of eighteen 
 hundred years has only served to confirm 
 the truth of his description in regard to 
 the people of his own nation and time. 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 71 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 nPHEREFORE, seeing we 
 -*- have this ministry, as we 
 
 20. That veil is to be removed only 
 by their turning to God. ver. 16. It is 
 only by true conversion that the mind 
 can be brought to a full and clear un- 
 derstanding of the Scriptures; and that 
 event will yet take place in regard to 
 the Jews. They shall yet be converted 
 to the Messiah whom their fathers slew, 
 and whom they have so long rejected ; 
 and when that event shall occur, they 
 shall see the beauty of their own Scrip- 
 tures, and rejoice in the promises and 
 glorious hopes which they hold out to 
 the view. 
 
 ?l. The duty of meditating much 
 on the glory of the gospel, ver. 18. It 
 is by that we are purified. It is by 
 keeping it constantly before the mind ; 
 dwelling on its splendour ; thinking of 
 its glorious truths, that we become 
 transformed into the same image, and 
 made like God. If the character is 
 formed by the objects which we contem- 
 plate, and with which we are familiar ; 
 if we are insensibly moulded in our 
 feelings and principles by that with 
 which we constantly associate, then we 
 should think much of the truths of the 
 gospel. We should pray much — for 
 thus we come in contact with God and 
 his truth. We should read the Scrip- 
 ture much. We should commune with 
 the good and the pure. We should 
 make our companions of those who 
 most love the Lord Jesus, and most 
 decidedly bear his image. We should 
 think much of a pure heaven. Thus 
 shall we be moulded, insensibly it may 
 be, but certainly, into the image of a 
 holy God and Saviour, and be prepared 
 for a pure and holy heaven. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 This chapter is intimately connected 
 with the preceding, and is indeed mere- 
 ly a statement of the consequences or 
 results of the doctrine advanced there. 
 In that chapter, Paul had stated the 
 clearness and plainness of the gospel as 
 
 have received a mercy, we famt 
 not ; 
 
 a 1 Co. 7. 25. 
 
 contrasted with the institutions of Mcses, 
 and particularly that the Christian mi- 
 nistry was a ministration more glorious 
 than that of Moses. It was more clear 
 It was a ministration of justification 
 (ver. 9), and of the Spirit (ver. 8), and 
 was a ministration where they were 
 permitted to look upon the unvailed 
 and unclouded glories of God. ver. 18. 
 In this chapter he states some of the 
 consequences, or results of their being 
 called to thii* ministry ; and the design 
 is, to magnify the office of the ministry, 
 to show the sustaining power of the 
 truths which they preached ; the interest 
 which the Corinthian Christians arid all 
 other Christians had in the ministry, 
 and thus to conciliate their favour ; and 
 to show what there was to comfort them 
 in the various trials to which as minis- 
 ters they were exposed. Paul states 
 therefore in this chapter, 
 
 1. That these clear and elevated 
 views of the gospel sustained him ; kept 
 him from fainting ; preserved him from 
 deceit and all improper acts ; made him 
 open and honest ; since he had no ne- 
 cessity for craft and guilt, but proclaim- 
 ed a system of religion which could be 
 commended to every man's conscience, 
 and be seen to be true. ver. 1, 2. 
 
 2. That if any persons were lost, it 
 was not the fault of the gospel, ver. 3, 
 4. That was clear, open, plain, glorious, 
 and might be understood ; and if they 
 were lost, it was to be traced to the ma- 
 lign influence of the god of this world, 
 and not to the gospel. 
 
 3. That the great purpose of Paul 
 and his associates was to make known 
 this clear and glorious truth of the 
 gospel, and that, therefore, the apostles 
 did not preach themselves, but Christ 
 Jesus, the revealer and source of all this 
 glory, ver. 5, 6. Their sole object was 
 to show forth this pure and glorious 
 light of the gospel. 
 
 4. That it was so arranged by God's 
 appointment and providence that all 
 
79 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 the glory of the lesults of the ministry 
 should be bis. ver. 7 — 11. He had ta- 
 ken especial care that they should have 
 no cause of self-exultation or glorying 
 in preaching the gospel ; and had taken 
 effectual means that they should be 
 humbled, and not lifted up with pride 
 from the fact that they were commis- 
 sioned to make known such glorious 
 truths, and had a ministry more ho- 
 nourable than that of Moses. He had, 
 therefore, committed the treasure to 
 earthen vessels ; to frail, weak, dying 
 men, and to men in humble life (ver. 
 7), and he had called them to submit to 
 constant trials of persecution, poverty, 
 peril, and want, in order that they 
 might be humbled, and that God might 
 manifestly have all the glory, ver. 8 
 —11. 
 
 5. All this was for the sake of the 
 church, a fact which was adapted to 
 conciliate the favour of Christians, and 
 excite their sympathy in the sufferings 
 of the apostles, and to lead them to 
 honour the ministry in a proper man- 
 ner, ver. 12 — 15. It was not for their 
 own welfare, happiness, honour, or 
 emolument that they endured these 
 trials in the ministry ; it was that the 
 church might be benefited, and thus 
 abundant praise redound to God. 
 
 6. These considerations sustained 
 them in their trials, ver. 16 — 18. They 
 had comfort in all their afflictions. 
 They felt that they were doing and 
 suffering these things for the salvation 
 of souls, and the glory of God (ver. 16) ; 
 they had inward strength given them 
 every day, though the outward man 
 perished (ver. 16) ; they knew that the 
 result of this would be an eternal 
 weight of glory (ver. 17) ; and they 
 were enabled to look to another and a 
 better world ; to keep the eye on heaven, 
 and to contemplate by faith the things 
 which were unseen and eternal, ver. 18. 
 These things supported them ; and thus 
 upheld, they went cheerfully to their 
 great work, and met with calmness and 
 joy all the trials which it involved. 
 
 1. Therefore (Aia tovto). On ac- 
 count of this. That is, because the light 
 of the gospel is so clear ; because it re- 
 
 veals so glorious truths, and all obscurity 
 is taken away, and we are permitted to 
 behold as in a mirror the glory of the 
 Lord. ch. iii. 18. Since the glories of 
 the gospel dispensation are so great, 
 and its effects on the heart are so trans- 
 forming and purifying. The object is, 
 to show the effect of being intrusted 
 with such a ministry, on the character 
 of his preaching. ^ Seeing we have 
 this ministry. The gospel ministry, so 
 much more glorious than that of Moses 
 (ch. iii. 6) ; which is the ministry by 
 which the Holy Spirit acts on the hearts 
 of men (ch. iii. 8) ; which is the mi- 
 nistry of that system by which men are 
 justified (ch. iii. 9) ; and which is the 
 ministry of a system so pure and un- 
 clouded, ch. iii. 9 — 11. 18. % As we 
 have received mercy. Tindal renders 
 this, " even as mercy is sure in us." 
 The idea is, that it was by the mere 
 mercy and favour of God, that he had 
 been intrusted with the ministry, and 
 the object of Paul is doubtless to prevent 
 the appearance of arrogance and self- 
 confidence by stating that it was to be 
 traced entirely to God that he was put 
 into the ministry. He doubtless had his 
 eye on the fact that he had been a per- 
 secutor and blasphemer; and that it 
 was by the mere favour of God that he 
 had been converted and intrusted with 
 the ministry. 1 Tim. i. 13. Nothing 
 will more effectually humble a minister, 
 and prevent his assuming any arrogant 
 and self-confident airs, than to look 
 over his past life ; especially if his life 
 was one of blasphemy, vice, or infidelity ; 
 and to remember that it is by the mere 
 mercy of God that he is intrusted with 
 the high office of an ambassador of 
 Jesus Christ. Paul never forgot to 
 trace his hope, his appointment to the 
 ministerial office, and his success, to the 
 mere grace of God. ^ We faint not 
 This is one of the effects of being in- 
 trusted with such a ministry. The 
 word here used (ixxuitovfAfv) means pro- 
 perly, to turn out a coward; to lose 
 one's courage; then to be faint-hearted, 
 to faint, to despond, in view of trial, 
 difficulty, &c. — Robinson. Here it 
 means, that by the mercy of God, he 
 
A. I). 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 73 
 
 2 But have renounced the hid- 
 den things of \ dishonesty, not 
 
 wis not disheartened by the difficulties 
 which he met ; his faith and zeal did 
 not flag; he was enabled to be faithful, 
 and laborious, and his courage always 
 kept up, and his mind was filled with 
 cheerfulness. See Note on ch. ii. 14. 
 He was deterred by no difficulties ; em- 
 barrassed by no opposition ; driven from 
 his purpose by no persecution; and 
 his strength did not fail under any trials. 
 The consciousness of being intrusted 
 with such a ministry animated him ; 
 and the mercy and grace of God sus- 
 tained him. 
 
 2. But have renounced (dTra^-a^eS-a, 
 from tiro and uttov). The word means 
 properly to speak out or off; to refuse 
 or deny ; to interdict or forbid. Here it 
 means, to renounce, or disown; to 
 spurn, or scorn with aversion. It oc- 
 curs nowhere else in the New Testa- 
 ment; and the sense here is, that the 
 apostles had such a view of the truth of 
 religion, and the glory of the Christian 
 scheme (ch. iii. 13 — 18), as to lead 
 them to discard every thing that was 
 disguised, and artful, and crafty ; every 
 thing like deceit and fraud. The reli- 
 gions of the heathen were made up 
 mainly of trick, and were supported by 
 dec eption practised on the ignorant, and 
 on the mass of men. Paul says, that 
 he and his fellow-labourers had such 
 views of the truth, and glory, and holi- 
 ness of the Christian scheme, as to lead 
 them solemnly to abjure and abhor 
 all such dishonest tricks and devices. 
 Truth never needs such arts; and no 
 cause will long succeed by mere trick 
 and cunning. \ The hidden things of 
 dishonesty. Marg. shame. The Greek 
 word most commonly means shame, or 
 disgrace. The hidden things of shame 
 here mean disgraceful conduct; clan- 
 destine and secret arts, which were in 
 themselves shameful and disgraceful. 
 They denote all underhanded dealings; 
 all dishonest artifices and plans, such as 
 were common among the heathen, and 
 7 
 
 walking in craftiness, nor hand- 
 ling the word of God deceitfully, a 
 
 a c. 2. 17. 
 
 such probably as the false teachers 
 adopted in the propagation of their 
 opinions at Corinth. The expression 
 here does not imply that the apostles 
 ever had any thing to do with such 
 arts; but that they solemnly abjured 
 and abhorred them. Religion is open, 
 plain, straight-forward. It has no alli- 
 ance with cunning, and trick, and arti- 
 fice. It should be defended openly ; 
 stated clearly ; and urged with steady 
 argument. It is a work of light, and 
 not of darkness, f Not walking in 
 craftiness. Not acting craftily; not 
 behaving in a crafty manner. The 
 word here used (jrwovgyix., from irav, all, 
 i§yw, work, i. e. doing every thing, or 
 capable of doing any thing) denotes 
 shrewdness, cunning, and craft. This 
 was common; and this was probably 
 practised by the false teachers in 
 Corinth. With this Paul says he had 
 nothing to do. He did not adopt a 
 course of carnal wisdom and policy 
 (Note, ch. i. 12) ; he did not attempt to 
 impose upon them, or to deceive them ; 
 or to make his way by subtle and de- 
 ceitful arts. True religion can never be 
 advanced by trick and craftiness. "J Nor 
 handling the word of God deceitfully 
 (Joxovvrt;). Not falsifying; or deceit- 
 fully corrupting or disguising the truth 
 of God. The phrase seems to be sy- 
 nonymous with that used in ch. ii. 1'*', 
 and rendered "corrupt the word of 
 God." See Note on that verse. It 
 properly means to falsify, adulterate, 
 corrupt, by Jewish traditions, &c. 
 (Robinson, Bloomfield, Doddridge, &c); 
 or it may mean, as in our translation, to 
 handle in a deceitful manner ; to make 
 use of trick and art in propagating and 
 defending it. Tindal renders it, " nei- 
 ther corrupt we the word of God." ^ But 
 by manifestation of the truth. By 
 making the truth manifest ; i. e. by a 
 simple exhibition of the truth. By 
 stating it just as it is, in an undisguised 
 and open manner. Not by adulterating 
 
74 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 but by manifestation of the truth commending oursehes to every 
 
 it with foreign mixtures ; not by min- 
 gling it with philosophy, or traditions; 
 not by blunting its edge, or concealing 
 any thing, or explaining it away ; but 
 by an open, plain, straight-forward ex- 
 hibition of it as it is in Jesus. Preach- 
 ing should consist in a simple exhibition 
 of the truth. There is no deceit in the 
 gospel itself; and there should be none 
 in the manner of exhibiting it. It 
 should consist of a simple statement of 
 things as they are. The whole design 
 of preaching is, to make known the 
 truth. And this is done in an effectual 
 manner only when it is simple, open, 
 undisguised, without craft, and without 
 deceit. ^ Commending ourselves to 
 every man's conscience. That is, so 
 speaking the truth that every man's 
 conscience shall approve it as true ; 
 every man shall see it to be true, and 
 to be in accordance with what he 
 knows to be right. Conscience is that 
 faculty of the mind which distinguishes 
 between right and wrong, and which 
 prompts us to choose the former and 
 avoid the latter. John viii. 9. Note 
 Rom. ii. 15. 1 Cor. x. 25. 27—29. 
 2 Cor. i. 12. It is implied here, (1.) 
 That a course of life, and a manner of 
 preaching that shall be free from dis- 
 honesty, and art, and trick, will be such 
 as the consciences of men will ap- 
 prove. Paul sought such a course of 
 life as should accord with their sense of 
 right, and thus serve to commend the 
 gospel to them. (2.) That the gospel 
 may be so preached as to be seen by 
 men to be true ; so as to be approved 
 as right ; and so that every man's con- 
 science shall bear testimony to its truth. 
 Men do not love it, but they may see 
 that it is true ; they may hate it, but 
 they may see that the truth which con- 
 demns their practices is from heaven. 
 This is an exceedingly important prin- 
 ciple in regard to preaching, and vastly 
 momentous in its bearing on the views 
 which ministers should have of their 
 own work. The gospel is reasonable. 
 It may be seen to be true by every man 
 o whom it is preached. And it should 
 
 be the aim of every preacher so to 
 preach it, as to enlist the consciences of 
 his hearers in his favour. And it is a 
 very material fact that when so preach- 
 ed the conscience and reason of every 
 man is in its favour, and they know 
 that it is true even when it pronounces 
 their own condemnation, and denounces 
 their own sins. This passage proves, 
 therefore, the following things. (1.^ 
 That the gospel may be so preached as 
 to be seen to be true by all men. Men 
 are capable of seeing the truth, and 
 even when they do not love it, they 
 can perceive that it has demonstration 
 that it is from God. It is a system so 
 reasonable ; so well established by evi- 
 dence ; so fortified by miracles, and the 
 fulfilment of prophecies ; so pure in its 
 nature ; so well-adapted to man ; so 
 fitted to his condition, and so well de- 
 signed to make him better; and so 
 happy in its influence on society, that 
 men may be led to see that it is true. 
 And this I take to be the case with 
 almost all those who habitually attend 
 on the preaching of the gospel. Infidels 
 do not often visit the sanctuary ; and 
 when they are in the habit of doing it, 
 it is a fact that they gradually come to 
 the conviction that the Christian reli- 
 gion is true. It is rare to find professed 
 infidels in our places of worship ; and 
 the great mass of those who attend on 
 the preaching of the gospel may be set 
 down as speculative believers in the 
 truth of Christianity. (2.) The con- 
 sciences of men are on the side of truth, 
 and the gospel may be so preached as to 
 enlist their consciences in its favour. 
 Conscience prompts to do right, and 
 condemns us if we do wrong. It can 
 never be made to approve of wrong, 
 never to give a man peace if he does 
 that which he knows to be evil. By no 
 art or device ; by no system of laws, oi 
 bad government ; by no training or dis- 
 cipline, can it be made the advocate of 
 sin. In all lands, at all times, -and in 
 all circumstances, it prompts a man to 
 do what is right, and condemns him if 
 he does wrong. It may be silenced for 
 
A.D.60.] 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 75 
 
 man's conscience in the sight of 
 God. 
 
 a time ; it may be * seared as with a hot 
 iron" and for a time be insensible, but 
 if it speak at all, it speaks to prompt a 
 man to do what he believes to be light, 
 and condemns him if he does that which 
 is wrong. The consciences of men are 
 on the side of the gospel ; and it is only 
 their hearts which are opposed to it. 
 Their consciences are in favour of the 
 gospel in the following, among other 
 respects, (a) They approve of it as a 
 just, pure, holy, and reasonable system ; 
 as in accordance with what they feel to 
 be right ; as recommending that which 
 ought to be done, and forbidding that 
 which ought not to be done. (Z>) In 
 its special requirements on themselves. 
 Their consciences tell them that they 
 ought to love God with all the heart; 
 to repent of their sins ; to trust in that 
 Saviour who died for them ; and to lead 
 a life of prayer and of devotedness to 
 th* service of God ; that they ought to 
 be sincere and humble Christians, and 
 prepare to meet God in peace, (c) 
 Their consciences approve the truth 
 that condemns them. No matter how 
 strict it may seem to be ; no matter how 
 loud its denunciation against their sins ; 
 no matter how much the gospel may 
 condemn their pride, avarice, sensuality, 
 levity, dishonesty, fraud, intemperance, 
 profaneness, blasphemy, or their neglect 
 of their soul, yet their consciences ap- 
 prove of it as right, and proclaim 
 that these things ought to be con- 
 demned, and ought to be abandoned. 
 The heart may love them, but the con- 
 science cannot be made to approve them. 
 And the minister of the gospel may 
 always approach his people, or an indi- 
 vidual man, with the assurance that 
 however much they may love the ways 
 of sin, yet that he has their consciences 
 in his favour, and that in urging the 
 claims of God on them, their consciences 
 will always coincide with his appeals. 
 (3.) The way in which a minister is to 
 commend himself to the consciences of 
 men, is that which was pursued by 
 
 3 But if our gospel be hid, it 
 is hid to them a that are lost : 
 
 tt2Th.2. 10. 
 
 Paul. He must (a) Have a clear and 
 unwavering conviction of the truth him- 
 self. On this subject he should have no 
 doubt. He should be able to look on 
 it as on a burnished mirror (Note, ch. iii. 
 18); and to see its glory as with open 
 face, (b) It should be by the simple 
 statement of the truth of the gospel. 
 Not by preaching philosophy, or meta- 
 physics, or the traditions of man, or the 
 sentiments of theologians, but the sim- 
 ple truths of the gospel of Jesus Christ. 
 Men may be made to see that these are 
 truths, and God will take care that the 
 reason and consciences of men shall 
 be in their favour, (c) By the absence 
 of all trick and cunning, and disguised 
 and subtle arts. The gospel has nothing 
 of these in itself, and it will never ap- 
 prove of them, nor will God bless them. 
 A minister of Jesus should be frank, 
 open, undisguised, and candid. He 
 should make a sober and elevated ap- 
 peal to the reason and conscience of 
 man. The gospel is not " a cunningly 
 devised fable ;" it has no trick in itself, 
 and the ministers of religion should 
 solemnly abjure all the hidden things of 
 dishonesty, f 1> 1 the sight of God. As 
 in the immediate presence of God. We 
 act as if we felt that his eye was upon 
 us; and this consideration serves to 
 keep us from the hidden things of dis- 
 honesty, and from improper arts in 
 spreading the true religion. See Note 
 on ch. ii. 17. 
 
 3. But if our gospel be hid. Paul 
 here calls it his gospel, because it was 
 that which he preached, or the message 
 which he bore. See Note, Rom. xvi. 
 25. The sense here is, 'if the gospel 
 which I preach is not understood ; if its 
 meaning is obscure or hidden ; if its 
 glory is not seen.' It is implied here, 
 that to many the beauty and glory of 
 the gospel was not perceived. This 
 was undeniable, notwithstanding the 
 plainness and fulness with which its 
 truths were made known. The object. 
 o Paul here is, to state that this fact 
 
76 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 4 In whom the god a of this world hath blinded the minds of 
 
 a Jno. 12. 31. 40. 
 
 was not to be traced to any want of 
 clearness in the gospel itself, but to other 
 causes, and thus probably to meet an 
 objection which might be made to his 
 argument about the clearness and ful- 
 ness of the revelation in the gospel. In 
 the language which Paul uses here, 
 there is undoubted allusion to what he 
 had said respecting Moses, who put a 
 vail on his face. ch. iii. 13. He had 
 hid, or concealed his face, as emblematic 
 of the nature of his institutions (Note, 
 ch. iii. 14.); and here Paul says that 
 it was not to be denied that the gospel 
 was vailed also to some. But it was 
 not from the nature of the gospel. It 
 was not because God had purposely con- 
 cealed its meaning. It was not from 
 any want of clearness in itself. It was 
 to be traced to other causes. 1 It is 
 hid to them that are lost. On the mean- 
 ing of the word here rendered "lost," 
 see Note, ch. ii. 15, there rendered 
 " perish." It is hid among them who 
 are about to perish; who are perishing 
 (tv T6?f djroxxu//4v«c); those who deserve 
 to perish. It is concealed only among 
 that class who may be designated as the 
 perishing, or as the lost. Grotius explains 
 this, " those who deserve to perish, who 
 foster their vices, and will not see the 
 truth which condemns those vices." And 
 he adds, that this might very well be, 
 for, " however conspicuous the gospel 
 was hi itself, yet like the aun it would 
 not be visible to the blind.'' The cause 
 was not in the gospel, but jn themselves. 
 This verse teaches, therefore, ( 1 .) That 
 the beauty of the gospel may be hidden 
 from many of the human family. This 
 is a matter of simple fact. There are 
 thousands and millions to whom it is 
 preached who see no beauty in it, 
 and who regard it as foolishness. (2.) 
 That there is a class of men who may 
 be called, even now, the lost. They are 
 lost to virtue, to piety, to happiness, to 
 hope. They deserve to perish; and 
 they are hastening to merited ruin. This 
 class in the time of Paul was large ; and 
 it is large now. It is composed of those 
 
 to whom the gospel is hidden, or to 
 whom it appears to be vailed, and who 
 see no beauty in it. It is made up in- 
 ' deed of all the profane, polluted, and 
 vile ; but their characteristic feature is, 
 that the gospel is hidden from them, 
 and that they see no beauty and glory 
 in it (3.) This is not the fault of the 
 gospel. It is not the fault of the sun 
 when men shut their eyes and will not 
 see it. It is not the fault of a running 
 stream, or a bubbling fountain, if men 
 will not drink of it, but rather choose 
 to die of thirst. The gospel does not 
 obscure and conceal its own glory any 
 more than the sun does. It is in itself 
 a clear and full revelation of God and 
 his grace ; and that glory is adapted to 
 shed light upon the benighted minds of 
 men. 
 
 4. In whom. In respect to whom , 
 among whom ; or in whose hearts. The 
 design of this verse is to account for the 
 fact that the glory of the gospel was not 
 seen by them. It is to be traced entirely 
 to the agency of him whom Paul here 
 calls " the god of this world." ^ The 
 god of this icorld. There can be nc 
 doubt that Satan is here designated by 
 this appellation; though some of the 
 fathers supposed that it means the true 
 God, and Clarke inclines to this opinion. 
 In John xii. 31, he is called "the 
 prince of this world." In Eph. ii. 2, 
 he is called " the prince of the power 
 of the air." And in Eph. vi. 12, the 
 same bad influence is referred to under 
 the names of " principalities, and 
 powers," " the rulers of the darkness of 
 this world," and "spiritual wickedness 
 in high places." The name " god" is 
 here given to him, not because he has 
 any divine attributes, but because he 
 actually has the homage of the men of 
 this world as their god, as the being 
 who is really worshipped, or who has 
 the affections of their hearts in the same 
 way as it is given to idols. By " this 
 world" is meant the wicked world ; or 
 the mass of men. He has dominion 
 over the world. They obey his will ; 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 7^ 
 
 them which believe not, lest the 
 light of the glorious gospel of 
 
 they execute his plans ; they further his 
 purposes, and they are his obedient 
 subjects. He had subdued the world 
 to himself, and was really adored in the 
 place of the true God. See Note on 1 
 Cor. x. 20. " They sacrificed to devils 
 and not to God." Here it is meant by 
 the declaration that Satan is the god of 
 this world, (1.) That the world at large 
 was under his control and direction. 
 He secured the apostasy of man, and 
 early brought him to follow his plans ; 
 and he has maintained his sceptre and 
 dominion since. No more abject sub- 
 mission could be desired by him than 
 has been rendered by the mass of men. 
 (2.) The idolatrous world particularly 
 is under his control, and subject to 
 him. 1 Cor. x. 20. He is worshipped 
 there; and the religious rites and cere- 
 monies of the heathen are in general 
 just such as a mighty being who hated 
 human happiness, and who sought pol- 
 lution, obscenity, wretchedness, and 
 blood would appoint ; and over all the 
 heathen world his power is absolute. 
 In the time of Paul all the world, except 
 the Jews and Christians, was sunk in 
 heathen degradation. (3.) He rules in 
 the hearts and lives of all wicked men — 
 and the world is full of wicked men. 
 They obey him, and submit to his will in 
 executing fraud, and rapine, and piracy, 
 and murder, and adultery, and lewdness ; 
 in wars and fightings ; in their amuse- 
 ments and pastimes ; in dishonesty and 
 falsehood. The dominion of Satan 
 over this world has been, and is still 
 almost universal and absolute \ nor has 
 the lapse of eighteen hundred years 
 rendered the appellation improper as 
 descriptive of his influence, that he is 
 the god of this world. The world pur- 
 sues his plans; yields to his tempta- 
 tions ; neglects, or rejects the reign of 
 God as he pleases ; and submits to his 
 sceptre, and is still full of abomination, 
 cruelty, and pollution, as he desires it to 
 be. \ Hath blinded i he minds of them 
 7* 
 
 Christ, who is the image a of 
 God, should shine unto them. 
 
 a Jno. 1. 14, 18. 
 
 which believe not. Of all who discern 
 no beauty in the gospel, and who reject 
 it. It is implied here, (1.) That the 
 minds of unbelievers are blinded ; that 
 they perceive no beauty in the gospel. 
 This is often affirmed of those who 
 reject the gospel, and who live in sin. 
 See Note on ch. ii. 13. Matt, xxiii. 
 16, 17. 26. Luke iv. 18. John ix. 
 39 ; xii. 40. Rom. xi. 7. The sense 
 is, that they did not see the spiritual 
 beauty and glory of the plan of redemp- 
 tion. They act in reference to that as 
 they would in reference to this world, 
 if a bandage were over their eyes, and 
 they saw not the light of the sun, the 
 beauty of the landscape, the path in 
 which they should go, or the counte- 
 nance of a friend. All is dark, and ob- 
 scure, and destitute of beauty to them, 
 however much beauty may be seen in 
 all these objects by others. (2.) That 
 this is done by the agency of Satan ; and 
 that his dominion is secured by keeping 
 the world in darkness. The affirmation 
 is direct and positive, that it is by his 
 agency that it is done. Some of the 
 modes in which it is done are the fol- 
 lowing, (a) By a direct influence on 
 the minds of men. I do not know why 
 it is absurd to suppose that one intellect 
 may, in some way unknown to us, have 
 access to another, and have power to 
 influence it ; nor can it be proved that 
 Satan may not have power to pervert 
 the understanding ; to derange its 
 powers ; to distract its attention ; and to 
 give in view of the mind a wholly de- 
 lusive relative importance to objects. In 
 the time of the Saviour it cannot be 
 doubted that in the numerous cases of 
 demoniacal possessions, Satan directly 
 affected the minds of men ; nor is there 
 any reason to think that he has ceased 
 to delude and destroy them, (b) By 
 the false philosophy which has pre- 
 vailed — a large part of which seems to 
 have been contrived as if on purpose 
 to deceive the world, and destroy the 
 
78 
 
 IT. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 peace and happiness of men. (c) By 
 the systems of superstition and idolatry. 
 All these seem to be under the control 
 of one master mind. They are so well 
 conceived and adapted to prostrate the 
 moral powers; to fetter the intellect; to 
 pervert the will ; to make men debased, 
 sunken, polluted, and degraded; and they 
 so uniformly accomplish this effect, that 
 they have all the marks of being under 
 the control of one mighty mind, and of 
 having been devised to accomplish his 
 purposes over men. (d) By producing 
 in the minds of men a wholly dispro- 
 portionate view of the value of objects. 
 A very small object held before the eye 
 will shut out the light of the sun. A 
 piece of money of the smallest value 
 laid on the eye will make every thing 
 appear dark, and prevent all the glory 
 of midday from reaching the seat of 
 vision. And so it is with the things of 
 this world. They are placed directly 
 before us, and are placed directly be- 
 tween us and the glory of the gospel. 
 And the trifles of wealth and of fashion ; 
 the objects of pleasure and ambition, are 
 made to assume an importance in view 
 of the mind which wholly excludes the 
 glory of the gospel, and shuts out all 
 the realities of the eternal world. And 
 he does it (e) By the blinding influence 
 of passion and vice. Before a vicious 
 mind all is dark and obscure. There 
 is no beauty in truth, in chastity, or 
 honesty, or in the fear and love of God. 
 Vice always renders the mind blind, and 
 the heart hard, and shrouds every thing 
 in the moral world in midnight. And 
 in order to blind the minds of men to 
 the glory of the gospel, Satan has only 
 to place splendid schemes of speculation 
 before men ; to tempt them to climb the 
 steeps of ambition ; to entice them to 
 scenes of gayety ; to secure the erection 
 of theatres, and gambling houses, and 
 houses of infamy and pollution ; to fill 
 the cities and towns of a land with 
 taverns and dram-shops; and to give 
 opportunity everywhere for the full 
 play and unrestrained indulgence of 
 passion; and the glory of the gospel 
 will be as effectually unseen as the 
 glory of the sun is in the darkest night. 
 
 f Lest the light, &c. This passage 
 states the design for which Satan blinds 
 the minds of men. It is because he 
 hates the gospel, and wishes to prevent 
 its influence and spread in the world. 
 Satan has always hated and opposed it, 
 and all his arts have been employed to 
 arrest its diffusion on earth. The word 
 light here means excellence, beauty, 
 or splendour. Light is the emblem of 
 knowledge, purity, or innocence; and 
 is here and elsewhere applied to the 
 gospel, because it removes the errors, 
 and sins, and wretchedness of men, as 
 the light of the sun scatters the shades 
 of night. This purpose of preventing 
 the light of the gospel shining on men, 
 Satan will endeavour to accomplish by 
 all the means in his power. It is his 
 grand object in this world, because it is 
 by the gospel only that man can be 
 saved ; by that that God is glorified on 
 earth more than by any thing else ; and 
 because, therefore, if he can prevent 
 sinners from embracing that, he will 
 secure their destruction, and most ef- 
 fectually show his hatred of God. And 
 it is to Satan a matter of little impor- 
 tance what men may be, or are, pro- 
 vided they are not Christians. They 
 may be amiable, moral, accomplished, 
 rich, honoured, esteemed by the world, 
 because in the possession of all these 
 he may be equally sure of their ruin, and 
 because, also, these things may contri- 
 bute somewhat to turn away their 
 minds from the gospel. Satan, there- 
 fore, will not oppose plans of gain or 
 ambition ; he will not oppose purposes 
 of fashion and amusement ; he may not 
 oppose schemes by which we desire to 
 rise in the world ; he will not oppose 
 the theatre, the ball-room, the dance, 
 or the song ; he will not oppose 
 thoughtless mirth ; but the moment the 
 gospel begins to shine on the benighted 
 mind, that moment he will make resist- 
 ance, and then all his power will be 
 concentrated. ^ The glorious gospel 
 Gr. ' The gospel of the glory of Christ,' 
 a Hebraism for the glorious gospel 
 Mr. Locke renders it, " the glorious 
 brightness of the light of the gospel of 
 Christ," and supposes it means tho 
 
A. D. 60 ] 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 79 
 
 5 For we preach not our- 
 selves, but Christ Jesus the 
 
 brightness, or clearness, of the doctrine 
 wherein Christ is manifested in the 
 gospel. — It is all light, and splendour, 
 and beauty, compared with the dark 
 systems of philosophy and heathenism. 
 It is glorious, for it is full of splendour ; 
 makes known the glorious God; dis- 
 closes a glorious plan of salvation ; and 
 conducts ignorant, weak, and degraded 
 man to a world of light. No two words 
 in our language are so full of rich and 
 precious meaning, as the phrase " glo- 
 rious gospel." If Who is the image 
 of God. Christ is called the image of 
 God, (1.) In respect to his divine nature, 
 his exact resemblance to God in his 
 divine attributes and perfections. See 
 Col. i. 15, and Heb. i. 3 ; and, (2.) In 
 his moral attributes as Mediator, as 
 showing forth the glory of the Father 
 to men. He resembles God, and in him 
 we see the divine glory and perfections 
 embodied, and shine forth. It is from 
 his resemblance to God in all respects 
 that he is called his image ; and it is 
 through him that the divine perfections 
 are made known to men. — It is an ob- 
 ject of especial dislike and hatred to 
 Satan that the glory of Christ, who is 
 the image of God, should shine on men, 
 and fill their hearts. Satan hates that 
 image; he hates that men should be- 
 come like God ; and he hates all that 
 has a resemblance to the great and glo- 
 rious Jehovah. 
 
 5. For we preach not ourselves. The 
 connexion here is not very apparent, 
 and the design of this verse has been 
 variously understood. The connexion 
 seems to me to be this. Paul gives here 
 a reason for what he had said in the 
 previous parts of the epistle respecting 
 his conduct in the ministry. He had 
 said that his course had been open, and 
 pure, and free from all dishonest arts 
 and tricks, and that he had not cor- 
 rupted the word of God, or resorted to 
 any artifice to accomplish his designs. 
 Ch. ii. 17; iv. 1, 2. The reason of this 
 he here says is, that he had not preach- 
 
 Lord ; and ourserves your ser- 
 vants for Jesus' sake. 
 
 ed himself, or sought to advance his 
 own interest He regarded himself as 
 sent to make known a Saviour ; himself 
 as bound by all means to promote his 
 cause, and to imitate him. Other men 
 — the false teachers, and the cunning 
 priests of the heathen religion — sought 
 to advance their own interest, and to per- 
 petuate a system of delusion that would 
 be profitable to themselves ; and they 
 therefore resorted to all arts, and stra- 
 tagems, and cunning devices to per- 
 petuate their authority, and extend their 
 influence. But the fact that Paul and 
 his associates went forth to make known 
 the Lord Jesus, was a reason why they 
 avoided all such dishonest arts and 
 artifices. *. We are merely the ambas- 
 sadors of another. We are not princi- 
 pals in this business, and do not de- 
 spatch it as a business of our own, but we 
 transact it as the agents for another, i. e. 
 for the Lord Jesus, and we feel ourselves 
 bound, therefore, to do it as he would 
 have done it himself; and as he was 
 free from all trick, and dishonest art, we 
 feel bound to be also.' This seems to 
 me to be the design of this passage. 
 Ministers may be said to preach them 
 selves in the following ways. (1.) 
 When their preaching has a primary 
 reference to their own interest ; and 
 when they engage in it to advance their 
 reputation, or to secure in some way 
 their own advantage. When they aim 
 at exalting their authority, extending 
 their influence, or in any way promot- 
 ing their own welfare. (2.) When 
 they proclaim their own opinions and 
 not the gospel of Christ; when they de- 
 rive their doctrines from their own 
 reasonings, and not from the Bible. 
 (3.) When they put themselves for- 
 ward ; speak much of themselves ; refer 
 often to themselves; are vain of their 
 powers of reasoning, of their eloquence, 
 and of their learning, and seek to make 
 these known rather than the simple 
 truth of the gospel. In one word, when 
 self is primary, and the gospel is se- 
 
80 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 condary ; when they prostitute the minis- 
 try to gain popularity ; to live a life of 
 ease ; to be respected ; to obtain a liveli- 
 hood ; to gain influence ; to rule over a 
 people ; and to make the preaching of 
 the gospel merely an occasion of advanc- 
 ing themselves in the world. — Such a 
 plan, it is implied here, would lead to 
 dishonest arts and devices, and to trick 
 and stratagem to accomplish the end in 
 view. And it is implied here, also, that 
 to avoid all such tricks and arts the true 
 way is not to preach ourselves, but Jesus 
 Christ. K But Christ Jesus the Lord. 
 This Paul states to be the only purpose 
 of the ministry. It is so far the sole 
 design of the ministry that had it not 
 been to make known the Lord Jesus, it 
 would never have been established ; and 
 whatever other objects are secured by its 
 appointment, and whatever other truths 
 are to be illustrated and enforced by the 
 ministry, yet, if this is not the primary 
 subject, and if every other object is not 
 made subservient to this, the design of 
 the ministry is not secured. The word 
 " Christ" properly means the anointed, 
 i. e. the Messiah, the anointed of God for 
 this great office (see Note, Matt. i. 1) ; 
 but it is used in the New Testament as 
 a proper name, the name that was ap- 
 propriate to Jesus. Still it may be used 
 with a reference to the fact of the Mes- 
 siahship, and not merely as a proper 
 name, and in this place it may mean 
 that they preached Jesus as the Messiah, 
 or the Christ, and defended his claims 
 to that high appointment. The word 
 "Lord" also is used to designate him 
 (Mark xi. 3. John xx. 25) ; and when 
 it stands by itself in the New Testa- 
 ment, it denotes the Lord Jesus (Note, 
 Acts i. 24) ; but it properly denotes one 
 who has rule or authority, or proprietor- 
 ship ; and it is used here not merely as 
 a part of the appropriate title of the Sa- 
 viour, but with reference to the fact 
 that he had the supreme headship, or 
 lordship over the church and the world. 
 This important passage, therefore, 
 means, that they made it their sole busi- 
 ness to make known Jesus the Messiah, 
 or the Christ, as the supreme head and 
 Lord of people ; i. e. to set forth the 
 
 Messiahship and the lordship of Jesus 
 of Nazareth, appointed to these high 
 offices by God. To do this, or to preach 
 Jesus Christ the Lord, implies the fol- 
 lowing things. (1.) To prove that he 
 is the Messiah so often predicted in the 
 Old Testament, and so long expected 
 by the Jewish people. To do this was 
 a very vital part of the work of the 
 ministry in the time of the apostles, and 
 was essential to their success in all their 
 attempts to convert the Jews ; and to do 
 this will be no less important in all 
 attempts to bring the Jews now or 
 in future times to the knowledge of the 
 truth. No man can be successful 
 among them who is not able to prove 
 that Jesus is the Messiah. — It is not 
 indeed so vital and leading a point 
 now in reference to those to whom the 
 ministers of the gospel usually preach ; 
 and it is probable that the importance 
 of this argument is by many overlooked, 
 and that it is not urged as it should be 
 by those who " preach Christ Jesus the 
 Lord." It involves the whole argu- 
 ment for the truth of Christianity. It 
 leads to all the demonstrations that this 
 religion is from God ; and the establish- 
 ment of the proposition that Jesus is the 
 Messiah, is one of the most direct and 
 certain ways of proving that his religion 
 is from heaven. For (a) It contains 
 the argument from the fulfilment of the 
 prophecies — one of the main evidences 
 of the truth of revelation; and (b) It 
 involves an examination of all the evi- 
 dences that Jesus gave that he was the 
 Messiah sent from God, and of course 
 an examination of all the miracles that 
 he wrought in attestation of his divine 
 mission. The first object of a preacher, 
 therefore, is to demonstrate that Jesus is 
 sent from God in accordance with the 
 predictions of the prophets. (2.) To 
 proclaim the truths that he taught. To 
 make known his sentiments, and his 
 doctrines, and not our own. This in- 
 cludes, of course, all that he taught 
 respecting God, and respecting man; 
 all that he taught respecting his own 
 nature, and the design of his coming , 
 all that he taught respecting the charac- 
 ter of the human heart, and about hu- 
 
AD. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 81 
 
 man obligation and duty ; all that he 
 taught respecting death, the judgment, 
 and eternity — respecting an eternal 
 heaven, and an eternal hell. To ex- 
 plain, enforce, and vindicate his doc- 
 trines, is one great design of the minis- 
 try ; and were there nothing else, this 
 would be a field sufficiently ample to 
 employ the life ; sufficiently glorious to 
 employ the best talents of man. The 
 minister of the gospel is to teach the 
 sentiments and doctrines of Jesus Christ, 
 in contradistinction from all his own 
 sentiments, and from all the doctrines 
 of mere philosophy. He is not to teach 
 science, or mere morals, but he is to 
 proclaim and defend the doctrines of the 
 Redeemer. (3.) He is to make known 
 the facts of the Saviour's life. He is to 
 show how he lived — to hold up his ex- 
 ample in all the trying circumstances in 
 which he was placed. For he came to 
 show by his life what the law required ; 
 and to show how men should live. 
 And it is the office of the Christian 
 ministry, or a part of their work in 
 preaching " Christ Jesus the Lord," to 
 show how he lived, and to set forth his 
 self-denial, his meekness, his purity, his 
 blameless life, his spirit of prayer, his 
 submission to the divine will, his pa- 
 tience in suffering, his forgiveness of 
 his enemies, his tenderness to the af- 
 flicted, the weak, and the tempted; 
 and the manner of his death. Were 
 this all, it would be enough to employ 
 the whole of a minister's life, and to 
 command the best talents of the world. 
 For he was the only perfectly pure mo- 
 del ; and his example is to be followed 
 by all his people, and his example is 
 designed to exert a deep and wide in- 
 fluence on the world. Piety flourishes 
 just in proportion as the pure example 
 of Jesus Christ is kept before a people; 
 and the world is made happier and 
 better just as that example is kept con- 
 stantly in view. To the gay and the 
 thoughtless, the ministers of the gospel 
 are to show how serious and calm was 
 the Redeemer; to the worldly-minded, 
 to show how he lived above the world ; 
 to the avaricious, how benevolent he 
 was ; to the profane and licentious, how 
 
 pure he was ; to the tempted, how he 
 endured temptation ; to the afflicted, how 
 patient and resigned ; to the dying, how 
 he died : — to all, to show how holy, and 
 heavenly-minded, and prayerful, and 
 pure he was ; in order that they may be 
 won to the same purity, and be prepared 
 to dwell with him in his kingdom. (4.) 
 To set forth the design of his death. To 
 show why he came to die ; and what 
 was the great object to be effected by 
 his sufferings and death. To exhibit, 
 therefore, the sorrows of his life ; to 
 describe his many trials ; to dwell upon 
 his sufferings in the garden of Geth- 
 semane, and on the cross. To show 
 why he died, and what was to be the 
 influence of his death on the destiny of 
 man. To show how it makes an atone- 
 ment for sin ; how it reconciles God to 
 man ; how it is made efficacious in the 
 justification and the sanctification of 
 the sinner. And were there nothing 
 else, this would be sufficient to employ 
 all the time, and the best talents in the 
 ministry. I or the salvation of the soul 
 depends on the proper exhibition of the 
 design of the death of the Redeemer. 
 There is no salvation but through his 
 blood ; and hence the nature and design 
 of his atoning sacrifice is to be exhi- 
 bited to every man, and the offers of 
 mercy through that death to be pressed 
 upon the attention of every sinner. (5.) 
 To set forth the truth and the design 
 of his resurrection. To prove that he 
 rose from the dead, and that he ascend- 
 ed to heaven ; and to show the influence 
 of his resurrection on our hopes and 
 destiny. The whole structure of Chris- 
 tianity is dependent on making out the 
 fact that he rose ; and if he rose, all the 
 difficulties in the doctrine of the resur- 
 rection of the dead are removed at once, 
 and his people will also rise. The in- 
 fluence of that fact, therefore, on our 
 hopes and on our prospects for eternity, 
 is to be shown by the ministry of the 
 gospel; and were there nothing else, 
 this would be ample to command all 
 the time, and the best talents of the 
 ministry. (6.) To proclaim him as 
 " Lord." This is expressly specified i* 
 the passage before us. " For we preach 
 
82 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 Christ Jesus the Loiid ;" we proclaim 
 him as the Lord. That is, he is to be 
 preached as having dominion over the 
 conscience; as the supreme Ruler in 
 his Church ; as above all councils, and 
 synods, and conferences, and all human 
 authority ; as having a right to legislate 
 for his people ; a right to prescribe their 
 mode of worship ; a right to define and 
 determine the doctrines which they 
 shall believe. He is to be proclaimed 
 also as ruling over all, and as exalted 
 in his mediatorial character over all 
 worlds, and as having all things put be- 
 neath his feet. Ps. ii. 6. Isa.ix.6,7. Matt 
 xxviii. 1 8. John xvii. 2. Eph. i. 20. Heb. 
 ii. 8. ^ And ourselves your servants, 
 &c. So far as we make any mention 
 of ourselves, it is to declare that we are 
 your servants, and that we are bound to 
 promote your welfare in the cause and 
 for the sake of the Redeemer. That is, 
 they were their servants in all things in 
 which they could advance the interests 
 of the Redeemer's kingdom among 
 them. The doctrine is, that they re- 
 garded themselves as under obligation 
 not to seek their own interest, or to 
 build up their own reputation and cause, 
 but to seek the welfare of the church ; 
 and promote its interests, as a servant 
 does that of his master. They should 
 not seek to lord it over God's heritage, 
 and to claim supreme and independent 
 authority. They were not masters but 
 servants. The church at large was the 
 master, and they were its servants. This 
 implies the following things. (1.) That 
 the time of ministers belongs to the 
 church, and should be employed in its 
 welfare. It is not their own ; and it is 
 not to be employed in farming, or in 
 speculating, or in trafficking, or in 
 idleness, or in lounging, or in unpro- 
 fitable visiting, or in mere science, or 
 in reading or making books that will 
 not advance the interests of the church. 
 The time of the ministry is not for ease, 
 or ambition, or self-indulgence, but is to 
 promote the interests of the body of 
 Christ. So Paul felt, and so he lived. 
 (2.) Their talents belong to the church. 
 All their original talents, and all that 
 they can acquire, should be honestly 
 
 devoted to the welfare of the church of 
 the Redeemer. (3.) Their best efforts and 
 plans, the avails of their best thoughts 
 and purposes, belong to the church, and 
 should be honestly devoted to it. Their 
 strength, and vigour, and influence 
 should be devoted to it, as the vigour, 
 and strength, and talent, and skill of , a 
 servant belong to the master. See Ps. 
 cxxxvii. 5, 6. The language of the 
 ministry, as of every Christian, should be: 
 
 I love thy church, O God, 
 Her walls before thee stand, 
 
 Dear as the apple of thine eye, 
 And graven on thy hand. 
 
 If e'er to bless thy sons 
 
 My voice or hands deny, 
 These hands let useful skill forsake, 
 
 This voice in silence die. 
 
 If e'er my heart forget 
 
 Her welfare or her wo, 
 Let every joy this heart forsake, 
 
 And every grief o'erflow. 
 
 For her my tears shall fall, 
 For her my prayers ascend, 
 
 To her my cares and toils be given. 
 Till toils and cares shall end. 
 
 And it implies, (4.) That they are the 
 servants of the church in time of trial, 
 temptation, and affliction. They are to 
 devote themselves to the comfort of the 
 afflicted. They are to be the guide to 
 the perplexed. They are to aid the 
 tempted. They are to comfort those 
 that mourn, and they are to sustain and 
 console the dying. They are to regard 
 themselves as the servants of the church 
 to accomplish these great objects ; and 
 are to be willing to deny themselves, 
 and to take up their cross, and to con- 
 secrate their time to the advancement 
 of these great interests. And they are, 
 in all respects, to devote their time, and 
 talents, and influence to the welfare of 
 the church, with as much single-mind- 
 edness as the servant is to seek the 
 interest of his master. It was in this 
 way eminently that Paul was favoured 
 with the success with which God 
 blessed him in the ministry ; and so 
 every minister will be successful, just 
 in proportion to the single-mindedness 
 with which he devotes himself to the 
 work of preaching Jesus Christ thb 
 Lord. 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 6 For God, who commanded ° 
 
 a Ge. 1. 3. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 83 
 
 the liofht to shine out of darkness, 
 
 6. For God, who commanded, &c. 
 The design of this verse seems to be, to 
 give a reason why Paul and his fellow- 
 apostles did not preach themselves, but 
 Jesus Christ the Lord. ver. 5. That 
 reason was, that their minds had been 
 so illuminated by that God who had 
 commanded the light to shine out of 
 darkness, that they had discerned the 
 glory of the divine perfections shining 
 in and through the Redeemer, and they 
 therefore gave themselves to the work 
 of making him known among men. 
 The doctrines which they preached they 
 had not derived from men in any form. 
 They had not been elaborated by human 
 reasoning or science, nor had they been 
 imparted by tradition. They had been 
 communicated directly by the source of 
 all light — the true God — who had 
 shined into the hearts that were once 
 benighted by sin. Having been thus 
 illuminated, they had felt themselves 
 bound to go and make known to others 
 the truths which God had imparted to 
 them. \ Who commanded the light, 
 &c. Gen. i. 3. God caused it to shine 
 by his simple command. He said " let 
 there be light, and there was light." 
 The fact that it was produced by his 
 saying so is referred to here by Paul by 
 nis use of the phrase (o tlvrlv) " Who 
 saying," or speaking the light to shine 
 from darkness. The passage in Genesis 
 is adduced by Longinus as a striking 
 instance of the sublime, t Hath shined 
 in our hearts. Marg. "It is he who 
 hath." This is more in accordance 
 with the Greek, and the sense is, 
 ' The God who at the creation bade 
 the light to shine out of darkness, is he 
 who has shined into our hearts ; or it is 
 the same God who has illuminated us, 
 who commanded the light to shine at 
 the creation.' Light is everywhere in 
 the Bible the emblem of knowledge, 
 purity, and truth ; as darkness is the 
 emblem of ignorance, error, sin, and 
 wretchedness. See Note, John i. 4, 5. 
 And the sense here is, that God had 
 removed this ignorance, and poured a 
 
 flood of light and truth on their minds. 
 This passage teaches, therefore, the 
 following important truths in regard to 
 Christians — since it is as applicable to 
 all Christians, as it was to the apostles. 
 (1.) That the mind is by nature igno- 
 rant and benighted — to an extent which 
 may be properly compared with the 
 darkness which prevailed before God 
 commanded the light to shine. Indeed, 
 the darkness which prevailed before the 
 light was formed, was a most striking 
 emblem of the darkness which exists in 
 the mind of man before it is enlightened 
 by revelation, and by the Holy Spirit. 
 For (a) In all minds by nature there is 
 deep ignorance of God, of his law, and 
 his requirements ; and (b) This is often 
 greatly deepened by the course of life 
 which men lead; by their education; or 
 by their indulgence in sin, and by their 
 plans of life ; and especially by the in- 
 dulgence of evil passions. The ten- 
 dency of man if left to himself is to 
 plunge into deeper darkness, and to 
 involve his mind more entirely in the 
 obscurity of moral midnight. " Light 
 is come into the world, and men loved 
 darkness rather than light, because their 
 deeds were evil." John iii. 19. (2.) 
 This verse teaches the fact, that the 
 minds of Christians are illuminated. 
 They are enabled to see things as they 
 are. This fact is often taught in the 
 Scriptures. See 1 John ii. 20. 1 Cor. 
 ii. 12 — 15. They have different views 
 of things from their fellow-men, and 
 different from what they once had. 
 They perceive a beauty in religion 
 which others do not see, and a glory in 
 truth, and in the Saviour, and in the 
 promises of the gospel, which they did 
 not see before they were converted. 
 This does not mean (a) That they are 
 superior in their powers of understand- 
 ing to other men — for the reverse is 
 often the fact ; nor (b) That the effect 
 of religion is at once to enlarge their 
 own intellectual powers, and make them, 
 different from what they were before in 
 this respect. But it means that they have 
 
84 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 1 hath shined in our hearts, to 
 give the light of the knowledge 
 
 it is he who hath. 
 
 clear and consistent views ; they look at 
 things as they are ; they perceive a beauty 
 in religion and in the service of God which 
 they did not before. They see a beauty in 
 the Bible, and in the doctrines of the Bible, 
 which thoy did not before, and which sin- 
 ners do not see. The temperate man will 
 see a beauty in temperance, and in an ar- 
 gument for temperance, which the drunk- 
 ard will not ; the benevolent man will see a 
 beauty in benevolence which the churl 
 will not; and so of honesty, truth, and 
 chastity. And especially will a man who 
 \& reformed from intemperance, impurity, 
 dishonesty, and avarice, see a beauty in a 
 virtuous life which he did not before see. 
 There is indeed no immediate and direct 
 enlargement of the intellect ; but there is 
 an effect on the heart which produces an 
 appropriate and indirect effect on the un- 
 derstanding. It is at the same time true, 
 that the practice of virtue, that a pure 
 heart, and that the cultivation of piety ail 
 tend to regulate, strengthen, and expand 
 the intellect, as the ways of vice and the 
 indulgence of evil passions and propensi- 
 ties tend to enfeeble, paralyze, darken, 
 and ruin the understanding; so that, 
 other things being equal, the man of 
 most decided virtue, and most calm and 
 elevated piety, will be the man of the 
 clearest and best regulated mind. His 
 powers will be most assiduously, care- 
 fully, and conscientiously cultivated, 
 and he will feel himself bound to make 
 the most of them. — The influence of 
 piety in giving light to the mind is 
 often strikingly manifested among un- 
 lettered and ignorant Christians. It 
 often happens, as a matter of fact, that 
 they have by far clearer, and more just 
 and elevated views of truth than men 
 of the most mighty intellects, and most 
 highly cultivated by science and adorned 
 with learning, but who have no piety ; 
 and a practical acquaintance with their 
 own hearts, and a practical experience 
 of the power of religion in the days of 
 temptation and trial is a better en- 
 lightener of the mind on the subject of 
 
 of the glory of God in the face 
 of Jesus Christ. 
 
 religion than all the learning of the 
 schools. (3.) This verse teaches, that 
 it is the same God who enlightens the 
 mind of the Christian that commanded 
 the light at first to shine. He is the 
 source of all light. He formed the 
 light in the natural world ; he gives all 
 light and truth on all subjects to the 
 understanding ; and he imparts all cor- 
 rect views of truth to the heart. Light 
 is not originated by man ; and man on 
 the subject of religion no more creates 
 the light which beams upon his be- 
 nighted mind than he created the light 
 of the sun when it first shed its beams 
 over the darkened earth. " All truth is 
 from the sempiternal source of light di- 
 vine ;" and it is no more the work of man 
 to enlighten the mind, and dissipate the 
 darkness from the soul of a benighted 
 sinner, than it was of man to scatter the 
 darkness that brooded over the creation, 
 or than he can now turn the shades of 
 midnight to noonday. All this work 
 lies beyond the proper province of man ; 
 and is all to be traced to the agency of 
 God — the great fountain of light. (4.) 
 It is taught here that it is the same 
 power that gives light to the mind of 
 the Christian which at first commanded 
 the light to shine out of darkness. It 
 requires the exertion of the same Omni- 
 potence ; and the change is often as 
 remarkable, and surprising. — Nothing 
 can be conceived to be more grand than 
 the first creation of light — when by one 
 word the whole solar system was in a 
 blaze. And nothing in the moral world 
 is more grand than when by a word 
 God commands the light to beam on the 
 soul of a benighted sinner. Night is at 
 once changed to day ; and all things are 
 seen in a blaze of glory. The works 
 of God appear different; the word of 
 God appears different ; and a new as- 
 pect of beauty is diffused over all things. 
 — If it be asked in what wax God 
 thus imparts light to the mind, we may 
 reply, (1.) By his written and preached 
 word. All spiritual and saving light to 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 85 
 
 the minds of men has come through his 
 revealed truth. Nor does the Spirit of 
 God now give or reveal any light to 
 the mind which is not to be found in 
 the word of God, and which is not im- 
 parted through that medium. (2.) 
 God makes use of his providential deal- 
 ings to give light to the minds of men. 
 They are then, by sickness, disappoint- 
 ment, and pain, made to see the folly 
 and vanity of the things of this world, 
 and to see the necessity of a better por- 
 tion. (3.) It is done especially and 
 mainly by the influences of the Holy 
 Spirit. It is directly by his agency that 
 the heart becomes affected, and the mind 
 enlightened. It is his province in the 
 world to prepare the heart to receive the 
 truth ; to dispose the mind to attend to 
 it; to remove the obstructions which 
 existed to its clear perception ; to enable 
 the mind clearly to see the beauty of 
 truth, and of the plan of salvation 
 through a Redeemer. And whatever 
 may be the means which may be used, 
 it is still true that it is only by the Spirit 
 of God that men are ever brought to see 
 the truth clearly and brightly. The 
 same Spirit that inspired the prophets 
 and apostles also illuminates the minds 
 of men now, removes the darkness 
 from their minds, and enables them 
 clearly to discover the truth as it is in 
 Jesus. See Notes, 1 Cor. ii. 10 — 15. 
 t To give the light of the knowledge 
 of the glory of God. This shows the 
 object, or the effect of enlightening the 
 mind. It is that Christians may behold 
 the divine glory. The meaning is, that 
 it is for the purpose of enlightening and 
 instructing them concerning the know- 
 ledge of the glory of God. — Bloomfield. 
 Doddridge renders it, " the lustre of the 
 knowledge of God's glory." Tindal, 
 " to give the light of the knowledge of 
 the glorious God." The sense is, that 
 the purpose of his shining into their 
 hearts was to give light {jr^z ipurtcrjuov) 
 i. e. unto the enlightening ; and the pur- 
 pose of that light was to acquaint them 
 with the knowledge of the divine glory. 
 \ In the face of Jesus Christ. That 
 is, that they might obtain the knowledge 
 of the divine glory as it shines in the 
 
 face of Jesus Christ; or as it is reflected 
 on the face, or the person of the Re- 
 deemer. — There is undoubted allusion 
 here to what is said of Moses (ch. iii. 
 13) when the divine glory was reflected 
 on his face, and produced such a splen- 
 dour and magnificence that the children 
 of Israel could not steadfastly look upon 
 it. The sense here is, that in the face 
 or the person of Jesus Christ the glory 
 of God shone clearly, and the divinity 
 appeared without a vail. The divine 
 perfections, as it were, illuminated him, 
 as the face of Moses was illuminated ; 
 or they shone forth through him, and 
 were seen in him. The word rendered 
 " face" here (^ot^ttoi') may mean either 
 face or person. See Note, ch. ii. 10. 
 The sense is not materially affected 
 whichever translation is preferred. It 
 is, that the divine perfections shone in 
 and through the Redeemer. This re- 
 fers doubtless to the following truths. 
 (1.) That the glory of the divine nature 
 is seen in him, since he is " the bright- 
 ness of his glory, and the express image 
 of his person." Heb. i. 3. And it is in 
 and through him that the glory of the 
 divine perfections are made known. (2.) 
 That the glory of the divine attributes 
 are made known through him, since it 
 is through him that the work of creation 
 was accomplished (John i. 3. Col. i. 
 16) ; and it is by him that the mercy 
 and goodness of God have been mani- 
 fested to men. (3.) That the glory of 
 the divine moral character is seen 
 through him, since when on earth he 
 manifested the embodied divine perfec- 
 tions; he showed what God is when 
 incarnate ; he lived as became the in- 
 carnate God — he was as pure and holy 
 in human nature as God is in the 
 heavens. And there is not, that we 
 know of, one of the divine attributes or 
 perfections which has not at some period, 
 or in some form, been evinced by Jesus 
 Christ. If it be the prerogative of God 
 to be eternal, he was eternal. Isa. ix. 6. 
 Rev. i. 8. 18. If it be the prerogative 
 of God to be the creator, he was also 
 the creator (Joh» i. 3) ; if to be omni- 
 scient, he was omniscient (Matt. xi. 27 
 Luke x. 22) ; if to be omnipresent, he 
 
II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 7 But we have this treasure 
 
 is omnipresent (Matt, xviii. 20) ; if to 
 be almighty, he was almighty (Isa. ix. 
 6) ; if to raise the dead, to give life, he 
 did it (John v. 21 ; xii. 43, 44); if to 
 still waves and tempests, he did it 
 (Mark iv. 39) ; if to be full of benevo- 
 lence, to be perfectly holy, to be with- 
 out a moral stain or spot, then all this 
 is found in Jesus Christ. And as the 
 wax bears the perfect image of the seal 
 — perfect not only in the outline, and 
 in the general resemblance, but in the 
 filling up — in all the lines, and features, 
 and letters on the seal, so it is with the 
 Redeemer. There is not one of the 
 divine perfections which has not the 
 counterpart in him, and if the glory of 
 the divine character is seen at all, it 
 will be seen in and through him. 
 
 7. But we have this treasure. The 
 treasure of the gospel ; the rich and in- 
 valuable truths which they were called 
 to preach to others. The word " trea- 
 sure" is applied to those truths on ac- 
 count of their inestimable worth. Paul 
 in the previous verses had spoken of 
 the gospel, the knowledge of Jesus 
 Christ, as full of glory, and infinitely 
 precious. This rich blessing had been 
 committed to him and his fellow-la- 
 bourers, to dispense it to others, and to 
 diffuse it abroad. His purpose in this 
 and the following verses is, to show 
 that it had been so intrusted to them as 
 to secure all the glory of its propagation 
 to God, and so also as to show its un- 
 speakable value. For this purpose, he 
 not only affirms that it is a treasure, but 
 says that it had been so intrusted to 
 them as to show the power of God in 
 its propagation ; that it had showed its 
 value in sustaining them in their many 
 trials; and they had showed their 
 sense of its worth by being willing to 
 endure all kinds of trial in order to 
 make it every where known, ver. 8 — 11. 
 The expression here is similar to that 
 which the Saviour uses when he calls 
 the gospel "the pearl of great price." 
 Matt. xiii. 46. ^f In earthen vessels. 
 This refers to the apostles and ministers 
 
 in earthen vessels, that the ex 
 
 of religion, as weak and feeble; as 
 having bodies decaying and dying ; aa 
 fragile, and liable to various accidents, 
 and as being altogether unworthy to 
 hold a treasure so invaluable ; as if 
 valuable diamonds and gold were placed 
 in vessels of earth of coarse composi- 
 tion, easily broken, and liable to decay. 
 The word vessel (a-KiZo^ means properly 
 any utensil or instrument ; and is ap- 
 plied usually to utensils of household 
 furniture or hollow vessels for contain- 
 ing things. Luke viii. 16. John xix. 29. 
 It is applied to the human body, as 
 made of clay, and therefore frail and 
 feeble, with reference to its containing 
 any thing, as, e. g., treasure. Comp. 
 Note on Rom. ix. 22, 23. The word 
 rendered earthen, (ctn^a/yc/?) means 
 that which is made of shells (from 
 iVT£*jc/vcy), and then burnt clay, proba- 
 bly because vessels were at first made 
 of burnt shells. It is fitted well to re- 
 present the human body ; frail, fragile, 
 and easily reduced again to dust. The 
 purpose of Paul here is, to show that it 
 was by no excellency of his nature that 
 the gospel was originated ; it was in 
 virtue of no vigour and strength which 
 he possessed that it was propagated ; 
 but that it had been, of design, com- 
 mitted by God to weak, decaying, and 
 crumbling instruments, in order that it 
 might be seen that it was by the power 
 of God that such instruments were sus- 
 tained in the trials to which they were 
 exposed, and in order that it might be 
 manifest to all that it was not originated 
 and diffused by the power of those to 
 whom it was intrusted. The idea is, 
 that they were altogether insufficient 
 of their own strength to accomplish 
 what was accomplished by the gospel. 
 Paul uses a metaphor similar to this in 
 2 Tim. ii. 20. 1 That the excellency 
 of the power. An elegant expression, 
 denoting the exceeding great power. 
 The great power referred to here was 
 that which was manifested in connexion 
 with the labours of the apostles — the 
 power of healing the sick, raising the 
 
A.D.60.] 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 87 
 
 cellency a of the power may be 
 of God, and not of us. 
 
 a 1 Co. 2. 5. 
 
 dead, and casting out devils ; the power 
 of bearing persecution and trial, and the 
 power of carrying the gospel over sea and 
 land, in the midst of danger, and in 
 spite of all the opposition which men 
 could make whether as individuals or as 
 combined ; and especially the power of 
 converting the hearts of sinners, of 
 humbling the proud, and leading the 
 guilty to the knowledge of God, and the 
 hope of heaven. The idea is, that all 
 this was manifestly beyond human 
 strength ; and that God had of design 
 chosen weak and feeble instruments in 
 order that it might be everywhere seen 
 that it was done not by human power 
 but by his own. The instrumentality 
 employed was altogether disproportion- 
 ate in its nature to the effect produced. 
 ^ May be of God. May evidently 
 appear to be of God; that it may be 
 manifest to all that it is God's power, 
 and not ours. It was one great pur- 
 pose of God that this should be kept 
 clearly in view. And it is still done. 
 God takes care that this shall be appa- 
 rent. For, (1.) It is always true, 
 whoever is employed, and however 
 great may be the talents, learning, or 
 zeal of those who preach, that it is by 
 the power of God that men are convert- 
 ed. Such a work cannot be accom- 
 plished by man. It is not by might or 
 by strength ; and between the conversion 
 of" a proud, haughty, and abandoned 
 sinner and the power of him who is 
 made the instrument, there is such a 
 manifest disproportion, that it is evident 
 it is the work of God. The conversion 
 of the human heart is not to be ac- 
 complished by man. (2.) Ministers 
 are frail, imperfect, and sinful, as they 
 were in the time of Paul. When the 
 imperfections of ministers are consider- 
 ed; when their frequent errors, and 
 their not unfrequent moral obliquities 
 are contemplated; when it is remem- 
 bered how far many of them live from 
 what they ought to, and how few of 
 
 8 We are troubled b on every 
 side, yet not distressed ; we are 
 
 b c. 7. 5. 
 
 them live in any considerable degree as 
 becometh the followers of the Redeem- 
 er, it is wonderful that God blesses their 
 labours as he does ; and the matter of 
 amazement is not that no more are con- 
 verted under their ministry, but it is 
 that so many are converted, or that any 
 are converted ; and it is manifest that 
 it is the mere power of God. (3.) He 
 often makes use of the most feeble, and 
 unlearned, and weak of his servants to 
 accomplish the greatest effects. It is 
 not splendid talents, or profound learn- 
 ing, or distinguished eloquence that is 
 always or even commonly most suc- 
 cessful. Often the ministry of such is 
 entirely barren; while some humble 
 and obscure man shall have constant 
 success, and revivals shall attend him 
 wherever he goes. It is the man of 
 faith, and prayer, and self-denial that is 
 blessed ; and the purpose of God in the 
 ministry, as in every thing else, is to 
 " stain the pride of all human glory" 
 and to show that he is all in all. 
 
 8. We are troubled. We the apos- 
 tles. Paul here refers to some of the 
 trials to which he and his fellow- 
 labourers were subjected in making 
 known the gospel. The design for 
 which he does it seems to be to show 
 them, (1.) What they endured in 
 preaching the truth; (2.) To show the 
 sustaining power of that gospel in the 
 midst of afflictions ; and, (3.) To con- 
 ciliate their favour, or to remind them 
 that they had endured these things on 
 their account, ver. 12 — 15. Perhaps 
 one leading design was to recover the 
 affections of those of the Corinthians 
 whose hearts had been alienated from 
 him, by showing them how much he 
 had endured on their account. For 
 this purpose he freely opens his heart to 
 them, and tenderly represents the many 
 and grievous pressures and hardships 
 to which love to souls, and theirs among 
 the rest, had exposed him. — Doddridge. 
 The whole passage is one of the most 
 

 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 perplexed, but not * in despair ; 
 
 » or, nut altogether without help or 
 
 pathetic and beautiful to be found in 
 the New Testament. The word ren- 
 dered troubled (d-hiSoutvot, from $-Kifia>) 
 may have reference to wrestling, or to 
 the contests in the Grecian games. It 
 properly means, to press, to press 
 together ; then to press as in a crowd 
 where there is a throng (Mark iii. 9) ; 
 then to compress together (Matt. vii. 14) ; 
 and then to oppress, or compress with 
 evils, to distress, to afflict. 2 Thess. i. 6. 
 2 Cor. i. 6. Here it may mean, that he 
 was encompassed with trials, or placed 
 in the midst of them, so that they 
 pressed upon him as persons do in a 
 crowd, or, possibly, as a man was close 
 pressed by an adversary in the games. 
 He refers to the fact that he was called 
 to endure a great number of trials and 
 afflictions. Some of those trials he re- 
 fers to in ch. vii. 5. " When we were 
 come into Macedonia, our flesh had no 
 rest, but we were troubled on every 
 side ; without were fightings, within 
 were fears." ^ On every side. In 
 every respect. In every way. We are 
 subjected to all kinds of trial and afflic- 
 tion. % Yet not distressed. This by 
 no means expresses the force of the 
 original ; nor is it possible perhaps to 
 express it in a translation. Tindal 
 renders it, " yet we are not without our 
 shift." The Greek word here used 
 (<rrevc,%u^'ju&Gi) has a relation to the 
 word which is rendered " troubled." 
 It properly means to crowd into a nar- 
 row place ; to straiten as to room ; to 
 be so straitened as not to be able to turn 
 one's self. And the idea is, that though 
 he was close pressed by persecutions 
 and trials, yet he was not so hemmed 
 in that he had no way to turn himself; 
 his trials did not wholly prevent motion 
 and action. He was not so closely 
 pressed as a man would be who was so 
 straitened that he could not move his 
 body, or stir hand or foot. He had 
 still resources; he was permitted to 
 move ; the energy of his piety, and the 
 vigour of his soul could not be entirely 
 cramped and impeded by the trials which 
 
 9 Persecuted, but not forsak- 
 en ; cast down, but not destroyed; 
 
 encompassed him. The Syriac renders it, 
 "In all things we are pressed, but are 
 not suffocated." The idea is, he was* 
 not wholly discouraged, and dishearten- 
 ed, and overcome. He had resources 
 in his piety which enabled him to bear 
 up under these trials, and still to engage 
 in the work of preaching the gospel. 
 | Weareperplrxed (uTtgovjuivct). This 
 word (from a7rc^, without resource, 
 which is derived from st, priv., and ?rogos, 
 way, or exit) means to be without re- 
 source; to know not what to do; to 
 hesitate ; to be in doubt and anxiety, as 
 a traveller is, who is ignorant of the 
 way, or who has not the means of 
 prosecuting his journey. It means 
 here, that they were often brought into 
 circumstances of great embarrassment, 
 where they hardly knew what to do, or 
 what course to take. They were sur- 
 rounded by foes; they were in want; 
 they were in circumstances which they 
 had not anticipated, and which greatly 
 perplexed them. ^ But not in despair. 
 In the margin, " not altogether without 
 help or means." Tindal renders this, 
 '*' We are in poverty, but not utterly 
 without somewhat." In the word here 
 used,(i{;x7r&govjutvci) the preposition is in- 
 tensive or emphatic, and means utterly, 
 quite. The word means to be utterly 
 without resource ; to despair altogether ; 
 and the idea of Paul here is, that they 
 were not left entirely without resource. 
 Their wants were provided for; their 
 embarrassments were removed ; their 
 grounds of perplexity were taken away; 
 and unexpected strength and resources 
 were imparted to them. When they 
 did not know what to do ; when all re- 
 sources seemed to fail them, in some 
 unexpected manner they would be re- 
 lieved and saved from absolute despair 
 How often does this occur in the lives 
 of all Christians ! And how certain is 
 it, that in all such cases God will inter- 
 pose by his grace and aid his people, and 
 save them from absolute despair. 
 
 9. Persecuted. Often persecuted 
 persecuted in all places. The " Acts 
 
4. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 89 
 
 10 Always beariug ° about in 
 
 a Ga. 6. 17. 
 
 of the Apostles" show how true this 
 was. % But not forsaken. Not de- 
 serted ; not left by God. Though per- 
 secuted by men, yet they experienced 
 the fulfilment of the divine promise that 
 h ) would never leave or forsake them. 
 God always interposed to aid them ; 
 aiways saved them from the power of 
 their enemies; always sustained them 
 in the time of persecution. It is still 
 true. His people have been often per- 
 secuted. Yet God has often interposed 
 to save them from the hands of their 
 enemies ; and where he has not saved 
 them from their hands, and preserved 
 their fives, yet he has never left them, 
 but has sustained, upheld, and comforted 
 them even in the dreadful agonies of 
 death, t Cast down. Thrown down 
 by our enemies, perhaps in allusion to 
 the contests of wrestlers, or of gladia- 
 tors. % But not destroyed. Not killed. 
 They rose again ; they recovered their 
 strength ; they were prepared for new 
 conflicts. They surmounted every 
 difficulty, and were ready to engage in 
 new strifes, and to meet new trials and 
 persecutions. 
 
 10. Always bearing about in the 
 body. The expression here used is de- 
 signed to show the great perils to which 
 Paul was exposed. And the idea is, 
 that he had on his body the marks, the 
 stripes and marks of punishment and 
 persecution, which showed that he was 
 exposed to the same violent death which 
 the Lord Jesus himself endured. Comp. 
 Gal. vi. 17 : "I bear in my body the 
 marks of the Lord Jesus." It is a strong 
 energetic mode of expression, to denote 
 the severity of the trials to which he 
 was exposed, and the meaning is, that 
 his body bore the marks of his being 
 exposed to the same treatment as the 
 Lord Jesus was ; and evidence that he 
 was probably yet to die in a similar 
 manner under the hands of persecutors. 
 Comp. Col. i. 24. ^ The dying of the 
 Lord Jesus. The death ; the violent 
 death. A death similar to that of the 
 Lord Jesus. The idea is, that he was 
 
 the body the dying of the Lord 
 
 always exposed to death, and always 
 suffering in a manner that was equiva- 
 lent to dying. The expression is par- 
 allel to what he says in 1 Cor. xv. 31. 
 " I die daily f and in 2 Cor. xi. 23, 
 where he says, "in deaths oft." It does 
 not mean that he bore about literally 
 the dying of the Lord Jesus, but that 
 he was exposed to a similar death, and 
 had marks on his person which showed 
 that he was always exposed to the same 
 violent death. This did not occur once 
 only, or at distant intervals, but it oc- 
 curred constantly, and wherever he was 
 it was still true that he was exposed to 
 violence, and liable to suffer in the 
 same manner that the Lord Jesus did, 
 U That the life also of Jesus, &c. This 
 passage has received a considerable 
 variety of interpretation. Grotius ren- 
 ders it, " such a life as was that of Christ, 
 immortal, blessed, heavenly." Locke 
 " That also the life of Jesus, risen from 
 the dead may be made manifest bj' the 
 energy that accompanies my preaching 
 in this frail body." Clarke supposes 
 that it means, that he might be able in 
 this manner to show that Christ was 
 risen from the dead. But perhaps, 
 Paul does not refer to one single thing 
 in the life of the Lord Jesus, but means 
 that he did this in order that in all 
 things the same life, the same kind of 
 living which characterized the Lord 
 Jesus might be manifested in him; or 
 that he resembled him in his sufferings 
 and trials, in order that in all things he 
 might have the same life in his body. 
 Perhaps, therefore, it may include the 
 following things as objects at which the 
 apostle aimed. (1.) A desire that his 
 life might resemble that of the Lord 
 Jesus. That there might be the same 
 self-denial; the same readiness to suffer; 
 the same patience in trials ; the same 
 meekness, gentleness, zeal, ardour, love 
 to God, and love to men evinced in his 
 body which was in that of the Lord 
 Jesus. Thus understood, it means that 
 he placed the Lord Jesus before him a9 
 the model of his life, and deemed it an 
 
90 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 
 Jesus, that a the life also of Jesus 
 might be made manifest in our 
 body. 
 
 1 1 For we which live are * 
 alway delivered unto death for 
 
 a 2 Ti. 2. 11, 12. b 1 Co. 15. 31, 49. 
 
 object to be attained even by great self- 
 denial and sufferings to be conformed 
 to him. (2.) A desire to attain to the 
 same life in the resurrection which the 
 Lord Jesus had attained to. A desire 
 to be made like him, and that in his body 
 which bore about the dying of the Lord 
 Jesus, he might asjain live after death as 
 the Lord Jesus did. Thus understood, 
 it implies an earnest wish to attain to 
 the resurrection of the dead and accords 
 with what he says in Phil. iii. 8 — 11, 
 which may perhaps be considered as 
 Paul's own commentary on this passage, 
 which has been so variously, and so 
 little understood by expositors. " Yea, 
 doubtless, and I count all things but 
 loss, for the excellency of the knowledge 
 of Jesus Christ my Lord ; for whom I 
 have suffered the loss of all things, and 
 do count them but dung that I may 
 win Christ. That I may know him, 
 and the power of his resurrection, and 
 the fellowship of his sufferings, being 
 made conformable unto his death ; if by 
 any means I might attain unto the re- 
 surrection of the dead." Comp. Col. i. 
 24. It intimates Paul's earnest desire 
 and longing to be made like Christ in 
 the resurrection (comp. Phil. iii. 21) ; 
 his longing to rise again in the last day 
 (comp. Acts xxvi. 7) ; his sense of the 
 importance of the doctrine of the resur- 
 rection and his readiness to suffer any 
 thing if he might at last attain to the 
 resurrection of the just, and be ready 
 to enter with the Redeemer into a 
 world of glory. The attainment of this 
 is the high object before the Christian, 
 and to be made like the Redeemer in 
 heaven, to have a body like his, is the 
 grand purpose for which they should 
 live ; and sustained by this hope they 
 should be willing to endure any trials, 
 and meet any sufferings, if they may 
 
 Jesus' sake, that the life also of 
 Jesus might be made manifest in 
 our mortal flesh. 
 
 12 So then c death workethin 
 us, but life in you. 
 
 c c. 13. 9. 
 
 come to that same " life" and blessed- 
 ness above. 
 
 1 1. For we which live. Those of us, 
 the apostles and ministers of the Re- 
 deemer who still survive. James the 
 brother of John had been put to death 
 (Acts xii. 2) ; and it is probable also 
 that some other of the apostles had been 
 also. This verse is merely explanatory 
 of the previous verse. % Are ahvay 
 delivered unto death. Exposed con- 
 stantly to death. This shows what is 
 meant in ver. 10, by bearing about in 
 the body the dying of the Lord Jesus. 
 See Note on 1 Cor. xv. 31. If In our 
 mortal flesh. In our body. In our 
 life on earth ; and in our glorified body 
 in heaven. See Note on ver. 10. 
 
 12. So then death worheth in us. 
 We are exposed to death. The preach- 
 ing of the gospel exposes us to trials 
 which may be regarded as death work- 
 ing in us. Death has an energy over 
 us (ivigyurai, is at work, is active, or 
 operates) ; it is constantly employed in 
 inflicting pains on us, and subjecting us 
 to privation and trials. This is a strong 
 and emphatic mode of saying that they 
 were always exposed to death. We are 
 called to serve and glorify the Redeem- 
 er, as it were, by repeated deaths and 
 by constantly dying. ^ But life in you. 
 You live as the effect of our being con- 
 stantly exposed to death. You reap the 
 advantage of all our exposure to trials, 
 and of all our sufferings. You are com- 
 paratively safe ; are freed from this ex- 
 posure to death ; and will receive eternal 
 life as the fruit of our toils, and exposures. 
 Life here may refer either to exemption 
 from danger and death ; or it may refer 
 to the life of religion ; the hopes of 
 piety ; the prospect of eternal salvation. 
 To me it seems most probable that Paul 
 means to use it in the latter sense, and 
 
A. D.60.J 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 91 
 
 13 We having the same a spirit 
 of faith, according as it is writ- 
 
 a2Pe. 1. 
 
 b Ps. 116. 10. 
 
 that he designs to say that while he was 
 exposed to death and called to endure 
 constant trial, the effect would be that 
 they would obtain, in consequence of 
 his sufferings, the blessedness of eternal 
 life. Comp. ver. 15. Thus understood, 
 this passage means, that the sufferings 
 and self-denials of the apostles were for 
 the good of others, and would result in 
 their benefit and salvation ; and the de- 
 sign of Paul here is to remind them of 
 his sufferings in their behalf, in order 
 to conciliate their favour and bind them 
 more closely to him by the remembrance 
 of his sufferings on their account. 
 
 13. We having the same spirit of 
 faith. The same spirit that is express- 
 ed in the quotation which he is about 
 to make ; the same faith which the 
 psalmist had. We have the very spirit 
 of faith which is expressed by David. 
 The sense is, we have the same spirit 
 of faith which he had who said, " I be- 
 lieved,'' <fec. The phrase " spirit of 
 faith," means substantially the same as 
 faith itself; a believing sense or im- 
 pression of the truth, 1 According as 
 it is written. This passage is found in 
 Ps. cxvi. 10. When the psalmist ut- 
 tered the words, he was greatly afflicted. 
 See ver. 3. 6 — 8. In these circumstances, 
 he prayed to God, and expressed con- 
 fidence in him, and placed all his reli- 
 ance on him. In his affliction he spoke 
 to God; he spoke of his confidence in 
 him; he proclaimed his reliance on 
 him ; and his having spoken in this 
 manner was the result of his belief, or 
 of his putting confidence in God. Paul, 
 in quoting this, does not mean to say 
 that the psalmist had any reference to 
 the preaching of the gospel ; nor does 
 he mean to say that his circumstances 
 were in all respects like those of the 
 psalmist. 1 he circumstances resembled 
 each other only in these respects, (1.) 
 That Paul, like the psalmist, was in 
 circumstances of trial and affliction; 
 
 have I spoken ; we also believe 
 and therefore speak ; 
 
 14 Knowing c that he which 
 
 c c. 5. 1—4. 
 
 and, (2.) That the language which both 
 used was that which was prompted by 
 faith — faith, which led them to give 
 utterance to the sentiments of their 
 hearts ; the psalmist to utter his confi- 
 dence in God, and the hopes by which 
 he was sustained, and Paul to utter his 
 belief in the glorious truths of the gos- 
 pel ; to speak of a risen Saviour and to 
 show forth the consolations which were 
 thus set before men in the gospel. The 
 sentiments of both were the language of 
 faith. Both, in afflictions, uttered the 
 language of faith ; and Paul uses here, 
 as he often does, the language of the 
 Old Testament, as exactly expressing 
 his feelings, and the principles by which 
 he was actuated. *[ We also believe, 
 &c. We believe in the truths of the 
 gospel; we believe in God, in the 
 Saviour, in the atonement, in the re- 
 surrection, &c. The sentiment is, that 
 they had a firm confidence in these 
 things, and that, as the result of that 
 confidence they boldly delivered their 
 sentiments. It prompted them to give 
 utterance to their feelings. " Out of the 
 abundance of the heart," said the Sa- 
 viour, " the mouth speaketh." Matt. xii. 
 34. No man should attempt to preach 
 the gospel who has not a firm belief of 
 its truths; and he who does believe its 
 truths will be prompted to make them 
 known to his fellow-men. All success- 
 ful preaching is the result of a firm and 
 settled conviction of the truth of the 
 gospel; and when such a conviction 
 exists, it is natural to give utterance to 
 the belief, and such an expression will 
 be attended with happy influences on 
 the minds of other men. See Note on 
 Acts iv. 20. 
 
 11. Knowing. Being fully confi- 
 dent ; having the most entire assurance. 
 It was the assured hope of the resurrec- 
 tion which sustained them in all their 
 trials. This expression denotes the 
 full and unwavering belief, in the minds 
 
99 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 raised up the Lord Jesus, shall 
 raise up us also by Jesus, and 
 shall present us with you. 
 
 15 For a all things are for 
 your sakes, that the abundant 
 
 a 1 Co. 3. 21, 22. 
 
 of the apostles, that the doctrines which 
 they preached were true. They knew 
 that they were revealed from heaven, 
 and that all the promises of God would 
 be fulfilled. 1 Shall raise up us also. 
 All Christians. In the hope of the re- 
 surrection they were ready to meet 
 trials, and even to die. Sustained by 
 this assurance, the apostles went forth 
 amidst persecutions and opposition, for 
 they knew that their trials would soon 
 end, and that they would be raised up 
 in the morning of the resurrection, to a 
 world of eternal glory. ^ By Jesus. 
 By the power or the agency of Jesus. 
 Christ will raise up the dead from their 
 graves. John v. 25 — 29. *f And shall 
 present us with you. Will present us 
 before the throne of glory with exceed- 
 ing joy and honour. He will present 
 us to God as those who have been re- 
 deemed by his biood. He will present 
 us in the courts of heaven, before the 
 throne of the eternal Father, as his 
 ransomed people ; as recovered from the 
 ruins of the fall ; as saved by the merits 
 of his blood. They shall not only be 
 raised up from the dead; but they shall 
 be publicly and solemnly presented to 
 God as his, as recovered to his service, 
 and as having a title in the covenant of 
 grace to the blessedness of heaven. 
 
 1 5. For all things are for your sakes. 
 All these things ; these glorious hopes, 
 and truths, and prospects ; these self- 
 denials of the apostles, and these provi- 
 sions of the plan of mercy. ^ For 
 your sakes. On your account. They 
 are designed to promote your salvation. 
 They are not primarily for the welfare 
 of those who engage in these toils and 
 self-denials; but the whole arrangement 
 and execution of the plan of salvation, 
 and all the self-denial evinced by those 
 who are engaged in making that plan 
 known, are in order that you might be 
 
 grace b might, through the thanks- 
 giving of many, redound to the 
 glory of God. 
 
 16 For which cause c we faint 
 not; but though our outward 
 
 b c. 8. 19. c 1 Co. 15. 58. 
 
 benefited. One object of Paul in this 
 statement, doubtless, is, to conciliate 
 their favour, and remove the objections 
 which had been made to him by a fac- 
 tion in the church at Corinth. ^ That 
 the abundant grace. Grace abounding, 
 or overflowing. The rich mercy of 
 God that should be manifested by these 
 means. It is implied here, that grace 
 would abound by means of these labours 
 and self-denials of the apostles. The 
 grace referred to here is that which 
 would be conferred on them in conse- 
 quence of these labours. ^ Through 
 the thanksgiving of many. That many 
 may have occasion of gratitude to God ; 
 that by these labours more persons may 
 be led to praise him. It was an object 
 with Paul so to labour that as many as 
 possible might be led to praise God, and 
 have occasion to thank him to all eter- 
 nity. % Redound to the glory of God. 
 That God may have augmented praise ; 
 that his glory in the salvation of men 
 may abound. The sentiment of the 
 passage is, that it would be for the glory 
 of God that as many as possible should 
 be brought to give praise and thanks- 
 givings to him ; and that, therefore, Paul 
 endeavoured to make as many converts 
 as possible. He denied himself; he 
 welcomed toil ; he encountered enemies ; 
 he subjected himself to dangers ; and 
 he sought by all means possible to bring 
 as many as could be brought to piaise 
 God. The word *' redound" (V^^ti/a) 
 here means abound, or be abundant; 
 and the sense is, that the overflowing 
 grace thus evinced in the salvation oj 
 many would so abound as to promote 
 the glory of God. 
 
 16. For which cause. With such 
 an object in view, and sustained by 
 such elevated purposes and desires 
 The sense .s, that the purpose of trying 
 to save as many a* possible would make 
 
A D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 93 
 
 man perish, yet the inward a man 
 is renewed day by day. 
 
 a Ro. 7. 22. 
 
 toil easy, privations welcome, and would 
 be so accompanied by the grace of God, 
 as to gird the soul with strength, and 
 fill it with abundant consolations, f We 
 faint not. For an explanation of the 
 word here used, see Note on ver. 1. 
 We are not exhausted, desponding, or 
 disheartened. We are sustained, en- 
 couraged, emboldened by having such 
 an object' in view. 1 But though our 
 outward man perish. By outward 
 man, Paul evidently means the body. 
 By using the phrases, " the outward 
 man," and the " inward man," he shows 
 that he believed that man was made up 
 of two parts, body and soul. He was 
 no materialist. He has described two 
 parts as constituting man, so distinct, 
 that while the one perishes, the other is 
 renewed; while the one is enfeebled, 
 the other is strengthened; while the 
 one grows old and decays, the other re- 
 news its youth and is invigorated. Of 
 course, the soul is not dependent on the 
 body for its vigour and strength, since 
 it expands while the body decays ; and 
 of course the soul may exist independ- 
 ently of the body, and in a separate 
 state. 1 Perish. Grows old ; becomes 
 weak and feeble ; loses its vigour and 
 elasticity under the many trials which 
 we endure, and under the infirmities of 
 advancing years. It is a characteristic 
 of the " outer man," that it thus perish- 
 es. Great as may be its vigour, yet it 
 must decay and die. It cannot long 
 bear up under the trials of life, and the 
 wear and tear of constant action, but 
 must soon sink to the grave, f Yet 
 the inward man. The soul; the un- 
 decaying, the immortal part, f Is re- 
 newed. Is renovated, strengthened, in- 
 vigorated. His powers of mind ex- 
 panded ; his courage became bolder; he 
 had clearer views of truth ; he had more 
 faith in God. As he drew nearer to 
 the grave and to heaven, his soul was 
 more raised above the world and he 
 was more filled with the joys and tri- 
 
 17 For b our light affliction, 
 which is but for a moment, 
 
 b Ro. 8. 18, 34. 
 
 umphs of the gospel. The understand- 
 ing and the heart did not sympathize 
 with the suffering and decaying body ; 
 but, while that became feeble, the soul 
 acquired new strength, and was fitting 
 for its flight to the eternal world. This 
 verse is an ample refutation of the doc- 
 trine of the materialist, and proves that 
 there is in man something that is dis- 
 tinct from decaying and dying matter, 
 and that there is a principle which may 
 gain augmented strength and power, 
 while the body dies. Comp. Note, Rom. 
 vii. 22. Tf Day by day. Constantly. 
 There was a daily and constant increase 
 of inward vigour. God imparted to 
 him constant strength in his trials, and 
 sustained him with the hopes of heaven, 
 as the body was decaying, and tending 
 to the grave. The sentiment of this 
 verse is, that in an effort to do good, 
 and to promote the salvation of man, the 
 soul will be sustained in trials, and will 
 be comforted and invigorated even when 
 the body is weary, grows old, decays, 
 and dies. It is the testimony of Paul 
 respecting his own experience; and it 
 is a fact which has been experienced 
 by thousands in their efforts to do good, 
 and to save the souls of men from death. 
 17. For our light affliction. This 
 verse, with the following, is designed 
 to show further the sources of conso- 
 lation and support which Paul and 
 his fellow-labourers had in their many 
 trials. Bloomfield remarks on this pas- 
 sage, that " in energy and beauty of ex- 
 pression, it is little inferior to any in 
 Demosthenes himself, to whom, indeed, 
 and to Thucydides ' in his orations, the 
 style of the apostle, when it rises to the 
 oratorical, bears no slight resemblance." 
 The passage abounds with intensive and 
 emphatic expressions, and manifests that 
 the mind of the writer was labouring to 
 convey ideas which language, even after 
 all the energy of expression which he 
 could command, would very imperfectly 
 communicate. The trials which Paul 
 
II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 
 worketh for us a far more exceed- 
 
 endured, to many persons would have 
 seemed to be any thing else but light. 
 They consisted of want, and danger, 
 and contempt, and stoning, and toil, 
 and weariness, and the scorn of the 
 world, and constant exposure to death 
 by land or by sea. See ver. 7 — 10. 
 comp. ch. xi. 23 — 27. Yet these trials, 
 though continued through many years, 
 and constituting, as it were, his very 
 life, he speaks of as the lightest con- 
 ceivable thing when compared with that 
 eternal glory which awaited him. He 
 strives to get an expression as emphatic 
 as possible to show that in his estima- 
 tion they were not worthy to be named 
 in comparison with the eternal weight 
 of glory. It is not sufficient to say that 
 the affliction was " light" or was a 
 mere trifle ; but he says that it was to 
 endure but for a moment. Though 
 trials had followed him ever since he 
 began to make known the Redeemer, 
 and though he had the firmest expecta- 
 tion that they would follow him to the 
 end of life and everywhere (Acts xx. 
 23), yet all this was a momentary trifle 
 compared with the eternal glory before 
 him. The word rendered "light" 
 («a*<^cv) means that which is easy to 
 bear, and is usually applied to a burden. 
 See Matt. xi. 30. Comp. 2 Cor. i. 17. 
 If Which is but for a moment. The 
 Greek word here used (jra^styTMtci) 
 occurs nowhere else in the New Testa- 
 ment. It is an adverb, from t-jrUst, 
 euros, and means properly, at this very 
 instant; immediately. Here it seems 
 to qualify the word " light," and to be 
 used in the sense of momentary, tran- 
 sient. Bloomfield renders it, " for the 
 at present lightness of our affliction." 
 Doddridge, " for this momentary light- 
 ness of our affliction, which passes off 
 bo fast, and leaves so little impression 
 that it may be called levity itself." The 
 apostle evidently wished to express two 
 ideas in as emphatic a manner as possi- 
 ble; first, that the affliction was light, 
 and, secondly, that it was transient, 
 momentary, and soon passing away. 
 
 ing and eternal weight of glory ; 
 
 His object is to contrast this with the 
 glory that awaited him, as being heavy, 
 and as being also eternal. % Worketh 
 for us. See Note, ver. 12. Will pro- 
 duce, will result in. The effect of these 
 afflictions is to produce eternal glory. 
 This they do, (1.) By their tendency to 
 wean us from the world ; (2.) To purify 
 the heart, by enabling us to break off 
 from the sins on account of which God 
 afflicts us; (3.) By disposing us to look 
 to God for consolation and support in 
 our trials; (4.) By inducing us to con- 
 template the glories of the heavenly 
 world, and thus winning us to seek 
 heaven as our home; and, (5.) Because 
 God has graciously promised to reward 
 his people in heaven as the result of 
 their bearing trials in this life. It is by 
 affliction that he purifies them (Isa. 
 xlviii. 1 0) ; and by trial that he takes 
 their affections from the objects of time 
 and sense, and gives them a relish for 
 the enjoyments which result from the 
 prospect of perfect and eternal glory. 
 t A far more exceeding (k*3-' 0^0^- 
 \m tk vTrt^Qzxvv). There is not to be 
 found anywhere a more energetic ex 
 pression than this. The word (j>s§/3s- 
 a», here used (whence our word hy- 
 perbole) means properly a throwing, 
 casting, or throwing beyond. In the 
 New Testament it means excess, ex- 
 cellence, eminence. See ver. 7. " The 
 excellency of the power." The phrase 
 K&iiTritfe^M means exceedingly, super- 
 eminently. Rom. vii. 13. 1 Cor. xii. 31. 
 2 Cor. i. 8. Gal. i. 13. This expression 
 would have been by itself intensive in a 
 high degree. But this was not sufficient 
 to express Paul's sense of the glory 
 which was laid up for Christians. It 
 was not enough for him to use the ordi- 
 nary highest expression for the superla- 
 tive to denote the value of the object in 
 his eye. He therefore coins an ex- 
 pression, and adds tU vTr^oxm. It is 
 not merely eminent ; but it is eminent 
 unto eminence ; excess unto excess ; a 
 hyperbole unto hyperbole — one hyper- 
 bole heaped on another ; and the ex 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 95 
 
 18 While we look not at the 
 
 pression means that it is "exceeding 
 exceedingly" glorious ; glorious in the 
 highest possible degree. — Robinson. 
 Mr. Slade renders it, " infinitely exceed- 
 ing." The expression is the Hebrew 
 forra of denoting the highest superla- 
 tive* and it means that all hyperboles 
 fail of expressing that eternal glory 
 which remains for the just. It is infi- 
 nite and boundless. You may pass 
 from one degree to another; from one 
 sublime height to another ; but still an 
 infinity remains beyond. Nothing can 
 describe the uppermost height of that 
 glory; nothing can express its infini- 
 tude. If Eternal. This stands in con- 
 trast with the affliction that is for a mo- 
 ment (7r*£xvrix.u.). The one is mo- 
 mentary, transient; so short, even in 
 the longest life, that it may be said to 
 be an instant ; the other has no limits to 
 its duration. It is literally everlasting. 
 •J Weight (/3a£o?). This stands opposed 
 to the (tKxipgov) light affliction. That 
 was so light that it was a trifle. It was 
 easily borne. It was like the most 
 light and airy objects, which constitute 
 no burden. It is not even here called 
 a burden, or said to be heavy in any 
 degree. This is so heavy as to be 
 a burden. Grotius thinks that the 
 image; is taken from gold or silver ar- 
 ticles, that are solid and heavy, compar- 
 ed with those that are mixed or plated. 
 But why may it not refer to the insignia 
 of glory and honour; a robe heavy 
 with gold, or a diadem or crown, 
 heavy with gold or diamonds : glory so 
 rich, so profuse as to be heavy ] The 
 affliction was light ; but the crown, the 
 robe, the adornings in the glorious world 
 were not trifles, or baubles, but solid, 
 substantial, weighty. We apply the 
 word weighty now to that which is 
 valuable and important, compared with 
 that which is of no value, probably be- 
 cause the precious metals and jewels are 
 heavy ; and it is by them that we usually 
 estimate the value of objects. If Of 
 glory (Sofyc). The Hebrew word nu3 
 denotes weight as well as glory. And 
 
 things which are seen, but at the 
 
 perhaps Paul had that use* of the word 
 in his eye in this strong expression. It 
 refers here to the splendour, magnifi- 
 cence, honour, and happiness of the 
 eternal world. — In this exceedingly in- 
 teresting passage, which is worthy of 
 the deepest study of Christians, Paul 
 has set in most beautiful and emphatic 
 contrast the trials of this life and the 
 glories of heaven. It may be profitable 
 to contemplate at a single glance the 
 view which he had of them, that they 
 may be brought distinctly before the 
 mind. 
 
 THE OSTE IS 
 
 1. Affliction, Shifts. 
 
 2. Light, tKupgcv. 
 
 3. For a moment, rrdt£*v7rix,x. 
 
 the otheh is, by contrast, 
 
 (1.) Glory, Jog*. 
 
 (2.) Weight, £^ 9f . 
 (3.) Eternal, m^vm. 
 (4.) Eminent, or excellent, -txS-' jJjregjSi- 
 
 >.yiv. 
 (5.) Infinitely excellent, eminent in the 
 
 highest degree, tl; t/s-reg/2oA»i\ 
 
 So the account stands in the view of 
 Paul; and with this balance in favour 
 of the eternal glory, he regarded afflic- 
 tions as mere trifles, and made it the 
 grand purpose of his life to gain the 
 glory of the heavens. What wise man, 
 looking at the account, would not do 
 likewise 1 
 
 18. While we look, &c. Or, rather, 
 we not looking at the things which are 
 seen. The design of this is, to show in 
 what way the afflictions which they en- 
 dured became in their view light and 
 momentary. It was by looking to the 
 glories of the future world, and thus 
 turning away the attention from the 
 trials and sorrows of this life. If we 
 look directly at our trials; if the mind 
 is fixed wholly on them, and we think 
 of nothing else, they often appear heavy 
 and long. Even comparatively light 
 and brief sufferings will appear to be 
 exceedingly difficult to bear. But if 
 
96 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 things which are not a seen : for 
 the things which are seen are 
 
 * a He. 11. 1. 
 
 we can turn away the mind from them 
 and contemplate future glory ; if we 
 can compare them with eternal blessed- 
 ness, and feel that they will introduce 
 us to perfect and everlasting happiness, 
 they will appear to be transitory, and 
 will be easily borne. And Taul here 
 has stated the true secret of bearing 
 trials with patience. It is to look at the 
 things which are unseen. To anticipate 
 the glories of the heavenly world. To 
 fix the eye on the eternal happiness 
 which is beyond the grave ; and to re- 
 flect how short these trials are, compared 
 with the eternal glories of heaven ; and 
 how short they will seem to be when 
 we are there. *J The things which are 
 seen. The things here below; the 
 things of this life — poverty, want, care, 
 persecution, trial, &c. *| The things 
 which are not seen. The glories of 
 heaven. Comp. Heb. xi. 1. 1 The 
 things which are seen are temporal. 
 This refers particularly to the things 
 which they suffered. But it is as true 
 of all things here below. Wealth, plea- 
 sure, fame, the three idols which the 
 people of this world adore, are all to en- 
 dure but for a little time. They will all 
 soon vanish away. So it is with pain, and 
 sorrow, and tears. All that we enjoy, 
 and all that we suffer here, must soon 
 vanish and disappear. The most 
 splendid palace will decay ; the most 
 costly pile will moulder to dust; the 
 most magnificent city will fall to ruins ; 
 the most exquisite earthly pleasures will 
 soon come to an end ; and the most 
 extended possessions can be enjoyed 
 but a little time. So the acutest pain 
 will soon be over ; the most lingering 
 disease will soon cease ; the evils of 
 the deepest poverty, want, and suffering 
 will soon be passed. There is nothing 
 on which the eye can fix, nothing that 
 the heart can desire here, which will not 
 60on fade away ; or, if it survives, it is 
 temporary in regard to us. We must 
 •oon leive it to others ; and if enjoyed, 
 
 temporal ; but the things which 
 are not seen are eternal. 
 
 it will be enjoyed while our bodies are 
 slumbering in the grave, and our souls 
 engaged in the deep solemnities of 
 eternity. How foolish then to make 
 these our portion, and to fix our affec- 
 tions supremely on the things of this 
 life ! How foolish also to be very deeply 
 affected by the trials of this life, which 
 at the furthest can be endured but a 
 little longer before we shall be forever 
 beyond their reach ! f The things 
 which are not seen are eternal. Every 
 thing which pertains to that state be- 
 yond the grave. (1.) God is eternal; 
 not to leave us as our earthly friends do. 
 (2.) The Saviour is eternal — to be our 
 everlasting friend. (3.) The compan- 
 ions and friends there are eternal. The 
 angels who are to be our associates, and 
 the spirits of the just with whom we 
 shall live, are to exist forever. The 
 angels never die ; and the pious dead 
 shall die no more. There shall be then 
 no separation, no death-bed, no grave, 
 no sad vacancy and loss caused by the 
 removal of a much-loved friend. (4.) 
 The joys of heaven are eternal. There 
 shall be no interruption ; no night ; no 
 cessation ; no end. Heaven and all its 
 joys shall be everlasting ; and he who 
 enters there shall have the assurance 
 that those joys shall endure and increase 
 while eternal ages shall roll away. 
 (5.) It may be added, also, that the 
 woes of hell shall be eternal. They are 
 now among the things which to us 
 " are not seen ;" and they, as well as 
 the joys of heaven, shall have no end. 
 Sorrow there shall never cease ; the soul 
 shall there never die ; the body that 
 shall be raised up " to the resurrection 
 of damnation" shall never again ex- 
 pire. — And when all these things are 
 contemplated, well might Paul say of 
 the things of this life — the sorrows, 
 trials, privations, and persecutions which 
 he endured, that they were "light," 
 and were " for a moment" How soon 
 will they pass away ; how soon shall 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 97 
 
 we all be engaged amidst the unchang- 
 ing and eternal realities of the things 
 which are not seen ! 
 
 REMARKS. 
 
 1. Ministers of the gospel have no 
 cause to faint or to be discouraged ver. 
 1. Whatever may be the reception of 
 their message, and whatever the trials 
 to which they may be subjected, yet 
 there are abundant sources of consola- 
 tion and support in the gospel which 
 they preach. They have the conscious- 
 ness that they preach a system of truth ; 
 that they are proclaiming that which 
 God has revealed ; and, if they are faith- 
 ful, that they have his smiles and appro- 
 bation. Even, therefore, if men reject, 
 and despise their message, and if they 
 are called to endure many privations 
 and trials, they should not faint. It is 
 enough for them that they proclaim the 
 truth which God loves, and that they 
 meet with his approbation and smiles. 
 Trials will come in the ministry as 
 everywhere else, but there are also 
 peculiar consolations. There may be 
 much opposition and resistance to the 
 message, but we should not faint or be 
 discouraged. We should do our duty, 
 and commit the result to God. 
 
 2. The gospel should be embraced 
 by those to whom it comes, ver. 2. If 
 it has their reason and conscience in its 
 favour, then they should embrace it 
 without delay. They are under the 
 most sacred obligation to receive it, and 
 to become decided Christians. Every 
 man is bound, and may be urged to 
 pursue, that course which his conscience 
 approves ; and the gospel may thus be 
 pressed on the attention of all to whom 
 it comes. 
 
 3. If men wish peace of conscience, 
 they should embrace the gospel, ver. 2. 
 They can never find it elsewhere. No 
 man's conscience is at peace from the 
 fact that he does not repent, and love 
 God and obey his gospel. His heart 
 may love sir. ; but his conscience cannot 
 approve it. That is at peace only in 
 doing the wcrk of God ; and that can 
 find self-approbation only when it sub- 
 mits to him, and embraces the gospel 
 
 i 
 
 of his Son. Then the conscience is at 
 ease. No man ever yet had a troubled 
 conscience from the fact that he had 
 embraced the gospel, and was an humble 
 and decided Christian. Thousands and 
 millions have had a troubled conscience 
 from the fact that they have neglected 
 it. No man on a death-bed ever had a 
 troubled conscience because he em- 
 braced religion too early in life. Thou- 
 sands and millions have been troubled 
 when they came to die, because they 
 neglected it so long, or rejected it 
 altogether. No man when death ap- 
 proaches has a troubled conscience 
 because he has lived too much devoted 
 to God the Saviour, and been too active 
 as a Christian. But O how many have 
 been troubled then because they have 
 been worldly-minded, and selfish, and 
 vain, and proud ! The conscience gives 
 peace just in proportion as we serve 
 God faithfully ; nor can all the art of 
 man or Satan give peace to one con- 
 science in the ways of sin, and in the 
 neglect of the soul. 
 
 4. Ministers should preach the truth 
 — the simple truth — and nothing but 
 the truth, ver. 2. They should make 
 use of no false art, no deception, no 
 trick, no disguise. They should be 
 open, sincere, plain, pure in all their 
 preaching, and in their manner of life. 
 Such was the course of the Saviour; 
 such the course of Paul; and such a 
 course only will God approve and bless. 
 
 5. This is a deluded world, ver. 4. It 
 is blinded and deceived by him who is 
 here called the "god of this world." 
 Satan rules in the hearts of men ; and 
 he rules by deceiving them, and in order 
 to deceive them. Every thing which 
 operates to prevent men from embracing 
 the gospel has a tendency to blind the 
 mind. The man who is seeking wealth 
 as his only portion, is blinded and de- 
 ceived in regard to its value. The man 
 who is pursuing the objects of ambition 
 as his main portion, is deceived in regard 
 to the true value of things. And he, or 
 she, who pursues pleasure as the main 
 business of life, is deceived in regard to 
 the proper value of objects. It is im- 
 possible to conceive of a world more 
 
98 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. 1). 
 
 deluded than this. We can conceive 
 of a world more sinful, and more mi- 
 erable, and such is hell ; but there is 
 not delusion and deception there. 
 Things are seen as they are ; and no one 
 is deceived in regard to his character or 
 prospects there. But here, every im- 
 penitent man is deceived and blinded. 
 He is deceived about his own character; 
 about the relative value of objects ; 
 about his prospects for eternity ; about 
 death, the judgment, heaven, hell. On 
 none of these points has he any right 
 apprehension ; and on none is it pos- 
 sible for any human power to break the 
 deep delusion, and to penetrate the 
 darkness of his mind. 
 
 6. Men are in danger, ver. 4. They 
 are under deep delusion, and they tread 
 ■unconcerned near to ruin. They walk 
 in darkness — blinded by the god of this 
 world, and are very near a precipice, 
 and nothing will rouse them from their 
 condition. It is like children gathering 
 flowers near a deep gulf, when the 
 pursuit of one more flower may carry 
 them too far, and they will fall to rise 
 no more. The delusion rests on every 
 unsanctificd mind ; and it needs to re- 
 main but a little longer, and the soul 
 will be lost. That danger deepens every 
 day and every hour. If it is continued 
 but a little longer it will be broken in 
 upon by the sad realities of death, 
 judgment, and hell. But then it will 
 be too late. The soul will be lost — 
 deluded in the world of probation ; 
 sensible of the truth only in the world 
 of despair. 
 
 7. Satan will practise every device 
 and art possible to prevent the gospel 
 from shining upon the hearts of men. 
 That light is painful and hateful to his 
 eyes, and he will do all that can be done 
 to prevent its being diffused. Every 
 art which long tried ingenuity and skill 
 can devise, will be resorted to; every 
 power which he can put forth will be 
 exeited. If he can blind the minds of 
 men, he will do it. If men can be 
 hoodwinked, and gulled, it will be done. 
 If error can be made to spread, and be 
 embraced— error smooth, plausible, 
 cunning — it will be diffused. Ministers 
 
 will be raised up to preach it and th* 
 press will be employed to accomplish it 
 If sinners can be deceived, and made to 
 remain at ease in their sins, by novels 
 and seductive poetry ; by books false in 
 sentiments, and perverse in moral;}, the 
 press will be made to groan under the 
 works of fiction. If theatres are neces- 
 sary to cheat and beguile men, they 
 will ~be reared ; and the song, and thi 
 dance, the ball, and the splendid part} 
 will alike contribute to divert the atten 
 tion from the cross of Christ, the wort} 
 of the soul, and the importance of h 
 preparation to die. No art has been 
 spared, or will be spared to deceive 
 men ; and the world is full of the device* 
 of Satan to hoodwink and blind the 
 perishing, and lead them down to hell. 
 
 8. Yet, Satan is not alone to blame 
 for this. He does all he can, and he has 
 consummate skill and art. Yet, let not 
 the deluded sinner take comfort to him- 
 self because Satan is the tempter, and 
 because he is deluded. The bitterness 
 of death is not made sweet to a young 
 man because he has been deluded by 
 the arts of the veteran in temptation ; 
 and the fires of hell will not burn any 
 the less fiercely because the sinner suf- 
 fered himself to be deluded, and chose 
 to go there through the ball-room or 
 the theatre. The sinner is, after all, 
 voluntary in his delusions. He does, 
 or he might, know the truth. He goes 
 voluntarily to the place of amusement ; 
 voluntarily forms the plans of gain and 
 ambition which deceive and ruin the 
 soul ; goes voluntarily to the theatre, 
 and to the haunts of vice ; and chooses 
 this course in the face of many warn- 
 ings, and remonstrances. Who is to 
 blame if he is lost ] Who but himself? 
 
 9. Sinners should be entreated to 
 rouse from this delusive and false 
 security. They are now blinded, and 
 deceived. Life is too short and too un- 
 certain to be playing such a game as 
 the sinner does. There are too many 
 realities here to make it proper to pass 
 life amidst deceptions and delusions. 
 Sin is real, and danger is real, and death 
 is real, and eternity is real ; and man 
 should rouse from his delusions, and 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 99 
 
 look upon things as they are. Soon he 
 will be on a bed of death, and then he 
 will look over the follies of his life. 
 Soon he will be at the judgment bar, 
 and from that high and awful place look 
 on the past and the future, and see 
 things as they are. But, alas ! it will be 
 too late then to repair the errors of a 
 life ; and amidst the realities of those 
 scenes, all that he may be able to do, 
 will be to sigh unavailingly that he 
 suffered himself to be deluded, deceived, 
 and destroyed in the only world of pro- 
 bation, by the trifles and baubles which 
 the great deceiver placed before him to 
 beguile him of heaven, and to lead him 
 down to hell ! 
 
 10. The great purpose of the ministry 
 is to make known in any and every way 
 the Lord Jesus Christ, ver. 5. To this, 
 the ministers of the gospel are to devote 
 themselves. It is not to cultivate farms ; 
 to engage in traffic ; to shine in the 
 social circle; to be distinguished for 
 learning ; to become fine scholars ; to be 
 profoundly versed in science; or to be 
 distinguished as authors, that they are 
 set apart ; but it is in every way pos- 
 sible to make known the Lord Jesus 
 Christ. Whatever other men do, or 
 not do ; however the world may choose 
 to be employed, their work is simple and 
 plain, and it is not to cease or be inter- 
 mitted till death shall close their toils. 
 Neither by the love of ease, of wealth, 
 or pleasure are they to turn aside from 
 their work, or to forsake the vocation to 
 which God has called them. 
 
 11. We see the responsibility of the 
 ministry, ver. 5. On the ministry de- 
 volves the work of making the Saviour 
 known to a dying world. If they will 
 not do it, the world will remain in igno- 
 rance of the Redeemer and will perish. 
 If there is one soul to whom they 
 might make known the Saviour, and to 
 whom they do not make him known, 
 that soul will perish, and the respo?ui- 
 bility will rest on the minister of the 
 Lord Jesus. And, O ! how great is this 
 responsibility ! And who is sufficient 
 for these things 1 
 
 12. Ministers of the gospel should 
 submit to any self-denial in order that 
 
 they may do good. Their Master did ; 
 and Paul and the other apostles did. It 
 is sufficient for the disciple that he be as 
 the master; and the ministers of the 
 gospel should regard themselves as set 
 apart to a work of self-denial, and called 
 to a life of toil, like their Lord. Their 
 rest is in heaven, not on the earth. 
 Their days of leisure and repose are to 
 be found in the skies when their work 
 is done, and not in a world perishing in 
 sin. 
 
 13. The ministry is a glorious work, 
 ver. 5. What higher honour is there 
 on earth than to make known a Re- 
 deemer 1 What pleasure more exquisite 
 can there be than to speak of pardon to 
 the guilty 1 What greater comfort than 
 to go to the afflicted and bind up their 
 hearts; to pour the balm of peace into 
 the wounded spirit, and to sustain and 
 cheer the dying 1 The ministry has its 
 own consolations amidst all its trials ; 
 its own honour amidst the contempt and 
 scorn with which it is often viewed by 
 the world. 
 
 14. The situation of man would have 
 been dreadful and awful had it not been 
 for the light which is imparted by reve- 
 lation, and by the Holy Spirit, ver. 6. 
 Man would have ever remained like the 
 dark night before God said " let there 
 be light;" and his condition would have 
 been thick darkness, where not a ray of 
 light would have beamed on his be- 
 nighted way. Some idea of what this 
 was, and would have continued to be, 
 we have now in the heathen world, 
 where thick darkness reigns over nations, 
 though it has been somewhat broken in 
 upon by the dim light which tradition 
 has diffused there. 
 
 15. God has power to impart light to 
 the most dark and benighted mind. 
 There is no one to whom he cannot 
 reveal himself and make his truth 
 known, ver. 6. With as much ease as 
 he commanded light to shine out of 
 darkness at first can he command the 
 pure light of truth to shine on the mind9 
 of men ; and on minds most beclouded 
 by sin he can cause the sun of 
 righteousness to shine with healing in 
 his beams. 
 
00 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. CO 
 
 16. We should implore the enlight- 
 ening influence of the Spirit of truth. 
 ver. 6. If God is the source of light, 
 we should seek it at his hands. Nothing 
 to man is so valuahle as the light of 
 truth ; nothing of so much worth as the 
 knowledge of the true God; and with 
 the deepest solicitude, and the most 
 fervent prayer, should we seek the en- 
 lightening influences of his Spirit, and 
 the guidance of his grace. 
 
 17. There is no true knowledge of 
 God except that which shines in the 
 face of Jesus Christ, ver. 6. He came 
 to make known the true God. He is 
 the exact image of God. He resembles 
 him in all things. And he who does 
 not love the character of Jesus Christ, 
 therefore, does not love the character of 
 God ; he who does not seek to be like 
 Jesus Christ, does not desire to be like 
 God. He who does not bear the image 
 of the Redeemer, does not bear the 
 image of God. To be a moral man 
 merely, therefore, is not to be like God. 
 To be amiable, and honest, merely, is 
 not to be like God. Jesus Christ, the 
 image of God, was more than this. He 
 was religious. He was holy. He was, 
 as a man, a man of prayer, and filled 
 with the love of God, and was always 
 submissive to his holy will. He sought 
 his honour and glory ; and he made it 
 the great purpose of his life and death to 
 make known his existence, perfections, 
 and name. To imitate him in this is to 
 have the knowledge of the glory of God ; 
 and no man is like God who does not 
 bear the image of the Redeemer. No 
 man is like God, therefore, who is not a 
 Christian. Of course, no man can be 
 prepared for heaven who is not a friend 
 and follower of Jesus Christ. 
 
 IS. God designs to secure the pro- 
 motion of his own glory in the manner 
 in which religion is spread in the world, 
 ver. 7. For this purpose, and with this 
 view, he did not commit it to angels, 
 nor has he employed men of rank, or 
 wealth, or profound scientific attain- 
 ments to be the chief instruments in its 
 propagation. He has committed it to 
 frail, mortal men ; and often to men of 
 humble rank, and even humble attain- 
 
 ments — except attainments in piety. In 
 fitting them for their work his grace is 
 manifest ; and in all the success which 
 attends their labours it is apparent that 
 it is by the mere grace and mercy of God 
 that it is done. 
 
 19. We see what our religion has 
 cost. ver. 8, 9. Its extension in the 
 world has been everywhere connected 
 with sufferings, and toil, and tears. It 
 began in the labours, sorrows, self- 
 denials, persecutions, and dying agonies 
 of the Son of God ; and to introduce it 
 to the world cost his life. It was spread 
 by the toils, and sacrifices, and suffer- 
 ings of the apostles. It was kept up by 
 the dying groans of martyrs. It has 
 been preserved and extended on earth 
 by the labours and prayers of the Re- 
 formers, and amidst scenes of persecu- 
 tion everywhere, and it is now extend- 
 ing through the earth by the sacrifices 
 of those who are willing to leave country 
 and home ; to cross oceans and deserts ; 
 and to encounter the perils of barbarous 
 climes, that they may make it known 
 to distant lands. If estimated by what 
 it has cost, assuredly no religion, no 
 blessing is so valuable as Christianity. 
 It is above all human valuation ; and it 
 should be a matter of unfeigned thank- 
 fulness to us that God has been pleased 
 to raise up men who have been willing 
 to suffer so much that it might be per- 
 petuated and extended on the earth; 
 and we should be willing also to imitate 
 their example, and deny ourselves, that 
 we may make its inestimable blessings 
 known to those who are now destitute. 
 To us, it is worth all it has cost — all the 
 blood of apostles and martyrs ; to others, 
 also, it would be worth all that it would 
 cost to send it to them. How can we bet- 
 ter express our sense of its worth, and oui 
 gratitude to the dying Redeemer, and 
 our veneration for the memory of self- 
 denying apostles and martyrs, than by 
 endeavouring to diffuse the religion for 
 which they died all over the world ? 
 
 20. We have in this chapter an illus- 
 tration of the sustaining power of reli- 
 gion in trials, ver. 8, 9. The friends 
 of Christianity have been called to en 
 dure every form of suffering. Poverty 
 
A.. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 101 
 
 want, tears, stripes, imprisonments, and 
 deaths have been their portion. They 
 have suffered under every form of tor- 
 ture which men could inflict on them. 
 And yet the power of religion has never 
 failed them. It has been amply tried ; 
 and has shown itself able to sustain 
 them always, and to enable them 
 always to triumph. Though troubled, 
 they have not been so close pressed that 
 they had no room to turn ; though per- 
 plexed, they have not been without 
 some resource ; though persecuted by 
 men, they have not been forsaken by 
 God ; though thrown down in the con- 
 flict, yet they have recovered strength, 
 and been prepared to renew the strife, 
 and to engage in new contentions with 
 the foes of God. Who can estimate the 
 value of a religion like this] Who 
 does not see that it is adapted to man in 
 a state of trial, and that it furnishes him 
 with just what he needs in this world ! 
 
 21. Christianity will live. ver. 8, 9. 
 Nothing can destroy it. All the power 
 that could be brought to bear on it to 
 blot it from the earth has been tried, and 
 yet it survives. No new attempt to 
 destroy it can prevail; and it is now 
 settled that this religion is to live to the 
 end of time. It has cost much to obtain 
 this demonstration ; but it is worth all 
 it has cost, and the sufferings of apostles 
 and martyrs, therefore, have not been 
 for naught. 
 
 22. Christians should be willing to 
 endure any thing in order that they 
 may become like Christ on earth, and 
 be like him in heaven, ver. 10. It is 
 worth all their efforts, and all their self- 
 denials. It is the grand object before 
 us ; and we should deem no sufferings 
 too severe, no self-denial or sacrifice too 
 great, if we may become like him here 
 below, and may live with him above, 
 ver. 10, 11. 
 
 23. In order to animate us in the 
 work to which God has called us ; to 
 encourage us in our trials ; and to 
 prompt us to a faithful discharge of our 
 duties, especially those who like Paul 
 are called to preach the gospel, we 
 should have, like him, the following 
 views and feelings — views and feelings 
 
 adapted to sustain us in all our trials, 
 and to uphold us in all the conflicts of 
 life. (1.) A firm and unwavering be- 
 lief of the truth of the religion which we 
 profess, and of the truth which we make 
 known to others, ver. 12. No man can 
 preach successfully, and no man can do 
 much good, whose mind is vacillating 
 and hesitating; who is filled with 
 doubts, and who goes timidly to work, 
 or who declares that of which he has no 
 practical acquaintance, and no deep-felt 
 conviction, and who knows not whereof 
 he affirms. A man to do good must 
 have a faith which never wavers; a 
 conviction of truth which is constant ; a 
 belief settled like the everlasting hills, 
 which nothing can shake or overturn. 
 With such a conviction of the truth of 
 Christianity, and of the great doctrines 
 which it inculcates, he cannot but speak 
 of it, and make known his convictions. 
 He that believes that men are in fact 
 in danger of hell, will tell them of it; 
 he that believes there is an awful bar 
 of judgment, will tell them of it ; he that 
 believes that the Son of God became in- 
 carnate and died for men, will tell them 
 of it ; he that believes that there is a 
 heaven, will invite them to it. And one 
 reason why professing Christians are so 
 reluctant to speak of these things, is, 
 that they have no very settled and defi- 
 nite conviction of their truth, and no 
 correct view of their relative importance. 
 (2.) We should have a firm assurance 
 that God has raised up the Lord Jesus, 
 and that we also shall be raised from 
 the dead. ver. 14. The hope and ex- 
 pectation of the resurrection of the dead 
 was one of the sustaining principles 
 which upheld Paul in his labours, and 
 to attain to this was one of the grand 
 objects of his life. Acts xxiii. 6. Phil, 
 iii. 11. Under the influence of this 
 hope and expectation, he was willing to 
 encounter any danger, and to endure 
 any trial. The prospect of being raised 
 up to eternal life and glory was all that 
 was needful to make trials welcome, and 
 to uphold him in the midst of privation 
 and toils. And so we, if we are assured 
 i of this great truth, shall welcome trial 
 1 also, and shall be able to endure afflic- 
 
102 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 tions and persecutions. They will soon 
 be ended, and the eternal glory in the 
 morning of the resurrection shall be 
 more than a compensation for all that 
 we shall endure in this life. (3.) We 
 should have a sincere desire to promote 
 the glory of God, and to bring as many 
 as possible to join in his praise, and to 
 celebrate his saving mercy, ver. 15. It 
 was this which sustained and animated 
 Paul; and a man who has this as the 
 leading object of his life, and his great 
 purpose and aim, will be willing to 
 endure much trial, to suffer much per- 
 secution, and to encounter many dan- j 
 gers. No object is so noble as that of 
 endeavouring to promote the divine 
 glory ; and he who is influenced by that 
 will care little how many sufferings he 
 is called to endure in this life. 
 
 24. Christians should have such a 
 belief of the truth of their religion as to 
 be willing to speak of it at all times, and 
 in all places, ver. 13. If we have such 
 a belief we shall be willing to speak, of 
 it. We cannot help it. We shall so see 
 its value, and so love it, and our hearts 
 will be so full of it, and we shall see so 
 much the danger of our fellow-men, that 
 we shall be instinctively prompted to go 
 to them and warn them of their danger, 
 and tell them of the glories of the Re- 
 deemer. 
 
 25. Christians may expect to be sup- 
 ported and comforted in the trials and 
 toils of life. ver. 16. The " outward 
 man" will indeed perish and decay. 
 The body will become feeble, weary, 
 jaded, decayed, decrepit. It will be 
 filled with pain, and will languish un- 
 der disease, and will endure the mortal 
 agony, and will be corrupted in the 
 tomb. But the "inward man" will be 
 renewed. The faith will be invigorated, 
 the hope become stronger, the intellect 
 brighter, the heart better, the whole 
 soul be more like God. While the 
 body, therefore, the less important part, 
 decays and dies, the immortal part shall 
 live and ripen for glory. Of what con- 
 sequence is it, therefore, how soon or 
 how much the body decays ; or when, 
 and where, and how it dies. Let the 
 immortal part be preserved, let that live, 
 
 and all is well. And while this is done, 
 we should not, we shall not " faint." 
 We shall be sustained ; and shall find 
 the consolations of religion to be fitted 
 to all our wants, and adapted to all the 
 necessities of our condition as weak, and 
 frail, and dying creatures. 
 
 26. We learn from this chapter how 
 to bear affliction in a proper manner. 
 ver. 17, 18. It is by looking at eternity 
 and comparing our trials with the eter- 
 nal weight of glory that awaits us. In 
 themselves afflictions often seem heavy 
 and long. Human nature is often ready 
 to sink under them. The powers of the 
 body fail, and the mortal frame is crush- 
 ed. The day seems long while we 
 suffer ; and the night seems often to 
 be almost endless. Deut. xxviii. 67. 
 But compared with eternity how short 
 are all these trials ! Compared with the 
 weight of glory which awaits the be- 
 liever, what a trifle are the severest 
 sufferings of this life. Soon the ran- 
 somed spirit will be released, and will 
 be admitted to the full fruition of the 
 joys of the world above. In that world 
 all these sorrows will seem like the 
 sufferings of childhood, that we have 
 now almost forgotten, and that now 
 seem to us like trifles. 
 
 27. We should not look to the things 
 which are seen as our portion, ver. 17, 
 18. They are light in their cbaracter, 
 and are soon to fade away. Our great 
 interests are beyond the grave. There 
 all is weighty, and momentous, and 
 eternal. Whatever great interests we 
 have are there. Eternity is stamped 
 upon all the joys and all the sorrows 
 which are beyond this life. Here all is 
 temporary, changing, decaying, dying. 
 There all is fixed, settled, unchanging, 
 immortal. It becomes us then as ra- 
 tional creatures to look to that world, 
 to act with reference to it, to feel and 
 act as if we felt that all our interests 
 were there. Were this life all, every 
 thing in relation to us would be trifling. 
 But when we remember that there is an 
 eternity ; that we are near it ; and that 
 our conduct here is to determine our 
 character and destiny there, life becomes 
 invested with infinite importance. Who 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 103 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 TpOR we know, that if our 
 •*■ earthly house of this taber- 
 
 can estimate the magnitude of the in- 
 terests at stake 1 Who can appreciate 
 aright the importance of every step we 
 take, and every plan we form 7 
 
 28. All here below is temporary, de- 
 caying, dying, ver. 17, 18. Afflictions 
 are temporary. They are but for a mo- 
 ment, and will soon be passed away. 
 Our sorrows here will soon be ended. 
 The last sigh on earth will soon be 
 heaved; the last tear will have fallen 
 on the cheek ; the last pain will have 
 shot across the seat of life ! The last 
 pang of parting with a beloved friend 
 will soon have been endured ; and the 
 last step which we are to take in " the 
 valley of the shadow of death," will 
 soon have been trod. And in like man- 
 ner we shall soon have tasted the last 
 cup of earthly joy. All our comforts 
 here below will soon pass from us. 
 Our friends will die. Our sources of 
 happiness will be dried up. Our health 
 will fail, and darkness will come over 
 our eyes, and we shall go down to the 
 dead. AH our property must be left, 
 and all our honours be parted with 
 forever. In a little time — O, how brief! 
 we shall have gone from all these, and 
 shall be engaged in the deep and awful 
 solemnities of the unchanging world. 
 How vain and foolish, therefore, the 
 attachment to earthly objects! How 
 important to secure an interest in that 
 future inheritance which shall never 
 fade away ! 
 
 29. Let it not be inferred, however, 
 that all affliction shall be light, and for 
 a moment, or that all earthly trial shall 
 of course work out a far more exceed- 
 ing and eternal weight of glory. There 
 are sorrows beyond the grave compared 
 with which the most heavy and most 
 protracted woes this side the tomb, are 
 "light," and are. "but for a moment." 
 And there are sorrows in this life, deep 
 and prolonged afflictions — which by no 
 means tend to prepare the soul for the 
 "far more exceeding land eternal weight 
 
 nacle a were dissolved, we have 
 a building of God, an house b not 
 
 a Job 4. 19. 2 Pe. 1.13, 14. b 1 Pe. 1. 4. 
 
 of glory." Such are those afflictions 
 where there is no submission to the will 
 of God ; where there is murmuring, re- 
 pining, impatience, and increased re- 
 bellion ; where there is no looking to 
 God for comfort, and no contemplation 
 of eternal glory. Such are those afflic- 
 tions where men look to philosophy, or 
 to earthly friends to comfort them ; or 
 where they plunge deeper into the busi- 
 ness, the gayety, or the vices of the 
 world, to drown their sorrows and to 
 obliterate the sense of their calamities. 
 This is " the sorrow of the world which 
 worketh death." 2 Cor. vii. 10. In 
 afflictions, therefore, it should be to us a 
 matter of deep and anxious solicitude 
 to know whether we have the right 
 feelings, and whether we are seeking 
 the right sources of consolation. And 
 in such seasons it shall be the subject 
 of our deep and earnest prayer to God 
 that our trials may, by his grace, be 
 made to work out for us " a far more 
 exceeding and eternal weight of glory." 
 All are afflicted; all suffer in various 
 ways ; and all may find these trials ter- 
 minate in eternal blessedness beyond 
 the grave. ' 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 This chapter is closely connected 
 with the former, and indeed has been 
 improperly separated from it, as is mani- 
 fest from the word " For" (>Ǥ) with 
 which it commences. It contains a 
 further statement of reasons for what 
 had been said in the previous chapter. 
 The main subject there was the minis- 
 try ; the honesty and fidelity with 
 which Paul and his fellow-labourers 
 toiled (ver. 1 — 3) ; the trials and dan- 
 gers which they encountered in the 
 work of the ministry (ver. 7 — 12) ; and 
 the consolations and supports which 
 they had in its various trials, ver. 13 — 18. 
 This chapter contains a continuation of 
 the same subject, and a further state- 
 ment of the motives which prompted 
 them to their work, and of the supports 
 
104 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 
 made with hands, eternal in the 
 heavens. 
 
 which upheld them in the arduous du- 
 ties to which they were called. It is a 
 chapter full of exquisite beauties of 
 sentiment and of language, and as well 
 adapted to give consolation and support 
 to all Christians now as it is to minis- 
 ters; and the sentiments are as well 
 adapted to sustain the humblest believer 
 in his trials as they were to sustain the 
 apostles themselves. The following are 
 the points of consolation and support, 
 and reasons for their zeal and self-denial, 
 to which the apostle refers. 
 
 1. They had the assured prospect of 
 the resurrection, and of eternal life, 
 ver. 1 — 4. The body might decay, 
 and be worn out; it might sigh and 
 groan, but they had a better home, a 
 mansion of eternal rest in the heavens. 
 It was their earnest desire to reach 
 heaven ; though not such a desire as 
 to make them unwilling to endure the 
 toils and trials which God should ap- 
 point to them here below, but still an 
 earnest, anxious wish to reach safely 
 their eternal home in the skies. In the 
 prospect of their heavenly home, and 
 their eternal rest, they were willing to 
 endure all the trials which were ap- 
 pointed to them. 
 
 2. God had appointed them to this ; 
 he had fitted them for these trials ; he 
 had endowed them with the graces of 
 his Spirit; and they were, therefore, 
 willing to be absent from the body, and 
 to be present with the Lord. ver. 5 — 8. 
 They had such a view of heaven as 
 their home that they were willing at 
 any time to depart and enter the world 
 of rest, and they did not, therefore, 
 shrink from the trials and dangers which 
 would be likely soon to bring them 
 there. 
 
 3. They had a deep and constant 
 conviction that they must soon appear 
 before the judgment seat of Christ, ver. 
 9 — 1 1. They laboured that they might 
 be accepted by him (ver. 9) ; they 
 knew that they must give a solemn 
 account to him (ver. 1 0) ; they had a 
 
 2 For in this we groan, ° 
 
 a Ro. 8. 23. 
 
 clear view, and a deep impression of 
 the awful terrors of that day, and they 
 laboured / therefore, to save as many as 
 possible from the condemnation of the 
 great Judge of all, and endeavoured to 
 " persuade" them to be prepared for that 
 scene, ver. 11. 
 
 4. Though to some they might ap- 
 pear to be under the influence of im- 
 proper excitement, and even to be de- 
 ranged (ver. 14), yet they were acting 
 only under the proper influence of the 
 love of Christ, ver. 14, 15. They were 
 constrained and urged on by his love ; 
 they knew that he had died for all, and 
 that all men were dead in sin ; and 
 they felt themselves the constraining 
 influence of that love prompting them 
 to deny themselves, and to devote their 
 all to his service and cause. 
 
 5. Their views of all things had been 
 changed, ver. 16, 17. They had 
 ceased to act under the influences which 
 govern other men ; but their own hearts 
 had been changed, and they had become 
 new creatures in Christ, and in their 
 lives they evinced the spirit which 
 should govern those who were thus re- 
 newed. 
 
 6. They had been solemnly commis- 
 sioned by God as his- ambassadors in 
 this cause. They had been sent to 
 make known the terms and the way of 
 reconciliation, and they felt it to be their 
 duty to proclaim those terms on as wide 
 a scale as possible, and with the utmost 
 zeal and self-denial. It was God's glo- 
 rious plan of reconciliation ; and on the 
 ground of the atonement made by the 
 Redeemer, they could now offer salva- 
 tion to all mankind, and as all %ight be 
 saved, they felt themselves bound to 
 offer the terms of salvation to as many 
 as possible, ver. 18 — 21. The grand 
 argument for urging sinners to be re- 
 conciled to God, is the fact that Christ 
 has died for their sins, and, therefore, the 
 apostles apprized of this fact, sought to 
 urge as many as possible to become his 
 friends, ver. 21. • 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 GHAPTER V. 
 
 105 
 
 1 . For we know. We who are en- 
 gaged in the work of the gospel minis- 
 try. Paul is giving a reason why he 
 and his fellow-labourers did not become 
 weary and faint in their work. The 
 reason was, that they knew that even if 
 their body should die, they had an in- 
 heritance reserved for them in heaven. 
 The expression "we know" is the lan- 
 guage of strong and unwavering assur- 
 ance. They had no doubt on the sub- 
 ject. And it proves that there may be 
 the assurance of eternal life ; or such 
 evidence of acceptance with God as to 
 leave no dovibt of a final admission into 
 heaven. This language was often used 
 by the Saviour in reference to the truths 
 which he taught (John iii. 11 ; iv. 22) ; 
 and it is used by the sacred writers in 
 regard to the truths which they record- 
 ed, and in regard to their own personal 
 piety. John xxi. 24 ; I John ii. 3. 5. 
 18; iii. 2. 14. 19. 24; iv. 6. 13; v. 2. 
 15. 19, 20. t That if our earthly 
 house. The word "earthly" here 
 (iTriyuog) stands opposed to " heavenly," 
 or to the " house eternal (iv rote oygz- 
 >.>??) in the heavens." The word pro- 
 perly means ' upon earth, terrestrial, be- 
 longing to the earth, or on the earth,' 
 and is applied to bodies ( I Cor. xv. 40) ; 
 to earthly things (John iii. 12) ; to earth- 
 ly, or worldly wisdom, James iii. 15. 
 The word house here refers doubtless to 
 the body, as the habitation, or the dwell- 
 ing-place of the mind or soul. The 
 soul dwells in it as we dwell in a house, 
 or tent. ^ Of this tabernacle. This 
 word means a booth, or tent — a mov- 
 able dwelling. The use of the word 
 here is not a mere redundancy, but the 
 idea which Paul designs to convey is, 
 doubtless, that the body — the house of 
 the soul — was not a permanent dwell- 
 ing-place, but was of the same nature 
 as a booth or tent, that was set up for a 
 temporary purpose, or that was easily 
 taken down in migrating from one place 
 to another. It refers here to the body 
 as the frail and temporary abode of the 
 soul. It is not a permanent dwelling; 
 a fixed habitation, but is liable to be 
 taken down at any moment, and was 
 fitted up with that view. Tindal ren- 
 
 ders it, ' if our earthly mansion wherein 
 we now dwell." The Syriac renders 
 it, " for we know that if our house on 
 earth,which is our body, were dissolved." 
 The idea is a beautiful one, that the 
 body is a mere unfixed, movable dwell- 
 ing-place ; liable to be taken down at 
 any moment, and not designed, any 
 more than a tent is, to be a permanent 
 habitation. | Were dissolved (jc*tix- 
 xud-f?). This word means properly to 
 disunite the parts of any thing; and is 
 applied to the act of throwing down, or 
 destroying a building. It is applied here 
 to the body, regarded as a temporary 
 dwelling that might be taken down, and 
 it refers, doubtless, to the dissolution of 
 the body in the grave. The idea is, 
 that if this body should moulder back to 
 dust, and be resolved into its original 
 elements ; or if by great zeal and labour 
 it should be exhausted and worn out. 
 Language like this is used by Eliphaz, 
 the Temanite, in describing the body of 
 man. " How much less in those that 
 dwell in houses of clay," &c. Job iv. 19. 
 Comp. 2 Pet. i. 13, 14. 1 We have a 
 building of God. Robinson (Lexicon) 
 supposes that it refers to "the future 
 spiritual body as the abode of the soul." 
 Some have supposed that it refers to 
 some "celestial vehicle" with which 
 God invests the soul during the inter- 
 mediate state. But the Scripture is si- 
 lent about any such celestial vehicle. 
 It is not easy to tell what was the pre- 
 cise idea which Paul here designed to 
 convey. Perhaps a few remarks may 
 enable us to arrive at the meaning. 
 (1.) It was not to be temporary ; not a 
 tent or tabernacle that could be taken 
 down. (2.) It was to be eternal in the 
 heavens. (3.) It was to be such as to 
 constitute a dwelling ; a clothing, or 
 such a protection as should keep the 
 soul from being " naked." (4.) It was 
 to be such as should constitute " life" 
 in contradistinction from "mortality." 
 These things will better agree with the 
 supposition of its referring to the future 
 body of the saints than any thing else ; 
 and probably the idea of Paul is, that 
 the body there will be incorruptible and 
 immortal. When he says it is a " build- 
 
106 
 
 11. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 earnestly desiring to be clothed 
 
 ing of God" (a e*v), ne evidently 
 means that it is made by God ; that he 
 is the architect of that future and eternal 
 dwelling. Macknight and some others, 
 however, understood this of the man- 
 sions which God has fitted up for his 
 people in heaven, and which the Lord 
 Jesus has gone to prepare for them. 
 Comp. John xiv. 2. But see Note on 
 ver. 3. 1 An house. A dwelling ; an 
 abode; that is, according to the inter- 
 pretation above, a celestial, pure, im- 
 mortal body ; a body that shall have 
 God for its immediate author, and that 
 shall be fitted to dwell in heaven forever. 
 ^ Not made with hands. Not con- 
 structed by man ; a habitation not like 
 those svhich are made by human skill, 
 and which are therefore easily taken 
 down or removed, but one that is made 
 by God himself. This does not imply 
 that the " earthly house" which is to be 
 superseded by that in heaven is made 
 with hands, but the idea is, that the 
 earthly dwelling has things about it 
 which resemble that which is made by 
 man, or as if it were made with hands ; 
 i. e. it is temporary, frail, easily taken 
 down or removed. But that which is 
 in heaven is permanent, fixed, eternal, 
 as if made by God. ^ Eternal in the 
 heavens. Immortal; to live forever. 
 The future body shall never be taken 
 down or dissolved by death. It is 
 eternal, of course, only in respect to the 
 future, and not in respect to the past. 
 And it is not only eternal, but it is to 
 abide forever in the heavens — in the 
 world of glory. It is never to be sub- 
 jected to a dwelling on the earth ; never to 
 be in a world of sin, suffering, and death. 
 2. For in this. In this tent, taber- 
 nacle, or dwelling. In our body here. 
 Tf We groan. Comp. Note Rom. viii. 
 22. The sense is, that we are subject- 
 ed to so many trials and afflictions in 
 the present body ; that the body is sub- 
 jected to so many pains and to so much 
 suffering, as to maite us earnestly desire 
 to be invested with that body which 
 shall be free from all susceptibility to 
 
 upon with our house which is 
 from heaven : 
 
 suffering. \ Earnestly desiring to be 
 clothed upon with our house, &c. There 
 is evidently here a change of the meta- 
 phor which gives an apparent harshness 
 to the construction. One idea of the 
 apostle is, that the body here, and the 
 spiritual body hereafter, is a house or a 
 dwelling. Here he speaks of it as a 
 garment which may be put on or laid off; 
 and of himself as earnestly desiring to 
 put on the immortal clothing or vestment 
 which was in heaven. Both these figures 
 are common in ancient writings, and a 
 change in this manner in the popular style 
 is not unusual. The Pythagoreans com- 
 pared the body to a tent, or hut for the 
 soul ; the Platonists liken it to a vest- 
 ment. — Bloomjield. The Jews speak 
 of a vestment to the soul in this world 
 and the next. They affirm that the 
 soul had a covering when it was under 
 the throne of God, and before it was 
 clothed with the body. This vestment 
 they say was " the image of God" which 
 was lost by Adam. After the fall, they 
 say, Adam and all his posterity were 
 regarded as naked. In the future world 
 they say the good will be clothed with a 
 vestment for the soul which they speak 
 of as lucid and radiant, and such as no 
 one on earth can attain. — Schoettgen. 
 But there is no reason to think that 
 Paul referred to any such trifles as the 
 Jews have believed on this subject. He 
 evidently regarded man as composed of 
 body and soul. The soul was the more 
 important part, and the body constituted 
 its mere habitation or dwelling. Yet a 
 body was essential to the idea of the 
 complete man ; and since this was frail 
 and dying, he looked forward to a union 
 with the body that should be eternal in 
 the heavens, as a more desirable and 
 perfect habitation of the soul. Mr 
 Locke has given an interpretation of 
 this in which he is probably alone, but 
 which has so much appearance of 
 plausibility that it is not improper to re- 
 fer to it He supposes that this whole 
 passage has reference to the fact that at 
 the coming of the Redeemer the body 
 
A. D. 60.] CHAPTER V. 
 
 3 If so be that being clothed 
 we shall not be found naked. a 
 
 a Re. 3. 18: 16. 15. 
 
 will be changed without experiencing 
 death (comp. 1 Cor. xv. 51, 52) ; that 
 Paul expected that this might soon 
 occur; and that he earnestly desired to 
 undergo this transformation without ex- 
 periencing the pains of dying. He 
 therefore paraphrases it, " For in this 
 tabernacle I groan, earnestly desiring, 
 without putting off this mortal, earthly 
 body by death, to have that celestial 
 body superinduced, if so be the coming 
 of Christ shall overtake me in this life, 
 before I put off this body." K With our 
 house. The phrase • to be clothed upon 
 with our house' seems to be harsh and 
 unusual. The sense is plain, however, 
 that Paul desired to be invested with 
 that pure, spiritual, and undecaying 
 body which was to be the eternal abode 
 of his soul in heaven. That he speaks 
 of as a house (ou»T»'^5v),a more perma- 
 nent and substantial dwelling than a 
 tent, or tabernacle. 
 
 3. If so be that being clothed. This 
 passage has been interpreted in a great 
 many different ways. The view of 
 Locke is given above. Rosenmiiller ren- 
 ders it, " For in the other life we shall 
 not be wholly destitute of a body, but 
 we shall have a body." Tindal renders 
 it, " If it happen that we be found clothed, 
 and not naked." Doddridge supposes 
 it to mean, "since being so clothed 
 upon, we shall not be found naked, 
 and exposed to any evil and inconve- 
 nience, how entirely soever we may be 
 stripped of every thing we can call our 
 own here below." Hammond explains 
 it to mean, " If, indeed, we shall, happily, 
 be among the number of those faithful 
 Christians, who will be found clothed 
 upon, not naked." Various other ex- 
 positions may be seen in the larger com- 
 mentaries. The meaning is probably 
 this: (1.) The word "clothed" refers 
 to the future spiritual body of believers ; 
 the eternal habitation in which they 
 shall reside. (2.) The expression im- 
 plies an earnest lesire of Paul to be thus 
 
 107 
 
 4 For we that are in this ta- 
 bernacle do groan, being burden- 
 ed : not for that we would be 
 
 invested with that body. (3.) It is the 
 language of humility and of deep solici- 
 tude, as if it were possible that they 
 might fail, and as if it demanded their 
 utmost care and anxiety that they might 
 thus be clothed with the spiritual body 
 in heaven. (4.) It means that in that 
 future state, the soul will not be naked ; 
 i. e. destitute of any body, or covering. 
 The present body will be laid aside. It 
 will return to corruption, and the dis- 
 embodied Spirit will ascend to God and 
 to heaven. It will be disencumbered 
 of the body with which it has been so 
 long clothed. But we are not thence 
 to infer that it will be destitute of a 
 body ; that it will remain a naked soul. 
 It will be clothed there in its appropri- 
 ate glorified body ; and will have an 
 appropriate habitation there. This does 
 not imply, as Bloomfield supposes, that 
 the bodies of the wicked will be desti- 
 tute of any such habitation as the glo- 
 rified body of the saints ; which may be 
 true — but it means simply that the soul 
 shall not be destitute of an appropriate 
 body in heaven, but that the union of 
 body and soul there shall be known as 
 well as on earth. 
 
 4. For we. We who are Christians. 
 All Christians. 1 That are in this ta- 
 bernacle. This frail and dying body. 
 Note, ver. 1. t Do groan. See ver. 2. 
 This is a further explanation of what is 
 said in ver. 2. It implies an ardent and 
 earnest desire to leave a world of toil 
 and pain, and to enter into a world of 
 rest and glory. 1 Being burdened. 
 Being borne down by the toils, and 
 trials, and calamities of this life. See 
 Note, ch. iii. 7—10. f Not for that tue 
 ivould be unclothed. Not that we are 
 impatient, and unwilling to bear these 
 burdens as long as God shall appoint. 
 Not that we merely wish to lay aside 
 this mortal body. We do not desire to 
 die and depart merely because we suffer 
 much, and because the body here is 
 subjected to great trials. This is not 
 
108 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 T A. D. 60. 
 
 unclothed, but clothed upon, that 
 mortality a might be swallowed 
 up of life. 
 
 5 Now he that hath wrought* 
 
 a 1 Co 15. 53. b Is. 29. 23. Ep. 2. 10. 
 
 the ground of our wish to depart. We 
 are willing to bear trials. We are not 
 impatient under afflictions. — The senti- 
 ment here is, that the mere fact that we 
 may be afflicted much and long, should 
 not be the principal reason why we 
 should desire to depart. We should be 
 willing to bear all this as long as God 
 shall choose to appoint. The anxiety 
 of Paul to enter the eternal world was 
 from a higher motive than a mere desire 
 to get away from trouble, f But 
 clothed upon. To be invested with our 
 spiritual bod)'. We desire to be clothed 
 with that body. We desire to be in 
 heaven, and to be clothed with immor- 
 tality. We wish to have a body that 
 shall be pure, undecaying, ever glorious. 
 It was not, therefore, a mere desire to 
 be released from sufferings ; it was an 
 earnest wish to be admitted to the glories 
 of the future world, and partake of the 
 happiness which he would enjoy there. 
 This is one of the reasons why Paul 
 wished to be in heaven. Other reasons 
 he has stated elsewhere. Thus in Phil. 
 i. 23 he says he had " a desire to 
 depart and to he with Christ." So in 
 ver. 8 of this chapter, he says he was 
 " willing rather to be absent from the 
 body and to be present with the Lord." 
 In 2 Tim. iv. 6 — 8, he speaks of the 
 "crown of righteousness" laid up for 
 him as a reason why he was willing to 
 die. Tf That mortality might he swal- 
 lowed up of life. On the meaning of 
 the word rendered "swallowed up" 
 (K*T:t7rcd-rj) see Note on 1 Cor. xv. 54. 
 The meaning here is, that it might be 
 completely absorbed ; that it might cease 
 to be; that there might be no more mor- 
 tality, but that he might pass to the 
 immortal state — to the condition of eter- 
 nal life in the heavens. The body here 
 is mortal; the body there will be im- 
 mortal; and Paul desired to pass away 
 from the mortal state to one that shall 
 
 us for the self same thing, z.i 
 God, who also hath given unto 
 us the earnest s of the Spirit. 
 6 Therefore we are always 
 
 c Ep. 1. 14. 
 
 be immortal, a world where there shall 
 be no more death. Comp. i Cor. xv. 53. 
 
 5. Now he that hath wrought us for 
 the selfsame thing. The phrase " self- 
 same thing" here means this very thing, 
 i. e. the thing to which he had referred 
 — the preparation for heaven, or the hea- 
 venly dwelling. The word "wrought" 
 here (je^T^/swa^syo?) means that God 
 had formed, or made them for this ; that 
 is, he had by the influences of the Spirit, 
 and by his agency on the heart, created 
 them, as it were, for this, and adapted 
 them to it. God has destined us to this 
 change from corruption to incorruption ; 
 he has adapted us to it ; he has formed 
 us for it. It does not refer to the origi- 
 nal creation of the body and the soul 
 for this end, but it means that God, by 
 his own renewing, and sanctifying, and 
 sustaining agency, had formed them for 
 this, and adapted them to it. The object 
 of Paul in stating that it was done by 
 God, is to keep this truth prominently 
 before the mind. It was not by any 
 native inclination, or strength, or power 
 which they had, but it was all to be 
 traced to God. Comp. Eph. ii. 10. 
 1 Who also hath given. In addition to 
 the fitting for eternal glory he has given 
 us the earnest of the Spirit to sustain 
 us here. We are not only prepared to 
 enter into heaven, but we have here 
 also the support produced by the earnest 
 of the Spirit. Tf The earnest of the 
 Spirit. On the meaning of this, see 
 Note on ch. i. 22. He has given to us 
 the Holy Spirit as the pledge or assur- 
 ance of the eternal inheritance. 
 
 6 . Therefore we are always confident. 
 The word here used (Bufcvvrts) means 
 to be of good cheer. To have good 
 courage, to be full of hope. The idea 
 is, that Paul was not dejected, cast down, 
 disheartened, discouraged. He was 
 cheerful and happy. He was patient in 
 his trials, and diligent in his calling 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 109 
 
 confident, knowing that, whilst 
 we are at home in fne body, we 
 are absent from the Lord ; 
 
 He was full of hope, at:.d of the confi- 
 dent expectation of heaven; and this 
 filled him with cheerfulness and with 
 joy. Tindal renders it, "we are 
 always of goud cheere." And this was 
 not occasional and transitory, it was 
 constant, it was uniform, it always 
 (7ravTST«) existed. — This is an instance 
 of the uniform cheerfulness which will 
 be produced by the assured prospect of 
 heaven. It is an instance too when the 
 hope of heaven will enable a man to 
 face danger with courage ; to endure toil 
 with patience ; and to submit to trials 
 in any form with cheerfulness, f Know- 
 ing. See ver. 1. This is another in- 
 stance in which the apostle expresses 
 undoubted assurance. ^ Wliilst we 
 are at home in the body. The word 
 here used (ivSttjuivvn;) means literally to 
 be among one's own people, to be at 
 home ; to be present in any place. It is 
 here equivalent to saying, • while we 
 dwell in the body.' See ver. 1. Dod- 
 dridge renders it, "sojourning in the 
 body ;" and remarks that it is improper 
 to render it ' at home in the body,' since 
 it is the apostle's design to intimate that 
 this is nut our home. But Bloomfield 
 says that the word is never used in the 
 sense of sojourning. The idea is not 
 that of being " at home" — for this is an 
 idea which is the very opposite of that 
 which the apostle wishes to convey. 
 His purpose is not at all to represent 
 the body here as our home, and the 
 original word does not imply that. It 
 means here simply to be in the body ; 
 to be present in the body ; that is, while 
 we are in the body, ^ We are absent 
 from the Lord. The Lord Jesus. See 
 Notes, Acts i. 24. Comp. Phil. i. 23. 
 Here he was in a strange world, and 
 among strangers. His great desire and 
 purpose was to be with the Lord ; and 
 hence he cared little how soon the frail 
 tabernacle of the body was taken down, 
 and was cheerful amidst all the labours 
 and sufferings that tended to bring it to 
 10 
 
 7 (For ° we walk by faith, not 
 by sight :) 
 
 a Ro. 8. 24, 25. 
 
 the grave, and to release him to go to 
 his eternal home where he would be 
 present forever with the Lord. 
 
 7. For we walk. To walk, in the 
 Scriptures often denotes to live, to act, 
 to conduct in a certain way. See Notes 
 on Rom. iv. 12; vi. 4. It has reference 
 to the fact that life is a journey, or a 
 pilgrimage, and that the Christian is 
 travelling to another country. The 
 sense here is, that we conduct ourselves 
 in our course of life with reference to 
 the things which are unseen, and not 
 with reference to the things which are 
 seen. *[ By faith. In the belief of 
 those things which we do not see. We 
 believe in the existence of objects which 
 are invisible, and we are influenced by 
 them. To walk by faith, is to live in 
 the confident expectation of things that 
 are to come ; in the belief of the exist- 
 ence of unseen realities ; and suffering 
 them to influence us as if they were 
 seen. The people of this world are 
 influenced by the things that are seen. 
 They live for wealth, honour, splendour, 
 praise, for the objects which this world 
 can furnish, and as if there were no- 
 thing which is unseen, or as if they 
 ought not to be influenced by the things 
 which are unseen. The Christian, on 
 the contrary, has a firm conviction of 
 the reality of the glories of heaven ; of 
 the fact that the Redeemer is there ; of 
 the fact that there is a crown of glory ; 
 and he lives, and acts as if that were all 
 real, and as if he saw it all. The 
 simple account of faith, and of living by 
 faith is, that we live and act as if these 
 things, were true, and suffer them to 
 make an impression on our mind ac- 
 cording to their real nature. See Note 
 on Mark xvi. 16. It is contradistin- 
 guished from living simply under tie 
 influence of things that are seen. God 
 is unseen — but the Christian lives, and 
 thinks, and acts as if there were a God, 
 and as if he saw him. Christ is un- 
 seen now by the bodily eye; but the 
 
110 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 
 8 We aie confident, / say, 
 
 Christian lives and acts as if he were 
 seen, i e. as if his eye were known to 
 be upon us, and as if he was now ex- 
 alted to heaven and was the only 
 Saviour. The Holy Spirit is unseen ; 
 but he lives, and acts as if there were 
 such a Spirit, and as if his influences 
 were needful to renew, and purify the 
 soul. Heaven is unseen ; but the Chris- 
 tian lives, and thinks, and acts as if 
 there were a heaven, and as if he now 
 saw its glories. He has confidence in 
 these, and in kindred truths, and he acts 
 as if they were real. — Could man see all 
 these ; were they visible to the naked 
 eye as they are to the eye of faith, no 
 one would doubt the propriety of living 
 and acting with reference to them. But 
 if they exist, there is no more impro- 
 priety in acting with reference to them 
 than if they were seen. Our seeing or 
 not seeing them does not alter their 
 nature or importance, and the fact that 
 they are not seen does not make it 
 improper to act with reference to them. 
 — There are many ways of being con- 
 vinced of the existence and reality of 
 objects besides seeing them ; and it may 
 be as rational to be influenced by the 
 reason, the judgment, or by strong con- 
 fidence, as it is to be influenced by sight. 
 Besides, all men are influenced by 
 things which they have not seen. They 
 hope for objects that are future. They 
 aspire to happiness which they have not 
 yet beheld. They strive for honour and 
 wealth which are unseen, and which is 
 in the distant future. They live, and 
 act — influenced by strong faith and 
 hope — as if these things were attainable; 
 and they deny themselves, and labour, 
 and cross oceans and desert*, and 
 breathe in pestilential air to obtain those 
 things which they have not seen, and 
 which to them are in the distant future. 
 And why should not the Christian en- 
 dure like labour, and be willing to suf- 
 fer in like manner, to gain the unseen 
 crown which is incorruptible, and to 
 acquire the unseen wealth which the 
 moth does not corrupt 1 — And further 
 
 and 
 
 willing rather to be absent 
 
 a I'll. 1.23. 
 
 still, the men of this world strive for 
 those objects which they have not beheld, 
 without any promise or any assurance 
 that they shall obtain them. No being 
 able to grant them has promised them ; 
 no one has assured them that their lives 
 shall be lengthened out to obtain them. 
 In a moment they may be cut off 
 and all their plans frustrated ; or they 
 may be utterly disappointed and all their 
 plans fail ; or if they gain the object, it 
 may be unsatisfactory, and may furnish 
 no pleasure such as they had antici- 
 pated. But not so the Christian. He 
 has, (1.) The promise of life. (2.) He 
 has the assurance that sudden death 
 cannot deprive him of it. It at once 
 removes him to the object of pursuit, 
 not from it. (3.) He has the assurance 
 that when obtained, it shall not disgust, 
 or satiate, or decay, but that it shall 
 meet all the expectations of the soul, 
 and shall be eternal. % Not by sight. 
 This may mean either that we are not 
 influenced by a sight of these future 
 glories, or that we are not influenced by 
 the things which we see. The main 
 idea is, that we are not influenced and 
 governed by the sight. We are not 
 governed and controlled by the things 
 which we see, and we do not see those 
 things which actually influence and 
 control us. In both it is faith that con- 
 trols us, and not sight. 
 
 8. We are confident, ver. 6. We 
 are cheerful, and courageous, and ready 
 to bear our trial. Tindal renders it, 
 " we are of good comfort." f And wil- 
 ling rather to he absent from the body. 
 We would prefer to die. The same 
 idea occurs in Phil. i. 23. " Having a 
 desire to depart and to be with Christ ; 
 which is far better." The sense is, that 
 Paul would have preferred to die, and 
 to go to heaven, rather than to remain 
 in a world of sin and trial, t To be 
 present with the Lord. The Lord Jesus. 
 See Note on Acts i. 24. Comp. Phil, 
 i. 23. The idea of Paul is, that the 
 Lord Jesus would constitute the main 
 glory of heaven, and that to be with 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 Ill 
 
 from the body, and to be present 
 with the Lord. 
 
 9 Wherefore we * labour, that, 
 
 * endeavour. 
 
 jiim was equivalent to being in a place 
 of perfect bliss. He had no idea of any 
 heaven where the Lord Jesus was not ; 
 and to be with him was to be in heaven. 
 That world where the Redeemer is, is 
 heaven. This also proves that the spirits 
 of the saints, when they depart, are with 
 the Redeemer ; i. e. are at once taken 
 to heaven. It demonstrates, (1.) That 
 they are not annihilated. (2.) That 
 they do not sleep, and remain in an un- 
 conscious state, as Dr. Priestley supposes. 
 (3.) That they are not in some inter- 
 mediate state, either in a state of purga- 
 tory, as the Papists suppose, or a state 
 where all the souls of the just and the 
 unjust are assembled in a common abode, 
 as many Protestants have supposed; but, 
 (4.) That they dwell with Christ; 
 they are with the Lord (vrgoc rev Kuyw). 
 They abide in his presence ; they par- 
 take of his joy and his glory ; they are 
 permitted to sit with him in his throne. 
 Rev. iii. 21. The same idea the Saviour 
 expressed to the dying thief, when he 
 said, " to-day shalt thou be with me in 
 paradise." Luke xxiii. 43. 
 
 9. Wherefore (ais). In view of the 
 facts stated above. Since we have the 
 prospect of a resurrection and of future 
 glory ; since we have the assurance that 
 there is a house not made with hands, 
 eternal in the heavens ; and since God 
 has given to us this hope, and has 
 granted to us the earnest of the Spirit, 
 we make it our great object so to live as 
 to be accepted by him. f We labour. 
 The word here used (pih(j<T(/ucu/u.&*, from 
 9i\o( and ri/u», loving honour) means 
 properly to love honour ; to be ambitious. 
 This is its usual classical signification. 
 In the New Testament, it means to be 
 ambitious to do any thing ; to exert one's 
 self; to strive, as if from a love or sense 
 of honour. As in English, to make it 
 a point of honour to do so and so. — 
 Robinson (Lex.). See Rom. xv. 20. 
 1 Thess. iv. 11. It means here, that 
 
 whether present or absent, we 
 may be accepted of him. 
 
 10 For a we must all appear be- 
 
 a Ro. 14. 10. 
 
 Paul made it a point of constant effort ; 
 it was his leading and constant aim to 
 live so as to be acceptable to God, and 
 to meet his approbation wherever he 
 was. % Whether present or absent 
 Whether present with the Lord (ver. 8), 
 or absent from him (ver. 6) ; that is, 
 whether in this world or the next; 
 whether we are here, or removed to 
 heaven. Wherever we are, or may be, 
 it is, and will be our main purpose and 
 object so to live as to secure his favour. 
 Paul did not wish to live on earth re- 
 gardless of his favour or without evi- 
 dence that he would be accepted by him. 
 He did not make the fact that he was 
 absent from him, and that he did not 
 see him with the bodily eye, an excuse 
 for walking in the ways of ambition, or 
 seeking his own purposes and ends. The 
 idea is, that so far as this point was 
 concerned, it made no difference with 
 him whether he lived or died ; whether 
 he was on earth or in heaven ; whether 
 in the body or out of the body ; it was 
 the great fixed principle of his nature 
 so to live as to secure the approbation 
 of the Lord. And this is the true prin- 
 ciple on which the Christian should act, 
 and will act. The fact that he is now 
 absent from the Lord will be to him no 
 reason why he should lead a life of sin 
 and self-indulgence, any more than he 
 would if he were in heaven ; and the fact 
 that he is soon to be with him is not the 
 main reason why he seeks to live so as 
 to please him. It is because this has 
 become the fixed principle of the soul ; 
 the very purpose of the life ; and this 
 principle and this purpose will adhere 
 to him, and control him wherever he 
 may be placed, or in whatever world he 
 may dwell. 1 We may be accepted of 
 him. The phrase here used (lud^nt 
 tlvsu) means to be well-pleasing; and 
 then to be acceptable, or approved. 
 Rom. xii. 1 ; xiv. 18. Eph. v. 10. Phil, 
 iv. 18. Tit. ii. 9. The sense here is, 
 
m 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 fore the judgment-seat of Christ; things done in his body, accord- 
 
 that every one may receive a the 
 
 a c. 7. 3. 
 
 ing to that he hath done, whether 
 it be good or bad. 
 
 that Paul was earnestly desirous of so 
 living as to please God, and to receive 
 from him the tokens and marks of his *■ 
 favour. And the truth taught in this 
 ▼erse is, that this will be the great pur- j 
 pose of the Christian's life, and that it 
 makes no difference as to the existence 
 and operation of this principle whether \ 
 a man is on earth or in heaven. He 
 will equally desire it, and strive for it ; 
 and this is one of the ways in which 
 religion makes a man conscientious and 
 holy , and is a better guard and security 
 for virtue than all human laws, and all j 
 the restraints which can be imposed by 
 man. 
 
 ' 10. For we must (/«). It is proper, ' 
 fit, necessary that we should all appear j 
 there. This fact to which Paul now | 
 refers, is another reason why it was 
 necessary to lead a holy life, and why 
 Paul gave himself with so much dili- 
 gence and self-denial to the arduous 
 duties of his office. There is a neces- 
 sity, or a fitness that we should appear 
 there to give up our account, for we are 
 here on trial ; we are responsible moral 
 agents ; we are placed here to form 
 characters for eternity. Before we re- 
 ceive our eternal allotment it is proper 
 that we should render our account of 
 the manner in which we have lived, ' 
 and of the manner in which we have 
 improved our talents and privileges. In 
 the nature of things, it is proper that we 
 should undergo a trial before we receive 
 our reward, or before we are punished ; 
 and God has made it necessary and cer- 
 tain, by his direct and positive appoint- 
 ment, that we should stand at the bar 
 of the final Judge. See Rom. xiv. 10. 
 % All. Both Jews and Gentiles ; old j 
 and young ; bond and free ; rich and j 
 poor ; all of every class, and every age, j 
 and every nation. None shall escape j 
 by being unknown; none by virtue of! 
 their rank, or wealth ; none because they j 
 have a character too pure to be judged, j 
 All shall be arraigned in one vast assem- i 
 
 blage, and with reference to their eternal 
 doom. See Rev. xx. 12. Rosenmuller 
 supposes that the apostle here alludes 
 to an opinion that was common among 
 the Jews that the Gentiles only would 
 be exposed to severe judgments in the 
 future world, and that the Jews would 
 be saved as a matter of course. But 
 the idea seems rather to be, that as the 
 trial of the great day was the most im- 
 portant that man could undergo, and as 
 all mast give account there, Paul and 
 his fellow-labourers devoted themselves 
 to untiring diligence and fidelity that 
 they might be accepted in that great 
 day. 1 Appear (<f>-jLvteu£rMdu). This 
 word properly means, to make apparent, 
 manifest, known ; to show openly, &c. 
 Hero it means that we must be manifest, 
 or openly shown ; i. e. we must be seen 
 there, and be publicly tried. We must 
 not only stand there, but our character 
 will be seen, our desert will be known, 
 our trial will be public. All will be 
 brought from their graves, and from 
 their places of concealment, and will be 
 seen at the judgment seat. The secret 
 things of the heart and the life will all be 
 made manifest and known. *f The judg- 
 ment seat of Christ. The tribunal of 
 Christ, who is appointed to be the judge 
 of quick and dead. See Note on John 
 v. 25. Acts x. 42 ; xvii. 31. Christ is 
 appointed to judge the world ; and for 
 this purpose he will assemble it before 
 him, and assign to all their eternal allot- 
 ments. See Matt. xxv. «[ That every 
 one may receive. The word rendered 
 may receive (x.c/ui<r»rat) means properly 
 to take care of, to provide for ; and in 
 the New Testament, to bear, to bring 
 (Luke vii. 37) ; to acquire, to ol tain, to 
 receive. This is the sense here Every 
 individual shall take, receive, or bear 
 away the appropriate reward for the 
 transactions of this life of probation. 
 See Eph. vi. 8. Col. iii 25. n The 
 things. The appropriate reward of the 
 actions of this life. % Done in his body 
 
A D.60.] 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 113 
 
 11 Knowing therefore, the 
 terror a of the Lord, we persuade 
 men ; but b we are made manifest 
 
 a He. 10. 31. Jude 23. b c. 4. 2. 
 
 Literally, "the things by or through 
 (Jm) the body." Tindal renders it, " the 
 works of his body." The idea is, that 
 every man shall receive an appropriate 
 reward for the actions of this life. Ob- 
 serve here, (1.) That it is the works 
 done in or through the body ; not which 
 the body itself has done. It is the mind, 
 the man that has lived in the body, and 
 acted by it, that is to be judged. (2.) it 
 is to be for the deeds of this life ; not 
 for what is done after death. Men are 
 not to be brought . into judgment for 
 what they do after they die. All beyond 
 the grave is either reward or punish- 
 ment ; it is not probation. The destiny 
 is to be settled forever by what is done 
 in this world of probation. (3.) It is 
 to be for all the deeds done in the body ; 
 for all the thoughts, plans, purposes, 
 words, as well as for all the outward 
 actions of the man. All that has been 
 thought or done must come into review, 
 and man must give account for all. 
 t According to that he hath done. As 
 an exact retribution for all that has been 
 done. It is to be a suitable and proper 
 recompense. The retribution is to be 
 measured by what has been done in this 
 life. Rewards shall be granted to the 
 friends, and punishments to the foes of 
 God, just in proportion to, or suitably 
 to their deeds in this life. Every man 
 shall receive just what, under all the 
 circumstances, he ought to receive, and 
 what will be impartial justice in the case. 
 The judgment will be such that it will 
 be capable of being seen to be right ; and 
 such as the universe at large, and as the 
 individuals themselves will see ought 
 to be rendered, % Whether it be good 
 or bad. Whether the life has been good 
 or evil. The good will have no wish to 
 escape the trial ; the evil will not be 
 able. No power of wickedness, how- 
 ever great, will be able to escape from 
 the trial of that day , no crime that has 
 been concealed in this life will be con- 
 10* 
 
 unto God, and I trust also are 
 made manifest in your con- 
 sciences. 
 
 cealed there ; no transgressor of law who 
 may have long escaped the punishment 
 due to his sins, and who may have eva- 
 ded all human tribunals, will be able to 
 escape them. 
 
 11. Knowing therefore. We who 
 are apostles, and who are appointed to 
 preach the gospel, having the fullest as- 
 surance of the terrors of the day of 
 judgment, and of the wrath of God, en- 
 deavour to persuade men to be prepared 
 to meet Him, and to give up their ac- 
 count. 1 The terror of the Lord. 
 That is, of the Lord Jesus, who will be 
 seated on the throne of judgment, and 
 who will decide the destiny of all men. 
 ver. 10. Comp. Matt. xxv. The sense 
 is, knowing how much the Lord is to be 
 feared ; what an object of terror and 
 alarm it will be to stand at the judgment 
 seat ; how fearful and awful will be the 
 consequences of the trial of that day. 
 The Lord Jesus will be an object of 
 terror and alarm, or it will be a subject 
 inspiring terror and alarm to stand there 
 on that day because, (1.) He has all 
 power, and is appointed to execute judg- 
 ment; (2.) Because all must there give 
 a strict and impartial account of all 
 that they have done ; (3.) Because the 
 wrath of God will be shown in the con- 
 demnation of the guilty. It will be a day 
 of awful wailing and alarm when all the 
 living and the dead shall be arraigned 
 on trial with reference to their eternal 
 destiny ; and when countless hosts of 
 the guilty and impenitent shall be thrust 
 down to an eternal hell. Who can 
 describe the amazing terror of the scene ! 
 Who can fancy the horrors of the hosts 
 of the guilty and the wretched who 
 shall then hear that their doom is to be 
 fixed forever in a world of unspeakable 
 wo? The influence of the knowledge 
 of the terror of the Lord on the mind 
 of the apostle seems to have been two- 
 fold ; first, an apprehension of it as a 
 personal concern, and a desire to escape 
 
114 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. 1). CO 
 
 12 For • we commend not I behalf, that ye may have some- 
 ourselves again unto you, but | what to answer them which glory 
 
 give you occasion to glory on our 
 
 a c. 3. 1. 
 
 it, which led him to constant self-denial 
 and toil ; and secondly, a desire to save 
 others from being overwhelmed in the 
 wrath of that dreadful day. f We per- 
 suade men. We endeavour to persuade 
 them to flee from the wrath to come * to 
 be prepared to stand before the judg- 
 ment seat, and to be fitted to enter into 
 heaven. Observe here the peculiarity 
 of the statement It is not, we drive 
 men ; or we endeavour to alarm men ; 
 or we frighten men ; or we appeal 
 merely to their fears, but it is, we per- 
 suade men, we endeavour to induce 
 them by all the arts of persuasion and 
 argument to flee from the wrath to come. 
 The future judgment, and the scenes of 
 future wo, are not proper topics for 
 mere declamation. To declaim con- 
 stantly on hell-fire and perdition ; to 
 appeal merely to the fears of men, is 
 not the way in which Paul and the 
 Saviour preached the gospel. The 
 knowledge that there would be a judg- 
 ment, and that the wicked would be sent 
 to hell, was a powerful motive for Paul to 
 endeavour to " persuade" men to escape 
 from wrath, and was a motive for the 
 Saviour to weep over Jerusalem, and 
 to lament its folly, and its doom. Luke 
 xix. 41. But they who fill their ser- 
 mons with the denunciations of wrath ; 
 who dwell on the words hell, and dam- 
 nation, for the purpose of rhetoric or 
 declamation, to round a period, or mere- 
 ly to excite alarm; and who "deal 
 damnation around the land" as if they 
 rejoiced that men were to be condemn- 
 ed, and in a tone and manner as if they 
 would be pleased to execute it, have 
 yet to learn the true nature of the way 
 to win men to God, and the proper 
 effect of those awful truths on the 
 mind. The true effect is, to produce 
 tenderness, deep feeling, and love ; to 
 prompt to the language of persuasion 
 and of tender entreaty ; to lead men to 
 weep over dying sinners rather than to 
 
 in * appearance, and not in heart. 
 
 * in the face. 
 
 denounce them ; to pray to God to have 
 mercy on them rather tkan to use the 
 language of severity, or to assume tones 
 as if they would,be pleased to execute 
 the awful wrath of God. ^ But we are 
 made manifest unto God. The mean- 
 ing of this is, probably, that God sees 
 that we are sincere and upright in our 
 aims and purposes. He is acquainted 
 with our hearts. All our motives are 
 known to him, and he sees that it is our 
 aim to promote his glory, and to save 
 the souls of men. • This is probably 
 said to counteract the charge which 
 might have been brought against him 
 by some of the disaffected in Corinth, 
 that he was influenced by improper 
 motives and aims. To meet this, Paul 
 says, that God knew that he was en- 
 deavouring to save souls, and that he 
 was actuated by a sincere desire to res- 
 cue them from the impending terrors of 
 the day of judgment. % And 1 trust 
 also, &c. And I trust also you are 
 convinced of our integrity and upright- 
 ness of aim. The same sentiment is 
 expressed in other words in ch. iv. 2. 
 It is an appeal which he makes to them, 
 and the expression of an earnest and 
 confident assurance that they knew and 
 felt that his aim was upright, and his 
 purpose sincere. 
 
 12. For toe eommtxd not ourselves 
 again unto you. This refers to what 
 he had said in the previous verse. He 
 had there said that he had such a con- 
 sciousness of integrity that he could ap- 
 peal to God, and that he wa.s persuaded 
 that the Corinthians also approved his 
 course, or admitted that he was influ- 
 enced by right motives. He here states 
 the reason why he had said this. It 
 was not to commend himself to them. 
 It was not to boast of his own character, 
 nor was it in order to secure their praise 
 or favour. Some might be disposed to 
 misrepresent all that Paul said of himself, 
 and to suppose that it was said for meie 
 
4. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 115 
 
 13 For whether we be be- 
 side ourselves, it is to God : 
 
 ac. 11. 1,16,17. 
 
 vain-glory, or the love of praise. He 
 tells them, therefore, that his sole aim 
 was necessary self-defence, and in order 
 that they might have the fullest evidence 
 that he, by whom they had been con- 
 verted, was a true apostle ; and that he 
 whom they regarded as their friend and 
 father in the gospel was a man of whom 
 they need not be ashamed, f But give 
 you occasion. This is a very happy 
 turn of expression. The sense is, ' You 
 have been converted under my labours. 
 You profess to regard me as your spirit- 
 ual father and friend. I have no reason 
 to doubt of your attachment to me. 
 Yet you often hear my name slandered, 
 and hear me accused of wanting the 
 evidence of being an apostle, and of 
 being vain-glorious, and self-seeking. 
 I know your desire to vindicate my 
 haracter, and to show that you are my 
 friends, I, therefore, say these things 
 in regard to myself in order that you 
 may be thus able to show your respect 
 for me, and to vindicate me from the 
 false and slanderous accusations of my 
 enemies. Thus doing, you will be able 
 to answer them ; to show that the man 
 whom you thus respect is worthy of 
 your confidence and esteem.' 1 On 
 your belialf. For your own benefit, or 
 as it were in self-vindication for adher- 
 ing to me, and evincing attachment to 
 me. ^ That ye may have somewhat to 
 answer them. That you may be fur- 
 nished with a ready reply when you are 
 charged with adhering to a man who 
 has no claims to the apostleship, or who 
 is slandered in any other way. ^ Which 
 glory in appearance. The false teach- 
 ers in Corinth. Probably they boasted 
 of their rank, their eloquence, their ta- 
 lents, their external advantages; but 
 not in the qualities of the heart — in 
 sincerity, honesty, real love for souls. 
 Their consciences would not allow them 
 to do this ; and they knew themselves 
 that their boasting was mere vain pre- 
 tence, and that there was no real and 
 
 or whether we be sober, it is for 
 your cause. 
 
 solid ground for it. The margin is, "in 
 the face." The meaning is, probably, 
 that their ground of boasting was ex- 
 ternal, and was such as can be seen of 
 men, and was not rather the secret con- 
 sciousness of right, which could exist 
 only in the conscience and the heart. 
 Paul, on the other hand, gloried mainly 
 in his sincerity, his honesty, his desire 
 for their salvation ; in his conscious 
 integrity before God ; and not in any 
 mere external advantages or professions, 
 in his rank, eloquence, or talent. Ac- 
 cordingly all his argument here turns on 
 his sincerity, his conscious uprightness, 
 and his real regard for their welfare. 
 And the truth taught here is, that sin- 
 cerity and conscious integrity are more 
 valuable than any or all external advan- 
 tages and endowments. 
 
 13. For whether we be beside our 
 selves. This is probably designed to 
 meet some of the charges which the 
 false teachers in Corinth brought against 
 him, and to furnish his friends there 
 with a ready answer, as well as to show 
 them the true principles on which he 
 acted, and his real love for them. It 
 is altogether probable that he was 
 charged with being deranged; that 
 many who boasted themselves of pru- 
 dence, and soberness, and wisdom, re- 
 garded him as acting like a madman. It 
 has not been uncommon, by any means, 
 for the cold and the prudent ; for formal 
 professors and for hypocrites to regard 
 the warm-hearted and zealous friends 
 of religion as maniacs. Festus thought 
 Paul was deranged, when he said, " Paul, 
 thou art beside thyself, much learning 
 doth make thee mad" (Acts xxvi. 24) ; 
 and the Saviour himself was regarded 
 by his immediate relatives and friends 
 as beside himself. Mark iii. 21. And 
 at all times there have been many, both 
 in the church and out of it, who have 
 regarded the friends of revivals, and of 
 missions, and all those who have evinced 
 any extraordinary zeal in religion, as 
 
116 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 14 For the love of a Christ 
 constraineth us ; because we thus 
 
 a Ca. 8. 6. 
 
 deranged. The object of Paul here is 
 to show, whatever might be the appear- 
 ance or the estimate which they affixed 
 to his conduct, what were the real prin- 
 ciples which actuated him. These were 
 zeal for God, love to the church, and 
 the constraining influences of the love 
 of Christ, ver. 14, 15. The word here 
 rendered " be beside ourselves" (s^tx- 
 /uev, from igio-r»(/.i) means properly, to 
 put out of place ; to be put out of place ; 
 and then to put out of one's self, to 
 astonish, to fill with wonder, Luke 
 xxiv. 22. Acts viii. 9. 11; and then 
 to be out of one's mind, to be deranged. 
 Here it means that they were charged 
 with being deranged, or that others es- 
 teemed, or professed to esteem Paul and 
 his fellow-labourers deranged. ^ It is 
 to God. It is in the cause of God, and 
 from love to him. It is such a zeal for 
 him ; such an absorbing interest in his 
 cause ; such love prompting to so great 
 self-denial, and teaching us to act so 
 much unlike other men as to lead them 
 to think that we are deranged. The 
 doctrine here is, that there may be such 
 a zeal for the glory of God, such an 
 active and ardent desire to promote his 
 honour, as to lead others to charge us 
 with derangement. It does not prove 
 however that a man is deranged on the 
 subject of religion because he is unlike 
 others, or because he pursues a course 
 of life that differs materially from that 
 of other professors of religion, and from 
 the man of the world. He may be the 
 truly sane man after all; and all the 
 madness that may exist may be where 
 there is a profession of religion without 
 zeal ; a professed belief in the existence 
 of God and in the realities of eternity, 
 that produces no difference in the con- 
 duct between the professor and other 
 men ; or an utter unconcern about eter- 
 nal realities when a man is walking on 
 the brink of death and of hell. There 
 are few men that become deranged by 
 religion ; there are millions who act as 
 
 judge, that if one died for all 
 then h were all dead. 
 
 b Ro. 5. 15; 14.7,9. 
 
 madmen who have no religion. And 
 the highest instances of madness in the 
 world are those who walk over an eter- 
 nal hell without apprehension or alarm. 
 ^ Or whether we be sober. Whether 
 we are sane, or of sound mind. Comp. 
 Mark v. 15. Tindal renders this whole 
 passage, " For if we be too fervent, to 
 God we are too fervent; if we keep 
 measure, for our cause keep we mea- 
 sure." The sense seems to be, ' if we 
 are esteemed to be sane, and sober- 
 minded, as we trust you will admit us 
 to be, it is for your sake. Whatever 
 may be the estimate in which we are 
 held, we are influenced by love to God, 
 and love to man. In such a cause, we 
 cannot but evince zeal and self-denial 
 which may expose us to the charge of 
 mental derangement ; but still we trust 
 that by you we shall be regarded as 
 influenced by a sound mind. We seek 
 your welfare. We labour for you. And 
 we trust that you will appreciate our 
 motives, and regard us as truly sober- 
 minded.' 
 
 14. For the love of Christ. In this 
 verse, Paul brings into view the princi- 
 ple which actuated him ; the reason of 
 his extraordinary and disinterested zeal. 
 That was, that he was influenced by 
 the love which Christ had shown in 
 dying for all men, and by the argument 
 which was furnished by that death 
 respecting the actual character and con- 
 dition of man (in this verse) ; and of 
 the obligation of those who professed to 
 be his true friends, ver. 15. The 
 phrase " the love of Christ" (ilybrn red 
 X^/o-Tiu) may denote either the love 
 which Christ bears toward us, and 
 which he has manifested, or our love 
 towards him. In the former sense the 
 phrase " the love of God" is used in 
 Rom. v. 8. 2 Cor. xiii. 13, and the 
 phrase " love of Christ" in Eph. iii. 14. 
 The phrase is used in the latter sense 
 in John xv. 9, 10, and Rom. viii. 35 
 It is impossible to determine the sens* 
 
k. D. 60 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 11 
 
 with certainty, and it is only by the 
 view which shall be taken of the con- 
 nexion and of the argument which will 
 in any way determine the meaning. 
 Expositors differ in regard to it. It 
 seems to me that the phrase here means 
 the love which Christ had toward us. 
 Paul speaks of his dying for all as the 
 reason why he was urged on to the 
 course of self-denial which he evinced. 
 Christ died for all. All were dead. 
 Christ evinced his great love for us, and 
 for all, by giving himself to die ; and it 
 was this love which Christ had shown 
 that impelled Paul to his own acts of 
 love and self-denial. He gave himself 
 to his great work impelled by that love 
 which Christ had shown ; by the view 
 of the ruined condition of man which 
 that work furnished ; and by a desire to 
 emulate the Redeemer, and to possess 
 the same spirit which he evinced. 
 If Constraintth us (o-vvixu). This 
 word (<rvy«^«) properly means, to hold 
 together, to press together, to shut up ; 
 then to press on, urge, impel, or excite. 
 Here it means, that the impelling, or 
 exciting motive in the labours and self- 
 denials of Paul, was the love of Christ 
 — the love which he had showed to the 
 children of men. Christ so loved the 
 world as to give himself for it. His 
 love for the world was a demonstration 
 that men were dead in sins. And we, 
 being urged by the same love, are 
 prompted to like acts of zeal and self- 
 denial to save the world from ruin. 
 If Because we thus judge. Gr. ' We 
 judging this;' that is, we thus deter- 
 mine in our own minds, or we thus 
 decide ; or this is our firm conviction 
 and belief — we come to this conclu- 
 sion, ^f That if one died for all. On 
 the supposition that one died for all ; or 
 taking it for granted that one died for 
 all, then it follows that all were dead. 
 The " one" who died for all here is un- 
 doubtedly the Lord Jesus. The word 
 " for" (v?rtg) means in the place of, in 
 Ihe stead of. See Phil. 13. ver. 20 of 
 this chapter. It means that Christ took 
 the place of sinners, and died in their 
 stead; that he endured what was an 
 ample equivalent for all the punishment 
 
 which would be inflicted if they were 
 to suffer the just penalty of the law 
 that he endured so much suffering, and 
 that God by his great substituted sor- 
 rows made such an expression of his 
 hatred of sin, as to answer the same end 
 in expressing his sense of the evil of sin, 
 and in restraining others from trans- 
 gression, as if the guilty were personally 
 to suffer the full penalty of the law. If 
 this was done, of course, the guilty 
 might be pardoned and saved, since all 
 the ends which could be accomplished 
 by their destruction have been accom- 
 plished by the substituted sufferings of 
 the Lord Jesus. See Notes on Rom. 
 iii. 25, 26, where this subject is consi- 
 dered at length. — The phrase ' for all,' 
 (j/rsg TavTm) obviously means for all 
 mankind ; for every man. This is an 
 exceedingly important expression in re- 
 gard to the extent of the atonement 
 which the Lord Jesus made, and while 
 it proves that his death was vicarious, 
 i. e. in the place of others, and for their 
 sakes, it demonstrates also that the 
 atonement was general, and had, in 
 itself considered, no limitation, and no 
 particular reference to any class or con- 
 dition of men ; and no particular appli- 
 cability to one class more than to an- 
 other. There was nothing in the nature 
 of the atonement that limited it to any 
 one class or condition ; there was nothing 
 in the design that made it, in itself, any 
 more applicable to one portion of man- 
 kind than to another. And whatever 
 may be true in regard to the fact as to 
 its actual applicability, or in regard to 
 the purpose of God to apply it, it is 
 demonstrated by this passage that his 
 death had an original applicability to 
 all, and that the merits of that death 
 were sufficient to save all. The argu- 
 ment in favour of the general atonement 
 from this passage, consists in the follow 
 ing points. (1.) That Paul assume* 
 this as a matter that was well-known, 
 indisputable, and universally admitted, 
 that Christ died for all. He did not 
 deem it necessary to enter into the argu- 
 ment to prove it, nor even to state it 
 formally. It was so well known, and 
 so universally admitted, that he made it 
 
118 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 
 a first principle — an elementary posi- 
 tion — a maxim on which to base an- 
 other important doctrine — to wit, that 
 all were dead. It was a point which he 
 assumed that no one would call in 
 question; a doctrine which might be 
 laid down as the basis of an argument, 
 like one of the first principles or maxims 
 in science. (2.) It is the plain and 
 obvious meaning of the expression — 
 the sense which strikes all men, unless 
 they have some theory to support to the 
 contrary ; and it requires all the inge- 
 nuity which men can ever command to 
 make it appear even plausible that this 
 is consistent with the doctrine of a 
 limited atonement ; much more to make 
 it out that it does not mean all. If a 
 man is told that all the human family 
 must die, the obvious interpretation is, 
 that it applies to every individual. If 
 told that all the passengers on board a 
 steamboat were drowned, the obvious 
 interpretation is, that every individual 
 was meant. If told that a ship was 
 wrecked, and that all the crew perished, 
 the obvious interpretation would be that 
 none escaped. If told that all the in- 
 mates of an hospital were sick, it would 
 be understood that there was not an in- 
 dividual that was not sick. Such is the 
 view which would be taken by nine 
 hundred and ninety-nine persons cut 
 of a thousand, if told that Christ died 
 for all ; nor could they conceive how 
 this could be consistent with the state- 
 ment that he died only for the elect, and 
 that the elect was only a small part of 
 the human family. (3.) This inter- 
 pretation is in accordance with all the j 
 explicit declarations on the design of the 
 death of the Redeemer. Heb. ii. 9 : 
 " That he, by the grace of God, should 
 taste death for every man." Comp. John 
 iii. 16 : "God so loved the world that 
 he gave his only begotten Son, that 
 whosoever believeth on him should not 
 perish, but have everlasting life." 1 Tim. 
 ii. 6 : " Who gave himself a ransom 
 for all." See Matt. xx. 28 : « The Son I 
 of man came to give his life a ransom 
 for many." 1 John ii. 2 : " And he is ! 
 the propitiation for our sins, and not for j 
 ours only, but also for the sins of the I 
 
 whole world." (4.) The fact also that 
 on the ground of the atonement made 
 by the Redeemer salvation is offered to 
 all men by God is a proof that he died 
 for all. The apostles were directed to 
 go " into all the world and to preach the 
 gospel to every creature" with the 
 assurance that "he that believeth and 
 is baptized s"hall be saved." Mark xvi. 
 15, 16; and everywhere in the Bible 
 the most full and free offers of salvation 
 are made to all mankind. Comp. Isa. 
 lv. 1. Johnvii. 37. Rev. xxii. 17. These 
 offers are made on the ground lhat the 
 Lord Jesus died for men. John iii. 16. 
 They are offers of salvation through the 
 gospel, of the pardon of sin, and of 
 eternal life to be made " to every crea- 
 ture." But if Christ died only for a 
 part, if there is a large portion of the 
 human family for whom he died in no 
 sense whatever; if there is no provision 
 of any kind made for them, then God 
 must know this, and then the offers 
 cannot be made with sincerity, and God 
 is tantalizing them with the offers of 
 that which does not exist, and which 
 he knows does not exist. It is of no 
 use here to say that the preacher does 
 not know who the elect are, and that he 
 is obliged to make the offer to all in 
 order that the elect may be reached 
 For it is not the preacher only who of 
 fers the gospel. It is God who does it 
 and he knows who the elect are, and 
 yet he offers salvation to all. And if 
 there is no salvation provided for all, 
 and no possibility that all to whom the 
 offer comes should be saved, then God is 
 insincere ; and there is no way possible 
 of vindicating his character. (5.) If 
 this interpretation is not correct, and if 
 Christ did not die for all, then the ar 
 gument of Paul here is a non sequitur 
 and is worthless. The demonstrate 
 that all are dead according to him is 
 that Christ died for all. But suppos* 
 that he meant, or that he knew, that 
 Christ died only for a part, for the 
 elect, then how would the argument 
 stand, and what would be its force] 
 1 Christ died only for a portion of the hu 
 man race, therefore all are sinners 
 Medicine is provided only for a part of 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 119 
 
 mankind, therefore all are sick. Par- 
 Jon is offered to part only, therefore all 
 are guilty." But Paul never reasoned 
 in this way. He believed that Christ 
 died for all mankind, and on the ground 
 of that he inferred at once that all 
 needed such an atonement ; that all were 
 sinners, and that all were exposed to the 
 wrath of God. And the argument is 
 in this way, and in this way only, sound. 
 But still it may be asked, what is the 
 force of this argument ] How does the 
 fact that Christ died for all, prove that 
 all were sinners, or dead in sin ? — I 
 answer, (a) In the same way that to 
 provide medicine for all, proves that all 
 are sick, or liable to be sick ; and to 
 offer pardon to all who are in a prison, 
 proves that all there are guilty. What 
 insult is it to offer medicine to a man 
 m health ; or pardon to a man who has 
 violated no law ! And there would be 
 the same insult in offering salvation to 
 a man who was not a sinner, and who 
 did not need forgiveness. (b) The 
 dignity of the sufferer, and the extent 
 of his sufferings prove that all were 
 under a deep and dreadful load of guilt. 
 Such a being would not have come to 
 die unless the race had been apostate ; 
 nor would he have endured so great 
 sorrows unless a deep and dreadful 
 malady had spread over the world. The 
 deep anxiety ; the tears ; the toils ; the 
 sufferings, and the groans of the Re- 
 deemer, show what was his sense of the 
 condition of man, and prove that he 
 regarded them as degraded, fallen, and 
 lost. And if the Son of God, who 
 knows all hearts, regarded them as lost, 
 they are lost. He was not mistaken in 
 regard to the character of man, and he 
 did not lay down his life under the in- 
 fluence of delusion and error. If to the 
 view which has been taken of this im- 
 portant passage it be objected that the 
 work of the atonement must have been 
 to a large extent in vain ; that it has 
 been actually applied to but compara- 
 tively a small portion of the human 
 family, and that it is unreasonable to 
 suppose that God would suffer so great 
 sorrows to be endured for naught, we 
 may reply, (1.) That it may not have 
 
 been in vain, though it may have been 
 rejected by a large portion of mankind. 
 There may have been other purposes 
 accomplished by it besides the direct 
 salvation of men. It was doing much 
 when it rendered it consistent for God 
 to offer salvation to all ; it is much that 
 God could be seen to be just and yet 
 pardoning the sinner ; it was much 
 when his determined hatred of sin, and 
 his purpose to honour his law was 
 evinced ; and in regard to the benevo- 
 lence and justice of God to other beings 
 and to other worlds, much, very much 
 was gained, though all the human race 
 had rejected the plan and been lost, and 
 in regard to all these objects, the plan 
 was not in vain, and the sufferings of 
 the Redeemer were not for naught. But, 
 (2.) It is in accordance with what we 
 see everywhere, when much that God 
 does seems to our eyes, though not to 
 his, to be in vain. How much rain 
 falls on ever sterile sands or on barren 
 rocks, to our eyes in vain ! What floods 
 of light are poured each day on barren 
 wastes, or untraversed oceans, to our 
 eyes in vain ! How many flowers shed 
 forth their fragrance in the wilderness, 
 and " waste their sweetness on the desert 
 air," to us apparently for naught ! How 
 many pearls lie useless in the ocean ; 
 how much gold and silver in the 
 earth ; how many diamonds amidst 
 rocks to us unknown, and apparently 
 in vain! How many lofty treeo rear 
 their heads in the untraversed wilder- 
 ness, and after standing for centuries 
 fall on the earth and decay, to our eyes 
 in vain ! And how much medicinal 
 virtue is created by God each year in 
 the vegetable world that is unknown to 
 man, and that decays and is lost with- 
 out removing any disease, and that 
 seems to be created in vain ! And how 
 long has it been before the most valuable 
 medicines have been found out, and 
 applied to alleviating pain, or removing 
 disease ! Year after year, and age after 
 age, they existed in a suffering world, 
 and men died perhaps within a few 
 yards of the medicine which would have 
 relieved or saved them, but it was un- 
 known, or if known disregarded. But 
 
120 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 15 And that he died for all, 
 that a they which live should 
 
 a 1 Co. 6. 19, 20. 
 
 times were coming when their value 
 would be appreciated, and when they 
 would be applied to benefit the sufferer. 
 So with the plan of salvation. It may 
 be rejected, and the sufferings of the 
 Redeemer may seem to have been for 
 naught. But they will yet be of value 
 to mankind ; and when the time shall 
 come for the whole world to embrace 
 the Saviour, there will be found no want 
 of sufficiency in the plan of redemption, 
 and in the merits of the Redeemer to 
 save all the race, t Then were all dead. 
 All dead in sin ; that is, all were sin- 
 ners. The fact that he died for all proves 
 that all were transgressors. The word 
 " dead" is not unfrequently used in the 
 Scriptures to denote the condition of 
 sinners. See Eph. ii. 1. It means not 
 that sinners are in all senses, and in all 
 respects like a lifeless corpse, for they are 
 not. They are still moral agents, and 
 have a conscience, and are capable of 
 thinking, and speaking, and acting. It 
 does not mean that they have no more 
 power than one in the grave, for they 
 have more power. But it means that 
 there is a striking similarity, in some 
 respects, between one who is dead and 
 a sinner. That similarity does not 
 extend to every thing, but in many 
 respects it is very striking. (1.) The 
 sinner is as insensible to the glories of 
 the heavenly world, and the appeals of 
 the gospel, as a corpse is to what is 
 going on around or above it. The body 
 that lies in the grave is insensible to the 
 voice of friendship, and the charms of 
 music, and the hum of business, and 
 the plans of gain and ambition ; and so 
 the sinner is insensible to all the glories 
 of the heavenly world, and to all the 
 appeals that are made to him, and to all 
 the warnings of God. He lives as though 
 there were no heaven and no hell ; no 
 God and no Saviour. (2.) There is 
 need of the same divine power to con- 
 vert a sinner which is needful to raise 
 up the dead. The same cause does not 
 
 not henceforth live unto them- 
 selves, but unto him which died 
 for them, and rose again. 
 
 exist, making the existence of that power 
 necessary, but it is a fact that a sinner 
 will no more be converted by his own 
 power than a dead man will rise from 
 the grave by his own power. No man 
 ever yet was converted without direct 
 divine agency, any more than Lazarus 
 was raised without divine agency. And 
 there is no more just, or melancholy 
 description which can be given of man, 
 than to say that he is dead in sins. He 
 is insensible to all the appeals that God 
 makes to him ; he is insensible to all 
 the sufferings of the Saviour, and to 
 all the glories of heaven ; he lives as 
 though these did not exist, or as though 
 he had no concern in them ; his eyes 
 see no more beauty in them than the 
 sightless eyeballs of the dead do in the 
 material world ; his ear is as inattentive 
 to the calls of God and the gospel as 
 the ear of the dead is to the voice of 
 friendship or the charms of melody ; and 
 in a world that is full of God, and that 
 might be full of hope, he is living with- 
 out God and without hope. 
 
 15. And that he died for all, &c. 
 This verse is designed still further to 
 explain the reasons of the conduct of 
 the apostle. He had not lived for him- 
 self. He had not lived to amass wealth, 
 or to enjoy pleasure, or to obtain a repu- 
 tation. He had lived a life of self-denial, 
 and of toil ; and he here states the 
 reason why he had done it It was 
 because he felt that the great purpose 
 of the death of the Redeemer was to 
 secure this result. To that Saviour, 
 therefore, who died for all, he conse- 
 crated his talents and his time, and 
 sought in every way possible to promote 
 his glory. ^ That they which live. 
 They who are true Christians, who are 
 made alive unto God as the result of 
 the dying love of the Redeemer. Sin- 
 ners are dead in sins. Christians are 
 alive to the worth of the soul, the pre- 
 sence of God, the importance of religion, 
 the solemnities of eternity ; i. e. thev 
 
A.. D. CO.] 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 121 
 
 act and feel as if these things had a real 
 existence, and as if they should exert 
 a constant influence upon the heart and 
 life. It is observable that Paul makes a 
 distinction here between those for whom 
 Christ died and those who actually 
 "live," thus demonstrating that there 
 may be many for whom he died who 
 do not live to God, or who are not 
 savingly benefited by his death. The 
 atonement was for all, but only a part 
 are actually made alive to God. Mul- 
 titudes reject it; but the fact that he 
 died for all ; that he tasted death for 
 every man, that he not only died for the 
 elect but for all others, that his benevo- 
 lence was so great as to embrace the 
 whole human family in the design of 
 his death, is a reason why they who are 
 actually made alive to God should con- 
 secrate themselves entirely to his service. 
 The fact that he died for all evinced 
 such unbounded and infinite benevo- 
 lence that it should induce us who are 
 actually benefited by his death, and 
 who have any just views of it, to de- 
 vote all that we have to his service. 
 K Should not henceforth live unto our- 
 selves. Should not seek our own ease 
 and pleasure ; should not make it our 
 great object to promote our own interest, 
 but should make it the grand purpose 
 of our lives to promote his honour, and 
 to advance his cause. This is a vital 
 principle in religion, and it is exceed- 
 ingly important to know what is meant 
 by living to ourselves, and whether we 
 do it. It is done in the following, and 
 perhaps in some other ways. (1.) When 
 men seek pleasure, gain, or reputation 
 as the controlling principle of their lives. 
 (2.) When they are regardless of the 
 rights of others, and sacrifice all the 
 claims which others have on them in 
 order to secure the advancement of their 
 own purposes and ends. (3.) When 
 they are regardless of the wants of 
 others, and turn a deaf ear to all the 
 appeals which charity makes to them, 
 and have no time to give to serve them, 
 and no money to spare to alleviate their i 
 wants ; and especially when they turn 
 a deaf ear to the appeals which are 
 made for the diffusion of the gospel to I 
 11 
 
 the benighted and perishing. (4.) When 
 their main purpose is the aggrandize- 
 ment of their own families, for their 
 families are but a diffusion of self. And, 
 (5.) When they seek their own salva- 
 tion only from selfish motives, and not 
 from a desire to honour God. Multi- 
 tudes are selfish even in their religion, 
 and the main purpose which they have 
 in view, is to promote their own objects, 
 and not the honour of the Master whom 
 they profess to serve. They seek and 
 profess religion only because they desire 
 to escape from wrath, and to obtain the 
 happiness of heaven, and not from any 
 love to the Redeemer or any desire to 
 honour him. Or they seek to build up 
 the interests of their own church and 
 party, and all their zeal is expended on 
 that and that alone, without any real 
 desire to honour the Saviour. Or though 
 in the church, they are still selfish, and 
 live wholly to themselves. They live 
 for fashion, for gain, for reputation. 
 They practise no self-denial ; they make 
 no effort to advance the cause of God 
 the Saviour, f But unto him, &c. 
 Unto the Lord Jesus Christ. To live 
 to him is the opposite to living unto our- 
 selves. It is to seek his honour; to feel 
 that we belong to him ; that all our time 
 and talents ; all our strength of intellect 
 and body ; all the avails of our skill and 
 toil, all belong to him, and should be 
 employed in his service. If we nave 
 talents by which we can influer ice c mer 
 minds, they should be employed to ho- 
 nour the Saviour. If we have skill, or 
 strength to labour by which we can 
 make money, we should feel that it all 
 belongs to him, and should be employed 
 in his service. If we have property, we 
 should feel that it is his, and that he has 
 a claim upon it all, and that it should- 
 be honestly consecrated to his cause. 
 And if we are endowed with a spirit 
 of enterprise, and are fitted by nature 
 to encounter perils in distant and bar« 
 barous climes, as Paul was, we should 
 feel like him that we are bound to devote 
 all entirely to his service, and to the pro- 
 motion of his cause. A servant, a slave, 
 does not live to himself but to his mas- 
 ter. His person, his time, his limbs, his 
 
122 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 A. D. 60 
 
 16 Wherefore henceforth 
 know we no man after the flesh : 
 yea, though we have known 
 
 talents, and the avails of his industry 
 are not regarded as his own. He is 
 judged incapable of holding any property 
 which is not at the disposal of his mas- 
 ter. If he has strength, it is his mas- 
 ter's. If he has skill, the avails of it 
 are his master's. If he is an ingenious 
 mechanic, or labours in any department ; 
 if he is amiable, kind, gentle, and faith- 
 ful, and adapted to be useful in an emi- 
 nent degree, it is regarded as all the 
 property of his master. He is bound 
 to go where his master chooses ; to 
 execute the task which he assigns; to 
 deny himself at his master's will ; and 
 to come and lay the avails of all his toil 
 and skill at his master's feet. He is 
 regarded as having been purchased with 
 money ; and the purchase money is sup- 
 posed to give a right to his time, his 
 talents, his services, and his soul. Such 
 as the slave is supposed to become 
 by purchase, and by the operation of 
 human laws, the Christian becomes by 
 the purchase of the Son of God, and by 
 the voluntary recognition of him as the 
 master, and as having a right to all that 
 we have and are. To him all belongs ; 
 and all should be employed in endea- 
 vouring to promote his glory, and in ad- 
 vancing his cause. ^ Which died for 
 them, and rose again. Paul here states 
 the grounds of the obligation under 
 which he felt himself placed, to live not 
 unto himself but unto Christ. ( 1 .) The 
 first is, the fact that Christ had died 
 for him, and for all his people. The 
 effect of that death was the same as a 
 purchase. It was a purchase. See 
 Note, 1 Cor. vi. 20 ; vii. 23. Comp. 
 1 Pet. i. 18, 19. (2.) The second is, 
 that he had risen again from the dead. 
 To this fact Paul traced all his hopes 
 cf eternal life, and of the resurrection 
 from the dead. See Rom. iv. 25. As 
 we have the hope of the resurrection 
 from the dead only from the fact that 
 he rose ; as he has " brought life and 
 immortality to light," and hath in this 
 
 Christ after the flesh, yet now 
 henceforth know we him no 
 more. 
 
 way " abolished death" (2 Tim. i. 10) ; 
 as all the prospect of entering a world 
 where there is no death and no grave is 
 to be traced to the resurrection of the 
 Saviour, so we are bound by every obli- 
 gation of gratitude to devote ourselves 
 without any reserve to him. To him, 
 and him alone should we live ; and in 
 his cause our lives should be, as Paul's 
 was, a living sacrifice, holy and accept- 
 able in his sight. 
 
 1 6. WJierefore henceforth. In view 
 of the fact that the Lord Jesus died for 
 all men, and rose again. The effect of 
 that has been to change all our feelings, 
 and to give us entirely new views of 
 men, of ourselves, and of the Messiah, 
 so that we have become new creatures 
 The word " henceforth" {iari tw vvv) 
 means properly from the present time , 
 but there is no impropriety in supposing 
 that Paul refers to the time when he 
 first obtained correct views of the Mes- 
 siah, and that he means from that time. 
 His mind seems to have been thrown 
 back to the period when these new 
 views burst upon his soul ; and the senti- 
 ment is, that from the time when he 
 obtained those new views, he had re* 
 solved to know no one after the flesh. 
 t Know we no man. The word know 
 here ('Map*) is used in the sense of, 
 we form our estimate of; we judge ; 
 we are influenced by. Our estimate of 
 man is formed by other views than 
 according to the flesh. % According to 
 the Jiesh. A great many different in- 
 terpretations have been proposed of this 
 expression, which it is not needful here 
 to repeat. The meaning is, probably, 
 that in his estimate of men he was no' 
 influenced by the views which are taker 
 by those who are unrenewed, and whe 
 are unacquainted with the truths of 
 redemption. It may include a great 
 many things, and perhaps the following. 
 (1.) He was not influenced in his esti- 
 mate of men by a regard to their birth, 
 or countr". He did not form an attach 
 
A.D.60.J 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 123 
 
 ment to a Jew because he was a Jew, 
 or to a Gentile because he was a Gentile. 
 He had learned that Christ died for all, 
 and he felt disposed to regard all alike. 
 (2.) He was not influenced in his esti- 
 mate of men by their rank, and wealth, 
 and office. Before his conversion he 
 had been, but now he learned to look 
 on their moral character, and to regard 
 that as making the only permanent, and 
 really important distinction among men. 
 He did not esteem one man highly be- 
 cause he was of elevated rank, or of great 
 wealth, and another less because he was 
 of a different rank in life. (3.) It may 
 also include the idea, that he had left 
 his own kindred and friends on account 
 of superior attachment to Christ. He 
 had parted from them to preach the 
 gospel. He was not restrained by their 
 opinions ; he was not kept from going 
 from land to land by love to them. It 
 is probable that they remained Jews. 
 It may be, that they were opposed to 
 him, and to his efforts in the cause of 
 the Redeemer. It may be that they 
 would have dismissed him from a work 
 so self-denying, and so arduous, and 
 where he would be exposed to so much 
 persecution and contempt. It may be 
 that they would have set before him 
 the advantages of his birth and educa- 
 tion ; would have reminded him of his 
 early brilliant prospects ; and would 
 have used all the means possible to dis- 
 suade him from embarking in a cause 
 like that in which he was engaged. The 
 passage here means that Paul was in- 
 fluenced by none of these considerations. 
 In early life he had been. He had 
 prided himself on rank, and on talent. 
 He was proud of his own advantages 
 as a Jew ; and he estimated worth by 
 rank, and by national distinction. Phil, 
 iii. 4 — 6. He had despised Christians 
 on account of their being the followers 
 of the man of Nazareth ; and there can 
 be no reason to doubt that he partook 
 of the common feelings of his country- 
 men and held in contempt the whole 
 Gentile world. But his views were 
 changed — so much changed as to make 
 it proper to say that he was a new 
 creature, ver. 17. When converted, he 
 
 did not confer with flesh and blood (Gal. 
 i. 1 6) ; and in the school of Christ, he 
 had learned that if a man was his dis- 
 ciple, he must be willing to forsake father, 
 and mother, and sister, and brother, and 
 to hate his own life that he might ho- 
 nour him. Lukexiv.26. He had formed 
 his principle of action now from a 
 higher standard than any regard to rank, 
 or wealth, or national distinction ; and 
 had risen above them all, and now 
 estimated men not by these external and 
 factitious advantages, but by a reference 
 to their personal character and moral 
 worth. 1 Yea, though we have known 
 Christ after the flesh. Though in 
 common with the Jewish nation we 
 expected a Messiah who would be a 
 temporal prince, and who would be dis- 
 tinguished for the distinctions which 
 are valued among men, yet we have 
 changed our estimate of him, and judge 
 of him in this way no longer. There 
 can be no doubt that Paul, in common 
 with his countrymen, had expected a 
 Messiah who would be a magnificent 
 temporal prince and conqueror, one who 
 they supposed would be a worthy suc- 
 cessor of David and Solomon. The 
 coming of such a prince, Paul had con- 
 fidently expected. He expected no other 
 Messiah. He had fixed his hopes on 
 that. This is what is meant by the 
 expression ' to know Christ after the 
 flesh.' It does not mean that he had 
 seen him in the flesh, but that he had 
 formed, so to speak, carnal views of 
 him, and such as men of this world 
 regard as grand and magnificent in a 
 monarch and conqueror. He had had 
 no correct views of his spiritual character, 
 and of the pure and holy purposes for 
 which he would come into the world. 
 1 Yet now henceforth know we him no 
 more. We know him no more in this 
 manner. Our conceptions and views of 
 him are changed. We no more regard 
 him according to the flesh ; we no longei 
 esteem the Messiah who was to com? 
 as a temporal prince and warrior ; but 
 we look on him as a spiritual Saviour, 
 a Redeemer from sin. The idea is, that 
 his views of him had been entirely 
 changed. It does not mean, as out 
 
124 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A.D.60. 
 
 17 Therefore if any man be I old things are passed away ; be- 
 
 in Christ, he is 1 a new "creature : 
 
 i let him be. a Jno. 3. 3. Ga. 6. 15. 
 
 translation would seem to imply, that 
 Paul would have no further acquaint- 
 ance with Christ, but it means that from 
 the moment of his conversion he had 
 laid aside all his views of his being a 
 temporal sovereign, and all his feelings 
 that he was to be honoured only because 
 he supposed that he would have an ele- 
 vated rank among the monarchs of the 
 earth. Locke and Macknight, it seems 
 to me, have strangely mistaken this pas- 
 sage. The former renders it, " For if I 
 myself have gloried in this, that Christ 
 was himself circumcised as I am, and 
 was of my blood and nation, I do so 
 now no more any longer." The same 
 substantially is the view of Macknight 
 Clarke as strangely mistakes it, when 
 he says that it means that Paul could 
 not prize now a man who was a sinner 
 because he was allied to the royal family 
 of David, nor prize a man because he 
 had seen Christ in the flesh. The cor- 
 rect view, as it seems to rne, is given 
 above. And the doctrine which is 
 taught here is, that at conversion, the 
 views are essentially changed, and that 
 the converted man has a view of the 
 Saviour entirely different from what he 
 had before. He may not, like Paul, 
 have regarded him as a temporal prince; 
 he may not have looked to him as a 
 mighty monarch, but his views in regard 
 to his person, character, work, and love- 
 liness will be entirely changed. He will 
 see a beauty in his character which he 
 never saw before. Before, he regarded 
 him as a root out of dry ground ; as 
 the despised man of Nazareth ; as hav- 
 ing nothing in his character to be de- 
 sired, or to render him lovely (Isa. liii) ; 
 but at conversion, the views are changed. 
 He is seen to be the chief among ten 
 thousand and altogether lovely ; as pure, 
 and holy, and benevolent; as mighty, 
 and great, and glorious ; as inlinitely 
 benevolent; as lovely in his precepts, 
 lovely in his life, lovely in his death, 
 lovely in hie resurrection, and as most 
 
 hold, fc all things are become new 
 
 b Is. 65. 17. Re. 21. 5. 
 
 glorious as he is seated on the right 
 hand of God. He is seen, to be a Sa- 
 viour exactly adapted to the condition 
 and wants of the soul ; and the soul 
 yields itself to him to be redeemed by 
 him alone. There is no change of view 
 so marked and decided as that of the 
 sinner in regard to the Lord Jesus Christ 
 at his conversion ; and it is a clear 
 proof that we have never been born 
 again if our views in reference to him 
 have never undergone any change. 
 " What think ye of Christ!" is a ques- 
 tion the answer to which will determine 
 any man's character, and demonstrate 
 whether he is or is not a child of God. 
 Tindal has more correctly expressed 
 the sense of this than our translation. 
 "Though we have known Christ after 
 the flesh, now henceforth know we him 
 so no more." 
 
 17. Therefore if any man be in 
 Christ. The phrase to " be in Christ," 
 evidently means to be united to Christ 
 by faith ; or to be in him as the branch 
 is in the vine — that is, so united to the 
 vine, or so in it, as to derive all its 
 nourishment and support from it, and to 
 be sustained entirely by it John xv. 2 : 
 " Every branch in me." ver. 4: "Abide 
 in me. and I in you." " The branch 
 cannot bear fruit of itself except it abide 
 in the vine ; no more can ye except ye 
 abide in me." See also ver. 5 — 7. 
 See Note on John xv. 2. To be " in 
 Christ" denotes a more tender and close 
 union ; and implies that all our support 
 is from him. All our strength is derived 
 from him ; and denotes further that we 
 shall partake of his fulness, and share 
 in his felicity and glory, as the branch 
 partakes of the strength and vigour of the 
 parent vine. The word "therefore" 
 ('TicrTt) here implies that the reason 
 why Paul infers that any one is a new 
 creature who is in Christ is that which 
 is stated in the previous verse ; to wit, 
 the change of views in regard to the 
 Redeemer to which he there refers, and 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 125 
 
 which was so great as to constitute a 
 change like a new creation. The af- 
 firmation here is universal, " if any man 
 be in Christ;" that is, all who become 
 true Christians — undergo such a change 
 in their views and feelings as to make it 
 proper to say of them that they are new 
 creatures. No matter what they have 
 been before, whether moral or immoral ; 
 whether infidels or speculative believers ; 
 whether amiable, or debased, sensual 
 and polluted, yet if they become Chris- 
 tians they all experience such a change 
 as to make it proper to say they are 
 a new creation. % A new creature. 
 Marg. " Let him be." This is one of the 
 instances in which the margin has given 
 a less correct translation than is in the 
 text. The idea evidently is, not that 
 he ought to be a new creature, but that 
 he is in fact ; not that he ought to live 
 as becomes a new creature — which is 
 true enough — but that he will in fact 
 live in that way, and manifest the 
 characteristics of the new creation. The 
 phrase " a new creature" (k -uvii kt'io-lz) 
 occurs also in Gal. vi. 15. The word 
 rendered " creature" (ktjW) means 
 properly in the New Testament, crea- 
 tion. It denotes, (1.) The act of creating 
 (Rom. i. 20); (2.) A created thing, a crea- 
 ture (Rom. i. 25) ; and refers (a) To the 
 universe, or creation in general. Mark 
 x. 6; xiii. 9—11. Pet. iii. 4. (/;) To 
 man, mankind. Mark xvi. 15. Col. i. 
 23. Here it means a new creation 
 in a moral sense, and the phrase new 
 creature is equivalent to the expression 
 in Eph. iv. 24 : " The new man, which 
 after God is created in righteousness and 
 true holiness." It means, evidently, 
 that there is a change produced in the 
 renewed heart of man that is equivalent 
 to the act of creation, and that bears a 
 strong resemblance to it — a change, so 
 to speak, as if the man was made over 
 again, and had become new. The mode 
 or manner in which it is done is not 
 described, nor should the words be 
 pressed to the quick, as if the process 
 were the same in both cases — for the 
 words are here evidently figurative. 
 But the phrase implies evidently the 
 following things. (1.) That thero is 
 
 an exertion of divine power in the con- 
 version of the sinner as really as in the 
 act of creating the world out ot no- 
 thing, and that this is as indispensable 
 in the one case as in the other. (2.) 
 That a change is produced so great 
 as to make it proper to say that he 
 is a new man. He has new views, 
 new motives, new principles, new ob- 
 jects and plans of life. He seeks new 
 purposes, and he lives for new ends. 
 If a drunkard becomes reformed, there 
 is no impropriety in saying that he is 
 a new man. If a man who was licen- 
 tious becomes pure, there is no impro- 
 priety in saying that he is not the same 
 man that he was before. Such ex- 
 pressions are common in all languages, 
 and they are as proper as they are com- 
 mon. There is such a change as to 
 make the language proper. And so in 
 the conversion of a sinner. There is 
 a change so deep, so clear, so entire, and 
 so abiding, that it is proper to say, here 
 is a new creation of God — a work of the 
 divine power as decided and as glorious 
 as when God created all things out of 
 nothing. There is no other moral change 
 that takes place on earth so deep, and 
 radical, and thorough as the change at 
 conversion. And there is no other 
 where there is so much propriety in 
 ascribing it to the mighty power of God. 
 J Old things are passed uway. The 
 old views in regard to the Messiah, and 
 in regard to men in general, ver. 16. 
 But Paul also gives this a general form 
 of expression, and says that old things 
 in general have passed away — referring 
 to every thing. It was true of all who 
 were converted that old things had 
 passed away. And it may include the 
 following things. (1.) In regard to 
 the Jews — that their former prejudices 
 against Christianity, their natural pride, 
 and spirit of seducing others ; their at- 
 tachment to their rites and ceremonies, 
 and dependence on them for salvation 
 had all passed away. They now le- 
 nounced that dependence, relied on the 
 merits of the Saviour, and embraced ail 
 as brethren who were of the family of 
 Christ. (2.) In regard to the Gentiles — 
 that their attachment to idols, their iove 
 
126 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 18 And all things are of God, 
 who hath reconciled a us to him- 
 
 a Col. 1. 20. 
 
 of sin, and degradation, their depend- 
 ence on their own works, had passed 
 away, and they had renounced all these 
 things, and had come to mingle their 
 hopes with those of the converted Jews, 
 and with all who were the friends of the 
 Redeemer. (3.) In regard to all, it is 
 also true that old things pass away. 
 Their former prejudices, opinions, habits, 
 attachments pass away. Their supreme 
 love of self passes away. Their love 
 of sin passes away. Their love of the 
 world passes away. Their supreme 
 attachment to their earthly friends rather 
 than God passes away. Their love of 
 sin, their sensuality, pride, vanity, levity, 
 ambition, passes away. There is a deep 
 and radical change on all these subjects, 
 — a change which commences at the 
 new birth ; which is carried on by pro- 
 gressive sanctification ; and which is con- 
 summated at death and in heaven. T Be- 
 hold, all things are become new. That 
 is, all things in view of the mind. The 
 purposes of life, the feelings of the 
 heart, the principles of action, all be- 
 come new. The understanding is con- 
 secrated to new objects, the body is 
 employed in new service, the heart forms 
 new attachments. Nothing can be more 
 strikingly descriptive of the facts in 
 conversion than this ; nothing more en- 
 tirely accords with the feelings of the 
 new-born soul. AH is new. There are 
 new views of God, and of Jesus Christ ; 
 new views of this world and of the 
 world to come ; new views of truth and 
 of duty ; and every thing is seen in a 
 new aspect and with new feelings. No- 
 thing is more common in young converts 
 than such feelings, and nothing is more 
 common than for them to say that all 
 things are new. The Bible seems to be 
 a new book, and though they may have 
 often read it before, yet there is a beauty 
 about it which they never saw before, 
 and which they wonder they have not 
 before perceived. The whole face of 
 nature seems to them to be changed, 
 and they seem to be in a new world. 
 
 self by Jesus Christ, and hath 
 given to us the ministry of recon- 
 ciliation ; 
 
 The hills, and vales, and streams ; the 
 J sun, the stars, the groves, the forests, 
 seem to be new. A new beauty is spread 
 over them all ; and they now see them 
 to be the work of God, and his glory is 
 spread over them all, and they can now 
 say 
 
 "My Father made them all." 
 
 The heavens and the earth are filled 
 with new wonders, and all things 
 seem now to speak forth the praise 
 of God. Even the very countenances 
 of friends seem to be new ; and 
 there are new feelings towards all 
 men ; a new kind of love to kindred 
 and friends ; a love before unfelt for 
 enemies ; and a new love for all man- 
 kind. 
 
 18. And all things arc of God. This 
 refers particularly to the things in ques- 
 tion, the renewing of the heart, and the 
 influences by which Paul had been 
 brought to a state of willingness to for- 
 sake all, and to devote his life to the 
 self-denying labours involved in the 
 purpose of making the Saviour known. 
 He makes the statement general, how- 
 ever, showing his belief that not only 
 these things were produced by God, but 
 that all things were under his direction, 
 and subject to his control. Nothing 
 that he had done was to be traced to his 
 own agency or power, but God was to 
 be acknowledged everywhere. This 
 great truth Paul never forgot ; and he 
 never suffered himself to lose sight of 
 it. It was in his view a cardinal and 
 glorious truth ; and he kept its influence 
 always before his mind and his heart 
 In the important statement which fol- 
 lows, therefore, about the ministry of 
 reconciliation, he deeply feels that the 
 whole plan, and all the success which 
 has attended the plan, was to be traced 
 not to his zeal, or fidelity, or skill, but 
 to the agency of God. See Note on 
 1 Cor. iii. 6, 7. f Who hath recon- 
 ciled us to himself. The word us here 
 includes, doubtless, all who were Chris 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 127 
 
 tians — whether Jews or Gentiles, or 
 whatever was their rank. They had all 
 been brought into a state of reconcilia- 
 tion, or agreement with God through 
 the Lord Jesus Christ. Before they 
 were opposed to God. They had vio- 
 lated his laws. They were his enemies. 
 But by the means of the plan of salva- 
 tion they had been brought into a state 
 of agreement, or harmony, and were 
 united in feeling and in aim with him. 
 Two men who have been alienated by 
 prejudice, by passion, or by interest, are 
 reconciled when the cause of the aliena- 
 tion is removed, on whichever side it 
 may have existed, or if on both sides, 
 and when they lay aside their enmity 
 and become friends. Thenceforward 
 they are agreed, and live together with- 
 out alienation, heart-burnings, jealousies, 
 and strife. So between God and man. 
 There was a variance ; there was an 
 alienation. Man was alienated from 
 God. He had no love for him. He 
 disliked his government and laws. He 
 was unwilling to be restrained. He 
 sought his own pleasure. He was 
 proud, vain, self-confident. He was not 
 pleased with the character of God, or 
 with his claims, or his plans. And in 
 like manner, God was displeased with 
 the pride, the sensuality, the rebellion, 
 the haughtiness of man. He was dis- 
 pleased that his law had been violated, 
 and that man had cast off his govern- 
 ment. Now reconciliation could take 
 place only when these causes of aliena- 
 tion should be laid aside, and when 
 God and man should be brought to 
 harmony ; when man should lay aside 
 his love of sin, and should be pardoned, 
 and when, therefore, God could consist- 
 ently treat him as a friend. The Greek 
 word which is here used {ki.tj.x- 
 hd<r3-a>) means properly to change against 
 any thing ; to exchange for any thing, 
 for money, or for any article. — Robinson. 
 In the New Testament it means to 
 change one person towards another ; 
 that is, to reconcile to any one. See 
 Note on Rom. v. 10. It conveys the 
 idea of producing a change so that one 
 who is alienated should be brought to 
 friendship. Of course, all the change 
 
 which takes place must be on the part 
 of man, for God will not change, and 
 the purpose of the plan of reconciliation 
 is to effect such a change in man as to 
 make him in fact reconciled to God, 
 and at agreement with him. There 
 were indeed obstacles to reconciliation 
 on the part of God, but they did not 
 arise from any unwillingness to be 
 reconciled ; from any reluctance to treat 
 his creature as his friend ; but they arose 
 from the fact that man had sinned, and 
 that God was just; that such is the 
 perfection of God that he cannot treat 
 the good and evil alike ; and that, there- 
 fore, if he should treat man as his friend, 
 it was necessary that in some proper 
 way he should maintain the honour of 
 his law, and show his hatred of sin, and 
 should secure the conversion and future 
 obedience of the offender. All this 
 God purposed to secure by the atone- 
 ment made by the Redeemer, rendering 
 it consistent for him to exercise the be- 
 nevolence of his nature, and to pardon 
 the offender. But God is not changed. 
 The plan of reconciliation has made no 
 change in his character. It has not 
 made him a different being from what 
 he was before. There is often a mis- 
 take on this subject ; and men seem to 
 suppose that God was originally stern, 
 and unmerciful, and inexorable, and that 
 he has been made mild and forgiving by 
 the atonement. But it is not so. No 
 change has been made in God ; none 
 needed to be made ; none could be made. 
 He was always mild, and merciful, and 
 good ; and the gift of a Saviour and the 
 plan of reconciliation is just an expres- 
 sion of his original willingness to par- 
 don. When a father sees a child strug- 
 gling in the stream, and in danger of 
 drowning, the peril and the cries of the 
 child make no change in the character 
 of the father, but such was his former 
 love for the child that he would plunge 
 into the stream at the hazard of his 
 own life to save him. So it is with 
 God. Such was his original love for 
 man, and his disposition to show mercy, 
 that he would submit to any sacrifice, 
 except that of truth and justice, in order 
 that he might save him. Hence he sent 
 
128 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 19 To wit, that God was in 
 Christ, reconciling the world 
 
 h.s son to die — not to change his own 
 character; not to make himself a differ- 
 ent being from what he was, but in 
 order to show his love and his readiness 
 to forgive when it could be consistently 
 done. " God so loved the world that 
 he sent his only begotten son." John 
 iii. 16. f By Jesus Christ. By the 
 agency, or medium of Jesus Christ. 
 He was the mediator to interpose in the 
 work of reconciliation. And he was 
 abundantly qualified for this work, and 
 was the only being that has lived in this 
 world who was qualified for it. For, 
 (1.) He was endowed with a divine 
 and human nature — the nature of both 
 the parties at issue — God and man, and 
 thus, in the language of Job, could " lay 
 his hand upon both." Job ix.33. (2.) 
 He was intimately acquainted with both 
 the parties, and knew what was needful 
 to be done. He knew God the Father 
 so well that he could say, " No man 
 knoweth the Father but the Son." Matt. 
 xi. 27. And he knew man so well that 
 it could be said of him, he " needed 
 not that any should testify of man, for 
 he knew what was in man." John ii. 
 25. No one can be a mediator who is 
 not acquainted with the feelings, views, 
 desires, claims, or prejudices of both the 
 parties at issue. (3.) He was the friend 
 of both the parties. He loved God. No 
 man ever doubted this, or had any reason 
 to call it in question, and he was always 
 desirous of securing all that God claim- 
 ed, and of vindicating him, and he never 
 abandoned any thing that God had a 
 right to claim. And he loved man. He 
 showed this in all his life. He sought 
 his welfare in every way possible, and 
 gave himself for him. Yet no one is 
 qualified to act the mediator's part who 
 is not the common friend of both the 
 parties at issue, and who will not seek 
 the welfare, the right, or the honour of 
 both. (4.) He was willing to suffer 
 any thing from either party in order to 
 produce reconciliation. From the hand 
 
 unto himself, not imputing their 
 trespasses °unto them; and hath 
 
 a Ro. 3. 24, 25. 
 
 of God he was willing to endure all that 
 he deemed to be necessary, in order to 
 show his hatred of sin by his vicarious 
 sufferings, and to make an atonement ; 
 and from the hand of man he was will- 
 ing to endure all the reproach, and con- 
 tumely, and scorn which could be 
 possibly involved in the work of in- 
 ducing man to be reconciled to God. — 
 And, (5.) He has removed all the obsta- 
 cles which existed to a reconciliation. 
 On the part of God, he has made it con- 
 sistent for him to pardon. He has made 
 an atonement so that God can be just 
 while he justifies the sinner. He has 
 maintained his truth, and justice, and 
 secured the stability of his moral go- 
 vernment while he admits offenders to 
 his favour. And on the part of man, 
 he, by the agency of his Spirit, over- 
 comes the unwillingness of the sinner 
 to be reconciled, humbles his pride, 
 shows him his sin, changes his heart, 
 subdues his enmity against God, and 
 secures in fact a harmony of feeling and 
 purpose between God and man, so that 
 they shall be reconciled forever. ^ Ana 
 hath given to us. To us the apostles 
 and our fellow-labourers, f The mi- 
 nistry of reconciliation. That is, of 
 announcing to men the nature and the 
 conditions of this plan of being recon- 
 ciled. We have been appointed to 
 make this known, and to press its ac- 
 ceptation on men. See ver. 20. 
 
 19. To wit (Greek, 'n f ot<), namely. 
 This verse is designed further to state 
 the nature of the plan of reconciliation, 
 and of the message with which they 
 were intrusted. It contains an ab- 
 stract, or an epitome of the whole plan ; 
 and is one of those emphatic passages 
 in which Paul compresses into a single 
 sentence the substance of the whole 
 plan of redemption. Tf That God was 
 in Christ. That God was by Christ 
 (lv Xg/s-Tw), by means of Christ; by 
 the agency, or mediatorship of Christ 
 Or it may mean that God was united 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 129 
 
 1 committed unto us the word of 
 reconciliation. 
 
 » put in us. 
 
 to Christ, and manifested himself by 
 him. So Doddridge interprets it. Christ 
 was the mediator by means of whom 
 God designed to accomplish the great 
 work of reconciliation. % Reconciling 
 the world ufito himself. The world 
 here evidently means the human race 
 generally, without distinction of nation, 
 age, or rank. The whole world -was 
 alienated from him, and he sought to 
 have it reconciled. This is one inci- 
 dental proof that God designed that 
 the plan of salvation should be adapted 
 to all men. See Note on ver. 14. It 
 may be observed further, that God 
 sought that the world should be recon- 
 ciled. Man did not seek it. He had 
 no plan for it. He did not desire it. 
 He had no way to effect it. It was the 
 offended party, not the offending, that 
 sought to be reconciled ; and this shows 
 the strength of his love. It was love 
 for enemies and alienated beings, and 
 love evinced to them by a most earnest 
 desire to become their friend, and to be 
 at agreement with them. Comp. Note 
 on Rom. v. 8. Tindal renders this very 
 accurately, "For God was in Christ, 
 and made agreement between the world 
 and himself, and imputed not their sins 
 unto them." f Not imputing their 
 trespasses. Not reckoning their trans- 
 gressions to them; that is, forgiving 
 them, pardoning them. On the mean- 
 ing of the word impute, see Note, Rom. 
 iv. 3. The idea here is, that God did 
 not charge on them with inexorable 
 severity and stern justice their offences, 
 but graciously provided a plan of par- 
 don, and offered to remit their sins on 
 the conditions of the gospel. The plan 
 of reconciliation demonstrated that he 
 was not disposed to impute their sins to 
 them, as he might have done, and to 
 punish them with unmitigated severity 
 for their crimes, but was more disposed 
 to pardon and forgive. And it may be 
 here asked, if God was not disposed to 
 charge with unrelenting severity their 
 
 20 Now then we are a am- 
 bassadors for Christ ; as though 
 
 a Job 33. 23. Mai. 2. 7. Ep. 6. 20. 
 
 own sins to their account, but was 
 rather disposed to pardon them, can we 
 believe that he is disposed to charge on 
 them the si?i of another ? If he does 
 not charge on them with inexorable and 
 unmitigated severity their own trans- 
 gressions, will he charge on them with 
 unrelenting severity — or at all — the sin 
 of Adam? See Note on Rom. v. 19. 
 The sentiment here is, that God is not 
 disposed or inclined to charge the trans- 
 gressions of men upon them ; he has 
 no pleasure in doing it ; and therefore 
 he has provided a plan by which they 
 may be pardoned. At the same time it 
 is true that unless their sins are par- 
 doned, justice wall charge or impute 
 their sins to them, and will exact pu- 
 nishment to the uttermost. ^ And hath 
 committed unto us the word of recon- 
 ciliation. Margin, " put in us." Tin- 
 dal renders this, " and hath committed 
 unto us the preaching of the atonement." 
 The meaning is, that the office of mak- 
 ing known the nature of this plan, and 
 the conditions on which God was will- 
 ing to be reconciled to man, had been 
 committed to the ministers of the 
 gospel. 
 
 20. Now then we are ambassadors for 
 Christ. We are the ambassadors whom 
 Christ has sent forth to negotiate with 
 men in regard to their reconciliation to 
 God. Tindal renders this, " Now then 
 are we messengers in the room of 
 Christ." The word here used (Vgw- 
 fii'jojuiv, from 7t^t&v;, an aged man, an 
 elder, and then an ambassador) means 
 to act as an ambassador, or sometimes 
 merely to deliver a message for another, 
 without being empowered to do any 
 thing more than to explain or enforce 
 it. — Bloomfield. See Thucyd. 7. 9. An 
 ambassador is a minister of the highest 
 rank, employed by one prince or state 
 at the court of another, to manage the 
 concerns of his own prince or state, 
 and representing the dignity and power 
 of his sovereign. — Webster. He is sent 
 
130 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 God did beseech you by us, we 
 pray you in Christ's stead, Be 
 ye reconciled to God. 
 
 to do what the sovereign would himself 
 do were he present. They are sent to 
 make known the will of the sovereign, 
 and to negotiate matters of commerce, 
 of war, or of peace, and in general every 
 thing affecting the interests of the 
 sovereign among the people to whom 
 they are sent. At all times, and in all 
 countries an ambassador is a sacred 
 character, and his person is regarded as 
 inviolable. He is bound implicitly to 
 obey the instructions of his sovereign, 
 and as far as possible to do only what 
 the sovereign would do were he himself 
 present. Ministers are ambassadors for 
 Christ, as they are sent to do what he 
 would do were he personally present. 
 They are to make known, and to ex- 
 plain, and enforce the terms on which 
 God is willing to be reconciled to men. 
 They are not to negotiate on any new 
 terms, nor to change those which God 
 has proposed, nor to follow their own 
 plans or devices, but they are simply to 
 urge, explain, state, and enforce the 
 terms on which God is willing to be 
 reconciled. Of course they are to seek 
 the honou r of the sovereign who has sent 
 them forth, and to seek to do only his 
 will. They go not to promote their 
 own welfare ; not to seek honour, digni- 
 ty, or emolument; but they go to trans- 
 act the business which the Son of God 
 would engage in were he again person- 
 ally on the earth. It follows that their 
 office is one of great dignity, and great 
 responsibility, and that respect should 
 be showed them as the ambassadors of 
 the King of kings. ^ As though God 
 did beseech you by us. Our message 
 is to be regarded as the message of God. 
 It is God who speaks. What we say 
 to you is said in his name and on his 
 authority, and should be received with 
 the respect which is due to a message 
 directly from God. The gospel message 
 is God speaking to men through the 
 ministry, and entreating them to be 
 reconciled. This invests the messaae 
 
 21 For* he hath made him to 
 be sin for us, who knew no 
 
 a Is. 53. 6, 9, 12. Ga. 3. 13. 1 Pe. 2. 22, 24. 
 1 Jno. 3. 5. 
 
 which the ministers of religion bear 
 with infinite dignity and solemnity ; and 
 it makes it a fearful and awful thing to 
 reject it. ^ We pray you, in Christ's 
 stead (i/rtg Xg/o-T:v). In the place of 
 Christ ; or doing what he did when on 
 earth, and what he would do were he 
 where we are. 1 Be ye reconciled to 
 God. This is the sum and burden of 
 the message which the ministers of the 
 gospel bear to their fellow-men. See 
 Noteonver. 19. It implies that man 
 has something to do in this work. He 
 is to be reconciled to God. He is to 
 give up his opposition. He is to submit 
 to the terms of mercy. All the change 
 in the case is to be in him, for God can- 
 not change. God has removed all the 
 obstacles to reconciliation which existed 
 on his part. He has done all that he 
 will do, all that needed to be done, in 
 order to render reconciliation easy as 
 possible. And now it remains that man 
 should lay aside his hostility, abandon 
 his sins, embrace the terms of mercy, 
 and become in fact reconciled to God. 
 And the great object of the ministers 
 of reconcilation is to urge this duty on 
 their fellow-men. They are to do it in 
 the name of Christ They are to do 
 it as if Christ were himself present, and 
 were himself urging the message. They 
 are to use the arguments which he 
 would use; evince the zeal which he 
 would show ; and present the motive* 
 which he would present to induce a 
 dying world to become in fact reconciles 
 to God. 
 
 21. For he hath made him to be sin 
 for us. The Greek here is, • for him 
 who knew no sin, he hath made sin, or 
 a sin-offering for us.' The design of 
 this very important verse is, to urge the 
 strongest possible reason for being recon- 
 ciled to God. This is implied in the 
 word (>Ǥ) for. Paul might have urged 
 other arguments, and presented other 
 strong considerations. But he chooses 
 to present this fact, that Christ has l»een 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 131 
 
 sin ; that we might be made a 
 
 a Ro. 5. 19. 
 
 made sin for us as imbodying and con- 
 xatrating all. It is the most affecting 
 of all arguments ; it is the one that is 
 likely to prove most effectual. It is not 
 it.deed improper to urge on men every 
 other consideration to induce them to be 
 reconciled to God. It is not improper 
 to appeal to them by the conviction of 
 duty ; to appeal to their reason and 
 conscience ; to remind them of the 
 claims, the power, the goodness, and 
 the fear of the Creator ; to remind them 
 of the awful consequences of a con- 
 tinued hostility to God ; to persuade 
 them by the hope of heaven, and by the 
 fear of hell (ver. 11) to become his 
 friends ; but, after all, the strongest argu- 
 ment, and that which is most adapted 
 to melt the soul, is the fact that the Son 
 of God has become incarnate for our 
 sins, and has suffered and died in our 
 stead. When all other appeals fail this 
 is effectual ; and this is in fact the strong 
 argument by which the mass of those 
 who become Christians are induced to 
 abandon their opposition and to become 
 reconciled to God. 1 To be .sin. The 
 words ' to be' are not in the original. 
 Literally it is, • he has made him sin, or 
 a sin-offering' (^^twk jtciWsp). But 
 what is meant by this? What is the 
 exact idea which the apostle intended 
 to convey 1 I answer, it cannot be, 
 (1.) That he was literally sin in the 
 abstract, or sin as such. No one can 
 pretend this. The expression must be, 
 therefore, in some sense, figurative. Nor, 
 (2.) Can it mean that he was a sinner, 
 for it is said in immediate connexion 
 that he " knew no sin," and it is every- 
 where said that he was holy, harmless, 
 undefiled. Nor, (3.) Can it mean that 
 he was, in any proper sense of the word, 
 guilty, for no one is truly guilty who is 
 not personally a transgressor of the law; 
 and if he was, in any proper sense, 
 guilty, then he deserved to die, and his 
 death could have no more merit than 
 that of any other guilty being ; and if 
 he was properly guilty it would make 
 
 the righteousness of God in 
 him. 
 
 no difference in this respect whether it 
 was by his own fault or by imputation. 
 a guilty being deserves to be punished ; 
 and where there is desert of punishment 
 there can be no merit in sufferings. 
 But all such views as go to make the 
 holy Redeemer a sinner, or guilty, or 
 deserving of the sufferings which he 
 endured, border on blasphemy, and are 
 abhorrent to the whole strain of the 
 Scriptures. In no form, in no sense 
 possible, is it to be maintained that the 
 Lord Jesus was sinful or guilty. It is 
 a corner stone of the whole system of 
 religion, that in all conceivable senses 
 of the expression he was holy, and pure, 
 and the object of the divine approbation. 
 And every view which fairly leads to 
 the statement that he was in any sense 
 guilty, or which implies that he deserved 
 to die, is prima facie a false view, and 
 should be at once abandoned. But, 
 (4.) If the declaration that he was made 
 "sin" (a/utiprUer) does not mean that 
 he was sin itself, or a sinner, or guilty, 
 then it must mean that he was a sin- 
 offering, — an offering or a sacrifice for 
 sin ; and this is the interpretation which 
 is now generally adopted by expositors ; 
 or it must be taken as an abstract for 
 the concrete, and mean that God treated 
 him as if he were a sinner. The former 
 interpretation, that it means that God 
 made him a sin-offering, is adopted by 
 Whitby, Doddridge, Macknight, Rosen- 
 muller, and others; the latter, that it 
 means that God treated him as a sin- 
 ner, is adopted by Vorstius, Schoettgen, 
 Robinson {Lex.), Bishop Bull, and 
 others. There are many passages in 
 the Old Testament where the word 
 "sin" (a/xa^rU) is used in the sense 
 of sin-offering, or a sacrifice for sin. 
 Thus, Hos. iv. 8 : " They eat up the sin 
 of ray people ;" i. e. the ?in-offerings. 
 See Ezek. xliii. 22. 25 ; xliv. 29 ; xlv. 22, 
 23. 25. See Whitby's Note on this verse. 
 But whichever meaning is adopted, 
 whether it means that he was a sacrifice 
 for sin, or that God treated him as if 
 
132 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 
 he weie a sinner, i. e. subjected him to 
 Bufferings which, if he had been per- 
 sonally a sinner, would have been a 
 proper expression of bis hatred of trans- 
 gression, and a proper punishment for 
 sin, in either case it means that he made 
 an atonement ; that he died for sin ; 
 that his death was not merely that of a 
 martyr ; but that it was designed by 
 substituted sufferings to make recon- 
 ciliation between man and God. Locke 
 renders this, probably expressing the 
 true sense, " For God hath made him 
 subject to suffering and death, the pu- 
 nishment and consequence of sin, as if 
 he had been a sinner, though he were 
 guilty of no sin." To me, it seems 
 probable that the sense is, that God 
 treated him as if he had been a sinner ; 
 that he subjected him to such pains 
 and woes as would have been a proper 
 punishment if he had been guilty ; that 
 while he was, in fact, in all senses per- 
 fectly innocent, and while God knew 
 this, yet that in consequence of the 
 voluntary assumption of the place of 
 man which the Lord Jesus took, it 
 pleased the Father to lay on him the 
 deep sorrows which would be the proper 
 expression of his sense of the evil of 
 sin ; that he endured so much suffering, 
 as would answer the same great ends in 
 maintaining the truth, and honour, and 
 justice of God, as if the guilty had them- 
 selves endured the penalty of the law. 
 This, I suppose, is what is usually meant 
 when it is said ' our sins were imputed 
 to him ;' and though this language is 
 not used in the Bible, and though it is 
 liable to great misapprehension and per- 
 version, yet if this is its meaning, there 
 can be no objection to it. *[ Who knew 
 no sin. He was not guilty. He was 
 perfectly holy and pure. This idea is 
 thus expressed by Peter (1 Pet. ii. 22) : 
 "who did no sin, neither was guile 
 found in his mouth ;" and in Heb. vii. 
 26, it is said he was " holy, harmless, 
 undefiled, separate from sinners." In all 
 respects, and in all conceivable senses, 
 the Lord Jesus was pure and holy. If 
 he had not been, he would not have 
 been qualified to make an atonement. 
 Hence the sacred writers are every- 
 
 where at great paws to keep this idea 
 prominent, for on this depends the whole 
 superstructure of the plan of salvation. 
 I The phrase "knew no sin," is an ex- 
 : pression of great beauty and dignity. 
 ; It indicates his entire and perfect pu- 
 I rity. He was altogether unacquainted 
 with sin ; he was a stranger to trans- 
 gression ; he was conscious of no 
 sin; he committed none. He had a 
 mind and heart perfectly free from pol- 
 lution, and his whole life was perfectly 
 pure and holy in the sight of God. 
 1 That we might be made the right- 
 eousness of God. This is a Hebraism, 
 meaning the same as divinely righteous. 
 It means that we are made righteous in 
 the sight of God ; that is, that we are 
 accepted as righteous, and treated as 
 righteous by God on account of what 
 the Lord Jesus has done. There is 
 here an evident and beautiful contrast 
 between what is said of Christ, and 
 what is said of us. He was made sin; 
 we are made righteousness ,- that is, he 
 was treated as if he were a sinner, 
 though he was perfectly holy and pure ; 
 we are treated as if we were righteous, 
 though we are defiled and depraved. 
 The idea is, that on account of what the 
 Lord Jesus has endured in our behalf 
 we are treated as if we had ourselves 
 entirely fulfilled the law of God, and 
 had never become exposed to its penalty. 
 I In the phrase " righteousness of God" 
 j there is a reference to the fact that this 
 is his plan of making men righteous, 
 or of justifying them. They who thus 
 become righteous, or are justified, are 
 justified on his plan, and by a scheme 
 which he has devised. Locke renders 
 this, " that we, in and by him, might be 
 made righteous, by a righteousness im- 
 puted to us by God." The idea is 
 that all our righteousness in the sight 
 of God we receive in and through a 
 Redeemer. All is to be traced to him. 
 This verse contains a beautiful epitome 
 of the whole plan of salvation, and the 
 peculiarity of the Christian scheme. On 
 the one hand, one who was perfectly 
 innocent, by a voluntary substitution, is 
 j treated as if he were guilty ; that is, 
 i is subjected, to pains and sorrows which 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER V, 
 
 133 
 
 if he were guilty would be a proper pu- 
 nishment for sin : and on the other, they 
 who are guilty and who deserve to be pu- 
 nished, are treated, through his vicarious 
 sufferings, as if they were perfectly in- 
 nocent; that is, in a manner which 
 would be a proper expression of God's 
 approbation if they had not sinned. The 
 whole plan, therefore, is one of substi- 
 tution ; and without such substitution, 
 there can be no salvation. Innocence 
 voluntarily suffers for guilt, and the 
 guilty are thus made pure and holy, and 
 are saved. The greatness of the divine 
 compassion and love is thus shown for 
 the guilty ; and on the ground of this 
 it is right and proper for God to call on 
 men to be reconciled to him. It is the 
 strongest argument that can be used. 
 "When God has given his only Son to 
 the bitter suffering of death on the cross 
 in order that we may be reconciled, it 
 is the highest possible argument which 
 can be used why we should cease our 
 opposition to him, and become his 
 friends. 
 
 IlEMARKS. 
 
 1. It is possible for Christians to have 
 the assurance that they shall enter into 
 heaven, ver. 1. Paul said that he knew 
 this ; John knew this (see Note on 
 ver. 1), and there is no reason why 
 others should not know it. If a man 
 hates sin he may know that as well as 
 any thing else ; if he loves God, why 
 should he not know that as well as to 
 know that he loves an earthly friend 1 
 If he desires to be holy, to enter heaven, 
 to be eternally pure, why should he have 
 any doubt about that 1 If he loves to pray, 
 to read the Bible, to converse of heaven 
 — if his heart is truly in these things, 
 he may know it, as well as know any 
 thing else about his own character or 
 feelings. 
 
 2. If a Christian may know it, he 
 should know it. No other knowledge 
 is so desirable as this. Nothing will 
 produce so much comfort as this. 
 Nothing will contribute so much to 
 make him firm, decided, and consistent 
 in his Christian walk as this. No 
 other knowledge will give him so much 
 
 12 
 
 support in temptation ; so much com- 
 fort in trial ; so much peace in death. 
 And if a man is a Christian, he should 
 give himself no rest till he obtains assu- 
 rance on this subject ; if he is not a 
 Christian he cannot know that too 
 soon, or take too early measures to flee 
 from the wrath to come. 
 
 3. The body will soon be dissolved 
 in death, ver. 1. It is a frail, crumbling, 
 decaying dwelling, that must soon be 
 taken down. It has none of the proper- 
 ties of a permanent abode. It can be 
 held together but a little time. It is 
 like a hut or cottage, that is shaken by 
 every gust of wind ; like a tent when 
 the pins are loose, and the cords un- 
 stranded, or rotten, and when the wind 
 will soon sweep it away. And since 
 this is the fact, we may as well know 
 it, and not attempt to conceal it from 
 the mind. All truth may be looked at 
 calmly, and should be, and a man who 
 is residing in a frail and shattered dwell- 
 ing, should be looking out for one that 
 is more permanent and substantial. 
 Death should be looked at. The fact 
 that this tabernacle shall be taken down 
 should be looked at; and every man 
 should be asking with deep interest the 
 question whether there is not a more 
 permanent dwelling for him in a better 
 world. 
 
 4. This life is burdened, and is full 
 of cares, ver. 2. 4. It is such as is 
 fitted to make us desire a better state. 
 We groan here under sin, amidst tempta- 
 tion, encompassed by the cares and toils 
 of life. We are burdened with duties, 
 and we are oppressed by trials; and 
 under all we are sinking to the grave. 
 Soon, under the accumulated burdens, 
 the body will be crushed, and sink back 
 to the dust. Man cannot endure the 
 burden long, and he must soon die. 
 These accumulated trials and cares are 
 such as are adapted to make him desire 
 a better inheritance, and to look forward 
 to a better world. God designs that this 
 shall be a world of care and anxiety, in 
 order that we may be led to seek a better 
 portion beyond the grave. 
 
 5. The Christian has a permanent 
 home in heaven, ver. 1, 2. 4. There 
 
134 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 is a house not made with hands; an 
 eternal home ; a world where mortality 
 is unknown. There is his home ; that 
 is his eternal dwelling. Here he is a 
 stranger, among strangers, in a strange 
 world. In heaven is his home. The 
 body here may be sick, feeble, dying ; 
 there it shall be vigorous, strong, im- 
 mortal. He may have no comfortable 
 dwelling here; he may be poor, and 
 afflicted ; there he shall have an unde- 
 caying dwelling, an unchanging home. 
 Who in a world like this should not 
 desire to be a Christian 1 What other 
 condition of life is so desirable as that 
 of the man who is sure that after a few 
 more days he shall be admitted to an 
 eternal home in heaven, where the body 
 never dies, and where sin and sorrow 
 are known no more ] 
 
 6. The Christian should be willing 
 to bear all the pain and sorrow which 
 God shall appoint, ver. 1 — 4. Why 
 should he not] He knows not only 
 that God is good in all this ; but he 
 knows that it is but for a moment ; that 
 he is advancing toward heaven, and 
 that he will soon be at home. Compared 
 with that eternal rest what trifles are all 
 the sufferings of this mortal life ! 
 
 7. We should not desire to die merely 
 to get rid of pain, or to be absent from 
 the body. ver. 4. It is not merely in 
 order that we may be "unclothed," or 
 that we may get away from a suffering 
 body, that we should be willing to die. 
 Many a sinner suffers so much here 
 that he is willing to plunge into an 
 awful eternity, as he supposes, to get 
 rid of pain, when, alas ! he plunges only 
 into deeper and eternal wo. We should 
 be willing to bear as much pain, and to 
 bear it as long as God shall be pleased 
 to appoint. We should submit to all 
 without a murmur. We should be 
 anxious to be relieved only when God 
 shall judge it best for us to be away 
 from the body, and to be present with 
 the Lord. 
 
 8. In a mere readiness to die there is 
 no evidence that we are prepared for 
 heaven. Comp. ver. 4. Many a man 
 supposes that because he is ready to 
 die, that, therefore, he is prepared. 
 
 Many a one takes comfort because a 
 dying friend was ready and willing to 
 die. But in a mere willingness to die 
 there is no evidence of a preparation 
 for death, because a hundred causes 
 may conspire to produce this besides 
 piety. And let us not be deceived by 
 supposing that because we have no 
 alarm about death, and are willing to 
 go to another world, that therefore we 
 are prepared. It may be either stupidity, 
 or insensibility ; it may be a mere desire 
 to get rid of suffering; it may be be- 
 cause we are cherishing a hope of 
 heaven which is altogether vain and 
 illusive. 
 
 9. The Christian should, and may 
 desire to depart and to be in heaven, 
 ver. 2. Heaven is his home ; and it ia 
 his privilege to desire to be there. Here 
 he is in a world of trial and of sin. 
 There he shall be in a world of joy and 
 of holiness. Here he dwells in a frail, 
 suffering, decaying body. There he 
 shall be clothed with immortality. It is 
 his privilege, therefore, to desire, as 
 soon as it shall be the will of God, to 
 depart, and to enter on his eternal in- 
 heritance in heaven. He should have 
 a strong, fixed, firm desire for that 
 world ; and should be ready at the 
 shortest notice to go and to be forever 
 with the Lord. 
 
 10. The hopes and joys of Christians, 
 and all their peace and calmness in the 
 prospect of death, are to be traced to 
 God. ver. 5. It is not that they are not 
 naturally as timid and fearful of dying 
 as others ; it is not that they have any 
 native courage or strength, but it is to be 
 traced entirely to the mercy of God, and 
 the influence of his Spirit, that they are 
 enabled to look calmly at death, at the 
 grave, at eternity. With the assured 
 prospect of heaven, they have nothing 
 to fear in dying ; and if we have the 
 "earnest of the Spirit" — the pledge 
 that heaven is ours — we have nothing 
 to fear in the departure from this world. 
 
 11. The Christian should be, and 
 may be, always cheerful, ver. 6. Paul 
 said that he was always confident, or 
 cheerful. Afflictions did not depress 
 him ; trials did not cast him down. He 
 
A.D.60.J 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 135 
 
 was not disheartened by opposition ; he 
 did not lose his courage by being reviled 
 and persecuted. In all this he was 
 cheerful and bold. There is nothing 
 in religion to make us melancholy and 
 sad. The assurance of the favour of 
 God, and the hope of heaven, should 
 have, and will have, just the opposite 
 effect. A sense of the presence of God, 
 a conviction that we are sinners, a deep 
 impression of the truth that we are to 
 die, and of the infinite interest of the 
 soul at stake, will indeed make us 
 serious and solemn, and should do so. 
 But this is not inconsistent with cheer- 
 fulness, but is rather fitted to produce 
 it. It is favourable to a state of mind 
 where all irritability is suppressed, and 
 where the mind is made calm and 
 settled ; and this is favourable to cheer- 
 fulness. Besides, there is much, very 
 much in religion to prevent sadness, and 
 to remove gloom from the soul. The 
 hope of heaven, and the prospect of 
 dwelling with God and with holy be- 
 ings forever, is the best means of expel- 
 ling the gloom which is caused by the 
 disappointments and cares of the world. 
 And much as many persons suppose 
 that religion creates gloom, it is certain 
 that nothing in this world has done so 
 much to lighten care, to break the force 
 of misfortune and disappointment, to 
 support in times of trial, and to save 
 from despair, as the religion of the Re- 
 deemer. And it is moreover certain 
 that there are no persons so habitually 
 calm in their feelings, and cheerful in 
 their tempers, as consistent and devoted 
 Christians. If there are some Chris- 
 tians, like David Brainerd, who are 
 melancholy and sad, as there are un- 
 doubtedly, it should be said, (1.) That 
 they are few in number; (2.) That 
 their gloom is to be traced to constitu- 
 tional propensity, and not to religion ; 
 (3.) That they have, even with all their 
 gloom, joys which the world never ex- 
 periences, and which can never be 
 found in sin ; and, (4.) That their gloom 
 is not produced by religion, but by the 
 want of more of it. 
 
 12. It is noble to act with reference 
 
 ! to things unseen and eternal, ver. 7. It 
 I elevates the soul ; lifts it above the 
 earth ; purifies the heart ; and gives to 
 man a new dignity. It prevents all 
 the grovelling effect of acting from a 
 view of present objects, and with refer- 
 ence to the things which are just around 
 us. " Whatever withdraws us," says 
 Dr. Johnson, " from the power of our 
 senses ; whatever makes the past, the 
 distant, or the future, predominate over 
 the present, advances us in the dignity 
 of thinking beings." — Tour to the He- 
 brides, p. 322, ed. Phil. 1810. What- 
 ever directs the eye and the heart to 
 heaven ; whatever may make man feel 
 and believe that there is a God, a 
 Saviour, a heaven, a world of glory, 
 elevates him with the consciousness of 
 his immortality, and raises him above 
 the grovelling objects that wither and 
 debase the soul. Man should act with 
 reference to eternity. He should be 
 conscious of immortality. He should 
 be deeply impressed with that high 
 honour that awaits him of standing be- 
 fore God. He should feel that he may 
 partake in the glories of the resurrection ; 
 that he may inherit an eternal heaven. 
 Feeling thus, what trifles are the things 
 of the earth ! How little should he 
 be moved by its trials ! How little 
 should he be influenced by its wealth, 
 its pleasures, and its honours ! 
 
 13. The Christian, when he leaves 
 the body, is at once with the Lord Jesus, 
 ver. 8. He rushes, as it were instinct- 
 ively, to his presence, and casts himself 
 at his feet. He has no other home than 
 where the Saviour is ; he thinks of no 
 future joy or glory but that which is to 
 be enjoyed with him. Why then should 
 we fear death ! Lay out of view, as we 
 may, the momentary pang, the chilli- 
 ness, and the darkness of the grave, 
 and think of that which will be the 
 moment after death — the view of the 
 Redeemer, the sight of the splendours 
 of the heavenly world, the angels, the 
 spirits of the just made perfect, the river 
 of the paradise of God, and the harps 
 of praise, and what has man to fear 
 in the prospect of dying ! 
 
136 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 fA. D. 60. 
 
 Why should I shrink at pain or wo, 
 
 Or feel at death dismay 1 
 I've Canaan's goodly land in view, 
 
 And realms of endless day. 
 
 Apostles, martyrs, prophets there, 
 Around my Saviour stand ; 
 
 And soon my friends in Christ below 
 Will join the glorious band. 
 
 Jerusalem ! my happy home ! 
 
 My soul still pants for thee ; 
 Whpn shall my labours have an end 
 
 In joy, and peace, and thee ! 
 
 C. Wesley. 
 
 14. We should act feeling that we 
 are in the immediate presence of God, 
 and so as to meet his acceptance and 
 approbation, whether we remain on earth, 
 or whether we are removed to eternity. 
 ver. 9. The prospect of being with 
 him, and the consciousness that his eye 
 is fixed upon us, should make us dili- 
 gent, humble, and laborious. It should 
 be the great purpose of our lives to 
 secure his favour, and meet with his 
 acceptance ; and it should make no 
 difference with us in this respect, where 
 we are — whether on earth or in heaven ; 
 with the prospect of long life, or of an 
 early death ; in society or in solitude ; 
 at home or abroad ; on the land or on 
 the deep ; in sickness or in health ; in 
 prosperity or in adversity, it should be 
 our great aim so to live as to be " ac- 
 cepted of him." And the Christian 
 will so act. To act in this manner is 
 the very nature of true piety ; and where 
 this desire does not exist, there can be 
 no true religion. 
 
 15. We must appear before the judg- 
 ment seat. ver. 10. We must all ap- 
 pear there. This is inevitable. There 
 is not one of the human family that can 
 escape. Old and young ; rich and poor ; 
 bond and free; all classes, all conditions, 
 all nations must stand there, and give 
 an account for all the deeds done in the 
 body, and receive their eternal doom. 
 How solemn is the thought of being 
 arraigned ! How deeply affecting the 
 idea that on the issue of that one trial 
 will depend our eternal weal or wo ! 
 How overwhelming the reflection that 
 from that sentence there can be no ap- 
 peal ; no power of reversing it ; no possi- 
 bility of afterwards changing our destiny ! 
 
 16. We shall soon be there, ver. 10. 
 No one knows when he is to die ; and 
 death when it comes will remove us at 
 once to the judgment seat. A disease 
 that may carry us off in a few hours 
 may take us there ; or death that may 
 come in an instant shall bear us to that 
 awful bar. How many are stricken down 
 in a moment; how many are hurried 
 without any warning to the solemnities 
 of the eternal world ! So we may die. 
 No one can insure our lives ; no one 
 can guard us from the approach of the 
 invisible king of terrors. 
 
 17. We should be ready to depart. 
 If we must stand at that awful bar ; and 
 if we may be summoned there any 
 moment, assuredly we should lose no 
 time in being ready to go. It is our 
 great business in life ; and it should 
 claim our first attention, and all other 
 things should be postponed that we may 
 be ready to die. It should be the first 
 inquiry every morning, and the lust sub- 
 ject of thought every evening — for who 
 knows when he rises in the morning 
 but that before night he may stand at 
 the judgment seat ! Who, when he 
 lies down on his bed at night, knows but 
 that in the silence of the night-watches 
 he may be summoned to go alone — to 
 leave his family and friends, his home 
 and his bed, to answer for all the deeds 
 done in the body 1 
 
 18. We should endeavour to save 
 others from eternal death, ver. 11. If 
 we have ourselves any just views of the 
 awful terrors of the day of judgment, 
 and if we have any just views of the 
 wrath of God, we should endeavour "to 
 persuade" others to flee from the wrath 
 to come. We should plead with them ; 
 we should entreat them ; we should 
 weep over them ; we should pray for 
 them, that they may be saved from going 
 up to meet the awful wrath of God. 
 If our friends are unprepared to meet 
 God ; if they are living in impenitence 
 and sin, and if we have any influence 
 over others in any way, we should exert 
 it all to induce them to come to Christ, 
 and to save themselves from the awful 
 terrors of that day. Paul deemed no 
 self-denial and no sacrifice too great, if 
 
A D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 137 
 
 he might persuade them to come to God, 
 and to save their souls. And who that 
 has any just views of the awful terrors 
 of the day of judgment ; of the woes 
 of an eternal hell, and of the glories of 
 an eternal heaven, can deem that labour 
 too great which shall be the means of 
 saving immortal souls ! Not to frighten 
 them should we labour, not to alarm 
 them merely should we plead with 
 them, but we should endeavour by all 
 means to persuade them to come to the 
 Redeemer. We should not use tones 
 of harshness and denunciation ; we 
 should not speak of hell as if we would 
 rejoice to execute the sentence, but we 
 should speak with tenderness, earnest- 
 ness, and with tears (comp. Acts xx. 
 31), that we may induce our friends and 
 fellow-sinners to be reconciled to God. 
 
 19. We should not deem it strange 
 or remarkable if we are charged with 
 being deranged for being active and 
 zealous in the subject of religion, ver. 13. 
 There will always be enough, both in 
 the church and out of it, to charge us 
 with over-heated zeal ; with want of 
 prudence ; or with decided mental aliena- 
 tion. But we are not to forget that 
 Paul was accused of being " mad ;" and 
 even the Redeemer was thought to be 
 " beside himself." " It is sufficient for 
 the disciple that he be as his master, 
 and the servant as his Lord ;" and if 
 the Redeemer was charged with derange- 
 ment on account of his peculiar views 
 and his zeal, we should not suppose that 
 any strange thing had happened to us 
 if we are accused in like manner. 
 
 20. The gospel should be offered to 
 all men. ver. 14. If Christ died for all, 
 then salvation is provided for all ; and 
 then it should be offered to all freely 
 and fully. It should be done without 
 any mental reservation, for God has no 
 such mental reservation ; without any 
 hesitation or misgiving ; without any 
 statements that would break the force, 
 or weaken the power of such an offer 
 on the consciences of men. If thev 
 reject it, they should be left to see that 
 they reject that which is in good faith 
 offered to them, and that for this they 
 must give an account to God. Every 
 
 12* 
 
 man who preaches the gospel should 
 feel that he is not only permitted but 
 REaumEn to preach the gospel "to 
 every creature ;" nor should he embrace 
 any opinion whatever which will in 
 form or in fact cramp him or restrain 
 him in thus offering salvation to all man- 
 kind. The fact that Christ died for all, 
 and that all may be saved, should be 
 a fixed and standing point in all sys- 
 tems of theology, and should be allowed 
 to shape every other opinion, and to 
 shed its influence over every other view 
 of truth. 
 
 21. All men by nature are dead in 
 sins. ver. 14. They are insensible to 
 their own good ; to the appeals of God ; 
 to the glories of heaven, and to the 
 terrors of hell. They do not act for 
 eternity ; they are without concern in 
 regard to their everlasting destiny. They 
 are as insensible to all these things, 
 until aroused by the Spirit of God, as a 
 dead man in his grave is to surrounding 
 objects. And there is nothing that ever 
 did arouse such a man, or ever could, 
 but the same power that made the world, 
 and the same voice that raised Lazarus 
 from his grave. This melancholy fact 
 strikes us everywhere ; and we should 
 be deeply humbled that it is our condi- 
 tion by nature, and should mourn that 
 it is the condition of our fellow men 
 everywhere. 
 
 22. We should form our estimate of 
 objects and of their respective value and 
 importance by other considerations than 
 those which are derived from their tem- 
 poral nature, ver. 16. It should not be 
 simply according to the flesh. It should 
 not be as they estimate them who are 
 living for this world. It should not be 
 by their rank, their splendour, or their 
 fashion. It should be by their reference 
 to eternity, and their bearing on the 
 state of things there. 
 
 23. It should be with us a very serious 
 inquiry whether our views of Christ 
 are such as they have who are living 
 after the flesh, or such only as the un- 
 renewed mind takes, ver. 1 6. The carnal 
 mind has no just views of the Redeemer. 
 To every impenitent sinner he is "a 
 
 i root out of a dry ground." There is no 
 
138 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 
 beauty in him. And to every hypo- 
 crite, and every deceived professor of 
 religion, there is really no beauty seen 
 in him. There is no spontaneous, ele- 
 vated, glowing attachment to him. It 
 is all forced and unnatural. But to the 
 true Christian there is a beauty seen 
 in his character that is not seen in any 
 other ; and the whole soul loves him, 
 and embraces him. His character is 
 seen to be most pure and lovely ; his 
 benevolence boundless ; his ability and 
 willingness to save, infinite. The re- 
 newed soul desires no other Saviour ; 
 and rejoices that he is just what he is — 
 rejoices in his humiliation as well as 
 his exaltation ; in his poverty as well as 
 his glory ; rejoices in the privilege of 
 being saved by him who was spit upon, 
 and mocked, and crucified, as well as 
 by him who is at the right hand of God. 
 One thing is certain, unless we have just 
 views of Christ we can never be saved. 
 
 24. The new birth is a great and 
 most important change, ver. 17. It is 
 not in name or in profession merely, 
 but it is a deep and radical change of 
 the heart. It is so great that it may be 
 said of each one that he is a new crea- 
 tion of God ; and in relation to each 
 one, that old things are passed away 
 and all things are become new. How 
 important it is that we examine our 
 hearts and see whether this change has 
 taken place, or whether we are still 
 living without God and without hope. 
 It is indispensable that we be born again. 
 John iii. If we are not born again, and 
 if we are not new creatures in Christ, 
 we must perish forever. No matter 
 what our wealth, talent, learning, accom- 
 plishment, reputation, or morality, un- 
 less we have been so changed that it 
 may be said, and that we can say, 
 " old things are passed away, and all 
 things are become new," we must pe- 
 rish forever. There is no power in the 
 universe that can save a man who is 
 not bom again. 
 
 25. The gospel ministry Is a most 
 responsible and important work. ver. 18, 
 19. There is no other office of the 
 same importance ; there is no situation 
 in which man can be placed more solemn 
 
 than that of making known the terms 
 on which God is willing to bestow favour 
 on apostate man. 
 
 26. How amazing is the divine con- 
 descension, that God should have ever 
 proposed such a plan of reconciliation, 
 ver. 20, 21. That he should not only 
 have been willing to be reconciled, but 
 that he should have sought, and have 
 been so anxious for it as to be willing 
 to send his own Son to die to secure it ! 
 It was pure, rich, infinite benevolence. 
 God was not to be benefited by it. He 
 was infinitely blessed and happy even 
 though man should have been lost. 
 He was pure, and just, and holy, and it 
 was not necessary to resort to this in 
 order to vindicate his own character. 
 He had done man no wrong ; and if 
 man had perished in his sins, the throne 
 of God would have been pure and spot- 
 less. It was love ; mere love. It was 
 pure, holy, disinterested, infinite benevo- 
 lence. It was worthy of a God ; and 
 it has a claim to the deepest gratitude 
 of man. 
 
 Let us then, in view of this whole 
 chapter, seek to be reconciled to God. 
 Let us lay aside all our opposition 
 to him. Let us embrace his plans. 
 Let us be willing to submit to him, and 
 to become his etkrsal frikxds. Let 
 us seek that heaven to which he would 
 raise us ; and though our earthly house 
 of this tabernacle must be dissolved, let 
 us be prepared, as we may be, for that 
 eternal habitation which he has fitted 
 up for all who love him in the heavens. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 This chapter, closely connected in 
 sense with the preceding, is designed as 
 an address to the Corinthian Christians, 
 exhorting them to act worthily of their 
 calling, and of their situation under 
 such a ministry as they had enjoyed. 
 In the previous chapters, Paul had dis- 
 coursed at length of the design and 
 of the labours of the ministry. The 
 main drift of all this was to show them 
 the nature of reconciliation, and the 
 obligation to turn to God, and to live 
 to him. This idea is pursued in this 
 chapter ; and la view of the labour 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 139 
 
 W 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 E then, as workers ' 
 gether with him, 
 
 a c. 5. 20. 
 
 to- 
 be- 
 
 and self-denials of the ministry, Paul 
 urges on the Corinthian Christians the 
 duty of coming out from the world, and 
 of separating themselves entirely from 
 all evil. The chapter may be conve- 
 niently contemplated in the following 
 parts : 
 
 I. Paul states that he and his asso- 
 ciates were fellow-labourers with God, 
 and he exhorts the Corinthians not to 
 receive the grace of God in vain. To 
 induce them to make a wise improve- 
 ment of the privileges which they en- 
 joyed, he quotes a passage from Isaiah, 
 and applies it as meaning that it 
 was then an acceptable time, and that 
 they might avail themselves of mercy, 
 ver. 1, 2. 
 
 II. He enumerates the labours and 
 self-denials of the ministry. He refers 
 to their sincerity, zeal, and honesty of 
 life. He shows how much they had 
 been willing to endure in order to con- 
 vey the gospel to others, and how much 
 they had in fact endured, and how much 
 they had benefited others. He speaks 
 of their afflictions in a most tender and 
 beautiful manner, and of the happy re- 
 sults which had followed from their 
 self-denying labours, ver. 3 — 10. The 
 design of this is, evidently, to remind 
 them of what their religion had cost, 
 and to appeal to them in view of all 
 this to lead holy and pure lives. 
 
 III. Paul expresses his ardent at- 
 tachment for them, and says that if they 
 were straitened ; if they did not live as 
 they should do, it was not because he 
 and his fellow-labourers had not loved 
 them, and sought their welfare, but from 
 a defect in themselves, ver. 11, 12. 
 
 IV. As a reward for all that he had 
 done and suffered for them, he now 
 asked only that they should live as be- 
 came Christians, ver. 13 — 18. He 
 sought not silver, or gold, or apparel. 
 He had not laboured as he had done 
 with any view to a temporal reward. 
 
 seech you also that ye re- 
 ceive not the grace of God in 
 
 b He. 12. 15. 
 
 And he now asked simply that they 
 should come out from the world, and be 
 dissociated from every thing that was 
 evil. He demanded that they should 
 be separate from all idolatry, and idol- 
 atrous practices ; assures them that there 
 can be no union between light and dark- 
 ness ; righteousness and unrighteous- 
 ness ; Christ and Belial ; that there can 
 be no agreement between the temple of 
 God and idols; reminds them of the 
 fact that they are the temple of God ; 
 and encourages them to do this by the 
 assurance that God would be their God, 
 and that they should be his adopted 
 sons and daughters. The chapter is one 
 of great beauty ; and the argument for 
 a holy life among Christians is one that 
 is exceedingly forcible and tender. 
 
 1. We then, as workers together with 
 him. On the meaning of this expression, 
 see Note, 1 Cor. iii. 9. The Greek here 
 is (ruvigycvvTir) ' working together,' and 
 may mean either that the apostles and 
 ministers to whom Paul refers were 
 joint labourers in entreating them not 
 to receive the grace of God in vain ; or 
 it may mean that they co-operated with 
 God, or were engaged with him in en- 
 deavouring to secure the reconciliation 
 of the world to himself. Tindal renders 
 it, "we as helpers." Doddridge, "we 
 then as the joint-labourers of God." 
 Most expositors have concurred in this 
 interpretation. The word properly 
 means, to work together ; to co-operate 
 in producing any result. Macknight 
 supposes that the word here is in the 
 vocative, and is an address to the fellow- 
 labourers of Paul entreating them not 
 to receive the grace of God in vain. In 
 this opinion he is probably alone, and 
 has manifestly departed from the scope 
 and design of the passage. Probably 
 the most obvious meaning is that of our 
 translators, who regard it as teaching 
 that Paul was a joint-worker with God 
 in securing the salvation of men. ^ That 
 
no 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 LA. D. 60. 
 
 2 (For he saith, a I have heard 
 
 a la. 49. 8. 
 
 yt receive not the grace of God in vain, 
 Ihe • grace of God' here means evident- 
 ly the gracious offer of reconciliation 
 and pardon. And the sense is, ' We en- 
 treat you not to neglect or slight this 
 offer of pardon, so as to lose the benefit 
 of it, and be lost. It is offered freely 
 and fully. It may be partaken of by 
 all, and all may be saved. But it may 
 also be slighted, and all the benefits of 
 it will then be lost.' The sense is, that 
 it was possible that this offer might be 
 made to them, they might hear of a 
 Saviour, be told of the plan of recon- 
 ciliation, and have the offers of mercy 
 pressed on their attention and accept- 
 ance, and yet all be in vain. They 
 might notwithstanding all this be lost, 
 for simply to hear of the plan of salva- 
 tion or the offers of mercy, will no more 
 save a sinner than to hear of medicine 
 will save the sick. It must be embraced 
 and applied, or it will be in vain. It is 
 true that Paul probably addressed this 
 to those who were professors of religion ; 
 and the sense is, that they should use 
 all possible care and anxiety lest these 
 offers should have been made in vain. 
 They should examine their own hearts ; 
 they should inquire into their own con- 
 dition ; they should guard against self- 
 deception. The same persons (ch. v. 20) 
 Paul had exhorted also to be reconciled 
 to God ; and the idea is, that he would 
 earnestly entreat even professors of re- 
 ligion to give all diligence to secure an 
 interest in the saving mercy of the 
 gospel, and to guard against the possi- 
 bility of being self-deceived and ruined. 
 2. For he saith. See Isaiah xlix. 8. 
 In that passage the declaration refers to 
 the Messiah, and the design is there to 
 show that God would be favourable to 
 him ; that he would hear him when he 
 prayed, and would make him the me- 
 dium of establishing a covenant with 
 his own people, and of spreading the \ 
 true religion around the earth. See my ■ 
 Note on that place. Paul quotes the j 
 passage here not as affirming that he ; 
 
 thee in a time accepted, and in 
 
 used it in exactly the sense, or with 
 reference to the same design for which 
 it was originally spoken, but as express- 
 ing the idea which he wished to convey, 
 or in accordance with the general prin- 
 ciple implied in its use in Isaiah. The 
 general idea there, or the principle in- 
 volved was, that under the Messiah God 
 would be willing to hear ; that is, that 
 he would be disposed to show mercy to 
 the Jew and to the Gentile. This is 
 the main idea of the passage as used 
 by Paul. Under the Messiah, it is said 
 by Isaiah, God would be willing to 
 show mercy. That would be an ac- 
 ceptable time. That time, says Paul, 
 has arrived. The Messiah has come, 
 and now God is willing to pardon and 
 save. And the doctrine in this verse 
 is, that tinder the Messiah, or in the 
 time of Christ, God is willing to show 
 mercy to men. In him alone is the 
 throne of grace accessible, and now that 
 he has come God is willing to pardon, 
 and men should avail themselves of the 
 offers of mercy. % I have heard thee. 
 The Messiah. I have listened to thy 
 prayer for the salvation of the heathen 
 world. The promise to the Messiah 
 was, that the heathen world should be 
 given to him ; but it was a promise that 
 it should be in answer to his prayers 
 and intercessions. " Ask of me, and I 
 shall give thee the heathen for thine 
 inheritance, and the uttermost parts of 
 the earth for thy possession." .Ps. ii. 
 8. The salvation of the heathen world, 
 and of all who are saved, is to be in 
 answer to the prevalent intercession of 
 the Lord Jesus. ^ In a time accepted. 
 In Isaiah, " in an acceptable time." The 
 idea is, that he had prayed in a time 
 when God was disposed to show mercy 
 the time when in his wise arrangements 
 he had designed that his salvation should 
 be extended to the world. It is a time 
 which he had fixed as the appropriate 
 period for extending the knowledge of 
 his truth and his salvation ; and it 
 proves that there was to be a period 
 
A. D. 60.1 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 141 
 
 the day of salvation have I suc- 
 coured thee : behold now is the 
 
 which was the favourable period of sal- 
 vation, that is, which God esteemed to 
 be the proper period for making his 
 salvation known to men. At such a 
 period the Messiah would pray, and the 
 prayer would be answered, *[ In the 
 day of salvation. In the time when I 
 am disposed to show salvation. % Have 
 I succoured thee. The Messiah. I have 
 sustained thee, that is, in the effort to 
 make salvation known. God here speaks 
 of there being an accepted time, a 
 limited period, in which the petitions in 
 favour of the world would be accepta- 
 ble to him. That time Paul says had 
 come ; and the idea which he urges is, 
 that men should avail themselves of 
 that, and embrace now the offers of 
 mercy. T Behold now is the accepted 
 time,&cc. The meaning of this passage 
 is, the ' Messiah is come. The time re- 
 ferred to by Isaiah has arrived. It is 
 now a time when God is ready to show 
 compassion, to hear prayer, and to have 
 mercy on mankind. Only through the 
 Messiah, the Lord Jesus, does he show 
 mercy, and men should therefore now 
 embrace the offers of pardon.' The 
 doctrine taught here, therefore, is, that 
 through the Lord Jesus, and where he 
 is preached, God is willing to pardon 
 and save men ; and this is true wher- 
 ever he is preached, and as long as men 
 live under the sound of the gospel. The 
 world is under a dispensation of mercy, 
 and God is willing to show compassion, 
 and while this exists, that is, while men 
 live, the offers of salvation are to be 
 freely made to them. The time will 
 come when it will not be an acceptable 
 time with God. The day of mercy will 
 be closed ; the period of trial will be 
 ended ; and men will be removed to a 
 world where no mercy is shown, and 
 where compassion is unknown. This 
 verse, which should be read as a pa- 
 renthesis, is designed to be connected 
 with the argument which the apostle 
 is urging, and which he presented in 
 the previous chapter. The general doc- 
 
 accepted time ; behold, now is 
 the day of salvation.) 
 
 trine is, that men should seek reconcilia- 
 tion with God. To enforce that, ho 
 here says, that it was now the accepta- 
 bje time, the time when God was willing 
 to be reconciled to men. The general 
 sentiment of this passage may be thus 
 expressed. (1.) Under the gospel it is 
 an acceptable time, a day of mercy, a 
 time when God is willing to show mercy 
 to men. (2.) There may be special 
 seasons which may be peculiarly called 
 the acceptable or accepted time, (a) 
 When the gospel is pressed on the at- 
 tention by the faithful preaching of his 
 servants, or by the urgent entreaties of 
 friends ; (b) When it is brought to our 
 attention by any striking dispensation 
 of Providence ; (c) When the Spirit of 
 God strives with us, and brings us to 
 deep reflection, or to conviction for sin ; 
 (d) In a revival of religion, when many 
 are pressing into the Kingdom — it is 
 at all such seasons an accepted time, a 
 day of salvation, a day which we should 
 improve. It is "now" such a season, 
 because, (I.) The time of mercy will 
 pass by, .and God will not be willing 
 to pardon the sinner who goes unpre- 
 pared to eternity. (2.) Because we 
 cannot calculate on the future. We 
 have no assurance, no evidence that we 
 shall live another day, or hour. (3.) 
 It is taught here, that the time will come 
 when it will not be an accepted time. 
 Now is the accepted time; at some fu- 
 ture period it will not be. If men 
 grieve away the Holy Spirit ; if they 
 continue to reject the gospel ; if they 
 go unprepared to eternity, no mercy can 
 be found. God does not design to par- 
 don beyond the grave. He has made 
 no provisions for forgiveness there ; and 
 they who are not pardoned in this life 
 must be unpardoned forever. 
 
 3. Giving no offence in any thing. 
 We the ministers of God. ver. 1. The 
 word rendered offence means, properly, 
 stumbling ; then offence, or cause of 
 offence, a falling into sin. The mean- 
 ing here is, 'giving no occasion for 
 
142 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 3 Giving no * offence in any I 4 But in all things approving 1 
 
 thing, that the ministry be not ourselves as the ministers b of 
 
 blamed : God, in much patience, in af- 
 
 a 1 Co. 10. 32. i commending. b 1 Co. 4. 1. 
 
 contemning or rejecting the gospel ;' 
 and the idea of Paul is, that he and his ! 
 fel ow-apostles so laboured as that no one I 
 who saw or knew them, should have j 
 occasion to reproach the ministry, or the I 
 religion which they preached ; but so | 
 that in their pure and self-denying t 
 lives, the strongest argument should be j 
 seen for embracing it. Comp. Matt. x. 
 16. 1 Cor. viii. 13 ; x. 32, 33. Notes, | 
 Phil. ii. 15. 1 Thess. ii. 10; v. 22. 
 How they conducted so as to give no 
 offence he states in the following verses. 
 % That the ministry be not blamed. 
 The phrase, " the ministry," refers here 
 not merely to the ministry of Paul, that 
 is, it does not mean merely that he 
 would be subject to blame and reproach, j 
 but that the ministry itself which the ] 
 Lord Jesus had established would be j 
 blamed, or would be reproached by the 
 improper conduct of any one who was 
 engaged in that work. The idea is, 
 that the misconduct of one minister of 
 the gospel would bring a reproach upon 
 the profession itself, and would prevent 
 the usefulness and success of others, 
 just as the misconduct of a physician ex- 
 poses the profession to reproach, or the 
 bad conduct of a lawyer reflects itself 
 in some degree on the entire profession. 
 And it is so everywhere. The errors, 
 follies, misconduct, or bad example of j 
 one minister of the gospel brings a re- j 
 proach upon the sacred calling itself, ! 
 and prevents the usefulness of many j 
 others. Ministers do not stand alone. \ 
 And though no one can be responsi- j 
 ble for the errors and failings of others, j 
 yet no one can avoid suffering in regard 
 to his usefulness by the sins of others. 
 Not only, therefore, from a regard to his 
 personal usefulness should every minis- 
 ter be circumspect in his walk, but from 
 respect to the usefulness of all others 
 who sustain the office of the ministry, 
 and from respect to the success of re- 
 ligion all over the world. Paul made 
 
 it one of the principles of his conduct 
 so to act that no man should have 
 cause to speak reproachfully of the 
 ministry on his account. In order to 
 this, he felt it to be necessary not only 
 to claim and assert honour for the mi- 
 nistry, but to lead such a life as should 
 deserve the respect of men. If a man 
 wishes to secure respect for his calling, 
 it must be by living in the manner 
 which that calling demands, and then 
 respect and honour will follow as a mat- 
 ter of course. See Calvin. 
 
 4. But in all things. In every respect. 
 In all that we do. In every way, both 
 by words and deeds. How this was 
 done, Paul proceeds to state in the fol- 
 lowing verses, ^ Approving ourselves 
 as the ministers of God. Marg. " Com- 
 mending." Tindal renders it, " In all 
 things let us behave ourselves as the 
 ministers of God." The idea is, that 
 Paul and his fellow-labourers endea- 
 voured to live as became the ministers 
 of God, and so as to commend the mi- 
 nistry to the confidence and affection of 
 men. They endeavoured to live as was 
 appropriate to those who were the 
 ministers of God, and so that the world 
 would be disposed to do honour to the 
 ministry. *f In much patience. In 
 the patient endurance of afflictions of 
 all kinds. Some of his trials he pro- 
 ceeds to enumerate. The idea is, that 
 a minister of God, in order to do good 
 and to commend his ministry, should set 
 an example of patience. He preaches 
 this as a duty to others ; and if, when 
 he is poor, persecuted, oppressed, ca- 
 lumniated, or imprisoned, he should 
 murmur, or be insubmissive, the conse- 
 quence would be that he would do littlo 
 good by all his preaching. And no one 
 can doubt, that God often places his 
 ministers in circumstances of peculiar 
 trial, among other reasons, in order that 
 they may illustrate their own precepts 
 by their example, and show to their 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 143 
 
 flietions, in necessities, in dis- ments, * in tumults, in labours, 
 
 tresses, 
 
 5 In stripes, * in imprison- 
 
 a c. 11. 23. &x. 
 
 people with what temper and spirit they 
 may and ought to suffer. Ministers 
 often do a great deal more good by their 
 example in suffering than they do in 
 their preaching. It is easy to preach 
 to others ; it is not so easy to manifest 
 just the right spirit in time of persecu- 
 tion and trial. Men too can resist preach- 
 ing, but they cannot resist the effect 
 and power of a good example in times 
 of suffering. In regard to the manner 
 in which Paul says that the ministry 
 may commend itself, it may be observed, 
 that he groups several things together ; 
 or mentions several classes of influences 
 or means. In this and the next verse 
 he refers to various kinds of afflictions. 
 In the following verses he groups several 
 things together, pertaining to a holy 
 life, and a pure conversation, f In 
 afflictions. In all our afflictions ; refer- 
 ring to all the afflictions and trials which 
 they were called to bear. The follow- 
 ing words, in the manner of a climax, 
 specify more particularly the kinds of 
 trials which they were called to endure. 
 ^ In necessities. This is a stronger 
 term than afflictions, and denotes the 
 distress which arose from want. He 
 everywhere endured adversity. It de- 
 notes unavoidable distress and calamity. 
 K In distresses. The word here used 
 (o-Tivo^oD^ix) denotes properly straitness 
 of place, want of room ; then straits, 
 distress, anguish. It is a stronger word 
 than either of those which he had before 
 used. See it explained in the Notes on 
 Rom. ii. 9. Paul means that in all 
 these circumstances he had evinced pa- 
 tience, and had endeavoured to act as 
 became a minister of God. 
 
 5. In stripes. In this verse, Paul 
 proceeds to specifications of what he 
 had been called to endure. In the 
 previous verse, he had spoken of his 
 afflictions in general terms. In this 
 expression, he refers to the fact that he 
 and his fellow-labourers were scourged 
 
 in watchings, in fastings. 
 
 » or in tossings to and fro. 
 
 in synagogues and cities as if they had 
 been the worst of men. In 2 Cor. xi. 
 23 — 25, Paul says that he had been 
 scourged five times by the Jews, and 
 had been thrice beaten with rods. See 
 the Notes on that place, ^f In impri- 
 sonments. As at Philippi. Acts xvi. 24. 
 seq. It was no uncommon thing for 
 the early preachers of Christianity to 
 be imprisoned. 1 In tumults. Marg. 
 Tossing to and fro. The Greek word 
 (dxATAorrxo-U) denotes properly insta- 
 bility, thence disorder, tumult, commo- 
 tion. Here it means that in the various 
 tumults and commotions which were 
 produced by the preaching of the gospel, 
 Paul endeavoured to act as became a 
 minister of God. Such tumults were 
 excited at Corinth (Acts xviii. 6) ; at 
 Philippi (Acts xvi. 19, 20) ; at Lystra 
 and Derbe (Acts xiv. 19) ; at Ephesus 
 (Acts xix), and in various other places. 
 The idea is, that if the ministers of re- 
 ligion are assailed by a lawless mob, 
 they are to endeavour to show the spirit 
 of Christ there, and to evince all pa- 
 tience, and to do good even in such a 
 scene. Patience and the Christian spirit 
 may often do more good in such scenes 
 than much preaching would do else- 
 where. % In labours. Referring pro- 
 bably to the labours of the ministry, 
 and its incessant duties, and perhaps 
 also to the labours which they performed 
 for their own support, as it is well known 
 that Paul and probably also the other 
 apostles, laboured often to support them- 
 selves, f In watchings. In wake- 
 fulness, or want of sleep. He probably 
 refers to the fact that in these arduous 
 duties, and in his travels, and in anxious 
 cares for the churches, and for the ad- 
 vancement of religion, he was often de- 
 prived of his ordinary rest. He refers 
 to this again in chap. xi. 27. f In 
 fastings. Referring probably not only 
 to the somewhat frequent fasts to which 
 he voluntarily submitted as acts of devo« 
 
144 
 
 H. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 6 By pureness, by knowledge, 
 by long-suffering, by kindness, 
 
 tion, but also to the fact that in his 
 travels, when abroad and among stran- 
 gers, he was often destitute of food. 
 To such trials, those who travelled as 
 Paul did, among strangers, and without 
 property, would be often compelled to 
 submit ; and such trials, almost without 
 number, the religion which we now 
 enjoy has cost. It at first cost the pain- 
 ful life, the toils, the anxieties, and the 
 sufferings of the Redeemer ; and it has 
 been propagated and perpetuated amidst 
 the deep sorrows, the sacrifices, and the 
 tears and blood of those who have con- 
 tributed to perpetuate it on earth. For 
 such a religion, originated, extended, 
 and preserved in such a manner, we 
 can never express suitable gratitude to 
 God. Such a religion we cannot over- 
 estimate in value; and for the extension 
 and perpetuity of such a religion, we 
 also should be willing to practise un- 
 wearied self-denial. 
 
 6. By pureness. Paul, having in the 
 previous verses, grouped together some 
 of the sufferings which he endured, and 
 by which he had endeavoured to com- 
 mend and extend the true religion, pro- 
 ceeds here to group together certain 
 other influences by which he had sought 
 the same object. The substance of what 
 he here says is, that it had not only 
 been done by sufferings and trials, but 
 by a holy life, and by entire consecra- 
 tion to the great cause to which he had 
 devoted himself. He begins by stating 
 that it was by pureness, that is, by 
 integrity, sanctity, a holy and pure life. 
 All preaching, and all labours would 
 have been in vain without this ; and 
 Paul well knew that if he succeeded in 
 the ministry, he must be a good man. 
 The same is true in all other profes- 
 sions. One of the essential requisites 
 of an orator, according to Quintilian, 
 is, that he musi be a good man ; 
 and no man may expect ultimately to 
 succeed in any calling of life unless he 
 is pure. But however this may be in 
 other callings, no one will doubt it in 
 regard to the ministry of the gospel. 
 
 by the Holy Ghost, by love 
 unfeigned, 
 
 Tf By knowledge. Interpreters have dif- 
 fered much in the interpretation of this. 
 Rosenmuller and Schleusner understand 
 by it prudence. Grotius interprets it 
 as meaning a knowledge of the law. 
 Doddridge supposes that it refers to a' 
 solicitude to improve in the knowledge 
 of those truths which they were called 
 to communicate to others. Probably 
 the idea is a very simple one. Paul is 
 showing how he endeavoured to com- 
 mend the gospel to others, ver. 4. He 
 says, therefore, that one way was by com- 
 municating knowledge, true knowledge. 
 He proclaimed that which was true, and 
 which was real knowledge, in opposi- 
 tion to the false science of the Greeks 
 and in opposition to those who would 
 substitute declamation for argument, and 
 the mere ornaments of rhetoric for truth. 
 The idea is, that the ministry should not 
 be ignorant, but that if they wished to 
 commend their office, they should be 
 well-informed, and should be men of 
 good sense. Paul had no belief that 
 an ignorant ministry was preferable to 
 one that was characterized by true 
 knowledge ; and he felt that if he was 
 to be useful it was to be by his impart- 
 ing to others truth that would be useful. 
 "The priest's lips should keep know- 
 ledge." Mai. ii. 7. ^ By long-suffering. 
 By patience in our trials, and in the 
 provocations which we meet with. We 
 endeavour to obtain and keep a control 
 over our passions, and to keep them in 
 subjection. See this word explained in 
 the Notes on 1 Cor. xiii. 4. ^ By kind' 
 ncss. See Note, 1 Cor. xiii. 4. By 
 gentleness of manner, of temper, and 
 of spirit. By endeavouring to evince 
 this spirit to all, whatever may be their 
 treatment of us, and whatever may be 
 our provocations. Paul felt that if a 
 minister would do good he must be 
 kind, and gentle to all. f By the Holy 
 Ghost. By the sanctifying influences 
 of the Holy Spirit. By tliuse graces 
 and virtues which it is his office pecu- 
 liarly to produce in the heart Comp. 
 Gal. v. 22, 23. Paul here evidently 
 
A D.bO.j 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 U 
 
 7 By the word ° of truth, by 
 the 'power of God, by the 
 
 ac.4.2. 6 1 Co. 2. 4. 
 
 I 
 
 re r ers not to the miraculous agency of 
 the Holy Spirit, but he is referring to the 
 Spirit which he and his fellow-ministers 
 manifested, and means here, doubtless, 
 that they evinced such feelings as the 
 Holy Spirit produced in the hearts of 
 the children of God. ^ By love un- 
 feigned. Sincere, true, ardent love to all. 
 By undissembled, pure, and genuine 
 affection for the souls of men. What 
 good can a minister do if he does not 
 love his people, and the souls of men ? 
 The prominent characteristic in the life 
 of the Redeemer was love — love to all. 
 So if we are like him, and if we do any 
 good, we shall have love to men. No 
 man is useful without it ; and ministers, 
 in general, are useful just in proportion 
 as they have it. It will prompt to labour, 
 self-denial, and toil ; it will make them 
 patient, ardent, kind ; it will give them 
 zeal, and will give them access to the 
 heart ; it will accomplish what no elo- 
 quence, labour, or learning will do with- 
 out it. He who shows that he loves 
 me has access at once to my heart ; he 
 who does not, cannot make a way there 
 by any argument, eloquence, denuncia- 
 tion, or learning. No minister is useful 
 without it ; no one with it can be other- 
 wise than useful. 
 
 7. By the word of truth. That is, 
 by making known the truths of the 
 gospel. It was his object to make known 
 the simple truth. He did not corrupt 
 it by false mixtures of philosophy and 
 human wisdom, but communicated it 
 as it had been revealed to him. The 
 object of the appointment of the Chris- 
 tian ministry is to make known the 
 truth, and when that is done it cannot 
 but be that they will commend their 
 office and work to the favourable re- 
 gards of men. ^ By the power of God. 
 By the divine power which attended 
 the preaching of the gospel. Most of 
 the ancient commentators explain this of 
 the power of working miracles. — Bloom- 
 field. But it probably includes all the 
 13 
 
 armour c of righteousness on the 
 right hand and on the left, 
 
 c Ep. 6. 11. &c. 
 
 displays of divine power which attended 
 the propagation of the gospel, whether 
 in the working of miracles, or in the 
 conversion of men. If it be asked how 
 Paul used this power so as to give no 
 offence in the work of the ministry, it 
 may be replied, that the miraculous 
 endowments bestowed upon the apostles, 
 the power of speaking foreign languages, 
 &c, seem to have been bestowed upon 
 them to be employed in the same way as 
 were their natural faculties. See Notes 
 on 1 Cor. xiv. 32. The idea here is, 
 that they used the great powers intrusted 
 to them by God, not as impostors would 
 have done, for the purposes of gain and 
 ambition, or for vain display, but solely 
 for the furtherance of the true religion, 
 and the salvation of men. They thus 
 showed that they were sent from God, 
 as well by the nature of the powers with 
 which they were intrusted, as by the man- 
 ner in which they used them. | By the 
 armour of righteousness on the right 
 hand and on the left. Interpreters have 
 varied much in the exposition of this 
 passage ; and many have run into- 
 utter wildness. Grotius says, that it 
 refers to the manner in which the 
 ancient soldiers were armed. They 
 bore a spear in their right hand, and 
 a shield in the left. With the former 
 they attacked their foes, with the latter 
 they made defence. Some have sup- 
 posed that it refers to the fact that 
 they were taught to use the sword with 
 the left hand as well as with the right. 
 The simple idea is, that they were com- 
 pletely armed. To be armed on the 
 right hand and on the left is to be well 
 armed, or entirely equipped. They wen 
 forth to conflict. They met persecutioi 
 opposition, and slander. As the soldia. 
 went well armed to battle, so did they 
 But the armour with which they m 
 their foes, and which constituted thet 
 entire panoply, was a holy life. With 
 that they met all the assaults of their 
 enemies ; with that all slander and perse- 
 
146 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 
 8 By honour and dishonour, 
 by evil report and good re- 
 
 » — 
 
 cution. That was their defence, and 
 by that they hoped and expected to 
 achieve their conquests. They had no 
 swords, and spears, and helmets, and 
 shields ; no carnal weapons of offence 
 and defence ; but they expected to meet 
 all their assaults, and to gain all their 
 victories, by an upright and holy life. 
 
 8. By honour and dishonour. The 
 apostle is still illustrating the proposition 
 that he and his fellow-labourers en- 
 deavoured to give no offence (ver. 3), 
 and to commend themselves as the mi- 
 nisters of God. ver. 4. He here (ver. 
 8 — 10) introduces another group of 
 particulars in which it was done. The 
 main idea is, that they endeavoured to 
 act in a manner so as to commend the 
 ministry and the gospel, whether they 
 were in circumstances of honour or dis- 
 honour, whether lauded or despised by 
 the world. The word rendered " by" 
 (J/d) does not here denote the means 
 by which they commended the gospel, 
 but the medium. In the midst of 
 honour and dishonour ; whatever might 
 be the esteem in which they were held 
 by the world, they gave no offence. 
 The first is, " by honour." They were 
 not everywhere, honoured, or treated 
 with respect. Yet they were some- 
 times honoured by men. The churches 
 which they founded would honour them, 
 and as the ministers of religion they 
 would be by them treated with respect. 
 Perhaps occasionally also they might 
 be treated with great attention and re- 
 gard by the men of the world on 
 account of their miraculous powers. 
 Comp. Acts xxviii. 7. So now, minis- 
 ters of the gospel are often treated with 
 great respect and honour. They are 
 beloved and venerated ; caressed and 
 flattered, by the people of their charge. 
 As ministers of God, as exercising a 
 holy function, their office is often treated 
 with great respect by the world. If 
 they are eloquent or learned, or if they 
 are eminently successful, they are often 
 highly esteemed and loved. It is diffi- 
 cult in such circumstances to "commend 
 
 port : as deceivers," and yet true 
 
 a Jno. 7. 12, 17. 
 
 themselves as the ministers of God." 
 Few are the men who are not injured 
 by honour ; few who are not corrupted 
 bv flattery. Few are the ministers who 
 are proof against this influence, and 
 who in such circumstances can honour 
 the ministry. If done, it is by show- 
 ing that they regard such things as of 
 little moment ; by showing that they are 
 influenced by higher considerations than 
 the love of praise ; by not allowing this 
 to interfere with their duties, or to make 
 them less faithful and laborious; but 
 rather by making this the occasion of 
 increased fidelity and increased zeal in 
 their master's cause. Most ministers do 
 more to " give offence" in times when 
 they are greatly honoured by the world 
 than when they are despised. Yet it is 
 possible for a minister who is greatly 
 honoured to make it the occasion of 
 commeriding himself more and more as 
 a minister of God. And he should do 
 it; as Paul said he did. — The other 
 situation was "in dishonour." It is 
 needless to say, that the apostles were 
 often in situations where they had op- 
 portunity thus to commend themselves 
 as the ministers of God. If sometimes 
 honoured, they were often dishonoured. 
 If the world sometimes flattered and 
 caressed them, it often despised them, 
 and cast out their names as evil. See 
 Note, 1 Cor. iv. 13. And perhaps it is 
 so substantially now with those who are 
 faithful. In such circumstances, also, 
 Paul sought to commend himself as a 
 minister of God. It was by receiving 
 all expressions of contempt with meek- 
 ness ; by not suffering them to inter- 
 fere with the faithful discharge of his 
 duties ; by rising above them, and show- 
 ing the power of religion to sustain him ; 
 and by returning good for evil, prayers 
 for maledictions, blessings for curses, 
 and by seeking to save, not injure and 
 destroy those who thus sought to over- 
 whelm him with disgrace. It may be 
 difficult to do this, but it can be done ; 
 and when done, a man always does good. 
 I ^ By evil report. The word here used 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 147 
 
 (JuTtM/Ai*.), means, properly, ill-omened 
 language, malediction, reproach, con- 
 tumely. It refers to the fact that they 
 were often slandered and calumniated. 
 Their motives were called in question, 
 and their names aspersed. They were 
 represented as deceivers and impostors, 
 &c. The statement here is, that in such 
 circumstances, and when thus assailed 
 and reproached, they endeavoured to 
 commend themselves as the ministers 
 of God. Evidently they endeavoured to 
 do this by not slandering or reviling in 
 return ; by manifesting a Christian spirit ; 
 by living down the slanderous accusa- 
 tion, and by doing good if possible even 
 to their calumniators. It is more diffi- 
 cult, says Chrysostom, to bear such re- 
 ports than it is pain of body ; and it is 
 consequently more difficult to evince a 
 Christian spirit then. To human nature 
 it is trying to have the name slandered 
 and cast out as evil when we are con- 
 scious only of a desire to do good. But 
 it is sufficient for the disciple that he 
 be as his master, and if they called the 
 master of the house Beelzebub, we must 
 expect they will also those of his house- 
 hold. It is a fine field for a Christian 
 minister, or any other Christian, to do 
 good when his name is unjustly slander- 
 ed. It gives him an opportunity of 
 showing the true excellency of the 
 Christian spirit ; and it gives him the 
 inexpressible privilege of being like 
 Christ — like him in his suffering and 
 in the moral excellence of character. 
 A man should be willing to be any 
 thing if it will make him like the Re- 
 deemer — whether it be in suffering or 
 in glory. See Phil. hi. 10. 1 Pet. iv. 
 13. ^f And good report. When men 
 speak well of us; when we are com- 
 mended, praised, or honoured. To ho- 
 nour the gospel then, and to commend 
 the ministry, is, (1.) To show that the 
 heart is not set on this, and does not 
 seek it ; (2.) To keep the heart from 
 being puffed up with pride and self- 
 estimation ; (3.) Not to suffer it to in- 
 terfere with our fidelity to others, and 
 with our faithfully presenting to them 
 the truth. Satan often attempts to 
 bribe men by praise, and to neutralize 
 
 the influence of ministers by flattery. 
 It seems ha:d to go and proclaim to 
 men painful truths who are causing the 
 incense of praise to ascend around us. 
 And it is commonly much easier for a 
 minister of the gospel to commend him- 
 self as a minister of God when he is 
 slandered than when he is praised, when 
 his name is cast out as evil than when 
 the breezes of popular favour are wafted 
 upon him. Few men can withstand 
 the influence of flattery, but many men 
 can meet persecution with a proper 
 spirit ; few men comparatively can al- 
 ways evince Christian fidelity to others 
 when they live always amidst the in- 
 fluence of " good report," but there are 
 many who can be faithful when they 
 are poor, and despised, and reviled. 
 Hence it has happened, that God has 
 so ordered it that his faithful servants 
 have had but little of the "good report" 
 which this world can furnish, but that 
 they have been generally subjected to 
 persecution and slander. If As deceivers. 
 That is, we are regarded and treated as 
 if we were deceivers, and as if we were 
 practising an imposition on mankind, 
 and as if we would advance our cause 
 by any trick or fraud that would be 
 possible. We are regarded and treated 
 as deceivers. Perhaps this refers to 
 some charges which had been brought 
 against them by the opposing faction at 
 Corinth (Locke), or perhaps to the 
 opinion which the Jewish priests and 
 heathen philosophers entertained of 
 them. The idea is, that though they 
 were extensively regarded and treated 
 as impostors, yet they endeavoured to 
 live as became the ministers of God. 
 They bore the imputation with patience, 
 and they applied themselves diligently 
 to the work of saving souls. Paul sel- 
 dom turned aside to vindicate himself 
 from such charges, but pursued his mas- 
 ter's wi rk, and evidently felt that if he 
 had a reputation that was worth any 
 thing, or deserved any reputation, God 
 would take care of it. Comp. Ps. 
 xxxvii. 1 — 4. A man, especially a 
 minister, who is constantly endeavour- 
 ing to vindicate his own reputation, 
 usually has a reputation which is not 
 
148 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 9 As ° unknown, and yet 
 well known ; as dying, and, be- 
 
 a 1 Co. 4. 9. 
 
 worth vindicating. A man who deserves 
 a reputation will ultimately obtain just 
 as much as is good for him, and as will 
 advance the cause in which he is em- 
 barked. Tf And yet true. We are not 
 deceivers and impostors. Though we 
 are regarded as such, yet we show our- 
 selves to be true and faithful ministers of 
 Christ. 
 
 9. As unknown. As those who are 
 deemed to be of an obscure and igno- 
 ble rank in life, unknown to the great, 
 unknown to fame. The idea, I think, 
 is, that they went as strangers, as per- 
 sons unknown, in preaching the gos- 
 pel. Yet, though thus unknown, they 
 endeavoured to commend themselves 
 as the ministers of God. Though among 
 strangers ; though having no introduc- 
 tion from the great and the noble, yet 
 they endeavoured so to act as to con- 
 vince the world that they were the mi- 
 nisters of God. This could be done only 
 by a holy life, and by the evidence of 
 the divine approbation which would 
 attend them in their work. And by 
 this, the ministers of religion, if they 
 are faithful, may make themselves known 
 even among those who were strangers, 
 and may live so as to " give no offence." 
 Every minister and every Christian, 
 even when they are " unknown" and 
 when among strangers, should remem- 
 ber their high character as the servants 
 of God, and should so live as to com- 
 mend the religion which they profess 
 to love or which they are called on to 
 preach. And yet how often is it that 
 ministers when among strangers seem 
 to feel themselves at liberty to lay aside 
 their ministerial character, and to engage 
 in conversation, and even partake of 
 amusements which they themselves 
 would regard as wholly improper if it 
 were known that they were the am- 
 bassadors of God ! And how often is 
 it the case that professing Christians 
 when travelling, when among strangers, 
 When in foreign lands, forget their high 
 
 hold, we live 
 not killed ; 
 
 b Ps. 118. 18 
 
 {A. D. 60. 
 fi as chastened, and 
 
 calling, and conduct in a manner wholly 
 different from what they did when sur- 
 rounded by Christians ; and when re- 
 strained by the sentiments and by the 
 eyes of a Christian community ! t And 
 yet well known. Our sentiments and 
 our principles are well known. We 
 have no concealments to make. We 
 practise no disguise. We attempt to 
 impose on no one. Though obscure 
 in our origin ; though without rank, or 
 wealth, or power, or patronage, to com 
 mend ourselves to favour, yet we have 
 succeeded in making ourselves known 
 to the world. Though obscure in our 
 origin, we are not obscure now. Though 
 suspected of dark designs, yet our prin- 
 ciples are all well known to the world. 
 No men of the same obscurity of birth 
 ever succeeded in making themselves 
 more extensively known than did the 
 apostles. The world at large became 
 acquainted with them ; and by their 
 self-denial, zeal, and success, they extend- 
 ed their reputation around the globe. 
 •f As dying. That is, regarded by others 
 as dying. As condemned often to death ; 
 exposed to death ; in the midst of trials 
 that expose us to death, and that are 
 ordinarily followed by death. See Note 
 on 1 Cor. xv. 31, on the phrase, " I die 
 daily." They passed through so many 
 trials that it might be said that they 
 were constantly dying. ^ And behold, 
 we live. Strange as it may seem, we 
 still survive. Through all our trial* 
 we are preserved, and though often 
 exposed to death, yet we still live. 
 The idea here is, that in all these trials, 
 and in these exposures to death, they 
 endeavoured to commend themselves as 
 the ministers of God. They bore their 
 trials with patience ; submitted to these 
 exposures without a murmur ; and 
 ascribed their preservation to the inter- 
 position of God. f As chastened. The 
 word chastened (jnuitu-jfAtvct) means 
 corrected, chastised. It is applied to the 
 chastening which God causes by afflic- 
 
A. D. 60.] CHAPTER VI. 149 
 
 10 As sorrowful, yet alway rejoicing ; as poor, yet mak- 
 
 tions and calamities. 1 Cor. xi. 32. 
 Rev. iii. 19. Heb. xii. 6. It refers here, 
 not to the scourgings to which they 
 were subjected in the synagogues and 
 elsewhere, but to the chastisements 
 which God inflicted ; the trials to which 
 he subjected them. And the idea is, 
 ttat in the midst of these trials, then 
 endeavoured to act as became the mi- 
 nisters of God. They bore them with 
 patience. They submitted to them as 
 coming from his hand. They felt that 
 they were right; and they submitted 
 without a murmur. <\ And not killed. 
 Though severely chastened, yet we are 
 not put to death. We survive them — 
 preserved by the interposition of God. 
 10. As sorrowful (xurouy.mi). Griev- 
 ing, afflicted, troubled, sad. Under 
 these sufferings we seem always to be 
 cast down and sad. We endure afflic- 
 tions that usually lead to the deepest 
 expressions of grief. If the world looks 
 only upon our trials, we must be regard- 
 ed as always suffering, and always sad. 
 The world will suppose that we have 
 cause for continued lamentation (Dod- 
 dridge), and they will regard us as 
 among the most unhappy of mortals. 
 Such, perhaps, is the estimate which the 
 world usually affixes to the Christian 
 life. They regard it as a life of sadness 
 and of gloom ; of trial and of melan- 
 choly. They see little in it that is 
 cheerful, and they suppose that a heavy 
 burden presses constantly on the heart 
 of the Christian. Joy they think per- 
 tains to the gayeties and pleasures of 
 this life ; sadness to religion. And per- 
 haps a more comprehensive statement 
 of the feelings with which the gay peo- 
 ple of the world regard Christians can- 
 not be found than in this expression, 
 "as sorrowful." True, they are not 
 free from sorrow. They are tried like 
 others. They have peculiar trials arising 
 from persecution, opposition, contempt, 
 and from the conscious and deep-felt 
 depravity of their hearts. They atir 
 serious ; and their seriousness is often 
 interpreted as gloom. But there is 
 another side to this picture, and there 
 13* 
 
 is much in the Christian character and 
 feelings unseen or unappreciated by the 
 world. For they are ^ Alway re- 
 joicing. So Paul was, notwithstanding 
 the fact that he always appeared to have 
 occasion for grief. Religion had a power 
 not only to sustain the soul in trial, but 
 to fill it with positive joy. The sources 
 of his joy were doubtless the assurances 
 of the divine favour and the hopes of 
 eternal glory. And the same is true 
 of religion always. There is an internal 
 peace and joy which the world may 
 not see or appreciate, but which is far 
 more than a compensation for all the 
 trials which the Christian endures. 
 f As poor. The idea is, we are poor, 
 yet in our poverty we endeavour 'to 
 give no offence, and to commend our- 
 selves as the ministers of God.' This 
 would be done by their patience and 
 resignation ; by their entire freedom 
 from every thing dishonest and dis- 
 honourable, and by their readiness, when 
 necessary, to labour for their own sup- 
 port. There is no doubt that the 
 apostles were poor. Comp. Acts iii. 6. 
 The little property which some of them 
 had, had all been forsaken in order that 
 they might follow the Saviour, and go 
 and preach his gospel. And there is as 
 little doubt that the mass of ministers 
 are still poor, and that God designs and 
 desires that they should be. It is in 
 such circumstances that he designs they 
 should illustrate the beauty and the sus- 
 taining power of religion, and be exam- 
 ples to the world. \ Yet making many 
 rich. On the meaning of the word rich 
 see Note, Rom. ii. 4. Here the apostle 
 means that he and his fellow-labourers, 
 though poor themselves, were the in- 
 struments of conferring durable and 
 most valuable possessions on many per- 
 sons. They had bestowed on them the 
 true riches. They had been the means 
 of investing them with treasures in- 
 finitely more valuable than any which 
 kings and princes could bestow. They 
 to whom they ministered were mado 
 partakers of the treasure where the moth 
 doth not corrupt, and where thieves do 
 
150 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 ing many rich ; as having no- 
 thing, and yet possessing all a 
 things. 
 
 oPs. 84. 11. 
 
 not break through nor steal. ^ As 
 having nothing. Being utterly desti- 
 tute. Having no property. This was 
 true, doubtless, in a literal sense, of most 
 of the apostles. If And yet possessing 
 all things. That is, (1.) Possessing a 
 portion of all things that may be neces- 
 sary for our welfare, as far as our heaven- 
 ly Father shall-deem to be necessary for 
 us. (2.) Possessing an interest in all 
 things, so that we can enjoy them. 
 We can derive pleasure from the works 
 of God — the heavens, the earth, the 
 hills, the streams, the cattle on the 
 mountains or in the vales, as the works 
 of God. We have a possession in them 
 so that, we can enjoy them as his works, 
 and can say, " Our Father made them 
 all." They are given to man to enjoy. 
 They are a part of the inheritance of 
 man. And though we cannot call them 
 our own in the legal sense, yet we can 
 call them ours in the sense that we can 
 derive pleasure from their contemplation, 
 and see in them the proofs of the wis- 
 dom and the goodness of God. The 
 child of God that looks upon the hills 
 and vales ; upon an extensive and 
 beautiful farm or landscape, may derive 
 more pleasure from the contemplation 
 of them as the work of God and his 
 gift to men, than the real owner does, 
 if irreligious, from contemplating all 
 this as his own. And so far as mere 
 happiness is concerned, the friend of 
 God who sees in all this the proofs of 
 God's beneficence and wisdom, may have 
 a more valuable possession in those 
 things than he who holds the title-deeds. 
 (3.) Heirs of all things. We have 
 a title to immortal life — a promised part 
 in all that the universe can furnish that 
 can make us happy. (4.) In the pos- 
 session of pardon and peace ; of the 
 friendship of God and the knowledge 
 of the Redeemer, we have the posses- 
 sion of all things. This comprises all. 
 
 11 O ye Corinthians, our 
 mouth is open unto you, our * 
 heart is enlarged. 
 
 b Ep. 6. 8. Re. 22. 12. 
 
 He that has this, what need has he of 
 more 1 This meets all the desires ; 
 satisfies the soul ; makes the man happy 
 and blessed. He that has God for his 
 portion, may be said to have all things, 
 for he is " all in all." He that has the 
 Redeemer for his friend has all things 
 that he needs, for " he that spared not 
 his own Son, but gave him up for us 
 all, how shall he not with him also 
 freely give us all things]" Rom 
 viii. 32. 
 
 11. O ye Corinthians, our mouth is 
 open unto you. We speak freely, and 
 fully. This is an affectionate address 
 to them, and has reference to what he 
 had just said. It means that, when the 
 heart was full on the subject, words 
 would flow freely, and that he had given 
 vent to the fervid language which he 
 had just used because his heart was full. 
 He loved them ; he felt deeply ; and he 
 spoke to them with the utmost freedom 
 of what he had thought, and purposed, 
 and done. ^ Our heart is enlarged. 
 We have deep feelings, which naturally 
 vent themselves in fervent and glowing 
 language. The main idea here is, that 
 he had a strong affection for them ; 
 a heart which embraced and loved them 
 all, and which expressed itself in the 
 language of deep emotion. He had 
 loved them so that he was willing to 
 be reproached, and to be persecuted, and 
 to be poor, and to have his name cast 
 out as evil. « I cannot be silent. I con- 
 ceal or dissemble nothing. I am full 
 of ardent attachment, and that naturally 
 vents itself in the strong language which 
 I have used.' True attachment will find 
 means of expressing itself. A heart 
 full of love will give vent to its feelings. 
 There will be no dissembling and hy- 
 pocrisy there. And if a minister loves 
 the souls of his people he will pour out 
 the affections of his heart in strong and 
 glowing language. 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 151 
 
 12 Ye are not straitened in us, 
 but ye are straitened in your 
 own bowels. 
 
 13 Now for a recompence in 
 
 12. Ye are not straitened in us. 
 That is, you do not possess a narrow 
 or contracted place in our affections. 
 We love you fully, ardently, and are 
 ready to do all that can be done for 
 your welfare. There is no want of room 
 in our affections towards you. It is not 
 narrow, confined, pent up. It is ample 
 and free. ^ But ye are straitened in 
 your own bowels. That is, in the affec- 
 tions of your hearts. The word here used 
 (ovrhayxy*) commonly means in the 
 Bible the tender affections. The Greek 
 word properly denotes the upper viscera ; 
 the heart, the lungs, the liver. It is 
 applied by Greek writers to denote those 
 parts of victims which were eaten during 
 or after the sacrifice. — Robinson (Lex.). 
 Hence it is applied to the heart, as the 
 seat of the emotions and passions; and 
 especially the gentler emotions, the ten- 
 der affections, compassion, pity, love, &c. 
 Our word " bowels" is applied usually 
 to the lower viscera, and by no means 
 expresses the idea of the word which is 
 used in Greek. The idea here is, that 
 they were straitened, or were confined 
 in their affections for him. It is the 
 language of reproof, meaning that he 
 had not received from them the demon- 
 strations of attachment which he had a 
 right to expect, and which was a fair 
 and proportionate return for the love 
 bestowed on them. Probably he refers 
 to the fact that they had formed parties ; 
 had admitted false teachers ; and had 
 oot received his instructions as impli- 
 citly and as kindly as they ought to 
 lave done. 
 
 13. Now for a recompense in the 
 \ame. ' By way of recompense, open 
 four hearts in the same manner towards 
 ane as I have done toward you. It is 
 all the reward or compensation which I 
 ask of you ; all the return which I de- 
 sire. I do not ask snver or gold, or any 
 earthly poMftndcsf. I ask only a return 
 
 the same, (I speak as unto my 
 children,) be ye also enlarged. 
 
 14 Be a ye not unequally yoked 
 together with unbelievers ; for 
 
 a De. 7. 2, 3. 1 Co. 7. 39. 
 
 of love, and a devotedness to the cause 
 which I love, and which I endeavour to 
 promote.' t I speak as unto my child 
 ren. I speak as a parent addressing 
 his children. I sustain toward you the 
 relation of a spiritual father, and I have 
 a right to require and expect a return 
 of affection. 1 Be ye also enlarged 
 Be not straitened in your affections 
 Love me as I love you. Give to me 
 the same proofs of attachment which I 
 have given you. The idea in this verse 
 is, that the only compensation or remu 
 neration which he expected for all the 
 love which he had shown them, and 
 for all his toils and self-denials in their 
 behalf (ver. 4, 5), was, that they would 
 love him, and yield obedience to the 
 laws of the gospel requiring them to be 
 separate from the world, ver. 14 — 18 
 One ground of the claim which he had 
 to their affection was, that he sustained 
 toward them the relation of a father, and 
 that he had a right to require and to ex- 
 pect such a return of love. The Syriac 
 renders it well, "Enlarge your love 
 towards me." Tindal renders it, "I 
 speak unto you as unto children, which 
 have like reward with us ; stretch your- 
 selves therefore out ; bear not the yoke 
 with unbelievers." 
 
 14. Be ye not unequally yoked to- 
 gether with unbelievers. This is closely 
 connected in sense with the previous 
 verse. The apostle is there stating the 
 nature of the remuneration or recom- 
 pense which he asks for all the love 
 which he had shown to them. He here 
 says, that one mode of remuneration 
 would be to yield obedience to his com- 
 mands, and to separate themselves from 
 all improper alliance with unbelievers. 
 • Make me this return for my love. Love 
 me also, and as a proof of your affec- 
 tion, be not improperly united with 
 unbelievers. Listen to me as a father 
 addressing his children, and secure your 
 
153 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 what fellowship hath righteous- 
 ness with unrighteousness ? and 
 
 own happiness and piety by not being 
 unequally yoked with those who are 
 not Christians.' The word which is 
 here used Qr^uyiut) means properly, 
 to bear a different yoke, to be yoked 
 heterogeneously. — Robinson (Lex.). It 
 is applied to the custom of yoking 
 animals of different kinds together (Pas- 
 sow) ; and as used here means not to 
 mingle together, or be united with un- 
 believers. It is implied in the use of the 
 word that there is a dissimilarity between 
 believers and unbelievers so great that 
 it is as improper for them to mingle 
 together as it is to yoke animals of dif- 
 ferent kinds and species. The ground 
 of the injunction is, that there is a dif- 
 ference between Christians and those 
 who are not, so great as to render such 
 unions improper and injurious. The 
 direction here refers doubtless to all 
 kinds of improper connexions with 
 those who were unbelievers. It has been 
 usually supposed by commentators to 
 refer particularly to marriage. But 
 there is no reason for confining it to 
 marriage. It doubtless includes that, 
 but it may as well refer to any other 
 intimate connexion, or to intimate 
 friendships, or to participation in their 
 amusements and employments, as to 
 marriage. The radical idea is, that 
 they were to abstain from all con- 
 nexions with unbelievers — with infidels, 
 and heathens, and those who were not 
 Christians, which would identify them 
 with them ; or they were to have no 
 connexion with them in any thing as 
 unbelievers, heathens, or infidels ; they 
 were to partake with them in nothing 
 that was peculiar to them as such. 
 They were to have no part with them in 
 their heathenism, unbelief, and idolatry, 
 and infidelity ; they were not to be 
 united with them in any way or sense 
 where it would necessarily be under- 
 stood that they were partakers with 
 them in those things. This is evidently 
 the principle here laid down, and this 
 principle is as applicable now as it 
 was then. In the remainder of this 
 
 what communion hath light with 
 darkness ? 
 
 verse and the following verses (15, 16), 
 he states reasons why they should have 
 no such intercourse. There is no princi- 
 ple of Christianity that is more impor- 
 tant than that which is here stated by 
 the apostle ; and none in which Chris- 
 tians are more in danger of erring, or 
 in which they have more difficulty in 
 determining the exact rule which they 
 are to follow. The questions which 
 arise are very important. Are we to 
 have no intercourse with the people 
 of the world 1 Are we cut loose from 
 all our friends who are not Christians ? 
 Are we to become monks, and live a 
 recluse and unsocial life 1 Are we 
 never to mingle with the people of the 
 world in business, in innocent recrea- 
 tion, or in the duties of citizens, and as 
 neighbours and friends 1 It is important, 
 therefore, in the highest degree, to en- 
 deavour to ascertain what are the prin- 
 ciples on which the New Testament 
 requires us to act in this matter. And 
 in order to a correct understanding of 
 this, the following principles may be 
 suggested. I. There is a large field 
 of action, pursuit, principle, and thought, 
 over which infidelity, sin, heathenism, 
 and the world as such, have the entire 
 control. It is wholly without the range 
 of Christian law, and stands opposed to 
 Christian law. It pertains to a different 
 kingdom ; is conducted by different 
 principles, and tends to destroy and 
 annihilate the kingdom of Christ. It 
 cannot be reconciled with Christian 
 principle, and cannot be conformed to 
 but in entire violation of the influence 
 of religion. Here the prohibition of the 
 New Testament is absolute and entire. 
 Christians are not to mingle with the 
 people of the world in these things ; and 
 are not to partake of them. This pro- 
 hibition, it is supposed, extends to the 
 following, among other things. ( 1 .) To 
 idolatry. This was plain. On no ac- 
 count or pretence were the early Chris- 
 tians to partake of that, or to counte- 
 nance it. In primitive times, during 
 the Roman persecutions, all that wa» 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 153 
 
 asked was that they should cast a little 
 incense on the altar of a heathen god. 
 They refused to do it, and because they 
 refused to do it, thousands perished as 
 martyrs. They judged rightly; and 
 the world has approved their cause. 
 (2.) Sin, vice, licentiousness. This is 
 also plain. Christians are in no way 
 to patronise them, or to lend their influ- 
 ence to them, or to promote them by their 
 name, their presence, or their property. 
 " Neither be partakers of other men's 
 sins." 1 Tim. v. 22. 2 John 11. 
 (3.) Arts and acts of dishonesty, de- 
 ception, and fraud in traffic and trade. 
 Here the prohibition also must be 
 absolute. No Christian can have a 
 right to enter into partnership with 
 another where the business is to be con- 
 ducted on dishonest and unchristian 
 principles, or where it shall lead to the 
 violation of any of the laws of God. 
 If it involves deception and fraud in 
 the principles on which it is conducted ; 
 if it spreads ruin and poverty — as the 
 distilling and vending of ardent spirits 
 does ; if it leads to the necessary viola- 
 tion of the Christian Sabbath, then the 
 case is plain. A Christian is to have 
 no "fellowship with such unfruitful 
 works of darkness, but is rather to re- 
 prove them." Eph. v. 11. (4.) The 
 amusements and pleasures that are en- 
 tirely worldly, and sinful in their nature ; 
 that are wholly under worldly influence, 
 and which cannot be brought under 
 Christian principles. Nearly all amuse- 
 ments are of this description. The true 
 principle here seems to be, that if a 
 Christian in such a place is expected to 
 lay aside his Christian principles, and 
 if it would be deemed indecorous and 
 improper for him to introduce the sub- 
 ject of religion, or if religion would be 
 regarded as entirely inconsistent with 
 the nature of the amusement, then he 
 is not to be found there. The world 
 reigns there, and if the principles of his 
 Lord and Master would be excluded, 
 he should not be there. This applies 
 of course to the theatre, the circus, the 
 ball-room, and to large and splendid 
 parties of pleasure. We are not to 
 associate with idolaters in their idolatrv ; 
 
 nor with the licentious in their licen- 
 tiousness ; nor with the infidel in 
 his infidelity ; nor with the proud in 
 their pride ; nor with the gay in their 
 gayety; nor with the friends of the 
 theatre, or the ball-room, or the circus 
 in their attachment to these places and 
 pursuits. And whatever other con- 
 nexion we are to have with them as 
 neighbours, citizens, or members of our 
 families, we are not to participate with 
 them i?f these things. Thus far all 
 seems to be clear; and the rule is a 
 plain one, whether it applies to mar- 
 riage, or to business, or to religion, or to 
 pleasure. Comp. Note, 1 Cor. v. 10. 
 II. There is a large field of action, 
 thought, and plan which may be said 
 to be common with the Christian and 
 the world ; that is, where the Chris- 
 tian is not expected to abandon his 
 own principles, and where there will be, 
 or need be, no compromise of the stern- 
 est views of truth, or the most upright, 
 serious, and holy conduct. He may 
 carry his principles with him ; may 
 always manifest them if necessary ; and 
 may even commend them to others. 
 A few of these may be referred to. 
 (1.) Commercial transactions and pro- 
 fessional engagements that are con- 
 ducted on honest and upright principles, 
 even when those with whom we act 
 are not Christians. (2.) Literary and 
 scientific pursuits, which never, when 
 pursued with a right spirit, interfere 
 with the principles of Christianity, and 
 never are contrary to it. (3.) The love 
 and affection which are due to relatives 
 and friends. Nothing in the Bible 
 assuredly will prohibit a pious son from 
 uniting with one who is not pious in 
 supporting an aged and infirm parent, 
 or a much loved and affectionate sister. 
 The same remark is true also respecting 
 the duty which a wife owes to a hus- 
 band, a husband to a wife, or a parent 
 to a child, though one of them should 
 not be a Christian. And the same ob- 
 servation is true also of neighbours, who 
 are not to be prohibited from uniting as 
 neighbours in social intercourse, and in 
 acts of common kindness and charity 
 though all not Christians. (4.) As 
 
154 II. CORINTHIANS. [A. D. 60. 
 
 15 And what concord hath Christ with Belial ? or what 
 
 citizens. We owe duties to our country, 
 and a Christian need not refuse to act 
 with others in the elective franchise, or 
 in making or administering the laws. 
 Here, however, it is clear that he is not 
 at liberty to violate the laws and the 
 principles of the Bible. He cannot be 
 at liberty to unite with them in political 
 schemes that are contrary to the law 
 of God, or in elevating to office men 
 whom he cannot vote for with a good 
 conscience as qualified for the station. 
 (5.) In plans of public improvement, 
 in schemes that go to the advancement 
 of the public welfare, when the schemes 
 do not violate the laws of God. But 
 if they involve the necessity of violating 
 the Sabbath, or any of the laws of God, 
 assuredly he cannot consistently par- 
 ticipate in them. (6.) In doing good 
 to others. So the Saviour was with sin- 
 ners ; so he ate, and drank, and conversed 
 with them. So we may mingle with 
 them, without partaking of their wicked 
 feelings and plans, so far as we can do 
 them good, and exert over them a holy 
 and saving influence. In all the situa- 
 tions here referred to, and in all the 
 duties growing out of them, the Chris- 
 tian may maintain his principles, and 
 may preserve a good conscience. In- 
 deed the Saviour evidently contemplated 
 that his people would have such inter- 
 course with the world, and that in it 
 they would do good. But in none of 
 these is there to be any compromise 
 of principle ; in none to be any yielding 
 to the opinions and practices that are 
 contrary to the laws of God. III. There 
 is a large field of action, conduct, and 
 plan, where Christians only will act 
 together. These relate to the peculiar 
 duties of religion — to prayer, Christian 
 fellowship, the ordinances of the gospel, 
 and most of the plans of Christian be- 
 neficence. Here the world will not in- 
 trude ; and here assuredly there will be 
 no necessity of any compromise of 
 Christian principle. 1 For what fel- 
 lowship. Paul proceeds here to state 
 reasons why there should be no such 
 
 improper connexion with the world. 
 The main reason, though under various 
 forms, is, that there can be no fellow- 
 ship, no communion, nothing in com- 
 mon between them ; and that therefore 
 they should be separate. The word 
 fellowship (//£to^») means partnership, 
 participation. What is there in com- 
 mon ; or how can the one partake with 
 the other 1 The interrogative form here 
 is designed to be emphatic, and to de- 
 clare in the strongest terms that there 
 can be no such partnership. ^ Right- 
 eousness. Such as you Christians are 
 required to practise ; implying that all 
 were to be governed by the stern and 
 uncompromising principles of honesty 
 and justice. Tf With unrighteousness. 
 Dishonesty, injustice, sin ; implying that 
 the world is governed by such principles. 
 5 And what communion (kvvmU). 
 Participation ; communion ; that which 
 is in common. What is there in com- 
 mon between light and darkness 1 What 
 common principle is there of which they 
 both partake ] There is none. There is 
 a total and eternal separation. % Light. 
 The emblem of truth, virtue, holiness. 
 See Note, Matt, iv. 16 ; v. 16. John i. 4. 
 Rom. ii. 19. 2 Cor. iv. 4. 6. It is 
 implied here that Christians are en- 
 ligbtened, and walk in the light. Their 
 principles are pure and holy — principles 
 of which light is the proper emblem. 
 Tf Darkness. The emblem of sin, cor- 
 ruption, ignorance ; implying that the 
 world to which Paul refers was go- 
 verned and influenced by these. The 
 idea is, that as there is an entire sepa- 
 ration between light and darkness in 
 their nature ; as they have nothing in 
 common, so it is and should be, between 
 Christians and sinners. There should 
 be a separation. There can be nothing 
 in common between holiness and sin ; 
 and Christians should have nothing to 
 do " with the unfruitful works of dark 
 ness." Eph. v. 11. 
 
 15. And what concord (ov/uplvtitrtc) 
 Sympathy, unison. This word refers 
 properly to the unison or harmony pro- 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 155 
 
 part hath he that believeth with 
 an infidel ? 
 
 16 And what agreement hath 
 
 duced by musical instruments, where 
 there is a chord. What accordance, 
 what unison is there ; what strings are 
 there which being struck will produce 
 a chord or harmony ] The idea is, then, 
 there is as much that is discordant be- 
 tween Christ and Belial as there is be- 
 tween instruments of music that produce 
 only discordant and jarring sounds. 
 U Hath Christ. What is there in com- 
 mon between Christ and Belial, imply- 
 ing that Christians are governed by the 
 principles, and that they follow the 
 example of Christ. 1 Belial. Bthiak 
 or Bsa/s^, as it is found in some of the 
 late editions. The form Beliar is Syriac. 
 The Hebrew word (*?p^2) means literally 
 without profit ,- worthlessness ; wicked- 
 ness. It is here evidently applied to 
 Satan. The Syriac translates it " Satan." 
 The idea is, that the persons to whom 
 Paul referred, the heathen, wicked, un- 
 believing world, were governed by the 
 principles of Satan, and were "taken 
 captive by him at his will" (2 Tim. ii. 
 26. Com p. John viii. 44), and that 
 Christians should be separate from the 
 wicked world, as Christ was separate 
 from all the feelings, purposes, and plans 
 of Satan. He had no participation in 
 them ; he formed no union with them ; 
 and so it should be with the followers 
 of the one in relation to the followers 
 of the other. f Or what part (/ui^ic). 
 Portion, share, participation, fellowship. 
 This word refers usually to a division 
 of an estate. Luke x. 42. Note, Acts 
 viii. 21. Col. i. 12. There is no par- 
 ticipation ; nothing in common, f He 
 that believeth. A Christian ; a man 
 the characteristic of whom it is that he 
 believes on the Lord Jesus. | With 
 an infidel. A man who does not be- 
 lieve — whether a heathen idolater, a 
 profane man, a scoffer, a philosopher, 
 a man of science, a moral man, or a 
 son or daughter of gayety. The idea 
 is, that on the subject of religion there 
 
 the temple of God with idols ? 
 for ye a are the temple of the 
 living God ; as God hath said, 
 
 a 1 Co. 3. 16, 17 ; 6. 19. Ep. 2. 21, 22. 
 
 is no union ; nothing in common ; no 
 participation. They are governed by 
 different principles ; have different feel- 
 ings ; are looking to different rewards ; 
 and are tending to a different destiny. 
 The believer, therefore, should not select 
 his partner in life and his chosen com- 
 panions and friends from this class, but 
 from those with whom he has sympathy, 
 and with whom he has common feelings 
 and hopes. 
 
 16. And what agreement (wyx.*- 
 rd&etrt;). Assent, accord, agreement; 
 what putting or laying down together 
 is there 1 What is there in one that re- 
 sembles the other. J The temple of 
 God. What has a temple of God to 
 do with idol worship ] It is erected for 
 a different purpose, and the worship of 
 idols in it would not be tolerated. It is 
 implied here that Christians are them- 
 selves the temple of God, a fact which 
 Paul proceeds immediately to illustrate, 
 and that it is as absurd for them to min- 
 gle with the infidel world as it would 
 be to erect the image of a heathen god 
 in the temple of Jehovah. This is 
 strong language, and we cannot but 
 admire the energy and copiousness of 
 the expressions used by Paul, " which 
 cannot," says Bloomfield, "be easily 
 paralleled in the best classical writers." 
 % With idols. Those objects which 
 God hates, and on which he cannot 
 look but with abhorrence. The sense 
 is, that for Christians to mingle with the 
 sinful world ; to partake of their plea- 
 sures, pursuits, and follies, is as detesta- 
 ble and hateful in the sight of God as if 
 his temple were profaned by erecting a 
 deformed, and shapeless, and senseless 
 block in it as an object of worship. And, 
 assuredly, if Christians had such a sense 
 of the abomination of mingling with the 
 world, they would feel the obligation to 
 be separate and pure. % For ye are 
 the temple of the living God. See this 
 explained in the Notes on 1 Cor. iii. 16, 
 
156 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 • I will dwell in them, and walk 
 in them; and I will be their 
 God, and they shall be my peo- 
 ple. 
 
 o Ex.29. 45. Le. 26. 12. Je. 31. 1,33; 
 32, 35. Ez. 11. 20 ; 36. 28 ; 37. 26, 27. 
 
 17. The idea is, that as God dwells 
 with his people, they ought to be sepa- 
 rated from a sinful and polluted world. 
 1 As God hath said. The words here 
 quoted are taken substantially from 
 Ex. xxxix. 45. Lev. xxvi. 12. Ezek. 
 xxxvii. 27. They are not literally quoted, 
 but Paul has thrown together the sub- 
 stance of what occurs in several places. 
 The sense, however, is the same as 
 occurs in the places referred to. f / 
 will dwell in them (svowc»Va>). I 
 will take up my indwelling in them. 
 There is an allusion doubtless to the 
 fact that he would be present among his 
 people by the Shechinah, or the visi- 
 ble symbol of his presence. See Note 
 on 1 Cor. iii. 16, 17. Tt implies, when 
 used with reference to Christians, that 
 the Holy Spirit would abide with them, 
 and that the blessing of God would 
 attend them. See Rom. viii. Col. 
 iii. 16. 2 Tim. i. 14. f And walk in 
 them. That is, I will walk among them. 
 I will be one of their number. He was 
 present among the Jews by the public 
 manifestation of his presence by a sym- 
 bol ; he is present with Christians by 
 the presence and guidance of his Holy 
 Spirit. J And I will be their God. 
 Not only the God whom they worship, 
 but the God who will protect and bless 
 them. I will take them under my pecu- 
 liar protection, and they shall enjoy my 
 favour. This is certainly as true of 
 Christians as it was of the Jews, and 
 Paul has not departed from the spirit 
 of the promise in applying it to the 
 Christian character. His object in 
 quoting these passages is, to impress on 
 Christians the solemnity and importance 
 of the truth that God dwelt among them 
 and with them ; that they were under 
 his care and protection ; that they be- 
 longed to him, and that they therefore 
 should be separate from the world. 
 
 17 Wherefore * come out from 
 among them, and be ye separate, 
 saith the Lord, and touch not the 
 unclean thing; and I will re- 
 ceive you, 
 
 b Is. 52. 11. c. 7.1. Re. 18.4. 
 
 17. Wherefore. Since you are a pe- 
 culiar people. Since God, the holy and 
 blessed God, dwells with you and among 
 you. 1 Come out from among them. 
 That is, from among idolaters and un- 
 believers; from a gay and vicious world. 
 These words are taken, by a slight 
 change, from Isaiah Hi. 11. They are 
 there applied to the Jews in Babylon, 
 and are a solemn call which God makes 
 on them to leave the place of their exile, 
 to come out from among the idolaters 
 of that city and return to their own 
 land. See my Note on that place. 
 Babylon, in the Scriptures, is the em- 
 blem of whatever is proud, arrogant, 
 wicked, and opposed to God ; and Paul, 
 therefore, applies the words here with 
 great beauty and force to illustrate the 
 duty of Christians in separating them- 
 selves from a vain, idolatrous, and wick- 
 ed world. 1 And he ye separate. 
 Separate from the world, and all its cor- 
 rupting influences. 1 Saith the Lord. 
 See Isaiah Iii. 11. Paul does not use 
 this language as if it had original refer- 
 ence to Christians, but he applies it as 
 containing an important principle that 
 was applicable to the case which he was 
 considering, or as language that would 
 appropriately express the idea which he 
 wished to convey. The language of 
 the Old Testament is often used in this 
 manner by the writers of the New. 
 f And touch not the unclean thing. 
 In Isaiah, " touch no unclean thing ;" 
 that is, they were to be pure, and to 
 have no connexion with idolatry in any 
 of its forms. So Christians were to 
 avoid all unholy contact with a vain and 
 polluted world. The sense is, '. Have 
 no close connexion with an idolater, or 
 an unholy person. Be pure ; and feel 
 that you belong to a community that is 
 under its own laws, and that is to be 
 distinguished in moral purity from all 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 157 
 
 18 And ° will be a Father un- 
 to you, and ye shall be my sons 
 
 oJe. 31. 9. Re. 21.7. 
 
 and daughters, saith the Lord 
 Almighty. 
 
 the rest of the world.' t And I will 
 receive you. That is, I will receive and 
 recognise you as my friends and my 
 adopted children. This could not be 
 done until they were separated from an 
 idolatrous and wicked world. The fact 
 of their being received by God, and 
 recognised as his children, depended 
 on their coming out from the world. 
 These words with the verse following, 
 though used evidently somewhat in 
 the form of a quotation, yet are not 
 to be found in any single place in the 
 Old Testament. In 2 Sam. vii. 14. 
 God says of Solomon, "I will be his 
 Father, and he shall be my son." In 
 Jer. xxxi. 9, God says, " For I am a 
 Father to Israel, and Ephraim is my 
 first-born." It is probable that Paul had 
 such passages in his eye, yet he doubt- 
 less designed rather to express the gene- 
 ral sense of the promises of the Old 
 Testament than to quote any single 
 passage. Or why may it not be that 
 we should regard Paul here himself as 
 speaking as an inspired man directly, 
 and making a promise then first com- 
 municated immediately from the Lord ? 
 Paul was inspired as well as the 
 prophets ; and it may be that he meant 
 to communicate a promise directly from 
 God. Grotius supposes that it was not 
 taken from any particular place in the 
 Old Testament, but was a part of a 
 hymn that was in use among the He- 
 brews. 
 
 1 8. And I will be a Father unto you. 
 A father is the protector, counsellor, 
 and guide of his children. He in- 
 structs them, provides for them, and 
 counsels them in time of perplexity. 
 No relation is more tender than this. 
 In accordance with this, God says, that 
 he will be to his people their protector, 
 counsellor, guide, and friend. He will 
 cherish towards them the feelings of a 
 father ; he will provide for them, he will 
 acknowledge them as his children. No 
 higher honour can be conferred on mor- 
 tals than to be adopted into the family 
 14 
 
 of God, and to be permitted to call the 
 Most High our Father. No rank is so 
 elevated as that of being the sons and 
 the daughters of the Lord Almighty. 
 Yet this is the common appellation by 
 which God addresses his people; and 
 the most humble in rank, the most poor 
 and ignorant of his friends on earth, 
 the most despised among men, may re- 
 flect that they are the children of the 
 ever living God, and have the Maker of 
 the heavens and the earth as their Father 
 and their eternal Friend. How poor are 
 all the honours of the world compared 
 with this ! If The Lord Almighty. 
 The word here used (sravrcx^aT^) oc- 
 curs nowhere except in this place 
 and in the book of Revelation. Rev. 
 i. 8 ; iv. 8 ; xi. 17 ; xv. 3 ; xvi. 7. 14 ; 
 xix. 6. 16 ; xxi.22. It means one who 
 has all power ; and is applied to God 
 in contradistinction from idols that are 
 weak and powerless. God is able to 
 protect his people, and they who put 
 their trust in him shall never be con- 
 founded. What has he to fear who has 
 a friend of almighty power ] 
 
 REMARKS. 
 
 1. It is right and proper to exhort 
 Christians not to receive the grace of 
 God in vain. ver. I. Even they some- 
 times abuse their privileges ; become 
 neglectful of the mercy of God ; under- 
 value the truths of religion, and do not 
 make as much as they should do of the 
 glorious truths that are fitted to sanctify 
 and to save. Every Christian should 
 endeavour to make just as much as 
 possible of his privileges, and to become 
 just as eminent as he can possibly be 
 
 in his Christian profession. 
 
 2. The benefits of salvation to this 
 world come through the intercession 
 of Jesus Christ, ver. 2. It is because 
 God is pleased to hear him ; because he 
 calls on God in an accepted time that 
 we have any hope of pardon. The 
 sinner enjoys no offer of mercy, and no 
 possibility of pardon except what he 
 
158 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 LA. D. 60. 
 
 owes to Jesus Christ. Should he cease 
 to plead for men, the offers of salvation 
 would be withdrawn, and the race would 
 perish forever. 
 
 3. The world is under a dispensation 
 of mercy, ver. 2. Men may be saved. 
 God is willing to show compassion, and 
 to rescue them from ruin. 
 
 4. How important is the present mo- 
 ment ! ver. 2. How important is each 
 moment ! It may be the last period of 
 mercy. No sinner can calculate with 
 any certainty on another instant of time. 
 God holds his breath, and with infinite 
 ease he can remove him to eternity. 
 Eternal results hang on the present — 
 the fleeting moment, and yet how un- 
 concerned are the mass of men about 
 their present condition ; how unanxious 
 about what may possibly or probably 
 occur the next moment! Now, the 
 sinner may be pardoned. The next 
 moment he may be beyond the reach 
 of forgiveness. This instant, the bliss 
 of heaven is offered him; the next, he 
 may be solemnly excluded from hope 
 and heaven ! 
 
 5. The ministers of the gospel should 
 give no occasion of offence to any one. 
 ver. 3. On each one of them depends 
 a portion of the honour of the ministry 
 in this world, and of the honour of Jesus 
 Christ among men. How solemn is 
 this responsibility ! How pure, and 
 holy, and unblameable should they be ! 
 
 6. Ministers and all Christians should 
 be willing to suffer in the cause of the 
 Redeemer, ver. 4, 5. If the early minis- 
 ters and other Christians were called to 
 endure the pains of imprisonment and 
 persecution for the honour of the gos- 
 pel, assuredly we should be willing 
 also to suffer. Why should there be 
 any more reason for their suffering 
 than for ours 1 
 
 7. We see what our religion has cost. 
 ver. 4, 5. It has come down to us 
 through suffering. All the privileges 
 that we enjoy have been the fruit of toil, 
 and blood, and tears, and sighs. The 
 best blood in human veins has flowed to 
 procure these blessings ; the holiest men 
 on earth have wept, and been scourged, 
 and tortured, that we might possess 
 
 these privileges. What thanks should 
 we give to God for all this ! How 
 highly should we prize the religion that 
 has cost so much ! 
 
 8. In trial we should evince such a 
 spirit as not to dishonour, but to honour 
 our religion, ver. 3 — 5. This is as in 
 cumbent on all Christians as it is on 
 ministers of the gospel. It is in such 
 scenes that the reality of religion is 
 tested. It is then that its power is seen. 
 It is then that its value may be known. 
 Christians and Christian ministers often 
 do good in circumstances of poverty, 
 persecution, and sickness, which they 
 never do in health, and in popular 
 favour, and in prosperity. And God 
 often places his people in trial that they 
 may do good then, expecting that they 
 will accomplish more then than they 
 could in prosperous circumstances. 
 They whose aim it is to do good have 
 often occasion to bless God that they 
 were subjected to trial. Bunyan wrote 
 the " Pilgrim's Progress" in a dungeon ; 
 and almost all the works of Baxter were 
 written when he was suffering under 
 persecution, and forbidden to preach the 
 gospel. The devil is often foiled in this 
 way. He persecutes and opposes Chris- 
 tians ; and on the rack and at the stake 
 they do most to destroy his kingdom ; 
 he throws them into dungeons, and they 
 make books which go down even to the 
 millennium, making successful war on 
 the empire of darkness. Christians, 
 therefore, should esteem it a privilege 
 to be permitted to suffer on account of 
 Christ. Phil. i. 29. 
 
 9. If ministers and other Christiana 
 do any good they must be pure. ver. 6, 
 7. The gospel is to be commended by 
 pureness, and knowledge, and the word 
 of truth, and the armour of righteous- 
 ness. It is in this way that they are to 
 meet opposition ; in this way that they 
 are to propagate their sentiments. No 
 man need expect to do good in the mi- 
 nistry or as a private Christian, who is 
 not a holy man. No man who is a holy 
 man can help doing good. It will be 
 a matter of course that he will shed a 
 healthful moral influence around him. 
 And he will no more live without effect 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 159 
 
 than the sun sheds its steady beams on 
 the earth without effect. His influence 
 may be very noiseless and still, like the 
 sun-beams or the dew, but it will be 
 felt in the world. Wicked men can 
 resist any thing else better than they 
 can a holy example. They can make 
 a mock of preaching ; they can deride 
 exhortation ; they can throw away a 
 tract ; they can burn the Bible ; but 
 what can they do against a holy exam- 
 ple "? No more than they can against 
 the vivifying and enlightening beams 
 of the sun ; and a man who leads a holy 
 life cannot help doing good, and cannot 
 be prevented from doing good. 
 
 10. They who are Christians must 
 expect to meet with much dishonour, 
 and to be subjected often to the influ- 
 ence of evil report, ver. 8. The world 
 is unfriendly to religion, and its friends 
 must never be surprised if their motives 
 are impeached, and their names calum- 
 niated. 
 
 11. Especially is this the case with 
 ministers, ver. 8. They should make 
 up their minds to it, and they should 
 not suppose that any strange thing had 
 happened to them if they are called thus 
 to suffer. 
 
 12. They who are about to make a 
 profession of religion, and they who 
 are about entering on the work of the 
 ministry, or who are agitating the ques- 
 tion whether they should be ministers, 
 should ask themselves whether they are 
 prepared for this. They should count 
 the cost ; nor should they either make 
 a profession of religion or think of the 
 ministry as a profession, unless they are 
 willing to meet with dishonour, and to 
 go through evil report ; to be poor (ver. 
 10), and to be despised and persecuted, 
 or to die in the cause which they 
 embrace. 
 
 13. Religion has power to sustain the 
 soul in trials, ver. 10. Why should he 
 be sad who has occasion to rejoice 
 always ? Why should he deem him- 
 self poor, though he has slender earthly 
 possessions, who is able to make many 
 rich ] Why should he be melancholy 
 as if he had nothing, who has Christ as 
 
 his portion, and who is an heir of all 
 things 1 Let not the poor, who are rich 
 in faith, despond as though they had 
 nothing. They have a treasure which 
 gold cannot purchase, and which will 
 be of infinite value when all other trea- 
 sure fails. He that has an everlasting 
 inheritance in heaven cannot be called 
 a poor man. And he that can look to 
 such an inheritance should not be un- 
 willing to part with his earthly posses- 
 sions. Those who seem to be most 
 wealthy are often the poorest of mortals ; 
 and those who seem to be poor, or 
 who are in humble circumstances, often 
 have an enjoyment of even this world 
 which is unknown in the palaces and 
 at the tables of the great. They look 
 on all things as the work of thein 
 Father ; and in their humble dwellings, 
 and with their humble fare, they have 
 an enjoyment of the bounties of their 
 heavenly Benefactor, which is not ex 
 perienced often in the dwellings of the 
 great and the rich. 
 
 14. A people should render to & 
 minister and a pastor a return of love 
 and confidence that shall be propor 
 tionate to the love which is shown to ' 
 them. ver. 1 2. This is but a reasonable 
 and fair requital, and this is necessary 
 not only to the comfort, but to the suc- 
 cess of a minister. What good can he 
 do unless he has the affections and con- 
 fidence of his people ] 
 
 15. The compensation or recompense 
 which a minister has a right to expect 
 and require for arduous toil is, that his 
 people should be "enlarged" in love 
 towards him, and that they should yield 
 themselves to the laws of the Redeemer, 
 and be separate from the world, ver. 13. 
 And this is an ample reward. It is 
 what he seeks, what he prays for, what 
 he most ardently desires. If he is worthy 
 of his office, he will seek not theirs but 
 them (2 Cor. xii. 14), and he will be 
 satisfied for all his toils if he sees them 
 walking in the truth (3 John 4), and 
 showing in their lives the pure and 
 elevated principles of the gospel which 
 they profess to love. 
 
 1 6. The welfare of religion depends on 
 
)G0 
 
 II CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60, 
 
 the fact that Christians should be sepa- 
 rate from a vain, and gay, and wicked 
 world, ver. 14 — 16. Why should they 
 partake of those things in which they 
 can, if Christians, have nothing in com- 
 mon] Why attempt to mingle light 
 with darkness ? to form a compact 
 between Christ and Belial 1 or to set 
 up a polluted idol in the temple of 
 the living God 1 The truth is, there 
 are great and eternal principles in the 
 gospel which should not be surrendered, 
 and which cannot be broken down. 
 Christ intended to set up a kingdom 
 that should be unlike the kingdoms of 
 this world. And he designed that his 
 people should be governed by different 
 principles from the people of this world. 
 
 17. They who are about to make 
 a profession of religion should resolve 
 to separate themselves from the world. 
 ver. 14, 15. Religion cannot exist where 
 there is no such separation, and they 
 who are unwilling to forsake infidel 
 companions and the gay amusements 
 and vanities of life, and to find their 
 chosen friends and pleasures among 
 the people of God, can have no evi- 
 dence that they are Christians. The 
 world with all its wickedness and its 
 gay pleasures must be forsaken, and 
 there must be an effectual line drawn 
 between the friends of God and the 
 friends of sin. 
 
 Let us, then, who profess to be the 
 friends of the Redeemer remember how 
 pure and holy we should be. It should 
 not be indeed with the spirit of the 
 Pharisee ; it should not be with a spirit 
 that will lead us to say " stand by, for I 
 am holier than thou ;" but it should be, 
 while we discharge all our duties to our 
 impenitent friends, and while in all our 
 intercourse with the world we should 
 be honest and true, and while we do not 
 refuse to mingle with them as neigh- 
 bours and citizens as far as we can 
 without compromitting Christian princi- 
 ples, still our chosen friends and our 
 dearest friendships should be with the 
 people of God. For, his friends should 
 be our friends ; our happiness should 
 be with them, and the world should see 
 that we prefer the friends of the Re- 
 
 deemer to the friends of gayety, ambi- 
 tion, and sin. 
 
 18. Christians are the holy temple 
 of God. ver. 16. How pure should they 
 be ! How free should they be from sin ! 
 How careful to maintain consciences 
 void of offence ! 
 
 19. What an inestimable privilege it 
 is to be a Christian ! (ver. 18) ; to be a 
 child of God ! to feel that he is a Father 
 and a Friend ! to feel that though we 
 may be forsaken by all others ; though 
 poor and despised, yet there is one 
 who never forsakes ; one who never 
 forgets that he has sons and daughters 
 dependent on him, and who need 
 his constant care. Compared with 
 this, how small the honour of being 
 permitted to call the rich our friends, or 
 to be regarded as the sons or daughters 
 of nobles and of princes ! Let the 
 Christian then most highly prize his 
 privileges, and feel that he is raised 
 above all the elevations of rank and 
 honour which this world can bestow. 
 All these shall fade away, and the high- 
 est and the lowest shall meet on the 
 same level in the grave, and alike return 
 to dust. But the elevation of the child 
 of God shall only begin to be visible and 
 appreciated when all other honours fade 
 away. 
 
 20. Let all seek to become the sons 
 and daughters of the Lord Almighty. Let 
 us aspire to this rather than to earthly 
 honours ; let us seek this rather than to 
 be numbered with the rich and the great. 
 All cannot be honoured in this world, 
 and few r are they who can be regarded 
 as belonging to elevated ranks here. 
 But all may be the children of the 
 living God, and be permitted to call 
 the Lord Almighty their Father and 
 their Friend. O ! if men could as easily 
 be permitted to call themselves the sons 
 of monarchs and princes ; if they could 
 as easily be admitted to the palaces of 
 the great and sit down at their tables 
 as they can enter heaven, how greedily 
 would they embrace it ! And yet how 
 poor and paltry would be such honour 
 and pleasure compared with that of 
 feeling that we are the adopted children 
 of the great and the eternal God ! 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 HAVING therefore these a 
 promises, dearly beloved, 
 
 a c. 6. 17, 18. 1 Jno. 3. 3. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 161 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 The first verse of this chapter proper- 
 ly belongs to the previous chapter, and 
 should have been attached to that. It 
 is an exhortation made in view of the 
 promises there referred to, to make every 
 effort to obtain perfect purity, and to be- 
 come entirely holy. 
 
 In ver. 2, 3, he entreats the Corinth- 
 ians, in accordance with the wish which 
 he had expressed in ch.vi. 13, to receive 
 him as a teacher, and a spiritual father ; 
 as a faithful apostle of the Lord Jesus. 
 To induce them to do this, he assures 
 them that he had given them, at no 
 time, any occasion of offence. He had 
 injured no man ; he had wronged no 
 man. Possibly some might suppose 
 that he had injured them by the stern- 
 ness of his requirements in forbidding 
 them to contract friendships and al- 
 liances with infidels ; or in the case of 
 discipline in regard to the incestuous 
 person. But he assures them that all 
 his commands had been the fruit of most 
 tender love for them, and that he was 
 ready to live and die with them. 
 
 The remainder of the chapter (ver. 
 4 — 15) is occupied mainly in stating the 
 joy which he had at the evidence which 
 they had given that they were ready to 
 obey his commands. He says, there- 
 fore (ver. 4), that he was full of com- 
 fort and joy ; and that in all his tribu- 
 lation, the evidence of their obedience 
 had given him great and unfeigned 
 satisfaction. In order to show them 
 the extent of his joy, he gives a pa- 
 thetic description of the anxiety of 
 mind which he had on the subject ; his 
 troubles in Macedonia, and particularly 
 his distress on not meeting with Titus 
 as he had expected, ver. 5. But this 
 distress had been relieved by his com- 
 ing, and by the evidence which was 
 furnished through him that they were 
 ready to yield obedience to his com- 
 14* 
 
 let us cleanse b ourselves from 
 all filthiness of the flesh and 
 spirit, perfecting holiness in the 
 fear of God. 
 
 b Ps. 51. 10. Ez. 36. 25, 26. 1 Jno. 1. 7, 9. 
 
 mands. ver. 6, 7. This joy was greatly 
 increased by his hearing from Titus the 
 effect which his former epistle to them 
 had produced, ver. 8 — 13. He had felt 
 deep anxiety in regard to that. He had 
 even regretted, it would seem (ver. 8), 
 that he had sent it. He had been deeply 
 pained at the necessity of giving them 
 pain. ver. 8. But the effect had been 
 all that he had desired ; and when he 
 learned from Titus the effect which it 
 had produced — the deep repentance 
 which they had evinced, and the 
 thorough reformation which had oc- 
 curred (ver. 9 — 11), he had great occa- 
 sion to rejoice that he had sent the 
 epistle to them. This new and dis- 
 tinguished instance of their obedience 
 had given him great joy, and confirmed 
 him in the proof that they were truly 
 attached to him. The apostle adds, in 
 the conclusion of the chapter, that his 
 joy was greatly increased by the joy 
 which Titus manifested, and his entire 
 satisfaction in the conduct of the Co- 
 rinthians and the treatment which he 
 had received from them (ver. 13), so 
 that though he, Paul, had often had 
 occasion to speak in the kindest terms of 
 the Corinthians, all that he had ever 
 said in their favour Titus had realized 
 in his own case (ver. 14), and the affec- 
 tion of Titus for them had been greatly 
 increased by his visit to them. ver. 1 5. 
 The whole chapter, therefore, is emi- 
 nently adapted to produce good feeling 
 in the minds of the Corinthians toward 
 the apostle, and to strengthen the bonds 
 of their mutual attachment. 
 
 1. Having therefore these promises. 
 The promises referred to in ch. vi. 17, 
 18 ; the promise that God would be a 
 Father, a protector, and a friend. The 
 idea is, that as we have a promise that 
 God would dwell in us, that he would 
 be our God, that he would be to us a 
 father, we should remove from us what 
 
J 62 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 ever s offensive in his sight, and become 
 perfectly holy. % Let us cleanse our- 
 selves. Let us purify ourselves. Paul 
 was not afraid to bring into view the 
 agency of Christians themselves in the 
 work of salvation. He, therefore, says, 
 'let us purify ourselves, 1 as if Christians 
 had much to do ; as if their own agency 
 was to be employed ; and as if their 
 purifying was dependent on their own 
 efforts. While it is true that all purify- 
 ing influence and all holiness proceeds 
 from God, it is also true that the effect 
 of all the influences of the Holy Spirit 
 is to excite us to diligence to purify our 
 own hearts, and to urge us to make 
 strenuous efforts to overcome our own 
 sins. He who expects to be made pure 
 without any effort of his own will never 
 become pure; and he who ever becomes 
 holy will become so in consequence 
 of strenuous efforts to resist the evil of 
 his own heart, and to become like God. 
 The argument here is, that we have the 
 promises of God to aid us. We do not 
 go about the work in our own strength. 
 It is not a work in which we are to have 
 no aid. But it is a work which God 
 desires, and where he will give us all 
 the aid which we need. \ From all 
 filthiness of the flesh. The noun here 
 used (fAoxva-fAoc) occurs nowhere else in 
 the New Testament. The verb occurs 
 in 1 Cor. viii. 7. Rev. Hi. 4 ; xiv. 4, and 
 means to stain, defile, pollute, as a 
 garment; and the word here used means 
 a soiling, hence defilement, pollution, 
 and refers to the defiling and corrupting 
 influence of fleshly desires and carnal 
 appetites. The filthiness of the flesh 
 here denotes evidently the gross and 
 corrupt appetites and passions of the 
 body, including all such actions of all 
 kinds as are inconsistent with the virtue 
 and purity with which the body, re- 
 garded as the temple of the Holy Ghost, 
 should be kept holy — all such passions 
 and appetites as the Holy Spirit of God 
 would not produce. % And Spirit. 
 By ' filthiness of the spirit,' the apostle 
 means, probably, all the thoughts or 
 mental associations that defile the man. 
 Thus the Saviour (Matt. xv. 19) speaks 
 of evil thoughts, &c. that proceed out 
 
 of the heart, and that pollute the man. 
 And probably Paul here includes all 
 the sins and passions which appertain 
 particularly to mind or to the soul rather 
 than to carnal appetites, such as the 
 desire of revenge, pride, avarice, ambi- 
 tion, &c. These are in themselves as 
 polluting and defiling as the gross sen- 
 sual pleasures. They stand as much in 
 the way of sanctification, they are as 
 offensive to God, and they prove as 
 certainly that the heart is depraved as 
 the grossest sensual passions. The 
 main difference is, that they are more 
 decent in the external appearance ; they 
 can be better concealed ; they are usually 
 indulged by a more elevated class in 
 society ; but they are not the less offen- 
 sive to God. It may be added, also, 
 that they are often conjoined in the 
 same person ; and that the man who is 
 defiled in his " spirit" is often a man 
 most corrupt and sensual in his " flesh." 
 Sin sweeps with a desolating influence 
 through the whole frame, and it usually 
 leaves no part unaffected, though some 
 part may be more deeply corrupted than 
 others. % Perfecting. This word 
 (iTrirsxouvTic ) means properly to bring to 
 an end, to finish, complete. The idea 
 here is, that of carrying it out to the 
 completion. Holiness had been com- 
 menced in the heart, and the exhortation 
 of the apostle is, that they should make 
 every effort that it might be complete 
 in all its parts. He does not say that 
 this work of perfection had ever been 
 accomplished — nor does he say that it 
 had not been. He only urges the obli- 
 gation to make an effort to be entirely 
 holy ; and this obligation is not affected 
 by the inquiry whether any one has been 
 or has not been perfect. It is an obli- 
 gation which results from the nature of 
 the law of God and his unchangeable 
 claims on the soul. The fact that no 
 one has been perfect does not relax the 
 claim ; the fact that no one will be in 
 this life does not weaken the obligation. 
 It proves only the deep and dreadful 
 depravity of the human heart, and 
 should humble us under the stubbornness 
 of guilt. The obligation to be perfect 
 is one that is unchangeable and eternal 
 
A. n 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 163 
 
 2 Receive us ; we have wrong- 
 ed no man, we have corrupted 
 
 See Matt. v. 48. 1 Pet. i. 15. Tindal 
 renders this, " and grow up to full holi- 
 ness in the fear of God." The unceas- 
 ing and steady aim of every Christian 
 should be perfection — perfection in all 
 things — in the love of God, of Christ, 
 of man ; perfection of heart, and feel- 
 ing, and emotion; perfection in his 
 words, and plans, and dealings with 
 men ; perfection in his prayers, and in 
 his submission to the will of God. No 
 man can be a Christian who does not 
 sincerely desire it, and who does not 
 constantly aim at it. No man is a friend 
 of God who can acquiesce in a state of 
 sin, and who is satisfied and contented 
 that he is not as holy as God is holy. 
 And any man who has no desire to be 
 perfect as God is, and who does not 
 make it his daily and constant aim to 
 be as perfect as God, may set it down as 
 demonstrably certain that he has no 
 true religion. How can a man be a 
 Christian who is willing to acquiesce 
 in a state of sin, and who does not de- 
 sire to be just like his Master and Lord 1 
 Tf In the fear of God. Out of fear and 
 reverence of God. From a regard to 
 his commands, and a reverence for his 
 name. The idea seems to be, that we 
 are always in the presence of God ; we 
 are professedly under his law ; and we 
 sheuld be awed and restrained by a 
 sense of his presence from the com- 
 mission of sin, and from indulgence in 
 the pollutions of the flesh and spirit. 
 There are many sins that the presence 
 of a child will restrain a man from com- 
 mitting ; and how should the conscious 
 presence of a holy God keep us from 
 sin ! If the fear of man or of a child 
 will restrain us, and make us attempt 
 to be holy and pure, how should the 
 fear of the all-present and the all-seeing 
 God keep us not only from outward sins, 
 but from polluted thoughts and unholy 
 desires ! 
 
 2. Receive us. Tindal renders this, 
 " understand us." The word here used 
 
 no man, a we have defrauded no 
 man. 
 
 a 1 Sa. 12. 3, 4. Ac. 20. 33. c. 12. 17. 
 
 (yagfra?*) means properly, give space, 
 place, or room ; and it means here evi- 
 dently, make place or room for us in 
 your affections ; that is, admit or receive 
 us as your friends. It is an earnest 
 entreaty that they would do what he 
 had exhorted them to do in ch. vi. 13. 
 See Note on that verse. From that he 
 had digressed in the close of the last 
 chapter. He here returns to the subject, 
 and asks an interest in their affections 
 and their love. | We have wronged no 
 man. We have done injustice to no 
 man. This is given as a reason why 
 they should admit him to their full confi- 
 dence and affection. It is not improba- 
 ble that he had been charged with 
 injuring the incestuous person by the 
 severe discipline which he had found it 
 necessary to inflict on him. Note 1 Cor. 
 v. 5. This charge would not impro- 
 bably be brought against him by the 
 false teachers in Corinth. But Paul 
 here says, that whatever was the se- 
 verity of the discipline, he was conscious 
 of having done injury to no member of 
 that church. It is possible, however, 
 that he does not here refer to any such 
 charge, but that he says in general that 
 he had done no injury, and that there was 
 no reason why they should not receive 
 him to their entire confidence. It argues 
 great consciousness of integrity when a 
 man who has spent a considerable time, 
 as Paul had, with others, is able to say 
 that he had wronged no man in any 
 way. Paul could not have made this 
 solemn declaration unless he was cer- 
 tain he had lived a very blameless life. 
 Comp. Acts xx. 33. J We have cor- 
 rupted no man. This means that he 
 had corrupted no man in his morals, 
 either by his precept or his example. 
 The word (p.5h/ga>) means in general to 
 bring into a worse state or condition, 
 and is very often applied to morals. The 
 idea is, here, that Paul had not by his 
 precept or example made any man the 
 worse. He had not corrupted his princi- 
 
164 
 
 H. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 3 I speak not this to condemn 
 you; for I have said "before, 
 that ye are in our hearts to die 
 and live with you, 
 
 4 Great is my boldness of 
 
 a c. 6. 11, 12. 
 
 pies or his habits, or led him into sin. 
 % We have defrauded no man. We 
 have taken no man's property by cun- 
 ning, by trick, or by deception. The 
 word 7rXKvtx.Tiai means literally to have 
 more than another, and then to take 
 advantage, to seek unlawful gain, to 
 circumvent, defraud, deceive. The idea 
 is, that Paul had taken advantage of no 
 circumstances to extort money from 
 them, to overreach them, or to cheat 
 them. It is the conviction of a man 
 who was conscious that he had lived 
 honestly, and who could appeal to them 
 all as full proof that his life among them 
 had been blameless. 
 
 3. / speak not this to condemn you. 
 I do not speak this with any desire to 
 reproach you. I do not complain of 
 you for the purpose of condemning, or 
 because I have a desire to find fault, 
 though I am compelled to speak in some 
 respect of your want of affection and 
 liberality towards me. It is not because 
 I have no love for you, and wish to have 
 occasion to use words implying com- 
 plaint and condemnation. \ For I have 
 said before, chap. vii. 11, 12. t That 
 ye are in our hearts. That is, we are 
 so much attached to you ; or you have 
 such a place in our affections, f To die 
 and live with you. If it were the will 
 of God, we would be glad to spend our 
 lives among you, and to die with you ; 
 an expression denoting most tender at- 
 tachment. A similar well-known ex- 
 pression occurs in Horace : 
 
 Tecum vivere amem, tecum obeam libens. 
 
 Odes, B. III. IX. 24. 
 With the world I live, with the world I die. 
 This was an expression of the tender- 
 est attachment. It was true that the 
 Corinthians had not shown themselves 
 remarkably worthy of the affections of 
 Paul, but from the beginning he had 
 felt towards them the tenderest attach- 
 
 speech toward you, great b is my 
 glorying of you : I am filled with 
 comfort, I am exceeding joyful 
 c in all our tribulation. 
 
 b 1 Co. 1.4. c. 1.14. c Ph. 2. 17. Col. 1.24. 
 
 merit. And if it had been the will of 
 God that he should cease to travel, and 
 to expose himself to perils by sea and 
 land to spread the knowledge of the 
 Saviour, he would gladly have confined 
 his labours to them, and there have ended 
 his days. 
 
 4. Great is my boldness of speech 
 toward you. This verse seems designed 
 to soften the apparent harshness of what 
 he had said (ch. vi. 12), when he 
 intimated that there was a want of love 
 in them towards him (Bloomfield), as 
 well as to refer to the plainness which he 
 had used all along in his letters to them. 
 He says, therefore, that he speaks freely ; 
 he speaks as a friend ; he speaks with 
 the utmost openness and frankness ; he 
 conceals nothing from them. He speaks 
 freely of their faults, and he speaks 
 freely of his love to them ; and he as 
 frankly commends them and praises 
 them. It is the open, undisguised lan- 
 guage of a friend, when he throws open 
 his whole soul and conceals nothing. 
 H Great is my glorying of you. I have 
 great occasion to commend and praise 
 you, and I do it freely. He refers here 
 to the fact that he had boasted of their 
 liberality in regard to the proposed col- 
 lection for the poor saints of Judea 
 (ch. ix. 4) ; that he had formerly boasted 
 much of them to Titus, and of their 
 readiness to obey his commands (ver. 
 14) ; and that now he had had abundant 
 evidence, by what he had heard from 
 Titus (ver. 5. seq.), that they were dis- 
 posed to yield to his commands, and 
 obey his injunctions. He had probablv 
 often had occasion to boast of their 
 favourable regard for him. f / am 
 filled with comfort. That is, by the 
 evidence which I have received of your 
 readiness to obey me. % I am exceed- 
 ing joyful. I am overjoyed. The word 
 here used occurs nowhere else in the 
 
A.D.60.] 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 165 
 
 5 For, when we were come 
 into Macedonia, our flesh had no 
 rest, but we were troubled on 
 every side ; without a were fight- 
 ings, within were fears. 
 
 6 Nf vertheless God that oom- 
 
 a De. 32. 25. 
 
 New Tte'ament except in Rom. v. 20. 
 It is not found in the classic writers ; 
 and is a word which Paul evidently 
 compounded (from v7rsg and 7ri£i<r<ri-ja>), 
 and means to superabound over, to 
 superabound greatly, or exceedingly. It 
 is a word which would be used only 
 when the heart was full, and when it 
 would be difficult to find words to ex- 
 press its conceptions. Paul's heart was 
 full of joy; and he pours forth his 
 feelings in the most fervid and glowing 
 language. I have joy which cannot be 
 expressed. ^ In all our tribulation. 
 See Note, ch. i. 4. 
 
 5. For when we were come into 
 Macedonia. For the reasons which 
 induced Paul to go into Macedonia, 
 see Notes on ch. i. 1 6. Comp. Notes, 
 ch. ii.-12, 13. ^ Our flesh had no rest. 
 We were exceedingly distressed and 
 agitated. We had no rest. The causes 
 of his distress he immediately states. 
 If But we were troubled on every side. 
 In every way. We had no rest in any 
 quarter. We were obliged to enter 
 into harassing labours and strifes there, 
 and we were full of anxiety in regard 
 to you. 1 Without were fightings. 
 Probably he here refers to fierce opposi- 
 tion, which he met with in prosecuting 
 his work of preaching the gospel. He 
 met there, as he did everywhere, with 
 opposition from Pagans, Jews, and false 
 brethren. Tumults were usually excited 
 wherever he went ; and he preached the 
 gospel commonly amidst violent opposi- 
 tion. ^ Within were fears. Referring 
 probably to the anxiety which he had 
 in regard to the success of the epistle 
 which he had sent to the church at 
 Corinth. He felt great solicitude on 
 the subject. He had sent Titus there 
 to see what was the state of the church 
 
 forteth those that are cast down, 
 comforted us by the coming of 
 Titus ; h 
 
 7 And not by his coming only, 
 but by the consolation where- 
 with he was comforted in you, 
 
 b c. 2. 13. 
 
 and to witness the effect of his instruc- 
 tions. Titus had not come to him as 
 he had expected, at Troas (ch. ii. 13), 
 and he felt the deepest anxiety in regard 
 to him and to the success of his epistle. 
 His fears were probably that they would 
 be indisposed to exercise the discipline 
 on the olfender ; or lest the severity of 
 the discipline required should alienate 
 them from him ; or lest the party under 
 the influence of the false teachers should 
 prevail. All was uncertainty, and his 
 mind was filled with the deepest appre- 
 hension. 
 
 6. God that comforteth those that 
 are cast down. Whose characteristic 
 is, that he gives consolation to those 
 who are anxious and depressed. All 
 his consolation was in God ; and by 
 whatever instrumentality comfort was 
 administered, he regarded and acknow 
 ledged God as the author. See Note, 
 ch. i. 4. If By the coming of Titus. 
 To Macedonia. He rejoiced not only 
 in again seeing him, but especially in 
 the intelligence which he brought re- 
 specting the success of his epistle, and 
 the conduct of the church at Corinth. 
 
 7. And not by his coming only. 
 Not merely by the fact that he was 
 restored to me, and that my anxieties 
 in regard to him were now dissipated. 
 It is evident that Paul, not having met 
 with Titus as he had expected, at Troas, 
 had felt much anxiety on his account, 
 perhaps apprehending that he was sick, 
 or that he had died. If But by the con- 
 solation wherewith he was comforted 
 in you. Titus was satisfied and de- 
 lighted with his interview with you. 
 He had been kindly treated, and he had 
 seen all the effect produced by the letter 
 which he had desired. He had, there- 
 fore, been much comforted by his visit 
 
166 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 when he told us your earnest 
 desire, your mourning, your fer- 
 vent mind toward me ; so that I 
 rejoiced the more. 
 
 to Corinth, and this was a source of 
 additional joy to Paul. He rejoiced at 
 what he had witnessed among you, and 
 he imparted the same joy to me also. 
 The joy of one friend will diffuse it- 
 self through the heart of another. Joy 
 is diffusive, and one Christian cannot 
 well be happy without making others 
 happy also. % When he told us of 
 your earnest desire. Either to rectify 
 what was amiss {Doddridge, Clarke) ; 
 or to see me. — Macknight, Rusenmuller, 
 Bloomjield. It seems to me that the 
 connexion requires us to understand it 
 of their desire, their anxiety to comply 
 with his commands, and to reform the 
 abuses which existed in the church, and 
 which had given him so much pain. 
 Tf Your mourning. Produced by the 
 epistle. Your deep repentance over the 
 sins which had prevailed in the church. 
 •J Your fervent mind toward me. 
 Greek, ' Your zeal for me.' It denotes 
 that they evinced great ardour of attach- 
 ment to him, and an earnest desire to 
 comply with his wishes. % So that I 
 rejoiced the more. I not only rejoiced 
 at his coming, but I rejoiced the more 
 at what he told me of you. Under any 
 circumstances the coming of Titus 
 would have been an occasion of joy ; 
 but it was especially so from the account 
 which he gave me of you. 
 
 8. For though I made you sorry, &c. 
 That is, in the first epistle which he had 
 sent to them. In that epistle he had 
 felt it necessary to reprove them for 
 their dissensions and other disorders 
 which had occurred and which were 
 tolerated in the church. That epistle 
 was fitted to produce pain in them — as 
 severe and just reproof always does; 
 and Paul felt very anxious about its 
 effect on them. It was painful to him 
 to write it, and he was well aware that 
 it must cause deep distress among them 
 to be thus reproved. T I do not repent. 
 I have seen such happy effects produced 
 
 8 For though I made you 
 sorry with a letter, I do not re- 
 pent, though I a did repent : for 
 
 a c. 2. 4. 
 
 by it ; it has so completely answered the 
 end which I had in view ; it was so 
 kindly received, that I do not regret now 
 that I wrote it. It gives me no pain in 
 the recollection, but I have occasion to 
 rejoice that it was done. ^ Though I 
 did repent. Doddridge renders this, 
 " however anxious I may have been." 
 The word here used does not denote 
 repentance in the sense in which that 
 word is commonly understood, as if any 
 wrong had been done. It is not the 
 language of remorse. It can denote 
 here nothing more than " that uneasi- 
 ness which a good man feels, not from 
 the consciousness of having done wrong 
 but from a tenderness for others, and a 
 fear lest that which, prompted by duty, 
 he had said, should have too strong an 
 effect upon them." — Campbell, diss. vi. 
 part iii. § 9. See the meaning of the 
 word further illustrated in the same 
 dissertation. The word ( /umi^A/^au) 
 denotes properly to change one's pur- 
 pose or mind after having done any 
 thing {Robinson) ; or an uneasy feel- 
 ing of regret for what has been done 
 without regard either to duration or 
 effects. — Campbell. Here it is not to 
 be understood that Paul meant to say he 
 had done any thing wrong. He was an 
 inspired man, and what he had said 
 was proper and right. But he was a 
 man of deep feeling, and of tender 
 affections. He was pained at the ne- 
 cessity of giving reproof. And there 
 is no improbability in supposing that af- 
 ter the letter had been sent off, and he 
 reflected on its nature and on the pain 
 which it would cause to those whom he 
 tenderly loved, there might be some 
 misgiving of heart about it, and the 
 deepest anxiety, and regret at the neces- 
 sity of doing it. What parent is there 
 who has not had the same feeling as 
 this 1 He has felt it necessary to cor- 
 rect a beloved child, and has formed the 
 purpose, and has executed it. But is 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 167 
 
 I perceive that the same epistle 
 hath made you sorry, though it 
 were but for a season. 
 
 9 Now I rejoice, not that ye 
 were made sorry, but that ye 
 
 there no misgiving of heart? No 
 question asked whether it might not 
 have been dispensed with 1 No inter- 
 nal struggle; no sorrow; no emotion 
 which may be called regret at the 
 resolution which has been taken ? Yet 
 there is no repentance as if the parent 
 had done wrong. He feels that he has 
 done what was right and necessary. 
 He approves his own course, and has 
 occasion of rejoicing at the good effects 
 which follow. Such appears to have 
 been the situation of the apostle Paul 
 in this case ; and it shows that, he had a 
 tender heart, that he did not delight in 
 giving pain, and that he had no desire 
 to overwhelm them with grief. When 
 the effect was seen, he was not un- 
 willing that they should be apprized of the 
 pain which it had cost him. When a 
 parent has corrected a child, no injury 
 is done if the child becomes acquainted 
 with the strugglings which it has cost 
 him, and the deep pain and anxiety 
 caused by the necessity of resorting to 
 chastisement. ^ For I perceive, &c. 
 I perceive the good effect of the epistle. 
 I perceive that it produced the kind of 
 sorrow in you which I desired. I see 
 that it has produced permanent good 
 results. The sorrow which it caused 
 in you is only for a season ; the good 
 effects will be abiding. I have, there- 
 fore, great occasion to rejoice that I sent 
 the epistle. It produced permanent re- 
 pentance and reformation (ver. 9), and 
 thus accomplished all that I wished or 
 desired. 
 
 9. Now Irejoice, not that ye were made 
 sorry, &c. I have no pleasure in giving 
 pain to any one, or in witnessing the 
 distress of any. When men are brought 
 to repentance under the preaching of 
 the gospel, the ministers of the gospel 
 do not find pleasure in their grief as 
 such. They are not desirous of making 
 men unhappy by calling them to re- 
 
 sorrowed to repentance : for ye 
 were made sorry, * after a godly 
 manner, that ye might receive* 
 damage by us in nothing. 
 
 1 or, according to God. 
 
 pentance, and they have no pleasure in 
 the deep distress of mind which is often 
 produced by their preaching, in itself 
 considered. It is only because such 
 sorrow is an indication of their return 
 to God, and will be followed by happi- 
 ness and by the fruits of good living, 
 that they find any pleasure in it, or that 
 they seek to produce it. t But that ye 
 sorrowed to repentance. It was not 
 mere grief; it was not sorrow producing 
 melancholy, gloom, or despair ; it was 
 not sorrow which led you to be angry 
 at him who had reproved you for your 
 errors — as is sometimes the case with the 
 sorrow that is produced by reproof; but 
 it was sorrow that led to a change and re- 
 formation. It was sorrow that was follow- 
 ed by a putting away of the evil for the 
 existence of which there had been oc- 
 casion to reprove you. The word here 
 rendered "repentance" ( juiidvotuv) is a 
 different word from that which, in ver. 
 8, is rendered " I did repent," and in- 
 dicates a different state of mind. It 
 properly means a change of mind or 
 purpose. Comp. Heb. xii. 7. It denotes 
 a change for the better ; a change of 
 mind that is durable and productive in 
 its consequences; a change which 
 amounts to a permanent reformation. 
 See Campbell's Diss, ut supra. The 
 sense here is, that it produced a change, 
 a reformation. It was such sorrow for 
 their sin as to lead them to reform and 
 to put away the evils which had ex- 
 isted among them. It was this fact, and 
 not that they had been made sorry, that 
 led Paul to rejoice. 1 After a godly 
 manner. Marg. " according to God." 
 See Note on the next verse. 1 That 
 ye might receive damage by us in no- 
 thing. The Greek word rendered " re- 
 ceive damage" (^^/aid-ars) means pro- 
 perly to bring loss upon any one ; to 
 receive loss or detriment. See Note on 
 lCor.iii. 15. Comp. Phil. iii. 8. The sense 
 
168 
 
 H. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 10 For godly sorrow a work- 
 
 aJe. 31. 9. Ez. 7. 16. 
 
 here seems to be, ' So that on the whole no 
 real injury was done you in any respect 
 by me. You were indeed put to pain and 
 grief by my reproof. You sorrowed. 
 But it has done you no injury on the 
 whole. It has been a benefit to you. 
 If you had not reformed, if you had 
 been pained without putting away the 
 sins for which the reproof was adminis- 
 tered, if it had been mere grief without 
 any proper fruit, you might have said 
 that you would have suffered a loss of 
 happiness, or you might have given me 
 occasion to inflict severer discipline. 
 But now you are gainers in happiness 
 by all the sorrow which I have caused.' 
 Sinners are gainers in happiness in the 
 end by all the pain of repentance pro- 
 duced by the preaching of the gospel. 
 No man suffers loss by being told of 
 his faults if he repents ; and men are 
 under the highest obligations to those 
 faithful ministers and other friends who 
 tell them of their errors, and who are 
 the means of bringing them to true re- 
 pentance. 
 
 10. For godly sorrow. ' Sorrow ac- 
 cording to God' (*H ya^ K*ra Qtov Kitth). 
 That is, such sorrow as has respect to 
 God, or is according to his will, or as 
 leads the soul to him. This is a very 
 important expression in regard to true 
 repentance, and shows the exact nature 
 of that sorrow which is connected with 
 a return to God. The phrase may be 
 regarded as implying the following 
 things. (1.) Such sorrow as God ap- 
 proves, or such as is suitable to, or con- 
 formable to his will and desires. It 
 cannot mean that it is such sorrow or 
 grief as God has, for he has none ; but 
 such as shall be in accordance with what 
 God demands in a return to him. It is 
 a sorrow which his truth is fitted to 
 produce on the heart ; such a sorrow as 
 shall appropriately arise from viewing 
 sin as God views it ; such sorrow as 
 exists in the mind when our views ac- 
 cord with his in regard to the existence, 
 the extent, the nature, and the ill-desert 
 
 eth repentance to salvation not 
 to be repented of: but the sor- 
 
 of sin. Such views will lead to sorrow 
 that it has ever been committed; and 
 such views will be ' according to God.' 
 (2.) Such sorrow as shall be exercised 
 towards God in view of sin ; which 
 shall arise from a view of the evil of sin 
 as committed against a holy God. It is 
 not mainly that it will lead to pain ; that 
 it will overwhelm the soul in disgrace ; 
 that it will forfeit the favour or lead to 
 the contempt of man ; or that it will 
 lead to an eternal hell ; but it is such 
 as arises from a view of the evil of sin 
 as committed against a holy and just 
 God, deriving its main evil from the 
 fact that it is an offence against his in- 
 finite Majesty. Such sorrow David 
 had (Ps. li. 4), when he said, " against 
 thee, thee only have I sinned ;" when the 
 offence regarded as committed against 
 man, enormous as it was, was lost and 
 absorbed in its greater evil when re- 
 garded as committed against God. So 
 all true and genuine repentance is that 
 which regards sin as deriving its main 
 evil from the fact that it is committed 
 against God. (3.) That which leads 
 to God. It leads to God to obtain for- 
 giveness ; to seek for consolation. A 
 heart truly contrite and penitent seeks 
 God, and implores pardon from him. 
 Other sorrow in view of sin than that 
 which is genuine repentance leads the 
 person away from God. He seeks con- 
 solation in the world ; he endeavours to 
 drive away his serious impressions or to 
 drown them in the pleasures and the 
 cares of life. But genuine sorrow for 
 sin leads the soul to God, and conducts 
 the sinner, through the Redeemer, to 
 him to obtain the pardon and peace 
 which he only can give to a wounded 
 spirit. In God alone can pardon and 
 true peace be found ; and godly sorrow 
 for sin will seek them there. \ Work- 
 eth repentance. Produces a change 
 that shall be permanent ; a reformation. 
 It is not mere regret ; it does not soon 
 pass away in its effects, but it produces 
 permanent and abiding changes. A man 
 
/L D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER VIL 
 
 169 
 
 row of the world a worketh death. 
 
 a Pr. 17. 22. 
 
 who mourns over sin as committed 
 against God, and who seeks to God for 
 pardon, will reform his life and truly 
 repent. He who has grief for sin only 
 because it will lead to disgrace or shame, 
 or because it will lead to poverty or 
 pain, will not necessarily break off from 
 it and reform. It is only when it is 
 seen that sin is committed against God 
 and is evil in his sight, that it leads to 
 a change of life. ^ Not to be repented 
 of (djutrctfAiKHTcv). See Note on ver. 8. 
 Not to be regretted. It is permanent 
 and abiding. There is no occasion to 
 mourn over such repentance and change 
 of life. It is that which the mind ap- 
 proves, and which it will always approve. 
 There will be no reason for regretting 
 it, and it will never be regretted. And 
 it is so. Who ever yet repented of 
 having truly repented of sin ] Who is 
 there, who has there ever been, who 
 became a true penitent, and a true 
 Christian, who ever regretted it ? Not 
 an individual has ever been known who 
 regretted his having become a Christian. 
 Not one who regretted that he had be- 
 come one too soon in life, or that he had 
 served the Lord Jesus too faithfully or too 
 long, t But the sorrow of the world. All 
 sorrow which is not toward God, and 
 which does not arise from just views of 
 sin as committed against God, or lead to 
 God. Probably Paul refers here to the 
 sorrow which arises from worldly causes, 
 and which does not lead to God for con- 
 solation. Such may be the sorrow which 
 arises from the loss of friends or pro- 
 perty ; from disappointment, or from 
 shame and disgrace. Perhaps it may 
 include the following things. (1.) Sor- 
 row arising from losses of property and 
 friends, and from disappointment. (2.) 
 Sorrow for sin or vice when it over- 
 whelms the mind with the consciousness 
 of guilt, and when it does not lead to 
 God, and when there is no contrition of 
 soul from viewing it as an offence 
 against God. Thus a female who has 
 wandered from the paths of virtue, and 
 involved her family and herself in dis- 
 15 
 
 1 1 For behold this self-same 
 thing, that ye sorrowed after a 
 
 grace ; or a man who has been guilty 
 of forgery, or perjury, or any other dis- 
 graceful crime, and who is detected ; a 
 man who has violated the laws of the 
 land, and who has involved himself and 
 family in disgrace, will often feel regret, 
 and sorrow, and remorse, but it arises 
 wholly from worldly considerations, and 
 does not lead to God. (3.) When the 
 sorrow arises from a view of worldly 
 consequences merely, and when there 
 is no looking to God for pardon and 
 consolation. Thus men, when they lose 
 their property or friends, often pine in 
 grief without looking to God. Thus 
 when they have wandered from the path 
 of virtue and have fallen into sin, they 
 often look merely to the disgrace among 
 men, and see their names blasted, and 
 their comforts gone, and pine away in 
 grief. There is no looking to God for 
 pardon or for consolation. The sorrow 
 arises from this world, and it terminates 
 there. It is the loss of what they va- 
 lued pertaining to this world, and it is 
 all which they had, and it produces 
 death. It is sorrow such as the men of 
 this world have, begins with this world, 
 and terminates with this world, | Work- 
 eth death. Tends to death, spiritual, tem- 
 poral, and eternal. It does not tend to 
 life. (1.) It produces distress only. It 
 is attended with no consolation. (2.) It 
 tends to break the spirit, to destroy the 
 peace, and to mar the happiness. (3.) 
 It often leads to death itself. The spirit 
 is broken, and the heart pines away 
 under the influence of the unalleviated 
 sorrow ; or under its influence men 
 often lay violent hands on themselves 
 and take their lives. Life is often 
 closed under the influence of such sor- 
 row. (4.) It tends to eternal death. 
 There is no looking to God ; no look- 
 ing for pardon. It produces murmur- 
 ing, repining, complaining, fretfulness 
 against God, and thus leads to his dis- 
 pleasure and to the condemnation and 
 ruin of the soul. 
 
 11. For behold this self-same thing. 
 For see in your own case the happy 
 
170 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 godly a sort, what carefulness b it 
 wrought in you, yea, what clear- 
 ing c of yourselves, yea, ivhat 
 
 a Is. 66.2. b Til. 3.8. cEp. 5. 11. 
 
 effects of godly sorrow'. See the effects 
 which it produced ; see an illustration 
 of what it is fitted to produce. The 
 construction is, ' For lo ! this very thing, 
 to wit, your sorrowing after a godly 
 manner, wrought carefulness, clearing of 
 yourselves,' &c. The object of Paul is 
 to illustrate the effects of godly sorrow, 
 to which he had referred in ver. 10. 
 He appeals, therefore, to their own case, 
 and says that it was beautifully illus- 
 trated among themselves, f What care- 
 fulness (<r7rcvJ»v). This word properly 
 denotes speed, haste ,- then diligence, 
 earnest effort, forwardness. Here it is 
 evidently used to denote the diligence 
 and the great anxiety which they mani- 
 fested to remove the evils which existed 
 among them. They went to work to 
 remove them. They did not sit down 
 to mourn over them merely, nor did 
 they wait for God to remove them, nor 
 did they plead that they could do no- 
 thing, but they set about the work as 
 though they believed it might be done. 
 When men are thoroughly convinced 
 of sin, they will set about removing it 
 with the utmost diligence. They will 
 feel that this can be done, and must be 
 done, or that the soul will be lost. 
 ^ What clearing of yourselves (urrcho- 
 yiay). Apology. This word properly 
 means a plea or defence before a tribu- 
 nal or elsewhere. Acts xxii. 1. 2 Tim. 
 iv. 16. Tindal renders it, "Yea, it 
 caused you to clear yourselves." The 
 word here properly means apology for 
 what had "been done ; and it probably 
 refers here to the effort which would be 
 made by the sounder part of the church 
 to clear themselves from blame in what 
 had occurred. It does not mean that 
 the guilty, when convicted of sin, will 
 attempt to vindicate themselves and to 
 apologize to God for what they had 
 done ; but it means that the church at 
 Corinth were anxious to state to Titus 
 all the mitigating circumstances of the 
 
 indignation, d yea, what fear, • 
 yea, what vehement desire, f yea, 
 
 dEp.4.26. c He. 4.1. /Ps. 42. 1. 130.6 
 
 case ; they showed great solicitude to 
 free themselves, as far as could be done, 
 from blame ; they were anxious, as far 
 as could be, to show that they had not 
 approved of what had occurred, and 
 perhaps that it had occurred only be- 
 cause it could not have been prevented. 
 We are not to suppose that all the 
 things here referred to occurred in the 
 same individuals, and that the same 
 persons precisely evinced diligence, and 
 made the apology, &c. It was done by 
 the church; all evinced deep feeling; 
 but some manifested it in one way, and 
 some in another. The whole church 
 was roused, and all felt, and all endea- 
 voured in the proper way to free them- 
 selves from the blame, and to remove 
 the evil from among them, ^f Yea, 
 what indignation. Indignation against 
 the sin, and perhaps against the persons 
 who had drawn down the censure of the 
 apostle. One effect of true repentance 
 is to produce decided hatred of sin. It is 
 not mere regret, or sorrow, it is positive 
 hatred. There is a deep indignation 
 against it as an evil and a bitter thing. 
 t Yea, what fear. Fear lest the thing 
 should be repeated. Fear lest it should 
 not be entirely removed. Or it may 
 possibly mean fear of the displeasure 
 of Paul, and of the punishment which 
 would be inflicted if the evil were not 
 removed. But it more probably refers 
 to the anxious state of mind that the 
 whole evil might be corrected, and to 
 the dread of having any vestige of the 
 evil remaining among them, t Yea, 
 what vehement desire. This may either 
 mean their fervent wish to remove the 
 cause of complaint, or their anxious de- 
 sire to see the apostle. It is used in the 
 latter sense in ver. 7, and according to 
 Doddridge and Bloomfield this is the 
 meaning here. Locke renders it, " de- 
 sire of satisfying me." It seems to me 
 more probable that Paul refers to their 
 anxious wish to remove the sin, since 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 171 
 
 
 ivhat zeal, yea, what revenge ! a 
 In all things ye have approved 
 yourselves b to be clear in this 
 matter. 
 
 12 Wherefore, though I wrote 
 unto you, / did it not for his 
 cause that had done the wrong, 
 
 a Re. 3. 19. Mat. 5. 29, 30. 
 
 b Ro. 14. 18. 
 
 this is the topic under consideration. 
 The point of his remarks in this verse 
 is not so much their affection for him 
 as their indignation against their sin, 
 and their deep grief that sin had existed 
 and had been tolerated among them. 
 % Yea, what zeal. Zeal to remove the 
 sin, and to show your attachment to 
 me. They set about the work of re- 
 formation in great earnest. ^ Yea, 
 what revenge ! Tindal renders this, 
 " it caused punishment." The idea is, 
 that they immediately set about the 
 work of inflicting punishment on the 
 offender. The word here used (ix.Jix.na-i?) 
 probably denotes maintenance of right, 
 protection ,• then it is used in the sense 
 of avengement, or vengeance ,• and then 
 of penal retribution or punishment. See 
 Lukexxi.22. 2 Thess. i.8. lPetii. 14. 
 % In all things, &c. The sense of this 
 is, 'You have entirely acquitted your- 
 selves of blame in this business.' The 
 apostle does not mean that none of them 
 had been to blame, or that the church 
 had been free from fault, for a large 
 part of his former epistle is occupied in 
 reproving them for their faults in this 
 business, but he means that by their 
 zeal and their readiness to take away 
 the cause of complaint, they had re- 
 moved all necessity of further blame, 
 and had pursued such a course as 
 entirely to meet his approbation. They 
 had cleared themselves of any further 
 blame in this business, and had become, 
 so far as this was concerned, "clear" 
 (d^viyc) or pure. 
 
 12. Wherefore, though I wrote unto 
 you, &c. In this verse Paul states the 
 main reason why he had written to 
 them on the subject. It was not princi- 
 pally on account of the man who had 
 
 nor for his cause that suffered 
 wrong, but that our care c for you 
 in the sight of God might appear 
 unto you. 
 
 13 Therefore we were com- 
 forted in your comfort : yea, and 
 exceedingly the more joyed we 
 
 c c. 2. 4. 
 
 done the wrong, or of him who had 
 been injured ; but it was from tender 
 anxiety for the whole church, and in 
 order to show the deep interest which 
 he had in their welfare. | Not for his 
 cause that had done the wrong. Not 
 mainly, or principally on account of the 
 incestuous person. 1 Cor. v. 1. It was 
 not primarily with reference to him as 
 an individual that I wrote, but from a 
 regard to the whole church. • f Nor for 
 his cause that had suffered wrong. Not 
 merely that the wrong which he had 
 suffered might be rectified, and that his 
 rights might be restored, valuable and 
 desirable as was that object. The of- 
 fence was that a man had taken his 
 father's wife as his own (I Cor. v. 1), 
 and the person injured, therefore, was 
 his father. It is evident from this 
 passage, I think, that the father was 
 living at the time when Paul wrote this 
 epistle, f But that our care, &c. I 
 wrote mainly that I might show the 
 deep interest which I had in the church 
 at large, and my anxiety that it might 
 not suffer by the misconduct of any of 
 its members. It is from a regard to the 
 welfare of the whole church that disci- 
 pline should be administered, and not 
 simply with reference to an individual 
 who has done wrong, or an individual 
 who is injured. In church discipline 
 such private interests are absorbed in 
 the general interest of the church at 
 large. 
 
 1 3. Therefore we were comforted in 
 your comfort. The phrase " your com. 
 fort," here seems to mean the happiness 
 which they had, or might reasonably be 
 expected to have in obeying the direc- 
 tions of Paul, and in the repentance 
 which they had manifested. Paul had 
 
172 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 LA. D. 60. 
 
 for the joy of Titus, because his 
 spirit was refreshed a by you all. 
 14 For if I have boasted any 
 thing to him of you, I am not 
 ashamed ; but as we spake all 
 things to you in truth, even so 
 our boasting, which / made be- 
 fore Titus, is found a truth. 
 
 o Ro. 15. 32. 
 
 spoken of no other consolation or comfort 
 than this ; and the idea seems to be that 
 they were a happy people, and would be 
 happy by obeying the commands of 
 God. This fact gave Paul additional 
 joy, and he could not but rejoice that 
 they had removed the cause of the of- 
 fence, and that they would not thus be 
 exposed to the displeasure of God. Had 
 they not repented and put away the 
 evil, the consequences to them must 
 have been deep distress. As it was, 
 they would be blessed and happy. 
 If And exceedingly the more, &c. Titus 
 had been kindly received, and hospitably 
 entertained, and had become much at- 
 tached to them. This was to Paul an 
 additional occasion of joy. See ver. 7. 
 14. For if I have boasted any thing 
 to him, &c. This seems to imply that 
 Paul had spoken most favourably to 
 Titus of the Corinthians before he went 
 among them. He had probably ex- 
 pressed his belief that he would be 
 kindly received ; that they would be 
 disposed to listen to him. and to comply 
 with the directions of the apostle ; per- 
 haps he had spoken to him of what he 
 anticipated would be their liberality in 
 regard to the collection which he was 
 about to make for the poor saints at 
 Jerusalem, f I am not ashamed. It 
 has all turned out to be true. He has 
 found it as I said it would be. All my 
 expectations are realized ; and you have 
 been as kind, and hospitable, and be- 
 nevolent as I assured him you would be. 
 1 .4s we spake all things to you in 
 truth. Every thing which I said to 
 you was said in truth. All my promises 
 to you, and all my commands, and all 
 
 15 And his * inward affection 
 is more abundant toward you, 
 whilst he remembereth the obe 
 dience of you all, how with fear fc 
 and trembling ye received him. 
 
 16 I rejoice, therefore, that I 
 have confidence e in you in all 
 things. 
 
 x bowels. b Ph. 2. 12. 
 
 » c 2 Th. 3. 4. Phile. 8. 21. 
 
 my reasonable expectations expressed 
 to you, were sincere. I practised no 
 disguise, and all that I have said thus 
 far turned out to be true, t Even so 
 our boasting, &c. My boasting of your 
 character, and of your disposition to do 
 right, which I made before Titus has 
 turned out to be true. It was as I said 
 it would be. I did not commend you 
 too highly to him, as I did not overstate 
 the matter to you in my epistle. 
 
 15. And his inward affection, &c. 
 He has become deeply and tenderly 
 attached to you. His affectionate re- 
 gard for you has been greatly increased 
 by his visit. On the meaning of the 
 word here rendered " inward affection" 
 (oTTKayxv*, Marg. bowels) see Note on 
 ch. vi. 1 2. It denotes here deep, tender 
 attachment, or love. ^ How with fear 
 and trembling ye received him. With 
 fear of offending, and with deep appre- 
 hension of the consequences of remain- 
 ing in sin. He saw what a fear there 
 was of doing wrong, and what evidence 
 there was, therefore, that you were 
 solicitous to do right. 
 
 16. / rejoice, therefore, that I have 
 confidence, &c. I have had the most 
 ample proof that you are disposed to 
 obey God, and to put away every thing 
 that is offensive to him. The address 
 of this part of the epistle, says Dod- 
 dridge, is wonderful. It is designed, 
 evidently, not merely to commend them 
 for what they had done, and to show 
 them the deep attachment which he had 
 for them, but in a special manner to pre- 
 pare them for what he was about to say 
 in the following chapter respecting the 
 collection which he had so much at 
 
\. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 173 
 
 I heart for the poor saints at Jerusalem. 
 What he here says was admirably 
 adapted to introduce that subject. They 
 had thus far showed the deepest regard 
 for him. They had complied with all 
 his directions. All that he had said of 
 them had proved to be true. And as 
 he had boasted of them to Titus (ver. 
 14), and expressed his entire confidence 
 that they would comply with his requi- 
 sitions, so he had also boasted of them 
 to the churches of Macedonia, and ex- 
 pressed the utmost confidence that they 
 would be liberal in their benefactions. 
 ch. ix. 2. AH that Paul here says in 
 their favour, therefore, was eminently 
 adapted to excite them to liberality, and 
 to prepare them to comply with his 
 wishes in regard to that contribution. 
 
 REMARKS. 
 
 1. Christians are bound by every so- 
 lemn and sacred consideration to endea- 
 vour to purify themselves, ver. 1. They 
 who have the promises of eternal life, 
 and the assurance that God will be to 
 them a father, and evidence that they 
 are his sons and daughters, should not 
 indulge in the filthiness of the flesh 
 and spirit. 
 
 2. Every true Christian will aim at 
 perfection, ver. 1. He will desire to be 
 perfect ; he will strive for it ; he will 
 make it a subject of unceasing and con- 
 stant prayer. No man can be a Chris- 
 tian to whom it would not be a pleasure 
 to be at once as perfect as God. And 
 if any man is conscious that the idea 
 of being made at once perfectly holy 
 would be unpleasant or painful, he may 
 set it down as certain evidence that he 
 is a stranger to religion. 
 
 3. No man can be a Christian who 
 voluntarily indulges in sin, or in what 
 he knows to be wrong, ver. 1. A man 
 who does that cannot be aiming at per- 
 fection. A man who does that shows 
 that he has no real desire to be perfect. 
 
 4. How blessed will be heaven, ver. 1. 
 There we shall be perfect. And the 
 crowning glory of heaven is not that we 
 shall be happy, but that we shall be 
 holy. Whatever there is in the heart 
 that is good shall there be perfectly de- 
 
 15* 
 
 veloped ; whatever there is that is evil 
 shall be removed, and the whole soul 
 will be like God. The Christian desires 
 heaven because he will be there perfect. 
 He desires no other heaven. He could 
 be induced to accept no other if it were 
 offered to him. He blesses God day by 
 day that there is such a heaven, and 
 that there is no other ; that there is one 
 world which sin does not enter, and 
 where evil shall be unknown. 
 
 5. What a change will take place at 
 death, ver. 1. The Christian will be 
 there made perfect. How this change 
 will be there produced we do not know. 
 Whether it will be by some extraordi- 
 nary influence of the Spirit of God on 
 the heart, or by the mere removal from 
 the body, and from a sinful world to a 
 world of glory, we know not. The fact 
 seems to be clear, that at death the 
 Christian will be made at once as holy 
 as God is holy, and that he will ever 
 continue to be in the future world. 
 
 6. What a desirable thing it is to 
 die. ver. 1. Here, should we attain to 
 the age of the patriarchs, like them we 
 should continue to be imperfect. Death 
 only will secure our perfection; and 
 death, therefore, is a desirable event. 
 The perfection of our being could not 
 be attained but for death ; and every 
 Christian should rejoice that he is to 
 die. It is better to be in heaven than 
 on earth ; better to be with God than to 
 be away from him ; better to be made 
 perfect than to be contending here with 
 internal corruption, and to struggle with 
 our sins. " I would not live always," 
 was the language of holy Job ; " I de- 
 sire to depart and to be with Christ," 
 was the language of holy Paul. 
 
 7. It is often painful to be compelled 
 to use the language of reproof, ver. 8. 
 Paul deeply regretted the necessity of 
 doing it in the case of the Corinthians, 
 and expressed the deepest anxiety in 
 regard to it. No man, no minister, 
 parent, or friend can use it but with 
 deep regret that it is necessary. But 
 the painfulness of it should not prevent 
 our doing it. It should be done tenderly 
 but faithfully. If done with the deep 
 feeling, with the tender affection of Paul, 
 
174 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 it will be done right ; and when so done, 
 it will produce the desired effect, and 
 do good. No man should use the lan- 
 guage of reproof with a hard heart, or 
 with severity of feeling. If he is, like 
 Paul, ready to weep when he does it, 
 it will do good. If he does it because 
 he delights in it, it will do evil. 
 
 8. It is a subject of rejoicing where 
 a people exercise repentance, ver. 8. 
 A minister has pleasure not in the pain 
 which his reproofs cause ; not in the 
 deep anxiety and distress of the sinner, 
 and not in the pain which Christians 
 feel under his reproofs, but he has joy in 
 the happy results or the fruits which 
 follow from it. It is only from the be- 
 lief that those tears will produce abun- 
 dant joy that he has pleasure in causing 
 them, or in witnessing them. 
 
 9. The way to bring men to repent- 
 ance is to present to them the simple 
 and unvarnished truth, ver. 8, 9. Paul 
 stated simple and plain truths to the 
 Corinthians. He did not abuse them ; 
 he did not censure them in general 
 terms ; he stated things just as they 
 were, and specified the things on account 
 of which there was occasion for repent- 
 ance. So if ministers wish to excite 
 repentance in others, they must specify 
 the sins over which others should weep ; 
 if we wish, as individuals, to feel regret 
 for our sins, and to have true repentance 
 toward God, we must dwell on those 
 particular sins which we have com- 
 mitted, and should endeavour so to re- 
 flect on them that they may make an 
 appropriate impression on the heart. 
 No man will truly repent by general 
 reflections on his sin ; no one who does 
 not endeavour so to dwell on his sins 
 as that they shall make the proper im- 
 pression which each one is fitted to 
 produce on the soul. Repentance is 
 that state of mind which a view of the 
 truth in regard to our own depravity is 
 fitted to produce. 
 
 10. There is a great difference be- 
 tween godly sorrow and the sorrow of 
 the world, ver. 10. All men feel sorrow. 
 All men, at some period of their lives, 
 grieve over their past conduct Some 
 in their sorrow are pained because they 
 
 have offended God, and go to God, and 
 find pardon and peace in him. That 
 sorrow is unto salvation. But the mass 
 do not look to God. They turn away 
 from him even in their disappointments, 
 and in their sorrows, and in the bitter 
 consciousness of sin. They seek to 
 alleviate their sorrows in worldly com- 
 pany, in pleasure, in the intoxicating 
 bowl ; and such sorrow works death. It 
 produces additional distress, and deeper 
 gloom here, and eternal wo hereafter. 
 
 11. We may learn what constitutes 
 true repentance, ver. 11. There should 
 be, and there will be, deep feeling. 
 There will be " carefulness," deep 
 anxiety to be freed from the sin ; there 
 will be a desire to remove it ; " indigna- 
 tion" against it; "fear" of offending 
 God ; " earnest desire" that all that has 
 been wrong should be corrected ; " zeal" 
 that the reformation should be entire ; 
 and a wish that the appropriate " re- 
 venge" or expression of displeasure 
 should be excited against it. The true 
 penitent hates nothing so cordially as 
 he does his sin. He hates nothing but 
 sin. And his warfare with that is de- 
 cided, uncompromising, inexorable, and 
 eternal. 
 
 12. It is an evidence of mercy and 
 goodness in God that the sorrow which 
 is felt about sin may be made to termi- 
 nate in our good, and to promote our 
 salvation, ver. 10, 11. If sorrow for 
 sin had been suffered to take its own 
 course, and had proceeded unchecked, 
 it would in all cases have produced 
 death. If it had not been for the merci 
 ful interposition of Christianity, by 
 which even sorrow might be turned to 
 joy, this world would have been every- 
 where a world of sadness and of death. 
 Man would have suffered. Sin always 
 produces, sooner or later, wo. Chris- 
 tianity has done nothing to make men 
 wretched, but it has done every thing 
 to bind up broken hearts. It has re- 
 vealed a way by which sorrow may be 
 turned into joy, and the bitterness of 
 grief may be followed by the sweet 
 calm and sunshine of peace. 
 
 13. The great purpose of Christian 
 discipline is to benefit the whole church. 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 175 
 
 ver. 12. It is not merely on account 
 of the offender, nor is it merely that the 
 injured may receive a just recompense. 
 It is primarily that the church may be 
 pure, and that the cause of religion may 
 not be dishonoured. When the work 
 of discipline is entered on from any 
 private and personal motives, it is usu- 
 ally attended with bad feeling, and 
 usually results in evil. When it is en- 
 tered on with a desire to honour God, 
 and to promote the purity of the church, 
 when the whole aim is to deliver the 
 church from opprobrium and scandal, 
 and to have just such a church as Jesus 
 Christ desires, then it will be prosecuted 
 with good temper, and with right feel- 
 ing, and then it will lead to happy re- 
 sults. Let no man institute a process 
 of discipline on an offending brother from 
 private, personal, and revengeful feel- 
 ings. Let him first examine his own 
 heart, and let him be sure that his aim 
 is solely the glory of Christ, before he 
 attempts to draw down the censure of 
 the church on an offending brother. 
 How many cases of church discipline 
 would be arrested if this simple rule 
 were observed ! And while the case be- 
 fore us shows that it is important in the 
 highest degree that discipline should 
 be exercised on an offending member 
 of the church ; while no consideration 
 should prevent us from exercising that 
 discipline ; and while every man should 
 feel desirous that the offending brother 
 should be reproved or punished, yet this 
 case also shows that it should be done 
 with the utmost tenderness, the most 
 strict regard to justice, and the deepest 
 anxiety that the general interests of re- 
 ligion should not suffer by the manifesta- 
 tion of an improper spirit, or by im- 
 proper motives in inflicting punishment 
 on an offending brother. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 Ix the previous chapter the apostle 
 had expressed his entire confidence in 
 the ready obedience of the Corinthians 
 in all things. To this confidence he 
 had been led by the promptitude with 
 which they had complied with his com- 
 mands in regard to the case of discipline 
 
 there, and by the respect which they had 
 shown to Titus, whom he had sent to 
 them. All that he had ever said in their 
 favour had been realized ; all that had 
 ever been asked of them had been ac- 
 complished. The object of his state- 
 ment in the close of ch. vii. seems to 
 have been to excite them to diligence in 
 completing the collection which they 
 had begun for the poor and afflicted 
 saints of Judea. On the consideration 
 of that subject, which lay so near his 
 heart, he now enters ; and this chapter 
 and the following are occupied with 
 suggesting arguments, and giving di- 
 rections for a liberal contribution. 
 
 Paul had given directions for taking 
 up this collection in the first epistle. 
 Seech. xv i. 1. seq. Comp. Rom. xv. 26. 
 This collection he had given Titus di- 
 rection to take up when he went to 
 Corinth. See ver. 6 — 17 of this chap- 
 ter. But from some cause it had not 
 been completed, ver. 10, 11. What 
 that cause was, is not stated, but it may 
 have been possibly the disturbances 
 which had existed there, or the opposi- 
 tion of the enemies of Paul, or the 
 attention which was necessarily bestow- 
 ed in regulating the affairs of the church. 
 But in order that the contribution might 
 be made, and might be a liberal one, 
 Paul presses on their attention several 
 considerations designed to excite them 
 to give freely. The chapter is, there- 
 fore, of importance to us, as it is a state- 
 ment of the duty of giving liberally to 
 the cause of benevolence, and of the 
 motives by which it should be done. 
 In the presentation of this subject, Paul 
 urges upon them the following con- 
 siderations. 
 
 He appeals to the very liberal exam- 
 ple of the churches of Macedonia, where, 
 though they were exceedingly poor, they 
 had contributed with great cheerfulness 
 and liberality to the object, ver. 1 — 5. 
 
 From their example he had been in- 
 duced to desire Titus to lay the subject 
 before the church at Corinth, and to 
 finish the collection which he had be- 
 gun, ver. 6. 
 
 He directs them to abound in this, 
 not as a matter of commandment, but 
 
* 
 
 176 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 1X/TOREOVER, brethren, we 
 *- do you to wit of the grace 
 
 excited by the example of others, ver. 
 7,8. 
 
 He appeals to them by the love of the 
 Saviour ; reminds them that though he 
 was rich yet he became poor, and that 
 they were bound to imitate his example, 
 ver. 9. 
 
 He reminds them of their intention 
 to make such a contribution, and of the 
 effort which they had made a year be- 
 fore ; and though they had been em- 
 barrassed in it, and might find it diffi- 
 cult still to give as much as they had 
 intended, or as much as they would 
 wish, still it would be acceptable to God. 
 For if there was a willing mind, God 
 accepted the offering, ver. 10 — 12. 
 
 He assures them that it was not his 
 wish to burden or oppress them. All 
 that he desired was that there should be 
 an equality in all the churches, ver. 
 13—15. 
 
 To show them how much he was in- 
 terested in this, he thanks God that he 
 had put it into the heart of Titus to en- 
 gage in it. And in order more effectually 
 to secure it, he says that he had sent 
 with Titus a brother who was well 
 known, and whose praise was in all 
 the churches. He had done this in 
 order that the churches might have en- 
 tire confidence that the contribution 
 would be properly distributed. Paul 
 did not wish it to be intrusted to himself. 
 He would leave no room for suspicion 
 _n regard to his own character ; he would 
 furnish the utmost security to the 
 churches that their wishes were com- 
 plied with. He desired to act honestly 
 not only in the sight of the Lord, but 
 to furnish evidence of his entire honesty 
 to men. ver. 16 — 21. 
 
 To secure the same object he had also 
 sent another brother, and these three 
 brethren he felt willing to recommend 
 as faithful and tried ; as men in whom 
 the church at Corinth might repose the 
 utmost confidence, ver. 22 — 24. 
 
 1. Moreover, brethren, we do you to 
 
 of God bestowed on the churches 
 of Macedonia ; ° 
 
 a c. 9. 2, 4. 
 
 wit. We make known to you ; we 
 inform you. The phrase * we do you 
 to wit,' is used in Tindal's translation, 
 and means 'we cause you to know.' 
 The purpose for which Paul informed 
 them of the liberality of the churches of 
 Macedonia was to excite them to similar 
 liberality. % Of the grace of God, &c. 
 The favour which God had shown them 
 in exciting a spirit of liberality, and in 
 enabling them to contribute to the fund 
 for supplying the wants of the poor 
 saints at Jerusalem. The word ' grace' 
 Ct a '§'0 * s sometimes used in the sense 
 of gift, and the phrase " gift of God" 
 some have supposed may mean very 
 great gift, where the words " of God" 
 may be designed to mark any thing very 
 eminent or excellent, as in the phrase 
 'cedars of God,' 'mountains of God,' 
 denoting very great cedars, very great 
 mountains. Some critics (as Macknight, 
 Bloomfield, Locke, and others) have 
 supposed that this means that the 
 churches of Macedonia had been able to 
 contribute largely to the aid of the 
 saints of Judea. But the more obvious 
 and correct interpretation, as I appre- 
 hend, is that which is implied in the 
 common version, that the phrase ' grace 
 of God,' means that God had bestowed 
 on them grace to give according to their 
 ability in this cause. According to this 
 it is implied, (1.) That a disposition to 
 contribute to the cause of benevolence 
 is to be traced to God. He is its author. 
 He excites it It is not a plant of native 
 growth in the human heart, but a large 
 and liberal spirit of benevolence is one 
 of the effects of his grace, and is to be 
 traced to him. (2.) It is a favour be- 
 stowed on a church when God excites 
 in it a spirit of benevolence. It is 
 one of the evidences of his love. And 
 indeed there cannot be a higher proof 
 of the favour of God than when by his 
 grace he inclines and enables us to 
 contribute largely to meliorate the con- 
 dition, and to alleviate the wants of our 
 
4. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 177 
 
 2 How that, in a great trial 
 of affliction, the abundance of 
 their joy and their deep a poverty 
 
 a Mar. 12. 44. 
 
 ellow-men. Perhaps the apostle here 
 meant delicately to hint this. He did 
 not therefore say coldly that the churches 
 of Macedonia had contributed to this 
 object, but he speaks of it as a favour 
 shown to them by God that they were 
 able to do it. And he meant, probably, 
 gently to intimate to the Corinthians 
 that it would be an evidence that they 
 were enjoying the favour of God if 
 they should contribute in like manner. 
 % The churches of Macedonia. Philippi, 
 Thessalonica, Berea. For an account 
 of Macedonia, see Notes, Acts xvi. 9. 
 Rom. xv. 26. Of these churches, that 
 at Philippi seems to have been most 
 distinguished for liberality (Phil. iv. 10. 
 15, 16. 18), though it is probable that 
 other churches contributed according to 
 their ability as they are commended 
 (comp. ch. ix. 2) without distinction. 
 
 2. How that, in a great trial of 
 affliction. When it might be supposed 
 they were unable to give ; when many 
 would suppose they needed the aid of 
 others ; or when it might be supposed 
 their minds would be wholly engrossed 
 with their own concerns. The trial to 
 which the apostle here refers was doubt- 
 less some persecution which was excited 
 against them, probably by the Jews. See 
 Acts xvi. 20; xvii. 5. % The abundance 
 of their joy. Their joy arising from the 
 hopes and promises of the gospel. Not- 
 withstanding their persecutions, their joy 
 has abounded, and the effect of their 
 joy has been seen in the liberal contribu- 
 tion which they have made. Their joy 
 could not be repressed by their persecu- 
 tion, and they cheerfully contributed 
 largely to the aid of others. % And 
 their deep poverty. Their very low 
 estate of poverty was made to contribute 
 liberally to the wants of others. It is 
 implied here, (1.) That they were very 
 poor — a fact arising probably from the 
 consideration that the poor generally 
 
 abounded unto the riches of their 
 1 liberality. 
 
 3 For to their power (I bear 
 
 i simplicity. 
 
 embraced the gospel first, and also be- 
 cause it is probable that they were mo- 
 lested and stripped of their property in 
 persecutions (comp. Heb. x. 34) ; (2.) 
 That notwithstanding this they were 
 enabled to make a liberal contribution — 
 a fact demonstrating that a people can 
 do much even when poor if all feel dis- 
 posed to do it, and that afflictions are 
 favourable to the effort; and, (3.) That 
 one cause of this was the joy which 
 they had even in their trials. If a peo- 
 ple have the joys of the gospel ; if they 
 have the consolations of religion them- 
 selves, they will somehow or other find 
 means to contribute to the welfare of 
 others. They will be willing to labour 
 with reference to it, or they will find 
 something which they can sacrifice or 
 spare. Even their deep poverty will 
 abound in the fruits of benevolence. 
 
 1 Abounded. They contributed libe- 
 rally. Their joy was manifested in a 
 large donation, notwithstanding their 
 poverty. If Unto the riches of their 
 liberality. Marg. " Simplicity." The 
 word ((br*oT»?) here used means pro- 
 perly sincerity, candour, probity ; then 
 Christian simplicity, integrity ; then 
 liberality. See Rom. xii. 8 (Marg.). 
 
 2 Cor. ix. 11. 13. The phrase "riches 
 of liberality," is a Hebraism, meaning 
 rich, or abundant liberality. The sense 
 is, their liberality was much greater than 
 could be expected from persons so poor ; 
 and the object of the apostle is, to excite 
 the Corinthians to give liberally by their 
 example. 
 
 3. For to their power. To the ut- 
 most of their ability. 1 I bear record 
 Paul had founded those churches and 
 had spent much time with them. He 
 was therefore well qualified to bear 
 testimony in regard to their condition. 
 1 Yea, and beyond their power. Be- 
 yond what could have been expected ; 
 or beyond what it would have been 
 
173 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 record) yea, and beyond their 
 power, they were willing of 
 themselves : 
 
 4 Praying us with much in- 
 treaty that we would receive the 
 gift, and take upon us the fellow- 
 ship a of the ministering to the 
 saints. 
 
 a Ac. 11. 29. Ro. 15. 25, 26. 
 
 thought possible in their condition. 
 Doddridge remarks that this is a noble 
 hyperbole similar to that used by De- 
 mosthenes when he says, " I have per- 
 formed all, even with an industry be- 
 yond my power." The sense is, they 
 were willing to give more than they 
 were well able. It shows the strong 
 interest which they had in the subject, 
 and the anxious desire which they had 
 to relieve the wants of others. ^ Of 
 themselves (aid-zigrrct). Acting from 
 choice, self-moved, voluntarily, of their 
 own accord. They did not wait to be 
 urged and pressed to do it. They re- 
 joiced in the opportunity of doing it. 
 They came forward of their own accord 
 and made the contribution. " God 
 loveth a cheerful giver" (ch. ix. 7) ; and 
 from all the accounts which we have 
 of these churches in Macedonia it is 
 evident that they were greatly distin- 
 guished for their cheerful liberality. 
 
 4. Praying us with much entreaty. 
 Earnestly entreating me to receive the 
 contribution and convey it to the poor 
 and afflicted saints in Judea. ^ And 
 take upon us the fellowship of the mi- 
 nistering to the saints. Greek, ' that we 
 would take the gift and the fellowship 
 of the ministering to the saints.' They 
 asked of us to take part in the labour 
 of conve3 r ing it to Jerusalem. The 
 occasion of this distress which made 
 the collection for the saints of Judea 
 necessary, was probably the famine 
 which was predicted by Agabus, and 
 which occurred in the time of Claudius 
 Caesar. See Note on Acts xi. 28. Bar- 
 nabas was associated with Paul in con- 
 veying the contribution to Jerusalem. 
 Acts vi. 30. Paul was unwilling: to do 
 
 5 And this they did, not as 
 we hoped, but first gave their 
 ownselves to the Lord, and unto 
 us by the will of God. 
 
 6 Insomuch that we desired 
 Titus, that as he had begun, so 
 he would also finish in you the 
 same ■ grace also. 
 
 * or gift. 
 
 it unless they particularly desired it, and 
 he seems to have insisted that some 
 person should be associated with him. 
 ver. 20. 1 Cor. xvi. 3, 4. 
 
 5. And this they did, &c. They did 
 not give what we expected only. We 
 knew their poverty, and we expected 
 only a small sum from them. ^ Not 
 as we hoped. Not according to the 
 utmost of our hopes. We were greatly 
 disappointed in the amount which they 
 gave, and in the manner in which it 
 was done, t But first gave their own- 
 selves to the Lord. They first made an 
 entire consecration of themselves and 
 all that they had to the Lord. They 
 kept nothing back. They felt that all 
 they had was his. And where a peo- 
 ple honestly and truly devote themselves 
 to God, they will find no difficulty in 
 having the means to contribute to the 
 cause of charity. Tf And unto us by 
 the will of God. That is, they gave 
 themselves to us to be directed in regard 
 to the contribution to be made. They 
 complied with our wishes and followed 
 our directions. The phrase "by the 
 will of God," means evidently that God 
 moved them to this, or that it was to 
 be traced to his direction and provi- 
 dence. It is one of the instances in 
 which Paul traces every thing that is 
 right and good to the agency and di- 
 rection of God. 
 
 6. Insomuch. The sense of Jiis 
 passage seems to be this. • We were 
 encouraged by this unexpected success 
 among the Macedonians. We were 
 surprised at the extent of their liberality 
 And encouraged by this, we requested 
 Titus to go among you and finish the 
 collection which you had proposed and 
 
 1 i 
 
A.. D. 60. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 179 
 
 7 Therefore, as ye abound a in 
 every thing, in faith, and utter- 
 ance, and knowledge, and in all 
 diligence, and in your love to 
 us, see that ye abound in this 
 grace also. 
 
 a 1 Co. 1. 5. 
 
 which you had begun. Lest you should 
 be outstripped in liberality by the com- 
 paratively poor Macedonian Christians, 
 we were anxious that you should per- 
 form what you had promised and con- 
 templated, and we employed Titus, there- 
 fore, that he might go at once and finish 
 the collection among you.' Tf The same 
 grace also. Marg. "Gift." See Note 
 on ver. 1 . The word refers to the contri- 
 bution which he wished to be made. 
 
 7. Therefore as ye abound in every 
 thing. See Note, 1 Cor. i. 5. Paul 
 never hesitated to commend Christians 
 where it could be done with truth ; and 
 the fact that they were eminent in some 
 of the Christian duties and graces, he 
 makes the ground of the exhortation 
 that they would abound in all. From 
 those who had so many eminent cha- 
 racteristics of true religion he had a 
 right to expect much ; and he therefore 
 exhorts them to manifest a symmetry 
 of Christian character. ^ In faith. In 
 the full belief of the truth and obliga- 
 tion of the gospel. % And utterance. 
 In the ability to instruct others ; perhaps 
 referring to their power of speaking 
 foreign languages. 1 Cor. xiv. *i And 
 knowledge. The knowledge of God, 
 and of his truth. Tf And in all dili- 
 gence. Diligence or readiness in the 
 discharge of every duty. Of this, Paul 
 had full evidence in their readiness to 
 comply with his commands in the case 
 of discipline to which so frequent refer- 
 ence is made in this epistle, f And in 
 your love to us. Manifested by the 
 readiness with which you received our 
 commands. See ch. vii. 4. 6, 7. 11. 16. 
 *J See that ye abound in this grace 
 also. The idea here is, that eminence 
 in spiritual endowments of any kind, 
 or in any of the traits of the Christian 
 character should lead to great benevo- 
 
 8 I speak not h by command- 
 ment, but by occasion of the 
 forwardness of others, and to 
 prove the sincerity of your 
 love. 
 
 6 1 Co. 7. 6. 
 
 lence, and that the character is not com- 
 plete unless benevolence be manifested 
 toward every good object that may be 
 presented. 
 
 8. / speak not by commandment. 
 This does not mean that he had no 
 express command of God in the case, 
 but that he did not mean to command 
 them ; he did not speak authoritatively ; 
 he did not intend to prescribe what they 
 should give. He used only moral 
 motives, and urged the considerations 
 which he had done to persuade rather 
 than to command them to give. See 
 ver. 10. He was endeavouring to in- 
 duce them to give liberally not by ab- 
 stract command and law, but by show- 
 ing them what others had given who 
 had much less ability and much fewer 
 advantages than they had. Men cannot 
 be induced to give to objects of charity 
 by command, or by a spirit of dictation 
 and authority. The only successful, as 
 well as the only lawful appeal, is to 
 their hearts, and consciences, and sober 
 judgments. And if an apostle did not 
 take upon himself the language of 
 authority and command in matters of 
 Christian benevolence, assuredly minis- 
 ters and ecclesiastical bodies now have 
 no right to use any such language. 
 f Bat by occasion of the forwardness 
 of others. I make use of the example 
 of the churches of Macedonia as an 
 argument to induce you to give libe- 
 rally to the cause. f And to prove the 
 sincerity of your love. The apostle 
 does not specify here what " love" he 
 refers to, whether love to God, to Christ, 
 to himself, or to the church at large. 
 It may be that he designedly used the 
 word in a general sense to denote love 
 to any good object ; and that he meant 
 to say that liberality in assisting the 
 poor and afflicted people of God would 
 
180 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 9 For ye know the grace of 
 our Lord Jesus Christ, that, 
 though he was a rich, yet for your 
 
 o Jno. 1. 1. 
 
 be the best evidence of the sincerity 
 of their love to God, to the Redeemer, 
 to him, and to the church. Religion is 
 love ; and that love is to be manifested 
 by doing good to all men as we have 
 opportunity. The most substantial evi- 
 dence of that love is when we are will- 
 ing to part with our property, or with 
 whatever is valuable to us, to confer 
 happiness and salvation on others. 
 
 9. For ye know, &c. The apostle 
 Paul was accustomed to illustrate every 
 subject, and to enforce every duty where 
 it could be done, by a reference to the 
 life and sufferings of the Lord Jesus 
 Christ. The design of this verse is 
 apparent. It is, to show the duty of 
 giving liberally to the objects of be- 
 nevolence, from the fact that the Lord 
 Jesus was willing to become poor in 
 order that he might benefit others. The 
 idea is, that he who was Lord and pro- 
 prietor of the universe, and who possessed 
 all things, was willing to leave his ex- 
 alted station in the bosom of the Father 
 and to become poor, in order that we 
 might become rich in the blessings of 
 the gospel, in the means of grace, and 
 as heirs of all things ; and that we who 
 are thus benefited, and who have such 
 an example, should be willing to part 
 with our earthly possessions in order 
 that we may benefit others, t TAe 
 grace. The benignity, kindness, mercy, 
 goodness. His coming in this manner 
 was a proof of the highest benevolence. 
 ^ Though he was rich. The riches of 
 the Redeemer here referred to, stand 
 opposed to that poverty which he as- 
 sumed and manifested when he dwelt 
 among men. It implies, (1.) His pre- 
 existence, for he became poor. He had 
 been rich. Yet not in this world. He 
 did not lay aside wealth here on earth 
 after he had possessed it, for he had 
 none. He was not first rich and then 
 poor on earth, for he had no earthly 
 wealth. The Socuiian interpretation 
 
 sakes he became poor, h that ye 
 through his poverty might be 
 rich. c 
 
 b Lu. 9. 58. Ph. 2. 6, 7. c Re. 3. 18 
 
 is, that he was "rich in power and 
 in the Holy Ghost;" but it was not 
 true that he laid these aside, and that 
 he became poor in either of them. He 
 had power, even in his poverty, to still 
 the waves, and to raise the dead, and 
 he was always full of the Holy Ghost. 
 His family was poor ; and his parents 
 were poor ; and he was himself poor 
 all his life. This then must refer to a 
 state of antecedent riches before his 
 assumption of human nature ; and the 
 expression is strikingly parallel to that 
 in Phil. ii. 6, seq. " Who being in the 
 form of God, thought it not robbery to 
 be equal with God, but made himself 
 of no reputation," &c. (2.) He was 
 rich as the Lord and proprietor of all 
 things. He was the Creator of all 
 (John i. 3. Col. i. 16), and as Creator 
 he had a right to all things, and the 
 disposal of all things. The most abso- 
 lute right which can exist is that 
 acquired by the act of creation ; and 
 this right the Son of God possessed 
 over all gold, and silver, and diamonds, 
 and pearls ; over all earth and lands ; 
 over all the treasures of the ocean, and 
 over all worlds. The extent and amount 
 of his riches, therefore, is to be measured 
 by the extent of his dominion over 
 the universe ; and to estimate his riches, 
 therefore, we are to conceive of the 
 sceptre which he sways over the distant 
 worlds. What wealth has man that 
 can compare with the riches of the 
 Creator and proprietor of all ] How 
 poor and worthless appears all the gold 
 that man can accumulate compared with 
 the wealth of him whose are the silver, 
 and the gold, and the cattle upon a 
 thousand hills ] ^ Yet for your sakes. 
 That is, for your sakes as a part of the 
 great family that was to be redeemed. 
 In what respect it was for their sake, 
 the apostle immediately adds when he 
 says, it was that they might be made 
 rich. It was not for his own sate, but 
 
A. D. 60. j 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 181 
 
 it was for ours, f He became poor. 
 In the following respects. (1.) He 
 chose a condition of poverty, a rank of 
 life that was usually that of poverty. 
 He " took upon himself the form of a 
 servant." Phil. ii. 7. (2.) He was con- 
 nected with a poor family. Though 
 of the family and lineage of David 
 (Luke ii. 4), yet the family had fallen 
 into decay, and was poor. In the Old 
 Testament he is beautifully represented 
 as a shoot or sucker that starts up from 
 the root of a decayed tree. See my Note 
 on Isa. xi. 1. (3.) His whole life was 
 a life of poverty. He had no home. 
 Luke ix. 58. He chose to be depend- 
 
 Ient on the charity of the few friends 
 that he drew around him, rather than to 
 create food for the abundant supply of 
 his own wants. He had no farms or 
 plantations ; he had no splendid palaces ; 
 he had no money hoarded in useless 
 coffers or in banks ; he had no property 
 to distribute to his friends. His mother 
 he commended when he died to the 
 charitable attention of one of his dis- 
 ciples (John xix. 27), and all his per- 
 sonal property seems to have been the 
 raiment which he wore, and which was 
 divided among the soldiers that crucified 
 him. Nothing is more remarkable than 
 the difference between the plans of the 
 Lord Jesus and those of many of his 
 followers and professed friends. He 
 formed no plan for becoming rich, and 
 he always spoke with the deepest earnest- 
 ness of the dangers which attend an 
 effort to accumulate property. He was 
 among the most poor of the sons of 
 men in his life ; and few have been the 
 men on earth who have not had as much 
 as he had to leave to surviving friends, 
 or to excite the cupidity of those who 
 should fall heirs to their property when 
 dead. (4.) He died poor. He made 
 no will in regard to his property, for he 
 had none to dispose of. He knew well 
 enough the effect which would follow if 
 he had amassed wealth, and had left it to 
 
 fbe divided among his followers. They 
 were very imperfect ; and even around 
 the cross there might have been anxious 
 discussion, and perhaps strife about it, 
 as there is often now over the coffin 
 16 
 
 and the unclosed grave of a rich and 
 foolish father who has died. Jesus in- 
 tended that his disciples should never 
 be turned away from the great work to 
 which he called them by any wealth 
 which he would leave them ; and he 
 left them not even a keepsake as a 
 memorial of his name. All this is the 
 more remarkable from two considera- 
 tions-, (a) That he had it in his power 
 to choose the manner in which he would 
 come. He might have come in the 
 condition of a splendid prince. He 
 might have rode in a chariot of ease, 
 or have dwelt in a magnificent palace. 
 He might have lived with more than 
 the magnificence of an oriental prince, 
 and might have bequeathed treasures 
 greater than those of Crcesus or Solo- 
 mon to his followers. But he chose not 
 to do it. (b) It would have been as 
 right and proper for him to have amassed 
 wealth, and to have sought princely 
 possessions, as for any of his followers. 
 What is right for them would have 
 been right for him. Men often mistake 
 on this subject ; and though it cannot 
 be demonstrated that all his followers 
 should aim to be as poor as he was, yet 
 it is undoubtedly true that he meant 
 that his example should operate con- 
 stantly to check their desire of amassing 
 wealth. In him it was voluntary ,- in 
 us there should be always a readiness 
 to be poor if such be the will of God ; 
 nay, there should be rather a preference 
 to be in moderate circumstances that 
 we may thus be like the Redeemer. 
 f That ye through his poverty might- 
 be rich. That is, might have durable 
 and eternal riches, the riches of God's 
 everlasting favour. This includes, 
 (1.) The present possession of an in- 
 terest in the Redeemer himself. 'Do 
 you see these extended fields V said the 
 owner of a vast plantation to a friend. 
 1 They are mine. All this is mine.' ' Do 
 you see yonder poor cottage V was the 
 reply of the friend as he directed his 
 attention to the abode of a poor widow. 
 * She has more than all this. She has 
 Chuist as her portion ; and that is 
 more than all.' He who has an interest 
 in the Redeemer has a possession that 
 
182 
 
 II. COBINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 10 Ana Acrein 1 give my 
 advice : for wild is expedient for 
 you, who have oegun before, not 
 
 is of more value than ail that princes 
 can bestow. (2.) The heirship of an 
 eternal inheritance, the prospect of im- 
 mortal glory. Rom.viii. 17. (3.) Ever- 
 lasting treasures in heaven. Thus the 
 Saviour compares the heavenly blessings 
 to treasures. Matt. vi. 20. Eternal and 
 illimitable wealth is theirs in heaven ; 
 and to raise us to that blessed inherit- 
 ance was the design of the Redeemer 
 in consenting to become poor. This, 
 the apostle says, was to be secured by 
 his poverty. This includes probably 
 the two following things, viz. (1.) That 
 it was to be by the moral influence of 
 the fact that he was poor that men 
 were to be blessed. He designed by 
 his example to counteract the effect of 
 wealth ; to teach men that this was not 
 the thing to be aimed at ; that there 
 were more important purposes of life 
 than to obtain money ; and to furnish 
 a perpetual reproof of those who are 
 aiming to amass riches. The example 
 of the Redeemer thus stands before the 
 whole church and the world as a living 
 and constant memorial of the truth that 
 men need other things than wealth ; 
 and that there are objects that demand 
 their time and influence other than the 
 accumulation of property. It is well to 
 have such an example ; well to have 
 before us the example of one who never 
 formed any plan for gain, and who 
 constantly lived above the world. In 
 a world where gain is the great object, 
 where all men are forming plans for it, 
 it is well to have one great model that 
 shall continually demonstrate the folly 
 of it, and that shall point to better 
 things. (2.) The word " poverty" here 
 may include more than a mere want 
 of property. It may mean all the cir- 
 cumstances of his low estate and humble 
 condition ; his sufferings and his woes. 
 The whole train of his privations was 
 included in this ; and the idea is, that 
 he gave himself to this lowly condition 
 in order that by his sufferings he might 
 
 only to do, but also to be ' for 
 ward a year ago. 
 
 i willing-. 
 
 procure for us a part in the kingdom 
 of heaven. His poverty was a part of 
 the sufferings included in the work of 
 the atonement. For it was not the 
 sufferings of the garden merely, or the 
 pangs of the cross, that constituted the 
 atonement ; it was the series of sorrows 
 and painful acts of humiliation which 
 so thickly crowded his life. By all these 
 he designed that we should be made rich ; 
 and in view of all these the argument 
 of the apostle is, we should be willing 
 to deny ourselves to do good to others. 
 
 10. And herein I give my advice. 
 Not undertaking to command them, or 
 to prescribe how much they should give. 
 Advice will go much farther than com- 
 mands on the subject of charities. ■" For 
 this is expedient for you (c-y^p^a). 
 That is, this will be of advantage to 
 you ; it will be profitable ; it will be 
 becoming. The idea is, that they were 
 bound by a regard to consistency and 
 to their own welfare, to perform what 
 they had purposed. It became them ; 
 it was proper, and was demanded ; and 
 there would have been manifest dis- 
 advantages if it had not been done. 
 U Who have begun before. Who com- 
 menced the collection a year before. 
 See ver. 6. It had been commenced 
 with fair prospects of success, but had 
 been interrupted probably by the dis- 
 sensions which arose in the church 
 there. 1 Not only to do. Not merely 
 to accomplish it as if by constraint, or 
 as a matter of compulsion and drudgery. 
 % But also to be forward. Marg. " Will- 
 ing." So the Greek (to 3-«a«V). They 
 were voluntary in this, and they set 
 about it with vigorous and determined 
 zeal and courage. There was a resolute 
 determination in the thing, and a will- 
 ingness and heartiness in it which 
 showed that they were actuated by 
 Christian principle. Consistency, and 
 their own reputation and advantage, 
 now demanded that they should com 
 plete what they had begun. 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 183 
 
 11 Now therefore perform a 
 the doing of it; that as there 
 was a readiness to will, so there 
 rnay be a performance also out 
 of that which ye have. 
 
 a 1 Ti. 6. 19. He. 13. 16. Ja. 2. 15, 16. 
 
 11. As there was a readiness to will. 
 Now accomplish the thing, and be not 
 satisfied with having begun it. Do not 
 suppose that the intention was sufficient, 
 or that you are now released from the 
 obligation. A year indeed has elapsed ; 
 but the necessity of the aid for the poor 
 has not ceased. The sentiment here is, 
 that if we have felt it our duty to aid 
 in a cause of benevolence, and have 
 commenced it, and have then been in- 
 terrupted in executing our purpose, we 
 should seize the first favourable oppor- 
 tunity to accomplish what we had de- 
 signed. We should not regard our- 
 selves as released from our obligation, 
 but should, from a regard to consistency 
 and our obligation to God, accomplish 
 what we had intended. % Out of that 
 which ye have. According to your 
 ability. See ver. 12. It should be in 
 proportion to your means. 
 
 II 2. For if there be first a willing 
 mind. If there is a readiness (^cSv/mia.), 
 a disposition to give ; if the heart is in 
 it, then the offering will be acceptable 
 to God, whether you be able to give much 
 or little. A willing mind is the first 
 consideration. No donation however 
 large can be acceptable where that does 
 not exist ; none however small can be 
 otherwise than acceptable where that is 
 found. This had relation as used by 
 Paul to the duty of almsgiving ; but the 
 principle is as applicable to every thing 
 in the way of duty. A willing mind is 
 the first and main thing. It is that 
 which God chiefly desires, and that 
 without which every thing else will be 
 offensive, hypocritical, and vain. See 
 Note, ch. ix. 7. f It is accepted. Dod- 
 dridge, Rosenmiiller, Macknight, and 
 some others apply this to the person, 
 and render it, " he is accepted ;" but the 
 more usual, and tb,e more natural in- 
 terpretation is to apply it to the gift — it 
 
 12 For if h there be first a 
 willing mind, it is accepted ac- 
 cording to that a man hath, and 
 not according to that he hath 
 not. 
 
 b Lu. 21. 3. 
 
 is accepted. God will approve of it, 
 and will receive it favourably, ^ Ac- 
 cording to that a man hath, &c. He 
 is not required to give what he has not. 
 His obligation is proportioned to his 
 ability. His offering is acceptable to 
 God according to the largeness and 
 willingness of his heart, and not accord- 
 ing to the narrowness of his fortune. — 
 Locke. If the means are small, if the 
 individual is poor, and if the gift shall 
 be, therefore, small in amount, yet it may 
 be proof of a larger heart and of more 
 true love to God and his cause than when 
 a much more ample benefaction is made 
 by one in better circumstances. This 
 sentiment the Saviour expressly stated 
 and defended in the case of the poor 
 widow. Mark xii. 42 — 44. Luke xxi. 
 1 — 4. She who had cast in her two 
 mites into the treasury had put in 
 more than all which the rich men had 
 contributed, for they had given of their 
 abundance, but she had cast in all that 
 she had, even all her living. The great 
 and obviously just and equal principle 
 here stated, was originally applied by 
 Paul to the duty of giving alms. But 
 it is equally true and just as applied to 
 all the duties which we owe to God. 
 He demands, (1.) A willing mind, a 
 heart disposed to yield obedience. He 
 claims that our service should be volun- 
 tary and sincere, and that we should 
 make an unreserved consecration of what 
 we have. Secondly, he demands only 
 what we have power to render. He re- 
 quires a service strictly according to 
 our ability, and to be measured by that. 
 He demands no more than our powers 
 are fitted to produce ; no more than we 
 are able to render. Our obligations in 
 all cases are limited by our ability. 
 This is obviously the rule of equity, 
 and this is all that is anywhere de- 
 manded in the Bible, and this is every- 
 
184 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 13 For I mean not that other 
 men be eased, and ye burdened: 
 
 where demanded. Thus our love to 
 him is to be in proportion to our ability, 
 and not to be graduated by the ability 
 of angels or other beings. " And thou 
 shalt love the Lord thy God with ail 
 THY heart, and with all thy soul, 
 and with all thy mind, and with all 
 thy strength." Mark xii. 30. Here 
 the obligation is limited by the ability, 
 and the love is to be commensurate with 
 the ability. So of repentance, faith, and 
 of obedience in any form. None but 
 a tyrant ever demands more than can 
 be rendered ; and to demand more is 
 the appropriate description of a tyrant, 
 and cannot appertain to the ever blessed 
 God. Thirdly, if there is any service 
 rendered to God, according to the ability, 
 it is accepted of him. It may not be as 
 much or as valuable as may be rendered 
 by beings of higher powers ; it may not 
 be as much as we would desire to ren- 
 der, but it is all that God demands, 
 and is acceptable to him. The poor 
 widow was not able to give as much 
 as the rich man ; but her offering was 
 equally acceptable, and might be more 
 valuable, for it would be accompanied 
 with her prayers. The service which 
 we can render to God may not be 
 equal to that which the angels render ; 
 but it may be equally appropriate to our 
 condition and our powers, and may be 
 equally acceptable to God. God may be 
 as well pleased with the sighings of peni- 
 tence as the praises of angels ; with the 
 offerings of a broken and a contrite 
 heart as with the loud hallelujahs of un- 
 fallen beings in heaven. 
 
 13. For I mean not that other men 
 be eased, &c. I do not intend that others 
 should be eased in order to relieve you. 
 Literally, 'Not that there should be 
 rest (avsT/c, a letting loose, remission, 
 relaxation) to others, but affliction 
 (d-Kt^i;) to you.' Probably the Corinth- 
 ians were able to contribute more than 
 many other churches, certainly more 
 than the churches of Macedonia (ver. 
 2), and Paul therefore presses upon 
 
 14 But by an equality, that 
 now at this time your abundance 
 
 them the duty of giving according to 
 their means, yet he by no means in- 
 tended that the entire burden should 
 come on them. 
 
 14. But by an equality. On just 
 and equal principles. ^ That now at 
 this time, &c. That at the present time 
 your abundance may be a supply for 
 their wants, so that at some future time, 
 if there should be occasion for it, their 
 abundance may be a supply for your 
 wants. The idea is this. Corinth was 
 then able to give liberally, but many of 
 the other churches were not. They 
 were poor, and perhaps persecuted and 
 in affliction. But there might be great 
 reverses in their condition. Corinth 
 might be reduced from its affluence, and 
 might itself become dependent on the 
 aid of others, or might be unable to 
 contribute any considerable amount for 
 the purposes of charity. The members 
 of the church in Corinth, therefore, 
 should so act in their circumstances of 
 prosperity, that others would be disposed 
 to aid them should their condition ever 
 be such as to demand it. And the 
 doctrine here taught is, (1.) That the 
 support of the objects of benevolence 
 should be on equal principles. The rich 
 should bear an equal .and fair propor- 
 tion, and if more frequent demands are 
 made on their benefaction than on others 
 they should not complain. (2.) Chris- 
 tians should contribute liberally while 
 they have the means. *In the vicissitudes 
 of life no one can tell how soon he 
 may be unable to contribute, or may even 
 be dependent on the charity of others 
 himself. A change in the commercial 
 world ; losses by fire or at sea ; want 
 of success in business ; loss of health, 
 and the failure of his plans, may soon 
 render him unable to aid the cause of 
 benevolence. While he is prospered he 
 should embrace every opportunity to 
 do good to all. Some of the most 
 painful regrets which men ever have, 
 arise from the reflection that when 
 prospered they were indisposed to give 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 185 
 
 may be a supply for their want, 
 that their abundance also may be 
 a supply for your want, that 
 there may be equality : 
 
 to benefit others, and when their proper- 
 ty is swept away they become unable. 
 God often sweeps away the property 
 which they were indisposed to contribute 
 to aid others, and leaves them to penury 
 and want. Too late they regret that 
 they were not the liberal patrons of the 
 objects of benevolence when they were 
 able to be. ^ That there may be equali- 
 ty. That all may be just and equal. 
 That no unjust burden should be borne 
 by any one portion of the great family 
 of the redeemed. Every Christian 
 brother should bear his due proportion. 
 15. As it is written. See Ex. xvi. 
 18. 1 He that had gathered much, 
 &c. This passage was originally ap- 
 plied to the gathering of manna by the 
 children of Israel. The manna which 
 fell around the camp of Israel was ga- 
 thered every morning. All that were 
 able were employed in gathering it; 
 and when it was collected it was dis- 
 tributed in the proportion of an omer, or 
 about five pints to each man. Some 
 would be more active and more success- 
 ful than others. Some by age or in- 
 firmity would collect little; probably 
 many by being confined to the camp 
 would collect none. They who had 
 gathered more than an omer, therefore, 
 would in this way contribute to the 
 wants of others, and would be constantly 
 manifesting a spirit of benevolence. 
 And such was their willingness to do 
 good in this way, such their readiness 
 to collect more than they knew would 
 be demanded for their own use, and 
 such the arrangement of Providence in 
 furnishing it, that there was no want ; 
 and there was no more gathered than 
 was needful to supply the demands of 
 the whole. Paul applies this passage, 
 therefore, in the very spirit in which it 
 was originally penned. He means to 
 say that the rich Christians at Corinth 
 should impart 
 
 15 As it is written, a He that 
 had gathered much had nothing 
 over ; and he that had gathered 
 little had no lack. 
 
 a Ex. 16. 18. 
 
 brethren. They had gathered more 
 wealth than was immediately necessary 
 for their families or themselves. They 
 should, therefore, impart freely to those 
 who had been less successful. Wealth, 
 like manna, is the gift of God. It is 
 like that spread by his hand around us 
 every day. Some are able to gather 
 much more than others. By their skill, 
 their health, their diligence, or by provi- 
 dential arrangements, they are eminently 
 successful. Others are feeble, or sick, 
 or aged, or destitute of skill, and are 
 less successful. All that is obtained is 
 by the arrangement of God. The health, 
 the strength, the skill, the wisdom by 
 which we are enabled to obtain it, are 
 all his gift. That which is thus ho- 
 estly obtained, therefore, should be re- 
 garded as his bounty, and we should 
 esteem it a privilege daily to impart to 
 others less favoured and less successful. 
 Thus society will be bound more close- 
 ly together. There will be, as there 
 was among the Israelites, the feelings 
 of universal brotherhood. There will 
 be on the one hand the happiness flow- 
 ing from the constant exercise of the 
 benevolent feelings ; on the other the 
 strong ties of gratitude. On the one hand 
 the evils of poverty will be prevented, 
 and on the other the not less, though dif- 
 ferent evils resulting from superabundant 
 wealth. Is it a forced and unnatural 
 analogy also to observe, that wealth, 
 like manna, corrupts by being kept in 
 store? Manna if kept more than a 
 single day became foul and loathsome. 
 Does not wealth hoarded up when it 
 might be properly employed ; wealth that 
 should have been distributed to relieve 
 the wants of others, become corrupting 
 in its nature, and offensive in the sight 
 of holy and benevolent minds 1 Comp. 
 James v. 2 — 4. Wealth, like manna, 
 
 should be employed in the service which 
 freely to their poorer I God designs — employed to diffuse every- 
 16* 
 
186 
 
 16 But thanks be to God, 
 which put the same earnest care 
 into the heart of Titus for you. 
 
 17 For indeed he accepted 
 the exhortation ; a but being more 
 
 where the blessings of religion, comfort, 
 and peace. 
 
 1 6. But thanks be to God. Paul re- 
 garded every right feeling, and every 
 pure desire; every inclination to serve 
 God or to benefit a fellow mortal, as the 
 gift of God. He, therefore, ascribes the 
 praise to him that Titus was disposed to 
 show an interest in the welfare of the 
 Corinthians. ^ The same earnest care. 
 The earnest care here referred to was 
 that the Corinthians might complete the 
 collection, and finish what they had 
 proposed. Titus was willing to under- 
 take this, and see that it was done. 
 Tf For you. For your completing the 
 collection. Paul represents it as being 
 done for them, or for their welfare. The 
 poor saints in Judea indeed were to have 
 the immediate benefit of the contribu- 
 tion, but it was a privilege for them to 
 give, and Paul rejoiced that they had 
 that privilege. A man who presents to 
 Christians a feasible object of benevo- 
 lence, and who furnishes them an op- 
 portunity of doing good to others, is 
 doing good to them, and they should 
 esteem it an act of kindness done to 
 them. 
 
 17. For indeed lie accepted the ex- 
 hortation. He cheerfully complied with 
 the exhortation which I gave him, to 
 wit, to visit you, and excite you to this 
 good work. *f But being more forward. 
 More disposed to do this than I had 
 »upposed. The idea here is, that he 
 was very ready to engage in this ; he 
 vas more ready to engage in it than 
 (*aul was to exhort him to it ; he an- 
 icipated his request; he had already 
 esoived to engage in it. ^ Of his own 
 xcord he went, &c. He went volunta- 
 rily, and without urging. The ground 
 of Paul's thankfulness here seems to 
 have been this, lie apprehended pro- 
 bably some difhcUity in obtaining the 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. [A. D. 60* 
 
 forward, of his own accord he 
 
 went unto you. 
 
 18 And we have sent with 
 him the brother, b whose praise 
 
 b c. 12. 18. 
 
 collection there. He was acquainted 
 with the distracted state of the church, 
 and feared that Titus might have some 
 reluctance to engage in the service. He 
 was therefore very agreeably surprised 
 when he learned that Titus was willing 
 to make another journey to Corinth and 
 to endeavour to complete the collection. 
 18. And we have sent with him the 
 brother. It has been generally supposed 
 that this anonymous brother was Luke. 
 Some have supposed however that it 
 was Mark, others that it was Silas or 
 Barnabas. It is impossible to determine 
 with certainty who it was ; nor is it 
 material to know. Whoever it was, it 
 was some one well known, in whom 
 the church at Corinth could have entire 
 confidence. It is remarkable that though 
 Paul mentions him again (ch. xii. 18), 
 he does it also in the same manner, 
 without specifying his name. The only 
 circumstances that can throw any light 
 on this are, (1.) That Luke was the 
 companion and intimate friend of Paul, 
 and attended him in his travels. From 
 Acts xvi. 10, 11, where Luke uses 
 the term "we" it appears that he 
 was with Paul when he first went into 
 Macedonia, and from ver. 15 it is clear 
 that he went with Paul to Philippi. 
 From Acts xvii. 1, where Luke alters 
 his style and uses the term " they," it is 
 ! evident that he did not accompany 
 ' Paul and Silas when they went to 
 j Thessalonica, but either remained at 
 J Philippi or departed to some other place 
 He did not join them again until they 
 | went to Troas on the way to Jerusalem. 
 I Acts xx. 5. In what manner Luke 
 ! spent the interval is not known. Mac- 
 ' knight supposes that it might have been 
 in multiplying copies of his gospel for 
 the use of the churches. Perhaps also 
 he might have been engaged in preach- 
 ing, and in services like that in the case 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 187 
 
 is in the gospel throughout all 
 the churches ; 
 
 19 And not that only, but 
 who was also chosen a of the 
 churches to travel with us with 
 this * grace, which is adminis- 
 
 a 1 Co. 16. 3, 4. x or, gift. 
 
 before us. (2.) It seems probable that 
 Luke is the person referred to by the 
 phrase " whose praise is in the gospel 
 throughout all the churches." This 
 would be more likely to be applied to 
 one who had written a gospel, or a life 
 of the Redeemer that had been exten- 
 sively circulated, than to any other per- 
 son. Still it is by no means certain 
 that he is the person here referred to, 
 nor is it of material consequence. 
 Tf Whose praise. Who is well known 
 and highly esteemed. ^ Is in the gospel. 
 Either for writing the gospel, or for 
 preaching the gospel. The Greek will 
 bear either construction. In some way 
 he was celebrated for making known 
 the truths of the gospel. 
 
 1 9. And not that only. Not only is 
 he esteemed on account of other ser- 
 vices which he has rendered by his 
 preaching and writings ; but he has 
 had a new mark of the confidence of 
 the churches in being appointed to 
 convey the collection to Jerusalem. 
 H Chosen of the churches. Chosen by 
 the churches. Many concurred in the 
 choice, showing that they had entire 
 confidence in him. Paul had been un- 
 willing to have charge of this contribu- 
 tion alone (1 Cor. xvi. 3, 4. comp. ver. 
 20), and he had procured the appoint- 
 ment of some one to undertake it. 
 Probably he expected that the church 
 at Corinth would concur in this appoint- 
 ment. ^ With this grace. Marg. 
 "Gift." See ver. 1. The word here 
 refers to the alms, or the collection 
 which had been made. Tf Which is ad- 
 ministered by us. That is, which is 
 undertaken by us. Paul had been the 
 instrument of procuring it. f To the 
 glory of the same Lord. The Lord of 
 
 tered by us to h the glory of the 
 same Lord, and declaration of 
 your ready mind : 
 
 20 Avoiding this, that no man 
 should blame us in this abun- 
 dance which is administered by 
 us: 
 
 b c. 4. 15. 
 
 us all. The design was to promote the 
 glory of the Lord by showing the influ- 
 ence of religion in producing true be- 
 nevolence. If And declaration of your 
 ready mind. That is, to afford you an 
 opportunity of evincing your readiness 
 to do good to others, and to promote 
 their welfare. 
 
 20. Avoiding this. That is, I intend 
 to prevent any blame from being cast 
 upon me in regard to the management 
 of these funds. For this purpose Paul 
 had refused to have the entire manage- 
 ment of the funds (see 1 Cor. xvi. 3, 4), 
 and had secured the appointment of one 
 who had the entire confidence of all 
 the churches. % That no man should 
 blame us. That no one should have 
 any occasion to say that I had appro- 
 priated it to my own use or contrary to 
 the will of the donors. Paul felt how 
 dangerous it was for ministers to have 
 much to do with money matters. He 
 had a very deep impression of the ne- 
 cessity of keeping his own character 
 free from suspicion on this subject. He 
 knew how easy it might be for his ene- 
 mies to raise the charge that he had em- 
 bezzled the funds and appropriated them 
 to his own use. He therefore insisted 
 on having associated with him some one 
 who had the entire confidence of the 
 churches, and who should be appointed 
 by them, and thus he was certain of be- 
 ing forever free from blame on the sub- 
 ject. A most important example for 
 all ministers in regard to the pecuniary 
 benefactions of the churches, ^ In this 
 abundance, &c. In this large amount 
 which is contributed by the churches 
 and committed to our disposal. Large 
 sums of money are in our time com- 
 mitted to the ministers of the gospel in 
 
188 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 21 Providing for honest a 
 »hings, not only in the sight 
 
 a Rd. 12. 17. Ph. 4. 8. 1 Pe. 2. 12. 
 
 the execution of the objects of Chris- 
 tian benevolence. Nothing can be more 
 wise than the example of Paul here, 
 that they should have associated with 
 them others who have the entire con- 
 fidence of the churches, that there may 
 not be occasion for slander to move her 
 poisonous tongue against the ministers 
 of religion. 
 
 21. Providing for honest things. 
 The expression here used occurs in 
 Rom. xii. 1 7. See the Note on that 
 place. In that place, however, it refers 
 to the manner in which we are to treat 
 those who injure us ; here it refers to 
 the right way of using property ; and it 
 seems to have been a kind of maxim by 
 which Paul regulated his life, a vade 
 mecum that was applicable to every 
 thing. The sentiment is, that we are 
 to see to it beforehand that all our con- 
 duct shall be comely or honest The 
 word rendered " providing for" (tt^voov- 
 fA&ru) means foreseeing, or perceiving 
 beforehand ; and the idea is, that we are 
 to make it a matter of previous calcula- 
 tion, a settled plan, a thing that is to be 
 attended to of set design. In the middle 
 voice, the form in which it occurs here, 
 it means to provide for in one's own be- 
 half; to apply oneself to any thing; 
 to practise diligently. — Robinson. The 
 word rendered " things honest" (jtaxa) 
 means properly beautiful, or comely. The 
 idea which is presented here is, that we are 
 to see beforehand, or we are to make it 
 a matter of set purpose that what we 
 do shall be comely, i. e. just, honoura- 
 ble, correct, not only in the sight of the 
 Lord, but in the sight of men. Paul 
 applies this in his own case to the alms 
 which were to be intrusted to him. 
 His idea is, that he meant so to con- 
 duct in the whole transaction as that 
 his conduct should be approved by God, 
 but that it should also be regarded as 
 beautiful or correct in the sight of men. 
 He knew how much his own useful- 
 ness depended on an irreproachable 
 
 of the Lord, but also in the sighJ 
 of men. 
 
 22 And we have sent with 
 
 character. He, therefore, procured the 
 appointment of one who had the entire 
 confidence of the churches to travel 
 with him. But there is no reason for 
 confining this to the particular case 
 under consideration. It seems to have 
 been the leading maxim of the life of 
 Paul, and it should be of ours. The 
 maxim may be applied to every thing 
 which we have to do ; and should con- 
 stantly regulate us. It may be applied 
 to the acquisition and use of property ; 
 to the discharge of our professional 
 duties ; to our intercourse with others ; 
 to our treatment of inferiors and de- 
 pendents ; to our charities, &c. — in all 
 of which we should make it a matter of 
 previous thought, of earnest diligence, 
 that our conduct should be perfectly 
 honest and comely before God and man. 
 Let us learn from this verse also, that 
 ministers of the gospel should be espe- 
 cially careful that their conduct in 
 money matters, and especially in the 
 appropriation of the charities of the 
 church, should be above suspicion. 
 Much is often intrusted to their care, 
 and the churches and individual Chris- 
 tians often commit much to their dis- 
 cretion. Their conduct in this should 
 be without reproach ; and in order to 
 this, it is well to follow the example of 
 Paul, and to insist that others who have 
 the entire confidence of the churches 
 should be associated with them. No- 
 thing is easier than to raise a slanderous 
 report against a minister of the gospel ; 
 and nothing gratifies a wicked world 
 more than to be able to do it — and per- 
 haps especially if it pertains to some 
 improper use of money. It is not easy 
 to meet such reports when they are 
 started ; and a minister, therefore, should 
 be guarded, as Paul was, at every possi- 
 ble point, that he may be freed from 
 that " whose breath outvenoms all the 
 worms of Nile" — slander. 
 
 22. And we have sent with them 
 our brother. Who this was is wholly 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 189 
 
 them our brother, whom we have 
 oftentimes proved diligent in 
 many things, but now much 
 more diligent, upon the great con- 
 fidence which * / have in you. 
 23 Whether any do inquire 
 
 *■ or, he hath. 
 
 unknown, and conjecture is useless. 
 Some have supposed that it was Apollos, 
 others Silas, others Timothy. But there 
 are no means of ascertaining who it 
 was ; nor is it material. It was some 
 one in whom Paul had entire confidence. 
 If Whom we have oftentimes proved 
 diligent. Of whom we have evidence 
 that he has been faithful. It is evident, 
 therefore, that he had been the com- 
 panion and fellow-labourer of Paul. 
 % But now much more diligent, &c. 
 Who will now prove himself much 
 more diligent than ever before, f Upon 
 the confidence, &c. Marg. " he hath." 
 The margin is doubtless the more cor- 
 rect reading here. The idea is, that 
 this brother had great confidence in the 
 Corinthians that they would give libe- 
 rally, and that he would, therefore, 
 evince special diligence in the business. 
 23. Whether any do inquire of Titus. 
 It is to be observed that the words " any 
 do inquire" are not in the original ; nor 
 is it clear that these are the most proper 
 words to be introduced here. The Greek 
 may mean either, "if any do inquire 
 about Titus," or it may mean • if any 
 thing is to be said about Titus.' The 
 sense of the passage may either be, that 
 some of the faction at Corinth might be 
 disposed to inquire about the authority 
 of Titus to engage in this work, or that 
 Paul having said so much in commenda- 
 tion of the persons who went with 
 Titus, it seemed proper also to say 
 something in his favour also. The idea 
 is, ' If any inquiry is made from any 
 quarter about him, or if it is necessary 
 from any cause to say any thing about 
 him, I would say he is my partner,' &c. 
 Tf He is my partner, &c. He partakes 
 with me in preaching the gospel, and 
 in establishing and organizing churches. 
 
 of Titus, he is my partner and 
 fellow-helper concerning you : 
 or our brethren be inquired of, 
 they are the messengers a of the 
 churches, and the glory of 
 Christ. 
 
 a Ph. 2. 25. 
 
 Comp. Tit. i. 5. To the Corinthians 
 this fact would be a sufficient com- 
 mendation of Titus. *! Or oar brethren 
 be inquired of. That is, the brethren 
 who accompanied Titus. If any inquiry 
 was made about their character, or if it 
 was necessary to say any thing in regard 
 to them. If They are the messengers 
 of the churches. They have the entire 
 confidence of the churches, having been 
 selected and appointed by them to a work 
 of labour and responsibility. Comp. 
 Phil. ii. 25. The words here rendered 
 ' messengers of the churches,' are in 
 the original 'apostles of the churches,' 
 (-mo-roM ix.x.\na-iZv). The word apostles 
 here is used evidently in its proper 
 sense, to denote one who is sent out to 
 transact any business for others, or as 
 an agent or legate. These persons 
 were not apostles in the technical sense, 
 and this is an instance where the word 
 is applied in the New Testament to 
 those who had no claim to the apostolic 
 office. It is also applied in a similar 
 way to Apollos and Barnabas, though 
 neither, strictly speaking, were apostles. 
 If And the glory of Christ. That is, 
 they have a character so well known 
 and established for piety ; they are so 
 eminent Christians and do such honour 
 to the Christian name and calling, that 
 they may be called the glory of Christ. 
 It is an honour to Christ that he has 
 called such persons into his church, and 
 that he has so richly endowed them. 
 Every Christian should so live as that 
 it would appear to all the world that it 
 was an honour and glory to the Re- 
 deemer that he had such followers ; an 
 honour to his gospel that it had con- 
 verted such and brought them into his 
 kingdom. It is sufficient honour, more- 
 over, to any man to say that he is " the 
 
190 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 24 Wherefore shew ye to 
 them, and before the churches, 
 
 glory of Christ." Such a character 
 should be, and will be, as it was here, 
 a recommendation sufficient for any to 
 secure them the confidence of others. 
 
 24. Wherefore show ye to them, &c. 
 By a liberal contribution in the cause in 
 which they are engaged and for which 
 they have come among you now, furnish 
 the evidence that you love me and the 
 Christian cause, and show that I have 
 not boasted of you in vain. ^ The 
 proof of your love. Your love to me, 
 to God, to the cause of religion. See 
 Note on ver. 8. 1 And of our boast- 
 ing, &c. My boasting that you would 
 give liberally to the object. See Note, 
 ch. vii. 14. Let it now be seen that 
 my boasting was well founded, and that 
 I properly understood your character, 
 and your readiness to contribute to the 
 objects of Christian benevolence. 
 
 REMARKS. 
 
 1. Let us bear in mind that a dispo- 
 sition to be liberal proceeds only from 
 God. ver. 1. The human heart is by 
 nature selfish, and indisposed to be- 
 nevolence. It is only by the grace of 
 God that men are excited to liberality ; 
 and we should therefore pray for this 
 as well as for all other graces. We 
 should beseech God to remove selfish- 
 ness from our minds ; to dispose us to 
 feel as we should feel for the wants of 
 others, and to incline us to give just 
 what we ought to give to relieve them 
 in trouble, and to promote their tempo- 
 ral and eternal welfare. 
 
 2. It is an inestimable blessing when 
 God gives a spirit of liberality to the 
 church, ver. 1. It should be regarded 
 as a proof of his special favour ; and 
 as an evidence of the prevalence of the 
 principles of true religion. 
 
 3. Men are often most liberal when 
 in circumstances of distress, perplexity, 
 and affliction, ver. 2. Prosperity often 
 freezes the heart, but adversity opens it. 
 Success in life often closes the hand of 
 
 the proof of your love, and of 
 our boasting a on your benaii. 
 a c. 7. 14. 
 
 benevolence, but adversity opens it. We 
 are taught to feel for the sufferings of 
 others by suffering ourselves ; and in 
 the school of adversity we learn invalu- 
 able lessons of benevolence which we 
 should never acquire in prosperity. If 
 you want the tear of sympathy ; if you 
 want aid in a good cause, go to a man 
 in affliction, and his heart is open. And 
 hence it is that God often suffers his 
 people to pass through trials in order 
 that they may possess the spirit of large 
 and active benevolence. 
 
 4. If Christians desire to be liberal 
 they must first devote themselves to 
 God. ver. 5. If this is not done they 
 will have no heart to give, and they 
 will not give. They will have a thou- 
 sand excuses ready, and there will be 
 no ground of appeal which we can make 
 to them. True liberality is always based 
 on the fact that we have given ourselves 
 wholly to God. 
 
 5. When Christians have honestly 
 devoted themselves to God, it will be 
 easy to contribute liberally to the cause 
 of benevolence, ver. 5. They will find 
 something to give; or if they have 
 nothing now they will labour and deny 
 themselves in order that they may have 
 something to give. If every professed 
 Christian on earth had honestly given 
 himself to God, and should act in 
 accordance with this, the channels of 
 benevolence would never be dry. 
 
 6. We should compare ourselves in 
 the matter of benevolence with the 
 churches here referred to. ver. 3. They 
 were poor ; they were in deep affliction, 
 and yet they contributed all in their 
 power, and beyond their power. Do 
 we do this 1 Do we give according to 
 our ability 1 Do we deny ourselves of 
 one comfort 1 withhold one gratifica 
 tion ? curtail one expense which fashion 
 demands, in order that we may have 
 the means of doing good 1 O ! if every 
 Christian would give according to his 
 ability to the sacred cause of charity, 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 191 
 
 how soon would the means be ample to 
 place the Bible in every family on the 
 globe, to preach the gospel in every 
 country, and to maintain all the institu- 
 tions which the cause of humanity needs 
 in this and in other lands. 
 
 7. The Christian character is incom- 
 plete unless there is a spirit of large and 
 liberal beneficence, ver. 7. This is in- 
 dispensable to the proper symmetry of 
 the Christian graces, and this should be 
 cultivated in order to give beauty and 
 completeness to the whole. Yet it can- 
 not be denied that there are true Chris- 
 tians where this is wanting. There are 
 those who give every other evidence of 
 piety ; who are men of prayer, and who 
 evince humility, and who are submissive 
 in trials, and whose conversation is that 
 of Christians, who are yet sadly deficient 
 in this virtue. Either by an original 
 closeness of disposition, or by a defect 
 of education, or by want of information 
 in regard to the objects of Christian 
 benevolence, they are most stinted in 
 their benefactions, and often excite the 
 amazement of others that they give so 
 little to the cause of benevolence. Such 
 persons should be entreated to carry out 
 their Christian character to completion. 
 As they abound in other things, they 
 should abound in this grace also. They 
 are depriving themselves of much com- 
 fort, and are bringing much injury on 
 the cause of the Redeemer while they 
 refuse to sustain the great objects of 
 Christian charity. No Christian cha- 
 racter is symmetrical or complete unless 
 it is crowned with the spirit of large 
 and comprehensive benevolence towards 
 every object that tends to promote the 
 temporal and eternal welfare of man. 
 
 8. The sincerity of our love should 
 be tested, and will be, by our readiness 
 to deny ourselves, to do good to others, 
 ver. 8. The love of the Lord Jesus 
 was tested in that way ; and there can 
 be no true love to God or man where 
 there is not a readiness to contribute of 
 our means for the welfare of others. 
 If we love the Redeemer we shall 
 devote all to his service ; if we love 
 our fellow-men we shall evince our 
 "sincerity" by being willing to part 
 
 with our earthly substance to alleviate 
 their woes, enlighten their ignorance, 
 and save their souls. 
 
 9. Let us imitate the example of the 
 Lord Jesus, ver. 9. He was rich, yet 
 he became poor; and, O ! how poor! 
 Let the rich learn to copy his example, 
 and be willing to part with their 
 abundant and superfluous wealth in 
 order that they may relieve and benefit 
 others. That man is most happy as 
 well as most useful, who most resembles 
 the Redeemer ; that man will be most 
 happy who stoops from the highest 
 earthly elevation to the lowest condition 
 that he may minister to the welfare of 
 others. 
 
 10. Charity should be voluntary, ver. 
 12. It should be the free and sponta- 
 neous offering of the heart ; and the 
 first promptings of the heart, before the 
 pleadings of avarice come in, and the 
 heart grows cold by the influence of 
 returning covetousness, are likely to be 
 the most correct. 
 
 11. Charity should be in an honest pro- 
 portion to our means, ver. 12. It should 
 be according to what a man hath. God 
 has left the determination of this pro- 
 portion to every individual, responsible 
 to him alone. He has not told us how 
 much we shall give, or in what propor- 
 tion we shall give ; but he has left it 
 for every individual to decide what he 
 may give, and what he ought to give. 
 
 12. If men do not give according to 
 their means they must answer for it to 
 God. Every man may have opportunity 
 to contribute to relieve others if he will 
 open his heart and ears to the cries of a 
 suffering and a dying world. No man 
 can complain that he has no opportunity 
 to give ; • or that he may not procure for 
 his own soul all the blessings which 
 can be produced by the most large and 
 liberal benevolence. 
 
 13. Men have no excuse for being 
 lost. ver. 12. If God required more 
 of them than they could render they 
 would have. They would not be to 
 blame. They might be sufferers and 
 martyrs in hell, but no one would blame 
 them. But the sinner can never have 
 any such excuse. God never required 
 
192 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 any more of him than he had power to 
 render ; and if he dies it will be his 
 own fault, and the throne of God will 
 still be spotless and pure. 
 
 14. God's government is an equal, 
 and just, and good government, ver. 12. 
 What can be more equitable than the 
 principle that a man is accepted accord- 
 ing to what he has 1 What ground of 
 complaint can the sinner have in regard 
 to this administration ? 
 
 15. The churches should bear then- 
 just proportion in the cause of Christian 
 beneficence, ver. 13 — 15. There are 
 great interests of charity which must 
 be sustained. The world cannot do 
 without them. Not only must the poor 
 be provided for, but the cause of tem- 
 perance, and of Sabbath-schools, and of 
 missions must be sustained. Bibles 
 must be distributed, and men must be 
 educated for the ministry, and the widow 
 and the fatherless must be the objects 
 of Christian benevolence. These bur- 
 dens, if they are burdens, should be 
 equally distributed. The rich should 
 furnish their fair proportion in sus- 
 taining them ; and those in more mode- 
 rate circumstances must do their fair 
 proportion also in sustaining them. If 
 this were done, all the objects of Chris- 
 tian benevolence could be sustained, and 
 they would in fact not be burdensome 
 to the churches. With infinite ease all 
 might be contributed that is necessary 
 to send the gospel around the world. 
 
 16. Ministers of the gospel should 
 have as little as possible to do with 
 money matters, ver. 19 — 21. While 
 they should be willing, if it is necessary, 
 to be the almoners of the churches, and 
 should esteem it a privilege to be the 
 means of conveying to the. poor and 
 needy, and to the great cause of benevo- 
 lence, what the churches may choose to 
 commit to them, yet they should not 
 covet this office ; they should not show 
 any particular desire for it ; nor should 
 they do it unless, like Paul, they have 
 the most ample security that the voice 
 of slander can never be raised in regard 
 to their management. Let them see to 
 it that they have persons associated 
 with them who have the entire confi- 
 
 dence of the churches ; men who will 
 be responsible also, and who will be 
 competent witnesses of the manner in 
 which they discharge their duty. In 
 all things ministers should be pure. 
 On few points is there more danger 
 that the enemy will endeavour to take 
 advantage, and to injure their character, 
 than in regard to their abuse of funds 
 intrusted to their care. 
 
 17. Let all Christians so live that 
 it may be honestly said of them they 
 are " the glory of Christ." ver. 23. 
 Let them aim so to live that it will be 
 esteemed to be an honour to the Re- 
 deemer that he called them into his 
 kingdom, and that he so richly endowed 
 them by his grace. This would be a 
 commendation to all men where they 
 might go ; to say this is enough to say 
 of any man. None can have a higher 
 character than to have it said with truth 
 of him ' he is the glory of Christ ; he 
 is an honour to his Redeemer and to 
 his cause.' 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 Is this chapter the apostle continues 
 the subject which he had discussed in 
 ch. viii. — the collection which he had 
 purposed to make for the poor saints in 
 Judea. The deep anxiety which he 
 had that the collection should be liberal ; 
 that it should not only be such as 
 to be really an aid to those who were 
 suffering, but be such as would be 
 an expression of tender attachment to 
 them on the part of the Gentile con- 
 verts, was the reason, doubtless, why 
 Paul urged this so much on their atten- 
 tion. His primary wish undoubtedly 
 was, to furnish aid to those who were 
 suffering. But in connexion with that, 
 he also wished to excite a deep interest 
 among the Gentile converts in behalf 
 of those who had been converted to 
 Christianity among the Jews. He 
 wished that the collection should be so 
 liberal as to show that they felt that 
 they were united as brethren, and that 
 they were grateful that they had re- 
 ceived the true religion from the Jews. 
 And he doubtless wished to cement as 
 much as possible the great body of the 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 193 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 T^OR as touching the minister- 
 •*- ing • to the saints, it is su- 
 
 Christian brotherhood, and to impress 
 on their minds the great truths that 
 whatever was their national origin, and 
 whatever were their national distinctions, 
 yet in Christ they were one. For this 
 purpose he presses on their attention a 
 great variety of considerations why they 
 should give liberally, and this chapter is 
 chiefly occupied in stating reasons for 
 that in addition to those which had 
 been urged in the previous chapter. 
 The following view will present the 
 main points in the chapter. 
 
 (1.) He was aware of their readi- 
 ness to give, and knowing this, he had 
 boasted of it to others, and others had 
 been excited to give liberally from what 
 the apostle had said of them. ver. 1, 2. 
 The argument here is, that Paul's ve- 
 racity and their own character were at 
 stake and depended on their now giving 
 liberally*. 
 
 (2.) He had sent the brethren to 
 them in order that there might by no 
 possibility be a failure, ver. 3 — 5. 
 Though he had the utmost confidence 
 in them, and fully believed that they 
 were disposed to give liberally, yet he 
 knew also that something might prevent 
 it unless messengers went to secure the 
 contributions, and that the consequence 
 might be, that he and they would be 
 " ashamed" that he had boasted so much 
 of their readiness to give. 
 
 (3.) To excite them to give liberally, 
 Paul advances the great principles that 
 the reward in heaven will be in propor- 
 tion to the liberality evinced on earth, 
 and that God loves one who gives 
 cheerfully, ver. 6, 7. By the prospect, 
 therefore, of an ample reward, and by 
 the desire to meet with the approbation 
 of God, he calls upon them to contribute 
 freely to aid their afflicted Christian 
 brethren. 
 
 (4.) He further excites them to libe- 
 ral giving by the consideration that if 
 they contributed liberally, God was able 
 to furnish them abundantly with the 
 17 
 
 perfluous for me to write to 
 you; 
 
 ac. 8. 4,&c. 
 
 means of doing good on a large scale in 
 time to come. ver. 8 — 11. In this way 
 he would enable them to do good here- 
 after in proportion as they were disposed 
 to do good now, and the result of all 
 would be, that abundant thanks would 
 be rendered to God — thanks from those 
 who were aided, and thanks from those 
 who had aided them that they had been 
 enabled to contribute to supply their 
 wants. 
 
 (5.) As a final consideration inducing 
 them to give, the apostle states that not 
 only would they thus do good, but 
 would show the power of the gospel, 
 and the affection which they had for 
 the Jewish converts, and would thus 
 contribute much in promoting the glory 
 of God. The Jewish converts would 
 see the power of the gospel on their 
 Gentile brethren ; they woukl feel that 
 they now appertained to one great 
 family ; they would praise God for im- 
 parting his grace in this manner ; and 
 they would be led to pray much for 
 those who had thus contributed to alle- 
 viate their wants, ver. 12 — -14. 
 
 (6.) Paul closes the whole chapter, 
 and the whole discussion respecting the 
 contribution about which he had felt so 
 deep an interest, by rendering thanks 
 to God for his " unspeakable gift," 
 Jesus Christ, ver. 15. Paul was 
 ever ready, whatever was the topic be- 
 fore him, to turn the attention to him. 
 He here evidently regards him as the 
 author of all liberal feeling, and of all 
 true charity ; and seems to imply that 
 all that they could give would be small 
 compared with the " unspeakable gift" 
 of God, and that the fact that God had 
 imparted such a gift to the world was a 
 reason why they should be willing to 
 devote all they had to his service. 
 
 1. For as touching the ministering 
 to the saints. In regard to the collec- 
 tion that was to be taken up for the aid 
 of the poor Christians in Judea. See 
 Notes on Rom. xv. 26. 1 Cor. xri. 1 
 
194 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 2 For I know the forwardness 
 of your mind, for which I boast 
 of you to them of Macedonia, 
 that Achaia was ready a year 
 ago ; and your zeal hath pro- 
 voked very many* 
 
 2 Cor. viii. 1 It is superfluous, &c. 
 It is needless to urge that matter on 
 you, because I know that you acknow- 
 ledge the obligation to do it, and have 
 already purposed it. ■& For me to write 
 to you. That is, to write more, or to 
 write largely on the subject It is un- 
 necessary for me to urge arguments 
 why it should be done ; and all that is 
 proper is to offer some suggestions in 
 regard to the manner in which it shall 
 be accomplished. 
 
 2. For I know the forwardness of 
 your mind. I know your promptitude, 
 or your readiness to do it. See ch. viii. 
 10. Probably Paul here means that he 
 had had opportunity before of witness- 
 ing their readiness to do good, and that 
 he had learned in particular of Titus 
 that they had formed the plan to aid in 
 this contribution. 1 For which I boast 
 of you to them of Macedonia. To the 
 church in Macedonia. See ch. viii. 1. 
 So well assured was he that the church 
 at Corinth would make the collection 
 as it had proposed, that he boasted of it 
 to the churches of Macedonia as if it 
 were already done, and made use of this 
 as an argument to stimulate them to 
 make an effort, f That Achaia was 
 ready a year ago. Achaia was that 
 part of Greece of which Corinth was 
 the capital. See Note, Acts xviii. 12. 
 It is probable that there were Christians 
 in other parts of Achaia besides Corinth, 
 and indeed it is known that there was 
 a church in Cenchrea (seeRom.xvi. 1) 
 which was one of the ports of Corinth. 
 Though the contribution would be 
 chieriy derived from Corinth, yet it is 
 probable that the others also would 
 participate in it. The phrase " was 
 ready" means that they had been pre- 
 paring themselves for this collection, 
 and doubtless Paul had stated that the 
 
 3 Yet have I sent the brethren, 
 lest our boasting of you should 
 be in vain in this behalf; that, 
 as I said, ye may be ready : 
 
 4 Lest haply if they of Mace- 
 donia come with me, and find 
 
 collection was already made and waff 
 waiting. He had directed them (1 Cor. 
 xvi. 1) to make it on the first day of the 
 week, and to lay it by in store, and he 
 did not doubt that they had complied 
 with his request. ^ And your zeal. 
 Your ardour and promptitude. The 
 readiness with which you entered into 
 this subject, and your desire to relieve 
 the wants of others. ^ Hath provoked. 
 Has roused, excited, impelled to give. 
 We use the word provoke commonly 
 now in the sense of to irritate, but in 
 the Scriptures it is confined to the 
 signification of exciting, or rousing. 
 The ardour of the Corinthians would 
 excite others not only by their prompti- 
 tude, but because Corinth was a splen- 
 did city, and their example would be 
 looked up to by Christians at a distance. 
 This is one instance of the effect which 
 will be produced by the example of a 
 church in a city. 
 
 3. Yet have I sent the brethren. The 
 brethren referred to in ch. viii. 1 8. 22, 
 23. ^ Lest our boasting of you. That 
 you were disposed to contribute, and 
 that you were already prepared, and 
 that the contribution was ready. ^ Should 
 be in vain. Lest any thing should have 
 occurred to prevent the collection. I 
 have sent them that they may facilitate 
 it, and that it may be secure and certain. 
 t In this behalf. In this respect. That 
 is, lest our boasting of you, in regard to 
 your readiness to contribute to relieve 
 the wants of others, should be found to 
 haye been ill-grounded. 
 
 4. Lest haply if they of Macedonia. 
 If any of the Macedonians should hap- 
 pen to come with me, and should find 
 that you had done nothing. He does 
 not say that they would come with him, 
 but it was by no means improbable that 
 they would. It was customary for some 
 
A.D 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 195 
 
 you Unprepared, we (that we 
 say not, ye) should be ashamed 
 in this same confident boast- 
 ing. a 
 
 5 Therefore I thought it ne- 
 cessary to exhort the brethren, 
 that they would go before unto 
 
 a c. 8. 24. 
 
 of the members of the churches to travel 
 with Paul from place to place, and the 
 intercourse was constant between Ma- 
 cedonia and Achaia. Paul had, there- 
 fore, every reason to suppose that some 
 of the Macedonians would accompany 
 him when he should go to Corinth. 
 At all events it was probable that the 
 Macedonians would learn from some 
 quarter whether the Corinthians were 
 or were not ready when Paul should 
 go to them, ^ We (that we say nut 
 ye) should be ashamed, &c. " In this," 
 says Bloomfield, " one cannot but re- 
 cognise a most refined and delicate turn 
 inferior to none of the best classical 
 writers." Paul had boasted confidently 
 that the Corinthians would be ready 
 with their collection. He had excited 
 and stimulated the Macedonians by this 
 consideration. He had induced them 
 in this way to give liberally, ch. viii. 
 1 — 4. If now it should turn out after 
 all that the Corinthians had given no- 
 thing, or had given stintedly, the cha- 
 racter of Paul would suffer. His ve- 
 racity and his judgment would be called 
 in question, and he would be accused 
 of trick, and artifice, and fraud in in- 
 ducing them to give. Or if he should 
 not be charged with dishonesty, yet he 
 would be humbled and mortified him- 
 self that he had made representations 
 which had proved to be so unfounded. 
 But this was not all. The character 
 of the Corinthians was also at stake. 
 They had purposed to make the collec- 
 tion. They had left the impression in 
 the mind of Paul that it would be done. 
 They had hitherto evinced such a 
 character as to make Paul confident 
 that the collection would be made. If 
 now by any means this should fail, their 
 character would suffer, and they would 
 
 you, and make up beforehand 
 your x bounty, 3 whereof ye had 
 notice before, that the same 
 might be ready, as a matter of 
 bounty, and not as of covetous- 
 ness. 
 
 1 blessing. 
 a or, which hath been so much spoken of before. 
 
 have occasion to be ashamed that they 
 had excited so confident expectations of 
 what they would do. 
 
 5. Therefore I thought it necessary. 
 &c. In order to secure the collection, 
 and to avoid all unpleasant feeling on 
 all hands. 1 That they would go he- 
 fore unto you. Before I should come. 
 t And make up beforehand your boun- 
 ty. Prepare it before I come. The 
 word " bounty" is in the Marg. render- 
 ed " blessing." The Greek (tlhoytA) 
 means properly commendation, eulogy. 
 Then it means blessing, praise applied 
 to God. Then that which blesses — a 
 gift, donation, favour, bounty — whether 
 of God to men, or of one man to 
 another. Here it refers to their con- 
 tribution as that which would be adapted 
 to confer a blessing on others, or fitted 
 to produce happiness. % That the same 
 might be ready as a matter of bounty. 
 That it may truly appear as a liberal 
 and voluntary offering ; as an act of 
 generosity and not as wrung or extorted 
 from you. That it may be truly a 
 blessing — a thank-offering to God and 
 adapted to do good to men. t And not 
 as of covetousness. "And not like a sort 
 of extortion, wrung from you by mere 
 dint of importunity." — Doddridge. The 
 word here used (tassv^**) means usually 
 covetousness, greediness of gain which 
 leads a person to defraud others. The 
 idea here is, that Paul would have them 
 give this as an act of bounty, or libe- 
 rality on their part, and not as an act 
 of covetousness on his part, not as ex- 
 torted by him from them. 
 
 6. But this I say. This I say in 
 order to induce you to give liberally. 
 This I say to prevent your supposing 
 that because it is to be a voluntary 
 offering you may give only from youf 
 
196 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 
 6 But this / say, He a which 
 soweth sparingly shall reap also 
 
 a Ps. 41. 1—3. Pr. 11.24,25; 19. 17; 22.U 
 Ga. 6. 7, 9. 
 
 superfluity, and may give sparingly. 
 Tf He which soweth sparingly. This 
 expression has all the appearance of a 
 proverb, and doubtless is such. It does 
 not occur indeed elsewhere in the 
 Scriptures, though substantially the 
 same sentiment exciting to liberality 
 often occurs. See Ps. xli. 1 — 3. Prov. 
 xi. 24, 25 ; xix. 17 ; xxii. 9. Paul here 
 says that it is in giving as it is in agri- 
 culture. A man that sows little must 
 expect to reap little. If he sows a small 
 piece of land he will reap a small har- 
 vest ; or if he is niggardly irf* sowing 
 and wishes to save his seed and will not 
 commit it to the earth, he must expect 
 to reap little. So it is in giving. Money 
 given in alms, money bestowed to aid 
 the poor and needy, or to extend the 
 influence of virtue and pure religion, 
 is money bestowed in a way similar to 
 the act of committing seed to the earth. 
 It will be returned again in some way 
 with an abundant increase. It shall 
 not be lost. The seed may be buried 
 long. It may lie in the ground with no 
 indication of a return or of increase. 
 One who knew not the arrangements 
 of Providence might suppose it was 
 lost and dead. But in due time it shall 
 spring up and produce an ample in- 
 crease. So with money given to objects 
 of benevolence. To many it may seem 
 to be a waste, or may appear to be thrown 
 away. But in due time it will be re- 
 paid in some way with abundant in- 
 crease. And the man who wishes to 
 make the most out of his money for 
 future use and personal comfort will give 
 liberally to deserving objects of charity — 
 just as the man who wishes to make the 
 most out of his grain will not suffer it 
 to lie in his granary, but will commit the 
 seed to the fertile earth. "Cast thy 
 bread upon the waters : for thou shalt 
 find it again after many days" (Eccl. 
 xi. 1) ; that is, when the waters as of 
 the Nile have overflown the banks and 
 flooded the whole adjacent country, then 
 
 sparingly ; and he which soweth 
 bountifully shall reap also boun- 
 tifully. 
 
 is the time, to cast abroad thy seed. The 
 waters will retire, and the seed will sink 
 into the accumulated fertile mud that is 
 deposited, and will spring up in an 
 abundant harvest. So it is with that 
 which is given for objects of benevolence. 
 1 Shall reap also sparingly. Shall 
 reap in proportion to what he sowed. 
 This every one knows is true in regard 
 to grain that is sowed. It is also no 
 less true in regard to deeds of charity. 
 The idea is, that God will bestow re- 
 wards in proportion to what is given. 
 These rewards may refer to results in 
 this life, or to the rewards in heaven, 
 or both. All who have ever been in 
 the habit of giving liberally to the ob- 
 jects of benevolence can testify that they 
 have lost nothing, but have reaped in 
 proportion to their liberality. This 
 follows in various ways. (I.) In the 
 comfort and peace which results from 
 giving. If a man wishes to purchase 
 happiness with his gold, he can secure 
 the most by bestowing it liberally on 
 objects of charity. It will produce him 
 more immediate peace than it would to 
 spend it In sensual gratifications, and 
 far more than to hoard it up useless in 
 his coffers. (2.) In reflection on it 
 hereafter. It will produce more hap- 
 piness in remembering that he has done 
 good with it, and promoted the happi- 
 ness of others, than it will to reflect that 
 he has hoarded up useless wealth, or 
 that he has squandered it in sensual 
 gratification. The one will be unmin- 
 gled pleasure when he comes to die ; 
 the other will be unmingled self-reproach 
 and pain. (3.) In subsequent life, God 
 will in some way repay to him far more 
 than he has bestowed in deeds of charity. 
 By augmented prosperity, by health 
 and future comfort, and by raising up 
 for us and our families, when in distress 
 and want, friends to aid us, God can 
 and often does abundantly repay the 
 liberal for all their acts of kindness and 
 deeds of beneficence. (4.) God can and 
 
A. D. 60.] CHAPTER IX. 197 
 
 7 Every man according as he purposeth in his heart, so let 
 
 will reward his people in heaven abun- 
 dantly for all their kindness to the poor, 
 and all their self-denials in endeavouring 
 to diffuse the influence of truth and the 
 knowledge of salvation. Indeed the 
 rewards of heaven will be in no small 
 degree apportioned in this manner, and 
 determined by the amount of benevo- 
 lence which we have shown on earth. 
 See Matt. xxv. 34 — 40. On all accounts, 
 therefore, we have every inducement to 
 give liberally. As a farmer who desires 
 an ample harvest scatters his seed with 
 a liberal hand ; as he does not grudge 
 it though it falls into the earth ; as he 
 scatters it with the expectation that in 
 due time it will spring up and reward 
 his labours, so should we give with a 
 liberal hand to aid the cause of benevo- 
 lence, nor should we deem w,hat we 
 give to be lost or wasted though we 
 wait long before we are recompensed, 
 or though we should be in no other way 
 rewarded than by the comfort which 
 arises from the act of doing good. 
 
 7. Every man according as he pur- 
 poseth in his heart, &c. The main 
 idea in this verse is, that the act of giv- 
 ing should be voluntary and cheerful. 
 It should not seem to be extorted by 
 the importunity of others (ver. 6) ; nor 
 should it be given from urgent necessity, 
 but it should be given as an offering of 
 the heart. On this part of the verse 
 we may remark, (1.) That the heart is 
 usually more concerned in the business 
 of giving than the head. If liberality 
 is evinced, it will be the heart which 
 prompts to it ; if it is not evinced, it will 
 be because the heart has some bad pas- 
 sions to gratify, and is under the influ- 
 ence of avarice, or selfishness, or some 
 other improper attachment. Very often 
 a man is convinced he ought to give 
 liberally, but a narrow heart and a parsi- 
 monious spirit prevents it. (2.) We 
 should follow the dictates of the heart 
 in giving. I mean that a man will 
 usually give more correctly who fol- 
 lows the first promptings of his heart 
 when an object of charity is presented 
 17* 
 
 than he will if he takes much time to 
 deliberate. The instinctive prompting 
 of a benevolent heart is to give liberally. 
 And the amount which should be given 
 will usually be suggested to a man by the 
 better feelings of his heart. But if he 
 resolves to deliberate much, and if he 
 suffers the heart to grow cold, and if he 
 defers it, the pleadings of avarice will 
 come in, or some object of attachment 
 or plan of life will rise to view, or he 
 will begin to compare himself with 
 others, and he will give much less than 
 he would have done if he had followed 
 the first impulse of feeling. God im- 
 planted the benevolent feelings in the 
 bosom that they should prompt us to do 
 good ; and he who acts most in accord- 
 ance with them is most likely to do what 
 he ought to do ; and in general it is the 
 safest and best rule for a man to give 
 just what his heart prompts him to 
 give when an object of charity is pre- 
 sented. Man at best is too selfish to 
 be likely to give too much, or to go 
 beyond his means ; and if in a few 
 instances it should be done, more would 
 be gained in value in the cultivation 
 of benevolent feeling than would be lost 
 in money. I know of no better rule on 
 the subject, than to cultivate as much 
 as possible the benevolent feelings, and 
 then to throw open the soul to every 
 proper appeal to our charity, and to 
 give just according to the instinctive 
 prompting of the heart. (3.) Giving 
 should be voluntary and cheerful. It 
 should be from the heart. Yet there is 
 much, very much that is not so, and 
 there is, therefore, much benevolence 
 that is spasmodic and spurious ; that 
 cannot be depended on, and that will 
 not endure. No dependence can be 
 placed on a man in regard to giving 
 who does not do it from the steady 
 influences of a benevolent heart. But 
 there is much obtained in the cause 
 of benevolence that is produced by a 
 kind of extortion. It is given because 
 others give, and the man would be 
 ashamed to give less than they do. Or, 
 
198 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A.D.60. 
 
 him give; not a grudgingly, or 
 of necessity : for God loveth a 
 cheerful h giver. 
 
 8 And c God is able to make 
 
 a De. 15. 7, 8. b Ex. 35. 5. Ro. 12. 8. 
 
 c Ph. 4. 19. 
 
 it is given because he thinks his rank 
 in life demands it, and he is prompted 
 to it by pride and vanity. Or, he gives 
 from respect to a pastor or a friend, or 
 because he is warmly importuned to 
 give ; or because he is shut up to a kind 
 of necessity to give, and must give or 
 he would lose his character and become 
 an object of scorn and detestation. In 
 all this there is nothing cheerful and 
 voluntary ; and there can be nothing in 
 it acceptable to God. Nor can U be 
 depended on permanently. The heart 
 is not in it, and the man will evade the 
 duty as soon as he can, and will soon 
 find excuses for not giving at all. T Not 
 grudgingly. Greek, 'Not of grief 
 '(ju.» \k xt/T»f). Not as if he were sorry 
 to part with his money. Not as if he 
 were constrained to do a thing that was 
 extremely painful to him. f Or of 
 necessity. As if he were compelled to 
 do it. Let him do it cheerfully. If For 
 God loveth a cheerful giver. And who 
 does not 1 Valuable as any gift may be 
 in itself, yet if it is forced and con- 
 strained ; if it can be procured only 
 after great importunity and persevering 
 effort, who can esteem it as desirable 1 
 God desires the heart in every service. 
 No service that is not cheerful and 
 voluntary ; none that does not arise 
 from true love to him can be acceptable 
 in his sight* God loves it because it 
 shows a heart like his own — a heart 
 disposed to give cheerfully and do good 
 on the largest scale possible ; and be- 
 cause it shows a heart attached from 
 principle to his service and cause. The 
 expression here has all the appearance 
 of a proverb, and expressions similar to 
 this occur often in the Scriptures. In 
 an uninspired writer, also, this idea has 
 been beautifully expanded. "In all 
 thy gifts show a cheerful countenance, 
 and dedicate thy tithes with gladness. 
 Give unto the Most High according as 
 
 all grace abound toward you : 
 that ye, always having all suffi- 
 ciency in all things, may abound 
 to every good work : 
 
 he hath enriched thee ; and as thou 
 hast gotten give with a cheerful eye. 
 For the Lord recompenseth, and will 
 give thee seven times as much." — 
 Wisdom of the Son of Sirach,ch.xxxv. 
 9 — 11. In nothing, therefore, is it more 
 important than to examine the motives 
 by which we give to the objects of be- 
 nevolence. However liberal may be 
 our benefactions, yet God may see that 
 there is no sincerity, and may hate the 
 spirit with which it is done. 
 
 8. And God is able, &c. Do not 
 suppose that by giving liberally you 
 will be impoverished and reduced to 
 want. You should rather confide in 
 God, who is able to furnish you abun- 
 dantly with what is needful for the 
 supply of your necessities. Few per- 
 sons are ever reduced to poverty by 
 liberality. Perhaps in the whole circle 
 of his acquaintance it would be difficult 
 for an individual to point out one who 
 has been impoverished or made the 
 poorer in this way. Our selfishness is 
 generally a sufficient guard against this; 
 but it is also to be added, that the divine 
 blessing rests upon the liberal man, and 
 that God keeps him from want. But 
 in the mean time there are multitudes 
 who are made poor by the want of 
 liberality. They are parsimonious in 
 giving, but they are extravagant in 
 dress, and luxury, and in expenses for 
 amusement or vice, and the conse- 
 quence is poverty and want. "There 
 is that withholdeth more than is meet, 
 and it tendcth to poverty." Prov. 
 xi. 24. The divine. blessing rests upon 
 the liberal ; and while every person 
 should make a proper provision for his 
 family, every one should give liberally, 
 confiding in God that he will furnish 
 the supplies for our future wants. Let 
 this maxim be borne in mind, that no 
 one is usually made the poorer by being 
 liberal, f All grace. All kinds ol 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 
 9 (As it is written, a He hath 
 dispersed abroad ; he hath given 
 to the poor : his righteousness 
 remaineth for ever. 
 
 10 Now he Hhat ministereth 
 
 a Ts. 112. 9. b Is. 56. 10. 
 
 favour. He is able to impart to you 
 those things which are needful for your 
 welfare. 1 That ye always, &c. The 
 sense is, * If you give liberally you are 
 to expect that God will furnish you 
 with the means, so that you will be 
 able to abound more and more in it. 
 You are to expect that he will abun- 
 dantly qualify you for doing good in 
 every way, and that he will furnish you 
 with all that is needful for this. The 
 man who gives, therefore, should have 
 faith in God. He should expect that 
 God will bless him in it ; and the expe- 
 rience of the Christian world may be 
 appealed to in proof that men are not 
 made poor by liberality. 
 
 9. As it is written. Ps. cxii. 9. The 
 idea is, • in this way will the saying in 
 the Scriptures be verified, or the promise 
 confirmed.' The psalmist is describing 
 the character of the righteous man. One 
 of his characteristics, he says, is, that 
 he has scattered abroad, he has given 
 liberally to the poor. On such a man 
 a blessing is pronounced (ver. 1) ; and 
 one of the blessings will be that he shall 
 be prospered. Some difficulty has been 
 felt by commentators to see how the 
 quotation here made sustains the posi- 
 tion of Paul that the liberal man would 
 be blessed of God, and would receive 
 an increase according to his liberality. 
 In order to this, they have supposed 
 (see Doddridge, Bloomfield, and Clarke) 
 that the word " righteousness" means 
 the same as almsgiving, or that " he 
 would always have something to be- 
 stow." But I would suggest that per- 
 haps Paul quoted this, as quotations 
 are frequently made in the Sciiptures, 
 where a passage was familiar. He 
 quotes only a part of the passage, mean- 
 ing that the whole passage confirms the 
 point under consideration. Thus the 
 whole passage in the Psalm is, "He 
 
 seed to the sower both minister 
 bread for your food, and multiply 
 your seed sown, and increase 
 the fruits c of your righteous- 
 ness ;) 
 
 c Hos. 10. 12. 
 
 hath dispersed ; he hath given to the 
 poor; his righteousness endureth for- 
 ever ; his horn shall be exalted with 
 honour " that is, he shall be abundantly 
 blessed with prosperity and with the 
 favour of God. Thus the entire pro- 
 mise sustains the position of Paul, that 
 the liberal man would be abundantly 
 blessed. The phrase "he hath dis- 
 persed" ('Eo-Jci^Trta-iv), may refer either 
 to the act of sowing, as a man scatters 
 seed on the earth ; or there may be an 
 allusion to the oriental custom of scatter- 
 ing money among an assembled com- 
 pany of paupers. Comp. Prov. xi. 24. 
 t His righteousness. His deeds of be- 
 nificence. If Remaineth. In its fruits 
 and consequences ; that is, either in its 
 effects on others, or on himself. It may 
 mean that the sums so distributed will 
 remain with him forever, inasmuch as 
 he will be supplied with all that is need- 
 ful to enable him to do good to others. 
 This interpretation accords with the 
 connexion. 
 
 10. Now he that ministereth seed to 
 the sower. This is an expression of an 
 earnest wish. In the previous verses 
 he had stated the promises, or had 
 shown what we had a right to expect 
 as a consequence of liberality. He here 
 unites the expression of an earnest de- 
 sire that they might experience this 
 themselves. The allusion is to the act 
 of sowing seed. The idea is, that when 
 a man scatters seed in his field God 
 provides him with the means of sowing 
 again. He not only gives him a har- 
 vest to supply his wants, but he blesses 
 him also in giving him the ability to 
 sow again. Such was the benevolent 
 wish of Paul. He desired not only 
 that God would supply their returning 
 wants, but he desired also that he would 
 give them the ability to do good again ,• 
 that he would furnish them the means 
 
200 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 II Being enriched in every- 
 thing to all bountifulness, 1 which 
 
 1 simplicity, or liberality. 
 
 of future benevolence. He acknow- 
 ledges God as the source of all increase, 
 and wishes that they may experience 
 the results of such increase. Perhaps 
 in this language there is an allusion to 
 Isa. lv. 10 ; and the idea is, that it is 
 God who furnishes by his providence 
 the seed to the sower. In like manner 
 he will furnish you the means of doing 
 good. U Minister bread for your food. 
 Furnish you with an ample supply for 
 your wants. K Multiply your seed 
 sown. Greatly increase your means 
 of doing good ; make the result of all 
 your benefactions so to abound that you 
 may have the means of doing good 
 again, and on a larger scale, as the seed 
 sown in the earth is so increased that 
 the farmer may have the means of sow- 
 ing more abundantly again, t And 
 increase the fruits of your righteous- 
 ness. This evidently means, the results 
 and effects of their benevolence. The 
 word 'righteousness' here refers to 
 their liberality; and the wish of the 
 apostle is, that the results of their be- 
 neficence might greatly abound, that 
 they might have the means of doing 
 extensive good, and that they might be 
 the means of diffusing happiness from 
 afar. 
 
 11. Being enriched in everything, 
 &c. In all respects your riches are 
 conferred on you for this purpose. The 
 design of the apostle is to state to them 
 the true reason why wealth was be- 
 stowed. It was not for the purposes 
 of luxury and self-gratification ; not to 
 be spent in sensual enjoyment, not for 
 parade and display ; it was that it might 
 be distributed to others in such a way 
 as to cause thanksgiving to God. At 
 the same time, this implies the expres- 
 sion of an earnest wish on the part of 
 Paul. He did not desire that they 
 should be rich for their own gratification 
 or pleasure ; he desired it only as the 
 means of their doing good to others. 
 
 a causeth through us thanksgiv- 
 ing to God. 
 
 12 For the administration of 
 
 a c. 1. 11. 4. 15. 
 
 Right feeling will desire property only 
 as the means of promoting happiness 
 and producing thanksgiving to God. 
 They who truly love their children and 
 friends will wish them to be successful 
 in acquiring wealth only that they may 
 have the means and the disposition to 
 alleviate misery, and promote the happi- 
 ness of all around them. No one who 
 has true benevolence will desire that any 
 one in whom he feels an interest should 
 be enriched for the purpose of living 
 amidst luxury, and encompassing him- 
 self with the indulgences which wealth 
 can furnish. If a man has not a disposi- 
 tion to do good with money, it is not true 
 benevolence to desire that he may pos- 
 sess it. Tf To all bountifulness. Marg. 
 Simplicity, or liberality. The word 
 (cb*oT»?) means properly sincerity, 
 candour, probity ; then also simplicity, 
 frankness, fidelity, and especially as 
 manifesting itself in liberality. See 
 Rom. xii. 8. 2 Cor. viii. 2. Here it 
 evidently means liberality, and the idea 
 is, that property is given for this pur- 
 pose, in order that there may be libe- 
 rality evinced in doing good to others. 
 | , Which causeth through us, &c. That 
 is, we shall so distribute your alms as 
 to cause thanksgiving to God. The 
 result will be that by our instrumentality, 
 thanks will be given to the great Source 
 and Giver of all wealth. Property should 
 always be so employed as to produce 
 thanksgiving. If it is made to con~ 
 tribute to our own support and the sup- 
 port of our families, it should excite 
 thanksgiving. If it is given to others, 
 it should be so given, if it is possible, 
 that the recipient should be more grate- 
 ful to God than to us ,- should feel that 
 though we may be the honoured instru- 
 ment in distributing it, yet the true 
 benefactor is God. 
 
 12. For the administration of this 
 service. The distribution of this proof 
 of your liberality. The wo*d service 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 20J 
 
 this service not only supplieth a 
 the want of the saints, but is 
 abundant also by many thanks- 
 givings unto God ; 
 
 13 Whiles by the experiment 
 of this ministration they glorify 6 
 God for your professed subjec- 
 
 a c. 8. 14. 
 
 b Mat. 5. 16. 
 
 nere, says Doddridge, intimates that 
 this was to be regarded not merely as 
 an act of humanity, but religion. 
 1 The want of the saints. Of the poor 
 Christians in Judea on whose behalf it 
 was contributed. % But is abundant 
 also by many thanksgivings unto God. 
 Will abound unto God in producing 
 thanksgivings. The result will be that 
 it will produce abundant thanksgiving 
 in their hearts to God. 
 
 13. Whiles by the experiment, &c. 
 Or rather, by the experience of this 
 ministration ; the proof (SoupHs), the 
 evidence here furnished of your libe- 
 rality. They shall in this ministration 
 have experience or proof of y our Chris- 
 tian principle. ^ They glorify God. 
 They will praise God as the source of 
 your liberality, as having given you the 
 means of being liberal, and having in- 
 clined your hearts to it. If For your 
 professed subjection, &c. Literally, 
 * For the obedience of your profession 
 of the gospel.' It does not imply merely 
 that there was a profession of religion, 
 but that there was a real subjection to 
 the gospel which they professed. This 
 is not clearly expressed in our transla- 
 tion. Tindal has expressed it better, 
 " Which praise God for your obedience 
 in acknowledging the gospel of Christ." 
 There was a real and sincere submission 
 to the gospel of Christ, and that was 
 manifested by their giving liberally to 
 supply the wants of others. The doc- 
 trine is, that one evidence of true sub- 
 jection to the gospel; one proof that 
 our profession is sincere and genuine, is 
 a willingness to contribute to relieve the 
 wants of the poor and afflicted friends 
 of the Redeemer. % And unto all 
 
 tion unto the gospel of Christ, 
 and for your liberal distribution 
 unto them, and unto all men; 
 
 14 And by their prayer for 
 you, which long after you for 
 the exceeding grace a of God in 
 you. 
 
 oc. 8. 1. 
 
 men. That is, all others whom you 
 may have the opportunity of relieving. 
 14. And by their prayer for you. 
 On the grammatical construction of this 
 difficult verse, Doddridge and Bloom- 
 field may be consulted. It is probably 
 to be taken in connexion with ver. 12, 
 and ver. 13 is a parenthesis. Thus in- 
 terpreted, the sense will be, ' The admi- 
 nistration of this service (ver. 12) will 
 produce abundant thanks to God. It 
 will also (ver. 14) produce another 
 effect. It will tend to excite the prayers 
 of the saints for you, and thus produce 
 important benefits to yourselves. They 
 will earnestly desire your welfare, they 
 will anxiously pray to be united in 
 Christian friendship with those who 
 have been so signally endowed with 
 the grace of God.' The sentiment is, 
 that charity should be shown to poor 
 and afflicted Christians because it will 
 lead them to pray for us and to desire 
 our welfare. The prayers of the poor- 
 est Christian for us are worth more than 
 all we usually bestow on them in charity ; 
 and he who has secured the pleadings 
 of a child of God, however humble, in 
 his behalf, has made a good use of his 
 money. J Which long after you. 
 Who earnestly desire to see and know 
 you. Who will sincerely desire your 
 welfare, and who will thus be led to 
 pray for you. f For the exceeding 
 grace of God in you. On account of 
 the favour which God has shown to you 
 the strength and power of the Christian 
 principle, manifesting itself in doing 
 good to those whom you have nevet 
 seen. The apostle supposes that tha 
 exercise of a charitable disposition is ta 
 be traced entirely to God. God is tht 
 
202 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 
 15 Thanks a be unto God for 
 
 a Ja. 1. 17. 
 
 author of all grace ; he alone excites in 
 us a disposition to do good to others. 
 
 15. Thanks be unto God. Whitby 
 supposes that this refers to the charita- 
 ble disposition which they had mani- 
 fested, and that the sense is, that God 
 Was to be adored for the liberal spirit 
 which they were disposed to manifest, 
 and the aid which they were disposed 
 to render to others. But this, it is be- 
 lieved, falls far below the design of the 
 apostle. The reference is rather to the 
 inexpressible gift which God had grant- 
 ed to them in bestowing his Son to die 
 for them ; and this is one of the most 
 striking instances which occur in the 
 New Testament, showing that the mind 
 of Paul was full of this subject ; and 
 that wherever he began, he was sure to 
 end with a reference to the Redeemer. 
 The invaluable gift of a Saviour was so 
 familiar to his mind, and he was so ac- 
 customed to dwell on that in his private 
 thoughts, that the mind naturally and 
 easily glanced on that whenever any 
 thing occurred that by the remotest al- 
 lusion would suggest it The idea is, 
 'Your benefactions are indeed valua- 
 ble ; and for them, for the disposition 
 which you have manifested, and for all 
 the good which you will be enabled thus 
 to accomplish, we are bound to give 
 thanks to God. All this will excite the 
 gratitude of those who shall be bene- 
 fited. But how small is all this com- 
 pared with the great gift which God 
 has imparted in bestowing a Saviour ! 
 That is unspeakable. No words can 
 express it, no language convey an ade- 
 quate description of the value of the 
 gift, and of the mercies which result 
 from it.' t His unspeakable gift. The 
 word here used (uvad^aTa) means, 
 what cannot be related, unutterable. It 
 occurs nowhere else in the New Testa- 
 ment. The idea is, that no words can 
 properly express the greatness of the 
 gift thus bestowed on man. It is higher 
 than the mind can conceive ; higher 
 than language can express. On this 
 verse we may observe, (> ) That the 
 
 his unspeakable gift. 
 
 b Jno. 3. 16. 
 
 Saviour is a gift to men. So he is 
 uniformly represented. See John hi. 
 16. Gal. i. 4, ii. 20. Eph. i. 22. Tim. 
 ii. 6. Tit. ii. 14. Man had no claim 
 on God. He could not compel him to 
 provide a plan of salvation ;. and the 
 whole arrangement — the selection of 
 the Saviour, the sending him into the 
 world, and all the benefits resulting 
 from his work, are all an undeserved 
 gift to man. (2.) This is a gift un- 
 speakably great, whose value no language 
 can express, no heart fully conceive. It 
 is so because, (a) Of his own greatness 
 and glory ; (b) Because of the inex- 
 pressible love which he evinced; (c) 
 Because of the unutterable sufferings 
 which he endured ; (d) Because of the 
 inexpressibly great benefits which re- 
 sult from his work. No language can 
 do justice to this work in either of 
 these respects ; no heart in this world 
 fully conceives the obligation which 
 rests upon man in virtue of his work. 
 (3.) Thanks should be rendered to 
 God for this. We owe him our highest 
 praises for this. This appears, (a) Be- 
 cause it was mere benevolence in God. 
 We had no claim ; we could not com- 
 pel him to grant us a Saviour. The 
 gift might have been withheld, and his 
 throne would have been spotless. We 
 owe no thanks where we have a claim ; 
 where we deserve nothing, then he who 
 benefits us has a claim on our thanks. 
 (6) Because of the benefits which we 
 have received from him. Who can 
 express this ] All our peace and hope ; 
 all our comfort and joy in this life ; all 
 our prospect of pardon and salvation ; all 
 the offers of eternal glory are to be 
 traced to him. Man has no prospect 
 of being happy when he dies but in 
 virtue of the ' unspeakable gift' of God. 
 And when he thinks of his sins, which 
 may now be freely pardoned ; when he 
 thinks of an agitated and troubled con- 
 science, which may now be at peace; 
 when he thinks of his soul, which may 
 now be unspeakably and eternally hap- 
 py ; when he tlunks of the hell from 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 203 
 
 which he is delivered, and of the heaven 
 to whose eternal glories he may now 
 be raised up by the gift of a Saviour, 
 his heart should overflow with gratitude, 
 and the language should be continually 
 on his lips and in his heart, 'thakks 
 be unto God for his unspeakable 
 gift.' Every other mercy should seem 
 small compared with this ; and every 
 manifestation of right feeling in the 
 heart should lead us to contemplate the 
 source of it, and to feel, as Paul did, 
 that all is to be traced to the unspeaka- 
 ble gift of God. 
 
 1. This chapter with the preceding 
 derives special importance from the fact 
 that it contains the most extended dis- 
 cussion of the principles of Christian 
 charity which occurs in the Bible. No 
 one can doubt that it was intended by 
 the Redeemer that his people should be 
 distinguished for benevolence. It was 
 important, therefore, that there should 
 be some portion of the New Testament 
 where the principles on which charity 
 should be exercised, and the motives 
 by which Christians should be induced 
 to give, should be fully stated. Such a 
 discussion we have in these chapters ; 
 and they therefore demand the profound 
 and prayerful attention of all who love 
 the Lord Jesus. 
 
 2. We have here a striking speci- 
 men of the manner in which the Bible 
 is written. Instead of abstract state- 
 ments and systematic arrangement, the 
 principles of religion are brought out in 
 connexion with a case that actually 
 occurred. But it follows that it is im- 
 portant to study attentively the Bible, 
 and to be familiar with every part of it. 
 In some part of the Scriptures, state- 
 ments of the principles which should 
 guide us in given circumstances will be 
 found ; and Christians should, therefore, 
 be familiar with every part of the Bible. 
 
 3. These chapters are of special im- 
 portance to the ministers of religion, 
 and to all whose duty it is to press upon 
 their fellow Christians the duty of giving 
 liberally to the objects of benevolence. 
 The principles on which it should be 
 
 done are fully developed here. The 
 motives which it is lawful to urge are 
 urged here by Paul. It may be added, 
 also, that the chapters are worthy of 
 our profound study on account of the 
 admirable tact and address which Paul 
 evinces in inducing others to give. 
 Well he knew human nature. Well 
 he knew the motives which would 
 influence others to give. And well 
 he knew exactly how to shape his 
 arguments and adapt his reasoning to 
 the circumstances of those whom he 
 addressed. 
 
 4. The summary of the motives pre 
 sented in this chapter contains still the 
 most important argument which can be 
 urged to produce liberality. We can- 
 not but admire the felicity of Paul in 
 this address — a felicity not the result 
 of craft and cunning, but resulting from 
 his amiable feelings, and the love which 
 he bore to the Corinthians and to the 
 cause of benevolence. He reminds 
 them of the high opinion which he had 
 of them, and of the honourable men- 
 tion which he had been induced to make 
 of them (ver. 1, 2); he reminds them 
 of the painful result to his own feelings 
 and theirs if the collection should in 
 any way fail, and it should appear that 
 his confidence in them had been mis- 
 placed (ver. 3 — 5) ; he refers them to 
 the abundant reward which they might 
 anticipate as the result of liberal bene- 
 factions, and of the fact that God loved 
 those who gave cheerfully (ver. 6, 7) ; 
 he reminds them of the abundant grace 
 of God, who was able to supply all their 
 wants and to give them the means to 
 contribute liberally to meet the wants 
 of the poor (ver. 8) ; he reminds them 
 of the joy which their liberality would 
 occasion, and of the abundant thanks- 
 giving to God which would result from 
 it (ver. 12, 13) ; and he refers them to the 
 unspeakable gift of God, Jesus Christ, 
 as an example, and an argument, and 
 as urging the highest claims in them, 
 ver. 15. " Who," says Doddridge, " could 
 withstand the force of such oratory ?" 
 No doubt it was effectual in that case, 
 and it should be in all others. 
 
 5. May the motives here urged bv 
 
204 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 fA. D. €0 
 
 the apostle be effectual to persuade us 
 all to liberal efforts to do good ! Assured- 
 ly there is no less occasion for Christian 
 liberality now than there was in the 
 time of Paul. There are still multitudes 
 of the poor who need the kind and 
 efficient aid of Christians. And the 
 whole world now is a field in which 
 Christian beneficence may be abundantly 
 displayed, and every land may, and 
 should experience the benefits of the 
 charity to which the gospel prompts, 
 and which it enjoins. Happy are they 
 who are influenced by the principles 
 of the gospel to do good to all men ! 
 Happy they who have any opportunity 
 to illustrate the power of Christian 
 principle in this ; any ability to alleviate 
 the wants of one sufferer, or to do any 
 thing in sending that gospel to be- 
 nighted nations which alone can save 
 the soul from eternal death ! 
 
 6. Let us especially thank God for 
 his unspeakable gift, Jesus Christ. Let 
 us remember that to him we owe every 
 opportunity to do good : that it was be- 
 cause he came that there is any possi- 
 bility of benefiting a dying world ; and 
 that all who profess to love him • are 
 bound to imitate his example and to 
 show their sense of their obligation to 
 God for giving a Saviour. How poor 
 and worthless are all our gifts compared 
 with the great gift of God ; how slight 
 our expressions of compassion, even at 
 the best, for o u r fellow-men, compared 
 with the compassion which he has 
 shown for us ! When God has given 
 his Son to die for us, what should we 
 not be willing to give that we may show 
 our gratitude, and that we may benefit 
 a dying world ! 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 Paul, having finished the subject of 
 the duty of alms-giving in the previous 
 chapter, enters in this on a vindication 
 of himself from the charges of his ene- 
 mies. His general design is to vindi- 
 cate his apostolic authority, and to show 
 that he had a right, as well as others, 
 to regard himself as sent from God. 
 This vindication is continued through 
 •h. xi. and xii. In this chapter the stress 
 
 j of the argument is, that he did not de- 
 pend on any thing external to recom- 
 mend him — on any "carnal weapons;" 
 on any thing which commended itself 
 by the outward appearance ; or on any 
 thing that was so much valued by the 
 admirers of human eloquence and learn- 
 ing. He seems willing to admit all that 
 his enemies could say of him on that 
 head, and to rely on other proofs that he 
 was sent from God. In ch. xi. he pur- 
 sues the subject, and shows by a com- 
 parison of himself with others, that he 
 I had as good a right certainly as they to 
 j regard himself as sent by God. In 
 ch. xii. he appeals to another argument, 
 to which none of his accusers was able 
 to appeal, that he had been permitted to 
 see the glories of the heavenly world, 
 and had been favoured in a manner 
 unknown to other men. 
 
 It is evident that there was one or 
 more false teachers among the Corinth- 
 ians who called in question the divine 
 authority of Paul. "These teachers were 
 native Jews (ch. xi. 13. 22), and they 
 boasted much of their own endowments. 
 It is impossible, except from the epistle 
 itself, to ascertain the nature of their 
 charges and objections against him. 
 From the chapter before us it would 
 seem that one principal ground of their 
 objection was, that though he was bold 
 enough in his letters and had threatened 
 to exercise discipline, yet that he would 
 not dare to do it. They accused him 
 of being, when present with them, 
 timid, weak, mild, pusillanimous, of 
 lacking moral courage to inflict the 
 punishment which he had threatened 
 in his letters. To this he replies in 
 this chapter. 
 
 (1.) He appeals to the meekness and 
 gentleness of Christ ; thus indirectly 
 and delicately vindicating his own mild- 
 ness from their objections, and entreats 
 them not to give him occasion to show 
 the boldness and severity which he had 
 purposed to do. He had no wish to be 
 bold and severe in the exercise of dis- 
 cipline, ver. 1. 2. 
 
 (2.) He assures them that the 
 weapons of his warfare were not carnal, 
 but spiritual. He relied on the truth 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER X, 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 "MOW I Paul myself beseech a 
 -^ you by the meekness and 
 
 alio. 12. 1. 
 
 of the gospel and on the power of mo- 
 tives ; and these weapons were mighty 
 by the aid of God to cast down all that 
 offend him. Yet he was ready to re- 
 venge and punish all disobedience by 
 severe measures if it were necessary, 
 ver. 3—6. 
 
 (3.) They looked on the outward 
 appearance. He cautioned them to 
 remember that he had as good claims 
 to be regarded as belonging to Christ as 
 they had. ver. 7. He had given proofs 
 that he was an apostle, and the false 
 teachers should look at those proofs lest 
 they should be found to be opposing 
 God. He assured them that if he had 
 occasion to exercise his power he would 
 have no reason to be ashamed of it. 
 ver. 8. It would be found to be ample 
 to execute punishment on his foes. 
 
 (4.) The false teachers had said that 
 Paul was terrible only in his letters. 
 He boasted of his power, but it was, 
 they supposed, only epistolary bravery. 
 He would not dare to execute his 
 threatening. In reply to this, Paul, in 
 a strain of severe irony, says that he 
 would not seem to terrify them by mere 
 letters. It would be by something far 
 more severe. He advised such objectors, 
 therefore, to believe that he would prove 
 himself to be such as he had shown 
 himself to be in his letters ; to look at 
 the evidence, since they boasted of their 
 talent for reasoning, that he would 
 show himself in fact to be what he had 
 threatened to be. ver. 9 — 12. 
 
 (5.) He pursues the strain of severe 
 irony by secretly comparing himself 
 with them. ver. 12 — 16. They boasted 
 much, but it was only by comparing 
 themselves with one another, and not 
 with any elevated standard of excel- 
 lence. Paul admitted that he had not 
 the courage to do that. ver. 12. Nor did 
 he dare to boast of things wholly be- 
 yond his ability as they had done. He 
 was contented to act only within the 
 18 
 
 gentleness of Christ, who *in 
 presence b am base among you, 
 
 * or, in outward appearance, 
 b ver. 10. 
 
 proper limits prescribed to him by his 
 talents and by the appointment of God. 
 Not so they. They had boldness and 
 courage to go far beyond that, and to 
 boast of things wholly beyond their 
 ability, and beyond the proper measure, 
 ver. 13, 14. Nor had he courage to 
 boast of entering into other men's la- 
 bours. It required more courage than 
 he had, to make a boast of what he had 
 done if he had availed himself of things 
 made ready to his hand as if they were 
 the fruit of his own labours, implying 
 that they had done this ; that they had 
 come to Corinth, a church founded by 
 his labours, and had quietly set them- 
 selves down there, and then, instead 
 of going into other fields of labour, had 
 called in question the authority of him 
 who had founded the church, and who 
 was labouring indefatigably elsewhere. 
 ver. 15, 16. Paul adds, that such was 
 not his intention. He aimed to preach 
 the gospel beyond, to carry it to regions 
 where it had not been spread. Such 
 was the nature of his courage ; such 
 the kind of boldness which he had, and 
 he was not ambitious to join them in 
 their boasting. 
 
 (6.) He concludes this chapter with 
 a very serious admonition. Leaving 
 the strain of irony, he seriously says 
 that if any man were disposed to boast, 
 it should be only in the Lord. He 
 should glory not in self-commendation, 
 but in the fact that he had evidence 
 that the Lord approved him ; not in his 
 own talents or powers, but in the excel- 
 lence and glory of the Lord. ver. 17, 18. 
 
 1. Now I Paul my self beseech you. 
 I entreat you who are members of the 
 church not to give me occasion for the 
 exercise of severity in discipline. I have 
 just expressed my confidence in the 
 church in general, and my belief that 
 you will act in accordance with the 
 rules of the gospel. But I cannot thus 
 speak of all. There are some among 
 
206 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 but being absent -am bold toward 
 you : 
 
 2 But I beseech you, that I 
 may not be bold when I am 
 present with that confidence, 
 
 you who have spoken with contempt 
 of my authority and my claims as an 
 apostle. Of them I cannot speak in 
 this manner; but instead of command- 
 ing them I entreat them not to give 
 me occasion for the exercise of discipline. 
 t By the meekness and gentleness of 
 Christ. In view of the meekness and 
 mildness of the Redeemer ; or desiring 
 to imitate his gentleness and kindness. 
 Paul wished to imitate that. He did 
 not wish to have occasion for severity. 
 He desired at all times to imitate, and 
 to exhibit the gentle feelings of the 
 Saviour. He had no pleasure in seve- 
 rity; and he did not desire to exhibit it. 
 1 Who in presence. Marg. In outward 
 appearance. It may either mean that 
 when present among them he appeared, 
 according to their representation, to be 
 humble, mild, gentle (ver. 10) ; or that 
 in his external appearance he had this 
 aspect. See on ver. 10. Most probably 
 it means that they had represented him 
 as timid when among them, and afraid 
 to exercise discipline, however much he 
 had threatened it. ^ Am buse among 
 you. The word here used (tuttuvc;) 
 usually means low, humble, poor. Here 
 it means timid, modest, the opposite of 
 boldness. Such was formerly the mean- 
 ing of the English word base. It was 
 applied to those of low degree or rank ; 
 of humble birth ; and stood opposed to 
 those of elevated rank or dignity. Now 
 it is commonly used to denote that 
 which is degraded or worthless ; of 
 mean spirit ; vile ; and stands opposed 
 to that which is manly and noble. But 
 Paul did not mean to use it here in that 
 sense. He meant to say that they re- 
 garded him as timid and afraid to exe- 
 cute the punishment which he had 
 threatened, and as manifesting a spirit 
 which was the opposite of boldness. 
 This was doubtless a charge which 
 they brought against him ; but we are 
 
 wherewith* I think to be bold 
 against some, which * think of 
 us as if we walked according to 
 the flesh. 
 
 a 1 Co. 4. 21. c. 13. 2, 10. i or, reckon. 
 
 not necessarily to infer that it was true. 
 All that it proves is, that he was modest 
 and unobtrusive, and that they inter- 
 preted this as timidity and want of spirit. 
 % But being absent am bold toward 
 you. That is, in my letters. See on 
 ver. 10. This they charged him with, 
 that he was bold enough when away 
 from them, but that he would be tame 
 enough when he should meet them face 
 to face, and that they had nothing to 
 fear from him. 
 
 2. That I may not be bold. I entreat 
 you so to act that I may not have occa- 
 sion to exercise the severity which I 
 fear I shall be compelled to against 
 those who accuse me of being governed 
 wholly by worldly motives and policy. 
 \ That I may not be bold. That I may 
 not be compelled to be bold and decisive 
 in my measures by your improper con- 
 duct. T Which think of us. Marg. 
 Reckon. They suppose this ; or, they 
 accuse me of it. By the word "us" 
 here Paul means himself, though it is 
 possible also that he speaks in the name 
 of his fellow-apostles and labourers who 
 were associated with him, and the ob- 
 jections may have referred to all who 
 acted with him. Tf As if we walked. 
 As if we lived or acted. The word 
 " walk" in the Scriptures is often used 
 to denote the course or manner of life. 
 
 i Notes, Rom. iv. 12. 2 Cor. v. 7. <[ Ac- 
 cording to the Jlesh. See Note on 
 
 I ch. i. 17. As if we were governed 
 by the weak and corrupt principles of 
 human nature. As if we had no higher 
 motive than carnal and worldly policy. 
 
 ; As if we were seeking our own advan- 
 tage and not the welfare of the world. 
 
 , The charge was, probably, that he was 
 not governed by high and holy princi- 
 ples, but by the principles of mere 
 worldly policy ; that he was guided by 
 personal interests, and by worldly views 
 — by ambition, or the love of dominion, 
 
A. D. 60.J 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 207 
 
 3 For though we walk in the 
 flesh, we do not war after ° the 
 flesh: 
 
 4 (For the weapons b of our 
 
 a Ro. 8. 13. b Ep. 6. 13. 1 Th. 5. 8. 
 
 wealth, or popularity, and that he was 
 destitute of every supernatural endow- 
 ment and every evidence of a divine 
 commission. 
 
 3. For though we walk in the flesh. 
 Though we are mortal like other men ; 
 though we dwell like them in mortal 
 bodies, and necessarily must devote 
 some care to our temporal wants ; and 
 though, being in the flesh, we are con- 
 scious of imperfections and frailties like 
 others. The sense is, that he did not 
 claim exemption from the common 
 wants and frailties of nature. The best 
 of men are subject to these wants and 
 frailties ; the best of men are liable to 
 err. f We do not war after the flesh. 
 The warfare in which he was engaged 
 was with sin, idolatry, and all forms 
 of evil. He means that in conducting 
 this he was not actuated by worldly 
 views or policy, or by such ambitious 
 and interested aims as controlled the 
 men of this world. This refers prima- 
 rily to the warfare in which Paul was 
 himself engaged as an apostle ; and the 
 idea is, that he went forth as a soldier 
 under the great Captain of his salvation 
 to fight his battles and to make con- 
 quests for him. A similar allusion 
 occurs in 2 Tim. ii. 3, 4. It is true, 
 however, that not only all ministers, but 
 all Christians are engaged in a warfare ; 
 and it is equally true that they do not 
 maintain their conflict " after the flesh," 
 or on the principles which govern the 
 men of this world. The warfare of 
 Christians relates to the following points. 
 (1.) It is a warfare with the corrupt 
 desires and sensual propensities of the 
 heart : with internal corruption and de- 
 pravity, with the remaining unsubdued 
 propensities of a fallen nature. (2.) With 
 the powers of darkness ; the mighty 
 •pirits of evil that seek to destroy us. 
 See Eph. vi. 11—17. (3.) With sin 
 in all forms ; with idolatry, sensuality, 
 
 warfare c are not carnal, but 
 mighty * through ° God to the 
 pulling down ' of strong holds ;) 
 
 c 1 Ti. 1. 18. » or, to. d c. 13. 3, 4. 
 
 e Jer. 1. 10. 
 
 corruption, intemperance, profaneness, 
 wherever they may exist. The Chris- 
 tian is opposed to all these, and it is the 
 aim and purpose of his life as far as 
 he may be able to resist and subdue 
 them. He is a soldier enlisted under 
 the banner of the Redeemer to oppose 
 and resist all forms of evil. But his 
 warfare is not conducted on worldly 
 principles. Mahomet propagated his 
 religion with the sword ; and the men 
 of this world seek for victory by arms 
 and violence. The Christian looks for 
 his conquests only by the force and 
 power of truth, and by the agency of 
 the Spirit of God. 
 
 4. For the weapons of our warfare. 
 The means by which we hope to 
 achieve our victory, % Are not carnal. 
 Not those of the flesh. Not such as 
 the men of the world use. They are 
 not such as are employed by conquerors; 
 nor are they such as men in general 
 rely on to advance their cause. We do 
 not depend on eloquence, or talent, or 
 learning, or wealth, or beauty, or any 
 of the external aids on which the men 
 of this world rely. They are not such 
 as derive advantage from any power in- 
 herent in themselves. Their strength 
 is derived from God alone. ^ But 
 mighty through God. Marg. "to." 
 They are rendered mighty or powerful 
 by the agency of God. They depend 
 on him for their efficacy. Paul has not 
 here specified the weapons on which 
 he relied ; but he had before specified 
 them (ch. vi. 6, 7), so that there was 
 no danger of mistake. The weapons 
 were such as were furnished by truth 
 and righteousness, and these were ren- 
 dered mighty by the attending agency 
 of God. The sense is, that God is the 
 author of the doctrines which we preach, 
 and that he attends them with the 
 agency of his Spirit, and accompanies 
 them to the hearts of men. It is im- 
 
208 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 5 Casting down * imagina- 
 tions, ■ and every high b thing 
 that exalteth itself against the 
 
 * or, reasonings. a 1 Co. 1. 19. 
 
 b Ps. 18. 27. Ez. 17. 24. 
 
 portant for all ministers to feel that 
 their weapons are mighty only through 
 God. Conquerors and earthly warriors 
 go into battle depending in the might 
 of their own arm, and on the wisdom 
 and skill which plans the battle. The 
 Christian goes on his warfare, feeling 
 that however well adapted the truths 
 which he holds are to accomplish great 
 purposes, and however wisely his plans 
 are formed, yet that the efficacy of all 
 depends on the agency of God. He 
 has no hope of victory but in God. And 
 if God does not attend him, he is sure 
 of inevitable defeat. ^ To the put- 
 ting down of strongholds. The word 
 here rendered " strongholds" (s^w^a) 
 means properly a fastness, fortress, or 
 strong fortification. It is here beautifully 
 used to denote the various obstacles 
 resembling a fortress which exist, and 
 which are designed and adapted to 
 oppose the truth and the triumph of the 
 Christian's cause. All those obstacles 
 are strongly fortified. The sins of his 
 heart are fortified by long indulgence 
 and by the hold which they have on 
 his soul. The wickedness of the world 
 which he opposes is strongly fortified 
 by the fact that it has seized on 
 strong human passions ; that one point 
 stengthens another ; that great numbers 
 are united. The idolatry of the world 
 was strongly fortified by prejudice, and 
 long establishment, and the protection 
 of laws, and the power of the priest- 
 hood ; and the opinions of the world 
 are entrenched behind false philosophy 
 and the power of subtle argumentation. 
 The whole world is fortified against 
 Christianity; and the nations of the 
 earth have been engaged in little else 
 than in raising and strengthening such 
 strongholds for the space of six thou- 
 sand years. The Christian religion 
 goes forth against all the combined and 
 concentrated powers of resistance of the 
 
 knowledge of God, and bringing 
 into captivity c every thought to d 
 the obedience of Christ : 
 
 c Mat. 11.29,30. 
 dGe. 8. 21. Mat. 15. 19. He. 4. 12. 
 
 whole world ; and the warfare is to be 
 waged against every strongly fortified 
 place of error and of sin. These strong 
 fortifications of error and of sin are to 
 be battered down and laid in ruins by 
 our spiritual weapons. 
 
 5. Casting down imaginations. 
 Marg. reasonings. The word is pro- 
 bably used here in the sense of device, 
 and refers to all the plans of a wicked 
 world ; the various systems of false 
 philosophy ; and the reasonings of the 
 enemies of the gospel. The various 
 systems of false philosophy were so 
 intrenched that they might be called the 
 stronghold of the enemies of God. The 
 foes of Christianity pretend to a great 
 deal of reason, and rely on that in re- 
 sisting the gospel. If And every high 
 thing, &c. Every exalted opinion 
 respecting the dignity and purity of 
 human .nature ; all the pride of the 
 human heart and of the understanding. 
 All this is opposed to the knowledge of 
 God, and all exalts itself into a vain 
 self-confidence. Men entertain vain 
 and unfounded opinions respecting their 
 own excellency, and they feel that they 
 do not need the provisions of the gospel 
 and are unwilling to submit to God. 
 Tf And bringing info captivity, &c. 
 The figure here is evidently taken from 
 military conquests. The idea is, that 
 all the strongholds of heathenism, and 
 pride, and sin would be demolished ; and 
 that when this was done, like throwing 
 down the walls of a city or making a 
 breach, all the plans and purposes of 
 the soul, the reason, the imagination, 
 and all the powers of the mind would 
 be subdued or led in triumph by the 
 gospel, like the inhabitants of a captured 
 city. Christ was the great Captain in 
 this warfare. In his name the battle 
 was waged, and by his power the victory 
 was won. The captives were made for 
 him and under his authority ; and all 
 
A.D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 6 And having in a readiness 
 to revenge all disobedience, when 
 your obedience ° is fulfilled. 
 
 a c. 7. 15. 
 
 were to be subject to his control. 
 Every power of thought in the heathen 
 world ; all the systems of philosophy 
 and all forms of opinion among men ; 
 all the purposes of the soul ; all the 
 powers of reason, memory, judgment, 
 fancy in an individual, were all to come 
 under the laws of Christ. All doctrines 
 were to be in accordance with his will ; 
 philosophy should no longer control 
 them, but they should be subject to the 
 will of Christ. All the plans of life 
 Bhould be controlled by the will of Christ, 
 and formed and executed under his 
 control — as captives are led by a con- 
 queror. All the emotions an d feelings of 
 the heart should be controlled by him, 
 and led by him as a captive is led by 
 a victor. The sense is, that it was the 
 aim, and purpose of Paul to accomplish 
 this, and that it would certainly be done. 
 The strongholds of philosophy, hea- 
 thenism, and sin should be demolished, 
 and all the opinions, plans, and purposes 
 of the world should become subject to 
 the all-conquering Redeemer. 
 
 6. And having in a readiness, &c. 
 I am ready to punish all disobedience, 
 notwithstanding all that is said to the 
 contrary. See Notes on ver. 1, 2. 
 Clothed as I am with this power ; aim- 
 ing to subdue all things to Christ, though 
 the weapons of my warfare are not 
 carnal, and though I am modest or 
 timid (ver. 1) when I am with you, I 
 am prepared to take any measures of 
 severity required by my apostolic office 
 in order that I may inflict deserved pun- 
 ishment on those who have violated the 
 laws of Christ. The design of this is, 
 to meet the objection of his enemies, 
 that he would not dare to execute his 
 threatenings. ^ When your obedience 
 is fulfilled. Doddridge renders this, 
 "now your obedience is fulfilled, and 
 the sounder part of your church restored 
 to due order and submission." The j 
 idea seems to be, that Paul was ready I 
 18* 
 
 7 Do ye look on things after 
 the outward b appearance ? If 
 any man trust to himself that he 
 
 b Jno. 7. 24. 
 
 to inflict discipline when the church 
 had showed a readiness to obey his laws, 
 and to do its own duty — delicately inti- 
 mating that the reason why it was not 
 done was the want of entire promptness 
 in the church itself, and that it could not 
 be done on any offender as long as the 
 church itself was not prepared to sustain 
 him. The church was to discountenance 
 the enemies of the Redeemer ; to show 
 an entire readiness to sustain the apostle, 
 and to unite with him in the effort to 
 maintain the discipline of Christ's 
 house. 
 
 7. Do ye look on things after the 
 outward appearance ? This is address- 
 ed evidently to the members of the 
 church, and with reference to the claims 
 which had been set up by the false 
 teachers. There can be no doubt that 
 they valued themselves on their external 
 advantages, and laid claim to peculiar 
 honour in the work of the ministry, be- 
 cause they were superior in personal 
 appearance, in rank, manners, or elo- 
 quence to Paul. Paul reproves them 
 for thus judging, and assures them thai 
 this was not a proper criterion by which 
 to determine on qualifications for the 
 apostolic office. Such things were high- 
 ly valued among the Greeks, and a con- 
 siderable part of the eflbrt of Paul in 
 these letters is to show that these things 
 constitute no evidence that those who 
 possessed them were sent from God. 
 1 If any man trust to himself &c. 
 This refers to the false teachers who 
 laid claims to be the followers of Christ 
 by way of eminence. Whoever these 
 teachers were, it is evident that they 
 claimed to be on the side of Christ, and 
 to be appointed by him. They were 
 probably Jews, and they boasted of their 
 talents and eloquence, and possibly that 
 they had seen the Saviour. The phrase 
 " trust to himself," seems to imply that 
 they relied on some special merit of their 
 own, or some special advantage which 
 
210 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 is Christ's, let him of himself 
 think this again, that, as he is 
 Christ's, even so are we Christ's. 
 8 For though I should boast 
 somewhat more of our authority, 
 ° which the Lord hath given us 
 
 ac. 13.2,3. 
 
 they had. — Bloornjield. It may have 
 been that they were of the same tribe 
 that he was, or that they had seen him, 
 or that they confided in their own talents 
 or endowments as proof that they had 
 been sent by him. It is not an un- 
 common thing for men to have such 
 confidence in their own gifts, and par- 
 ticularly in a power of fluent speaking, 
 as to suppose that this is a sufficient 
 evidence that they are sent to preach 
 the gospel. % Let him of himself think 
 this again. Since he relies so much 
 on himself; since he has such confi- 
 dence in his own powers, let him look 
 at the evidence that I also am of Christ. 
 % That as he is Christ's, even so are we 
 Chrisfs. That I have given as much 
 evidence that I am commissioned by 
 Christ as they can produce. It may be 
 of a different kind. It is not in elo- 
 quence, and rank, and the gift of a rapid 
 and ready elocution, but it may be su- 
 perior to what they are able to produce. 
 Probably Paul refers here to the fact 
 that he had seen the Lord Jesus, and 
 that he had been directly commissioned 
 by him. The sense is, that no one 
 could produce more proofs of being 
 called to the ministry than he could. 
 
 8. For though I should boast, &c. 
 If I should make even higher claims 
 than I have done to a divine commission. 
 I could urge higher evidence than I have 
 done that I am sent by the Lord Jesus. 
 1 Of our authority. Of my authority 
 as an apostle, my power to administer 
 discipline, and to direct the affairs of the 
 church. "|f Which the Lord hath given 
 us for edification. A power primarily 
 conferred to build up his people and save 
 them and not to destroy. If J should 
 not be ashamed. It would be founded 
 on good evidence and sustained by the 
 nature of my commission. I should 
 
 for edification, h and not for your 
 destruction, I should not be 
 ashamed : 
 
 9 That I may not seem as if I 
 would terrify you by letters. 
 
 10 For his letters, • say they, 
 
 b c. 13. 
 
 i said he. 
 
 also have no occasion to be ashamed of 
 the manner in which it has been exer- 
 cised — a power that has in fact been 
 employed in extending religion and 
 edifying the church, and not in originat- 
 ing and sustaining measures fitted to 
 destroy the soul. 
 
 9. That I may not seem, &c. The 
 meaning of this verse seems to be this. 
 ' I say that I might boast more of my 
 power in order that I may not appear 
 disposed to terrify you with my letters 
 merely. I do not threaten more than I 
 can perform. I have it in my power to 
 execute all that I have threatened, and 
 to strike an awe not only by my letters, 
 but by the infliction of extraordinary 
 miraculous punishments. And if I 
 should boast that I had done this, and 
 could do it again, I should have no 
 reason to be ashamed. It would not 
 be vain and empty boasting ; not boast- 
 ing which is not well-founded.' 
 
 10. For his letters. The letters which 
 he has sent to the church when absent. 
 Reference is had here probably to the 
 first epistle to the Corinthians. They 
 might also have seen some of Paul's 
 other epistles, and been so well ac- 
 quainted with them as to be able to 
 make the general remark that he had 
 the power of writing in an authorita- 
 tive and impressive manner. 1 Say 
 they. Marg. Said he. Greek (<?»«•/) 
 in the singular. This seems to have 
 referred to some one person who had 
 uttered the words — perhaps some one 
 who was the principal leader of the 
 faction opposed to Paul. % Are weighty 
 and powerful. Tindal renders this, 
 " Sore and strong." The Greek is,' heavy 
 and strong' (fiz^uai x.*i iV^w^at/). The 
 sense is, that his letters were energetic 
 and powerful. They abounded with 
 strong argument, manly appeals, and 
 
A. D. 60.] CHAPTER X. 2, i 
 
 are weighty and powerful ; but his bodily presence is weak, 
 
 impressive reproof. This even his ene- 
 mies were compelled to admit, and this 
 no one can deny who ever read them. 
 Paul's letters comprise a considerable 
 portion of the New Testament ; and 
 some of the most important doctrines 
 of the New Testament are those which 
 are alvocated and enforced by him ; and 
 his .etters have done more to give shape 
 to the theological doctrines of the Chris- 
 tian world than any other cause what- 
 ever. He wrote fourteen epistles to 
 churches and individuals on various 
 occasions and on a great variety of 
 topics ; and his letters soon rose into 
 very high repute among even the in- 
 spired ministers of the New Testament 
 (see 2 Pet. iii. 15, 16), and were re- 
 garded as inculcating the most important 
 doctrines of religion. The general 
 characteristics of Paul's letters are, 
 (1.) They are strongly argumentative. 
 See especially the epistles to the Ro- 
 mans and the Hebrews. (2.) They are 
 distinguished for boldness and vigor 
 of style. (3.) They are written under 
 great energy of feeling and of thought — 
 a rapid and impetuous torrent that bears 
 him forcibly along. (4.) They abound 
 more than most other writings in paren- 
 theses, and the sentences are often in- 
 volved and obscure. (5.) They often 
 evince rapid transitions and departures 
 from the regular current of thought. 
 A thought strikes him suddenly, and 
 he pauses to illustrate it, and dwells 
 upon it long, before he returns to the 
 main subject. The consequence is, 
 that it is often difficult to follow him. 
 (G.) They are powerful in reproof — 
 abounding with strokes of great bold- 
 ness of denunciation, and also with 
 specimens of most withering sarcasm 
 and most delicate irony. (7.) They 
 abound in expressions of great tender- 
 ness and pathos. Nowhere can be 
 found expressions of a heart more ten- 
 der and affectionate than in the writings 
 of Paul. (8.) They dwell much on 
 great and profound doctrines, and on the 
 application of the principles of Chris- 
 
 tianity to the various duties of life. 
 (9.) They abound with references to 
 the Saviour. He illustrates every thing 
 by his life, his example, his death, his 
 resurrection. It is not wonderful that 
 letters composed on such subjects and 
 in such a manner by an inspired man 
 produced a deep impression on the 
 Christian world ; nor that they should 
 be regarded now as among the most 
 important and valuable portions of the 
 Bible. Take away Paul's letters, and 
 what a chasm would be made in the 
 New Testament ! What a chasm in 
 the religious opinions and in the con- 
 solations of the Christian world ! ^f But 
 his bodily presence. His personal ap- 
 pearance. 1 Is weak. Imbecile, feeble 
 (£?$»»;) — a word often used to denote 
 infirmity of body, sickness, disease. 
 Matt. xxv. 39. 43, 44. Luke x. 9. Acts 
 iv. 9 ; v. 15, 10. 1 Cor. xi. 30. Here 
 it is to be observed that this is a mere 
 charge which was brought against him, 
 and it is not of necessity to be supposed 
 that it was true, though the presumption 
 is, that there was some foundation for 
 it. It is supposed to refer to some bodily 
 imperfections, and possibly to his dimi- 
 nutive stature. Chrysostom says that 
 his stature was low, his body crooked, 
 and his head bald. Lucian, in his Phi- 
 lopatris, says of him, corpore erat par- 
 vo, contracto, incurvo, tricubitali — pro- 
 bably an exaggerated description, perhaps 
 a caricature — to denote one very di- 
 minutive and having no advantages of 
 personal appearance. According to 
 Nicephorus, Paul "was a little man, 
 crooked, and almost bent like a bow ; 
 with a pale countenance, long and 
 wrinkled; a bald head; his eyes full 
 of fire and benevolence ; his beard long, 
 thick, and interspersed with gray hairs, 
 as was his head," &c. But there is no 
 certain evidence of the truth of these 
 representations. Nothing in the Bible 
 would lead us to suppose that Paul was 
 remarkably diminutive or deformed ; 
 and though there may be some founda- 
 tion for the charge here alleged that his 
 
213 
 
 and 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 his speech contemptible. 
 
 11 Let such an one think this, 
 
 that, such as we are in word by 
 
 letters when we are absent, 
 
 bodily presence was weak, yet we are 
 to remember that this was the accusa- 
 tion of his enemies, and that it was 
 doubtless greatly exaggerated. Nice- 
 phorus was a writer of the sixteenth cen- 
 tury, and his statements are worthy of 
 no regard. That Paul was eminently 
 an eloquent man may be inferred from 
 a great many considerations ; some of 
 which are, ( 1 .) His recorded discourses 
 in the Acts of the Apostles, and the 
 effect produced by them. No one can 
 read his defence before Agrippa or Fe- 
 lix and not be convinced that as an 
 orator he deserves to be ranked among 
 the most distinguished of ancient times. 
 No one who reads the account in the 
 Acts can believe that he had any re- 
 markable impediment in his speech or 
 that he was remarkably deformed. (2.) 
 Such was somehow his grace and power 
 as an orator that he was taken by the 
 inhabitants of Lycaonia as Mercury, the 
 god of eloquence. Acts xvi. 12. As- 
 suredly the evidence here is, that Paul 
 was not deformed. (3.) It may be 
 added, that Paul is mentioned by Lon- 
 ginus among the principal orators of 
 antiquity. Prom these circumstances, 
 there is no reason to believe that Paul 
 was remarkably deficient in the quali- 
 fications requisite for an orator, or that 
 he was in any way remarkably deform- 
 ed. If And his speech contemptible. 
 To be despised. Some suppose that he 
 had an impediment in his speech. But 
 conjecture here is vain and useless. 
 We are to remember that this is a 
 charge made by his adversaries, and that 
 it was made by the fastidious Greeks, 
 who professed to be great admirers of 
 eloquence, but who in his time confided 
 much more in the mere art of the 
 rhetorician than in the power of thought, 
 and in energetic appeals to the reason 
 and conscience of men. Judged by 
 their standard it may be that Paul had 
 not the graces in voice or manner, or in 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 in deed 
 
 such will we be also 
 when we are present. 
 
 12 For a we dare not make 
 
 oc. 3. 1. 
 
 the knowledge of the Greek language, 
 which they esteemed necessary in a 
 finished orator ; but judged by his power 
 of thought, and his bold and manly 
 defence of truth, and his energy of 
 character and manner, and his power 
 of impressing truth on mankind, he 
 deserves, doubtless, to be ranked among 
 the first orators of antiquity. No man 
 has left the impress of his own mind on 
 more other minds than Paul. 
 
 11. Let such an one think this, &c. 
 Let them not flatter themselves that 
 there will be any discrepancy between 
 my words and my deeds. Let them 
 feel that all which has been threatened 
 will be certainly executed unless there 
 is repentance. Paul here designedly 
 contradicts the charge which was made 
 against him ; and means to say that all 
 that he had threatened in his letters would 
 be certainly executed unless there was 
 reform. I think that the evidence here 
 is clear that Paul does not intend to ad- 
 mit what they said about his bodily 
 presence to be true ; and most probably 
 all that has been recorded about his de- 
 formity is mere fable. 
 
 12. For we dare not make ourselves 
 of the number. We admit that we are 
 not bold enough for that. They had 
 accused him of a want of boldness and 
 energy when present with them. ver. 
 1. 10. Here, in a strain of severe but 
 delicate irony, he says he was not bold 
 enough to do things which they had 
 done. He did not dare to do the things 
 which had been done among them. To 
 such boldness of character, present or 
 absent, he could lay no claim. If Or 
 compare ourselves, &c. I am not bold 
 enough for that. That requires a stretch 
 of boldness and energy to which I can 
 lay no claim. % That commend them~ 
 selves. That put themselves forward, 
 and that boast of their endowments 
 and attainments. It is probable that 
 this was commonly done by those to 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 213 
 
 ourselves of the number, or com- 
 pare ourselves with some that 
 commend themselves : but they 
 measuring themselves by them- 
 
 whom the apostle here refers ; and it 
 is certain that it is everywhere the 
 characteristic of pride. To do this, 
 Paul say s, required greater boldness than 
 he possessed, and on this point he yield- 
 ed to them the palm. The satire here 
 is very delicate, and yet very severe, and 
 was such as would doubtless be felt by 
 them. "I But they measuring them- 
 selves by themselves. Whitby and 
 Clarke suppose that this means that 
 they compared themselves with each 
 other ; and that they made the false 
 apostles particularly their standard. 
 Doddridge, Grotius, Bloomfield, and 
 some others suppose the sense to be, 
 that they made themselves the stand- 
 ard of excellence. They looked con- 
 tinually on their own accomplish- 
 ments, and did not look at the excel- 
 lences of others. They thus formed a 
 disproportionate opinion of themselves, 
 and undervalued all others. Paul says 
 that he had not boldness enough for 
 that. It required a moral courage to 
 which he could lay no claim. Horace 
 (Epis. i. 7. 98) has an expression simi- 
 lar to this. 
 
 Metiri se quemque suo modulo ac pede, 
 verum est. 
 
 The sense of Paul is, that they made 
 themselves the standard of excellence ; 
 that they were satisfied with their own 
 attainments ; and that they overlooked 
 the superior excellence and attainments 
 of others. This is a graphic description 
 of pride and self-complacency ; and, 
 alas ! it is what is often exhibited. How 
 many there are, and it is to be feared 
 even among professing Christians, who 
 have no other standard of excellence 
 than themselves. Their views are the 
 standard of orthodoxy ; their modes of 
 worship are the standard of the proper 
 manner of devotion ; their habits and 
 customs are in their own estimation per- 
 fect ; and their own characters are the 
 
 selves, and comparing themselves 
 among themselves, * are not 
 wise. • 
 
 13 But we will not boast of 
 
 * understand it not. a Pr. 26. 12. 
 
 models of excellence, and they see little 
 or no excellence in those who differ 
 from them. They look on themselves 
 as the true measure of orthodoxy, hu- 
 mility, zeal, and piety ; and they con- 
 demn all others, however excellent they 
 may be, who differ from them, f And 
 comparing themselves, &c. Or rather 
 comparing themselves with themselves. 
 Themselves they make to be the stand- 
 ard, and they judge of every thing by 
 that, 1 Are not wise. Are stupid and 
 foolish. Because, (1.) They had no 
 such excellence as to make themselves 
 the standard. (2.) Because this was 
 an indication of pride. (3.) Because 
 it made them blind to the excellences of 
 others. It was to be presumed that 
 others had endowments not inferior to 
 theirs. (4.) Because the requirements 
 of God, and the character of the Re- 
 deemer were the proper standard of 
 conduct. Nothing is a more certain 
 indication of folly than for a man to 
 make himself the standard of excellence. 
 Such an individual must be blind to his 
 own real character ; and the only thing 
 certain about his attainments is, that he 
 is inflated with pride. And yet how 
 common ! How self-satisfied are most 
 persons ! How pleased with their own 
 character and attainments ! How grieved 
 at any comparison which is made with 
 others implying their inferiority ! How 
 prone to undervalue all others simply 
 because they differ from them! — The 
 margin renders this, "understand it not," 
 that is, they do not understand their 
 own character or their inferiority. 
 
 1 3. But we will not boast of things 
 without our measure. Tindal renders 
 this, "But we will not rejoice above 
 measure." There is great obscurity in 
 the language here, arising from its 
 brevity. But the general idea seems to 
 be plain. Paul says that he had not 
 boldness as they had to boast of things 
 
214 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 things without our measure, but 
 according to the measure of the 
 1 rule which God hath distributed 
 
 i or, line. 
 
 wholly beyond his proper rule and his 
 actual attainments and influence : and, 
 especially, that he was not disposed to 
 enter into other men's labours; or to 
 boast of things that had been done by 
 the mere influence of his name, and 
 beyond the proper limits of his personal 
 exertions. He made no boast of hav- 
 ing done any thing where he had not 
 been himself on the ground and laboured 
 assiduously to secure the object. They, 
 it is not improbable, had boasted of what 
 had been done in Corinth as though it 
 were really their work, though it had 
 been done by the apostle himself. Nay 
 more, it is probable that they boasted 
 of what had been done by the mere in- 
 fluence of their name. Occupying a 
 central position, they supposed that 
 their reputation had gone abroad, and 
 that the mere influence of their reputa- 
 tion had had an important effect. Not 
 so with Paul. He made no boast of 
 any thing but what God had enabled 
 him to do by his evangelical labours, 
 and by personal exertions. He entered 
 into no other men's labours, and claim- 
 ed nothing that others had done as his 
 own. He was not bold enough for that. 
 H But according to the measure of the 
 rule, &c. Marg. Or, line. The word 
 rendered " rule" (Greek, kxvJLv, whence 
 our English word canon) means pro- 
 perly a reed, rod, or staff employed to 
 keep any thing stiff, erect, asunder 
 (Horn. II. 8. 1 03) ; then a measuring 
 rod o. line ; then any standard or rule — 
 its usual meaning in the New Testa- 
 ment, as, e. g., of life and doctrine. 
 Gal. vi. 16. Phil. iii. 16.— Robinson's 
 Lex Here it means the limit, boun- 
 dary line, or sphere of action assigned 
 to any one. Paul means to say that 
 God had appropriated a certain line or 
 boundary as the proper limit of his 
 sphere of action; that his appropriate 
 sphere extended to them ; that in going 
 to them, though they were far distant 
 
 to us, a measure to reach even 
 unto you. 
 
 14 For we stretch not our- 
 selves beyond our measure, as 
 
 from the field of his early labours, he 
 had confined himself within the proper 
 limits assigned him by God ; and that 
 in boasting of his labours among them 
 he was not boasting of any thing which 
 did not properly fall within the sphere 
 of labour assigned to him. The mean- 
 ing is, that Paul was especially careful 
 not to boast of any thing beyond his 
 proper bounds. 1 Which God hath 
 distributed to us. Which in assigning 
 our respective fields of labour God has 
 assigned unto me and my fellow- 
 labourers. The Greek word here ren- 
 dered "distributed" (^^ct) means 
 properly to measure ; and the sense is, 
 that God had measured out or appor- 
 tioned their respective fields of labour ; 
 that by his providence he had assigned 
 to each one his proper sphere, and that 
 in the distribution Corinth had fallen to 
 the lot of Paul. In going there he had 
 kept within the proper limits ; in boast- 
 ing of his labours and success there he 
 did not boast of what did not belong to 
 him. ^ -4 measure to reach even unto 
 you. The sense is, ' the limits assigned 
 me include you, and I may therefore 
 justly boast of what I have done among 
 you as within my proper field of labour.' 
 Paul was the apostle to the Gentiles 
 (Acts xx vi. 17, 18) ; and the whole 
 country of Greece therefore he regarded 
 as falling within the limits assigned to 
 him. No one therefore could blame 
 him for going there as if he was an 
 intruder ; no one assert that he had 
 gone beyond the proper bounds. 
 
 14. For we stretch not mirt-elves be- 
 yond our measure. In coming to preach 
 to you we have not gone beyond the 
 proper limits assigned us. We have 
 not endeavoured to enlarge the proper 
 boundaries, to stretch the line which 
 limited us, but have kept honestly 
 within the proper limits. % As though 
 we reached not unto you. That is, as 
 if our boundaries did not extend so fai 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 215 
 
 though we reached not unto you ; 
 for we are come as far as to you 
 also in preaching the gospel of 
 Christ : 
 
 15 Not boasting of things 
 
 as to comprehend you. We have not 
 overstepped the proper limits, as if 
 Greece was not within the proper 
 sphere of action, t For we are come 
 as far to you, &c. In the regular 
 work of preaching the gospel we have 
 come to you. We have gone from 
 place to place preaching the gospel 
 where we had opportunity ; we have 
 omitted no important places, until in 
 the regular discharge of our duties in 
 preaching we have reached you and 
 have preached the gospel to you. We 
 have not omitted other places in order to 
 come to you and enter into the proper 
 field of labour of others, but in the 
 regular work of making the gospel 
 known as far as possible to all men we 
 have come to Corinth. Far as it is, 
 therefore, from the place where we 
 started, we have approached it in a 
 regular manner, and have not gone out 
 of our proper province in doing it. 
 
 15. Net boasting of things without. 
 our measure. There is here probably 
 an allusion to the false teachers at 
 Corinth. They had come after Paul 
 had been there, and had entered into 
 his labours. When he had founded 
 the church ; when he had endured trials 
 and persecutions in order to reach Co- 
 rinth ; when he had laboured there for 
 a year and a half (Acts xviii. 11), they 
 came and entered the quiet and easy 
 field, formed parties, and claimed the 
 field as their own. Paul says that he 
 had not courage to do that. See Note, 
 ver. 12. That required a species of 
 boldness to which he could lay no claim ; 
 and he did not assume honour to him- 
 self like that. ^ That is, of other men's 
 labours. Not intruding into churches 
 which we did not establish, and claim- 
 ing the right to direct their affairs, and 
 to exclude the founders from all proper 
 honours and all influence, and endea- 
 vouring to alienate the affections of 
 
 without our measure, that is. 
 of a other men's labours ; bu.* 
 having hope, when your faith is 
 increased, that we shall be x en- 
 
 a Ro. 15. 20. i or, magnified in you. 
 
 Christians from their spiritual father and 
 guide. 1 But having hope, &c. So 
 far from this ; so far from a desire to 
 enter into the labours of others and 
 quietly enjoying the avails of their in- 
 dustry ; and so far even from a desire 
 to sit down ourselves and enjoy the 
 fruit of our own labours, I desire to pene- 
 trate other untrodden regions ; to en- 
 counter new dangers ; to go where the 
 gospel has not been planted, and to rear 
 other churches there. I do not, there- 
 fore, make these remarks as if I wished 
 even to dispossess the teachers that 
 have entered into my labours. I make 
 them because I wish to be aided by you 
 in extending the gospel further ; and I 
 look to your assistance in order that I 
 may have the means of going into the 
 regions where I have not made known 
 the name of the Redeemer. *[ When 
 your faith is increased. When you 
 become so strong as not to need my 
 presence and my constant care ; and 
 when you shall be able to speed me on 
 my way and to aid me on my journey. 
 He expected to be assisted by them in 
 his efforts to carry the gospel to other 
 countries, f That we shall be enlarged. 
 Marg. Magnified by you. Bloomfield 
 supposes that this means, " to gain fame 
 and glory by you ;" that is, as the 
 teacher may justly by his pupils. So 
 Robinson renders it, " to make great, to 
 praise." But to me the idea seems to 
 be that he wished them to enlarge or 
 magnify him by introducing him to 
 larger fields of action ; by giving him a 
 wider sphere of labour. It was not that 
 he wished to be magnified by obtaining 
 a wider reputation, not as a matter of 
 praise or ambition, but he wished to 
 have his work and success greatly en- 
 larged. This he hoped to be enabled 
 to do partly by the aid of the church at 
 Corinth. When they became able to 
 manage their own affairs; when his 
 
216 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 larged by you according to our 
 rule abundantly. 
 
 16 To preach the gospel in 
 the regions beyond you, and 
 not to boast in another man's 
 
 time was not demanded to superintend 
 them ; when their faith became so strong 
 that his presence was not needed ; and 
 when they should assist him in his 
 preparations for travel, then he would 
 enter on his wider field of labour. He 
 had no intention of sitting down in ease 
 as the false teachers in Corinth seem 
 disposed to have done, f According to 
 our rule. Greek, 'According to our 
 canon.' See on ver. 13. The sense is, 
 according to the rule by which the 
 sphere of his labours had been marked 
 out. His rule was to carry the gospel 
 as far as possible to the heathen world. 
 He regarded the regions lying far be- 
 yond Corinth as coming properly within 
 his limits ; and he desired to occupy 
 that field. Tf Abundantly. Greek, 
 Unto abundance. So as to abound ; 
 that is, to occupy the field assigned as 
 far as possible. 
 
 16. To preach the gospel in the 
 regions beyond you. What regions 
 are referred to here can be only a matter 
 of conjecture. It may be that he wished 
 to preach in other parts of Greece, and 
 that he designed to go to Arcadia or 
 Lacaedemon. Rosenmuller supposes 
 that as the Corinthians were engaged in 
 commerce, the apostle hoped that by 
 them some tidings of the gospel would 
 reach the countries with which they 
 were engaged in traffic. But I think it 
 most probable that he alludes to Italy 
 and Spain. It is certain that he had 
 formed the design of visiting Spain 
 (Rom. xv. 24. 28) ; and he doubtless 
 wished the Corinthians to aid him in 
 that purpose, and was anxious to do 
 this as soon as the condition of the 
 eastern churches would allow it. % And 
 not to boast in another man's line of 
 things, &c. Marg. Rule, the same word 
 (xstvwy) which occurs in ver. 13. The 
 meaning is, that Paul did not mean to 
 boast of what properly belonged to 
 
 line * of things made ready to 
 our hand. 
 
 17 But a he that glorieth, let 
 him glory in the Lord. 
 
 » or, rule. a Je. 9. 24. 
 
 others. He did not claim what they 
 had done as his own. He did not in- 
 tend to labour within what was properly 
 their bounds, and then to claim the field 
 and the result of the labour as his. He 
 probably means here to intimate that 
 this had been done by the false teachers 
 of Corinth ; but so far was he from 
 designing to do this, that he meant soon 
 to leave Corinth, which was properly 
 within his Unfits, and the church which 
 he had founded there, to go and preach 
 the gospel to other regions. Whether 
 Paul ever went to Spain has been a 
 question (see Note on Rom. xv. 24) ; 
 but it is certain that he went to Rome, 
 and that he preached the gospel in 
 many other places after this besides 
 Corinth. 
 
 17. But he that glorieth. He that 
 boasts. Whatever may be the occasion 
 of his boasting, whether in planting 
 churches or in watering them ; whether 
 in his purposes, plans, toils, or success. 
 Paul himself did not deem it improper 
 on some occasions to boast (ch. xi. 16; 
 xii. 5), but it was not of his own 
 power, attainments, or righteousness. 
 He was disposed to trace all to the Lord, 
 and to regard him as the source of all 
 blessing and all success, f Let him 
 glory in the Lord. In this serious 
 and weighty admonition, Paul designs, 
 doubtless, to express the manner in 
 which he was accustomed to glory, and 
 to furnish an admonition to the Co- 
 rinthians. In the previous part of the 
 chapter there had been some severe 
 irony. He closes the chapter with the 
 utmost seriousness and solemnity of 
 manner, in order to show on his pan 
 that he was not disposed to glory in his 
 own attainments and to admonish them 
 not to boast of theirs. If they had any 
 thing valuable they should regard the 
 Lord as the author of it. In this admo- 
 nition it is probable that Paul had in 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 217 
 
 18 For not he that com- 
 mendeth himself is approved, 
 
 his eye the passage in Jer. ix. 23, 24. 
 though he has not expressly quoted it. 
 "Let not the wise man glory in his 
 wisdom, neither let the mighty man 
 glory in his might, let not the rich man 
 glory in his riches ; but let him that 
 glorieth, glory in this, that he under- 
 standeth and knoweth me, that I am the 
 Lord which exercise loving-kindness, 
 judgment, and righteousness in the 
 earth." The sentiment is a favourite 
 one with Paul, as it should be with all 
 Christians. See Note on 1 Cor. i. 31. 
 On this verse we may here remark, 
 I. That nothing is more common than 
 for men to boast or glory. Little as 
 they really have in which to glory, yet 
 there is no one probably who has not 
 something of which he is proud, and 
 of which he is disposed to boast. It 
 would be difficult or impossible to find 
 a person w r ho had not something on 
 which he prided himself; something in 
 which he esteemed himself superior to 
 others. II. The things of which they 
 boast are very various. (1.) Many are 
 proud of their personal beauty ; many, 
 too, who would be unwilling to be thought 
 proud of it. (2.) Many glory in their 
 accomplishments; or, what is more 
 likely, in the accomplishments of their 
 children. (3.) Many glory in their 
 talents ; talents for any thing, valuable 
 or not, in which they suppose they 
 surpass others. They glory in their 
 talent for eloquence, or science, or gain 
 ing knowledge; or in their talent for 
 gaining property or keeping it ; for their 
 skill in their professions or callings ; for 
 their ability to run, to l*ap, or to practise 
 even any trick or sleight of hand. 
 There is nothing so worthless that it 
 does not constitute a subject of glorying, 
 provided it be ours. If it belong to 
 others it may be valueless. (4.) Many 
 glory in their property ; in fine houses, 
 extended plantations, or in the reputa- 
 tion of being rich ; or in gorgeous dress, 
 equipage, and furniture. In short, there 
 19 
 
 but a whom the Lord com- 
 mendeth. 
 
 o Ro. 2. 29. 
 
 is nothing which men possess in which 
 they are not prone to glory. Forgetful 
 of God the giver ; forgetful that all may 
 be soon taken from them, or that they 
 soon must leave all ; forgetful that none 
 of these things can constitute a distinc- 
 tion in the grave or beyond, they boast as 
 if these things were to remain forever, and 
 as if they had been acquired independ- 
 ently of God. How prone is the man 
 of talents to forget that God has given 
 him his intellect, and that for its proper 
 use he must give account ! How prone 
 is the rich man to forget that he must die ! 
 How prone the gay and the beautiful to 
 forget that they will lie undistinguished 
 in the grave ; and that death will con- 
 sume them as soon as the most vile and 
 worthless of the species ! III. If we 
 glory it should be in the Lord. We 
 should ascribe our talents, wealth, health, 
 strength, salvation to him. We should 
 rejoice, (1.) That we have such a Lord, 
 so glorious, so full of mercy, so power- 
 ful, so worthy of confidence and love. 
 (2.) We should rejoice in our endow- 
 ments and possessions as his gift. We 
 should rejoice that we may come and 
 lay every thing at his feet, and whatever 
 may be our rank, or talents, or learning, 
 we should rejoice that we may come 
 with the humblest child of poverty, and 
 sorrow, and want, and say, " not unto 
 us, not unto us, but unto thy name give 
 glory for thy mercy and for thy truth's 
 sake." Ps. cxv. 1. See Note on 
 1 Cor. i. 31. 
 
 18. For not he who commendetk 
 himself, &c. Not he who boasts of his 
 talents and endowments. He is not to 
 be judged by the estimate which he 
 shall place on himself, but by the esti- 
 mate which God shall form and ex- 
 press, f Is approved. By God. It is 
 no evidence that we shall be saved that 
 we are prone to commend ourselves. 
 See Rom. xvi. 10. 1 But whom tht 
 Lord commendeth. See Note on Rom. 
 ii. 29. The idea here is, that men are 
 
218 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 
 to be approved or rejected by God. He 
 is to pass judgment on them, and that 
 judgment is to be in accordance with 
 his estimate of their character, and not 
 according to their own. If he approves 
 them they will be saved ; if he does 
 not, vain will be all their empty boast- 
 ing; vain all their reliance on their 
 wealth, eloquence, learning, or earthly 
 honours. None will save them from 
 condemnation ; not all these things can 
 purchase for them eternal life. Paul 
 thus seriously shows that we should 
 be mainly anxious to obtain the divine 
 favour. It should be the grand aim and 
 purpose of our life ; and we should re- 
 press all disposition for vainglory or 
 self-confidence ; all reliance on our ta- 
 lents, attainments, or accomplishments 
 for salvation. Our boast is that 
 
 WE HAVE SUCH A REDEEMER ; AM) IN 
 THAT WE ALL MAY GLORT. 
 
 REMARKS. 
 
 1. We should have no desire to show 
 off any peculiar boldness or energy of 
 character which we may have. ver. 1, 2. 
 We should greatly prefer to evince the 
 gentleness and meekness of Christ. 
 Such a character is in itself of far more 
 value than one that is merely energetic 
 and bold ; that is rash, authoritative, and 
 fond of display. 
 
 2. They who are officers in the 
 church should have no desire to ad- 
 minister discipline, ver. 2. Some men 
 are so fond of power that they always 
 love to exercise it. They are willing 
 to show it even by inflicting punish- 
 ment on others ; and " dressed in a little 
 brief authority" they are constantly 
 seeking occasion to show their conse- 
 quence ; they magnify trifles ; they are 
 unwilling to pass by the slightest of- 
 fences. The reason is not that they 
 love the truth, but that they love their 
 own consequence, and they seek every 
 opportunity to show it. 
 
 3. All Christians and all Christian 
 ministers are engaged in a warfare, 
 ver. 3. They are at war with sin in 
 their own hearts, and with sin wherever 
 it exists on earth, and with the powers 
 of darkness. With foes so numerous 
 
 and so vigilant, they should not expect 
 to live a life of ease or quietness. Peace, 
 perfect peace, they may expect in hea- 
 ven, not on earth. Here they are to 
 fight the good fight of faith and thus to 
 lay hold on eternal life. It has been 
 the common lot of all the children of 
 God to maintain such a war, and shall 
 we expect to be exempt 1 
 
 " Shall / be carried to the skies 
 On flowery beds of ease, 
 While others fought to win the prize, 
 And sailed through bloody seas 1 
 " Are there no foes for me to face, 
 Must I not stem the flood ? 
 Is this vile world a friend to grace, 
 To help me on to God I" 
 
 4. The weapons of the Christian are 
 not to be carnal, but are to be spiritual, 
 ver. 4. He is not to make his way by 
 the exhibition of human passion ; in 
 bloody strife ; and by acting under the 
 influence of ambitious feelings. Truth 
 is his weapon ; and armed with truth, 
 and aided by the Spirit of God, he is to 
 expect the victory. How different is 
 the Christian warfare from others ! How 
 different is Christianity from other sys- 
 tems ! Mahomet made his way by arms, 
 and propagated his religion amidst the 
 din of battle. But not so Christianity. 
 That is to make its way by the silent, 
 but mighty operation of truth ; and 
 there is not a rampart of idolatry and sin 
 that is not yet to fall before it. 
 
 5. The Christian should be a man 
 of a pure spirit, ver. 4. He is to make 
 his way by the truth. He should there- 
 fore love the truth, and he should seek 
 to diffuse it as far as possible. In propa- 
 gating or defending it, he should be 
 always mild, gentle, and kind. Truth 
 is never advanced, and an adversary 
 is never convinced, where passion is 
 evinced ; where there is a haughty man- 
 ner or a belligerent spirit. The apos- 
 tolic precepts are full of wisdom, 
 " speaking the truth in love'' (Eph. 
 
 iv. 15), "in MEEKNESS INSTRUCTING 
 
 those that oppose themselves; if God 
 peradventure will give them repentance 
 to the acknowledging of the truth." 
 2 Tim. ii. 25. 
 
 6. In his warfare the Christian shall 
 conquer, ver. 4, 5. Against the truth 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 219 
 
 of Christianity nothing has been able 
 to stand. It made its way against the 
 arrayed opposition of priests and empe- 
 rors ; against customs and laws ; against 
 inveterate habits and opinions ; against 
 all forms of sin, until it triumphed, and 
 " the banners of the faith floated from 
 the palaces of the Cesars." So it will 
 be in all the conflicts with evil. Nothing 
 is more certain than that the powers 
 of darkness in this world are destined 
 to fall before the power of Christian 
 truth, and that every stronghold of sin 
 shall yet be demolished. So it is in the 
 conflicts of the individual Christian. He 
 may struggle long and hard. He may 
 have many foes to contend with. But 
 he shall gain the victory. His triumph 
 shall be secure ; and he shall yet be 
 enabled to say, " I have fought a good 
 fight — henceforth there is laid up for 
 me a caowjf." 
 
 "The saints in all this glorious war 
 Shall conquer, though they die ; 
 They see the triumph from afar, 
 And seize it with their eye." 
 
 7. Yet all should feel their depend- 
 ence on God. ver. 4. It is only through 
 him and by his aid that we have any 
 power. Truth itself has no power 
 except as it is attended and directed by 
 God ; and we should engage in our 
 conflict feeling that none but God can 
 give us the victory. If forsaken by him 
 we shall fall ; if supported by him we 
 may face without fear a "frowning 
 world," and all the powers of the "dark 
 world of hell." 
 
 8. We should not judge by the out- 
 ward appearance, ver. 7. It is the 
 heart that determines the character ; 
 and by that God shall judge us, and by 
 that we should judge ourselves. 
 
 9. We should aim to extend the gos- 
 pel as far as possible, ver. 14 — 16. Paul 
 aimed to go beyond the regions where 
 the gospel had been preached, and to 
 extend it to far-distant lands. So the 
 "field" still "is the world." A large 
 portion of the earth is yet unevangelized. 
 Instead, therefore, of sitting down quietly 
 in enjoyment and ease, let us, like him, 
 earnestly desire to extend the influence 
 of pure religion, and to bring distant 
 
 nations to the saving knowledge of the 
 truth. 
 
 10. Let us not boast in ourselves, 
 ver. 17. Not of our talents, wealth, 
 learning, or accomplishments let us 
 glory. But let us glory that we have 
 such a God as Jehovah. Let us glory 
 that we have such a Redeemer as Jesus 
 Christ. Let us glory that we have such 
 a sanctifier as the Holy Spirit. Let us 
 acknowledge God as the source of all 
 our blessings, and to him let us honestly 
 consecrate our hearts and our lives. 
 
 11. What a reverse of judgment there 
 will yet be on human character! ver. 
 17, 18. How many now commend 
 themselves who will be condemned in 
 the last day. How many men boast 
 of their talents and morals, and even 
 their religion, who will then be involved 
 in indiscriminate condemnation with 
 the most vile and worthless of the race. 
 How anxious should we be, therefore, 
 to secure the approbation of God ; and 
 whatever our fellow-men may say of us, 
 how infinitely desirable is it to be com- 
 mended then by our heavenly Father. 
 
 CHAPTER XL 
 This chapter is connected in its 
 general design with the preceding. The 
 object of Paul is to vindicate himself 
 from the charges which had been 
 brought against him, and especially to 
 vindicate his claims to the apostolic 
 office. It is ironical in its character, 
 and is of course severe upon the false 
 teachers who had accused him in Co- 
 rinth. The main purpose is to state his 
 claims to the office of an apostle, and 
 especially to show that when he men- 
 tioned those claims, or even boasted 
 of his labours, he had ground for 
 doing so. It would seem that they had 
 charged him with "/o%" in boasting 
 as he had done. Probably the false 
 teachers were loud in proclaiming their 
 own praise, but represented Paul as 
 guilty of folly in praising himself. Ho 
 therefore (ver. 1) asks them if they 
 could bear with him a little further in 
 his folly, and entreats them to do it. 
 This verse contains the scope of the 
 chapter ; and the remainder of the 
 
220 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 chapter is an enumeration of the 
 causes which he had for this boasting, 
 though probably each reason is adapted 
 to some form of accusation brought 
 against him. 
 
 Having entreated them to bear with 
 him a little farther, he states the reasons 
 why he was disposed to go into this 
 subject at all. ver. 2 — 4. It was not 
 because he was disposed to sound his 
 own praise, but it was from love to 
 them. He had espoused them as a 
 chaste virgin to Christ. He was afraid 
 that their affections would be alienated 
 from the Redeemer. He reminded them 
 of the manner in which Eve was 
 tempted ; and he reminded them that by 
 the same smooth and plausible arts their 
 affections might also be stolen away, 
 and that they might be led into sin. 
 He reminds them that there was danger 
 of their receiving another gospel, and 
 expresses the apprehension that they 
 had done it, and that they had embraced 
 a deceiver, ver. 4. 
 
 Having made this general statement 
 of his design, Paul now goes more 
 into detail in answering the objections 
 against him, and in showing the reasons 
 which he had for boasting as he had 
 done. The statement in answer to 
 their objections relates to the following 
 points. 
 
 (1.) He had supposed that he was 
 not behind the chiefest of the apostles. 
 He had supposed that he had claims to 
 the apostolic office of as high an order 
 as any of them. Called to the work 
 as he had been, and labouring as he 
 had done, he had regarded himself as 
 having an indisputable claim to the 
 office of an apostle. True, they had 
 charged him with being rude in speech, 
 a charge which he was not disposed to 
 deny, but in a far more important point 
 than that he had showed that he was 
 not disqualified for the apostolic office. 
 In knowledge, the main qualification, 
 he had not been deficient, as probably 
 even his opponents were disposed to 
 admit, ver. 5, 6. 
 « (2.) He had not deprived himself of 
 
 the claims to the office and honours of 
 an apostle by declining to receive from 
 
 them a compensation, and by preaching 
 the gospel without charge, ver. 7 — 9. 
 Probably they had alleged that this was 
 a proof that he knew that he had no 
 claim to the honours of an apostle. 
 He, therefore, states exactly how this 
 was. He had received a support, but 
 he had robbed other churches to do it. 
 And even when he was with them, he 
 had received supplies from a distant 
 church in order that he might not be 
 burdensome to them. The charge was, 
 therefore, groundless that he knew that 
 he had no right to the support due to 
 an apostle. 
 
 (3.) He declares it to be his fixed 
 purpose that no one should prevent his 
 boasting in that manner. And this he 
 did because he loved them, and because 
 he would save them from the snares 
 of those who would destroy them. He 
 therefore stated the true character of 
 those who attempted to deceive them. 
 They were the ministers of Satan, ap- 
 pearing as the ministers of righteous- 
 ness, as Satan himself was transformed 
 into an angel of light ver. 10 — 15. 
 
 (4.) Paul claims the privilege of 
 boasting as a fool a little farther, ver. 1 G. 
 And he claims that as others boasted, 
 and as they were allowed to do so by 
 the Corinthians, he had also a right to 
 do the same thing. They suffered them 
 to boast ; they allowed them to do it 
 even if they devoured them, and smote 
 them, and took their property. It was 
 but fair, therefore, that he should be 
 allowed to boast a little of what he was 
 and of what he had done. ver. 17 — 20. 
 
 (5.) He goes, therefore, into an ex- 
 tended and most tender description of 
 what he had suffered, and of his claims 
 to their favourable regard. He had all 
 the personal advantages arising from 
 birth which they could pretend to. He 
 was a Hebrew, of the seed of Abra- 
 ham, and a minister of Christ, ver. 
 21 — 23. He had endured far more 
 labours and dangers than they had done ; 
 and in order to set this before them he 
 enumerates the trials through which he 
 had passed, and stated the labours which 
 constantly came upon him. ver. 23 — 30. 
 Of these things, of his sufferings, and 
 
A. D. 60.] * CHAPTER XI. 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 TTTOULD to God ye could 
 
 "* bear with me a little in 
 
 221 
 
 1 
 
 trials, and infirmities, he felt that he 
 had a right to speak, and these consti- 
 tuted a far higher claim to the confi- 
 dence of the Christian church than 
 the endowments of which his adversa- 
 ries boasted. 
 
 (6.) As another instance of peril 
 and suffering, he refers to the fact that 
 his life was endangered when he was in 
 Damascus, and that he barely escaped 
 by being lowered down from the wall 
 of the city. ver. 31—33. The con- 
 clusion which Paul doubtless intends 
 should be derived from all this is, that 
 he had far higher grounds of claim to the 
 office of an apostle than his adversaries 
 would admit, or than they could furnish 
 themselves. He admitted that he was 
 weak and subject to infirmities ; he did 
 not lay claim to the graces of a polished 
 elocution, as they did ; but if a life of 
 self-denial and toil, of an honest devo- 
 tion to the cause of truth at imminent 
 and frequent hazard of life, constituted 
 an evidence that he was an apostle, he 
 had that evidence. They appealed to 
 their birth, their rank, their endowments 
 as public speakers. In the quiet and 
 comfort of a congregation and church 
 established to their hands ; in reaping 
 the avails of the labours of others; and 
 in the midst of enjoyments, they coolly 
 laid claims to the honours of the mi- 
 nisterial office, and denied his claims. 
 In trial, and peril, and labour, and 
 poverty ; in scourges, and imprison- 
 ments, and shipwrecks ; in hunger and 
 thirst; in unwearied travelling from 
 place to place ; and in the care of all the 
 churches, were his claims to their respect 
 and confidence, and he was willing that 
 any one that chose should make the com- 
 parison between them. Such was his 
 " foolish" boasting ; such his claims to 
 their confidence and regard. 
 
 1. Would to God. Greek, ' I would' 
 ("Opihov). This expresses earnest de- 
 sire, but in the Greek there is no appeal 
 19* 
 
 my folly : and indeed bear * with 
 me. 
 
 2 For I am jealous over you 
 
 t or, ye do bear. 
 
 to God. The sense would be well ex- 
 pressed by ' O that,' or ' I earnestly wish.' 
 Tf Ye could bear with me. That you 
 would bear patiently with me ; that you 
 would hear me patiently, and suffer me 
 to speak of myself, f In my folly. 
 Folly in boasting. The idea seems to 
 be, ' I know that boasting is generally 
 foolish, and that it is not to be indulged 
 in. But though it is to be generally 
 regarded as folly, yet circumstances 
 compel me to it, and I ask your in- 
 dulgence in it.' It is possible also that 
 his opponents accused him of folly in 
 boasting so much of himself. \ And 
 indeed bear with me. Marg. Ye do 
 bear. But the text has probably the 
 correct rendering. It is the expression 
 of an earnest wish that they would tole- 
 rate him a little in this. He entreats 
 them to bear with him because he was 
 constrained to it. 
 
 2. For I am jealous over you. This 
 verse expresses the reason why he was 
 disposed to speak of his attainments, 
 and of what he had done. It was be- 
 cause he loved them, and because he 
 feared that they were in danger of being 
 seduced from the simplicity of the gos- 
 pel. The phrase ' I am jealous' (Z»\a>) 
 means properly, I ardently love you ; I 
 am full of tender attachment to you. 
 The word was usual among the Greeks 
 to denote an ardent affection of any 
 kind (from £m, to boil, to be fervid or 
 fervent). The precise meaning is to 
 be determined by the connexion. See 
 Note on 1 Cor. xii. 31. The word may 
 denote the jealousy which is felt by an 
 apprehension of departure from fidelity 
 on the part of those whom we love ? or 
 it may denote a fervid and glowing at- 
 tachment. The meaning here proba- 
 bly is, that Paul had a strong attach- 
 ment to them. If With godly jealousy. 
 Greek, " with the zeal of God" (0«y 
 £»\a>). That is, with very great or 
 vehement zeal — in accordance with the 
 
222 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A.D.60. 
 
 with godly jealousy : for I have 
 espoused you a to one husband, 
 
 a Hos. 2. 19, 20. b Le. 21. 13. 
 
 Hebrew custom when the name God is 
 used to denote any thing signally great, 
 as the phrase 'mountains of God,' 
 meaning very elevated or lofty moun- 
 tains. The mention of this ardent 
 attachment suggested what follows. 
 His mind reverted to the tenderness of 
 the marriage relation, and to the possi- 
 bility that in that relation the affections 
 might be estranged. He makes use of 
 this figure, therefore, to apprize them of 
 the change which he apprehended. 
 % For I have espoused you, &c. The 
 word here used (a£(*o£a>) means proper- 
 ly to adapt, to fit, to join together. 
 Hence to join in wedlock, to marry. 
 Here it means to marry to another ; and 
 the idea is, that Paul had been the agent 
 employed in forming a connexion, simi- 
 lar to the marriage connexion, between 
 them and the Saviour. The allusion 
 here is not certain. It may refer to the 
 custom which prevailed when friends 
 made and procured the marriage for the 
 bridegroom ; or it may refer to some 
 custom like that which prevailed among 
 the Lacedemonians where persons were 
 employed to form the lives and manners 
 of virgins and prepare them for the du- 
 ties of the married life. The sense is 
 clear. Paul claims that it was by his 
 instrumentality that they had been united 
 to the Redeemer. Under him they had 
 been brought into a relation to the Sa- 
 viour similar to that sustained by the 
 bride to her husband ; and he felt all 
 the interest in them which naturally 
 grew out of that fact and from a desire 
 to present them blameless to the pure 
 Redeemer. The relation of the church 
 to Christ is often represented by mar- 
 riage. See Eph. v. 23—33. Rev. xix. 
 7 ; xxi. 9. f To one husband. To the 
 Redeemer. ^ That 1 may present you 
 as a chaste virgin to Christ: The al- 
 lusion here, according to Doddridge, is, 
 to the custom among the Greeks " of 
 having an officer whose business it was 
 to educate and form young women, 
 
 that I may present you as a 
 chaste virgin b to Christ. 
 
 3 But I fear, lest by any 
 
 especially those of rank and figure, de- 
 signed for marriage, and then to present 
 them to those who were to be their 
 husbands, and if this officer through 
 negligence permitted them to be cor- 
 rupted between the espousals and the 
 consummation of the marriage, great 
 blame would fall upon him." Such a 
 responsibility Paul felt. So anxious 
 was he for the entire purity of that 
 church which was to constitute "the 
 bride, the Lamb's wife;" so anxious 
 that all who were connected with that 
 church should be presented pure in 
 heaven. 
 
 3. But I fear. Paul had just com- 
 pared the church to a virgin, soon to be 
 presented as a bride to the Rsdeemer. 
 The mention of this seems to have sug- 
 gested to him the fact that the first wo- 
 man was deceived and led astray by the 
 tempter, and that the same thing might 
 occur in regard to the church which he 
 was so. desirous should be preserved 
 pure. The grounds of his fear were, 
 (1.) That Satan had seduced the first 
 woman, thus demonstrating that the 
 most holy were in danger of being led 
 astray by temptation; and, (2.) That 
 special efforts were made to seduce them 
 from the faith. The persuasive arts of 
 the false teachers ; the power of phi- 
 losophy ; and the attractive and cor- 
 rupting influences of the world, he had 
 reason to suppose might be employed 
 to seduce them from simple attachment 
 to Christ. % Lest by any means. Lest 
 somehow (/ufoae). It is implied that 
 many means would be used ; that all arts 
 would be tried ; and that in some way, 
 which perhaps they little suspected, these 
 arts would be successful, unless they 
 were put constantly on their guard. 
 f As the serpent beguiled Eve. See 
 Gen. iii. 1 — 11. The word serpent here 
 refers doubtless to Satan who was the 
 agent by whom Eve was beguiled. 
 See John viii. 44. 1 John iii. 8. Rev. 
 xii. 9 ; xx. 2. Paul did not mean tha« 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 223 
 
 means, as the serpent beguiled 
 Eve through his subtilty, so your 
 
 minds should be corrupted from 
 the simplicity that is in Christ. 
 
 they were in danger of being corrupted 
 in the same way, but that similar efforts 
 would be made to seduce them. Satan 
 adapts his temptations to the character 
 and circumstances of the tempted. He 
 varies them from age to age, and applies 
 them in such a way as best to secure 
 his object. Hence all should be on their 
 guard. No one knows the mode in 
 which he will approach him, but all 
 may know that he will approach them 
 in some way. t Through his subtilty. 
 See Gen. iii. 1 . By his craft, art, wiles 
 (iv Tjj 7TAViv^yU). The word implies 
 that shrewdness, cunning, craft was 
 employed. A tempter always employs 
 cunning and art to accomplish his object. 
 The precise mode in which Satan ac- 
 , complished his object is not certainly 
 known. Perhaps the cunning consist- 
 ed in assuming an attractive form — a 
 fascinating manner — a manner fitted to 
 charm ; perhaps in the idea that the 
 eating of the forbidden fruit had en- 
 dowed a serpent with the power of 
 reason and speech above all other ani- 
 mals, and that it might be expected to 
 produce a similar transformation in Eve. 
 At all events there were false pretences 
 and appearances, and such Paul appre- 
 hended would be employed by the false 
 teachers to seduce and allure them. See 
 on ver. 13, 14. % So your minds 
 should be corrupted. So your thoughts 
 should be perverted. So your hearts 
 should be alienated. The mind is cor- 
 rupted when the affections are alienated 
 from the proper object, and when the 
 soul is filled with unholy plans, and pur- 
 poses, and desires. ^ From the sim- 
 plicity that is in Christ. (1.) From 
 simple and single-hearted devotedness to 
 him — from pure and unmixed attach- 
 ment to him. The fear was that their 
 affections would be fixed on other objects, 
 and that the singleness and unity of their 
 devotedness to him would be destroyed. 
 (2.) From his pure doctrines. By the 
 admixture of philosophy ; by the opi- 
 nions of the world there was danger 
 
 that their minds should be turned away 
 from their hold on the simple truths 
 which Christ had taught. (3.) From 
 that simplicity of mind and heart ; that 
 childlike candour and docility; that 
 freedom from all guile, dishonesty, and 
 deception which so eminently character- 
 ized the Redeemer. Christ had a single 
 aim ; was free from all guile ; was pure- 
 ly honest ; never made use of any im- 
 proper arts ; never resorted to false ap- 
 pearances, and never deceived. His 
 followers should in like manner be art- 
 less and guileless. There should be no 
 mere cunning, no trick, no craft in ad- 
 vancing their purposes. There should 
 be nothing but honesty and truth in all 
 that they say. Paul was afraid that 
 they would lose this beautiful simplicity 
 and artlessness of character and man- 
 ner ; and that they would insensibly be 
 led to adopt the maxims of mere cun- 
 ning, of policy, of expediency, of seduc- 
 tive arts which prevailed so much in the 
 world — a danger which was imminent 
 among the shrewd and cunning people 
 of Greece ; but which is confined to no 
 time and no place. Christians should 
 be more guileless than even children are; 
 as pure and free from trick, and from 
 art and cunning as was the Redeemer 
 himself. (4.) From the simplicity in 
 worship which the Lord Jesus com- 
 mended and required. The worship 
 which the Redeemer designed to esta- 
 blish was simple, unostentatious, and 
 pure — strongly in contrast with the 
 gorgeousness and corruption of the 
 pagan worship, and even with the im- 
 posing splendour of the Jewish temple 
 service. He intended that it should be 
 adapted to all lands, and such as could 
 be offered by all classes of men — a pure 
 worship, claiming first the homage of 
 the heart, and then such simple external 
 expressions as should best exhibit the 
 homage of the heart. How easily might 
 this be corrupted ! What temptations 
 were there to attempt to corrupt it by 
 those who had been accustomed to the 
 
224 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS, 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 4 For if he that cometh 
 
 magnificence of the temple service, and 
 who would suppose that the religion 
 of the Messiah could not be less gor- 
 geous than that which was designed to 
 shadow forth his coming ; and by those 
 who had been accustomed to the splen- 
 did rites of the pagan worship, and who 
 would suppose that the true religion 
 ought not to be less costly and splendid 
 than the false religion had been. If so 
 much expense had been lavished on 
 false religions, how natural to suppose 
 that equal costliness at least should be 
 bestowed on the true religion. Ac- 
 cordingly the history of the church for a 
 considerable part of its existence has 
 been little more than a record of the va- 
 rious forms in which the simple worship 
 instituted by the Redeemer has been 
 corrupted, until all that was gorgeous in 
 pagan ceremonies and splendid in the 
 Jewish ritual has been introduced as a 
 part of Christian worship. (5.) From 
 simplicity in dress and manner of living. 
 The Redeemer's dress was simple. His 
 manner of living was simple. His re- 
 quirements demand great simplicity and 
 plainness of apparel and manner of 
 life. 1 Pet. iii. 3—6. 1 Tim. ii. 9, 10. 
 5Tet how much proneness is there at all 
 times to depart from this ! What a be- 
 setting sin has it been in all ages to 
 the church of Christ ! And how much 
 pains should there be that the very sim- 
 plicity that is in Christ should be ob- 
 served by all who bear the Christian 
 name! 
 
 4. For if he that cometh, &c. There 
 is much difficulty in this verse in ascer- 
 taining the true sense, and expositors 
 have been greatly perplexed and divided 
 in opinion, especially with regard to the 
 true sense of the last clause, " ye might 
 well bear with him" It is difficult to 
 ascertain whether Paul meant to speak 
 ironically or seriously ; and different 
 views will prevail as different views are 
 taken of the design. If it be supposed that 
 he meant to speak seriously, the sense 
 will be, 'If the false teacher could re- 
 commend a better Saviour than I have 
 
 preacheth another Jesus, whom 
 
 done, or a Spirit better able to sanctify 
 and save, then there would be a pro- 
 priety in your receiving him and tole- 
 rating his doctrines.' If the latter, 
 then the sense will be, 'You cannot 
 well bear with me ; but if a man comes 
 among you preaching a false Saviour, 
 and a false Spirit, and a false doctrine, 
 then you bear with him without any 
 difficulty.' Another interpretation still 
 has been proposed, by supposing that 
 the word " me" is to be supplied at the 
 close of the verse instead of " him," 
 and then the sense would be, 'If you re- 
 ceive so readily one who preaches 
 another gospel, one who comes with 
 far less evidence that he is sent from 
 God than I have, and if you show your- 
 selves thus ready to fall in with any 
 kind of teaching that may be brought 
 to you, you might at least bear with 
 me also.' Amidst this variety it is not 
 easy to ascertain the true sense. To 
 me it seems probable, however, that Paul 
 spoke seriously, and that our translation 
 has expressed the true sense. The 
 main idea doubtless is, that Paul felt 
 that there was danger that they would 
 be corrupted. If they could bring a 
 better gospel, a more perfect system, 
 and proclaim a more perfect Saviour 
 there would be no such change. But 
 that could not be expected. It could 
 not be done. If therefore they preach- 
 ed any other Saviour or any other gos- 
 pel ; if they departed from the truths 
 which he had taught them, it would be 
 for the worse. It could not be other- 
 wise. The Saviour whom he preached 
 was perfect, and was able to save. The 
 Spirit which he preached was perfect, 
 and able to sanctify. The gospel which 
 he preached was perfect, and there was 
 no hope that it could be improved Any 
 change must be for the worse ; and as 
 the false teachers varied from his in- 
 structions, there was every reason to ap- 
 prehend that their minds would be 
 corrupted from the simplicity that was 
 in Christ. The principal idea, there- 
 fore, is, that the gospel which he preached 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER XL 
 
 225 
 
 we have not preached, or if ye 
 receive another spirit, which ye 
 have not received, or another* 
 
 aGa. 1.7,8. 
 
 was as perfect as it could be, and that 
 any change would be for the worse. 
 No doctrine which others brought could 
 be recommended because it was better. 
 By the phrase ' he that cometh' is meant 
 doubtless the false teacher in Corinth. 
 ^ Preacheth another Jesus. Proclaims 
 one who is more worthy of your love 
 and more able to save. If he that 
 comes among you and claims your 
 affections can point out another Christ 
 who is more worthy of your confidence, 
 then I admit that you do well to receive 
 him. It is implied here that this could 
 not be done. The Lord Jesus in his 
 character and work is perfect. No Sa- 
 viour superior to him has been provided ; 
 none but him is necessary, ^f Whom 
 we have not preached. Let them show, 
 if they can, that they have any Saviour 
 to tell of whom we have not preached. 
 We have given all the evidence that 
 we are sent by God, and have laid all 
 the claim to your confidence, which they 
 can do for having made known the 
 Saviour. They with all their pretensions 
 have no Saviour to tell you of with 
 whom we have not already made you 
 acquainted. They have no claims, there- 
 fore, from this quarter which we have 
 not also. T Or if ye receive another 
 spirit, &c. If they can preach to you 
 another Sanctifier and Comforter ; or if 
 under their ministry you have received 
 higher proofs of the power of the Spirit 
 in performing miracles; in the gift of 
 tongues; in renewing sinners and in 
 comforting your hearts. The idea is, 
 that Paul had proclaimed the existence 
 and agency of the same Holy Spirit 
 which they did ; that his preaching had 
 been attended with as striking proofs 
 of the presence and power of that Spirit; 
 that he had all the evidence of a divine 
 commission from such an influence at- 
 tending his labours which they could 
 possibly have. They could reveal no 
 spirit better able to sanctify and save ; 
 none who had more power than the 
 
 gospel, which ye have not ac- 
 cepted, ye might well bear * with 
 him. 
 
 or, with me. 
 
 Holy Spirit which they had received 
 under the preaching of Paul, and there 
 was therefore no reason why they should 
 be "corrupted" or seduced from the 
 simple doctrines which they had received, 
 and follow others, f Or another gos- 
 pel, &c. A gospel more worthy of 
 your acceptance — one more free, more 
 full, more rich in promises ; one that 
 revealed a better plan of salvation, or 
 that was more full of comfort and peace. 
 1 Ye might well bear with him. Marg. 
 "with me." The word him is not in 
 the Greek ; but is probably to be sup- 
 plied. The sense is, there would then 
 be some excuse for your conduct. There 
 would be some reason why you should 
 welcome such teachers. But if this 
 cannot be done ; if they can preach no 
 other and no better gospel and Saviour 
 than I have done, then there is no excuse. 
 There is no reason why you should 
 follow such teachers and forsake those 
 who were your earliest guides in reli- 
 gion. — Let us never forsake the gospel 
 which we have till we are sure we can 
 get a better. Let us adhere to the sim- 
 ple doctrines of the New Testament 
 until some one can furnish better and 
 clearer doctrines. Let us follow the 
 rules of Christ in our opinions and our 
 conduct ; our plans, our mode of wor- 
 ship, our dress, and our amusements, 
 engagements, and company, until we 
 can certainly ascertain that there are 
 better rules. A man is foolish for mak- 
 ing any change until he has evidence 
 that he is likely to better himself; and 
 it remains yet to be proved that any 
 one has ever bettered himself or his 
 family by forsaking the simple doctrines 
 of the Bible, and embracing a philoso- 
 phical speculation; by forsaking the 
 scriptural views of the Saviour as the 
 incarnate God, and embracing the views 
 which represent him as a mere man ; by 
 forsaking the simple and plain rules of 
 Christ about our manner of life, our 
 dress, and our words and actions, and em 
 
226 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 
 5 For I suppose I ° was not a 
 whit behind the very chiefest 
 apostles. 
 
 6 But though 1 1 be rude in 
 
 a 1 Co. 15. 10. c. 12. 11. 
 b 1 Co. 1. 17. 2. 1, 13. 
 
 bracing those which are recommended 
 by mere fashion and by the customs of 
 a gay world. 
 
 5. For I suppose, &c. I think that 
 I gave as good evidence that I was com- 
 missioned by God as the most eminent 
 of the apostles. In the miracles which 
 I performed ; in the abundance of my 
 labours, and in my success, I suppose 
 tbat I did not fall behind any of them. 
 If so, I ought to be regarded and treated 
 as an apostle ; and if so, then the false 
 teachers should not be allowed to sup- 
 plant me in your affections, or to seduce 
 you from the doctrines which I have 
 taught On the evidence that Paul 
 was equal to others in the proper proof 
 of a commission from God, see Notes 
 on ver. 21—30. 
 
 6. But though I be rude in speech. 
 See Note,ch. x. 10. The word rendered 
 rude here (/V/wt»?) means properly a 
 private citizen, in opposition to one in a 
 public station ; then a plebeian, or one 
 unlettered or unlearned, in opposition to 
 one of more elevated rank, or one who 
 is learned. See Notes on Acts iv. 13. 
 1 Cor. xiv. 16. The idea is, my lan- 
 guage is that of a plain unlettered per- 
 son. This was doubtless charged upon 
 him by his enemies, and it may be that 
 he designed in part to admit the truth 
 of the charge. \ Yet not in knowledge. 
 I do not admit that I am ignorant of 
 the religion which I profess to teach. 
 I claim to be acquainted with the doc- 
 trines of Christianity. It does not ap- 
 pear that they charged him with igno- 
 rance. If it be asked how the admission 
 that he was rude in speech consists with 
 the fact that he was endowed by the 
 Holy Spirit with the power of speaking 
 languages, we may observe that Paul 
 had undoubtedly learned to speak Greek 
 in his native place (Tarsus in Cilicia), 
 and that the Greek which he had learned 
 
 speech, yet not c in knowledge ; 
 but we have been thoroughly 
 made manifest d among you in 
 all things. 
 
 7 Have I committed an offence 
 
 c Ep. 3. 4. 
 
 d c. 12. 12. 
 
 there was probably a corrupt kind, such 
 as was spoken in that place. It was 
 this Greek which he probably continued 
 to speak ; for there is no more reason 
 to suppose that the Holy Spirit would 
 aid him in speaking a language which 
 he had thus early learned than he 
 would in speaking Hebrew. The en- 
 dowments of the Holy Spirit were con- 
 ferred to enable the apostles to speak 
 languages which they had never learned, 
 not in perfecting them in languages 
 with which they were before acquainted. 
 It may have been true, therefore, that 
 Paul may have spoken some languages 
 which he never learned with more 
 fluency and perfection than he did those 
 which he had learned to speak when 
 he was young. See the remarks of the 
 Archbishop of Cambray, as quoted by 
 Doddridge in be. It may be remarked, 
 also, that some estimate of the manner 
 of Paul on this point may be formed 
 from his writings. Critics profoundly 
 acquainted with the Greek language 
 remark, that while there is great energy 
 of thought and of diction in the writings 
 of Paul ; while he chooses or coins 
 most expressive words, yet that there is 
 everywhere a want of Attic elegance 
 of manner, and of the smoothness and 
 beauty which were so grateful to a 
 Grecian ear. t But we have been 
 thoroughly made manifest, &c. You 
 have known all about me. I have con- 
 cealed nothing from you, and you have 
 had ample opportunity to become tho- 
 roughly acquainted with me. The 
 meaning is, ' I need not dwell on this. 
 I need speak no more of my manner 
 of speech or knowledge. With all that 
 you are well acquainted.' 
 
 7. Have I committed an offence. 
 
 Have 1 done wrong. Greek, ' Have I 
 
 committed a sin.' There is here a some- 
 
 j what abrupt transition from the pre- 
 
A. D. 60. J 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 2*7 
 
 in abasing myself that ye might 
 be exalted, because I have 
 preached to you the gospel of 
 God freely ? 
 
 8 I robbed other churches, 
 
 vious verse ; and the connexion is not 
 very apparent. Perlmps the connexion 
 is this. ' I admit my inferiority in re- 
 gard to my manner of speaking. But 
 this does not interfere with my full 
 understanding of the doctrines which I 
 preach, nor does it interfere with the 
 numerous evidences which I have fur- 
 nished that I am called to the office of 
 an apostle. What then is the ground 
 of offence ? In what have I erred 1 
 Wherein have I shown that I was not 
 qualified to be an apostle ] Is it in the 
 fact that I have not chosen to press my 
 claim to a support, but have preached 
 the gospel without charge]' There can 
 be no doubt that they urged this as an 
 objection to him, and as a proof that he 
 was conscious that he had no claim to 
 the office of an apostle. See Notes on 
 1 Cor. ix. 3 — 18. Paul here answers 
 this charge ; and the sum of his reply 
 is, that he had received a support, but 
 that it had come from others, a support 
 which they had furnished because the 
 Corinthians had neglected to do it. 
 f In abasing myself. By labouring 
 with my own hands ; by submitting to 
 voluntary poverty, and by neglecting to 
 urge my reasonable claims for a support. 
 Tf That ye might be exalted. In spiritual 
 blessings and comforts. I did it because 
 I could thus better promote religion 
 among you. I could thus avoid the 
 charge of aiming at the acquisition of 
 wealth ; could shut the mouths of gain- 
 sayers, and could more easily secure 
 access to you. Is it now to be seriously 
 urged as a fault that I have sought your 
 welfare, and that in doing it I have 
 submitted to great self-denial and to 
 many hardships I See Notes on 1 Cor. 
 ix. 18, seq. 
 
 8. I robbed other churches. The 
 churches of Macedonia and elsewhere, 
 which had ministered to his wants. 
 
 taking wages of them, to do you 
 service. 
 
 9 And when I was present 
 with you, and wanted, I a was 
 for that 
 
 Ac. 18. 3. 1 Th. 2. 9. 
 
 chargeable to no man : 
 
 Probably he refers especially to the 
 church at Philippi (see Phil. iv. 5, 16), 
 which seems to have done more than 
 almost any other church for his support. 
 By the use of the word " robbed" here 
 Paul does not mean that he had ob- 
 tained any thing from them in a violent 
 or unlawful manner, or any thing which 
 they did not give voluntarily. The word 
 (io-uMtTx) means properly, 'I spoiled, 
 plundered, robbed,' but the idea of Paul 
 here is, that he, as it were, robbed them, 
 because he did not render an equivalent 
 for what they gave him. They sup- 
 ported him when he was labouring for 
 another people. A conqueror who 
 plunders a country gives no equivalent 
 for what he takes. In this sense only 
 could Paul say that he had plundered 
 the church at Philippi. His general 
 principle was, that " the labourer was 
 worthy of his hire," and that a man 
 was to receive his support from the 
 people for whom he laboured (see 1 Cor. 
 7 — 14), but this rule he had not ob- 
 served in this case. ^ Taki?ig wages 
 of them. Receiving a support from 
 them. They bore my expenses. \ To 
 do you service. That I might labour 
 among you without being supposed to 
 be striving to obtain your property, and 
 that I might not be compelled to labour 
 with my own hands, and thus to pre- 
 vent my preaching the gospel as I could 
 otherwise do. The supply from other 
 churches rendered it unnecessary in a 
 great measure that his time should be 
 taken off from the ministry in order to 
 obtain a support. 
 
 9. And when I was present "oith 
 you. When I was labouring in order 
 to build up the church in Corinth. 
 \ I was chargeable to no man. I was 
 burdensome to no one; or more literally 
 ' I did not lie as a dead weight upon 
 you.' The word here used, which 
 
II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 which was lacking to me, the a 
 brethren which came from Mace- 
 donia supplied : and in all things 
 I have kept myself from being 
 burdensome unto you, and so 
 will I keep myself. 
 
 a Ph. 4. 10, 15. 
 
 occurs nowhere else in the New Testa- 
 ment (x*TsvaW«(7«), means, literally, to 
 become torpid against, i. e. to the detri- 
 ment of any one ; and hence to be bur- 
 densome. According to Jerome, its use 
 here is a Cilicism of Paul. The idea is 
 that he did not lead a torpid, inactive life 
 at the expense of others. He did not 
 expect a support from them when he 
 was doing nothing ; nor did he demand 
 support which would in any sense be a 
 burden to them. By his own hands 
 (Acts xviii. 3), and by the aid which 
 he received from abroad, he was sup- 
 ported without deriving aid from the 
 people of Corinth. ^ And in all things, 
 &c. In all respects I have carefully 
 kept myself from being a burden on the 
 church. Paul had no idea of living at 
 other men's expense when he was doing 
 nothing. He did not, as a general 
 thing, mean to receive any thing for 
 which he had not rendered a fair equiva- 
 lent - a just principle for ministers and 
 for all other men. See ch. xii. 13. 
 
 1 0. As the truth of Christ is in me. 
 That is, I solemnly declare this as in 
 the presence of Christ. As I am a 
 Christian man ; as I feel bound to de- 
 clare the truth, and as I must answer to 
 Christ. It is a solemn form of assevera- 
 tion, equal to an oath. See Note on 
 Rom. ix. 1. Comp. 1 Tim. ii. 7. f No 
 man shall stop me, &c. Marg. This 
 boasting shall not be stopped in me. 
 See Note on 1 Cor. ix. 15. The idea 
 here is, that Paul was solemnly deter- 
 mined that the same thing should con- 
 tinue. He had not been burdensome 
 to any, and he was resolved that he 
 would not be. Rather than be burden- 
 some he had laboured with his own 
 hands, and he meant to do it still. No 
 man in all Achaia should ever have 
 reason to say that he had been an 
 
 10 As the truth of Christ is 
 in me, * no man shall stop me 
 of this boasting in the regions 
 of Achaia. 
 
 11 Wherefore ? because I love 
 you not? God knoweth. 
 
 i this boasting shall not be stopped in vie. 
 
 idler, and had been supported by the 
 churches when he was doing nothing. 
 It was the fixed and settled purpose of 
 his life never to be burdensome to any 
 man. What a noble resolution ! How 
 fixed were the principles of his life ! 
 And what an instance of magnanimous 
 self-denial and of elevated purpose ! 
 Every man, minister or otherwise, should 
 adopt a similar resolution. He should 
 resolve to receive nothing for which he 
 has not rendered a fair equivalent, and 
 resolve if he has health never to be a 
 burden to his friends or to the church 
 of God. And even if sick he may yet 
 feel that he is not burdensome to others. 
 If he is gentle and grateful ; if he makes 
 no unnecessary care ; and especially 
 if he furnishes an example of patience 
 and piety, and seeks the blessing of God 
 on his benefactors, he furnishes them 
 what they will usually esteem an ample 
 equivalent. No man need be burden- 
 some to his friends ; and all should 
 resolve that by the grace of God they 
 never will be. There is considerable 
 variety in the MSS. here (see Mill on 
 the place), but in regard to the general 
 sense there can be no doubt. Nothing 
 should ever hinder this boasting ; no- 
 thing should deprive him of the privilege 
 of saying that he had not been a burden. 
 f In the regions of Achaia. Achaia 
 was that part of Greece of which Co- 
 rinth was the capital. See Note on 
 Acts xviii. 12. 
 
 11. Wherefore, &c. Tt is not be- 
 cause I do not love you. It is not from 
 pride, or because I would not as willingly 
 receive aid from you as from any other. 
 It is not because I am more unwilling 
 to be under obligation to you than to 
 others. I have a deep and tender attach- 
 ment to you ; but it is because I can 
 thus best promote the gospel, and ad 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 12 But what I do, that I will 
 do, that I may cut off occasion 
 from them a which desire occa- 
 
 a Ga. 1. 7. Ph. 1. 15, &c. 
 
 vance the kingdom of the Redeemer. 
 Possibly it might have been thought 
 that his unwillingness to receive aid 
 from them was some proof of reserve 
 towards them or want of affection, and 
 this may have been urged against him. 
 This he solemnly denies. 
 
 12. But what I do. The course of 
 life which I have been pursuing I will 
 continue to pursue. That is, I will 
 continue to preach as I have done with- 
 out demanding a support. I will labour 
 with my own hands if necessary ; I will 
 preach without demanding rigidly what 
 I might be entitled to. % That I may 
 cut off occasion. That I may give them 
 no opportunity of accusing me of de- 
 siring to grow rich, and of calumniating 
 me. Paul meant that they should have 
 no plausible pretext even for accusing 
 him ; that no man should be able to 
 say that he was preaching merely for 
 the hire. % Which desire occasion. No 
 doubt his enemies eagerly sought oppor- 
 tunities of accusing him, and greatly 
 wished for some plausible reason for 
 charging him with that which would be 
 disgraceful and ruinous to his character. 
 Or it may mean that they desired oppor- 
 tunity from the example of Paul to 
 justify themselves in their course ; that 
 they took wages from the church at 
 Corinth largely, and desired to be able 
 to say that they had his example. 
 % That wherein they glory. Probably 
 meaning that they boasted that they 
 preached the gospel gratis; that they 
 received nothing for their labours. Yet 
 while they did this, it is not improbable 
 that they received presents of the Co- 
 rinthians, and under various pretences 
 contrived to get from them an ample 
 support, perhaps much more than would 
 have been a reasonable compensation. 
 Men who profess to preach the gospel 
 gratis usually contrive in various ways 
 to get more from the people than those 
 who receive a regular and stipulated 
 20 
 
 sion ; that wherein they glory, 
 they may be. found even as we. 
 13 For such are false b apostles, 
 
 &Ga.2. 4. 2 re. 2. 1. Uno.4.1. Re. 2. 2. 
 
 compensation. By taxing pretty libe 
 rally their hospitality; by accepting 
 liberal presents ; by frequent proclama- 
 tion of their self-denial and their poverty, 
 they usually filch large amounts from 
 the people. No people were ever louder 
 in praise of poverty, or in proclamation 
 of their own self-denials than some 
 orders of monks, and that when it might 
 be said almost that the richest possessions 
 of Europe were passing into their hands 
 At all events, Paul meant that these 
 men should have no opportunity from 
 his course to take any such advantage. 
 He knew what he had a right to 
 (1 Cor. ix.), but he had not urged the 
 right. He had received nothing from 
 the church at Corinth, and he meant 
 to receive nothing. He had honestly 
 preached the gospel to them without 
 charge, and he meant still to do it. 
 1 Cor. ix. 18. They should, therefore, 
 have no opportunity from his conduct 
 either to accuse him of preaching for 
 money, or of sheltering themselves under 
 his example in pretending to preach for 
 nothing when they were in fact obtain- 
 ing large sums from the people. % They 
 may be found even as we. That they 
 may be compelled honestly to pursue 
 such a course as I do, and be found to 
 be in fact what they pretend to be. 
 The sense is, ' I mean so to act that if 
 they follow my example, or plead my 
 authority, they may be found to lead an 
 honest life ; and that if they boast on 
 this subject, they shall boast strictly 
 according to truth. There shall be no 
 trick ; nothing underhanded or decep- 
 tive in what they do so far as my 
 example can prevent it.' 
 
 13. For such are false apostles, 
 They have no claim to the apostolic 
 office. They are deceivers. They pre- 
 tend to be apostles ; but they have no 
 divine commission from the Redeemer. 
 Paul had thus far argued the case with- 
 out giving them an explicit designation 
 
230 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 deceitful a workers, transforming 
 themselves into the apostles of 
 Christ. 
 
 a Ph. 3. 2. Tit. 1. 10, 11. 
 
 as deceivers. But here he says that 
 men who had conducted thus ; who had 
 attempted to impose on the people ; who 
 nad brought another gospel, whatever 
 pretences they might have — and he was 
 not disposed to deny that there was 
 much that was plausible, — were really 
 impostors and the enemies of Christ. 
 It is morally certain, from ver. 22, that 
 these men were Jews ; but why they 
 had engaged in the work of preaching, 
 or why they had gone to Corinth, 
 cannot with certainty be determined. 
 f Deceitful workers. Impostors. Men 
 who practise various arts to impose on 
 others. They were crafty , and fraudulent, 
 and hypocritical. It is probable that 
 they were men who saw that great ad- 
 vantage might be taken of the new 
 religion ; men who saw the power which 
 it had over the people, and who saw 
 the confidence which the new converts 
 were inclined to repose in their teachers; 
 perhaps men who had seen the disciples 
 to the Christian faith commit all their 
 property to the hands of the apostles, 
 or who had heard of their doing it 
 (Comp. Acts iv. 34, 35), and wmo sup- 
 posed that by pretending to be apostles 
 also they might come in for a share of 
 this confidence, and avail themselves 
 of this disposition to commit their pro- 
 perty to their spiritual guides. To suc- 
 ceed, it was needful as far as possible 
 to undermine the influence of the true 
 apostles, and take their place in the 
 confidence of the people. Thence they 
 were ' deceitful (Jokioi) workers,' full 
 of trick, and cunning, and of plausible 
 arts to impose on others, ^f Tra?isform- 
 ing themselves, &c. Pretending to be 
 apostles. Hypocritical and deceitful, 
 they yet pretended to have been sent 
 by Christ. This is a direct charge of 
 hypocrisy. They knew they were de- 
 ceivers ; and yet they assumed the high 
 claims of apostles of the Son of God. 
 14. And no marvel. And it is not 
 
 14 And no marvel ; for'Satan* 
 himself is transformed into an 
 angel of light. 
 
 b Ge. 3. 1, 5. Re. 12. 9. 
 
 wonderful, ver. 15. Since Satan him- 
 self is capable of appearing to be an 
 angel of light, it is not to be deemed 
 strange that those who are in his service 
 also should resemble him. f For Satan 
 himself is transformed, &c. That is, 
 he who is an apostate angel ; who is 
 malignant and wicked ; who is the 
 prince of evil, assumes the appearance 
 of a holy angel. Paul assumes this 
 as an indisputable and admitted truth, 
 without attempting to prove it, and 
 without referring to any particular in- 
 stances. Probably he had in his eye 
 cases where Satan put on false and de- 
 lusive appearances for the purpose of 
 deceiving, or where he assumed the 
 appearance of great sanctity and reve- 
 rence for the authority of God. Such 
 instances occurred in the temptation 
 of our first parents (Gen. iii. 1 — 6), 
 and in the temptation of the Saviour. 
 Matt. iv. The phrase ' an angel of 
 light,' means a pure and holy angel, 
 light being the emblem of purity and 
 holiness. Such are all the angels that 
 dwell in heaven ; and the idea is, that 
 Satan assumes such a form as to appear 
 to be such an angel. Learn here, 
 (1.) His power. He can assume such 
 an aspect as he pleases. He can dis- 
 semble and appear to be eminently pious. 
 He is the prince of duplicity as well as 
 of wickedness ; and it is the consumma- 
 tion of bad power for an individual to 
 be able to assume any character which 
 he pleases. (2.) His art. He is long 
 practised in deceitful arts. For six 
 thousand years he has been practising 
 the art of delusion. And with him it 
 is perfect. (3.) We are not to suppose 
 that all that appears to be piety is piety. 
 Some of the most plausible appearances 
 of piety are assumed by Satan and his 
 ministers. None ever professed a pro- 
 founder regard for the authority of God 
 than Satan did when he tempted the 
 Saviour. And if the prince of wicked- 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 231 
 
 15 Therefore it is no great 
 thing if his ministers also be 
 transformed as the ministers of 
 righteousness ; whose end ° shall 
 be according to their works. 
 
 a Ph. 3. 19. 
 
 ness can appear to be an angel of light, 
 we are not to be surprised if those who 
 have the blackest hearts appear to be 
 men of most eminent piety. (4.) We 
 should be on our guard. We should 
 not listen to suggestions merely because 
 they appear to come from a pious man, 
 nor because they seem to be prompted by 
 a regard to the will of God. We may 
 be always sure that, if we are to be 
 tempted, it will be by some one having 
 i great appearance of virtue and religion. 
 (5.) We are not to expect that Satan 
 *vill appear to man to be as bad as he 
 «. He never shows himself openly to 
 oe a spirit of pure wickedness ; or black 
 and abominable in his character ; or full 
 of evil and hateful. He would thus 
 defeat himself. It is for this reason that 
 wicked men do not believe that there 
 is such a being as Satan. Though 
 continually under his influence and 'led 
 captive by him at his will,' yet they 
 neither see him, nor the chains which 
 lead them, nor are they willing to be- 
 lieve in the existence of the one or the 
 other. 
 
 15. Therefore it is no great thing., 
 &c. It is not to be deemed surprising. 
 You are not to wonder if men of the 
 basest, blackest character put on the 
 appearance of the greatest sanctity, and 
 even become eminent as professed 
 preachers of righteousness, ^f Whose 
 end shall be, &c. Whose final destiny. 
 Their doom in eternity shall not be ac- 
 cording to their fair professions and 
 plausible pretences, for they cannot de- 
 ceive God ; but shall be according to 
 their real character, and their works. 
 Their work is a work of deception, and 
 they shall be judged according to that. 
 What revelations there will be in the 
 day of judgment, when all impostors 
 shall be unmasked, and when all hypo- 
 crites and deceivers shall be seen in their 
 
 16 1 say again, Let no man 
 think me a fool ; b if otherwise, 
 yet as a fool * receive me, that I 
 may boast myself a little. 
 
 17 That which I speak, I 
 
 6 c. 12. 6. n. 
 
 or, suffer. 
 
 true colours ! And how desirable is it 
 that there should be such a day to dis- 
 close all beings in their true character, 
 and forever to remove imposture and 
 delusion from the universe ! 
 
 16. I say again. I repeat it. He 
 refers to what he had said in ver. 1. 
 The sense is, ' I have said much respect- 
 ing myself which may seem to be fool- 
 ish. I admit that to boast in this manner 
 of one's own self in general is folly. 
 But circumstances compel me to it. 
 And I entreat you to look at those cir- 
 cumstances and not regard me as a fool 
 for doing it.' 1 If otherwise. If you 
 think otherwise. If I cannot obtain 
 this of you that you will not regard me 
 as acting prudently and wisely. If you 
 will think me foolish, still I am con- 
 strained to make these remarks in vindi- 
 cation of myself. 1 Yet as a fool re- 
 ceive me. Marg. "Suffer." See ver. 1. 
 Bear with me as you do with others. 
 Consider how much I have been pro- 
 voked to this ; how necessary it is to 
 my character ; and do not reject and 
 despise me because I am constrained to 
 say that of myself which is usually re- 
 garded as foolish boasting. 1 That 1 
 may boast myself a little. Since others 
 do it and are not rebuked, may I be per- 
 mitted to do it also. See ver. 18, 19. 
 There is something sarcastic in the 
 words ' a little? The sense is, ' Others 
 are allowed to boast a great deal. As- 
 suredly I may be allowed to boast a little 
 of what I have done.' 
 
 17. That which I speak. In praise 
 of myself, f / speak it not after the 
 Lord. See Note on 1 Cor. vii. 12. The 
 phrase here may mean either, I do not 
 speak this by inspiration or claiming to 
 be inspired by the Lord ; or more pro- 
 bably it may mean, I do not speak this 
 imitating the example of the Lord Jesus 
 or strictly as becomes his follower. He 
 
232 
 
 speak it a not after the Lord, but 
 as it were foolishly, in this con- 
 fidence b of boasting. 
 
 18 Seeing c that many glory 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 the flesh, I 
 
 a 1 Co. 7. 12. 
 
 : Ph. 3. 3. 4. 
 
 b c. 9. 4. 
 Co. 4. 10. 
 
 was eminently modest, and never vaunted 
 or boasted. And Paul probably means 
 to say, ' I do not in this profess to follow 
 him entirely. I admit that it is a de- 
 parture from his pure example in this 
 respect. But circumstances have com- 
 pelled me • and much as I would pre- 
 fer another strain of remark, and sensi- 
 ble as I am in general of the folly of 
 boasting, yet a regard to my apostolic 
 office and authority urges me to this 
 course.' Bloomfield supposes that the 
 apostle is not speaking seriously, but 
 that he has an allusion to their view 
 of what he was saying. ' Be it so, if 
 you think that what I speak, I speak 
 not as I profess to do according to the 
 Lord, or with a view to subserve the 
 purposes of his religion, but as it were 
 in folly, in the confidence of boasting, 
 yet permit me to do it notwithstanding, 
 since you allow others to do it.' It is 
 not easy to settle which is the true sense 
 of the passage. I see no conclusive 
 evidence against either. But the for- 
 mer seems to me to be most in accordance 
 with the scope of the whole. Paul ad- 
 mitted that what he said was not in 
 exact accordance with the spirit of the 
 Lord Jesus ; and in admitting this he 
 designed probably to administer a deli- 
 cate hint that all their boasting was a 
 wide departure from that spirit. 1 As 
 it were foolishly. As in folly. It is to 
 be admitted that to boast is in general 
 foolish ; and I admit that my language 
 is open to this general charge. "J In 
 this confidence of boasting. In confi- 
 dent boasting. I speak confidently and 
 I admit in the spirit of boasting. 
 
 18. Seeing that many glory, &c. 
 The false teachers in Corinth. They 
 boasted of their birth, rank, natural en- 
 dowments, eloquence, &c. See ver. 22. 
 Comp. Phil. in. 3, 4. | Z will glory 
 also. I also will boast of my endow- 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 will glory 
 
 after 
 also. 
 
 19 For ye suffer fools gladly, 
 seeing ye yourselves are wise. 
 
 20 For ye suffer, if a man 
 
 ments, which though somewhat different 
 | yet pertain in the main to the flesh also. 
 See ver. 23, seq. His endowments in 
 '■ the flesh, or what he had to boast of 
 i pertaining to the flesh, related not so 
 j much to birth and rank, though not in- 
 ferior to them in these, but to what the 
 I flesh had endured — to stripes and im- 
 | prisonments, and hunger and peril. 
 j This is an exceedingly delicate and hap- 
 ! py turn given to the whole subject. 
 
 19. For ye suffer fools gladly. You 
 tolerate or endure those who are really 
 
 | fools. This is perhaps, says Dr. Bloom- 
 ! field, the most sarcastic sentence ever 
 ; penned by the apostle Paul. Its sense 
 is, 'You profess to be wondrous wise. 
 And yet you who are so wise a people, 
 freely tolerate those who are foolish in 
 their boasting ; who proclaim their own 
 merits and attainments. You may al- 
 low me, therefore, to come in for my 
 share, and boast also, and thus obtain 
 your favour.' Or it may mean, 'You 
 are so profoundly wise as easily to see 
 who are fools. You have great power 
 of discernment in this, and have found 
 out that I am a fool, and also that other 
 boasters are fools. Yet knowing this, 
 you bear patiently with such fools ; have 
 admitted them to your favour and friend- 
 ship, and I may come in among the rest 
 of the fools, and partake also of your 
 favours.' They had borne with the 
 false apostles who had boasted of their 
 endowments, and yet they claimed to 
 be eminent for wisdom and discern 
 ment. 
 
 20. For ye suffer, &c. You bear 
 patiently with men who impose on you 
 in every way, and who are constantly 
 defrauding you, though you profess to 
 be so wise, and you may bear with me 
 a little, though I have no such intention. 
 Seriously, if you bear with boasters who 
 intend to delude and deceive you in 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 233 
 
 bring you into bondage, if a man 
 devour you, if a man take of you, 
 
 various ways, you may bear with one 
 who comes to you with no such inten- 
 tion, but with an honest purpose to do 
 good. *i If a man bring you into bond- 
 age (ksltoJivicI). If a man, or if any 
 one (if t/?) make a slave of you, or re- 
 duce you to servitude. The idea is, 
 doubtless, that the false teachers set up 
 a lordship over their consciences ; de- 
 stroyed their freedom of opinion ; and 
 made them subservient to their will. 
 They really took away their Christian 
 freedom as much as if they had been 
 slaves. In what way this was done is 
 unknown. It may be that they im- 
 posed on them rites and forms, com- 
 manded expensive and inconvenient 
 ceremonies, and required arduous ser- 
 vices merely at their own will. A false 
 religion always makes slaves. It is on- 
 ly true Christianity that leaves perfect 
 freedom. All heathens are slaves to 
 their priests ; all fanatics are slaves to 
 some fanatical leader; all those who 
 embrace error are slaves to those who 
 claim to be their guides. The papist 
 everywhere is the slave of the priest, 
 and the despotism there is as great as 
 in any region of servitude whatever. 
 1 If a man devour you. This is ex- 
 ceedingly sarcastic. The idea is, « Though 
 you are so wise, yet you in fact tolerate 
 men who impose on you — no matter 
 though they eat you up, or consume all 
 that you have. By their exorbitant de- 
 mands they would consume all you 
 have — or, as we would say, eat you out 
 of house and home.' All this they took 
 patiently ; and freely gave all that they 
 demanded. False teachers are always 
 rapacious. They seek the property, not 
 the souk of those to whom they minis- 
 ter. Not satisfied with a maintenance, 
 they aim to obtain all, and their plans 
 are formed to secure as much as possi- 
 ble of those to whom they minister. 
 K If a man take of you. If he take 
 and seize upon your possessions. If he 
 comes and takes what he pleases and 
 bears it away as his own. ^Ifa man 
 20* 
 
 if a man exalt himself, if a man 
 smite you on the face. 
 
 exalt himself. If he set himself up as 
 a ruler and claim submission. No 
 matter how arrogant his claims, yet you 
 are ready to bear with him. You might 
 then bear with me in the very moderate 
 demands which I make on your obe- 
 dience and confidence. % If a man 
 smite you on the face. The word here 
 rendered " smite" (Ji§a>) means properly 
 to skin, to flay ; but in the New Testa- 
 ment it means to beat, to scourge — espe- 
 cially so as to take off the skin. Matt, 
 xxi. 35. Mark xii. 3. 5. The idea 
 here is, if any one treats you with con- 
 tumely and scorn — since there can be 
 no higher expression of it than to smite 
 a man on the face. Matt. xxvi. 67. It 
 is not to be supposed that this occurred 
 literally among the Corinthians ; but the 
 idea is, that the false teachers really 
 treated them with as little respect as if 
 they smote them on the face. In what 
 way this was done is unknown ; but 
 probably it was by their domineering 
 manners, and the little respect which 
 they showed for the opinions and feelings 
 of the Corinthian Christians. Paul says 
 that as they bore this very patiently, they 
 might allow him to make some remarks 
 about himself in self-commendation. 
 
 21. / speak as concerning reproach. 
 I speak of disgrace. That is, says 
 Rosenmuller, " I speak of your disgrace, 
 or, as others prefer it, of the disgrace of 
 the false apostles." Doddridge regards 
 it as a question. " Do I speak this by 
 way of dishonour, from an envious de- 
 sire to derogate from my superiors so as 
 to bring them down to my own level ?" 
 But to me it seems that Paul refers to 
 what he had been admitting respecting 
 himself — to what he had evinced in 
 rudeness of speech (ver. 6), and to his 
 not having urged his claims to the sup- 
 port which an apostle had a right to 
 receive — to things in short which they 
 esteemed to be disgraceful or reproach- 
 ful. And his idea, it seems to me, is 
 this. ' I have been speaking of re- 
 proach or disgrace as if I was weak. 
 
S34 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A D 60. 
 
 21 I speak as concerning re- 
 proach, as though we had been 
 weak. Howbeit whereinsoever 
 
 i. e. as if I was disposed to admit as true 
 all that has been said of me as reproachful 
 or disgraceful ; all that has been said of my 
 want of qualifications for the office, of 
 my want of talent, or elevated rank, or 
 honourable birth, &c. I have not pressed 
 my claims, but have been reasoning as 
 if all this were true — as if all that was 
 honourable in birth and elevated in rank 
 belonged to them — all that is mean and 
 unworthy pertained to me. But it is 
 not so. Whatever they have /have. 
 Whatever they can boast of, I can boast 
 of in a more eminent degree. What- 
 ever advantage there is in birth is mine ; 
 and I can tell of toils, and trials, and 
 sufferings in the apostolic office which 
 far surpass theirs.' Paul proceeds, there- 
 fore, to a full statement of his advantages 
 of birth and of his labours in the cause 
 of the Redeemer. ^ As though we had 
 been weak. As if I had no claims to 
 urge ; as if I had no just cause of bold- 
 ness, but must submit to this reproach. 
 5 Howbeit (J*). But. The sense is, 
 if any one is disposed to boast, I am 
 ready for him. I can tell also of things 
 that have as high claims to confidence 
 as they can. If they are disposed to 
 go into a comparison on the points 
 which qualify a man for the office of 
 an apostle, I am ready to compare my- 
 self with them. J Whereinsoever' (}v «). 
 In what. Whatever they have to boast 
 of I am prepared also to show that I am 
 equal to them. Be it pertaining to 
 birth, ranK, education, labours, they will 
 find that I do not shrink from the com- 
 parison. 1 Any is bold (ti; <rox/ua). 
 Any one dares to boast ; any one is 
 bold. *f I speak foolishly. Remember 
 now that I speak as a fool. I have been 
 charged with this folly. Just now keep 
 that in mind ; and do not forget that it 
 is only a fool who is speaking. Just 
 recollect that I have no claims to public 
 confidence; that I am destitute of all 
 pretensions to the apostolic office ; that 
 I am given to a vain parade and osten- 
 
 any is bold, (I speak foolishly,) 
 I am bold also. 
 
 22 Are they Hebrews ? so am 
 
 tation, and to boasting of what does 
 not belong to me, and when you recol- 
 lect this let me tell my story. The 
 whole passage is ironical in the 
 highest degree. The sense is, ' It is 
 doubtless all nonsense and folly for a 
 man to boast who has only the qualifi- 
 cations which I have. But there is a 
 great deal of wisdom in their boasting 
 who have so much more elevated endow- 
 ments for the apostolic office.' ^ / am 
 bold also. I can meet them on their 
 own ground, and speak of qualifications 
 not inferior to theirs. 
 
 22. Are they Hebrews ? This proves 
 that the persons who had made the 
 difficulty in Corinth were those who 
 were of Hebrew extraction, though it 
 may be that they had been born in 
 Greece and had been educated in the 
 Grecian philosophy and art of rhetoric. 
 It is also clear that they prided them- 
 selves on being Jews — on having a 
 connexion with the people and land 
 from whence the religion which the 
 Corinthian church now professed had 
 emanated. Indications are apparent 
 everywhere in the New Testament of 
 the superiority which the Jewish con- 
 verts to Christianity claimed over those 
 converted from among the heathen. 
 Their boast would probably be that they 
 were the descendants of the patriarchs ; 
 that the land of the prophets was theirs; 
 that they spake the language in which 
 the oracles of God were given ; that the 
 true religion had proceeded from them, 
 &c. t So am I. I have as high claims 
 as any of them to distinction on this 
 head. Paul had all their advantages 
 of birth. He was an Israelite ; of the 
 honoured tribe of Benjamin ; a Phari- 
 see, circumcised at the usual time 
 (Phil. iii. 5), and educated in the best 
 manner at the feet of one of their most 
 eminent teachers. Acts xxii. 3. t Are 
 they Israelites ? Another name, signify- 
 ing substantially the same thing. The 
 only difference i.-?, that the word " He- 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER XL 
 
 235 
 
 I. Are they Israelites ? so am 
 I. Are they the seed of Abra- 
 ham ? so am I. 
 
 23 Are they ministers of 
 
 brew" signified properly one who was 
 from beyond (nap from -oy, to pass, to 
 pass over — hence applied to Abraham, 
 because he had come from a foreign 
 land : and the word denoted properly a 
 foreigner — a man from the land or 
 country beyond, -\2y) the Euphrates. 
 The name Israelite denoted properly 
 one descended from Israel or Jacob, and 
 the difference between them was, that 
 the name Israelite, being a patronymic 
 derived from one of the founders of their 
 nation, was in use among themselves ; 
 the name Hebrew was applied by the 
 Canaanite to them as having come from 
 beyond the river, and was the current 
 name among foreign tribes and nations. 
 See Gesenius' Lexicon on the word 
 (nap) Hebrew. Paul in the passage 
 before us means to say that he had as 
 good a claim to the honour of being a 
 native born descendant of Israel as could 
 be urged by any of them. 1 Are they 
 the seed of Abraham ? Do they boast 
 that they are descended from Abraham. 
 This with all the Jews was regarded as 
 a distinguished honour (See Matt. iii. 
 9. John viii. 39), and no doubt the 
 false teachers in Corinth boasted of it 
 as eminently qualifying them to engage 
 in the work of the ministry, f So am 
 7. Paul had the same qualification. 
 He was a Jew also by birth. He 
 was of the tribe of Benjamin. Phil, 
 iii. 5. 
 
 23. Are they ministers of Christ ? 
 Though Jews by birth yet they claimed 
 to be the ministers of the Messiah. 
 % I speak as a fool. As if he had said, 
 ' Bear in mind, in what I am now about 
 to say, that he who speaks is accused of 
 jeing a fool in boasting. Let it not be 
 deemed improper that I should act in 
 this character, and since you regard me 
 as such, let me speak like a fool.' His 
 frequent reminding them of this charge 
 was eminently fitted to humble them 
 that they had ever made it, especially 
 
 Christ ? (I speak as a fool) I am 
 more ; in labours a more abun- 
 dant, in stripes b above measure, 
 
 a 1 Co 15. 10. b Ac. 9. 16 ; 20. 23 ; 21. 11. 
 
 when they were reminded by an enu- 
 meration of his trials of the character 
 of the man against whom the charge 
 was brought. 1 I am more. Paul was 
 not disposed to deny that they were 
 true ministers of Christ. But he had 
 higher claims to the office than they 
 had. He had been called to it in a more 
 remarkable manner, and he had shown 
 by his labours and trials that he had 
 more of the true spirit of a minister of 
 the Lord Jesus than they had. He 
 therefore goes into detail to show what 
 he had endured in endeavouring to 
 diffuse the knowledge of the Saviour ; 
 trials which he had borne probably while 
 they had been dwelling in comparative 
 ease and in a comfortable manner, free 
 from suffering and persecution, f In 
 labours more abundant. In the kind of 
 labour necessary in propagating the gos- 
 pel. Probably he had now been en- 
 gaged in the work a much longer time 
 than they had, and had been far more 
 indefatigable in it. f In stripes. In 
 receiving stripes ; i. e. I have been more 
 frequently scoui'ged. ver. 24. This was 
 a proof of his being a minister of Christ, 
 because eminent devotedness to him at 
 that time, of necessity subjected a man 
 to frequent scourging. The ministry 
 is one of the very few places, perhaps 
 it stands alone in this, where it is 
 proof of peculiar qualification for office 
 that a man has been treated with all 
 manner of contumely, and has even been 
 often publicly whipped. What other 
 office admits such a qualification as this' 1 
 f Above measure. Exceedingly; far 
 exceeding them. He had received far 
 more than they had, and he judged, 
 therefore, that this was one evidence 
 that he had been called to the ministry 
 f In prisons more frequent. Luke, in 
 the Acts of the Apostles, mentions only 
 one imprisonment of Paul before the 
 time when this epistle was written. That 
 was at Philippi with Silas. Acts xvi. 23. 
 
236 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS 
 more frequent, in 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 in prisons 
 deaths a oft. 
 
 a 1 Co. 15. 30. 32. 
 
 seq. But we are to remember that many 
 things were omitted by Luke. He does 
 not profess to give an account of all 
 that happened to Paul ; and an omis- 
 sion is not a contradiction. For any 
 thing that Luke says, Paul may have 
 been imprisoned often. He 7nentions 
 his having been in prison once ; he does 
 not deny that he had been in prison 
 many times besides. See on ver. 24. 
 1 In deaths oft. That is, exposed to 
 death ; or suffering pain equal to death. 
 See on ch. i. 9. No one familiar with 
 the history of Paul can doubt that he 
 was often in danger of death. 
 
 24. Of the Jews, &c. On this 
 verse and the following verse it is 
 of importance to make a few remarks 
 preliminary to the explanation of the 
 phrases. (1.) It is admitted that the 
 particulars here referred to cannot 
 be extracted out of the Acts of the 
 Apostles. A few can be identified, but 
 there are many more trials referred to 
 here than are specified there. (2.) This 
 proves that this epistle was not framed 
 from the history, but that they are writ- 
 ten independently of one another. — Pa- 
 ley. (3.) Yet they are not inconsistent 
 one with the other. For there is no 
 article in the enumeration here which is 
 contradicted by the history, and the 
 history, though silent with respect to 
 many of these transactions, has left 
 space enough to suppose that they may 
 have occurred, (a) There is no con- 
 tradiction between the accounts. W here 
 it is said by Paul that he was thrice 
 beaten with rods, though in the Acts 
 but one beating is mentioned, yet there 
 is no contradiction. It is only the omis- 
 sion to record all that occurred to Paul. 
 But had the history, says Paley, con- 
 tained an account of four beatings with 
 rods, while Paul mentions here but three, 
 there would have been a contradiction. 
 And so of the other particulars, (b) 
 Though the Acts of the Apostles be 
 silent concerning many of the instances 
 
 24 Of the Jews five times re- 
 ceived I forty stripes h save one. 
 
 b De. 25. 3. 
 
 referred to, yet that silence may be 
 accounted for on the plan and design 
 of the history. The date of the epistle 
 synchronizes with the beginning of the 
 twentieth chapter of the Acts. The 
 part, therefore, which precedes the 
 twentieth chapter is the only place in 
 which can be found any notice of the 
 transactions to which Paul here refers. 
 And it is evident from the Acts that the 
 author of that history was not with 
 Paul until his departure from Troas, as 
 related in ch. xvi. 10. See Note on that 
 place. From that time Luke attended 
 Paul in his travels. From that period 
 to the time when this epistle was written 
 occupies but four chapters of the history, 
 and it is here if anywhere that we are 
 to look for the minute account of the 
 life of Paul. But here much may have 
 occurred to Paul before Luke joined 
 him. And as it was the design of Luke 
 to give an account of Paul mainly 
 after he joined him, it is not to be won- 
 dered at that many things may have been 
 omitted of his previous life, (c) The 
 period of time after the conversion of 
 Paul to the time when Luke joined him 
 at Troas is very succinctly given. That 
 period embraced sixteen years, and is 
 comprised in a few chapters. Yet in 
 that time Paul was constantly travelling. 
 He went to Arabia, returned to Damas- 
 cus, went to Jerusalem, and then to 
 Tarsus, and from Tarsus to Antioch, 
 and thence to Cyprus, and then through 
 Asia Minor, &c. In this time he must 
 have made many voyages, and been 
 exposed to many perils. Yet all this 
 is comprised in a few chapters, and a 
 considerable portion of them is occupied 
 with an account of public discourses. 
 In that period of sixteen years, there- 
 fore, there was ample opportunity for all 
 the occurrences which are here referred 
 to by Paul, See Paley's Horse Pau- 
 lina? on 2 Cor. No. ix. (d) I may 
 add, that from the account which 
 follows the time when Luke joined him 
 
k. D 60.] CHAPTER XI. 
 
 25 Thrice was I beaten a with 
 
 a Ac. 16. 22. 
 
 at Troas (from Acts xvi. 10), it is alto- 
 gether probable that he had endured 
 much before. After that time there is 
 mention of just such transactions of 
 scourging, stoning, &c. as are here 
 specified, and it is altogether probable 
 that he had been called to suffer them 
 before. When Paul says " of the Jews," 
 &c, he refers to this because this was a 
 Jewish mode of punishment. It was 
 usual with them to inflict but thirty- 
 nine blows. The Gentiles were not 
 limited by law in the number which 
 they inflicted. Tf Five times. This 
 was doubtless in their synagogues and 
 before their courts of justice. They 
 had not the power of capital punish- 
 ment, but they had the power of inflict- 
 ing minor punishments. And though 
 the instances are not specified by Luke 
 in the Acts, yet the statement here by 
 Paul has every degree of probability. 
 We know that he often preached in 
 their synagogues (Acts ix. 20 ; xiii. 5. 
 14, 15 ; xiv. 1 ; xvii. 17 ; xviii. 4) ; and 
 nothing is more probable than that they 
 would be enraged against him, and 
 would vent their malice in every way 
 possible. They regarded him as an 
 apostate, and a ringleader of the Naza- 
 renes, and they would not fail to inflict 
 on him the severest punishment which 
 they were permitted to. t Forty stripes 
 save one. The word stripes does not 
 occur in the original, but is necessarily 
 understood. The law of Moses (Deut. 
 xxv. 3) expressly limited the number 
 of stripes that might be inflicted to forty. 
 In no case might this number be ex- 
 ceeded. This was a humane provision, 
 and one that was not found among the 
 heathen, who inflicted any number of 
 blows at discretion. Unhappily it is 
 not observed among professedly Chris- 
 tian nations where the practice of whip- 
 ping prevails, and particularly in slave 
 countries, where the master inflicts any 
 number of blows at his pleasure. In 
 practice among the Hebrew aie num- 
 ber of blows inflicted was in fact limited 
 
 237 
 
 rods, once was I b stoned, thrice 
 
 b Ac. 14. 19. 
 
 to thirty-nine, lest by any accident in 
 counting, the criminal should receive 
 more than the number prescribed in the 
 law. There was another reason still for 
 limiting it to thirty-nine. They usually 
 made use of a scourge with three thongs, 
 and this was struck thirteen times. 
 That it was usual to inflict but thirty- 
 nine lashes is apparent from Josephus, 
 Ant. book iv. ch. viii. § 21. 
 
 25. Thrice was I beaten with rods. 
 In the Acts of the Apostles there is 
 mention made of his being beaten in 
 this manner but once before the time 
 when this epistle was written. That 
 occurred at Philippi. Acts xvi. 22, 23. 
 But there is no reason to doubt that it 
 was more frequently done. This was a 
 frequent mode of punishment among 
 the ancient nations, and as Paul was 
 often persecuted, he would be naturally 
 subjected to this shameful punishment. 
 1 Once was I stoned. This was the 
 usual mode of punishment among the 
 Jews for blasphemy. The instance re- 
 ferred to here occurred at Lystra. Acts 
 xiv. 19. Paley (Horse Paulinos) has 
 remarked that this, when confronted 
 with the history, furnished the nearest 
 approach to a contradiction without a 
 contradiction being actually incurred, 
 that he ever had met with. The history 
 (Acts xiv. 1 9) contains but one account 
 of his being actually stoned. But prior 
 to this (Acts xiv. 5), it mentions that 
 " an assault was made both of the Gen- 
 tiles, and also of the Jews with their 
 rulers, to use them despiteful ly and to 
 stone them, but they were aware of it, 
 and fled to Lystra and Derbe." " Now," 
 Paley remarks, " had the assault been 
 completed ; had the history related that 
 a stone was thrown, as it relates that 
 preparations were made both by Jews 
 and Gentiles to stone Paul and his com- 
 panions ; or even had the account of 
 this transaction stopped without going 
 on to inform us that Paul and his com- 
 panions were aware of their danger and 
 fled, a contradiction between the history 
 
238 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 
 I suffered shipwreck, a night" 
 and a day I have been in the deep ; 
 26 In journey ings often, in 
 perils of waters, in perils of rob- 
 bers, in perils fc by mine own 
 
 a Ac 27. b Ac. 14. 5. 
 
 and the epistle would have ensued. 
 Truth is necessarily consistent ; but it 
 is scarcely possible that independent 
 accounts, not having truth to guide 
 them, should thus advance to the very 
 brink of contradiction without falling 
 into it" % Thrice I suffered shipwreck. 
 On what occasions, or where, is now 
 unknown, as these instances are not 
 referred to in the Acts of the Apostles. 
 The instance of shipwreck recorded there 
 (ch. xxvii.), which occurred when on 
 his way to Rome, happened after this 
 epistle was written, and should not be 
 supposed to be one of the instances 
 referred to here. Paul made many 
 voyages in going from Jerusalem to 
 Tarsus, and to Antioch, and to various 
 parts of Asia Minor, and to Cyprus ; 
 and shipwrecks in those seas were by 
 no means such unusual occurrences as 
 to render this account improbable, f A 
 night and a day, &c. The word here 
 used (yvx§Yiy.ig<,v) denotes a complete 
 natural day, or twenty-four hours. ^ In 
 the deep. To what this refers we do 
 not now certainly know. It is probable, 
 however, that Paul refers to some period 
 when, having been shipwrecked, he was 
 saved by supporting himself on a plank 
 or fragment of the vessel until he ob- 
 tained relief. Such a situation is one 
 of great peril, and he mentions it, there- 
 fore, among the trials which he had 
 endured. The supposition of some com- 
 mentators that he spent his time on 
 some rock in the deep ; or of others that 
 this means some deep dungeon ; or of 
 others that he was swallowed by a 
 whale, like Jonah, shows the extent to 
 which the fancy is often indulged in 
 interpreting the Bible. 
 
 26. Injourneyings often. Of course 
 subject to the fatigue, toil, and danger 
 which such a mode of life involves. 
 K In perils of waters. In danger of 
 
 countrymen, in perils by th< 
 heathen, in perils in the city, zV 
 perils in the wilderness, in peril* 
 in the sea, in perils among false 
 brethren ; 
 
 losing my life at sea, or by floods, or bj 
 crossing streams. % Of robbers. Man) 
 of the countries, especially Arabia 
 through which he travelled were the* 
 infested, as they are now, with robbers 
 It is not impossible or improbable tha< 
 he was often attacked and his life en 
 dangered. It is still unsafe to travel 
 in many of the places through which hfc 
 travelled. ^ By mine own countrymen. 
 The Jews. They often scourged him ; 
 laid wait for him ; and were ready to 
 put him to death. They had deep 
 enmity against him as an apostate, and 
 he was in constant danger of being put 
 to death by them. ^ By the heathen. 
 By those who had not the true religion. 
 Several instances of his danger from 
 this quarter are mentioned in the Acts. 
 *! In the city. In cities, as in Derbe, 
 Lystra, Philippi, Jerusalem, Ephesus, 
 &c. U In the wilderness. In the 
 desert, where he would be exposed to 
 ambushes, or to wild beasts, or to hun- 
 ger and want. Instances of this are 
 not recorded in the Acts, but no one 
 can doubt that they occurred. The 
 idea here is, that he had met with con- 
 stant danger wherever he was, whether 
 in the busy haunts of men or in the 
 solitude and loneliness of the desert. 
 1 In the sea. See ver. 25. J Among 
 fahe brethren. This was the crowning 
 danger and trial to Paul, as it is to all 
 others. A man can better bear danger 
 by land and water, among robbers and 
 in deserts, than he can bear to have his 
 confidence abused, and to be subjected 
 to the action and the arts of spies upon 
 his conduct. Who these were he has 
 not informed us. He mentions it as 
 the chief trial to which he had been 
 exposed, that he had met those who 
 pretended to be his friends, and who yet 
 had sought every possible opportunity 
 to expose and destroy him. Perhaps 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 27 In weariness and painful- 
 ness, in watchings a often, in 
 hunger *and thirst, in fastings 
 often, in cold and nakedness. 
 
 a Ac. 20. 31. b 1 Co. 4. 11. 
 
 he has here a delicate reference to the 
 danger which he apprehended from the 
 false brethren in the church at Corinth. 
 
 27. In weariness. Resulting from 
 travelling, exposure, labour, and want. 
 The word kottos (from kotttoi, to beat, 
 to cut) means, properly, wailing and 
 grief, accompanied with beating the 
 breast. Hence the word means toil, 
 labour, wearisome effort, •f And pain- 
 fulness. This word (/uo%$c;) is a 
 stronger term than the former. It im- 
 plies painful effort ; labour producing 
 sorrow, and in the New Testament is 
 uniformly connected with the word ren- 
 dered " weariness" ( 1 Thess. ii. 9. 
 2 Thess. iii. 8), rendered in both those 
 places " travail." t In watchings often. 
 In loss of sleep, arising from abundant 
 toils and from danger. See Note on ch. 
 vi. 5. f In hunger and thirst. From 
 travelling among strangers, and being 
 dependent on them and on his own 
 personal labours. See Note, 1 Cor. iv. 1 1. 
 ^ In fastings often. Either voluntary 
 or involuntary. See Note on ch. vi. 5. 
 Tf In cold and nakedness. See Note, 
 1 Cor. iv. 11. 
 
 28. Beside those things that are with- 
 out. In addition to these external trials, 
 these trials pertaining u> the body, I 
 have mental trials and anxieties result- 
 ing from the necessary care of all the 
 churches. But on the meaning of these 
 words commentators are not agreed. 
 Rosenmuller supposes that the phrase 
 means ' besides those things that come 
 from other sources,' "that I may omit 
 other things." Beza, Erasmus, Bloom- 
 field, and some others suppose that the 
 passage means those things out of the 
 regular routine of his office. Doddridge, 
 "beside foreign affairs." Probably the 
 sense is, ' Apart from the things beside" 
 (Xa>g/c rZv jragatToc) ; not to mention 
 other matters ; or if other matters should 
 bo laid aside, there is this continually 
 
 28 Beside those things that 
 are without, that which cometh 
 upon me daily, the care c of all 
 the churches. 
 
 c Ac. 15. 36, 40. 
 
 rushing anxiety arising from the care 
 of all the churches.' That is, this 
 would be enough in itself. Laying 
 aside all that arises from hunger, thirst, 
 cold, &c, this continual care occupies 
 my mind and weighs upon my heart. 
 1 That which cometh upon me daily. 
 There is great force in the original 
 here. The phrase rendered \ that which 
 cometh upon me' means properly, ' that 
 which rushes upon me.' The word 
 (\m7ii<TT*o-is) means properly a con- 
 course, a crowd, hence a tumult; and 
 the idea here is, that these cares rushed 
 upon him, or pressed upon him like a 
 crowd of men or a mob that bore all 
 before it. This is one of Paul's most 
 energetic expressions, and denotes the 
 incessant anxiety of mind to which he 
 was subject. ^ The care of all the 
 churches. The care of the numerous 
 churches which he had established, and 
 which needed his constant supervision. 
 They were young ; many of them were 
 feeble ; many were made up of hetero- 
 geneous materials; many composed of 
 Jews and Gentiles mingled together, 
 with conflicting prejudices, habits, pre- 
 ferences ; many of them were composed 
 of those who had been gathered from 
 the lowest ranks of life ; and questions 
 would be constantly occurring lelating 
 to their order and discipline in which 
 Paul would feel a deep interest, and 
 which would naturally be referred to 
 him for decision. Besides this, they 
 had many trials. They were persecuted, 
 and would suffer much. In their suffer- 
 ings Paul would feel deep sympathy, 
 and would desire, as far as possible, to 
 afford them relief. In addition to the 
 churches which he had planted, he 
 would feel an interest in all others, 
 and doubtless many cases would be re- 
 ferred to him as an eminent apostle 
 for counsel and advice. No wonder 
 that all this came rushing on him like 
 
240 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 29 Who a is weak, and I am 
 not weak ? who is offended, and 
 I burn not ? 
 
 a 1 Co. 9. 22. 
 
 a tumultuous assembly ready to over- 
 power him. 
 
 29. Who is weak, &c. I sympathize 
 with all. I feel where others feel, and 
 their sorrows excite deep sympathetic 
 emotions in my bosom. Like a tender 
 and compassionate friend I am affected 
 when I see others in circumstances of 
 distress. The word weak here may 
 refer to any want of strength, any in- 
 firmity or feebleness arising either from 
 body or mind. It may include all who 
 were feeble by persecution or by disease ; 
 or it may refer to the weak in faith and 
 doubtful about their duty (see 1 Cor. 
 ix. 22), and to those who were bur- 
 dened with mental sorrows. The idea 
 is, that Paul had a deep spmpathy in all 
 who needed such sympathy from any 
 cause. And the statement here shows 
 the depth of feeling of this great apostle ; 
 and shows what should be the feeling 
 of every pastor. See Note on Rom. 
 xii. 15. If And I am not weak? I 
 share his feelings and sympathize with 
 him. If he suffers, I suffer. Bloom- 
 field supposes that Paul means that in 
 the case of those who were weak in the 
 faith he accommodated himself to their 
 weakness and thus became all things to 
 all men. See my Note on 1 Cor. ix. 22. 
 But it seems to me probable that he 
 uses the phrase here in a more general 
 sense, as denoting that he sympathized 
 with those who were weak and feeble 
 in all their circumstances. If Who is 
 offended (<rK*.vScLKi£ira.t). Who is scan- 
 dalized. The word means properly to 
 cause to stumble and fall ; hence to be 
 a stumbling-block to any one ; to give 
 or cause offence to any one. The idea 
 here seems to be, ' who is liable to be 
 led astray ; who has temptations and 
 trials that are likely to lead him to sin 
 or to cause him to fall, and I do not 
 burn with impatience to restore him, or 
 with indignation against the tempter V 
 In all such cases Paul deeply sympa- 
 thized with them, and was prompt to 
 
 30 If I must needs glory, I 
 will b glory of the things which 
 concern mine infirmities. 
 
 be. 12.5,9, 10. 
 
 aid them. ^ And I burn not ? That 
 is, with anger or with great agitation 
 of mind at learning that any one had 
 fallen into sin. This may either mean 
 that he would burn with indignation 
 against those who had led them into 
 sin, or be deeply excited in view of the 
 disgrace which would be thus brought 
 on the Christian cause. In either case it 
 means that his mind would be in a glow 
 of emotion ; he would feel deeply ; he 
 could not look upon such things with 
 indifference or without being deeply 
 agitated. With all he sympathized ; 
 and the condition of all, whether in a 
 state of feeble faith, or feeble body, or 
 falling into sin, excited the deepest emo- 
 tions in his mind. The truth here taught 
 is, that Paul felt a deep sympathy for 
 all others who bore the Christian name, 
 and this sympathy for others greatly in- 
 creased the cares and toils of the apos- 
 tolic office which he sustained. But 
 having given this exposition, candour 
 compels me to acknowledge that the 
 whole verse may mean, ' Who is feeble 
 in the faith in regard to certain observ- 
 ances and rites and customs (1 Cor. 
 ix. 22), and I do not also evince the 
 same ] I do not rouse their prejudices, 
 or wound their feelings, or alarm them. 
 On the other hand, who is scandalized, 
 or led into sin oy tne example of others 
 in regard to such custom ; who is led 
 by the example of others into transgres- 
 ion, and I do not burn with indignation !' 
 In either case, however, the general 
 sense is, that he sympathized with all 
 others. 
 
 30. If I must needs glory. It is 
 unpleasant for me to boast, but i ircum- 
 stances have compelled me. But since 
 I am compelled, I will not boast of my 
 rank, or talents, but of that which is 
 regarded by some as an infirmity. 
 If Mine infirmities. Greek, • The things 
 of my weakness.' The word here used 
 is derived from the same word which 
 is rendered weak/ in ver. 29. He 
 
k. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 241 
 
 31 The God" and Father of 
 our Lord Jesus Christ, which h 
 
 a Ga. 1. 3. b Ro. 9. 5. 
 
 intends doubtless to refer here to what 
 had preceded in his enumeration of the 
 trials which he had endured. He had 
 spoken of sufferings. He had endured 
 much. He had also spoken of that 
 tenderness of feeling which prompted 
 him to sympathize so deeply when 
 others suffered. He admitted that he 
 often wept, and trembled, and glowed 
 with strong feelings on occasions which 
 perhaps to many would not seem to 
 call for such strong emotions, and which 
 they might be disposed to set down as 
 a weakness or infirmity. This might 
 especially be the case among the Greeks, 
 where many philosophers, as the Stoics, 
 were disposed to regard all sympathetic 
 feeling, and all sensitiveness to suffering 
 as an infirmity. But Paul admitted 
 that he was disposed to glory in this 
 alone. He gloried that he had suffered 
 so much ; that he had endured so many 
 trials on account of Christianity, and 
 that he had a mind that was capable 
 of feeling for others and of entering 
 into their sorrows and trials. Well 
 might he do this, for there is no more 
 lovely feature in the mind of a virtuous 
 man, and there is no more lovely influ- 
 ence of Christianity than this, that it 
 teaches us to " bear a brother's woes," 
 and to sympathize in all the sorrows 
 and joys of others. Philosophy and in- 
 fidelity may be dissocial, cheerless, cold ; 
 but it is not so with Christianity. Phi- 
 losophy may snap asunder all the cords 
 which bind us to the living world, but 
 Christianity strengthens these cords ; 
 cold and cheerless atheism and skepticism 
 may teach us to look with unconcern 
 on a suffering world, but it is the glory 
 of Christianity that it teaches us to feel 
 An interest in the weal or wo of the 
 obscurest man that lives, to rejoice in 
 his joy and to weep in his sorrows. 
 
 31. The God and Father, &c. Paul 
 
 was accustomed to make solemn appeals 
 
 to God for the truth of what he said, 
 
 especially when it was likely to be call- 
 
 21 
 
 is blessed forevermore, knoweth 
 c that I lie not. 
 
 c 1 Th. 2. 5. 
 
 ed in question. See ver. 10. Comp. 
 Rom. ix. 1. The solemn appeal which 
 he here makes to God is made in view 
 of what he had just said of his suffer- 
 ings, not of what follows — for there was 
 nothing in the occurrence at Damascus 
 that demanded so solemn an appeal to 
 God. The reason of this asseveration 
 is probably that the transactions to which 
 he had referred were known to but 
 few, and perhaps not all of them to 
 even his best friends; that his trials 
 and calamities had been so numerous 
 and extraordinary that his enemies 
 would say that they were improbable, 
 and that all this had been the mere 
 fruit of exaggeration; and as he had 
 no witnesses to appeal to for the truth 
 of what he said, he makes a solemn 
 appeal to the ever-blessed God. This 
 appeal is made with great reverence. 
 It is not rash, or bold, and is by no means 
 irreverent or profane. He appeals to 
 God as the Father of the Redeemer 
 whom he so much venerated and lc v ed, 
 and as himself blessed forevermore. If 
 all appeals to God were made on as 
 important occasions as this, and with 
 the same profound veneration and reve- 
 rence, such appeals would never be 
 improper, and we should never be shock- 
 ed as we are often now when men ap- 
 peal to God. This passage proves that 
 an appeal to God on great occasions 
 is not improper ; it proves also that it 
 should be done with profound venera- 
 tion. 
 
 32. At Damascus. This circum- 
 stance is mentioned as an additional 
 trial. It is evidently mentioned as an 
 instance of peril which had escaped his 
 recollection in the rapid account of 
 his dangers enumerated in the previous 
 verses. It is designed to show what 
 imminent danger he was in, and how 
 narrowly he escaped with his life. On 
 the situation of Damascus, see Note, 
 Acts ix. 2. The transaction here re- 
 ferred to is also related by Luke (Acts 
 
243 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 32 In Damascus a the governor 
 under Aretas the king kept the 
 
 a Ac. 9. 24, 25. 
 
 ix. 24, 25), though without mentioning 
 the name of the king, or referring to 
 the fact that the governor kept the city 
 with a garrison. 1 The governor. 
 Greek, o i&vde,x>x, The ethnarch ,- pro- 
 perly a ruler of the people, a prefect, a 
 ruler, a chief. Who he was is unknown, 
 though he was evidently some officer 
 under the king. It is not improbable 
 that he was a Jew, or at any rate he 
 was one who could be influenced by 
 the Jews, and who was doubtless ex- 
 cited by the Jews to guard the city, and 
 if possible to take Paul as a malefactor. 
 Luke informs us (Acts ix. 23, 24) that 
 the Jews took counsel against Paul to 
 kill him, and that they watched the 
 gates night and day to effect their 
 object They doubtless represented 
 Paul as an apostate, and as aiming to 
 overthrow their religion. He had come 
 with an important commission to Da- 
 mascus and had failed to execute it; 
 he had become the open friend of those 
 whom he came to destroy ; and they 
 doubtless claimed of the civil authori- 
 ties of Damascus that he should be 
 given up and taken to Jerusalem for 
 trial. It was not difficult, therefore, to 
 secure the co-operation of the governor 
 of the city in the case, and there is no 
 improbability in the statement % Un- 
 der Aretas the king. There were three 
 kings of this name who are particularly 
 mentioned by ancient writers. The 
 first is mentioned in 2 Mac. v. 8, as the 
 " king of the Arabians." He lived about 
 170 years before Christ, and of course 
 could not be the one referred to here. 
 The second is mentioned in Josephus, 
 Ant. b. xiii. ch. xv. § 2. He is first 
 mentioned as having reigned in Ccelo- 
 Syria, but as being called to the govern- 
 ment of Damascus by those who dwelt 
 there, on account of the hatred which 
 they bore to Ptolemy Meneus. Whis- 
 ton remarks in a note on Josephus, 
 that this was the first king of the Ara- 
 bians who took Damascus and reigned 
 
 city of the Damascenes with a 
 garrison, desirous to apprehend 
 me : 
 
 there, and that this name afterwards be- 
 came common to such Arabian kings as 
 reigned at Damascus and at Petra. Sea 
 Josephus, Ant. b. xvi. ch. ix. § 4. Of 
 course this king reigned some time be 
 fore the transaction here referred to by 
 Paul. A third king of this name, says 
 Rosenmuller, is the one mentioned here. 
 He was the father-in-law of Herod 
 Antipas. He made war with his son 
 in-law Herod because he had repudiated 
 his daughter, the wife of Herod. This 
 he had done in order to marry his 
 brother Philip's wife. See Note, Matt 
 xiv. 3. On this account Aretas made 
 war with Herod, and in order to resist 
 him, Herod applied to Tiberius the Ro- 
 man emperor for aid. Vitellius was 
 sent by Tiberius to subdue Aretas, and 
 to bring him dead or alive to Rome. 
 But before Vitellius had embarked in 
 the enterprise, Tiberius died, and thus 
 Aretas was saved from ruin. It is sup- 
 posed that in this state of things, when 
 thus waging war with Herod, he made 
 an incursion to Syria and seized upon 
 Damascus, where he was reigning when 
 Paul went there ; or if not reigning 
 there personally, he had appointed an 
 ethnarch or governor who administered 
 the affairs of the city in his place. 
 1 Kept the city, &c. Luke (Actsix. 
 24) says that they watched the gates 
 day and night to kill him. This was 
 probably the Jews. Meantime the 
 ethnarch guarded the city, .to prevent 
 his escape. The Jews would have kill- 
 ed him at once; the ethnarch wished 
 to apprehend him and bring him to 
 trial. In either case Paul had much to 
 fear, and he, therefore, embraced the 
 only way of escape. \ With a garrison. 
 The word which is used here in the 
 original (q^vgia) means simply to watch ; 
 to guard; to keep. Our translation 
 would seem tb imply that there was a 
 body of men stationed in order to guard 
 the city. The true idea is, that there 
 were men who were appointed to guard 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 243 
 
 33 And through a window 
 in a basket was I let down 
 
 the gates of the city and to keep watch 
 lest he should escape them. Damascus 
 was surrounded, as all ancient cities 
 were, with high walls, and it did not 
 occur to them that he could escape in 
 any other way than by the gates. 
 
 33. And through a windoiv. That 
 is, through a little door or aperture in 
 the wall ; perhaps something like an 
 embrasure, that might have been large 
 enough to allow a man to pass through 
 it Luke says (Acts ix. 25) that they 
 let him down "by the wall." But there 
 is no inconsistency. They doubtless 
 first passed him through the embrasure 
 or loop-hole in the wall, and then let 
 him down gently by the side of it. 
 Luke does not say it was over the top 
 of the wall, but merely that he descended 
 by the wall. It is not probable that an 
 embrasure or opening would be near 
 the bottom, and consequently there 
 would be a considerable distance for 
 him to descend by the side of the wall 
 after he had passed through the window. 
 Bloomfield, however, supposes that the 
 phrase employed by Luke and rendered 
 " by the wall," means properly " through 
 the wall." But I prefer the former in- 
 terpretation. 1 In a basket. The word 
 here used (o-x^ydvn) means any thing 
 braided or twisted ; hence a rope-basket, 
 a net-work of cords, or a wicker ham- 
 per. It might have been such an one 
 as was used for catching fish, or it might 
 have been made for the occasion. The 
 word used by Luke (Acts ix. 25) is 
 (t-ttw^/c — a word usually meaning a 
 basket for storing grain, provisions, &c. 
 Where Paul went immediately after he 
 had escaped them, he does not here say. 
 From Gal. i. 17, it appears that he went 
 into Arabia, where he spent some time, 
 and then returned to Damascus, and after 
 three years he went up to Jerusalem. 
 It would not have been safe to have 
 gone to Jerusalem at once, and he there- 
 fore waited for the passions of the Jews 
 to have time to cool, before he ventured 
 himself again in their hands. 
 
 by the wall, and escaped his 
 hands. 
 
 REMARKS. 
 
 1. There may be circumstances, but 
 they are rare, in which it may be proper 
 to speak of our own attainments, and 
 of our own doings, ver. 1. Boasting 
 is in general nothing but folly — the 
 fruit of pride — but there may be situa- 
 tions when to state what we have done 
 may be necessary to the vindication of 
 our own character, and may tend to 
 honour God. Then we should do it ; 
 not to trumpet forth our own fame, but 
 to glorify God and to advance his cause. 
 Occasions occur however but rarely in 
 which it is proper to speak in this man- 
 ner of ourselves. 
 
 2. The church should be pure. It 
 is the bride of the Redeemer; the 
 " Lamb's wife." ver. 2. It is soon to 
 be presented to Christ, soon to be ad- 
 mitted to his presence. How holy 
 should be that church which sustains 
 such a relation ! How anxious to be 
 worthy to appear before the son of 
 God! 
 
 3. All the individual members of 
 that church should be holy. ver. 2. They 
 as individuals are soon to be presented 
 in heaven as the fruit of the labours of 
 the Son of God, and as entitled to his 
 eternal love. How pure should be the 
 lips that are soon to speak his praise in 
 heaven ; how pure the eyes that are soon 
 to behold his glory ; how holy the feet 
 that are soon to tread his courts in the 
 heavenly world ! 
 
 4. There is great danger of being 
 corrupted from the simplicity that is in 
 Christ, ver. 3. Satan desires to destroy 
 us ; and his great object is readily ac- 
 complished if he can seduce Christians 
 from simple devotedness to the Redeem 
 er ; if he can secure corruption in doc- 
 trine or in the manner of worship, and 
 can produce conformity in dress and in 
 the style of living to this world. For- 
 merly he excited persecution. But in 
 that he was foiled. The more the 
 church was persecuted the more it 
 grew. Then he changed his ground 
 
244 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 What he could not do by persecution 
 he sought to do by corrupting the 
 church ; and in this he has been by far 
 more successful. This can be done 
 slowly but certainly ; effectually but 
 without exciting suspicion. And it 
 matters not to Satan whether the church 
 is crippled by persecution or its zeal de- 
 stroyed by false doctrine and by con- 
 formity to the world. His aim is se- 
 cured ; and the power of the church 
 destroyed. The form in which he now 
 assails the church is by attempting to 
 seduce it from simple and hearty attach- 
 ment to the Saviour. And, O ! in how 
 many instances is he successful. 
 
 5. Our religion has cost much suffer- 
 ing. We have in this chapter a detail 
 of extraordinary trials and sorrows in 
 establishing it ; and we have reason 
 to be thankful, in some degree, that the 
 enemies of Paul made it necessary for 
 him to boast in this manner. We 
 have thus some most interesting de- 
 tails of facts of which otherwise we 
 should have been ignorant; and we 
 see that the life of Paul was a life of 
 continual self-denial and toil. By sea 
 and land ; at home and abroad ; among 
 his own countrymen and strangers, he 
 was subjected to continued privations 
 and persecution. So it has been al- 
 ways in regard to the establishment of 
 the gospel. It began its career in the 
 sufferings of its great Author, and the 
 foundation of the church was laid in 
 his blood. It progressed amidst suffer- 
 ings, for all the apostles, except John, 
 it is supposed were martyrs. It 
 continued to advance amidst suffer- 
 ings — for ten fiery persecutions raged 
 throughout the Roman empire, and 
 thousands died in consequence of their 
 professed attachment to the Saviour. 
 It has been always propagated in hea- 
 then lands by self-denials and sacrifices, 
 for the life of a missionary is that of 
 sacrifice and toil. How many such 
 men as David Brainerd and Henry 
 Martyn have sacrificed their lives in 
 order to extend the true religion around 
 the world ! 
 
 6. All that we enjoy is the fruit of 
 the sufferings, toils, and sacrifices of 
 
 others. We have not one Christian 
 privilege or hope which has not cost 
 the life of many a martyr. How thank- 
 
 ; ful should we be to God that he was 
 pleased to raise up men who would 
 be willing thus, to suffer, and that he 
 sustained and kept them until their work 
 
 ; was accomplished ! 
 
 7. We may infer the sincerity of 
 
 j the men engaged in propagating the 
 i Christian religion. What had Paul to 
 ; gain in the sorrows which he endured] 
 Why did he not remain in his own 
 j land and reap the honours which were 
 then fully within his grasp ? The an- 
 swer is an easy one. It was because 
 he believed that Christianity was true ; 
 and believing that, he believed that it 
 was of importance to make it known to 
 the world. Paul did not endure these 
 sorrows, and encounter these perils for 
 the sake of pleasure, honour, or gain. 
 No man who reads this chapter can 
 doubt that he was sincere, and that he 
 was an honest man. 
 
 8. The Christian religion is, therefore, 
 true. Not because the first preachers 
 were sincere — for the advocates of error 
 are often sincere, and are willing to 
 suffer much or even to die as martyrs ; 
 but because this was a case when their 
 sincerity proved the facts in regard to 
 the truth of Christianity. It was not 
 sincerity in regard to opinions merely, it 
 was in regard to facts. They not only 
 believed that the Messiah had come and 
 died and risen again, but they saw him — 
 saw him when he lived ; saw him die ; 
 saw him after he was risen ; and it was 
 in relation to these facts that they were 
 sincere. But how could they be de- 
 ceived here 1 Men may be deceived in 
 their opinions ; but how could John, 
 e. g., be deceived in affirming that he 
 was intimately acquainted — the bosom 
 friend — with Jesus of Nazareth ; that 
 he saw him die ; and that he conversed 
 with him after he had died ] In this 
 he could not be mistaken ; and sooner 
 than deny this, John would have spent 
 his whole life in a cave in Patmos, or 
 
 J have died on the cross or at the stake. 
 j But if John saw all this, then the Chris- 
 i tian religion is true. 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 245 
 
 9. We should be willing to suffer 
 now. If Paul and the other apostles 
 were willing to endure so much, why 
 should not we be 1 If they were will- 
 ing to deny themselves so much in order 
 that the gospel should be spread among 
 the nations, why should not we be 1 It 
 is now just as important that it should 
 be spread as it was then ; and the church 
 should be just as willing to sacrifice its 
 comforts to make the gospel known as 
 it was in the days of Paul. We may 
 add, also, that if there was the same de- 
 votedness to Christ evinced by all Chris- 
 tians now which is described in this 
 chapter; if there was the same zeal and 
 self-denial, the time would not be far 
 distant when the gospel would be spread 
 all around the world. May the time 
 soon come when all Christians shall 
 have the same self-denial as Paul ; and 
 especially when all who enter the mi- 
 nistry shall be willing to forsake 
 country and home, and to encounter 
 peril in the city and the wilderness ; on 
 the sea and the land ; to meet cold, and 
 nakedness, hunger, thirst, persecution, 
 and death in any way in order that they 
 may make known the name of the Sa- 
 viour to a lost world. 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 This chapter is a continuation of the 
 same general subject which was discuss- 
 ed in the two* previous chapters. The 
 general design of the apostle is, to de- 
 fend himself from the charges brought 
 against him in Corinth, and especially, 
 as would appear, from the charge that 
 he had no claims to the character of an 
 apostle. In the previous chapters he 
 had met these charges, and had shown 
 that he had just cause to be bold to- 
 wards them; that he had in his life 
 given^evidence that he was called to 
 this work, and especially that by his 
 successes and by his sufferings he had 
 showed that he had evidence that he 
 had been truly engaged in the work of 
 the Lord Jesus. 
 
 This chapter contains the following 
 subjects, 
 
 1. Paul appeals to another evidence 
 that he was engaged in the apostolic 
 21* 
 
 office — an evidence to which none of 
 his accusers could appeal — that he had 
 been permitted to behold the glories of 
 the heavenly world, ver. 1 — 10. In 
 the previous chapter he had mentioned 
 his trials. Here he says (ver. 1), that 
 as they had compelled him to boast, he 
 would mention the revelation which 
 he had had of the Lord. He details, 
 therefore, the remarkable vision which 
 he had had several years before (ver. 
 2 — 4), when he was caught up to hea- 
 ven, and permitted to behold the wonders 
 there. Yet he says, that lest such an 
 extraordinary manifestation should exalt 
 him above measure, he was visited with 
 a sore and peculiar trial — a trial from 
 which he prayed earnestly to be deli- 
 vered, but that he received answer that 
 the grace of God would be sufficient to 
 support him. ver. 5 — 9. It was in view 
 of this, he says (ver. 10) that he had 
 pleasure in infirmities and sufferings in 
 the cause of the Redeemer. 
 
 2. He then (ver. 11,12) sums up 
 what he had said ; draws the conclusion 
 that he had given every sign or evidence 
 that he was an apostle ; that in all that 
 pertained to toil, and patience, and mira- 
 cles, he had shown that he was com 
 missioned by the Saviour ; though with 
 characteristic modesty he said he was 
 nothing. 
 
 3. He then expresses his purpose to 
 come again and see them, and his in- 
 tention then not to be burdensome to 
 them. ver. 13 — 15. He was willing to 
 labour for them, and to exhaust his 
 strength in endeavouring to promote 
 their welfare without receiving support 
 from them, for he regarded himself in 
 the light of a father to them, and it was 
 not usual for children to support their 
 parents. 
 
 4. In connexion with this, he answers 
 another charge against himself. Some 
 accused him of being crafty ; that though 
 he did not burden them, yet he kntw 
 well how to manage so as to secure 
 what he wanted without burdening 
 them, or seeming to receive any thing 
 from them. ver. 16. To this he answers 
 by an appeal to fact. Particularly he 
 appeals to the conduct of Titus when 
 
246 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 TT is not expedient for me 
 •*■ doubtless to glory. * I will 
 
 i For I will. 
 
 with them, in full proof that he had no 
 such design, ver. 17 — 19. 
 
 5. In the conclusion of the chapter, 
 he expresses his fear that when he 
 should come among them he would 
 find much that would humble them, 
 and give him occasion for severity of 
 discipline, ver. 20, 21. This appre- 
 hension is evidently expressed in order 
 that they might be led to examine them- 
 selves, and to put away whatever was 
 wrong. 
 
 1. It is not expedient. It is not well ; 
 it does not become me. This may either 
 mean that he felt and admitted that it 
 did not become him to boast in this 
 manner ; that there was an impropriety 
 in his doing it though circumstances 
 had compelled him, and in this sense 
 it is understood by nearly, or quite, all 
 expositors ; or it may be taken ironically. 
 'Such a man as I am ought not to 
 boast. So you say, and so it would 
 seem. A man who has done no more 
 than I have ; who has suffered nothing ; 
 who has been idle and at ease as I have 
 been, ought surely not to boast. And 
 since there is such an evident impro- 
 priety in my boasting and speaking 
 about myself, I will turn to another 
 matter, and inquire whether the same 
 thing may not be said about visions and 
 revelations. I will speak, therefore, of 
 a man who had some remarkable reve- 
 lations, and inquire whether he has any 
 right to boast of the favours imparted 
 to him.' This seems to me to be the 
 probable interpretation of this passage. 
 1 To glory. To boast, ch. x. 8. 13 ; 
 xi. 1 0. One of the charges which they 
 alleged against him was, that he was 
 given to boasting without any good 
 reason. After the enumeration in the 
 previous chapter of what he had done 
 and suffered, he says that this was 
 doubtless very true. Such a man had 
 nothing to boast of. % I will come. 
 Marg. "For I will." Our translators 
 
 come to visions and revelations 
 of the Lord. 
 
 2 I knew a man in a Christ 
 
 a Ro. 16. 7. 
 
 have omitted the word ( ya£) for in the 
 text, evidently supposing that it is a 
 mere expletive. Doddridge renders it, 
 " nevertheless." But it seems to me 
 that it contains an important sense, and 
 that it should be rendered by thex. 
 ' Since it is not fit that I should glory, 
 then I will refer to visions, &c. I will 
 turn away then from that subject, and 
 come to another.' Thus the word (ya$) 
 is used in John vii. 41. "Shall the?*" 
 (/mil ya%) Christ come out of Galilee V* 
 Acts viii. 31. "How can I thett 
 (jtvLc yvLg) except some man should guide 
 me ! See also Acts xix. 35. Rom. 
 hi. 3. Phil. i. 18. % To visions. The 
 word vision is used in the Scriptures 
 often to denote the mode in which 
 divine communications were usually 
 made to men. This was done by 
 causing some scene to appear to pass 
 before the mind as in a landscape, so 
 that the individual seemed to see a repre- 
 sentation of what was to occur in some 
 future period. It was usually applied 
 to prophecy, and is often used in the 
 Old Testament. See my Note on Isa. 
 i. 1, and also on Acts ix. 10. The 
 vision which Paul here refers to was 
 that which he was permitted to have 
 of the heavenly world, ver. 4. He was 
 permitted to see what perhaps no other 
 mortal had seen, the glory of heaven. 
 t And revelations of the Lord. Which 
 the Lord had made. Or it may mean 
 manifestations which the Lord had 
 made of himself to him. The word 
 rendered revelations means properly an 
 uncovering (umitdxtj^K, from amx.:t\v7r- 
 t«, to uncover), and denotes a removal 
 of the veil of ignorance and darkness, 
 so that an object may be clearly seen , 
 and is thus applied to truth revealed, 
 because the obscurity is removed tnd 
 the truth becomes manifest. 
 
 2. 1 knew a man in Christ. I was 
 acquainted with a Christian ; the phrase 
 " in Christ" meaning nothing more than 
 
A. D. 60.1 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 247 
 
 about fourteen * years ago, 
 
 i A. D. 46. Ac. 22. 17. 
 
 that he was united to Christ or was a 
 Christian. See Rom. xvi. 7. The reason 
 why Paul did not speak of this directly 
 as a vision which he had himself seen 
 was probably that he was accused of 
 boasting, and he had admitted that it 
 did not become him to glory. But 
 though it did not become him to boast 
 directly, yet he could tell them of a man 
 concerning whom there would be no 
 impropriety evidently in boasting. It 
 is not uncommon, moreover, for a man 
 to speak of himself in the third person. 
 Thus Cesar in his Commentaries uni- 
 formly speaks of himself. And so John 
 in his gospel speaks of himself, ch. xiii. 
 23, 24 ; xix. 26 ; xxi. 20. John did it 
 on account of his modesty, because he 
 would not appear to put himself forward, 
 and because the mention of his own 
 name as connected with the friendship 
 of the Saviour in the remarkable man- 
 ner in which he enjoyed it, might have 
 savoured of pride. For a similar reason 
 Paul may have been unwilling to men- 
 tion his own name here ; and he may 
 have abstained from referring to this 
 occurrence elsewhere because it might 
 savour of pride, and might also excite the 
 envy or ill-will of others. Those who 
 have been most favoured with spiritual 
 enjoyments will not be the most ready 
 to proclaim it. They will cherish the 
 remembrance in order to excite gratitude 
 in their own hearts and support them 
 in trial ; they will not blazon it abroad 
 as if they were more the favourites of 
 heaven than others are. That this refers 
 to Paul himself is evident for the fol- 
 lowing reasons. (1.) His argument 
 required that he should mention some- 
 thing that had occurred to himself. Any 
 thing that had occurred to another 
 would not have been pertinent. (2.) He 
 applies it directly to himself (ver. 7), 
 when he says that God took effectual 
 measures that he should not be unduly 
 exalted in view of the abundant revela- 
 tions bestowed on him. 1 About four- 
 teen years ago. On what occasion or 
 
 (whether in the body I cannot 
 tell ; or whether out of the body, 
 
 where this occurred, or why he con- 
 cealed the remarkable fact so long, and 
 why there is no other allusion to it, is 
 unknown ; and conjecture is useless. 
 If this epistle was written, as is com- 
 monly supposed, about the year 58, then 
 this occurrence must have happened 
 about the year 44. This was several 
 years after his conversion, and of course 
 this does not refer to the trance men- 
 tioned in Acts ix. 9, at the time when 
 he was converted. Dr. Benson supposes 
 that this vision was made to him when 
 he was praying in the temple after his 
 return to Jerusalem,w hen he was directed 
 to go from Jerusalem to the Gentiles 
 (Acts xxii. 17), and that it was intended 
 to support him in the trials which he 
 was about to endure. There can be 
 little danger of error in supposing that 
 its object was to support him in those 
 remarkable trials, and that God designed 
 to impart to him such views of heaven 
 and its glory, and of the certainty that 
 he would soon be admitted there, as 
 to support him in his sufferings, and 
 make him willing to bear all that should 
 be laid upon him. God often gives to 
 his people some clear and elevated spirit- 
 ual comforts before they enter into trials 
 as well as while in them ; he prepares 
 them for them before they come. This 
 vision Paul had kept secret for fourteen 
 years. He had doubtless often thought 
 of it; and the remembrance of that 
 glorious hour was doubtless one of the 
 reasons why he bore trials so patiently 
 and was willing to endure so much. 
 But before this he had had no occasion 
 to mention it. He had other proofs in 
 abundance that he was called to the 
 work of an apostle ; and to mention 
 this would savour of pride and ostenta- 
 tion. It was only when he was com' 
 pelled to refer to the evidences of his 
 apostolic mission that he refers to it here. 
 f Whether in the body I cannot tell. 
 That is, I do not pretend to explain it. 
 I do not know how it occurred. With 
 the fact he was acquainted ; but how 
 
248 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60 
 
 I cannot tell : God knoweth ;) 
 
 it was brought about he did not know. 
 Whether the body was caught up to 
 heaven ; whether the soul was for a time 
 separated from the body; or whether 
 the scene passed before the mind in a 
 vision, so that he seemed to have been 
 caught up to heaven, he does not pre- 
 tend to know. The evident idea is, 
 that at the time he was in a state 
 of insensibility in regard to surround- 
 ing objects, and was unconscious of 
 what was occurring, as if he had been 
 dead. Where Paul confesses his own 
 ignorance of what occurred to himself 
 it would be vain for us to inquire ; and 
 the question how this was done is im- 
 material. No one can doubt that God 
 had power if he chose to transport the 
 body to heaven; or that he had power 
 for a time to separate the soul from the 
 body ; or that he had power to represent 
 to the mind so clearly the view of the 
 heavenly world that he would appear 
 to see it. See Acts vii. 56. It is clear 
 only that he lost all consciousness of 
 any thing about him at that time, and 
 that he saw only the things in heaven. 
 It may be added here, however, that 
 Paul evidently supposed that his soul 
 might be taken to heaven without the 
 body, and that it might have separate 
 consciousness and a separate existence. 
 He was not, therefore, a materialist, and 
 he did not believe that the existence 
 and consciousness of the soul was de- 
 pendent on the body. % God knoweth. 
 With the mode in which it was done 
 God only could be acquainted. Paul 
 did not attempt to explain that. That 
 was to him of comparatively little con- 
 sequence, and he did not lose his time 
 in a vain attempt to explain it How 
 happy would it be if all theologians 
 were as ready to be satisfied with the 
 knowledge of a fact, and to leave the 
 mode of explaining it with God, as 
 this prince of theologians was. Many 
 a man would have busied himself with 
 a vain speculation about the way in 
 which it was done ; Paul was contented 
 
 such an one caught up to the 
 third heaven. 
 
 with the fact that it had occurred. 
 1 Such an one caught up. The word 
 which is here used (i:gjra£a>) means, to 
 seize upon, to snatch away, as wolves 
 do their prey (John xii. 10) ; or to 
 seize with avidity or eagerness (Matt, 
 xi. 12) ; or to carry away, to hurry off 
 by force or involuntarily. See John 
 vi. 15. Acts vii. 39 ; xxiii. 10. In the 
 case before us there is implied the idea 
 that Paul was conveyed by a foreign 
 force ; or that he was suddenly seized 
 and snatched up to heaven. The word 
 expresses the suddenness and the rapid- 
 ity with which it was done. Probably it 
 was instantaneous, so that he appeared 
 at once to be in heaven. Of the mode 
 in which it was done Paul has given 
 no explanations ; and conjecture would 
 be useless. ^ To the third heaven. 
 The Jews sometimes speak of seven 
 heavens, and Mahomet has borrowed 
 this idea from the Jews. But the 
 Bible speaks of but three heavens, and 
 among the Jews in the apostolic ages, 
 also the heavens were divided into three. 
 (1.) The aerial, including the clouds 
 and the atmosphere, the heavens above 
 us, until we come to the stars. (2.) The 
 starry heavens, the heavens in which 
 the sun, moon, and stars appear to be 
 situated. (3.) The heavens beyond 
 the stars. That heaven was supposed 
 to be the residence of God, of angels, 
 and of holy spirits. It was this up- 
 per heaven, the dwelling-place of God, 
 to which Paul was taken, and whose 
 wonders he was permitted to behold — 
 this region where God dwelt ; where 
 Christ was seated at the right hand of the 
 Father, and where the spirits of the just 
 were assembled. The fanciful opinions 
 of the Jews about seven heavens may 
 be seen detailed in Schoettgen or in 
 Wetstein, by whom the principal pas- 
 sages from the Jewish writings relating 
 to the subject have been collected. As 
 their opinions throw no light on this 
 passage, it is unnecessary to detail them 
 here. 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 249 
 
 3 And I knew such a man, 
 (whether in the body, or out of 
 the body, I cannot tell : God 
 knoweth ;) 
 
 3. And I knew such a man. It is 
 not uncommon to repeat a solemn 
 affirmation in order that it may be made 
 more emphatic. This is done here. 
 Paul repeats the idea, that he was in- 
 timately acquainted with such a man, 
 and that he did not know whether he 
 was in the body or out of the body. All 
 that was known to God. 
 
 4. Into paradise. The word para- 
 dise (Tr^odWc?) occurs but three times 
 in the New Testament. Luke xxiii. 
 43. 2Cor.xii. 4. Rev. ii. 7. It occurs 
 often in the Septuagint, as the trans- 
 lation of the word garden. Gen. ii. 8, 
 9, 10. 15, 16; hi. 1,2,3. 8.16.23,24; 
 xiii. 10. Num. xxiv. 6. Isa. Ii. 3. 
 Ezek.xxviii. 13; xxxi. 8, 9. Joel ii. 3. 
 And also Isa. i. 30. Jer. xxix. 5; and 
 of the word (diid) Pardes in Neh. ii. 8. 
 Eccl. ii. 5. Cant. ii. 13. It is a word 
 which had its origin in the language of 
 eastern Asia, and which has been adopt- 
 ed in the Greek, the Roman, and other 
 western languages. In Sanscrit the word 
 paradesha means a land elevated and 
 cultivated ; in Armenian, pardes denotes 
 a garden around the house planted with 
 trees, shrubs, grass for use and ornament. 
 In Persia, the word denotes the plea- 
 sure gardens and parks with wild ani- 
 mals around the country residences of 
 the monarchs and princes. Hence it 
 denotes in general a garden of pleasure ; 
 and in the New Testament is applied 
 to the abodes of the blessed after death, 
 the dwelling-place of God and of hap- 
 py spirits ; or to heaven as a place of 
 blessedness. Some have supposed that 
 Paul here by the word " paradise" means 
 to describe a different place from that 
 denoted by the phrase " the third hea- 
 ven ;" but there is no good reason for 
 this supposition. The only difference 
 is that this word implies the idea of a 
 place of blessedness; but the same 
 place is undoubtedly referred to. K And 
 
 4 How that he was caught up 
 into paradise, a and heard un- 
 speakable words, which it is not 
 1 lawful for a man to utter. 
 
 aLu. 23. 43. Re. 2. 7. i or, possible. 
 
 heard unspeakable words. The word 
 which is here rendered " unspeakable" 
 (upo»TA) may either mean what cannot 
 be spoken, or what ought not to be 
 spoken. The word means unutterable, 
 ineffable; and whichever idea we attach 
 to it, Paul meant to say that he could 
 not attempt by words to do justice to 
 what he saw and heard. The use of 
 the word "words' 1 here would seem to 
 imply that he heard the language of 
 exalted praise ; or that there were 
 truths imparted to his mind which he 
 could not hope to convey in any lan- 
 guage spoken by men. % Which it is 
 not lawful for a man to utter. Marg. 
 "Possible." Witsius supposes that the 
 word i?iv may include both, and Dod- 
 dridge accords with the interpretation. 
 See also Robinson's Lex. The word is 
 most commonly used in the significa 
 tion of lawful. Thus, Matt. xiv. 4. 
 " It is not lawful for thee to have her." 
 Acts xvi. 21. " Which it is not lawful 
 for us to observe;" xxii. 25. "Is it 
 lawful for you to scourge a man that 
 is a Roman," &c. In the same sense 
 of lawful it is used in Matt. xii. 2. 10. 
 12 ; xx. 15. Mark ii. 26 ; x. 2. When 
 it refers to possibility it probably means 
 moral possibility ; that is, propriety, or 
 it means that it is right. It seems to 
 me, therefore, that the word here rather 
 means that it was not proper to give 
 utterance to those things ; it would not 
 be right to attempt it. It might be 
 also true that it would not have been 
 possible for language to convey clearly 
 the ideas connected with the things which 
 Paul was then permitted to see ; but 
 the main thought is, that there was some 
 reason why it would not be proper for 
 him to have attempted to communicate 
 those ideas to men at large. The Jews 
 held that it was unlawful to pronounce 
 the Tetragrammaton, i. e. the name of 
 four letters (mrr*), Jehovah ; and 
 
250 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 whenever that name occurred in their 
 Scriptures, they substituted the name 
 Adonai in its place. They maintain 
 indeed that the true pronunciation is 
 utterly lost, and none of them to this 
 day attempt to pronounce it. But this 
 was mere superstition ; and it is im- 
 possible that Paul should have been in- 
 fluenced by any such reason as this. 
 
 The ransaction here referred to is 
 very remarkable. It is the only instance 
 in the Scriptures of any one who was 
 taken to heaven, either in reality or in 
 vision, and who returned again to the 
 earth and was then qualified to commu- 
 nicate important truths about the hea- 
 venly world from personal observation. 
 Enoch and Elijah were taken to hea- 
 ven ; but they returned not to converse 
 with men. Elijah appeared with Moses 
 in conversation wilh "Jesus on the mount 
 of transfiguration ; but they conversed 
 with him only about his decease, which 
 he was about to accomplish at Jerusa- 
 lem. Luke ix. 31. There would have 
 been no propriety for them to have 
 spoken to Jesus of heaven, for he came 
 down from heaven and was in heaven 
 (John iii. 13), and they were not per- 
 mitted to speak to the disciples of hea- 
 ven. Lazarus was raised from the dead 
 (John xi.), and many of the saints 
 which had slept in their graves arose at 
 the death of Jesus (Matt, xxvii. 52), but 
 there is no intimation that they commu- 
 nicated any thing to the living about 
 the heavenly world. Of all the millions 
 who have been taken to heaven, not one 
 has been permitted to return to bear 
 his testimony to its glories ; to witness 
 for God that he is faithful to his pro- 
 mises; to encourage his pious friends 
 to persevere; or to invite his impenitent 
 friends to follow him to that glorious 
 world. And so fixed is the law ; so 
 settled is the principle, that even La- 
 zarus was not permitted to go, though 
 at the earnest request of the rich 
 man in hell, and warn his friends 
 not to follow him to that world of wo. 
 Luke xvi. 27 — 31. Mahomet indeed 
 feigned that he had made a journey to 
 heaven, and he attempts to describe what 
 he saw; and the difference between 
 
 true inspiration and false or pretended 
 inspiration is strikingly evinced by the 
 difference between Paul's dignified si- 
 lence — verba sacro digna silentio (Ho~ 
 race) — and the puerilities of the prophet 
 of Mecca. See the Koran, ch. xvii. As 
 the difference between the true religion 
 and imposture is strikingly illustrated 
 by this, we may recur to the principal 
 events which happened to the impostor 
 on this celebrated journey. The whole 
 account may be seen in Prideaux's Life 
 of Mahomet, p. 43, seq. He solemnly 
 affirmed that he had been translated to 
 the heaven of heavens ; that on a white 
 beast, less than a mule, but larger than 
 an ass, he had been conveyed from the 
 temple of Mecca to that of Jerusalem ; 
 had successively ascended the seven 
 heavens with his companion Gabriel, 
 receiving and returning the salutations 
 of its blessed inhabitants; had then 
 proceeded alone within two bow-shots 
 of the throne of the Almighty, when he 
 felt a cold which pierced him to the 
 heart, and was touched on the shoulder 
 by the hand of God, who commanded 
 him to pray fifty times a day, but with 
 the advice of Moses he was prevailed 
 on to have the number reduced to five ; 
 and that he then returned to Jerusalem 
 and to Mecca, having performed a 
 journey of thousands of years in the 
 tenth part of a night. 
 
 The fact that Paul was not permitted 
 to communicate what he had seen is 
 very remarkable. It is natural to ask 
 why it is so 1 Why has not God sent 
 down departed saints to tell men of the 
 glories of heaven 1 Why does he not 
 permit them to come and bear testimo- 
 ny to what they have seen and enjoy- 
 ed] Why not come and clear up the 
 doubts of the pious ; why not come 
 and convince a thoughtless world* 
 why not come and bear honourable 
 testimony for God that he is faithful to 
 reward his people 1 And especially 
 why did he not suffer Paul, whom he 
 had permitted to behold the glories of 
 paradise, to testify simply to what he 
 had seen, and tell us what was there! 
 
 To these questions, so obvious, it is 
 impossible to give an answer that we 
 
A.. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 251 
 
 can demonstrate to be the true one. 
 But we may suggest some reasons which 
 may furnish a plausible answer, and 
 which may serve to remove some of the 
 perplexity in the case. I would, there- 
 fore, suggest that the following may 
 have been some of the reasons why 
 Paul was not permitted to communicate 
 what he saw to men. (1.) It was de- 
 signed for the support of Paul himself 
 in view of the very remarkable trials 
 which he was about to endure. God 
 had called him to great toils and self- 
 denials. He was to labour much alone ; 
 to go to foreign lands ; to be persecuted, 
 and ultimately put to death ; and it was 
 his purpose to qualify him for this work 
 by some peculiar manifestation of his 
 favour. He accordingly gave him such 
 views of heaven that he would be sup- 
 ported in his trials by a conviction of 
 the undoubted truth of what he taught, 
 and by the prospect of certain glory 
 when his labours should end. It was 
 one instance when God gave peculiar 
 views to prepare for trials, as he often 
 does to his people now, preparing them 
 in a peculiar manner for peculiar trials. 
 Christians, from some cause, often have 
 more elevated views and deeper feeling 
 before they are called to endure trials 
 than they have at other times — peculiar 
 grace to prepare them for suffering. 
 But as this was designed in a peculiar 
 manner for Paul alone, it was not pro- 
 per for him to communicate what he 
 saw to others. (2.) It is probable that 
 if there were a full revelation of the 
 glories of heaven we should not be able 
 to comprehend it; or even if we did, 
 we should be incredulous in regard to 
 it. So unlike what we see ; so elevated 
 above our highest comprehension ; pro- 
 bably so unlike what we now anticipate 
 is heaven, that we should be slow to 
 receive the revelation. It is always 
 difficult to describe what we have not 
 seen, even on earth, so that we shall have 
 any very clear idea of it : how much 
 more difficult must it be to describe 
 heaven. We are often incredulous 
 about what is reported to exist in foreign 
 lands on earth which we have not seen, 
 and a long time is often necessary before 
 
 we will believe it. The king of Siam, 
 when told by the Dutch ambassador 
 that water became so hard in hid coun- 
 try that men might walk on it, said, " I 
 have often suspected you of falsehood, 
 but now I know that you lie." So 
 incredulous might we be, with our weak 
 faith, if we were told what actually ex- 
 ists in heaven. We should not im- 
 probably turn away from it as wholly 
 incredible. (3.) There are great truths 
 which it is not the design of God to 
 reveal to men. The object is to com- 
 municate enough to win us, to comfort 
 us, to support our faith, not to reveal 
 all. In eternity there must be boundless 
 truths and glories which are not needful 
 for us to know now, and which, on many 
 accounts, it would not be proper to be 
 revealed to men. The question is not, 
 do we know all, but have we enough 
 safely to guide us to heaven, and to 
 comfort us in the trials of life. (4.) 
 There is enough revealed of heaven for 
 our guidance and comfort in this world. 
 God has told us what it will be in gene- 
 ral. It will be a world without sin ; 
 without tears ; without wrong, injustice, 
 fraud, or wars ; without disease, pesti- 
 lence, plague, death ; and it is easy to 
 fill up the picture sufficiently for all our 
 purposes. Let us think of a world 
 where all shall be pure and holy ; of a 
 world free from all that we now behold 
 that is evil ; free from pain, disease, 
 death ; a world where ' friends never 
 depart, foes never come ;' a world where 
 all shall be harmony and love — and 
 where all this shall be eternal, and 
 we shall see that God has revealed 
 enough for our welfare here. The highest 
 hopes of man are met when we antici- 
 pate an eterhal heaven ; the heaviest 
 trials may be cheerfully borne when we 
 have the prospect of everlasting rest. 
 (5.) One other reason may be assigned 
 why it was not proper for Paul to dis- 
 close what he saw, and why God has 
 withheld more full revelations from 
 men about heaven. It is, that his pur- 
 pose is that we shall here walk by faith 
 and not by sight. We are not to see the 
 reward, nor to be told fully what it is 
 We are to have such confidence in God 
 
252 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 5 Of such an one will I glory : 
 yet ° of myself I will not glory, 
 but in mine infirmities. 
 
 a c. 11. 30. ver. 9, 10. 
 
 6 For though I would desire 
 to glory, I shall not be a fool ; 
 for I will say the truth : but now 
 
 that we shall assuredly believe that he 
 will fully reward and bless us, and un- 
 der this confidence we are to live and 
 act here below. God designs, therefore, 
 to try our faith, and to furnish an abun- 
 dant evidence that his people are disposed 
 to obey his commands and to put their 
 trust in his faithfulness. Besides, if all 
 the glories of heaven were revealed ; if 
 all were told that might be ; and if 
 heaven were made as attractive to mor- 
 tal view as possible, then it might appear 
 that his professed people were influenced 
 solely by the hope of the reward. As 
 it is, there is enough to support and 
 comfort; not enough to make it the 
 main and only reason why we serve 
 God. It may be added, (a) That we 
 have all the truth which we shall ever 
 have about heaven here below. No 
 other messenger will come ; none of the 
 pious dead will return. If men, there- 
 fore, are not willing to be saved in view 
 of the truth which they have, they must 
 be lost. God will communicate no more. 
 
 (b) The Christian will soon know all 
 about heaven. He will soon be there. 
 He begins no day with any certainty 
 that he may not close it in heaven ; he 
 lies down to rest at no time with any 
 assurance that he will not wake in hea- 
 ven amidst its full and eternal splendours. 
 
 (c) The sinner will soon know fully 
 what it is to lose heaven. A moment may 
 make him fully sensible of his loss — 
 for he may die ; and a moment may put 
 him forever beyond the possibility of 
 reaching a world of glory. 
 
 5. Of such an one will I glory. Of 
 such a man it would be right to boast. 
 It would be admitted that it is right to 
 exult in such a man, and to esteem him 
 to be peculiarly favoured by God. I 
 will boast of him as having received 
 peculiar honour from the Lord. Bloom- 
 field, however, supposes that the. words 
 rendered " of such an one" should be 
 translated " of such a thing," or of such 
 
 a transaction ; meaning ' I can indeed 
 justly boast of my being caught up to 
 heaven as of a thing the whole glory of 
 which pertains to him who has thus 
 exalted me ; but of myself, or of any 
 thing in me, I will not boast.' So Ro- 
 senmuller explains it. But it seems to 
 me that the connexion requires that we 
 should understand it of a person, and 
 that the passage is partly ironical. Paul 
 speaks in the third person. He chooses 
 to keep himself directly out of view. 
 And though he refers really to himself, 
 yet he would not say this directly, but 
 says that of such a man they would 
 admit it would be proper to boast 
 f Yet of myself. Directly. It is not 
 expedient for me to boast of myself. 
 ' You would allow me to boast of such 
 a man as I have referred to ; I admit 
 that it is not proper for me to boast 
 directly of myself.' t But in mine 
 infirmities. My weaknesses, trials, 
 pains, sufferings ; such as many regard 
 as infirmities. See Note on ch. xi. 30. 
 6. For though I would desire to 
 glory. I take this to be a solemn and 
 serious declaration of the bony which 
 precedes ; and that Paul means to say 
 seriously, that if he had a wish to boast 
 as other men boasted, if he chose to 
 make much of his attainments and 
 privileges, he would have enough of 
 which to make mention. It would not 
 be mere empty boasting without any 
 foundation or any just cause, for he had 
 as much of which to speak in a confi- 
 dent manner pertaining to his labours 
 as an apostle, and his evidence of the 
 divine favour as could be urged by any 
 one. 'I might go on to speak mucli 
 more than I have done, and to urge 
 claims which all would admit to be well- 
 founded.' ^f / shall not be a fool. 
 ' It would not be foolish boasting ; for 
 it would be according to truth. I could 
 urge much more than I have done ; I 
 could speak of things which no one 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 253 
 
 I forbear, lest any man should 
 think of me above that which 
 
 would be disposed to call in question as 
 laying the foundation of just claims to 
 my being regarded as eminently fa- 
 voured of God ; I could seriously state 
 what all would admit to be such.' *f For 
 I will say the truth. That is, * What- 
 ever I should say on this subject would 
 be the simple truth. I should mention 
 nothing which has not actually occurred. 
 But I forbear, lest some one should form 
 an improper estimate of me.' The 
 apostle seems to have intended to have 
 added something more, but he was 
 checked by the apprehension to which 
 he here refers. Or perhaps he means 
 to say that if he should boast of the 
 vision to which he had just referred ; 
 if he should go on to say how highly he 
 had been honoured and exalted by it, 
 there would be no impropriety in it. 
 It was so remarkable that if he confined 
 himself strictly to the truth, as he would 
 do, still it would be regarded by all as a 
 very extraordinary honour, and one to 
 which no one of the false teachers could 
 refer as laying a foundation for their 
 boasting. ^ Lest any man should think 
 of me, &c. The idea in this part of the 
 verse I take to be this. ' I desire and 
 expect to be estimated by my public 
 life. I expect to be judged of men by 
 my deeds, by what they see in me, and 
 by my general reputation in respect to 
 what I have done in establishing the 
 Christian religion. I am willing that 
 my character and reputation, that the 
 estimate in which I shall be held by 
 mankind, shall rest on that. I do not 
 wish that my character among men 
 shall .be determined by my secret feel- 
 ings ; or by any secret extraordinary 
 communication from heaven which I 
 may have, and which cannot be sub- 
 jected to the observation of my fellow- 
 men. I am willing to be estimated by 
 my public life ; and however valuable 
 such extraordinary manifestations may 
 be to me as an individual ; or however 
 much they may comfort me, I do not 
 wish to make them the basis of my 
 
 he seeth me to be, or that he 
 heareth of me. 
 
 public reputation. I expect to stand 
 and be estimated by my public deeds ; 
 by what all men see and hear of me ; 
 and I would not have them form even 
 a favourable opinion of me beyond that.' 
 This is the noble language of a man 
 who was willing to enjoy such a repu- 
 tation as his public life entitled him to. 
 He wished to have the basis of his repu- 
 tation such that all men could see and 
 examine it. Unlike enthusiasts and fa- 
 natics, he appealed to no secret im- 
 pulses ; did not rest his claims for public 
 confidence on any peculiar communica- 
 tions from heaven ; but wished to be 
 estimated by his public deeds. And the 
 important truth taught is, that however 
 much communion we may have with 
 God ; however much comfort and sup 
 port in prayer and in our favoured mo- 
 ments of fellowship with God ; or how- 
 ever much we may fancy in this way 
 that we are the favourites of Heaven , 
 and however much this may support us 
 in trial ; still this should not be made 
 the foundation of claim to the favour- 
 able opinions of our fellow-men. By 
 our public character ; by our well-known 
 actions; by our lives as seen by men, 
 we should desire to be estimated, and 
 we should be satisfied with such a 
 measure of public esteem as our deport- 
 ment shall fairly entitle us to. We 
 should seldom, perhaps, refer to our 
 moments of secret, happy, and most 
 favoured communion with God. Paul 
 kept his most elevated joys in this re- 
 spect, secret for fourteen years : — what 
 an example to those who are constantly 
 blazoning their Christian experience 
 abroad, and boasting of what they have 
 enjoyed ! We should never refer to 
 such moments as a foundation for the 
 estimate in which our character shall 
 be held by our fellow-men. We should 
 never make this the foundation of a 
 claim to the public confidence in us. 
 For all such claims ; for all the estimate 
 in which we shall be held by men, we 
 should be willing to be tried by our 
 
254 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 7 And lest I should be exalted 
 above measure through the abun- 
 
 lives. Paul would not even make a 
 vision of heaven ,- not even the privilege 
 of having beheld the glories of the 
 upper world, though a favour conferred 
 on no other living man, a ground of 
 the estimate in which his character 
 should be held ! What an example 
 to those who wish to be estimated by 
 secret raptures, and by special commu- 
 nications to their souls from heaven ! 
 No. Let us be willing to be estimated 
 by men by what they see in us ; to 
 enjoy such a reputation as our conduct 
 shall fairly entitle us to. Let our com- 
 munion with God cheer our own hearts; 
 but let us not obtrude this on men as 
 furnishing a claim for an exalted stand- 
 ing in their estimation. 
 
 7. And lest I should be exalted. Lest 
 I should be spiritually proud ; lest I 
 should become self-confident and vain, 
 and suppose that I was a special favour- 
 ite of Heaven. If Paul was in danger 
 of spiritual pride, who is not 1 If it 
 was necessary for God to adopt some 
 special measures to keep him humble, 
 we are not to be surprised that the 
 same thing should occur in other cases. 
 There is abundant reason to believe 
 that Paul was naturally a proud man. 
 He was by nature self-confident ; trust- 
 ing in his own talents and attainments, 
 and eminently ambitious. When he 
 became a Christian, therefore, one of 
 his besetting sins would be pride ; and 
 as he had been peculiarly favoured in 
 his call to the apostleship ; in his sue- j 
 cess as a preacher ; in the standing ; 
 which he had among the other apostles, I 
 and in the revelations imparted to him, I 
 there was also peculiar danger that he 
 would become self-confident and proud 
 of his attainments. There is no danger 
 that more constantly besets Christians, 
 and even eminent Christians, than pride. 
 There is no sin that is more subtle, 
 insinuating, deceptive ; none that lurks 
 more constantly around the heart and 
 that finds a more ready entrance, than 
 
 dance of the revelations, there was 
 given to me a thorn ° in the flesh, 
 
 a Eze. 28. 24. Ga. 4. 14. 
 
 pride. He who has been characterized 
 by pride before his conversion will be 
 in special danger of it afterwards ; he 
 who has eminent gifts in prayer, or 
 in conversation, or in preaching, will 
 be in special danger of it ; he who is 
 eminently successful will be in danger of 
 it; and he who has any extraordinary 
 spiritual comforts will be in danger of it. 
 Of this sin he who lives nearest to God 
 may be in most special danger ; and he 
 who is most eminent in piety should 
 feel that he also occupies a position where 
 the enemy will approach him in a sly 
 and subtle manner, and where he is in 
 peculiar danger of a fall. Possibly the 
 fear that he might be in danger of 
 being made proud by the flattery of his 
 friends may have been one reason why 
 Paul kept this thing concealed for four- 
 teen years ; and if men wish to keep 
 themselves from the danger of this sin, 
 they should not be forward to speak even 
 of the most favoured moments of their 
 communion with God. ^ Through the 
 abundance of the revelations. By my 
 being raised thus to heaven, and by 
 being permitted to behold the wonders 
 of the heavenly world, as well as by the 
 numerous communications which God 
 had made to me at other times. % There 
 was given to me. That is, God was 
 pleased to appoint me. The word which 
 Paul uses is worthy of special notice. 
 It is that this " thorn in the flesh" was 
 given to him, implying that it was a 
 favour. He does not complain of it; 
 he does not say it was sent in cruelty ; 
 he does not even speak of it as an 
 affliction ; he speaks of it as a gift, as 
 any man would of a favour that had 
 been bestowed. Paul had so clear a 
 view of the benefits which resulted from 
 it that he regarded it as a favour, as 
 Christians should every trial. ^ A 
 thorn in the flesh. The word here 
 used (intoM^) occurs nowhere else in 
 the New Testament. It means propeily 
 any thing pointed or sharp, e. g. a stake 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 the 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 255 
 
 messenger of Satan, to buf- 
 
 o Job 2. 7. Lu. 13. 16. 
 
 or palisade (Xen. Anab. 5. 2. 5) ; or the 
 point of a hook. The word is used in 
 the Septuagint to denote a thorn or 
 prickle, as a translation of -pd (sir), in 
 
 (Hos. ii. 6, " I will hedge up thy way 
 with thorns ,-" to denote a pricking 
 briar in Ezek. xxviii. 24, as a transla- 
 tion of pSo (si lion), meaning a thorn or 
 prickle, such as is found in the shoots 
 and twigs of the palm-tree ; and to de- 
 note " pricks in the eyes" (Num. xxxiii. 
 55), as a translation of D^a> (sikkim), 
 thorns or prickles. So far as the word 
 here used is concerned, it means a sharp 
 thorn or prickle ; and the idea is, that 
 the trial to which he refers was as 
 troublesome and painful as such a thorn 
 would be in the flesh. But whether he 
 refers to some infirmity or pain in the 
 flesh or the body is another question, 
 and a question in which interpreters 
 have been greatly divided in opinion. 
 Every one who has become familiar 
 with commentaries knows that almost 
 every expositor has had his own opinion 
 about this, and also that no one has 
 been able to give any good reason for 
 his own. Most of them have been 
 fanciful ; and many of them eminently 
 ridiculous. Even Baxter, who was 
 subject himself to some such disorder, 
 supposes that it might be the stone or 
 gravel; and the usually very judicious 
 Doddridge supposes that the view which 
 he had of the glories of heavenly ob- 
 jects so affected his nerves as to pro- 
 duce a paralytic disorder, and particu- 
 larly a stammering in his speech, and 
 perhaps also a ridiculous distortion of 
 the countenance. This opinion was sug- 
 gested by Whitby, and has been adopted 
 also by Benson, Macknight, Slade, and 
 Bloomfield. But though sustained by 
 most respectable names, it would be 
 easy to show that it is mere conjecture, 
 and perhaps quite as improbable as any 
 of the numerous opinions which have 
 been maintained on the subject. If 
 Paul's speech had been affected, and his 
 face distorted, and his nerves shattered 
 
 fet me, lest I should be exalted 
 above measure. 
 
 by such a sight, how could he doubt 
 whether he was in the body or out of 
 it when this occurred 1 Many of the 
 Latin fathers supposed that some un- 
 ruly and ungovernable lust was intended. 
 Chrysostom and Jerome suppose that 
 he meant the headache ; Tertullian an 
 earache ; and Rosenmiiller supposes 
 that it was the gout in the head, kopf- 
 gicht, and that it was a periodical dis- 
 order such as affected him when he was 
 with the Galatians. Gal. iv. 13. But 
 all conjecture here is vain ; and the 
 numerous strange and ridiculous opi- 
 nions of commentators is a melancholy 
 attestation of their inclination to fanci- 
 ful conjecture where it is impossible in 
 the nature of the case to ascertain the 
 truth. All that can be known of this 
 is, that it was some infirmity of the 
 flesh, some bodily affliction or calamity, 
 that was like the continual piercing of 
 the flesh with a thorn (Gal. iv. 13) ; 
 and that it was something that was 
 designed to prevent spiritual pride. It 
 is not indeed an improbable supposition 
 that it was something that could be seen 
 by others, and that thus tended to hum- 
 ble him when with them, f The mes~ 
 senger of Satan. Among the Hebrews 
 it was customary to attribute severe and 
 painful diseases to Satan. Comp. 
 Job ii. 6, 7. Comp. Note on Luke 
 xiii. 16. In the time of the Saviour ma- 
 lignant spirits are known to have taken 
 possession of the body in numerous 
 cases, and to have produced painful 
 bodily diseases, and Paul here says that 
 Satan was permitted to bring this ca- 
 lamity on him. t To buffet me. To 
 buffet, means to smite with the hand ; 
 then to maltreat in any way. The mean- 
 ing is, that the effect and design of this 
 was deeply to afflict him. Doddridge 
 and Clarke suppose that the reference 
 is here to the false teacher whom Satan 
 had sent to Corinth, and who was to 
 him the source of perpetual trouble. 
 But it seems more probable to me that 
 he refers to some bodily infirmity. The 
 
256 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 8 For this a thing I besought 
 
 a Be. 3. 23. 27. Ps. 77. 2. 11. La. 3. 8. 
 
 Mat. 26. 44. 
 
 general truth taught in this verse is, that 
 God will take care that his people shall 
 not be unduly exalted by the manifesta- 
 tions of his favour, and by the spiritual 
 privileges which he bestows on them. 
 He will take measures to humble them ; 
 and a large part of his dealings with 
 his people is designed to accomplish 
 this. Sometimes it will be done, as in 
 the case of Paul, by bodily infirmity or 
 trial, by sickness, or by long and linger- 
 ing disease ; sometimes by great poverty 
 and by an humble condition of life ; some- 
 times by reducing us from a state of 
 affluence where we were in danger of 
 being exalted above measure ; some- 
 times by suffering us to be slandered 
 and calumniated, by suffering foes to 
 rise up against us who shall blacken 
 our character and in such a manner that 
 we cannot meet it ; sometimes by perse- 
 cution ; sometimes by want of success 
 in our enterprises, and if in the ministry, 
 by withholding his Spirit; sometimes 
 by suffering us to fall into sin, and thus 
 greatly humbling us before the world. 
 Such was the case with David and with 
 Peter ; and God often permits us to see 
 in this manner our own weakness, and 
 to bring us to a sense of our dependence 
 and to proper humility by suffering us 
 to perform some act that should be ever 
 afterward a standing source of our 
 humiliation ; some act so base, so hu- 
 miliating, so evincing the deep depravity 
 of our hearts as forever to make and 
 keep us humble. How could David be 
 lifted up with pride after the murder of 
 Uriah 1 How could Peter after having 
 denied his Lord with a horrid oath 1 
 Thus many a Christian is suffered to 
 fall by the temptation of Satan to show 
 him his weakness and to keep him from 
 pride ; many a fall is made the occasion 
 of the permanent benefit of the offender. 
 And perhaps every Christian who has 
 been much favoured with elevated 
 spiritual views and comforts can recall 
 something which shall be to him a 
 standing topic of regret and humiliation 
 
 the Lord thrice, that it might 
 depart from me. 
 
 in his past life. We should be thankful 
 for any calamity that will humble us ; 
 and we should remember that clear and 
 elevated views of God and heaven are, 
 after all, more than a compensation for 
 all the sufferings which it may be neces- 
 sary to endure in order to make us 
 humble. 
 
 8. For this thing. On account of 
 this ; in order that this calamity might 
 be removed, f I besought the Lord. 
 The word " Lord" in the New Testa- 
 ment, when it stands without any other 
 word in connexion to limit its significa- 
 tion, commonly denotes the Lord Jesus 
 Christ. See Note on Acts i. 24. The 
 following verse here shows conclusively 
 that it was the Lord Jesus to whom 
 Paul addressed this prayer. The answer 
 was that his grace was sufficient for 
 him ; and Paul consoled himself by 
 saying that it was a sufficient support 
 if the power of Christ implied in that 
 answer, should rest on him. He would 
 glory in trials if such was their result. 
 Even Rosenmiiller maintains that it 
 was the Lord Jesus to whom this prayer 
 was addressed, and says that the So- 
 cinians themselves admit it. So Grotius 
 (on ver. 9) says that the answer was 
 given by Christ. But if this refers to 
 the Lord Jesus, then it proves that it is 
 right to go to him in times of trouble, 
 and that it is right to worship him. 
 Prayer is the most solemn act of adora- 
 tion which we can perform ; and no 
 better authority can be required for pay- 
 ing divine honours to Christ than the 
 fact that Paul worshipped him and 
 called upon him to remove a severe and 
 grievous calamity. % Thrice. This 
 may either mean that he prayed for this 
 often, or that he sought it on three set 
 and solemn occasions. Many commen- 
 tators have supposed that the former is 
 meant. But to me it seems probable 
 that Paul on three special occasions 
 earnestly prayed for the removal of this 
 calamity. It will be recollected that the 
 Lord Jesus prayed three times in the 
 
A.D.60.] 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 257 
 
 9 And he said unto me, My 
 
 garden of Gethsemane that the cup 
 might be removed from him. Matt. 
 xxvi. 44. At the third time he ceased, 
 and submitted to what was the will of 
 God. There is some reason to suppose 
 that the Jews were in the habit of pray- 
 ing three times for any important bless- 
 ing or for the removal of any calamity ; 
 and Paul in this would not only con- 
 form to the usual custom, but especially 
 he would be disposed to imitate the 
 example of the Lord Jesus. Among 
 the Jews three was a sacred number, 
 and repeated instances occur where an 
 important transaction is mentioned as 
 having been done thrice. See Num. 
 xxii.28; xxiv. 10. 1 Sam. hi. 8; xx.41. 
 1 Kings xviii. 44. Prov. xxii. 20. Jer. 
 vii. 4; xxii. 29. John xxi. 17. The 
 probability, therefore, is, that Paul on 
 three different occasions earnestly be- 
 sought the Lord Jesus that this calamity 
 might be removed from him. It might 
 have been exceedingly painful ; or it 
 might, as he supposed, interfere with 
 his success as a preacher ; or it might 
 have been of such a nature as to ex- 
 pose him to ridicule ; and he prayed, 
 therefore, if it were possible that it 
 might be taken away. The passage 
 proves that it is right to pray earnestly 
 and repeatedly for the removal of any 
 calamity. The Saviour so prayed in 
 the garden ; and Paul so prayed here. 
 Yet it also proves that there should be a 
 limit to such prayers. The Saviour 
 prayed three times ; and Paul limited 
 himself to the same number of petitions, 
 and then submitted to the will of God. 
 This does not prove that we should be 
 limited to exactly this number in our 
 petitions ; but it proves that there should 
 be a limit ; that we should not be over- 
 anxious, and that when it is plain from 
 any cause that the calamity will not be 
 removed, we should submit to it. The 
 Saviour in the garden knew that the 
 cup would not be removed, and he 
 acquiesced. Paul was told indirectly 
 that his calamity would not be removed, 
 and he submitted. We may expect no 
 22* 
 
 grace is sufficient for thee : for 
 
 such revelation from heaven, but we 
 may know in other ways that the 
 calamity will not be removed ; and we 
 should submit. The child or other 
 friend for whom we prayed may die ; or 
 the calamity, as, e. g. blindness, or deaf- 
 ness, or loss of health, or poverty, may 
 become permanent, so that there is no 
 hope of removing it ; and we should 
 then cease to pray that it may be re- 
 moved, and we should cheerfully acqui- 
 esce in the will of God. So David 
 prayed most fervently for his child when 
 it was alive ; when it was deceased, and 
 it was of no further use to pray for it, 
 he bowed in submission to the will of 
 God. 2 Sam. xii. 20. 
 
 9. And he said unto me. The Sa- 
 viour replied. In what way this was 
 done, or whether it was done at the time 
 when the prayer was offered, Paul does 
 not inform us. It is possible, as Mac- 
 knight supposes, that Christ appeared to 
 him again and spake to him in an audi- 
 ble manner. Grotius supposes that this 
 was done by the Vip na (Bath-qol) — 
 " daughter of the voice," so frequently 
 referred to by the Jewish writers, and 
 which they suppose to be referred to in 
 1 Kings xix. 12, by the phrase, "a still 
 small voice." But it is impossible to 
 determine in what way it was done, and 
 it is not material. Paul was in habits 
 of communion with the Saviour, and 
 was accustomed to receive revelations 
 from him. The material fact here is, 
 that the request was not granted in the 
 exact form in which he presented it, but 
 that he received assurance of grace to 
 support him in his trial. It is one of 
 the instances in which the fervent prayer 
 of a good man, offered undoubtedly in 
 faith, was not answered in the form 
 in which he desired, though substan- 
 tially answered in the assurance of grace 
 sufficient to support him. It furnishes, 
 therefore, a very instructive lesson in 
 regard to prayer, and shows us that we 
 are not to expect as a matter of course 
 that all our prayers will be literally 
 answered, and that we should not be 
 
858 
 
 n. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 my strength is made perfect in 
 
 disappointed or disheartened if they are 
 not. It is a matter of fact that not all 
 the prayers even of the pious, and of 
 those who pray having faith in God as a 
 hearer of prayer, are literally answered. 
 Thus the prayer of David (2 Sam. xii. 
 16 — 20) was not literally answered; 
 the child for whose life he so earnestly 
 prayed died. So the Saviour's request 
 was not literally answered. Mark. xiv. 
 36. The cup of suffering which he so 
 earnestly desired should be taken away 
 was not removed. So in the case be- 
 fore us. Comp. also Deut. iii. 23 — 27. 
 Job xxx. 20. Lam. iii. 8. So in 
 numerous cases now, Christians pray 
 With fervour and with faith for the re- 
 moval of some calamity which is not 
 removed ; or for something which they 
 regard as desirable for their welfare 
 which is withheld. Some of the reasons 
 why this is done are obvious. (1.) The 
 grace that will be imparted if the ca- 
 lamity is not removed will be of greater 
 value to the individual than would be 
 the direct answer to his prayer. Such 
 was the case with Paul; so it was 
 doubtless with David ; and so it is often 
 with Christians now. The removal of 
 the calamity might be apparently a 
 blessing, but it might also be attended 
 with dangers to our spiritual welfare ; 
 the grace imparted may be of perma- 
 nent value and may be connected with 
 the development of some of the love- 
 liest traits of Christian character. (2.) It 
 might not be for the good of the indi- 
 vidual who prays that the exact thing 
 should be granted. When a parent 
 prays with great earnestness and with 
 insubmission for the life of a child, he 
 knows not what he is doing. If the child 
 lives, he may be the occasion of much 
 more grief to him than if he had died. 
 David had far more trouble from Absa- 
 lom than he had from the death of the 
 child for which he so earnestly prayed. 
 At the same time it may be better for 
 the child that he should be removed. 
 If he dies in infancy he will be saved. 
 But who can tell what will be his 
 
 weakness. Most gladly there- 
 
 character and destiny should he live to 
 be a man 1 So of other things. (3.) God 
 has often some better thing in store for 
 us than would be the immediate answer 
 to our prayer. Who can doubt that 
 this was true of Paul 1 The promised 
 grace of Christ as sufficient to support 
 us is of more value than would be the 
 mere removal of any bodily affliction. 
 (4.) It would not be well for us, proba- 
 bly, should our petition be literally 
 answered. Who can tell what is best 
 for himself ? If the thing were obtained, 
 who can tell how soon we might forget 
 the benefactor and become proud and 
 self-confident ] It was the design of 
 God to humble Paul ; and this could be 
 much better accomplished by continuing 
 his affliction and by imparting the pro- 
 mised grace, than by withdrawing the 
 affliction and withholding the grace. 
 The very thing to be done was to keep 
 him humble ; and this affliction could 
 not be withdrawn without also forego- 
 ing the benefit. It is true, also, that 
 where things are in themselves proper 
 to be asked, Christians sometimes ask 
 them in an improper manner, and 
 this is one of the reasons why many 
 of their prayers are not answered. But 
 this does not pertain to the case before 
 us. 1 My grace is sufficient for thee. 
 A much better answer than it would 
 have been to have removed the calamity ; 
 and one that seems to have been entirely 
 satisfactory to Paul. The meaning of 
 the Saviour is, that he would support 
 him ; that he would not suffer him to 
 sink exhausted under his trials ; that he 
 had nothing to fear. The affliction 
 was not indeed removed ; but there was 
 a promise that the favour of Christ 
 would be shown to him constantly, and 
 that he would find his support to be 
 ample. If Paul had this support, he 
 might well bear the trial ; and if we 
 have this assurance, as we may have, 
 we may welcome affliction, and rejoice 
 that calamities are brought upon us. It 
 is a sufficient answer to our prayers 
 if we have the solemn promise of the 
 
A,. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 859 
 
 Fore will I rather glory a in my 
 infirmities, that the power ^of 
 Christ may rest upon me. 
 
 a ver. 5. b 1 Pe. 4. 14. 
 
 Redeemer that we shall be upheld and 
 never sink under the burden of our 
 neavy woes, t My strength is made 
 perfect in weakness. That is, the 
 strength which I impart to my people 
 is more commonly and more completely 
 manifested when my people feel that 
 they are weak. It is not imparted 
 to those who feel that they are strong 
 and who do not realize their need of 
 divine aid. It is not so completely 
 manifested to those who are vigorous 
 and strong as to the feeble. It is when 
 we are conscious that we are feeble, and 
 when we feel our need of aid, that the 
 Redeemer manifests his power to up- 
 hold, and imparts his purest consola- 
 tions. Grotius has collected several 
 similar passages from the classic writers 
 which may serve to illustrate this expres- 
 sion. Thus Pliny, vii. Epis. 26, says, 
 " We are best where we are weak." 
 Seneca says, " Calamity is the occasion 
 of virtue." Quintilian, "All temerity 
 of mind is broken by bodily calamity." 
 Minutius Felix, " Calamity is often the 
 discipline of virtue." There are few 
 Christians who cannot bear witness to 
 the truth of what the Redeemer here 
 says, and who have not experienced the 
 most pure consolations which they have 
 known, and been most sensible of his 
 comforting presence and power in times 
 of affliction. ^ Most gladly, therefore, 
 &c. I count it a privilege to be afflicted, 
 if my trials may be the means of my 
 more abundantly enjoying the favour 
 of the Redeemer. His presence and 
 imparted strength are more than a com- 
 pensation for all the trials that I endure. 
 1 That the power of Christ. The 
 strength which Christ imparts ; his 
 power manifested in supporting me in 
 trials. 1 May rest upon me (sJna-xxvXa-w). 
 The word properly means to pitch a 
 tent upon; and then to dwell in or 
 upon. Here it is used in the sense 
 of abiding upon, or remaining with. 
 
 10 Therefore I take pleasure 
 in infirmities, in reproaches, in 
 necessities, in persecutions, in 
 distresses for Christ's sake : for 
 
 The sense is, that the power which 
 Christ manifested to his people rested 
 with them, or abode with them in their 
 trials, and therefore he would rejoice in 
 afflictions, in order that he might par- 
 take of the aid and consolation thus 
 imparted. Learn hence, (1.) That a 
 Christian never loses any thing by suf- 
 fering and affliction. If he may obtain 
 the favour of Christ by his trials he is 
 a gainer. The favour of the Redeemer 
 is more than a compensation for all 
 that we endure in his cause. (2.) The 
 Christian is a gainer by trial. I never 
 knew a Christian that was not ultimately 
 benefited by trials. I never knew one 
 who did not find that he had gained 
 much that was valuable to him in 
 scenes of affliction. I do not know that 
 I have found one who would be willing 
 to exchange the advantages he has 
 gained in affliction for all that the most 
 uninterrupted prosperity and the highest 
 honours that the world could give would 
 impart. (3.) Learn to bear trials with 
 joy. They are good for us. They 
 develope some of the most lovely traits 
 of character. They injure no one if 
 they are properly received. And a 
 Christian should rejoice that he may 
 obtain what he does obtain in affliction, 
 cost what it may. It is worth more 
 than it costs ; and when we come to 
 die, the things that we shall have most 
 occasion to thank God for will be our 
 afflictions. And, ! if they are the 
 means of raising us to a higher seat in 
 heaven, and placing us nearer the Re- 
 deemer there, who will not rejoice in 
 his trials 1 
 
 10. Therefore I take pleasure. Sinco 
 so many benefits result from trials; since 
 my afflictions are the occasion of obtain- 
 ing the favour of Christ in so eminent 
 a degree, I rejoice in the privilege of 
 suffering. There is often real pleasure 
 in affliction, paradoxical as it may ap- 
 pear. Some of the happiest persons I 
 
II. CORINTHIANS, 
 am weak, then am I 
 
 260 
 
 when I 
 strong. 
 
 11 I am become a fool in 
 glorying: ye have compelled 
 
 have known are those who have been 
 deeply afflicted ; some of the purest joys 
 which I have witnessed have been mani- 
 fested on a sick-bed, and in the prospect 
 of death. And I have no doubt that 
 Paul, in the midst of all his infirmities 
 and reproaches, had a joy above that 
 which all the wealth and honour of the 
 world could give. See here the power 
 of religion. It not only supports, it 
 comforts. It not only enables one to 
 bear suffering with resignation, but it 
 enables him to rejoice. Philosophy 
 blunts the feelings ; infidelity leaves 
 men to murmur and repine in trial ; 
 the pleasures of this world have no 
 power even to support or comfort in 
 times of affliction ; but Christianity fur- 
 nishes positive pleasure in trial, and 
 enables the sufferer to smile through his 
 tears. Tf In infirmities. In my weak- 
 nesses. See Note on ch. xi. 30. t In 
 reproaches. In the contempt and scorn 
 with which I meet as a follower of Christ. 
 Note, ch. xi. 21. ^ In necessities. In 
 want. See Notes on ch. vi. 4, 5. % In 
 distresses for Christ's sake. Note, ch. 
 vi. 4. In the various wants and diffi- 
 culties to which I am exposed on ac- 
 count of the Saviour, or which I suffer 
 in his cause. If For when I am weak, 
 then am I strong. When I feel weak ; 
 when I am subjected to trial, and nature 
 faints and fails, then strength is im- 
 parted to me, and I am enabled to bear 
 all. The more I am borne down with 
 trials, the more do I feel my need of 
 divine assistance, and the more do I feel 
 the efficacy of divine grace. Such was 
 the promise in Deut. xxxiii. 25 : " As 
 thy days, so shall thy strength be." So 
 in Heb. xi. 24 : " Who out of weak- 
 ness were made strong." What Chris- 
 tian has not experienced this, and been 
 able to say that when he felt himself 
 weak and felt like sinking under the 
 accumulation of many trials, he has 
 found his strength according to his day, 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 me : for I ought to have been 
 commended of you: for fl in 
 nothing am I behind the very 
 
 ac. 11. 5. 
 
 and felt an arm of power supporting 
 him] It is then that the Redeemer 
 manifests himself in a peculiar manner; 
 and then that the excellency of the re- 
 ligion of Christ is truly seen and its 
 power appreciated and felt 
 
 1 1. I am become a fool in glorying. 
 The meaning of this expression I take 
 to be this. ' I have been led along in 
 speaking of myself until I admit I appear 
 foolish in this kind of boasting. It is 
 folly to do it, and I would not have en- 
 tered on it unless I had been driven to 
 it by my circumstances and the necessi- 
 ty which was imposed on me of speak- 
 ing of myself.' Paul doubtless desired 
 that what he had said of himself should 
 not be regarded as an example for 
 others to follow. Religion repressed all 
 vain boasting and self-exultation; and 
 to prevent others from falling into a 
 habit of boasting, and then pleading 
 his example as an apology, he is care- 
 ful to say that he regarded it as folly ; 
 and that he would by no means have done 
 it if the circumstances of the case had 
 not constrained him. If any one, there- 
 fore, is disposed to imitate Paul in 
 speaking of himself and what he has 
 done, let him do it only when he is in 
 circumstances like Paul, and when the 
 honour of religion and his usefulness 
 imperiously demand it; and let him not 
 forget that it was the deliberate convic- 
 tion of Paul that boasting was the 
 characteristic of a fool ! | Ye have 
 compelled me. You have made it ne- 
 cessary for me to vindicate my character 
 and to state the evidence of my divine 
 commission as an apostle. T For 1 
 ought to have been commended of you. 
 By you. Then this boasting, so foolish, 
 would have been unnecessary. What 
 a delicate reproof! All the fault of 
 this foolish boasting was theirs. They 
 knew him intimately. They had de- 
 rived great benefits from his ministry, 
 and they were bound in gratitude and 
 
A. D. 60 ] 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 261 
 
 chiefest apostles, though ° I be 
 nothing. 
 
 o Lu. 17. 10. 1 Co. 3. 7. Ep. 3. 8. 
 
 from a regard to right and truth to 
 vindicate him. But they had not done 
 it ; and hence, through their fault, he 
 had been compelled to go into this un- 
 pleasant vindication of his own charac- 
 ter. 1 For in nothing am I behind 
 the very chiefest apostles. Neither in 
 the evidences of my call to the apostolic 
 office (see 1 Cor. ix. 1, seq.) ; nor in 
 the endowments of the Spirit ; nor in 
 my success ; nor in the proofs of a di- 
 vine commission in the power of work- 
 ing miracles. See Note on ch. xi. 5. 
 ^ Though I he nothing. This ex- 
 pression was either used in sarcasm or 
 seriously. According to the former sup- 
 position it means, that he was regarded 
 as nothing ; that the false apostles 
 spoke of him as a mere nothing, 
 or as having no claims to the office of 
 an apostle. This is the opinion of 
 Clarke, and many of the recent com- 
 mentators. Bloomfield inclines to this. 
 According to the latter view, it is an 
 expression of humility on the part of 
 Paul, and is designed to express his deep 
 sense of his unworthiness in view of 
 his past life — a conviction deepened by 
 the exalted privileges conferred on him, 
 and the exalted rank to which he had 
 been raised as an apostle. This was 
 the view of most of the early commen- 
 tators. Doddridge unites the two. It 
 is not possible to determine with cer- 
 tainty which is the true interpretation ; 
 but it seems to me that the latter view 
 best accords with the scope of the pas- 
 sage, and with what we have reason to 
 suppose the apostle would say at. this 
 time. It is true that in this discussion 
 (ch. x. seq.) there is much that is sar- 
 castic. But in the whole strain of the 
 passage before us he is serious. He is 
 speaking of his sufferings, and of the 
 evidences that he was raised to elevated 
 rank as an apostle, and it is not quite 
 natural to suppose that he would throw 
 jn a sarcastic remark just in the midst 
 of this discussion. Besides, this inter- 
 
 12 Truly the signs b of an 
 apostle were wrought among 
 
 b 1 Co. 9. 2. 
 
 pretation accords exactly with what he 
 says, 1 Cor. xv. 9 : " For I am the 
 least of all the apostles, that am not 
 meet to be called an apostle." If this 
 be the correct interpretation, then it 
 teaches, (1.) That the highest attain- 
 ments in piety are not inconsistent with 
 the deepest sense of our nothingness 
 and unworthiness. (2.) That the most 
 distinguished favours bestowed on us 
 by God are consistent with the lowest 
 humility. (3.) That those who are most 
 favoured in the Christian life, and most 
 honoured by God, should not be un- 
 willing to take a low place, and to regard 
 and speak of themselves as nothing. 
 Compared with God, what are they ? — 
 Nothing. Compared with the angels, 
 what are they 1 — Nothing. As creatures 
 compared with the vast universe, what 
 are we 1 — Nothing. An atom, a speck. 
 Compared with other Christians, the 
 eminent saints who have lived before 
 us, what are we] Compared with 
 what we ought to be, and might be, 
 what are we? — Nothing. Let a man 
 look over his past life, and see how vile 
 and unworthy it has been ; let him 
 look at God, and see how great and glo- 
 rious he is ; let him look at the vast 
 universe, and see how immense it is ; 
 let him think of the angels, and reflect 
 how pure they are ; let him think of 
 what he might have been, of how much 
 more he might have done for his Saviour ; 
 let him look at his body, and think how 
 frail it is, and how soon it must return 
 to the dust; and no matter how elevated 
 his rank among his fellow-worms, and 
 no matter how much God has favoured 
 him as a Christian or a minister, he will 
 feel, if he feels right, that he is nothing. 
 The most elevated saints are distinguish- 
 ed for the deepest humility ; those who 
 are nearest to God feel most their dis- 
 tance; they who are to occupy the 
 highest place in heaven feel most deeply 
 that they are unworthy of the lowest. 
 12. Truly the signs of an apostle. 
 
II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 you in all patience, in signs, and 
 wonders, and mighty deeds. 
 
 1 3 For what is it wherein you 
 were inferior to other churches, 
 
 Such miracles as the acknowledged 
 apostles worked. Such " signs" or evi- 
 dences that they were divinely com- 
 missioned. See Notes on Mark xvi. 1 7. 
 Acts ii. 22. Rom. xv. 19. 1 Were 
 wrought among you. That is, by me. 
 See Note, 1 Cor. ix. 2. ^f In all patience. 
 I performed those works notwithstand- 
 ing the opposition which I met with. 
 I patiently persevered in furnishing the 
 evidence of my divine commission. 
 There was a succession of miracles de- 
 monstrating that I was from God, not- 
 withstanding the unreasonable opposi- 
 tion which I met with, until I convinced 
 you that I was called to the office of an 
 apostle. ^ In signs and wonders. In 
 working miracles. Comp. Note, Acts 
 ii. 22. What these miracles at Corinth 
 were, we are not distinctly informed. 
 They probably, however, were similar 
 to those wrought in other places, in 
 healing the sick, &c. ; the most benevo- 
 lent as it was one of the most decisive 
 proofs of the divine power. 
 
 13. For what is it, &c. This verse 
 contains a striking mixture of sarcasm 
 and irony, not exceeded, says Bloom- 
 field, by any example in Demosthenes. 
 The sense is, ' I have given among you 
 the most ample proofs of my apostolic 
 commission. I have conferred on you 
 the highest favours of the apostolic 
 office. In these respects you are supe- 
 rior to all other churches. In one re- 
 spect only are you inferior — it is in 
 this, that you have not been burdened 
 with the privilege of supporting me. 
 If you had had this, you would have 
 been inferior to no others. But this was 
 owing to me ; and I pray that you will 
 forgive me this. I might have urged 
 it ; I might have claimed it ; I might 
 have given you the privilege of becom- 
 ing equal to the most favoured in all 
 respects. But I have not pressed it, and 
 you have not done it, and I ask your 
 
 except it be that I ° myself was 
 not burdensome to you ? forgive 
 me this wrong. 
 
 14 Behold, the third time 1 
 
 ac. 11. 9. 
 
 pardon.' There is a delicate insinuation 
 that they had not contributed to his 
 wants (see Note, ch. xi. 8) ; an intima- 
 tion that it was a privilege to contribute 
 to the support of the gospel, and that 
 Paul might have been "burdensome to 
 them" (see Notes on 1 Cor.ix. 1 — 12) ; 
 and an admission that he was in part 
 to blame for this, and had not in this 
 respect given them an opportunity to 
 equal other churches in all respects 
 % Was not burdensome to you. See 
 this explained in the Notes on ch. x. 8. 
 If Forgive me this ivrong. 'If it be a 
 fault, pardon it. Forgive me that I 
 did not give you this opportunity to be 
 equal to other churches. It is a privi- 
 lege to contribute to the support of the 
 gospel, and they who are permitted to 
 do it should esteem themselves highly 
 favoured. I pray you to pardon me 
 for depriving you of any of your Chris- 
 tian privileges.' What the feelings of 
 the Corinthians were about forgiving 
 Paul for this we know not ; but most 
 churches would be as ready to forgive 
 a minister for this as for any othei 
 offence. 
 
 14. Behold, the third time, lam ready 
 to come to you. That is, this is the 
 third time that I have purposed to come 
 and see you, and have made preparation 
 for it. He does not mean that he had 
 been twice with them and was now 
 coming the third time, but that he. had 
 twice before intended to go and had 
 been disappointed. See 1 Cor. xvi. 5. 
 2 Cor. i. 15, 16. His purpose had been 
 to visit them on his way to Macedonia, 
 and again on his return from Macedo- 
 nia. He had now formed a third reso- 
 lution, which he had a prospect of carry- 
 ing into execution, i And I will not 
 be burdensome to you. I resolve still, 
 as I have done before, not to receive a 
 compensation that shall be oppressive 
 to you. See Notes on ch. xi. 9, 10. 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER X1L 
 
 263 
 
 am ready to come to you ; and 
 I will not be burdensome to you : 
 for a I seek not yours, but you : 
 for the children ought not to lay 
 
 a 1 Co. 10. 33. 1 Th. 2. 8. 
 
 1 For I seek not yours, but you. I de- 
 sire not to obtain your property, but to 
 save your souls. This was a noble reso- 
 lution ; and it is the resolution which 
 should be formed by every minister of 
 the gospel. While a minister of Christ 
 has a claim to a competent support, his 
 main purpose should not be to obtain 
 such a support. It should be the higher 
 and nobler object of winning souls to 
 the Redeemer. See Paul's conduct in 
 this respect explained in the Notes on 
 Acts xx. 33. ^ For the children, &c. 
 There is great delicacy and address in 
 this sentiment. The meaning is, • It is 
 not natural and usual for children to 
 make provisions for their parents. The 
 common course of events and of duty 
 is, for parents to make provision for their 
 offspring. I, therefore, your spiritual 
 father, choose to act in the same way. 
 I make provision for your spiritual 
 wants ; I labour and toil for you as a 
 father does for his children. I seek 
 your welfare, as he does, by constant 
 self-denial. In return, I do not ask you 
 to provide for me, any more than a father 
 ordinarily expects his children to provide 
 for him. I am willing to labour as he 
 does, content with doing my duty, and 
 promoting the welfare of those under 
 me.' The words rendered " ought not" 
 (ob cxpiihii) are to be understood in a 
 comparative sense. Paul does not mean 
 that a child ought never to provide for 
 his parents, or to lay any thing up for a 
 sick, a poor, and an infirm father, but 
 that the duty of doing that was slight 
 and unusual compared with the duty of 
 a parent to provide for his children. 
 The one was of comparatively rare oc- 
 currence ; the other was constant and 
 was the ordinary course of duty. It is 
 a matter of obligation for a child to pro- 
 vide for an aged and helpless parent ; 
 but commonly the duty is that of a pa- 
 rent to provide for his children. Paul 
 
 up for the parents, but the parents 
 for the children. 
 
 15 And I will very gladly 
 spend and be spent for 1 you ; 
 
 1 your souls. 
 
 felt like a father toward the church in 
 j Corinth ; and he was willing, therefore, 
 | to labour for them without compensa- 
 - tion. 
 
 15. And I- mill very gladly spend. 
 1 1 am willing to spend my strength, and 
 j time, and life, and all that I have for 
 j your welfare, as a father cheerfully does 
 for his children. Any expense which 
 may be necessary to promote your salva- 
 tion I am willing to submit to. The 
 labour of a father for his children is 
 cheerful and pleasant. Such is his love 
 for them that he delights in toil for their 
 sake and that he may make them hap- 
 py. The toil of a pastor for his flock 
 should be cheerful. He should be will- 
 ing to engage in unremitted efforts for 
 their welfare ; and if he has any right 
 feeling he will find a pleasure in that 
 toil. He will not grudge the time de- 
 manded ; he will not be grieved that it 
 exhausts his strength, or his life, any 
 more than a father will who toils for 
 his family. And as the pleasures of a 
 father who is labouring for his children 
 are among the purest and most pleasant 
 which men ever enjoy, so it is with a 
 pastor. Perhaps, on the whole, the 
 pleasantest employment in life is that 
 connected with the pastoral office ; the 
 happiest moments known on earth are 
 in the duties, arduous as they are, of the 
 pastoral relation. God thus, as in the 
 relation of a father, tempers toil and 
 pleasure together; and accompanies 
 most arduous labours with present and 
 abundant reward. If Be spent. Be 
 exhausted and worn out in my labours. 
 So the Greek word means. Paul was 
 willing that his powers should be en- 
 tirely exhausted and his life consumed 
 in this service. K For you. Marg. as 
 in the Greek, for your souls. So it 
 should have been rendered. So Tindal 
 renders it. The sense is, that he was 
 willing to become wholly exhausted if 
 
264 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 though the more abundantly 
 love you, the less I be loved. 
 16 But be it so, I did not 
 
 I burden you : nevertheless, being 
 I crafty, I caught you with guile. 
 17 Did I make a gain of you 
 
 by it he might secure the salvation of 
 their souls. % Though the more abun- 
 dantly I love you, &c. This is design- 
 ed doubtless as a gentle reproof. It 
 refers to the fact that notwithstanding 
 the tender attachment which he had 
 evinced for them, they had not mani- 
 fested the love in return which he had 
 had a right to expect. It is possible that 
 there may be an allusion to the case of 
 a fond, doting parent. It sometimes 
 happens that a parent fixes his affections 
 with undue degree on some one of his 
 children ; and in such cases it is not 
 uncommon that the child evinces special 
 ingratitude and want of love. Such 
 may be the allusion here — that Paul 
 had fixed his affections on them like a 
 fond, doting father, and that he had 
 met with a return by no means corres- 
 ponding with the fervour of his attach- 
 ment ; yet still he was willing, like such 
 a father, to exhaust his time and strength 
 for their welfare. The doctrine is, that 
 we should be willing to labour and toil 
 for the good of others, even when they 
 evince great ingratitude. The proper 
 end of labouring for their welfare is not 
 to excite their gratitude, but to obey the 
 will of God ; and no matter whether 
 others are grateful or not ; whether they 
 love us or not ; whether we can promote 
 our popularity with them or not, let 
 us do them good always. It better 
 shows the firmness of our Christian 
 principle to endeavour to benefit others 
 when they love us the less for all our 
 attempts, than it does to attempt to do 
 good on the swelling tide of popular 
 favour. 
 
 16. But be it so. This is evidently 
 a charge of his enemies ; or at least a 
 charge which it might be supposed they 
 would make. Whether they ever in 
 fact made it, or whether the apostle 
 merely anticipates an objection, it is im- 
 possible to determine. It is clearly to 
 be regarded as the language of objectors ; 
 for, (I.) It can never be supposed that 
 
 Paul would state as a serious matter 
 that he had caught them with deceit 
 or fraud. (2.) He answers it as an 
 objection in the following verse. The 
 meaning is, ' We admit that you did 
 not burden us. You did not exact a 
 support from us. But all this was mere 
 trick. You accomplish the same thing 
 in another way. You professed when 
 with us not to seek our property but 
 our souls. But in various ways you 
 contrived to get our money, and to 
 secure your object. You made others 
 the agents for doing this, and sent them 
 among us under various pretexts to gain 
 money from us.' It will be remembered 
 that Paul had sent Titus among them 
 to take up the collection for the poor 
 saints in Judea (ch. viii. 6), and it is 
 not at all improbable that some there 
 had charged Paul with making use of 
 this pretence only to obtain money for 
 his own private use. To guard against 
 this charge, was one of the reasons why 
 Paul was so anxious to have some per- 
 sons appointed by the church to take 
 charge of the contribution. Sec 1 Cor. 
 xvi. 3. Comp. Notes on 2 Cor. viii. 
 19 — 21. f Being crafty. Being cun- 
 ning. That is, by sending persons to 
 obtain money on different pretences. 
 1 / caught you with guile. I took you 
 by deceit or fraud. That is, making use 
 of fraud in pretending that the money 
 was for poor and afflicted saints, when 
 in reality it was for my own use. It is 
 impossible that Paul should have ever 
 admitted this of himself; and they 
 greatly pervert the passage who suppose 
 that it applies to him, and then plead 
 that it is right to make use of guile iu 
 accomplishing their purposes. Paul 
 never carried his measures by dis- 
 honesty, nor did he ever justify fraud. 
 Comp. Notes on Acts xxiii. 6. 
 
 17. Did I make a gain, &c. In 
 refuting this slander, Paul appeals boldly 
 to the facts, and to what they knew. 
 • Name the man, says he, who has thus 
 
A. 1). 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 265 
 
 by any of them whom I sent 
 unto you ? 
 
 18 I desired Titus, • and with 
 him, I sent a brother : b Did 
 Titus make a gain of you ? 
 walked we not in the same 
 spirit? walked we not in the 
 same steps ? 
 
 ac.7.2. b c. 8. 6. 
 
 defrauded you under my instructions. 
 If the charge is well-founded, let him 
 be specified, and let the mode in which 
 it was done be distinctly stated.' The 
 phrase " make a gain" (from 7r\KVBLrii») , 
 means properly to have an advantage ; 
 then to take advantage, to seek unlawful 
 gain. Here Paul asks whether he had 
 defrauded them by means of any one 
 whom he had sent to them. 
 
 18. I desired Titus. To go and 
 complete the collection which you had 
 commenced. See ch. viii. 6. | And 
 with him I sent a brother. See Note 
 on ch. viii. 18. H Did Titus make a 
 gain of you P They knew that he did 
 not. They had received him kindly, 
 treated him with affection, and sent him 
 away with every proof of confidence 
 and respect. See ch. vii. 7. How then 
 could they now pretend that he had 
 defrauded them ? 1 Walked we not in 
 the same spirit ? Did not all his actions 
 resemble mine? Was there not the 
 same proof of honesty, sincerity, and 
 love which I have ever manifested 7 
 This is a very delicate turn. Paul's 
 course of life when with them they 
 admitted was free from guile and from 
 any attempt to get money by impro- 
 per means. They charged him only 
 with attempting it by means of others. 
 He now boldly appeals to them and 
 isks whether Titus and he had not in 
 fact acted in the same manner; and 
 whether they had not alike evinced a 
 spirit free from covetousness and 
 jeceit 1 
 
 1 9. Again, think ye that we excuse 
 ourselves unto you? See Note on 
 ch. v. 12. The sense is, do not sup- 
 pose that this is said from mere anxiety 
 
 23 
 
 19 Again, think ye that we 
 excuse ourselves c unto you ? we 
 speak before God in Christ: but 
 we do all things, dearly beloved, 
 for your edifying. 
 
 38 For I fear, lest, when d l 
 come, I shall not find you such 
 as I would, and that I shall be 
 
 c c. 5. 12. d i Co. 4. 21. c. 13. 2. 10. 
 
 to obtain your favour, or to ingratiate 
 ourselves into your esteem. This is 
 said doubtless to keep himself from the 
 suspicion of being actuated by improper 
 motives. He had manifested great so- 
 licitude certainly in the previous chap- 
 ters to vindicate his character ; but he 
 here says that it was not from a mere 
 desire to show them that his conduct 
 was right; it was from a desire to 
 honour Christ ^ We speak before 
 God in Christ. We declare the simple 
 and undisguised truth as in the pre- 
 sence of God. I have no mere desire 
 to palliate my conduct; I disguise no- 
 thing; I conceal nothing; I say nothing 
 for the mere purpose of self-vindication, 
 but I can appeal to the Searcher of 
 hearts for the exact truth of all that I 
 say. The phrase " before God in Christ," 
 means probably, * I speak as in the pre- 
 sence of God and as a follower of Christ, 
 as a Christian man.' It is the solemn 
 appeal of a Christian to his God for the 
 truth of what he said, and a solemn 
 asseveration that what he said was not 
 for the mere purpose of excusing or 
 apologizing for (Greek) his conduct. 
 <[ But we do all things, dearly beloved, 
 for your edifying. All that I have 
 done has been for your welfare. My 
 vindication of my character, and my 
 effort to disabuse you of your prejudices, 
 has been that you might have unwaver- 
 ing confidence in the gospel and might 
 be built up in holy faith. On the word 
 edify , see Notes on Rom. xiv. 1 9. 1 Cor. 
 viii. 1 ; x. 23. 
 
 20. For I fear lest, when I come. See 
 ver. 14. K J shall not find you such 
 as I would. That is, walking in the 
 truth and order of the gospel. He had 
 
II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 found unto you such as ye would 
 not ; lest there be debates, envy- 
 ings, wraths, strifes, backbitings, 
 whisperings, swellings, tumults : 
 21 And lest, when I come 
 again, my God will humble a me 
 
 a c. 2. ]. 
 
 feared that the disorders would not be 
 removed, and that they would not have 
 corrected the errors which prevailed, 
 and for which he had rebuked them. 
 It was on this account that he had said 
 so much to them. His desire was that 
 all these disorders might be removed, 
 and that he might be saved from the 
 necessity of exercising severe discipline 
 when he should come among them. 
 1 And that / shall be found unto you 
 such as ye would not. That is, that I 
 shall be compelled to administer disci- 
 pline, and that my visit may not be 
 as pleasant to you as you would desire. 
 For this reason he wished all disorder 
 corrected, and all offences removed ; that 
 every thing might be pleasant when he 
 should come. See 1 Cor. iv. 21. Comp. 
 Note on ch. x. 2. ^ Lest there be de- 
 bates. I fear that there may be existing 
 there debates, &c, which will require 
 the interposition of the authority of an 
 apostle. On the meaning of the word 
 debate, see Note on Rom. i. 29. ^ Envy- 
 ings. See Note on 1 Cor. iii. 3. 
 | Wraths. Anger or animosity between 
 contending factions, the usual effect of 
 forming parties. Tf Strifes. Between 
 contending factions. See Note on 1 Cor. 
 iii. 3. ^ Backbitings. See Note on Rom. 
 i. 30. f Whisperings. See Note on 
 Rom. i. 29. Tf Swellings. Undue ela- 
 tion; being puffed up (see Note on 
 ch. viii. 1 . 1 Cor. iv. 6. 1 8, 1 9 ; v. 2)— 
 such as would be produced by vain 
 self-confidence, f Tumults. Disorder 
 and confusion arising from this exist- 
 ence of parties. Paul, deeply sensible 
 of the evil of all this, had endeavoured 
 in this correspondence to suppress it, 
 that all things might be pleasant when 
 he should come among them. 
 
 21. And lest, when I come again, my 
 
 among you, and that 1 shall be- 
 wail many which have sinned 
 already, and have not repented l 
 of the uncleanness, and fornica- 
 tion, c and lasciviousness which 
 they have committed. 
 
 b Re. 2. 21. 
 
 c 1 Co. 5. 1. 
 
 God will humble me, &c. Lest I should 
 be compelled to inflict punishment on 
 those whom I supposed to have bee^ 
 converted under my ministry. I had re- 
 joiced in them as true converts. I had 
 counted them as among the fruit of my 
 ministry. Now to be compelled to in- 
 flict punishment on them as having no 
 religion would mortify me and humble 
 me. The infliction of punishment on 
 members of the church is a sort of 
 punishment to him who inflicts it as 
 well as to him who is punished. Mem- 
 bers of the church should walk uprightly, 
 lest they overwhelm the ministry in 
 shame. U And that I shall bewail 
 many, &c. If they repented of their sin 
 he could still rejoice in them. If they 
 continued in their sin till he came, it 
 would be to him a source of deep la- 
 mentation. It is evident from the word 
 " many" here that the disorders had pre- 
 vailed very extensively in the church at 
 Corinth. The word rendered "have 
 sinned already r means •' who have sinned 
 before,' and the idea is, that they were 
 old offenders, and that they had not yet 
 repented. \ The uncleanness. See 
 Note, Rom i. 24. ^ And fornication 
 and lasciviousness, &c. See Notes on 
 1 Cor. v. 1 ; vi. 18. This was the sin 
 to which they were particularly exposed 
 in Corinth, as it was the sin for which 
 that corrupt city was particularly dis- 
 tinguished. See the Introduction to the 
 first epistle. Hence the frequent cautions 
 in these epistles against it ; and hence it 
 is not to be wondered at that some of 
 those who had become professing Chris- 
 tians had fallen into it It may be 
 added that it is still the sin to which 
 converts from the corruptions and licen- 
 tiousness of paganism are particularly 
 exposed. 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 set 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 n^HIS is the third time I am 
 coming to you. In "the 
 
 a De. 19. 15. He. 10. 28, 29. 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 This closing chapter of the epistle 
 relates to the following subjects. 
 
 I. The assurance of Paul that he was 
 about to come among them (ver. 1 — 4), 
 and that he would certainly inflict pu- 
 nishment on all who deserved it. His 
 enemies had reproached him as being 
 timid and pusillanimous. See Notes 
 on ch. x. 1, 2. 10, 11. They had said 
 that he was powerful to threaten, but 
 afraid to execute. It is probable that 
 they had become more bold in this from 
 the fact' that he had twice purposed to 
 go there and had failed. In reply to 
 all this, he now in conclusion solemnly 
 assures them that he was coming, and 
 that in all cases where an offence was 
 proved by two or three witnesses, pu- 
 nishment would be inflicted, ver. 1. He 
 assures them (ver. 2) that he would 
 not spare ; and that since they sought 
 a proof that Christ had sent him, they 
 should witness that proof in the punish- 
 ment which he would inflict (ver. 3) ; for 
 that Christ was now clothed with power 
 and was able to execute punishment, 
 though he had been crucified, ver. 4. 
 
 II. Paul calls on them solemnly to 
 examine themselves and to see whether 
 they had any true religion, ver. 5, 6. 
 In the state of things which existed 
 there ; in the corruption which had 
 abounded in the church, he solemnly 
 commands them to institute a faithful 
 inquiry to know whether they had not 
 been deceived ; at the same time ex- 
 pressing the hope that it would appear 
 as the result of their examination that 
 they were not reprobates. 
 
 III. He earnestly prays to God that 
 they might do no evil ; that they might 
 be found to be honest and pure, what- 
 ever might be thought of Paul himself 
 or whatever might become of him. ver. 7. 
 Their repentance would save Paul from 
 exerting his miraculous power in their 
 
 mouth of two or three wit- 
 nesses shall every word be es- 
 tablished. 
 
 punishment, and might thus prevent the 
 proof of his apostolic authority which 
 they desired, and the consequence might 
 be that they might esteem him to be a 
 reprobate, for he could not exert his 
 miraculous power except in the cause 
 of truth, ver. 8. Still he was willing 
 to be esteemed an impostor if they 
 would do no evil. 
 
 IV. He assures them that he earnestly 
 wished their perfection, and that the 
 design of his writing to them, severe as 
 he had appeared, was their edification, 
 ver. 9, 10. 
 
 V. Then he bids them an affectionate 
 and tender farewell, and closes with 
 the usual salutations and benedictions, 
 ver. 11—14. 
 
 1. This is the third time, &c. See 
 Note on ch. xii. 14. For an interesting 
 view of this passage, see Paley's Horse 
 Paulina? on this epistle, No. xi. It is 
 evident that Paul had been to Corinth 
 but once before this, but he had resolved 
 to go before a second time, but had been 
 disappointed, f In the mouth of two 
 or three witnesses, &c. This was what 
 the law of Moses required. Deut. xx. 
 16. See Note on John viii. 17. Comp. 
 Matt xviii. 16. But in regard to its 
 application here, commentators are not 
 agreed. Some suppose that Paul refers 
 to his own epistles which he had sent 
 to them as the two or three witnesses 
 by which his promise to them would be 
 made certain ; that he had purposed it 
 and promised it two or three times, and 
 that as this was all that was required 
 by the law, it would certainly be esta- 
 blished. This is the opinion of Bloom- 
 field, Itosenmiiller, Grotius, Hammond, 
 Locke, and some others. But, with all 
 the respect due to such great names, it 
 seems to me that this would be trifling 
 and childish in the extreme. ' Light- 
 foot supposes that he refers to Stephanas, 
 Fortunatus, and Achaicus, who would 
 be witnesses to them of his purpose. 
 
II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D, 60. 
 
 2 I told you before, and fore- 
 tel you, as if I were present, the 
 6econd time ; and being absent 
 now I write to them a which 
 heretofore have sinned, and to 
 all other, that, if I come again, 
 I will not spare : 
 
 a c. 12. 21. 
 
 See 1 Cor. xvi. 17. But the more pro- 
 bable opinion, it seems to me, is that 
 of Doddridge, Macknight, and others, 
 that he anticipated that there would be 
 necessity for the administration of dis- 
 cipline there, but that he would feel 
 himself under obligation in administer- 
 ing it to adhere to the reasonable maxim 
 of the Jewish law. No one should be 
 condemned or punished where there 
 was not at least two or three witnesses 
 to prove the offence. But where there 
 were, discipline would be administered 
 according to the nature of the crime. 
 
 2. I told you before. That I would 
 not spare offenders ; that I would cer- 
 tainly punish them. He had intimated 
 this before in the first Epis. ch. iv. 21, 
 and ch. v. % And forettl you. Now 
 apprise you of my fixed determination 
 to punish every offender as he deserves. 
 T As if I were present the second time. 
 The mention of the ' second time'' here 
 proves that Paul had been with them 
 but once before. He had formed the 
 resolution to go to them, but had been 
 disappointed. The time when he had 
 been with them is recorded in Acts 
 xviii. 1, seq. He now uses the same 
 language to them which he says he 
 would use if he were with them, as he 
 had expected to be, the second time- 
 See the remarks of Paley on this pas- 
 sage, referred to above. \ And being 
 absent. See Note on 1 Cor. v. 3. % To 
 them which have heretofore sinned. To 
 all the offenders in the church. They 
 had supposed that he would not come to 
 them (I Cor. iv. 18), or that if he came 
 he would not dare to inflict punish- 
 ment. 2 Cor. 9 — 11. They had, there- 
 fore, given themselves greater liberty, 
 and had pursued their own course, re- 
 gardless of his authority and commands. 
 
 3 Since ye seek a proof of 
 Christ speaking in me, which to 
 you-ward is not weak, but is 
 mighty fc in you. 
 
 4 For though e he was crucified 
 through weakness, yet he liveth 
 by the power of God. For we 
 
 b 1 Co. 9. 2. e Ph. 2. 7, 8. 1 Pe. 3. IS. 
 
 t I will not spare. I will punish them. 
 They shall not escape. 
 
 3. Since ye seek a proof of Christ 
 speaking in ine. See the Notes on 
 the previous chapters. They had called 
 in question his apostolic authority ; they 
 had demanded the evidence of his divine 
 commission. He says that he would 
 now furnish such evidence by inflicting 
 just punishment on all offenders, and 
 they should have abundant proof that 
 Christ spoke by him, or that he was 
 inspired. ^ Which to you-ward is not 
 weak. Or who, that is, Christ, is not 
 weak, &c. Christ has manifested his 
 power abundantly towards you, that is, 
 either by the miracles that had been 
 wrought in his name ; or by the diseases 
 and calamities which they had suffered 
 on account of their disorders and of- 
 fences (see Note on 1 Cor. xi. 30 ; and 
 1 Cor. v.) ; or by the force and efficacy 
 of his doctrine. The connexion, it 
 seems to me, requires that we should 
 understand it of the calamities which 
 had been inflicted by Christ on them 
 for their sins, and which Paul says 
 would be inflicted again if they did not 
 repent. The idea is, that they had had 
 ample demonstration of the power of 
 Christ to inflict punishment, and they 
 had reason to apprehend it again. 
 
 4. For though he was crucified 
 through weakness. Various modes have 
 been adopted of explaining the phrase 
 " through weakness." The most proba- 
 ble explanation is that which refers it to 
 the human nature which he had assurr.eJ 
 (Phil. ii. 7, 8. 1 Pet. iii. 18), and to the 
 appearance of weakness which he mani- 
 fested. He did not choose to exert his 
 power. He appeared to his enemies 
 to be weak and feeble. This idea would 
 be an exact illustration of the point 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 269 
 
 also are weak 1 in him, but we 
 
 • or, with. 
 
 before the apostle. He is illustrating 
 his own conduct, and especially in the 
 fact that he had not exerted his miracu- 
 lous powers among them in the punish- 
 ment of offenders; and he does it by 
 the example of Christ, who though 
 abundantly able to have exerted his 
 power and to have rescued himself from 
 his enemies, yet was willing to appear 
 weak, and to be crucified. It is very 
 clear, (1.) That the Lord Jesus seemed 
 to his enemies to be weak and incapa- 
 ble of resistance. (2.) That he did not 
 put forth his power to protect his life. 
 He in fact offered no resistance, as if he 
 had no power. (3.) He had a human 
 nature that was peculiarly sensitive, and 
 sensible to suffering; and that was 
 borne down and crushed under the 
 weight of mighty woes. See my Notes 
 on Isa. liii. 2, 3. From all these causes 
 he seemed to be weak and feeble ; and 
 these appear to me to be the principal 
 ideas in this expression, t Yet he liveth. 
 He is not now dead. Though he was 
 crucified, yet he now lives again, and is 
 now capable of exerting his great power. 
 He furnishes proof of his being alive, in 
 the success which attends the gospel, and 
 in the miracles which are wrought in his 
 name and by his power. There is a 
 living Redeemer in heaven ; a Redeemer 
 who is able to exert all the power which 
 he ever exerted when on earth ; a Re- 
 deemer, therefore, who is able to save 
 the soul ; to raise the dead ; to punish 
 all his foes, t By the power of God. 
 In raising him from the dead and placing 
 him at his own right hand. See Eph. 
 i. 19 — 21. Through the power of God 
 he was brought from the tomb, and has 
 had a place assigned him at the head 
 of the universe. \ For we also are 
 weak in him. Marg. * with him.' We 
 his apostles, also, are weak in virtue of 
 our connexion with him. We are 
 subject to infirmities and trials ; we 
 seem to have no power ; we are exposed 
 to contempt; and we appear to our 
 enemies to be destitute of strength. 
 23* 
 
 shall live with him by the power 
 of God towards you. 
 
 Our enemies regard us as feeble ; and 
 they despise us. % But we shall live 
 with him, &c. That is, we shall show 
 to you that we are alive. By the aid 
 of the power of God we shall show 
 that we are not as weak as our foes pre- 
 tend ; that we are invested with power ; 
 and that we are able to inflict the punish- 
 ment which we threaten. This is one 
 of the numerous instances in which 
 Paul illustrated the case before him by 
 a reference to the example and charac- 
 ter of Christ. The idea is, that Christ 
 did not exert his power, and appeared to 
 be weak, and was put to death. So 
 Paul says that he had not exerted his 
 power, and seemed to be weak. But, 
 says he, Christ lives, and is clothed 
 with strength ; and so we, though we 
 appear to be weak, shall exert among 
 you, or toward you, the power with 
 which he has invested us, in inflicting 
 punishment on our foes. 
 
 5. Examine yourselves. See Note 
 on 1 Cor. xi. 28. The particular rea- 
 son why Paul calls on them to examine 
 themselves was, that there was occasion 
 to fear that many of them had been de- 
 ceived. Such had been the irregularities 
 and disorders in the church at Corinth ; 
 so ignorant had many of them shown 
 themselves of the nature of the Chris- 
 tian religion, that it was important, in 
 the highest degree, for them to institute 
 a strict and impartial examination to 
 ascertain whether they had not been 
 altogetherdeceived. This examination, 
 however, is never unimportant or use- 
 less for Christians; and an exhortation 
 to do it is always in place. So impor- 
 tant are the interests at stake, and so 
 liable are the best to deceive themselves, 
 that all Christians should be often in- 
 duced to examine the foundation of their 
 hope of eternal salvation. % Whether 
 ye be in the faith. Whether you are 
 true Christians. Whether you have any 
 true faith in the gospel. Faith in Jesus 
 Christ, and in the promises of God 
 through him, is one of the distinguishing 
 
370 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 5 Examine a yourselves 
 
 a 1 Co. 11. 28. 1 Jno. 3. 20, 21. 
 
 characteristics of a true Christian ; and 
 to ascertain whether we have any true 
 faith, therefore, is to ascertain whether 
 we are sincere Christians. For some 
 reasons for such an examination, and 
 some remarks on the mode of doing it, 
 see Note on 1 Cor. xi. 28. 1 Prove 
 your ownselves. The word here used 
 (JoMpa^iTi) is stronger than that before 
 used, and rendered " examine" {jruga^ni) . 
 This word, prove, refers to assaying or 
 trying metals by the powerful action of 
 heat ; and the idea here is, that they 
 should make the most thorough trial of 
 their religion, to see whether it would 
 stand the test. See Note on 1 Cor. iii. 
 13. The proof of their piety was to 
 be arrived at by a faithful examination 
 of their own hearts and lives ; by a 
 diligent comparison of their views and 
 feelings with the word of God ; and 
 especially by making trial of it in life. 
 The best way to prove our piety is to 
 subject it to actual trial in the various 
 duties and responsibilities of life. A 
 man who wishes to prove an axe to see 
 whether it is good or not, does not sit 
 down and look at it, or read all the 
 treatises which he can find on axe- 
 making, and on the properties of iron 
 and steel, valuable as such information 
 would be ; but he shoulders his axe and 
 goes into the woods, and puts it to the 
 trial there. If it cuts well ; if it does 
 not break ; if it is not soon made dull, 
 he understands the quality of his axe 
 better than he could in any other way. 
 So if a man wishes to know what his 
 religion is worth, let him try it in the 
 places where religion is of any value. 
 Let him go into the world with it. Let 
 him go and try to do good ; to endure 
 affliction in a proper manner ; to combat 
 the errors and follies of life ; to ad- 
 monish sinners of the error of their 
 ways; and to urge forward the great 
 work of the conversion of the world, 
 and he will soon see there what, his re- 
 ligion is worth — as easily as a man can 
 test the qualities of an axe. Let him 
 
 whether ye be in the faith ; 
 prove your ownselves. Know 
 
 not merely sit down and think, and 
 compare himself with the Bible and 
 look at his own heart — valuable as this 
 may be in many respects — but let him 
 treat his religion as he would any thing 
 else — let him subject it to actual expe- 
 riment. That religion which will ena- 
 ble a man to imitate the example of Paul 
 or Howard, or the great Master himself, 
 in doing good, is genuine. That reli- 
 gion which will enable a man to endure 
 persecution for the name of Jesus ; to 
 bear calamity without murmuring; to 
 submit to a long series of disappoint- 
 ments and distresses for Christ's sake, 
 is genuine. That religion which will 
 prompt a man unceasingly to a life of 
 prayer and self-denial ; which will make 
 him ever conscientious, industrious, and 
 honest ; which will enable him to warn 
 sinners of the error of their ways, and 
 which will dispose him to seek the 
 friendship of Christians, and the salva- 
 tion of the world, is pure and genuine. 
 That will answer the purpose. It is 
 like the good axe with which a man can 
 chop all day long, in which there is no 
 flaw, and which does not get dull, and 
 which answers all the purposes of an 
 axe. Any other religion than this is 
 worthless. ^ Know ye not your own- 
 selves. That is, 'Do you not know 
 yourselves V This does not mean, as 
 some may suppose, that they might 
 know of themselves, without the aid of 
 others, what their character was ; or 
 that they might themselves ascertain it ; 
 but it means that they might know 
 themselves ,- i. e. their character, princi- 
 ples, conduct. This proves that Chris- 
 tians may k?iow their true character. 
 If they are Christians, they may know 
 it with as undoubted certainty as they 
 may know their character on any 
 other subject. Why should not a man 
 be as able to determine whether he loves 
 God as whether he loves a child, a pa- 
 rent, or a friend] What greater diffi- 
 culty need there be in understanding 
 the character on the subject of religion 
 
k. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 271 
 
 ye not your ownselves, how 
 that Jesus Christ «■ is in you, 
 except ye be reprobates 1 b 
 
 a Ro. 8. 10. Ga. 4. 19. 
 
 than on any other subject; and why 
 should there be any more reason for 
 doubt on this than on any other point 
 of character 1 And yet it is remarkable, 
 that while a child has no doubt that he 
 loves a parent, or a husband a wife, or 
 a friend a friend, almost all Christians 
 are in very great doubt about their at- 
 tachment to the Redeemer and to the 
 great principles of religion. Such was 
 not the case with the apostles and early 
 Christians. "I know," says Paul, 
 * whom I have believed, and am persuaded 
 that he is able to keep that which I have 
 committed to him," &c. 2 Tim. i. 12. 
 " We know," says John, speaking in 
 the name of the body of Christians, 
 " that we have passed from death unto 
 life." 1 John iii. 14. "We know that 
 we are of the truth." 19. "We know 
 that he abideth in us." 24. "We 
 know that we dwell in him." 1 John 
 iv. 13. See also v. 2. 19, 20. So Job 
 said, "I know that my Redeemer liveth, 
 and that he shall stand in the latter day 
 upon the earth," &c. Job xix. 25. 
 Such is the current language of Scrip- 
 ture. Where, in the Bible, do the sacred 
 speakers and writers express doubts 
 about their attachment to God and the 
 Redeemer? Where is such language 
 to be found as we hear from almost all 
 professing Christians, expressing entire 
 uncertainty about their condition ; ab- 
 solute doubt whether they love God or 
 hate him; whether they are going to 
 heaven or hell ; whether they are in- 
 fluenced by good motives or bad ; and 
 even making it a matter of merit to be 
 in such doubt, and thinking it wrong 
 not to doubt 1 What would be thought 
 of a husband that should make it a mat- 
 ter of merit to doubt whether he loved 
 his wife ; or of a child that should think 
 it wrong not to doubt whether he loved 
 his father or mother ? Such attachments 
 ought to be doubted — but they do not 
 occur in the common relations of life. 
 
 6 But I trust that yo shall 
 know that we are not repro- 
 bates. 
 
 b 1 Co. 9. 27. 2 Ti. 3. 8. 
 
 On the subject of religion men often 
 act as they do on no other subject ; and 
 if it is right for one to be satisfied of the 
 sincerity of his attachments to his best 
 earthly friends, and to speak of such 
 attachment without wavering or mis- 
 giving, it cannot be wrong to be satisfied 
 with regard to our attachment to God, 
 and to speak of that attachment, as the 
 apostles did, in language of undoubted 
 confidence. *J How that Jesus Christ 
 is in you. To be in Christ, or for Christ 
 to be in us, is a common mode in the 
 Scriptures of expressing the idea that 
 we are Christians. It is language de- 
 rived from the close union which sub- 
 sists between the Redeemer and his 
 people. See the phrase explained in 
 the Note on Rom.viii. 10. 1 Except 
 ye be reprobates. See Note on Rom. 
 i. 28. The word rendered " reprobates" 
 (oJkifxoi) means properly not approved, 
 rejected ,- that which will not stand the 
 trial. It is properly applicable to metals, 
 as denoting that they will not bear the 
 tests to which they are subjected, but 
 are found to be base or adulterated. 
 The sense here is, that they might know 
 that they were Christians, unless their 
 religion was base, false, adulterated ; or 
 such as would not bear the test. There 
 is no allusion here to the sense which 
 is sometimes given to the word reprobate, 
 of being cast off or abandoned by God, 
 or doomed by him to eternal ruin in ac- 
 cordance with an eternal purpose. 
 Whatever may be the truth on that 
 subject, nothing is taught in regard tc 
 it here. The simple idea is, that they 
 might know that they were Christians, 
 unless their religion was such as would 
 not stand the test, or was worthless. 
 
 6. But I trust, &c. The sense of 
 this verse is, 'Whatever may be the 
 result of your examination of yourselves, 
 I trust (Gr. / hope) you will not find us 
 false and to be rejected ; that is, I trust 
 you will find in me evidence that I am 
 
372 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A.D.60 
 
 7 Now I pray to God that ye ! should do that which is honest, 
 do no evil ; not that we should though we be as reprobates. 
 
 8 For ° we can do nothing 
 
 oPr. 21.30. 
 
 appear approved, but that ye 
 
 commissioned by the Lord Jesus to be 
 his apostle.' The idea is, that they 
 would find when he was among them, 
 that he was endowed with all the quali- 
 fications needful to confer a claim to the 
 apostolic office. 
 
 7. Now 1 pray to God that ye do no 
 evil. I earnestly desire that you may 
 do right, and only right ; and I beseech 
 God that it may be so, whatever may 
 be the result in regard to me, and what- 
 ever may be thought of my claims to 
 the apostolic office. This is designed 
 to mitigate the apparent severity of the 
 sentiment in ver. 6. There he had said 
 that they would find him fully endowed 
 with the power of an apostle. They 
 would see that he was able abundantly 
 to punish the disobedient They would 
 have ample demonstration that he was 
 endowed by Christ with all the powers 
 appropriate to an apostle, and that all 
 that he had claimed had been well- 
 founded, all that he threatened would 
 be executed. But this seemed to imply 
 that he desired that there should be 
 occasion for the exercise of that power 
 of administering discipline ; and he, 
 therefore, in this verse, removes all sus- 
 picion that such was his wish, by saying 
 solemnly, that he prayed to God that 
 they might never do wrong ; that they 
 might never give him occasion for the 
 exercise of his power in that way, 
 though as a consequence he would be 
 regarded as a reprobate, or as having no 
 claims to the apostolic office. He would 
 rather be regarded as an impostor ; ra- 
 ther lie under the reproach of his ene- 
 mies that he had no claims to the 
 apostolic character, than that they, by 
 doing wrong, should give him occasion 
 to show that he was not a deceiver. 
 T Not that we should appear approved. 
 My great object, and my main desire, 
 is not to urge my claims to the apostolic 
 office and clear up my own character ; 
 it is that you should lead honest lives, 
 
 whatever may become of me and my 
 reputation. \ Though we be as repro- 
 bates. I am willing to be regarded as 
 rejected, disapproved, worthless, like 
 base metal, provided you lead honest 
 and holy lives. I prefer to be so esteem- 
 ed, and to have you live as becomes 
 Christians, than that you should dis- 
 honour your Christian profession, and 
 thus afford me the opportunity of de- 
 monstrating, by inflicting punishment, 
 that I am commissioned by the Lord 
 Jesus to be an apostle. The sentiment 
 is, that a minister of the gospel should 
 desire that his people should walk 
 worthy of their high calling, whatever 
 may be the estimate in which he is held. 
 He should never desire that they should 
 do wrong — how can he do it 1 — in order 
 that he may take occasion from their 
 wrong-doing to vindicate, in any way, 
 his own character, or to establish a re- 
 putation for skill in administering disci- 
 pline or in governing a church. What 
 a miserable ambition it is — and as wick- 
 ed as it is miserable — for a man to wish 
 to take advantage of a state of disorder, 
 or of the faults of others, in order to es- 
 tablish his own character, or to obtain 
 reputation. Paul spurned and detested 
 such a thought ; yet it is to be feared it 
 is sometimes done. 
 
 8. For we. That is, we the apostles. 
 f Can do nothing against the truth, 
 &c. That is, we who are under the in- 
 fluence of the Spirit of God ; who have 
 been commissioned by him as apostles, 
 can do nothing that shall be against 
 that great system of truth which we are 
 appointed to promulgate and defend. 
 You need, therefore, apprehend no par- 
 tial, or severe discipline from is; no 
 unjust construction of your conduct. 
 Our aim is to promote the truth, and to 
 do what is right ; and we cannot, there- 
 fore, by any regard to our own reputa- 
 tion, or to any personal advantage, do 
 what is wrong, or countenance, or deajrt 
 
A. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER XIII 
 
 but for the 
 
 273 
 
 against the truth 
 truth. 
 
 9 For we are glad, when we 
 are weak, and ye are strong: 
 and this also we wish, even 
 your perfection. a 
 
 a 1 Th. 3. 10. He. 6. 1. 
 
 what is wrong in others. We must 
 wish that which is right to be done by 
 others, whatever may be the effect on us 
 — whether we are regarded as apostles or 
 deceivers. I suppose, therefore, that this 
 verse is designed to qualify and confirm 
 the sentiment in the previous verse, that 
 Paul meant to do only right ; that he 
 wished all others to do right ; and that 
 whatever might be the effect on his 
 own reputation, or however he might 
 be regarded, he could not go against 
 the great system of gospel truth which 
 he preached, or even desire that others 
 should ever do wrong, though it might 
 in any way be for his advantage. It 
 was a fixed principle with him to act 
 only in accordance with truth ; to do 
 what was right. 
 
 9. For we are glad token we are 
 weak, &c. We rejoice in your wel- 
 fare, and are willing to submit to self- 
 denial and to infirmity if it may promote 
 your spiritual strength. In the con- 
 nexion in which this stands it seems to 
 mean, ' I am content to appear weak, 
 provided you do no wrong ; I am will- 
 ing not to have occasion to exercise 
 my power in punishing offenders, and 
 had rather lie under the reproach of 
 being actually weak, than to have occa- 
 sion to exercise my power by punishing 
 you for wrong-doing ; and provided you 
 are strong in the faith and in the hope 
 of the gospel, I am very willing, nay, I 
 rejoice that I am under this necessity of 
 appearing weak.' Tf And this also we 
 ivish. I desire this in addition to your 
 doing no evil. ^ Even your perfection. 
 The word here used (k^to^t/ov?) occurs 
 nowhere else in the New Testament, 
 though the verb from which it is derived 
 (**t*{t*£«) occurs often. Matt. iv. 21 ; 
 xxi. J 6. Mark i. 19. Luke vi. 40. 
 
 10 Therefore I write these 
 things being absent, lest being 
 present I should use sharpness, 
 h according c to the power which 
 the Lord hath given me to edifi- 
 cation, and not to destruction. 
 
 b Tit. 1. 13. c c. 10. 8. 
 
 Rom. ix. 22. 1 Cor. i. 10. 2 Cor. xiii. 
 11. Gal. vi. 1. 1 Thess. iii. 10, et al. 
 See Note on ver. 11. On the meaning 
 of the word see Rom. ix. 22. The idea 
 of restoring, putting in order, fitting, 
 repairing, is involved in the word always, 
 and hence the idea of making perfect ; 
 i. e. of completely restoring any thing 
 to its proper place. Here it evidently 
 means that Paul wished their entire 
 reformation — so that there should be no 
 occasion for exercising discipline. Dod- 
 dridge renders it, "perfect good order." 
 Macknight, " restoration." For this re- 
 storation of good order Paul had dili- 
 gently laboured in these epistles ; and 
 this was an object near to his heart. 
 
 10. Therefore I write these things, 
 &c. This is a kind of apology for what 
 he had said, and especially for the ap- 
 parently harsh language which he had 
 felt himself constrained to use. He had 
 reproved them; he had admonished 
 them of their faults ; he had threatened 
 punishment, all of which was designed 
 to prevent the necessity of severe mea- 
 sures when he should be with them. 
 1 Lest being present I should use 
 sharpness. In order that when I come 
 I may not have occasion to employ se- 
 verity. See the sentiment explained in 
 the Note on ch. x. 2. t According to 
 the power, &c. That I may not use 
 the power with which Christ has invest- 
 ed me for maintaining discipline in his 
 church. The same form of expression 
 is found in ch. x. 8. See Note on that 
 place. 
 
 11. Finally, brethren (acwgv). The 
 remainder ; all that remains is for me 
 to bid you an affectionate faiewell. The 
 word here rendered "farewell" 0t«^g«"»)> 
 means usually to joy and rejoice, or to 
 be glad, Luke i. 14. John xvi. 20. 22 ; 
 
274 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 11 Finally, brethren, farewell. 
 Be perfect, a be of good comfort, 
 be i of one mind, live in peace ; 
 
 b Ro. 12. 16; 15. 5. 
 
 a ver. y 
 Ep. 4. 3. 
 
 Ph.2.-2. lPe.3.8. 
 
 and it is often used in the sense of 'joy 
 to you,' 'hail!' as a salutation. Matt, 
 xxvi. 49; xxvii. 29. It is also used as 
 a salutation at the beginning of an 
 epistle, in the sense of greeting. Acts 
 xv. 23; xxiii. 26. James i. 1. It is 
 generally agreed, however, that it is 
 here to be understood in the sense of 
 farewell, as a parting salutation, though 
 it may be admitted that there is included 
 in the word an expression of a wish for 
 their happiness. This was among the 
 last words which Cyrus, when dying, 
 addressed to his friends. \ Be perfect. 
 See this word explained in the Notes 
 on ver. 9, and Rom. ix. 22. It was a 
 wish that every disorder might be re- 
 moved ; that all that was out of joint 
 might be restored ; that every thing 
 might be in its proper place ; and that 
 they might be just what they ought to 
 be. A command to be perfect, however, 
 does not prove that it has ever in fact 
 been obeyed ; and an earnest wish on 
 the part of an apostle that others might 
 be perfect, does not demonstrate that 
 they were ; and this passage should not 
 be adduced to prove that any have been 
 free from sin. It maybe adduced, how- 
 ever, to prove that an obligation rests 
 on Christians to be perfect, and that 
 there is no natural obstacle to their 
 becoming such, since God never can 
 command us to do an impossibility. 
 "Whether any one, but the Lord Jesus, 
 has been perfect, however, is a question 
 on which different denominations of 
 Christians have been greatly divided. 
 It is incumbent on the advocates of the 
 doctrine of sinless perfection to produce 
 some one instance of a perfectly sinless 
 character. This has not yet been done. 
 1 Be of good comfort. Be consoled by 
 the promises and supports of the gospel. 
 Take comfort from the hopes which the 
 gospel imparts. Or the word may pos- 
 sibly have a reciprocal sense, and mean, 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 and peace 
 
 and the God of love 
 shall be with you. 
 
 12 Greet c one another with 
 an holy kiss. 
 
 c Ro. 16. 16. 
 
 comfort one another. See Schlcusner 
 Rosenmuller renders it, " receive admo- 
 nition from all with a grateful mind, 
 that you may come to greater perfec- 
 tion." It is, at any rate, the expression 
 of an earnest wish on the part of the 
 apostle, that they might be happy. H Be 
 of one mind. They had been greatly 
 distracted, and divided into different 
 parties and factions. At the close of 
 the epistle he exhorts them, as he had 
 repeatedly done before, to lay aside those 
 strifes, and to be united, and manifest 
 the same spirit. See Note on Rom. 
 xii. 16 ; xv. 5. See Note also on 1 Cor. 
 i. 10. The sense is, that Paul desired 
 that dissensions should cease, and that 
 they should be united in opinion and 
 feeling as Christian brethren. \ hive 
 in peace. With each other. Let con- 
 tentions and strifes cease. To promote 
 the restoration of peace had been the 
 main design of these epistles. \ And 
 the God of love and peace. The God 
 who is all love, and who is the author 
 of all peace. What a glorious appella- 
 tion is this ! There can be no more 
 beautiful expression, and it is as true as 
 it is beautiful, that God is a God of love 
 and of peace. He is infinitely benevo- 
 lent; he delights in exhibiting his love; 
 and he delights in the love which his 
 people evince for each other. At the 
 same time he is the author of peace, 
 and he delights in peace among men. 
 When. Christians love each other they 
 have reason to expect that the God of 
 love will be with them ; when they 
 live in peace, they may expect the God 
 of peace will take up his abode with 
 them. In contention and strife we have 
 no reason to expect his presence ; and 
 it is only when we are willing to lay 
 aside all animosity that we may expect 
 the God of peace will Jix his abodo 
 with us. 
 
 12. Greet. Salute. See Note, Rom. 
 
A.. D. 60.] 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 275 
 
 13 All the saints salute you. 
 
 14 The "grace of the Lord 
 Jesus Christ, and the love of 
 God, and the b communion of the 
 
 a Ro. 16. 24. 
 
 b Ph. 2. 
 
 xvi. 3. f With an holy kiss. Note, 
 Rom. xvi. 16. 
 
 13. All the saints salute you. That 
 is, all who were with Paul, or in the 
 place where he was. The epistle was 
 written from Macedonia, probably from 
 Philippi. See Intro. § 3. 
 
 14. The grace of our Lord Jesus 
 Christ. See Note, Rom xvi. 20. This 
 verse contains what is usually called 
 the apostolic benediction.; the form 
 which has been so long, and which is 
 almost so universally used, in dismissing 
 religious assemblies. It is properly a 
 prayer, and it is evident that the Opta- 
 tive ef«, ' May the grace,' &c, is to be 
 supplied. It is the expression of a de- 
 sire that the favours here referred to may 
 descend on all for whom they are thus 
 invoked. ^ And the love of God. 
 May the love of God towards you be 
 manifest. This must refer peculiarly 
 to the Father, as the Son and the Holy 
 Spirit are mentioned in the other mem- 
 bers of the sentence. The ' love of God' 
 here referred to is the manifestation of 
 his goodness and favour in the pardon 
 of sin, in the communication of his 
 grace, in the comforts and consolations 
 which he imparts to his people, in all 
 that constitutes an expression of love. 
 The love of God brings salvation ; im- 
 parts comfort ; pardons sin ; sanctifies 
 the soul ; fills the heart with joy and 
 peace ; and Paul here prays that all the 
 blessings which are the fruit of that love 
 may be with them. ^ And the com- 
 munion of the Holy Ghost. Comp. 
 Note, 1 Cor. x. 16. The word com- 
 munion (.tofyain'*) means properly par- 
 ticipation, fellowship, or having any 
 thing in common. Acts ii. 4-2. Rom. 
 xv 26. 1 Cor. i. 9; x. 16. 2 Cor. 
 vi. 14 ; viii.4 ; ix. 13. Gal. ii. 9. Eph. 
 iii. 9. 1 John i. 3. This is also a 
 wish or prayer of the apostle Paul ; and 
 
 Holy Ghost, be with you all. 
 
 Amen. 
 
 The second epistle to the Co- 
 rinthians was written from 
 Philippi, a city of Mace- 
 donia, by Titus and Lucas. 
 
 the desire is either that they might par- 
 take of the views and feelings of the 
 Holy Ghost ; that is, that they might 
 have fellowship with him ; or that they 
 might all in common partake of the 
 gifts and graces which the Spirit of 
 God imparts. He gives love, joy, 
 peace, long-suffering, gentleness, good- 
 ness, faith (Gal. v. 22), as well as mi- 
 raculous endowments ; and Paul prays 
 that these things might be imparted 
 freely to all the church in common, that 
 all might participate in them, all might 
 share them. 1 Amen. This word is 
 wanting, says Clarke, in almost every 
 MS. of any authority. It was however 
 early affixed to the epistle. 
 
 In regard to this closing verse of the 
 epistle, we may make the following 
 remarks. (I.) It is a prayer ,• and if 
 it is a prayer addressed to God, it is no 
 less so to the Lord Jesus and to the 
 Holy Spirit. If so, it is right to offer 
 worship to the Lord Jesus and to the 
 Holy Spirit. (2.) There is a distinction 
 in the divine nature ; or there is the 
 existence of what is usually termed three 
 persons in the Godhead. If not, why 
 are they mentioned in this manner 1 
 If the Lord Jesus is not divine and 
 equal with the Father, why is he men- 
 tioned in this connexion 1 How strange 
 it would be for Paul, an inspired man, 
 to pray in the same breath, ' the grace 
 of a man or an angel' and " the love of 
 God" be with you ! And if the ' Holy 
 Spirit' be merely an influence of God, 
 or an attribute of God, how strange to 
 pray that the ' love of God' and the par- 
 ticipation or fellowship of an ' influence 
 of God,' or an ' attribute of God' might 
 be with them ! (3.) The Holy Spirit 
 is a person, or has a distinct personality. 
 He is not an attribute of God, nor a 
 mere divine influence. How could 
 prayer be addressed to an attribute, or 
 
276 
 
 II. CORINTHIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 60. 
 
 an influence ? But here, nothing can 
 be plainer than that there were favours 
 which the Holy Ghost, as an intelligent 
 and conscious agent, was expected to 
 bestow. And nothing can be plainer 
 than that they were favours in some 
 sense distinct from those which were 
 conferred by the Lord Jesus, and by the 
 Father. Here is a distinction of some 
 kind as real as that between the Lord 
 Jesus and the Father ; here are favours 
 expected from him distinct from those 
 conferred by the Father and the Son ; 
 and there is, therefore, here all the proof 
 that there can be, that there is in some 
 respects a distinction between the per- 
 sons here referred to, and that the Holy 
 Spirit is an intelligent, conscious agent. 
 (4.) The Lord Jesus is not inferior to 
 the Father, that is, he has an equality 
 with God. If he were not equal, how 
 could he be mentioned, as he here is, as 
 bestowing favours like God, and espe- 
 cially why is he mentioned first ? 
 Would Paul, in invoking blessings, 
 mention the name of a mere man or an 
 angel before that of the eternal God 1 
 (5.) The passage, therefore, furnishes 
 a proof of the doctrine of the Trinity 
 that has not yet been answered, and, it 
 is believed, cannot be. On the suppo- 
 sition that there are three persons in the 
 adorable Trinity, united in essence and 
 yet distinct in some respects, all is plain 
 and clear. But on the supposition 
 that the Lord Jesus is a mere man, an 
 angel, or an archangel, and that the 
 Holy Spirit is an attribute, or an influ- 
 ence from God, how unintelligible, con- 
 fused, strange does all become ! That 
 Paul, in the solemn close of the epistle, 
 should at the same time invoke blessings 
 from a mere creature, and from God, 
 and from an attribute, surpasses belief. 
 But that he should invoke blessings 
 from him who was the equal with the 
 Father, and from the Father himself, 
 and from the Sacred Spirit sustaining 
 the same rank, and in like manner im- 
 parting important blessings, is in accord- 
 ance with all that we should expect, 
 and makes all harmonious and appro- 
 
 priate. (6.) Nothing could be a more 
 proper close of the epistle ; nothing is a 
 more appropriate close of public wor- 
 ship, than such an invocation. It is a 
 prayer to the ever-blessed God, that all 
 the rich influences which he gives as 
 Father, Son, and Holy Ghost, may be 
 imparted ; that all the benefits which 
 God confers in the interesting relations 
 in which he makes himself known to 
 us may descend and bless us. What 
 more appropriate prayer can be offered 
 at the close of public worship ] How 
 seriously should it be pronounced, as a 
 congregration is about to separate, per- 
 haps to come together no more ! With 
 what solemnity should all join in it, and 
 how devoutly should all pray, as they 
 thus separate, that these rich and in- 
 estimable blessings may rest upon them ! 
 With hearts uplifted to God it should 
 be pronounced and heard ; and every 
 worshipper should leave the sanctuary 
 deeply feeling that what he most needs 
 as he leaves the place of public worship ; 
 as he travels on the journey of life ; as 
 he engages in its duties or meets its 
 trials ; as he looks at the grave and 
 eternity, is the grace of the Lord Jesus 
 Christ, the love of God, and the bless- 
 ings which the Holy Spirit imparts in 
 renewing, and sanctifying, and comfort- 
 ing his people. What more appropriate 
 prayer than this for the writer and 
 reader of these Notes ! May that bless- 
 ing rest alike upon us, though we may 
 be strangers in the flesh, and may those 
 heavenly influences guide us alike 
 to the same everlasting kingdom of 
 glory ! 
 
 In regard to the subscription at the 
 end of this epistle, it may be observed, 
 that it is wanting in a great part of the 
 most ancient MSS., and is of no author- 
 ity whatever. See Notes at the end 
 of the epistle to the Romans, and 1 Co- 
 rinthians. In this case, however, this 
 subscription is in the main correct, as 
 there is evidence that it was written 
 from Macedonia, and not improbably 
 from Philippi. See the Introduction to 
 the epistle. 
 
INTRODUCTION 
 
 TO THE 
 
 EPISTLE TO THE GALATIANS 
 
 § 1 . The Situation of Galatia, and the Character of the People. 
 
 Galatia was a province of Asia Minor, having Pontus on the east, Bithyma 
 and Paphlagonia north, Cappadocia and Phrygia south, and Phrygia west. 
 See the map prefixed to the Acts of the Apostles. In Tanner's Classical Atlas, 
 however, it extends on the north to the Euxine or Black sea. It was probably 
 about two hundred miles in its greatest extent from cast to west, and varied in 
 breadth from twelve to an hundred and fifty miles. It was one of the largest 
 provinces of Asia Minor, and covered an extent of country almost as large as the 
 State of New Jersey. It is probable, however, that the boundaries of Galatia 
 varied at different times as circumstances dictated. It had no natural boundary, 
 except on the north ; and of course the limits may have been varied by conquests, 
 or by the will of the Roman Emperor, when it was erected into a province. 
 
 The name Galatia is derived from the word Gaul, and was given to it be- 
 cause it had been conquered by the Gauls, who, having subdued the country 
 settled in it. — Pausanias, Attic, cap. iv. These were mixed with various Gre- 
 cian families, and the country was also called Gallograecia. — Justin., lib. xxiv. 
 4; xxv. 2 ; xxvii. 3. This invasion of Asia Minor was made, according to Jus- 
 tin (lib. xxv. cap. 2), about the four hundred and seventy-ninth year after the 
 founding of Rome, and, of course, about 272 years before Christ. They invaded 
 Macedonia and Greece ; and subsequently invaded Asia Minor, and became an 
 object of terror to all that region. This expedition issued from Gaul, passed over 
 the Rhine, along the Danube, through Noricum, Pannonia, and Moesia, and at 
 its entrance into Germany, carried along with it many of the Tectosages. On 
 their arrival in Thrace, Lutarius took them with him, crossed the Bosphorus, and 
 effected the conquest of Asia Minor. — Liv. lib. xxxviii. c. 16. Such was their 
 number, that Justin says, " they filled all Asia (i. e. all Asia Minor) like swarma 
 of bees. Finally, they became so numerous that no kings of the east could en- 
 gage in war without an army of Gauls ; neither when driven from their king- 
 dom could they flee to any other than to the Gauls. Such was the terror of the 
 name of Gauls, and such the invincible felicity of their arms — et armorum in* 
 victa felicitas erat — that they supposed that in no other way could their own 
 majesty be protected, or being lost, could be recovered, without the aid of Gallic 
 courage. Their being called in by the king of Bithynia for aid, when they had 
 gained the victory, they divided the kingdom with him, and called that region 
 Gallogrxcia" — Justin, xxv. 2. Under the reign of Augustus Cesar, about 26 
 years before the birth of Christ, this region was reduced into the form of a 
 Roman colony, and was governed by a. propraetor, appointed by the emperor. 
 
 Their original Gaulish language they retained so late as the fifth century, asr 
 
 24 eclxxvii 
 
CclxXViii INTRODUCTION. 
 
 appears from the testimony of Jerome, who says that their dialect was nearly the 
 same as that of the Treviri. — Tom. iv. p. 256. ed. Benedict. At the same 
 time, they also spoke the Greek language in common with all the inhabitants of 
 Lesser Asia, and therefore the epistle to them was written in Greek, and was 
 intelligible to them as well as to others. 
 
 The Galatians, like the inhabitants of the surrounding country, were hea- 
 thens, and their religion was of a gross and debasing kind. They are said to 
 have worshipped " the mother of the gods," under the name of Agdistis. Cal- 
 limachus, in his hymns, calls them " a foolish people." And Hillary, himself a 
 Gaul, calls them Gallos indociles — expressions which, says Calmet, may well 
 excuse Paul's addressing them as "foolish." ch. iii. 1. There were few cities to 
 be found among them, with the exception of Ancyra, Tavium, and Pessinus, 
 which carried on some trade. 
 
 The possessors of Galatia were of three different nations or tribes of Gauls ; 
 the Tolistobogi, the Trocmi, and the Tectosagi. There are imperial medals ex- 
 tant, on which these names are found. It is of some importance to bear in mind 
 these distinctions. It is possible that while Peter was making converts in one 
 part of Galatia, the apostle Paul was in another ; and that some, claiming au- 
 thority as from Peter, propagated opinions not conformable to the views of Paul, 
 to correct and expose which was one design of this epistle. — Calmet. 
 
 The Gauls are mentioned by ancient historians as a tall and valiant people. 
 They went nearly naked. Their arms were only a sword and buckler. The 
 impetuosity of their attack, it is said, was irresistible, and hence they became so 
 formidable, and were usually so victorious. 
 
 It is not possible to ascertain the number of the inhabitants of Galatia, at the 
 time when the gospel was preached there, or when this epistle was written. In 
 2 iMacc. viii. 20, it is said that Judas Maccabeus, exhorting his followers to fight 
 manfully against the Syrians, referred to several instances of divine interposition 
 to encourage them ; and among others, " he told them of the battle which they 
 had in Babylon with the Galatians,- how they came but eight thousand in all to 
 the business, with four thousand Macedonians ; and that the Macedonians being 
 perplexed, the eight thousand destroyed an hundred and twenty thousand, be- 
 cause of the help which they had from Heaven, and so received a great booty." 
 But it is not certain that this refers to those who dwelt in Galatia. It may refer 
 to Gauls who at that time had overrun Asia Minor; the Greek word here used, 
 (YdLXoLTdt.;) being taken equally for either. It is evident, however, that there was a 
 large population that went under this general name; and it is probable that Ga- 
 latia was thickly settled at the time when the gospel was preached there. It was 
 in a central part of Asia Minor, then one of the most densely populated parts of 
 the world, and was a region singularly fertile. — Strabo, lib. xii. p. 567, 568, ed. 
 Casaub. Many persons, also, were attracted there for the sake of commerce. 
 That there were many Jews also, in all the provinces of Asia Minor, is apparent 
 not only from the Acts of the Apostles, but is expressly declared by Josephus, 
 Ant. xvi. 6. 
 
 § 2. The time when the Gospel was preached in Galatia. 
 
 There is no certain information as to the time when the gospel was first 
 preached in Galatia, or the persons by whom it was done. There is mention, 
 however, of Paul's having preached there several times, and several circum- 
 stances lead us to suppose that those churches were established by him, or that 
 he was the first to carry the gospel to them, or that he and Barnabas together 
 preached the gospel there oa the mission on which they were sent from Antioch. 
 Acts xiii. 2, seq. In Acts xvi. 5, 6, it is expressly said that they went " through- 
 
INTRODUCTION. CclxXlX 
 
 out Phrygia and the region of Galatia." This journey was for the purpose of 
 confirming the churches, and was undertaken at the suggestion of Paul (Acts 
 xv. 36), with the design of visiting their brethren in every city where they had 
 preached the word of the Lord. It is true, that in the account of the mission of 
 Paul and Barnabas (Acts xiv), it is not expressly said that they went into Gala- 
 tia; but it is said (Acts xiv. 5, 6), that when they were in Iconium, an assault 
 was made on them, or a purpose formed to stone them, and that, being apprized 
 of it, they fled unto Lystra and Derbe, cities of Lycaonia, " and unto the region 
 that lieth round about." Pliny, lib. v. c. 27, says, that a part of Lycaonia bor- 
 dered on Galatia, and contained fourteen cities, of which Iconium was the most 
 celebrated. Phrygia also was contiguous to Galatia, and to Lycaonia, and these 
 circumstances render it probable that when Paul proposed to Barnabas to visit 
 again the churches where they had preached, Galatia was included, and that they 
 had been there before this visit referred to in Acts xvi. 6. 
 
 It may be, also, that Paul refers to himself in the epistle (ch. i. 6), where he 
 says, " I marvel that ye are so soon removed from him that called you into 
 the grace of Christ unto another gospel ;" and if so, then it is plain that he 
 preached to them first, and founded the churches there. The same thing may 
 be evinced also from the expression in ch. iv. 15, where he says, " I bear you 
 record, that if it had been possible, ye would have plucked out your own eyes, 
 and have given them to me ;" an expression which leads us to suppose that they 
 had formed for him a peculiar attachment, because he had first preached the gos- 
 pel to them, and that there had existed all the ardour of attachment implied in 
 their first love. It is quite evident, therefore, I think, that the gospel was preached 
 among the Galatians first by Paul, either alone or in company with some other 
 one of the apostles. It is possible, however, as has been intimated above, that 
 Peter also may have preached in one part of Galatia at the time that Paul was 
 preaching in other parts. It is a circumstance also of some importance on this 
 point, that Paul speaks in this epistle in a tone of authority, and with a severity 
 of reproof which he would hardly have used unless he had at first preached 
 there, and had a right to be regarded as the founder of the church, and to ad- 
 dress it as its father. In this respect the tone here is quite different, as Mr. Locke 
 has remarked, from what is observable in the epistle to the Romans. Paul had 
 not been at Rome when he addressed the church there by letter, and his language 
 differs materially from that which occurs in the epistles to the Corinthians and 
 Galatians. It was to them the very respectful and mild language of a stranger ; 
 here it is respectful, but it is the authoritative language of a father having a right 
 to reprove. 
 
 § 3. Tlie date of this Epistle. 
 
 Many have supposed that this was the first epistle which Paul wrote. Ter- 
 tullian maintained this (See Lardner, vol. vi. p. 7. ed. Lond. 1829), and Epi- 
 phanius also. Theodoret and others suppose it was written at Rome, and waa 
 consequently written near the close of the life of Paul, and was one of his last 
 epistles. Lightfoot supposes also that it was written from Rome, and that it wag 
 among the first which Paul wrote there. Chrysostom says that this epistle was 
 written before that to the Romans. Lewis Capellus, Witsius, and Wall sup- 
 pose that it was written from Ephesus after the apostle had been a second time 
 in Galatia. This also was the opinion of Pearson, who places it in the year 57, 
 after the first epistle to the Corinthians, and before Paul left Ephesus. Grotius 
 thought it difficult to assign the date of the epistle, but conjectures that it was 
 written about the same time as that to the Romans. Mill supposes that it was 
 
CclXXX INTRODUCTION. 
 
 not written until after that to the Romans, probably at Troas, or some other place 
 in Asia, as Paul was going to Jerusalem. He dates the epistle in the year 58. 
 Dr. Benson supposes that it was written at Corinth, when the apostle was first 
 there, and made a long stay of a year and six ir.onths. While there, he sup- 
 poses that Paul received tidings of the instability of the converts in Galatia, 
 and wrote this epistle and sent it by one of his assistants. See these opinions 
 examined in Lardner as quoted above. Lardner himself supposes that it was 
 written from Corinth about the year 52, or the beginning of the year 53. Mac- 
 knight supposes it was written from Antioch, after the council at Jerusalem, and 
 before Paul and Silas undertook the journey in which they delivered to the 
 churches the decrees which were ordained at Jerusalem. Acts xvi. 4. Hug, in 
 his Introduction, supposes that it was written at Ephesus in the year 57, and 
 after the I. and II. Thess., and the epistle to Titus had been written. Mr. Locke 
 supposes that Paul established churches in Galatia, in the year 51 ; and that this 
 epistle was written between that time and the year 57. These opinions are 
 mostly mere conjecture ; and amidst such a variety of sentiment, it is evidently 
 impossible to determine exactly at what time it was written. The only mark of 
 time in the epistle itself occurs in ch. i. 6, where the apostle says, u I marvel 
 that ye are so soon (wtu> Tat^ac ) removed from him that called you," &c. ; 
 where the words " so soon" would lead us to suppose that it was at no distant 
 period after he had been among them. Still it might have been several years. 
 The date assigned to it in the Polyglott Bible (Bagster's) is the year 58. 
 
 The exact date of the epistle is of very little importance. In regard to the 
 time when it was written the only arguments which seem to me to be of much 
 weight, are those advanced by Paley in his Horae Paulinas. " It will hardly be 
 doubted," says he, " but that it was written whilst the dispute concerning the cir- 
 cumcision of Gentile converts was fresh in men's minds; for even supposing it 
 to have been a forgery, the only credible motive that can be assigned for the 
 forgery, was to bring the name and authority of the apostle into this controversy. 
 No design can be so insipid, or so unlikely to enter into the thoughts of any 
 man, as to produce an epistle written earnestly and pointedly on one side of a 
 controversy, when the controversy itself was dead, and the question no longer 
 interesting to any class of readers whatever. Now the controversy concerning 
 the circumcision of the Gentiles was of such a nature, that, if it arose at all, it 
 must have arisen in the beginning of Christianity." Paley then goes on to show 
 that it was natural that the Jews, and converts from the Jews, should start this 
 question, and agitate it ; and that this was much more likely to be insisted on 
 while the temple was standing, and they continued as a nation, and sacrifices 
 were offered, than after their city and temple were destroyed. It is therefore 
 clear that the controversy must have been started, and the epistle written before 
 the invasion of Judea, by Titus, and the destruction of Jerusalem. The interna. 
 evidence leads to this conclusion. On the whole, it is probable that the epistle 
 was written somewhere about the year 53, or between that and 57 ; and was 
 evidently designed to settle an important controversy in the churches of Galatia. 
 The place where it was written, must be, I think, wholly a matter of conjecture. 
 The subscription at the end that it was written from Rome is of no authority 
 whatever; and there are no internal circumstances, which, so far as I can sec, 
 throw any light on the subject. 
 
 § 4. Tfie design of the Epistle. 
 
 It is easy to discern from the epistle itself that the following circumstances px 
 isted in the churches of Galatia, and that it was written with reference to theiu 
 
INTRODUCTION. CClxXXl 
 
 (1.) That they had been at first devotedly attached to the apostle Paul, and 
 had received his commands and instructions with implicit confidence when ha 
 was among them. ch. iv. 14, 15. Comp. ch. i. 5. 
 
 (2.) That they had been perverted from the doctrine which he taught them 
 soon after he had left them. ch. i. 6. 
 
 (3.) That this had been done by persons who were of Jewish origin, and who 
 insisted on the observance of the rites of the Jewish religion. 
 
 (4.) That they claimed to have come directly from Jerusalem, and to have 
 derived their views of religion and their authority from the apostles there. 
 
 (5.) That they taught that the apostle Paul was inferior to the apostles there , 
 that he had been called more recently into the apostolic office ; that the apostles 
 at Jerusalem must be regarded as the source of authority in the Christian church ; 
 and that, therefore, the teaching of Paul should yield to that which was derived 
 directly from Jerusalem. 
 
 (6.) That the laws of Moses were binding, and were necessary in order to 
 justification. That the rite of circumcision especially was of binding obliga- 
 tion ; and it is probable (ch. vi. 1 2) that they had prevailed on many of the Ga- 
 latians to be circumcised, and certain that they had induced them to observe the 
 Jewish festivals, ch. iv. 10. 
 
 (7.) It would seem, also, that they urged that Paul himself had changed his 
 views since he had been among the Galatians, and now maintained the neces- 
 sity of circumcision, ch. v. 11. Perhaps they alleged this, from the undoubted 
 fact, that Paul, when at Jerusalem (Acts xxi. 26), had complied with some of 
 the customs of the Jewish ritual. 
 
 (8.) That they urged that all the promises of God were made to Abraham, 
 and that whoever would partake of those promises, must be circumcised as Abra- 
 ham was. This Paul answers, ch. iii. 7 — iv. 7. 
 
 (9.) That in consequence of the promulgation of these views, great dissen- 
 sions had arisen in the church, and strifes of an unhappy nature existed, greatly 
 contrary to the spirit which should be manifested by those who bore the Christian 
 name. 
 
 From this description of the state of things in the churches of Galatia, the de- 
 sign of the epistle is apparent, and the scope of the argument will be easily seen. 
 Of this state of things the apostle had been undoubtedly apprized, but whether 
 by letters, or by messengers from the churches there, is not declared. It is not 
 improbable, that some of his friends in the churches there had informed him of 
 it, and he immediately set about a remedy to the evils existing there. 
 
 I. The first object, therefore, was to show that he had received his commission 
 as an apostle, directly from God. He had not received it at all from man ; he 
 had not even been instructed by the other apostles ; he had not acknowledged 
 their superiority ; he had not even consulted them. He did not acknowledge, 
 therefore, that the apostles at Jerusalem possessed any superior rank or authority. 
 His commission, though he had not seen the Lord Jesus before he was crucified, 
 he had, nevertheless, derived immediately from him. The doctrine, therefore, 
 which he had taught them, that the Mosaic laws were not binding, and that there 
 was no necessity of being circumcised, was a doctrine which had been derived 
 directly from God. In proof of this, he goes into an extended statement (ch. i.) 
 of the manner in which he had been called, and of the fact, that he had not con- 
 sulted with the apostles at Jerusalem, or confessed his inferiority to them ; of the 
 fact that when they had become acquainted with the manner in which he preached, 
 they approved his course (ch. i. 24 ; ii. 1 — 10) ; and of the fact that on one occa- 
 sion, he had actually been constrained to differ from Peter, the oldest of the 
 apostles, on a point in which he was manifestly wrong, and on one of the very 
 points then under consideration. 
 
 24* 
 
Cclxxxii INTRODUCTION. 
 
 II. The second great object, therefore, was to show the real nature and design 
 of the law of Moses, and to prove that the peculiar rites of the Mosaic ritual, and 
 especially the rite of circumcision, were not necessary to justification and salva- 
 tion ; and that they who observed that rite, did in fact renounce the Scripture 
 method of justification ; make the sacrifice of Christ of no value, and make slaves 
 of themselves. This leads him into a consideration of the true nature of the 
 doctrine of justification, and of the way of salvation by a Redeemer. 
 
 This point he shows in the following way, 
 
 (1.) By showing that those who lived before Christ, and especially Abraham, 
 were in fact justified, not by obedience to the ritual law of Moses, but by faith in 
 the promises of God. ch. iii. 1 — 18. 
 
 (2.) By showing that the design of the Mosaic ritual was only temporary, 
 and that it was intended to lead to Christ, ch. iii. 19 — 29; iv. 1 — 8. 
 
 (3. In view of this, he reproves the Galatians for having so readily fallen into 
 the observance of those customs, ch. iv. 9 — 21. 
 
 (4.) This view of the design of the Mosaic law, and of its tendency, he illus- 
 trates by an allegory drawn from the case of Hagar. ch. iv. 21 — 31. 
 
 This whole discourse is succeeded by an affectionate exhortation to the Gala- 
 tians, to avoid the evils which had been engendered ; reproving them for the 
 strifes existing in consequence of the attempt to introduce the Mosaic rites, and 
 earnestly entreating them to stand firm in the liberty which Christ had vouch- 
 safed to them from the servitude of the Mosaic institutions, ch. v. vi. 
 
 The design of the whole epistle, therefore, is to state and defend the true doc- 
 trine of justification, and to show that it did not depend on the observance of 
 the laws of Moses. In this general purpose, therefore, it accords with the design 
 of the epistle to the Romans. In one respect, however, it differs from the de- 
 sign of that epistle. That was written, to show that man could not be justified 
 by any works of the law, or by conformity to any law, moral or ceremonial ; 
 the object of this is, to show that justification cannot be obtained by conformity 
 to the ritual or ceremonial law ; or that the observance of the ceremonial law 
 is not necessary to salvation. In this respect, therefore, this epistle is of less 
 general interest than that to the Romans. It is also, in some respects, more dif- 
 ficult. The argument, if I may so express myself, is more Jewish. It is more 
 in the Jewish manner ; is designed to meet a Jew in his own way, and is, there- 
 fore, somewhat more difficult for all to follow. Still it contains great and vital 
 statements on the doctrines of salvation, and, as such, demands the profound and 
 careful attention of all who desire to be saved, and who would know the wcy of 
 acceptance with God. 
 
EPISTLE TO THE GALATIANS. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 OAUL, an apostle, (not of men, 
 **- neither by man, but by Jesus 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 ANALYSIS. 
 
 The main design of Paul in this 
 chapter, is to show that he had received 
 his call to the apostleship, not from man, 
 but from God. It had been alleged 
 (see the Introduction above) that the 
 apostles at Jerusalem possessed the most 
 elevated rank, and the highest authority 
 in the Christian church ; that they were 
 to be regarded as the fountains and the 
 judges of the truth ; that Paul was in- 
 ferior to them as an apostle ; and that 
 they who inculcated the necessity of 
 circumcision, and the observance of the 
 rites of Moses, were sustained by the 
 authority and the examples of the apos- 
 tles at Jerusalem. 
 
 To meet this statement was the de- 
 sign of this first chapter. Paul's grand 
 object was to show that he was not ap- 
 pointed by men ; that he had not been 
 commissioned by men ; that he had not 
 derived his instructions from men; that 
 he had not even consulted with them ; 
 but that he had been commissioned and 
 taught expressly by Jesus Christ, and 
 that when the apostles at Jerusalem had 
 become acquainted with him, and with 
 his views and plans of labour, long after 
 he had begun to preach, they had fully 
 concurred with him. This argument 
 comprises the following parts: 
 
 I. The solemn declaration that he was 
 not commissioned by men, and that he 
 was not, in any sense, an apostle of 
 man, together with the general salutation 
 to the churches in Galatia. ver. 1 — 5. 
 
 II. The expression of his astonish- 
 ment that the Galatians had so soon for- 
 saken his instruction, and embraced an- 
 
 Christ, and God the Father, who 
 6 raised him from the dead ;) 
 
 a Ac. 9. 6, 15. b Ac. 2.24. 
 
 other gospel ; and a solemn declaration 
 that whoever preached another gosoel 
 was to be held accursed, ver. 6 — 10. 
 Twice he anathematizes those who at- 
 tempt to declare any other way of justi- 
 fication than that which consisted in 
 faith in Christ, and says that it was no 
 gospel at all. It was to be held as a 
 great and fixed principle, that there was 
 but one way of salvation ; and no mat- 
 ter who attempted to preach any other, 
 he was to be held accursed. 
 
 III. To show, therefore, that he was 
 not appointed by men, and that he had 
 not received his instruction from men, 
 but that he, had preached the truth di-. 
 rectly revealed to him by God, and that 
 which was, therefore, immutable and 
 eternal, he goes into a statement of the 
 manner in which he was called into the 
 ministry, and made acquainted with the 
 gospel, ver. 11 — 24. 
 
 (a) He affirms, that he was not taught 
 it by man, but by the express revelation 
 of Jesus Christ, ver. 11, 12. 
 
 (b) He refers to his former well- 
 known life, and his zeal in the Jewish 
 religion ; showing how much he had 
 been formerly opposed to the gospel, 
 ver. 13, 14. 
 
 (c) He says that he had been sepa- 
 rated, by the divine purpose, from his 
 mother's womb, to be a preacher of the 
 gospel, and that when he was called to 
 the ministry, he had no conference with 
 any human being, as to what he was 
 to preach; he did not go up to Jerusa- 
 lem to consult with those who were 
 older apostles, but he retired far from 
 them into Arabia, and thence again ro 
 turned to Damascus, ver. 15 — 17. 
 
GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 (d) After three years, he says, he did 
 indeed go to Jerusalem ; but he remain- 
 ed there but fifteen days, and saw none 
 of the apostles but Peter and James, 
 ver. 18, 19. His views of the gospel 
 were formed before that; and that he 
 did not submit implicitly to Peter, and 
 learn of him, he shows in ch. ii., where 
 he says, he " withstood him to the face." 
 
 (e) After that, he says, he departed 
 into the regions of Cilicia, in Asia Mi- 
 nor, and had no opportunity of confer- 
 ence with the churches which were in 
 Judea. Yet they heard that he who 
 had been formerly a persecutor, had be- 
 come a preacher, and they glorified God 
 for it. ver. 20 — 24. Of course, he had 
 had no opportunity of deriving his views 
 of religion from them; he had been in 
 no sense dependent on them ; but so far 
 as they were acquainted with his views, 
 they concurred in them. The sum of 
 the argument, therefore, in this chapter 
 is, that when Paul went into Cilicia 
 and the adjacent regions, he had never 
 seen but two of the apostles, and that 
 but for a short time ; he had never seen 
 the apostles together ; and he had never 
 .received any instructions f/om them. 
 His views of the gospel, which he had 
 imparted to the Galatians, he had de- 
 rived directly from God. 
 
 1. Paul an apostle. See Note, Rom. 
 i. 1. This is the usual form in which he 
 commences his epistles ; and it was of 
 special importance to commence this 
 epistle in this manner, because it was 
 one design to vindicate his apostleship, 
 or to show that he had received his com- 
 mission directly from the Lord Jesus. 
 \ Not of men. ' Not from (dw') men.' 
 That is, he was not from any body of 
 men, or commissioned by men. The 
 word apostle means sent, and Paul 
 means to say, that he was not sent to 
 execute any purpose of men, or com- 
 missioned by them. His was a higher 
 calling ; a calling of God, and he had 
 been sent directly by him. Of course, 
 he means to exclude here all classes of 
 men as having had any thing to do in 
 sending him forth ; and, especially, he 
 means to affirm, that he had not been 
 sent out by the body of apostles at Jeru- 
 
 salem. This, it will be remembered 
 (See the Introduction), was one of the 
 charges of those who had perverted the 
 Galatians from the faith which Paul 
 had preached to them. Tf Neither by 
 man. ' Neither by or through (St) the 
 instrumentality of any man.' Here he 
 designs to exclude all men from having 
 had any agency in his appointment to 
 the apostolic office. He was neither 
 sent out from any body of men to exe- 
 cute their purposes ; nor did he receive 
 his commission, authority, or ordination, 
 through the medium of any man. A 
 minister of the gospel now receives his 
 call from God, but he is ordained or set 
 apart to his office by man. Matthias, 
 the apostle chosen in the place of Judas, 
 (Acts i. 27), received his call from God, 
 but it was by the vote of the body of 
 the apostles. Timothy was also called 
 of God, but he was appointed to his 
 office by the laying on the hands of the 
 presbytery. 1 Tim. iv. 14. But Paul 
 here says, that he received no such com- 
 mission as that from the apostles. They 
 were not the means or the medium of 
 ordaining him to his work. He had, 
 indeed, together with Barnabas, been 
 set apart at Antioch, by the brethren 
 there (Acts xiii. 1 — 3), for a special 
 mission in Asia Minor; but this was not 
 an appointment to the apostleship. He 
 had been restored to sight after the mi- 
 raculous blindness produced by seeing 
 the Lord Jesus on the way to Damas- 
 cus, by the laying on of the hands of 
 Ananias, and had received important 
 instruction from him (Acts ix. 17), but 
 his commission as an apostle had been 
 received directly from the Lord Jesus, 
 without any intervening medium, or any 
 form of human authority. Actsix. 15 ; 
 xxii. 17 — 21. 1 Cor. ix. 1. % But by 
 Jesus Christ. That is, directly by Christ. 
 He had been called by him, and com- 
 missioned by him, and sent by him, to 
 engage in the work of the gospel If And 
 God the Father. These words wero 
 omitted by Marcion, because, says Je- 
 rome, he held that Christ raised himself 
 from the dead. But there is no author- 
 ity for omitting them. The sense is, 
 that he had the highest possible author- 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 285 
 
 2 And all the brethren which 
 are with me, unto the churches of 
 Galatia : a 
 
 3 Grace h be to you, and peace, 
 
 o Ac. 16.6; 18.23. 6Ro. 1.7,&c. 
 
 ity for the office of an apostle ; he had 
 been called to it by God himself, who 
 . had raised up the Redeemer. It is re- 
 markable here, that Paul associates Jesus 
 Christ and God the Father, as having 
 called and commissioned him. We may 
 ask here, of one who should deny the 
 divinity of Christ, how Paul could men- 
 tion him as being equal with God in the 
 work of commissioning him] We may 
 further ask, how could he say that he 
 had not received his call to this office 
 from a man, if Jesus Christ was a mere 
 man 7 That he was called by Christ, 
 he expressly says, and strenuously main- 
 tains as a point of great importance. 
 And yet, the very point and drift of his 
 argument is, to show that he was not 
 called by man. How could this be 
 if Christ was a mere man 1 % Who 
 raised him from the dead. See Notes 
 on Acts ii. 24. 32. It is not quite clear, 
 why Paul introduces this circumstance 
 here. It may have been, (1.) Because 
 his mind was full of it, and he wished 
 on all occasions to make that fact promi- 
 nent ; (2.) Because this was the dis- 
 tinguishing feature of the Christian re- 
 ligion, that the Lord Jesus had been 
 raised up from the dead, and he wished, 
 in the outset, to present the superiority 
 of that religion which had brought life 
 and immortality to light; and, (3.) Be- 
 cause he wished to show that he had 
 received his commission from that same 
 God, who had raised up Jesus, and who 
 was, therefore, the author of the true 
 religion. His commission was from the 
 source of life and light ; the God of the 
 living and the dead ; the God who was 
 the author of the glorious scheme which 
 revealed life and immortality. 
 
 2. And all the brethren which are 
 with me. It was usual for Paul to as- 
 sociate with him the ministers of the 
 gospel, or other Christians who were 
 with him, in expressing friendly saluta- 
 
 from God the Father, and from 
 our Lord Jesus Christ, 
 
 4 Who gave c himself for our 
 sins, that he might deliver us - 
 
 c Jno. 10. 17, 18. Tit. 2. 14. d Jno. 17. 14. 
 
 tions to the churches to which he wrote, 
 or as uniting with him, and concurring 
 in the sentiments which he expressed. 
 Though Paul claimed to be inspired, 
 yet it would do much to conciliate favour 
 for what he advanced, if others also 
 concurred with what he said, and espe- 
 cially if they were known to the churches 
 to which the epistles were written. 
 Sometimes the names of others were as- 
 sociated with his in the epistle. See 
 Note, 1 Cor. i. 1. Phil. i. 1. Col. i. 1. 
 1 Thess. i. 1. As we do not know 
 where this epistle was written, of course 
 we are ignorant who the "brethren" 
 were, who are here referred to. They 
 may have been ministers with Paul, or 
 they may have been the private members 
 of the churches. Commentators have 
 been much divided in opinion on the 
 subject ; but all is conjecture. It is ob- 
 viously impossible to determine, ^ Un- 
 to the churches. How many churches 
 there were in Galatia, is unknown. 
 There were several cities in Galatia, as 
 Ancyria, Tavia, Pessinus, &c. It is 
 not improbable that a church had been 
 established in each of the cities, and as 
 they were not far distant from each 
 other, and the people had the same gene- 
 ral character and habits, it is not impro- 
 bable that they had fallen into the same 
 errors. Hence the epistle is directed to 
 them in common. 
 
 3. Grace be unto you, &c. This is 
 the usual apostolic salutation, imploring 
 for them the blessing of God. See it 
 fully explained in the Notes on Rom. i. 7. 
 
 4. Who gave himself for our sins. 
 The reason why Paul so soon introduces 
 this important doctrine, and makes it 
 here so prominent, probably is, that this 
 was the cardinal doctrine of the Chris- 
 tian religion, the great truth which was 
 ever to be kept before the mind, and 
 because this truth had been in fact lost 
 sight of by them. They had embraced 
 
286 GALATIANS. 
 
 from this present evil a world 
 
 alJno.2. 16. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 doctrines which tended to obscure it, or 
 to make it void. They had been led 
 into error by the Judaizing teachers, who 
 held that it was necessary to be circum- 
 cised, and to conform to the whole Jewish 
 ritual. Yet the tendency of all this 
 was to obscure the doctrines of the gos- 
 pel, and particularly the great truth that 
 men can be justified only by faith in 
 the blood of Jesus, ch. v. 4. Comp. ch. 
 i. 6, 7. Paul, therefore, wished to make 
 this prominent — the very starting point 
 in their religion ; a truth never to be 
 forgotten, that Christ gave himself for 
 their sins, that he might deliver them 
 from all the bad influences of this world, 
 and from all the false systems of religion 
 engendered in this world. The expres- 
 sion "who gave" (**3 Swtz<;) is one that 
 often occurs in relation to the work of 
 the Redeemer, where it is represented as 
 a gift, either on the part of God, or on 
 the part of Christ himself. See Note 
 on John iii. 16. Comp. John iv. 10. 
 Rom. iv. 25. 2 Cor. ix. 14. Gal. ii. 20. 
 Eph. v. 25. Tit. ii. 14. This passage 
 proves, ( 1 .) That it was wholly volun- 
 tary on the part of the Lord Jesus. No 
 one compelled him to come ; no one 
 could compel him. It is not too much 
 to say, that God could not, and would 
 not compel any innocent and holy being 
 to undertake the great work of the atone- 
 ment, and endure the bitter sorrows 
 which were necessary to redeem man. 
 God will compel the guilty to suffer, but 
 he never will compel the innocent to 
 endure sorrows, even in behalf of others. 
 The whole work of redemption must be 
 voluntary, or it co\ Id not be performed. 
 (2.) It evinced great benevolence on the 
 part of the Redeemer. He did not come 
 to take upon himself unknown and un- 
 surveyed woes. He did not go to work 
 in the dark. He knew what was to be 
 done. He knew just what sorrows were 
 to be endured — how long, how keen, 
 how awful. And yet, knowing this, he 
 came resolved and prepared to endure 
 
 according * to the will of God 
 and our Father : 
 
 fcRo.8.27. 
 
 all those woes, and to drink the bitter 
 cup to the dregs. (3.) If there had not 
 been this benevolence in his bosom, man 
 must have perished forever. He could 
 not have saved himself; and he had no 
 power or right to compel another to suf- 
 fer in his behalf; and even God would 
 not lay this mighty burden on any other, 
 unless he was entirely willing to endure 
 it. How much then do we owe to the 
 Lord Jesus ; and how entirely should 
 we devote our lives to him who loved 
 us, and gave himself for us. The word 
 himself, is rendered by the Syriac, his 
 life (Nuphsh'e); and this is in fact the 
 sense of the Greek, that he gave his life 
 for our sins, or that he died in our stead. 
 He gave his life up to toil, tears, priva- 
 tion, sorrow, and death, that he might 
 redeem us. The phrase, ' for our ettu? 
 (v7rig tZv a/ut^rtZv »/uZv^, means the same 
 as on account of; meaning, that the 
 cause or reason why he gave himself to 
 death, was our sins ; that is, he died be- 
 cause we are sinners, and because we 
 could be saved only by his giving him- 
 self up to death. Many MSS. instead 
 of v?rt^, here read 7rt^i, but the sense is 
 not materially varied. The Syriac trans- 
 lates it, " who gave himself instead of" 
 by a word denoting that there was a 
 substitution of the Redeemer in our 
 place. The sense is, that the Lord 
 Jesus became a vicarious offering, and 
 died in the stead of sinners. It is not 
 possible to express this idea more dis- 
 tinctly and unambiguously than Paul 
 has done, in this passage. Sin was the 
 procuring cause of his death; to make 
 expiation for sin was the design of his 
 coming; and sin is pardoned and re- 
 moved only by his substituted suffering. 
 1 That //% might deliver us. The word 
 here used (i£tx»Tut) properly means, to 
 pluck out, to tear out ; to take out from 
 a number, to select ; then to rescue or 
 deliver. This is the sense here. He 
 came and gave himself that he might 
 rescue or deliver us from this present 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER 1. 
 
 287 
 
 5 To whom be glory for ever 
 and ever. Amen. 
 
 6 I marvel that ye are so soon 
 
 evil world. It does not mean to take away 
 by death, or to remove to another world, 
 but that he might effect a separation be- 
 tween us and what the apostle calls 
 here, "this present evil world." The 
 grand purpose was, to rescue sinners 
 from the dominion of this world, and 
 separate them unto God. f This pre- 
 sent evil world. See John xvii. 15, 16. 
 Locke supposes, that by this phrase is 
 intended the Jewish institutions, or the 
 Mosaical age, in contradistinction from 
 the age of the Messiah. Bloomfield 
 supposes, that it means " the present 
 state of being, this life, filled as it is with 
 calamity, sin, and sorrow ; or, rather, the 
 sin itself, and the misery consequent 
 upon it." Rosenmiiller understands by 
 it, " the men of this age, Jews, who re- 
 ject the Messiah ; and Pagans, who are 
 devoted to idolatry and crime." The 
 word rendered world, (*iij<) means pro- 
 perly age, an indefinitely long period of 
 time; then eternity, forever. It then 
 comes to mean the world, either pre- 
 sent or future; and then the present 
 world, as it is, with its cares, temptations, 
 and desires; the idea of evil, physical 
 and moral, being everywhere implied. — 
 Robinson, Lex. Matt. xiii. 22. Luke 
 xvi. 8 ; xx. 34. Rom. xii. 2. Here it 
 means the world as it is, without reli- 
 gion ; a world of bad passions, false 
 opinions, corrupt desires; a world full 
 of ambition, and of the love of pleasure, 
 and of gold ; a world where God is not 
 loved or obeyed; a world where men 
 are regardless of right, and truth, and 
 duty ; where they live for themselves, 
 and not for God ; in short, that great 
 community, which in the Scriptures is 
 called thk would, in contradistinction 
 from the kingdom of God. That world, 
 that evil world, is full of sin ; and the 
 object of the Redeemer was to deliver 
 us from that ; that is, to effect a separa- 
 tion between his followers and that. It 
 follows, therefore, that his followers con- 
 
 removed a from him that called 
 you into the grace of Christ unto 
 another gospel; 
 
 a c. 5.4,7,8. 
 
 stitute a peculiar community, not go- 
 verned by the prevailing maxims, or in- 
 fluenced by the peculiar feelings of the 
 people of this world. And it follows, 
 also, that if there is not in fact such a 
 separation, then the purpose of the Re- 
 deemer's death, in regard to us, has not 
 been effected, and we are still a part of 
 that great and ungodly community, the 
 world. % According to the will of God, 
 &c. Not by the will of man, or by his 
 wisdom, but in accordance with the 
 will of God. It was his purpose that 
 the Lord Jesus should thus give himself; 
 and his doing it was in accordance with 
 his will, and was pleasing in his sight. 
 The whole plan originated in the divine 
 purpose, and has been executed in ac- 
 cordance with the divine will. If in 
 accordance with his will, it is good, and 
 is worthy of universal acceptation. 
 
 5. To whom be glory, &c. Let him 
 have all the praise and honour of the plan 
 and its execution. It is not uncommon 
 for Paul to introduce an ascription of 
 praise in the midst of an argument. Sec 
 Note on Rom. i. 25. It results from the 
 strong desire which he had, that all the 
 glory should be given to God, and 
 showed that he believed that all blessings 
 had their origin in him, and that he 
 should be always acknowledged. 
 
 6. / marvel. I wonder. It is re- 
 marked by Luther (Comm. in loco), 
 that Paul here uses as mild a word as 
 possible. He does not employ the Ian 
 guage of severe reproof, but he expresses 
 his astonishment that the thing should 
 have occurred. He was deeply affected 
 and amazed, that such a thing could 
 have happened. They had cordially 
 embraced the gospel ; they had mani- 
 fested the tenderest attachment for him; 
 they had given themselves to God, and 
 yet in a very short time they had been 
 led wholly astray, and had embraced 
 opinions which tended wholly to pervert 
 and destroy the gospel. They had shown 
 
GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 an instability and inconstancy of cha- 
 racter, which was to him perfectly sur- 
 prising. «| That ye are so soon. This 
 proves that the epistle was written not 
 long after the gospel was first preached 
 to them. According to the general sup* 
 position, it could not have been more 
 than from two to five years. Had it been 
 a long and gradual decline ; had they 
 been destitute for years of the privileges 
 of the gospel ; or had they had time to 
 forget him who had first preached to 
 them, it would not have been a matter 
 of surprise. But when it occurred in a 
 few months; when their once ardent 
 love for Paul, and their confidence in 
 him had so soon vanished, or their affec- 
 tions become alienated, and when they 
 had so soon embraced opinions tending 
 to set the whole gospel aside, it could 
 not but excite his wonder. Learn hence, 
 that men, professedly pious, and appa- 
 rently ardently attached to the gospel, 
 may become soon perverted in their 
 views, and alienated from those who had 
 called them into the gospel, and whom 
 they professed tenderly to love. The 
 ardour, of the affections becomes cool, and 
 some artful, and zealous, and plausible 
 teachers of error seduce the mind, cor- 
 rupt the heart, and alienate the affec- 
 tions. Where there is the ardour of the 
 first love to God, there is also an effort 
 soon made by the adversary, to turn 
 away the heart from him ; and young 
 converts are commonly soon attacked in 
 some plausible manner, and by art and 
 arguments adapted to turn away their 
 minds from the truth, and to alienate 
 the affections from God. J So soon re- 
 moved. This also, Luther remarks, is 
 a mild and gentle term. It implies that 
 foreign influence had been used, to turn 
 away their minds from the truth. The 
 word here used (fjLiTxr&VT§-t) means, to 
 transpose, put in another place; and 
 then, to go over from one party to ano- 
 ther Their affections had become trans- 
 ferred to other doctrines than those 
 which they had at first embraced, and 
 they had moved off from the only true 
 foundation, to one which would give 
 them no support. \ From him that 
 called you. There has been great dif- 
 
 ference of opinion in regard to the sense 
 of this passage. Some have supposed, 
 that it refers to God ; others to Christ ; 
 others to Paul himself. Either suppo- 
 sition .makes good sense, and conveys 
 an idea not contrary to the Scriptures in 
 other places. Doddridge, Chandler, 
 Clarke, Macknight, Locke, and some 
 others, refer it to Paul; Rosenmuller, 
 Koppe, and others, suppose it refers to 
 God ; and others refer it to the Re- 
 deemer. The Syriac renders it thus: 
 " I marvel that ye are so soon turned 
 away from that Messiah (Christ) who 
 has called you." &c. It is not possible, 
 perhaps, to determine the true sense. It 
 does not seem to me to refer to Paul, as 
 the main object of the epistle is, not to 
 show that they had removed from him, 
 but from the gospel — a far more griev- 
 ous offence ; and it seems to me that 
 it is to be referred to God. The reasons 
 are, (1.) That he who had called them, 
 is said to have called them " into the 
 grace of Christ," which would be hardly 
 said of Christ himself; and, (2.) That 
 the work of calling men is usually in 
 the Scriptures attributed to God. 1 
 Thess. ii. 12; v. 24. 2 Thess. ii. 14. 
 2 Tim. i. 9. ] Into the grace of Christ. 
 Locke renders this, " into the covenant 
 of grace which is by Christ." Doddridge 
 understands it of the method of salva- 
 tion which is by or through the grace 
 of Christ There is no doubt that it re- 
 fers to the plan of salvation which is by 
 Christ, or in Christ ; and the main idea 
 is, that the scheme of salvation which 
 they had embraced under his instruc- 
 tion, was one which contemplated salva- 
 tion only by the grace or favour of Christ; 
 and that from that they had been re- 
 moved to another scheme, essentially 
 different, where the grace of Christ was 
 made useless and void. It is Paul's ob- 
 ject to show that the true plan makes 
 Christ the great and prominent object : 
 and that the plan which they had embracl 
 ed was in this respect wholly different. 
 ^ Unto another gospel. A gospel which 
 destroys the grace of Christ ; which 
 proclaims salvation on other terms than 
 simple dependence on the merits of the 
 Lord Jesus ; and which has introduced 
 
A. D. 58.1 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 7 Which a is not another ; but 
 there be some that trouble you, 
 
 a 2 Co. 11.4. 6 Ac. 15. 1,24. 2 Co. 2. 17; c. 
 5. 10, 12. 
 
 the Jewish rites and ceremonies as es- 
 sential, in order to obtain salvation. 
 The apostle calls that scheme the gospel, 
 because it pretended to be ; it was 
 preached by those who claimed to be 
 preachers of the gospel ; who alleged 
 that they had come direct from the apos- 
 tles at Jerusalem, and who pretended 
 to declare the method of salvation. It 
 claimed to be the gospel, and yet itTwas 
 essentially unlike the plan which he 
 had preached as constituting the gospel. 
 That which he preached, inculcated the 
 entire dependence of the sinner on the 
 merits and grace of Christ ; that system 
 had introduced dependence on the ob- 
 servance of the rites of the Mosaic sys- 
 tem, as necessary to salvation. 
 
 7. Which is not another. There is 
 also a great variety of view in regard to 
 the meaning of this expression. Tindal 
 translates it, " which is nothing else but 
 there be some that trouble you." Locke, 
 "which is not owing to any thing else 
 but only this, that ye are troubled with 
 a certain sort of men who would over- 
 turn the gospel of Christ." But Rosen- 
 muller, Koppe, Bloomfield, and others, 
 give a different view ; and according to 
 them the sense is, " which, however, is 
 not another gospel, nor indeed the gospel 
 at all, or true," &c. According to this, 
 the design was to state, that what they 
 taught had none of the elements or 
 characteristics of the gospel. It was a 
 different system, and one which taught 
 an entirely different method of justifi- 
 cation before God. It seems to me that 
 this is the true sense of the passage, 
 and that Paul means to teach them that 
 the system, though it was called the 
 gospel, was essentially different from that 
 which he had taught, and which con- 
 sisted in simple reliance on Christ for 
 salvation. The system which they 
 taught, was in fact the Mosaic system ; 
 the Jewish mode, depending on the 
 rites and ceremonies of religion ; and 
 which, therefore, did not deserve to be 
 25 
 
 and would pervert b the gospel of 
 Christ. 
 
 8 But though we, or an angel 
 
 called the gospel. It would load them 
 again with burdensome rites, and with 
 cumbrous institutions, from which it 
 was the great purpose of the gospel to 
 relieve them, f But there be some that 
 trouble you. Though this is most mani- 
 festly another system, and not the gos- 
 pel at all, yet there are some persons who 
 are capable of giving trouble and of un- 
 settling your minds, by making it plau- 
 sible. They pretend that they have 
 come direct from the apostles at Jerusa- 
 lem ; that they have received their in- 
 structions from them, and that they 
 preach the true gospel as they teach it. 
 They pretend that Paul was called into 
 the office of an apostle after them ; that 
 he had never seen the Lord Jesus ; that 
 he had derived his information only 
 from others ; and thus they are able to 
 present a plausible argument, and to 
 unsettle the minds of the Galatians. 
 f And would prevent. That is, the ten- 
 dency of their doctrine is wholly to turn 
 away ^/mncto-r^ti), to destroy, or ren- 
 der useless the gospel of Christ. It 
 would lead to the denial of the necessity 
 of dependence on the merits of the Lord 
 Jesus for salvation, and would substi- 
 tute dependence on rites and ceremonies. 
 This does not of necessity mean that 
 such was the design of their teaching, 
 for they might have been in the main 
 honest ; but that such was the tendency 
 and result of their teaching. It would 
 lead men to rely on the Mosaic rites for 
 salvation. 
 
 8. But though we. That is, we the 
 apostles. Probably, he refers particu- 
 larly to himself, as the plural is often 
 used by Paul when speaking of himself. 
 He alludes here, possibly, to a charge 
 which was brought against him by the 
 false teachers in Galatia, that he had 
 changed his views since he came among 
 them, and now preached differently from 
 what he did then. See the Introduc- 
 tion. They endeavoured probably to 
 fortify their own opinions in regard to 
 
290 
 
 GALAT1ANS. 
 
 [A. D. 5& 
 
 from heaven, preach any other 
 gospel unto you than that which 
 
 the obligations of the Mosaic law, by 
 affirming, that though Paul when h^ 
 was among them had maintained that 
 the observance of the law was not 
 necessary to salvation, yet that he had 
 changed his views, and now held the 
 same doctrine on the subject which they 
 did. What they relied on in support 
 of this opinion is unknown. It is cer- 
 tain, however, that Paul did, on some 
 occasions (see Note on Acts xxi. 2 1 — 
 26), comply with the Jewish rites, and 
 it is not improbable that they were ac- 
 quainted with that fact, and interpreted 
 it as proving that he had changed his 
 sentiments on the subject. At all events, 
 it would make their allegation plausible 
 that Paul was now in favour of the ob- 
 servance of the Jewish rites, and that if 
 he had ever taught differently, he must 
 now have changed his opinion. Paul, 
 therefore, begins the discussion by de- 
 nying this in the most solemn manner. 
 He affirms that the gospel which he had 
 at first preached to them was the true 
 gospel. It contained the great doctrines 
 of salvation. It was to be regarded by 
 them as a fixed and settled point, that 
 there was no other way of salvation but 
 by the merits of the Saviour. No matter 
 who taught any thing else; no matter 
 though it be alleged that he had changed 
 hisfmind; no matter even though he 
 should preach another gospel ; and no 
 matter though an angel from heaven 
 should declare any other mode of salva- 
 tion, it was to be held as a fixed and 
 settled position, that the true gospel had 
 been preached to them at first. We are 
 not to suppose that Paul admitted that 
 he had changed his mind, or that the 
 inferences of the false teachers there 
 were well-founded, but we are to under- 
 stand this as affirming in the most 
 solemn manner that the true gospel, and 
 the only method of salvation, had been 
 preached among them at first. 1 Or an 
 angel from heaven. This is a very 
 strong rhetorical mode of expression. It 
 is not to be supposed that an angel 
 
 we have preached unto you, let 
 him be accursed. 
 
 c 1 Co. 16. 22. 
 
 from heaven would preach any other 
 than the true gospel. But Paul wishes 
 to put the strongest possible case, and 
 to affirm in the strongest manner possi- 
 ble, that the true gospel had been 
 preached to them. The great system of 
 salvation had been taught; and no other 
 was to be admitted, no matter who 
 preached it; no matter what the cha- 
 racter or rank of the preacher ; and no 
 matter with what imposing claims he 
 came. It follows from this, that the 
 mere rank, character, talent, eloquence, 
 or piety of a preacher does not of neces- 
 sity give his doctrine a claim to our be- 
 lief, or prove that his gospel is true. 
 Great talents may be prostituted; and 
 great sanctity of manner, and even holi- 
 ness of character, may be in error ; and 
 no matter what may be the rank, and 
 j talents, and eloquence, and piety of the 
 preacher, if he does not accord with the 
 I gospel which was first preached, he is to 
 j be held accursed. *f Preach any other 
 ' gospel, &c. See Note on ver. 6. Any 
 1 gospel that differs from that which was 
 I first preached to you, any system of 
 I doctrines which goes to deny the neces- 
 ! sity of simple dependence on the Lord 
 j JesuS Christ for salvation. % Let him 
 \ be accursed. Gr. uvaS-sa* (anathema). 
 On the meaning of this word, see Notes 
 on 1 Cor. xii. 3 ; xvi. 22. It is not im- 
 properly here rendered ' accursed,' or 
 ' devoted to destruction.' The object of 
 Paul is to express the greatest possible 
 abhorrence of any other doctrine than 
 that which he had himself preached. So 
 great was his detestation of it, that, says 
 Luther, " he casteth out very flames of 
 fire, and his zeal is so fervent, that he 
 beginneth almost to curse the angels." 
 j It follows from this, (1.) That any other 
 I doctrine than that which is proclaimed 
 j in the Bible on the subject of justifica- 
 tion, is to be rejected and treated with 
 I abhorrence, no matter what the rank, 
 \ talent, or eloquence of him who deiends 
 it. (2.) That we are not to patronise 
 or countenance such preachers. No 
 
A. D. 58.1 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 291 
 
 9 As we said before, so say I 
 now again, If any ?nan preach 
 any other ft gospel unto you than 
 
 a De. 4. 2. Re. 22. 18. 
 
 matter what their zeal or their apparent 
 sincerity, or their apparent sanctity, or 
 their apparent success, or their real bold- 
 ness in rebuking vice, we are to with- 
 draw from them. " Cease, my son," 
 said Solomon, " to hear the instruction 
 that causes to err from the words of 
 knowledge." Prov. xix. 27. Especially 
 are we to withdraw wholly from that 
 instruction which goes to deny the great 
 doctrines of salvation; that pure gospel 
 which the Lord Jesus and the apostle 
 taught. If Paul would regard even an 
 angel as doomed to destruction, and as 
 held accursed, should he preach any 
 other doctrine, assuredly we should not 
 be found to lend our countenance to it, 
 nor should we patronise it by attending 
 on such a ministry. Who would desire 
 to attend on the ministry of even an 
 angel if he was to be held accursed 1 
 How much less the ministry of a man 
 preaching the same doctrine ! — It does 
 not follow from this, however, that we 
 are to treat others with severity of lan- 
 guage or with the language of cursing. 
 They must answer to God. We are to 
 withdraw from their teaching ; we are to 
 regard the doctrines with abhorrence; 
 and we are not to lend our countenance 
 to them. To their own master they 
 stand or fall ; but what must be the 
 doom of a teacher whom an inspired 
 man has said should be regarded as 
 " accuiised !" — It may be added, how 
 responsible is the ministerial office ! How 
 fearful the account which the ministers 
 of religion must render! How much 
 prayer, and study, and effort are needed 
 that they may be able to understand the 
 true gospel, and that they may not be 
 led into error, or lead others into error. 
 
 9. As we said before. That is, in 
 the previous verse. It is equivalent to 
 saying, 'as I have just said.' See 2 
 Cor. vii. 3. It cannot be supposed that 
 he had said this when he was with 
 them, as it cannot be believed that he 
 then anticipated that his doctrines would 
 
 that ye have received, let him be 
 accursed. 
 
 10 For do I now persuade 
 
 be perverted, and that another gospel 
 would be preached to them. The sen- 
 timent of ver. 8 is here repeated on 
 account of its importance. It is com- 
 mon in the Scriptures, as indeed it is 
 everywhere else, to repeat a declaration 
 in order to deepen the impression of its 
 importance and its truth. Paul would 
 not be misunderstood on this point. He 
 would leave no doubt as to his meaning. 
 He would not have it supposed that he 
 had uttered the sentiment in ver. 8 
 hastily ; and he therefore repeats it with 
 emphasis. % Than that ye have re- 
 ceived. In the previous verse, it is, 
 " that which we have preached." By 
 this change in the phraseology he de- 
 signs, probably, to remind them that 
 they had once solemnly professed to 
 embrace that system. It had not only 
 been preached to them, it had been 
 embraced by them. The teachers ot 
 the new system, therefore, were really 
 in opposition to the once avowed senti- 
 ments of the Galatians ; to what they 
 knew to be true. They were not only 
 to be held accursed, therefore, because 
 Paul so declared, but because they 
 preached what the Galatians themselves 
 knew to be false, or what was contrary 
 to that which they had themselves pro- 
 fessed to be true. 
 
 10. For do I now persuade men, or 
 God? The word "now" (agiv) is used 
 here, evidently, to express a contrast 
 between his present and his former pur- 
 pose of life. Before his conversion to 
 Christianity, he impliedly admits, that it 
 was his object to conciliate the favour of 
 men; that he derived his authority 
 from them (Acts ix. 1,2); that he en 
 deavoured to act so as to please thera 
 and gain their good esteem. But now 
 he says, this was not his object. He 
 had a higher aim. It was to please 
 God, and to conciliate his favour. The 
 object of this verse is obscure ; but it 
 seems to me to be connected with what 
 follows, and to be designed to introduce? 
 
292 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 men, or God ? or do I seek a to 
 please men ? for if I yet pleased 
 
 a .2 Co. 12. 19. 1 Th. 2. 4. 
 
 that by showing that he had not now 
 received his commission from men, but 
 had received it from God. Perhaps 
 there may be an allusion to an implied 
 allegation in regard to him. It may 
 have been alleged (see Notes on the 
 previous verses) that even he had 
 changed his mind, and was now himself 
 an observer of the laws of Moses. To 
 this, perhaps, he replies, by this question, 
 that such conduct would not have been 
 inconsistent in his view, when it was his 
 main purpose to please men, and when 
 he derived his commission from them ; 
 but that now he had a higher aim. His 
 purpose was to please God ; and he was 
 not aiming in any way to gratify men. 
 The word which is rendered " persuade" 
 here (w«/3-a), has been very variously in- j 
 terpreted. Tindal renders it, " seek now ! 
 the favour of men or of God?" Dod- i 
 dridge : "Do I now solicit the favour | 
 of men or of God \ n This also is the i 
 interpretation of Grotius, Hammond, 
 Eisner, Koppe, Rosenmiiller, Bloom- | 
 field, &c. and is undoubtedly the true 
 explanation. The word properly means 
 to persuade, or to convince. Acts xviii. 4 ; 
 xxviii. 23. 2 Cor. v. 11. But it also ; 
 means, to bring over to kind feelings, to 
 conciliate, to pacify, to quiet. Sept. 1 | 
 Sam. xxiv. 8. 2 Mace. iv. 25. Acts j 
 xii. 20. 1 John iii. 19. By the I 
 question here, Paul means to say, that 
 his great object was now to please God. 
 He desired his favour rather than the 
 favour of man. He acted with refer- 
 ence to his will. He derived his au- 
 thority from him, and not from the 
 Sanhedrim or any earthly council. And 
 the purpose of all this is to say, that he 
 had not received his commission to 
 preach from man, but had received it 
 directly from God. f Or do I seek to 
 please men ? It is not my aim or pur- 
 pose to please men, and to conciliate 
 their favour. Comp. 1 Thess. ii. 4. 
 f For if I yet pleased men. If I made 
 it my aim to please men ; if this was 
 the regulating principle of my conduct. 
 
 men. I should not * be the ser- 
 vant of Christ. 
 
 b Ja. 4. 4. 
 
 The word " yet" here (in) has reference 
 to his former purpose. It implies that 
 this had once been his aim. But he 
 says if he had pursued that purpose to 
 please men; if this had continued to 
 be the aim of his life, he would not 
 now have been a servant of Chri.<?t. 
 He had been constrained to abandon 
 that purpose in order that he might be a 
 servant of Christ ; and the sentiment is, 
 that in order that a man may become a 
 Christian, it is necessary for him to 
 abandon the purpose of pleasing men as 
 the rule of his life. It may be implied 
 also that if in fact a man makes it his 
 aim to please men, or if this is the pur- 
 pose for which he lives and acts, and if 
 he shapes his conduct with reference to 
 that, he cannot be a Christian or a ser- 
 vant of Christ. A Christian must act 
 from higher motives than those, and he 
 who aims supremely at the favour of 
 his fellow-men has full evidence that 
 he is not a Christian. A friend of 
 Christ must do his duty, and must 
 regulate his conduct by the will of God, 
 whether men are pleased with it or not. 
 And it may be further implied that the 
 life and deportment of a sincere Chris- 
 tian will not please men. It is not 
 that which they love. A holy, humble, 
 spiritual life they do not love. It is 
 true, indeed, that their consciences tell 
 them that such a life is right ; that they 
 are often constrained to speak well of 
 the life of Christians, and to commend 
 it ; it is true that they are constrained to 
 respect a man who is a sincere Christian, 
 and that they often repose confidence in 
 such a man; and it is true also that 
 they often speak with respect of them 
 when they are dead ; but the life of an 
 humble, devoted, and zealous Christian 
 they do not love. It is contrary to their 
 views of life. And especially if a 
 Christian so lives and acts as to reprove 
 them either by his words or by his life ; 
 or if a Christian makes his religion so 
 prominent as to interfere with their 
 pursuits or pleasures, they do not love 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 293 
 
 11 But 1 certify you, bre- 
 thren, that the gospel which was 
 preached of me, is not after 
 
 it. It follows from this, (1.) That a 
 Christian is not to expect to please men. 
 He must not be disappointed, therefore, 
 if he docs not. His Master did not 
 please the world ; and it is enough for 
 the disciple that he be as his master. 
 (2.) A professing Christian, and espe- 
 cially a minister, should be alarmed 
 when the world flatters and caresses 
 him. He should fear either, («) That 
 he is not living as he ought to, and 
 that sinners love him because he is 
 so much like them, and keeps them 
 in countenance ; or, (A) That they 
 mean to make him betray his religion 
 and become conformed to them. It is a 
 great point gained for the gay world, 
 when it can, by its caresses and atten- 
 tions, get a Christian to forsake a prayer- 
 meeting for a party, or surrender his 
 deep spirituality to engage in some 
 political project. " Wo unto you," 
 said the Redeemer, " when all men 
 speak well of you." Luke vi. 26. (3.) 
 One of the main differences between 
 Christians and the world is, that others 
 aim to please men ; the Christian aims 
 to please God And this is a great dif- 
 ference. (4.) It follows that if men 
 would become Christians, they must 
 cease to make it their object to please 
 men. They must be willing to be met 
 with contempt and a frown ; they must 
 be willing to be persecuted and despised ; 
 they must be willing to lay aside all 
 hope of the praise and the flattery of 
 men, and be content with an honest 
 effort to please God. (5.) True Chris- 
 tians must differ from the world. Their 
 aims, feelings, purposes must be unlike 
 the world. They are to be a peculiar 
 people; and they should be willing to 
 be esteemed such. It does not follow, 
 however, that a true Christian should 
 not desire the good esteem of the world, 
 or that he should be indifferent to an 
 honourable reputation ( 1 Tim. iii. 7) ; 
 nor does it follow that a consistent 
 25* 
 
 12 For a I neither received it 
 of man, neither was I taught it, 
 but by the revelation b of Jesus 
 Christ. 
 
 alCo. 15. 1— 3 6Ep. 3. 3. . 
 
 Jhristian will not often command the 
 respect of the world. In times of trial, 
 the world will repose confidence in 
 Christians ; when any work of benevo- 
 lence is to be done, the world will 
 instinctively look to Christians; and 
 notwithstanding sinners will not love re- 
 ligion, yet they will secretly feel assured 
 that some of the brightest ornaments of 
 society are Christians, and that they 
 have a claim to the confidence and 
 esteem of their fellow-men. % The 
 servant of Christ. A Christian. 
 
 1 1 . Bat I certify you. I make 
 known to you; or, I declare to you. 
 See 1 Cor. xv. 1. Doubtless this had 
 been known to them before, but he 
 now assures th*em of it, and goes into 
 an extended illustration to show them 
 that he had not received his authority 
 from man to preach the gospel. To 
 state and prove this is the main design 
 of this chapter. 1 Is not after man. 
 Gr. Not according to man. See ver. 1. 
 That is, he was not appointed by man, 
 nor had he any human instructor to 
 make known to him what the gospel 
 was. He had neither received it from 
 man, nor had it been debased or adul- 
 terated by any human admixtures. He 
 had received it directly from the Lord 
 Jesus. 
 
 1 2. For I neither received it of man. 
 This is very probably said in reply to 
 his opponents, who had maintained that 
 Paul had derived his knowledge of the 
 gospel from other men, as he had not 
 been personally known to the Lord 
 Jesus, or been of the number of those" 
 whom he called to be his apostles. In 
 reply to this, he says, that he did not 
 receive his gospel in any way from 
 man. f Neither was I taught it. 
 That is, by man. He was not taught 
 it by any written account of it, or by 
 the instruction of man in any way. 
 The only plausible objection to this 
 statement which could be urged would 
 
294 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A.D. 58. 
 
 13 For ye have heard of my I measure I persecuted the church 
 conversation in time past in the a of God, and wasted it. 
 Jews' religion, how that beyond I 14 And profited in the Jews' 
 
 a Ac. 8. 1,3; 9. 1, 2; 26. 9. 
 
 derstood in the time when he was 
 educated. It was not merely in the 
 religion of Moses, but it was in that 
 religion as understood and practised by 
 the Jews in his time, when opposition to 
 Christianity constituted a very material 
 part of it. In that religion Paul pro- 
 ceeds to show that he had been more 
 distinguished than most persons of his 
 time. % How that beyond measure. 
 In the highest possible degree ; beyond 
 all limits or bounds; exceedingly. The 
 phrase which Paul here uses (**3-* 
 vTrs^fi-.hYiv), by hyperbole, is one which 
 he frequently employs to denote any 
 thing that is excessive, or that cannot 
 be expressed by ordinary language. 
 See the Greek in Rom. vii. 13. 1 Cor. 
 xii. 31. 2 Cor. i. 8; iv. 7. 17. 1 / 
 persecuted the church. See Acts viii. 
 3 ; ix. 1, seq. % And wasted it. De- 
 stroyed it. The word which is here 
 used, means properly to waste or destroy, 
 as when a city or country is ravaged by 
 an army or by wild beasts. His pur- 
 pose was utterly to root out and destroy 
 the Christian religion. 
 
 14. And profited. Made advances 
 and attainments. He made advances 
 not only in the knowledge of the Jewish 
 religion, but also he surpassed others in 
 his zeal in defending its interests. He had 
 had better advantages than most of his 
 countrymen ; and by his great zeal and 
 characteristic ardour, he had been able 
 to make higher attainments than most 
 others had done. Tf Above many my 
 equals. Marg. Equal in years. This 
 is the true sense of the original. It 
 means that he surpassed those of the 
 same age with himself. Possibly there 
 may be a reference here to those of the 
 same age who attended with him on 
 the instructions of Gamaliel. % Being 
 more exceedingly zealous. More stu- 
 dious of; more ardently attached to 
 them ; more anxious to distinguish him- 
 self in attainments in the religion in 
 which he was brought up. All this is 
 
 be the fact that Paul had an interview 
 with Ananias (Acts ix. 17) before his 
 baptism, and that he would probably 
 receive instructions from him. But to 
 this it may be replied, (1.) That there is 
 no evidence that Ananias went into 
 an explanation of the nature of the 
 Christian religion in his interview with 
 Paul ; (2.) Paul had before this been 
 taught what Christianity was by his 
 interview with the Lord Jesus on the 
 way to Damascus (Acts ix. 5 ; xxvi. 
 14—18) ; (3.) The purpose for which 
 Ananias was sent to him in Damascus 
 was that he might receive his sight, 
 and be filled with the Holy Ghost. 
 Acts ix. 17. Whatever instructions he 
 may have received through Ananias, it 
 is still true that his call was d'recily 
 from the Lord Jesus, and his informa- 
 tion of the nature of Christianity from 
 his revelation. % But by the revela- 
 tion of Jesus Christ. On his way to 
 Damascus, and subsequently in the 
 temple. Acts xxii. 17 — 21. Doubtless 
 he received communications at various 
 times from the Lord Jesus with regard 
 to the nature of the gospel and his 
 duty. The sense here is, that he was 
 not indebted to men for his knowledge 
 of the gospel, but had derived it entirely 
 from the Saviour. 
 
 13. For ye have heard of my con- 
 versation. My conduct, my mode of 
 life, my deportment. See Note on 2 
 Cor. i. 12. Probably Paul had himself 
 made them acquainted with the events 
 of his early years. The reason why he 
 refers to this is, to show them that he 
 had not derived his knowledge of the 
 Christian religion from any instruction 
 which he had received in his early 
 years, or any acquaintance which he 
 had formed with the apostles. He had 
 at first been decidedly opposed to the 
 Lord Jesus, and had been converted 
 only by his wonderful grace. *J In the 
 Jews' religion. In the belief and prac- 
 tice of Judaism ; that is, as it was un- 
 
A.D. 53.] 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 295 
 
 religion above many my * equals 
 in mine own nation, being a more 
 exceedingly zealous of the tra- 
 ditions b of my fathers. 
 
 » equal in years. a Ac. 22. 3. Ph. 3. 6. 
 
 b Mar. 7. 5—13. 
 
 fully sustained by all that we know of 
 the character of Paul, as at all times a 
 man of singular and eminent zeal in all 
 that he undertook, f Of the tradi- 
 tions of my fathers. Or the traditions 
 of the Jews. See Note, Matt. xv. 2. A 
 large part of the doctrines of the Phari- 
 sees depended on mere tradition ; and 
 Paul doubtless made this a special mat- 
 ter of study, and was particularly tena- 
 cious in regard to it. It was to be 
 learned, from the very nature of it, only 
 by oral teaching, as there is no evidence 
 that it was then recorded. Subsequently 
 these traditions were recorded in the 
 Mishna, and are found in the Jewish 
 writings. But in the time of Paul 
 they were to be learned as they were 
 handed down from one to another ; and 
 hence the utmost diligence was requisite 
 to obtain a knowledge of them. Paul 
 does not here nay that he was zealous 
 then for the practice of the new religion, 
 nor for the study of the Bible. His 
 object in going to Jerusalem and study- 
 ing at the feet of Gamaliel was doubt- 
 less to obtain a knowledge of the 
 traditions of the sect of the Pharisees. 
 Had he been studying the Bible all 
 that time, he would have kept from the 
 fiery zeal which he evinced in persecut- 
 ing the church, and would, if he had 
 studied it right, been saved from much 
 trouble of conscience afterwards. 
 
 15. But when it pleased God. Paul 
 traced all his hopes of eternal life, and 
 all the good influences which had ever 
 borne upon his mind, to God. \ Who 
 separated me, <fec. That is, who destined 
 me ; or who purposed from my very 
 birth that I should be a preacher and an 
 apostle. The meaning is, that God had 
 in his secret purposes set him apart to 
 be an apostle. It does not mean that 
 he had actually called him in his 
 infancy to the work, for this was not so, 
 
 15 But when it pleased God, 
 c who separated me from my 
 mother's womb, and called me 
 by his grace, 
 
 els. 49. 1. Je. 1.5 
 
 but that he designed him to be an 
 important instrument in his hands in 
 spreading the true religion. Jeremiah 
 (i. 5) was thus set apart, and John the 
 Baptist was thus early designated for the 
 work which they afterwards performed. 
 It follows from this, (1.) That God often, 
 if not always, has purposes in regard to 
 men from their very birth. He designs 
 them for some important field of labour, 
 and endows them at their creation with 
 talents adapted to that. (2.) It does not 
 follow that because a young man has 
 gone far astray ; and has become even 
 a blasphemer and a persecutor, that 
 God has not destined him to some im- 
 portant and holy work in his service. 
 How many men have been called, like 
 Paul, and Newton, and Bunyan, and 
 Augustine, from a life of sin to the 
 service of God. (3.) God is often 
 training up men in a remarkable man- 
 ner for future usefulness. His eye is 
 upon them, and he watches over them, 
 until the time comes for their conver- 
 sion. His providence was concerned 
 in the education and training of Paul. 
 It was by the divine intention with 
 reference to his future work that he had 
 so many opportunities of education, 
 and was so well acquainted with the 
 " traditions" of that religion which he 
 was yet to demonstrate to be unfounded 
 and false. He gave him the opportu- 
 nity to cultivate his mind, and prepare 
 to grapple with the Jew in argument, 
 and show him how unfounded were his 
 hopes. So it is often now. He gives 
 to a young man an opportunity of a 
 finished education. Perhaps he suffers 
 him to fall into the snares of infidelity, 
 and to become familiar with the argu- 
 ments of sceptics, that he may thus 
 be better prepared to meet their soph- 
 isms, and to enter into their feelings. 
 His eye is upon them in their wander- 
 
296 
 
 16 To leveal a his Son in me, 
 
 a 2 Co. 4.6. 
 
 GALATIANS. [A. D. 58. 
 
 that b I might preach him among 
 
 b Ac. 9. 15. 
 
 ings, and they are suffered often to 
 wander far; to range the fields of 
 science; to become distinguished as 
 scholars, as Paul was; until the time 
 comes for their conversion, and then, in 
 accordance with the purpose which set 
 them apart from the world, God converts 
 them, and consecrates all their talents 
 and attainments to his service. (4.) 
 We should never despair of a young 
 man who has wandered far from God. 
 If he has risen high in attainments ; 
 if his whole aim is ambition ; or if he 
 has become an infidel, still we are not 
 to despair of him. It is possible still 
 that God "separated" that talent to his 
 service from the very birth, and that he 
 means yet to call it all to his service. 
 How easy it was to convert Saul of 
 Tarsus when the proper period arrived. 
 So it is of the now unconverted and 
 unconsecrated, but cultivated talent 
 among the young men of our land. 
 Far as they may have wandered from 
 God and virtue, yet much of that ta- 
 lent has been devoted to him in baptism, 
 and by parental purposes and prayers ; 
 and, it may be — as is morally certain 
 from the history of the past — that much 
 of it is consecrated also by the divine 
 purpose and intention for the noble 
 cause of virtue and pure religion. In 
 that now apparently wasted talent; in 
 that learning now apparently devoted to 
 other aims and ends, there is much that 
 will yet adorn the cause of virtue and 
 religion ; and how fervently should we 
 pray that it may be "called" by the 
 grace of God and actually devoted to 
 his service, f And called me by his 
 grace. On the way to Damascus. It 
 was special grace, because he was then 
 engaged in bitterly opposing him and 
 his cause. 
 
 1 6. To reveal his Son in me. This 
 is to be regarded as connected with the 
 first part of ver. 15. ' When it pleased 
 God to reveal his Son in me,' i. e. on 
 the way to Damascus. The phrase 
 evidently means, to make me acquainted 
 with the Lord Jesus, or ta reveal his 
 
 Son to me. Comp. the Greek in 
 Matt. x. 32. for a similar expression. 
 The revelation here referred to was the 
 miraculous manifestation which was 
 made to Paul on his way to Damascus. 
 Comp. 2 Cor. iv. 6. That revelation 
 was in order to convince him that he 
 was the Messiah ; to acquaint him with 
 his nature, rank, and claims; and to 
 qualify him to be a preacher to the 
 heathen. ^ That I might preach him. 
 In order that I might so preach him ; 
 or with a view to my being appointed 
 to this work. This was the leading 
 purpose for which Paul was converted. 
 Acts ix. 15; xxii. 21. f The heathen. 
 The Gentiles ; the portion of the world 
 that was not Jewish, or that was desti- 
 tute of the true religion, t Imme- 
 diately. Koppe supposes that this is to 
 be connected with, " I went into Arabia" 
 (ver. 17). Rosenmiiller supposes it 
 means, " Immediately / consented." 
 Dr. Wells and Locke suppose that it 
 refers to the fact that he immediately 
 went to Arabia. But this seems to 
 me to be an unnatural construction. 
 The words are too remote from each 
 other to allow of it. The evident 
 sense is, that he was at once decided. 
 He did not take time to deliberate 
 whether he should or should not become 
 a Christian. He made up his mind 
 at once and on the spot. He did not con- 
 sult with any one ; he did not ask ad- 
 vice of any one ; he did not wait to be 
 instructed by any one. He was con- 
 vinced by the vision in an overpowering 
 manner that Jesus was the Messiah, 
 and he yielded at once. The main idea 
 is, that there was no delay, no consulta- 
 tion, no deferring it, that he might see 
 and consult with his friends, or with 
 the friends of Christianity. The ob- 
 ject for which he dwells on this is to 
 show he did not receive his views of the 
 gospel from man. f J conferred not. 
 I did not lay the case (7r£c<ru.vid-iju»v} 
 before any man ; I did not confer with 
 any one. t Flesh and blood. Any hu- 
 man being, for so the phrase properly 
 
A. D. 58. J 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 297 
 
 the heathen ; immediately 1 con- 
 ferred not with flesh and a blood : 
 
 a 2 Co. 5. 16. 
 
 signifies. See Note, Matt. xvi. 17. 
 This does not mean here, that Paul did 
 not consult his own ease and happi- 
 ness ; that he was regardless of the 
 sufferings which he might be called to 
 endure ; that he was willing to suffer, 
 and was not careful to make provision 
 for his own comfort — which was true in 
 itself — but that he did not lay the case 
 before any man, or any body of men 
 for instruction or advice. He acted 
 promptly and decisively. He was not 
 disobedient to the heavenly vision 
 (Acts xxvi. 19), but resolved at once to 
 obey. Many suppose that this passage 
 means that Paul did not take counsel 
 of the evil passions and suggestions of 
 his own heart, or of the feelings which 
 would have prompted him to lead a life 
 of ambition, or a life under the influ- 
 ence of corrupt desires. But however 
 true this was in fact, no such thing is 
 intended hers. It means simply that 
 he did not take counsel of any human 
 being. He resolved at once to follow 
 the command of the Saviour, and at 
 once to obey him. The passage shows, 
 (1.) That when the Lord Jesus calls 
 us to follow him we should promptly 
 and decidedly obey. (2.) We should 
 not delay even to take counsel of 
 earthly friends, or wait for human 
 advice, or consult their wishes, but 
 should at once resolve to follow the 
 Lord Jesus. Most persons, when they 
 are awakened to see their guilt, and 
 their minds are impressed on the subject 
 of religion, are prone to defer it ; to re- 
 solve to think of it at some future time; 
 or to engage in some other business 
 before they become Christians ; or, at 
 least, they wish to finish what they 
 have on hand before they yield to God. 
 Had Paul pursued this course, he would 
 probably never have become a Christian. 
 It follows, therefore, (3.) That when 
 the Lord Jesus calls us, we should at 
 once abandon any course of life, how- 
 ever pleasant, or any plan of ambition, 
 
 17 Neither went I up to Jeru- 
 salem to them which were apos- 
 tles before me ; but I went into 
 
 however brilliant, or any scheme of 
 gain, however promising, in order that 
 we may follow him. What a brilliant 
 career of ambition did Paul abandon ! 
 and how promptly and decidedly did he 
 do it ! He did not pause or hesitate a 
 moment ; but brilliant as were his pros- 
 pects, he at once forsook all ; paused in 
 mid-career in his ambition ; and with- 
 out consulting a human being, at once 
 gave his heart to God. Such a course 
 should be pursued by all. Such a 
 promptness and decision will prepare 
 one to become an eminent Christian, 
 and to be eminently useful. 
 
 1 7. Neither went I up to Jerusalem. 
 That is, I did not go there at once. I 
 did not go to consult with the apostles 
 there, or to be instructed by them in re- 
 gard to the nature of the Christie 
 religion. The design of this statement 
 is, to show that in no sense did 
 he derive his commission from man. 
 f To them which were apostles before 
 me. This implies that Paul then 
 regarded himself to be an apostle. 
 They were, he admits, apostles before 
 he was ; but he felt also that he had 
 original authority with them, and he 
 did not go to them to receive instruc- 
 tion, or to derive his commission from 
 them. Several of the apostles remained 
 in Jerusalem for a considerable time 
 after the ascension of the Lord Jesus, 
 and it was regarded as the principal 
 place of authority. See Acts xv. 
 f But I went into Arabia. Arabia was 
 south of Damascus, and at no great 
 distance. The line indeed between 
 Arabia Deserta and Syria is not very 
 definitely marked, but it is generally 
 agreed that Arabia extends to a consi 
 derable distance into the great Syrian 
 desert. To what part of Arabia, and 
 for what purpose Paul went, is wholly 
 unknown. Nothing is known of the 
 circumstances of this journey ; nor is 
 the time which he spent there known. 
 • It is known indeed (ver. 18) that he 
 
GAL ATI AN S. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 Arabia, and returned again unto 
 Damascus. 
 
 did not go to Jerusalem until three years 
 after his conversion, hut how large a 
 part of this time was spent in Damas- 
 cus, we have no means of ascertaining. 
 Tt is probable that Paul was engaged 
 during these three years in preaching 
 the gospel in Damascus and the adjacent 
 regions, and in Arabia. Comp. Acts 
 ix. 20. 22. 27. The account of this 
 journey into Arabia is wholly omitted 
 by Luke in the Acts of the Apostles, 
 ind this fact, as has been remarked by 
 Paley (Hors Paulina?, ch. v. No. 2), 
 demonstrates that the Acts and this 
 epistle were not written by the same 
 author, or that the one is independent of 
 the other ; because, " if the Acts of the 
 Apostles had been a forged history made 
 up from the epistle, it is impossible that 
 this journey should have been passed 
 oUr in silence ; if the epistle had been 
 composed out of what the author had 
 read of St. Paul's history in the Acts, it 
 is unaccountable that it should have been 
 inserted." As to the reason why Lake 
 omitted to mention the journey into 
 Arabia, nothing is known. Various con- 
 jectures have been entertained, but they 
 are mere conjectures. It is sufficient to 
 say, that Luke has by no means re- 
 corded all that Paul or the other apos- 
 tles did, nor has he pretended to do it. 
 He has given the leading events in the 
 public labours of Paul; and it is not at 
 all improbable that he has omitted not a 
 few short excursions made by him for the 
 purpose of preaching the gospel. The 
 journey into Arabia, probably, did not 
 furnish any incidents in regard to the 
 success of the gospel there which re- 
 quired particular record by the sacred 
 historian, nor has Paul himself referred 
 to it for any such reason, or intimated 
 that it furnished any incidents, or any 
 facts, that required particularly the 
 notice of the historian. He has men- 
 tioned it for a different purpose alto- 
 gether," to show that he did not receive 
 his commission from the apostles, and 
 that he did not go at once to consult 
 
 18 Then a after three years I 
 went * up to Jerusalem to see 
 
 a Ac. 9 26. t or, returned. 
 
 them. He went directly the other way. 
 As Luke, in the Acts, had no occasion 
 to illustrate this ; as he had no occasion 
 to refer to this argument, it did not fall 
 in with his design to mention the fact. 
 Nor is it known why Paul went into 
 Arabia. Bloomfield supposes that it 
 was in order to recover his health after 
 the calamity which he suffered on the 
 way to Damascus. But every thing in 
 regard to this is mere conjecture. I 
 should rather think it was more in 
 accordance with the general character 
 of Paul that he made this short excur- 
 sion for the purpose of preaching the 
 gospel. If And returned again unto 
 Damascus. He did not go to Jerusa- 
 lem to consult with the apostles after 
 his visit to Arabia, but returned again 
 to the place where he was converted 
 and preached there, showing that he 
 had not derived his commission from 
 the other apostles. 
 
 18. Then after three years. Proba- 
 bly three years after his departure from 
 Jerusalem to Damascus, not after his 
 return to Arabia. So most commenta- 
 ; tors have understood it. ^ Went up to 
 j Jerusalem. More correctly, as in the 
 ; margin, returned. If To see Peter. 
 ; Peter was the oldest and most distin- 
 j guished of the apostles. In ch. ii. 9. 
 he, with James and John, is called a 
 pillar. But why Paul particularly 
 ! went to see him is not known. It was 
 ! probably, however, from the celebrity and 
 distinction which he knew Peter had 
 j among the apostles that he wished to 
 J become particularly acquainted with 
 j hi in. The word which is here ren- 
 | dered to see (/o-T.-gaa-*/) is by no means 
 i that which is commonly employed to 
 ! denote that idea. It occurs nowhere 
 i else in the New Testament ; and pro- 
 | perly means to ascertain by personal 
 j inquiry and examination, and then to 
 narrate, as a historian was accustomed 
 j to do, whence our word history. The 
 notion of personally seeing and examin- 
 ing, is one that belongs essentially to 
 
A.D.58.] 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 299 
 
 Peter, and abode with him fifteen 
 days. 
 
 19 But other of the apostles 
 
 the word, and the idea here is that of 
 seeing or visiting Peter in order to a 
 personal acquaintance, ^f And abode 
 with him fifteen days. Probably, says 
 Bloom field, including three Lord's-days. 
 Why he departed then is unknown. 
 Beza supposes that it was on account of 
 the plots of the Grecians against him, 
 and their intention to destroy him (Acts 
 ix. 29) ; but this is not assigned by Paul 
 himself as a reason. It is probable that 
 the purpose of his visit to Peter would 
 be accomplished in that time, and he 
 would not spend more time than was 
 necessary with him. It is clear that in 
 the short space of two weeks he could 
 not have been very extensively taught 
 by Peter the nature of the Christian 
 religion, and probably the time is men- 
 tioned here to show that he had not 
 been under the teaching of the apos- 
 tles. 
 
 19. Save James the Lord's brother. 
 That the James here referred to was 
 an apostle, is clear. The whole con- 
 struction of the sentence demands this 
 supposition. In the list of the apostles 
 in Matt. x. 2, 3, two of this name are 
 mentioned, James the son of Zebedee 
 and brother of John, and James the 
 son of Alpheus. From the Acts of the 
 apostles, it is clear that there were two 
 of this name in Jerusalem. Of these, 
 James the brother of John was slain by 
 Herod (Acts xii. 2), and the other con- 
 tinued to reside in Jerusalem. Acts 
 xv, 13; xxi. 13. This latter James was 
 called James the Less (Mark xv. 40), 
 to distinguish him from the other James, 
 probably because he was the younger. 
 It is probable that this was the James 
 referred to here, as it is evident from 
 the Acts of the Apostles that he was a 
 prominent man among the apostles in 
 Jerusalem. Commentators have not 
 been agreed as to what is meant by his 
 being the brother of the Lord Jesus. 
 Doddridge understands it as meaning that 
 he was " the near kinsman" or cousin- 
 
 saw I none, save James B the 
 Lord's brother. 
 
 20 Now the things which I 
 
 a Mar. 6. 3. 
 
 german to Jesus, for he was, says he, the 
 son of Alpheus and Mary, the sister of 
 the virgin ; and if there were but two 
 of this name, this opinion is undoubt- 
 edly correct. In the Apostolical Consti- 
 tutions (see Rosenmuller) three of this 
 name are mentioned as apostles or 
 eminent men in Jerusalem ; and hence 
 many have supposed that one of them 
 was the son of Mary the mother of the 
 Lord Jesus. It is said (Matt. xiii. 55) 
 that the brothers of Jesus were James, 
 and Joses, and Simon, and Judas ; and it 
 is remarkable that three of the apostles 
 bear the same names; James the son 
 of Alpheus, Simon Zelotes, and Judas. 
 John xiv. 22. It is indeed possible, 
 as Bloomfield remarks, that three bro- 
 thers of our Lord and three of his 
 apostles might bear the same names, 
 and yet be different persons ; but such 
 a coincidence would be very remark- 
 able, and not easily explained. But 
 if it were not so, then the James 
 here was the son of Alpheus, and con- 
 sequently a cousin of the Lord Jesus. 
 The word brother may, according to 
 Scripture usage, be understood as de- 
 noting a near kinsman. See Schleus- 
 ner (Lex. 2) on the word iiJ«\<j>oc. After 
 all, however, it is not quite certain who 
 is intended. Some have supposed that 
 neither of the apostles of the name of 
 James is intended, but another James 
 who was the son of Mary the mother 
 of Jesus. See Koppe in loc. But it 
 is clear, I think, that one of the apos- 
 tles is intended. Why James is par- 
 ticularly mentioned here is unknown. 
 As, however, he was a prominent man 
 in Jerusalem, Paul would naturally 
 seek his acquaintance. It is possible 
 that the other apostles were absent from 
 Jerusalem during the fifteen days when 
 he was there. 
 
 20. Behold, before God, 1 lie not. 
 This is an oath, or a solemn appeal to 
 God. See Note, Rom. ix. 1. The de- 
 sign of this oath here is to prevent all 
 
300 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 write unto you, behold, before 
 God, I lie not. 
 
 21 Afterwards I a came into 
 the regions of Syria and Cilicia; 
 
 o Ac. 9. 30. 
 
 suspicion of falsehood. It may seem 
 to be remarkable that Paul should make 
 this solemn appeal to God in this argu- 
 ment, and in the narrative of a plain 
 fact, when his statement could hardly 
 be called in question by any one. But 
 we may remark, (1.) That the oath 
 here refers not only to the fact that he 
 was with Peter and James but fifteen 
 days, but to the entire group of facts 
 to which he had referred in this chap- 
 ter. "The things which I wrote unto 
 you." It included, therefore, the nar- 
 rative about his conversion, and the 
 direct revelation which he had from 
 the Lord Jesus. (2.) There were no 
 witnesses which he could appeal to in 
 this case, and he could, therefore, only 
 appeal to God. It was probably not 
 practicable for him to appeal to Peter 
 or James, as neither of them were in 
 Galatia, and a considerable part of the 
 transactions here referred to occurred 
 where there were no witnesses. It per- 
 tained to the direct revelation of truth 
 from the Lord Jesus. The only way, 
 therefore, was for Paul to appeal di- 
 rectly to God for the truth of what he 
 said. (3.) The importance of the truth 
 here affirmed was such as to justify 
 this solemn appeal to God. It was an 
 extraordinary and miraculous revela- 
 tion of the truth by Jesus Christ him- 
 self. He received information of the 
 truth of Christianity from no human 
 being. He had consulted no one in 
 regard to its nature. That fact was so 
 extraordinary, and it was so remarkable 
 that the system thus communicated to 
 him should harmonize so entirely with 
 that taught by the other apostles with 
 whom he had had no intercourse, that it 
 was not improper to appeal to God in 
 this solemn manner. It was, therefore, 
 no trifling matter in which Paul ap- 
 pealed to God ; and a solemn appeal of 
 the same nature and in the same circum- 
 stances can never be improper. 
 
 22 And was unknown by face 
 unto the churches b of Judea 
 which were in Christ: 
 
 23 But they had heard c only, 
 
 b 1 Th. 2. 14. 
 
 c Ac. 9. 13, 26. 
 
 21. Afterwards I came, &c. In this 
 account he has omitted a circumstance 
 recorded by Luke (Acts ix. 29), of the 
 controversy which he had with the 
 Grecians or Hellenists. It was not ma- 
 terial to the purpose which he has here 
 in view, which is to state that he was 
 not indebted to the apostles for his 
 knowledge of the doctrines of Chris- 
 tianity. He therefore merely states 
 that he left Jerusalem soon after he 
 went there, and travelled to other places. 
 ^ The regions of Syria. Syria was 
 between Jerusalem and Cilicia. An- 
 tioch was the capital of Syria, and in 
 that city and the adjacent places he 
 spent considerable time. Comp. Acts 
 xv. 23. 41. | Cilicia. This was a 
 province of Asia Minor, of which Tar 
 sus, the native place of Paul, was the 
 capital. See Note on Acts vi. 9. 
 
 22. And was tin known by face, &c. 
 Paul had visited Jerusalem only, and 
 he had formed no acquaintance with 
 any of the churches in the other parts 
 of Judea. He regarded himself at the 
 first as called to preach particularly to 
 the Gentiles, and he did not remain even 
 to form an acquaintance with the Chris- 
 tians in Judea. 1 The churches of 
 Judea. Those which were out of 
 Jerusalem. Even at the early period of 
 the conversion of Paul there were 
 doubtless many churches in various 
 parts of the land. Tf Which were in 
 Christ. United to Christ ; or which 
 were Christian churches. The design 
 of mentioning this is, to show that 
 he had not derived his views of the 
 gospel from any of them. He had 
 neither been instructed by the apostles, 
 nor was he indebted to the Christians 
 in Judea for his knowledge of the Chris- 
 tian religion. 
 
 23. But they had heard only, &c. 
 They had not seen me; but the re- 
 markable fact of my conversion had 
 been reported to them. It was a fac* 
 
A..P.58.] 
 
 CHAPTER 1. 
 
 I 
 
 That he which persecuted us in 
 limes past, now preacheth the 
 faith which once he destroyed. 
 
 vhat could hardly be concealed. See 
 Note, Acts xxvi. 26. 
 
 24. And they glorified God in me. 
 They praised God on my account. 
 They regarded me as a true convert 
 and a sincere Christian ; and they 
 praised God that he had converted such 
 a persecutor, and had made him a 
 preacher of the gospel. The design 
 lor which this is mentioned is, to show 
 that though he was personally unknown 
 to them, and had not derived his views 
 of the gospel from them, yet that he 
 had their entire confidence. They re- 
 garded him as a convert and an apostle, 
 and they were disposed to praise God 
 for his conversion. This fact would do 
 much to conciliate the favour of the 
 Galatians, by showing them that he had 
 the confidence of the churches in the 
 very land where the gospel was first 
 planted, and which was regarded as the 
 source of ecclesiastical authority. In 
 view of this we may remark, (1.) That 
 it is the duty of Christians kindly and 
 yfFectionately to receive among their 
 number those who have been converted 
 from a career of persecution or of sin in 
 any form. And it is always done by 
 true Christians. It is easy to forgive a 
 man who has been actively engaged in 
 persecuting the church, or a man who 
 has been profane, intemperate, disho- 
 nest, or licentious, if he becomes a true 
 penitent, and confesses and forsakes his 
 sins. No matter what his life has been ; 
 no matter how abandoned, sensual, or 
 devilish ; if he manifests true sorrow arid 
 gives evidence of a change of heart, he 
 is cordially received into any church, 
 and welcomed as a fellow-labourer in 
 the cause which he once destroyed. 
 Here, at least, is one place where for- 
 giveness is cordial and perfect. His 
 former life is not remembered, except to 
 praise God for his grace in recovering a 
 sinner from such a course; the evils 
 that he has done are forgotten ; and 
 he is henceforward regarded as entitled 
 26 
 
 24 And they glorified 
 in me. 
 
 a Ac. 21. 19, 20. 
 
 301 
 God 
 
 to all the privileges and immunities of a 
 member of the household of faith, 
 There is not on earth an infuriated 
 persecutor or blasphemer who woukl 
 not be cordially welcomed to any 
 Christian church on the evidence of 
 his repentance ; not a man so debased 
 and vile that the most pure, and ele- 
 vated, and learned, and wealthy Chris- 
 tians would not rejoice to sit down with 
 him at the same communion table on 
 the evidence of his conversion to God. 
 (2.) We should "glorify" or praise 
 God for all such instances of convex 
 sion. We should do it because, (a) Of 
 the abstraction of the talents of the 
 persecutor from the cause of evil. Paul 
 could have done, and would have done 
 immense service to the enemies of 
 Christianity if he had pursued the 
 career which he had commenced. But 
 when he was converted, all that bad 
 influence ceased. So when an infidel 
 or a profligate man is converted now. 
 (b) Because now his talents will be 
 consecrated to a better service. They 
 will be employed in the cause of truth 
 and salvation. All the power of the 
 matured and educated talent will now 
 be devoted to the interests of religion ; 
 and it is a fact for which we should 
 thank God, that he often takes educated 
 talent, and commanding influence, and 
 an established reputation for ability, 
 learning, and zeal, and devotes it to 
 his own service, (c) Because there 
 will be a change of destiny ; because 
 the enemy of the Redeemer will now 
 be saved. The moment when Saul of 
 Tarsus was converted, was the moment 
 which determined a change in his 
 eternal destiny. Before, he was in the 
 broad way to hell; henceforward he 
 walked in the path of life and salvation. 
 Thus we should always rejoice over a 
 sinner returning from the error of his 
 ways; and should praise God that he 
 whu was in danger of eternal ruin is 
 now an heir of glory. Christians are 
 
302 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A.D.58. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 rpiIEN, fourteen years after, l 
 ■*■ I went up again to Jerusalem 
 
 not jealous in regard to the numbers 
 who shall enter heaven. They feel 
 thi*, there is " room" for all ; that the 
 feast is ample for all ; and they rejoice 
 when any can be induced to come with 
 them and partake of the happiness of 
 heaven. (3.) We may still glorify and 
 praise God for the grace manifested in 
 the conversion of Saul of Tarsus. 
 What does not the world owe to him ! 
 What do we not owe to him ! No man 
 did as much in establishing the Chris- 
 tian religion as he did ; no one among 
 the apostles was the means of convert- 
 ing and saving so many souls ; no one 
 has left so many and so valuable writ- 
 ings for the edification of the church. 
 To him we owe the invaluable epistles — 
 so full of truth, and eloquence, and 
 promises, and consolations — on which we 
 are commenting ; and to him the church 
 owes, under God, some of its most ele- 
 vated and ennobling views of the 
 nature of Christian doctrine and duty. 
 After the lapse, therefore, of eighteen 
 hundred years, we should not cease to 
 glorify God for the conversion of this 
 wonderful man, and should feel that we 
 have cause of thankfulness that he 
 changed the infuriated persecutor to a 
 holy and devoted apostle. (4.) Let us 
 remember that God has the same power 
 now. There is not a persecutor whom 
 he could not convert with the same 
 ease with which he changed Saul of 
 Tarsus. There is not a vile and sen- 
 sual man that he could not make pure ; 
 not a dishonest man that his grace 
 could not make honest; not a blas- 
 phemer that he could not teach to ven- 
 erate his name; not a lost and aban- 
 doned sinner that he cannot receive to 
 himself. Let us then without ceasing 
 cry unto him that his grace may be con- 
 tinually manifested in reclaiming such 
 sinners from the error of their ways, 
 and bringing them to the knowledge of 
 the truth, and to a consecration of their 
 lives to his service. 
 
 with Barnabas, and took Titus 
 with we also. 
 
 a Ac. 15. 2, &c. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 ANALYSIS. 
 
 The second chapter is closely con- 
 nected in sense with the first, and is 
 indeed a part of the same argument. 
 Injury has been done by the division 
 which is made. The proper division 
 would have been at the close of the 
 10th verse of this chapter. The gene- 
 ral scope of the chapter, like the first, 
 is to show that he did not receive the 
 gospel from man ; that he had not 
 derived it from the apostles ; that he 
 did not acknowledge his indebtedness 
 to them for his views of the Christian 
 religion ; that they had not even set up 
 authority over him ; but that they had 
 welcomed him as a fellow-labourer, and 
 acknowledged him as a coadjutor in the 
 work of the apostleship. In confirma- 
 tion of this he states (ver. 1) that he 
 had indeed gone to Jerusalem, but that 
 he had done it by express revelation 
 (ver. 2) ; that he was cordially received 
 by the apostles there — especially by 
 those who were pillars in the church; 
 and that so far from regarding himself 
 as inferior to the other apostles, he had 
 resisted Peter to his face at Antioch on 
 a most important and vital doctrine. 
 
 The chapter, therefore, may be re- 
 garded as divided into two portions, 
 viz. : — 
 
 1. The account of his visit to Jeru- 
 salem and of what occurred there, 
 ver. 1—10. 
 
 (a) He had gone up fourteen years 
 after his conversion, after having la- 
 boured long among the Gentiles in his 
 own way, and without having felt his 
 dependence on the apostles at Jerusa- 
 lem, ver. 1, 2. 
 
 (b) When he was there, there was 
 no attempt made to compel him to sub- 
 mit to the Jewish rites and customs; 
 and what was conclusive in the case 
 was, that they had not even required 
 Titus to be circumcised, thus proving 
 that they did not assert jurisdiction 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 303 
 
 over Paul, and that they did not in- 
 end to impose the Mosaic rites on 
 the converts from among the Gentiles, 
 ver. 3—5. 
 
 (c) The most distinguished persons 
 among the apostles at Jerusalem, he 
 says, received him kindly, and admitted 
 him to their conlidence and favour 
 without hesitation. They added no 
 heavy burdens to him (ver. 6) ; they 
 saw evidence that he had been ap- 
 pointed to bear the gospel to the Gen- 
 tiles (ver. 7, 8) ; they gave to him and 
 Barnabas the right hand of fellowship 
 (ver. 9) ; and they asked only that 
 they should remember and show kind- 
 ness to the poor saints in Judea, and 
 thus manifest an interest in those who 
 had been converted from Judaism, or 
 contribute their proper proportion to 
 the maintenance of all, and show that 
 they were not disposed to abandon their 
 own countrymen, ver. 10. In this way 
 they gave the fullest proof that they 
 approved the course of Paul, and ad- 
 mitted him into entire fellowship with 
 them as an apostle. 
 
 II. The scene at Antioch, where Paul 
 rebuked Peter for his dissimulation. 
 ver. 1 1 — 21. The main object of men- 
 tioning this seems to be to show, first, 
 that he did not regard himself as in- 
 ferior to the other apostles, or that he 
 had not derived his views of the gospel 
 from them ; and, secondly, to state that 
 the observance of the Jewish rites was 
 not necessary to salvation, and that he 
 had maintained that from the beginning. 
 He had strongly urged it in a contro- 
 versy with Peter, and in a case where 
 Peter was manifestly wrong; and it 
 was no new doctrine on the subject ot 
 justification which he had preached to 
 the Galatians. He states, therefore, 
 
 (a) That he had opposed Peter at 
 Antioch, because he had dissembled 
 there, and that even Barnabas had been 
 carried away with the course which 
 Peter had practised, ver. 11 — 14. 
 
 (b) That the Jews must be justified 
 by faith, and not by dependence on 
 their own law. ver. 15, 16. 
 
 (c) That they who are justified by 
 faith should act consistently, and not 
 
 attempt to build again the things which 
 they had destroyed, ver. 17, 18. 
 
 (d) That the effect of justification 
 by faith was to make one dead to the 
 law that he might live unto God ; that 
 the effect of it was to make one truly 
 alive and devoted to the cause of true 
 religion ; and to show this, he appeals 
 to the effect on his own heart and life 
 (ver. 19, 20) ; 
 
 (e) And that if justification could 
 be obtained by the law, then Christ 
 had died in vain. ver. 21. He thus 
 shows that the effect of teaching the 
 necessity of the observance of the Jew- 
 ish rites was to destroy the gospel, and 
 to render it vain and useless. 
 
 1. Then fourteen years after. That 
 is, fourteen years after his first visit 
 there subsequent to his conversion. 
 Some commentators, however, suppose 
 that date of the fourteen years are to 
 be reckoned from his conversion. But 
 the more obvious construction is, to 
 refer it to the time of his visit there, as 
 recorded in the previous chapter, ver. 18. 
 This time was spent in Asia Minor 
 chiefly in preaching the gospel. % I 
 went up again to Jerusalem. It is 
 commonly supposed that Paul here re- 
 fers to the visit which he made as 
 recorded in Acts xv. The circum- 
 stances mentioned are substantially the 
 same ; and the object which he had 
 at that time in going up was one whose 
 mention was entirely pertinent to the 
 argument here. He went up with 
 Barnabas to submit a question to the 
 assembled apostles and elders at Jerusa- 
 lem in regard to the necessity of the 
 observance of the laws of Moses. Some 
 persons who had come among the Gen- 
 tile converts from Judea had insisted on 
 the necessity of being circumcised in 
 order to be saved. Paul and Barnabas 
 had opposed them ; and the dispute had 
 become so warm that it was agreed to 
 submit the subject to the apostles and 
 elders at Jerusalem. For that purpose 
 Paul and Barnabas had been sent, with 
 certain others, to lay the case before all 
 the apostles. As the question which 
 Paul was discussing in this epistle was 
 about the necessity of the observance ot 
 
304 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58 
 
 2 And I went up by revela- 
 
 the laws of Moses in order to justifica- 
 tion, it was exactly in point to refer to 
 a journey when this very question had 
 been submitted to the apostles. Paul 
 indeed had made another journey to 
 Jerusalem before this witb the collection 
 for the poor saints in Judea (Acts xi. 
 29, 30 ; xii. 25), but he does not men- 
 tion that here, probably because he did 
 not then see the other apostles, or more 
 prpbably because that journey furnished 
 no illustration of the point now under 
 debate. On the occasion here referred 
 to (Acts xv.), the very point under dis- 
 cussion here constituted the main sub- 
 ject of inquiry, and was definitely 
 settled. *f And took Titus with me 
 also. Luke, in the Acts of the Apos- 
 tles (xv. 2), says, that there were 
 others with Paul and Barnabas on that 
 journey to Jerusalem. But who they 
 were he does not mention. It is by 
 no means certain that Titus was ap- 
 pointed by the church to go to Jerusa- 
 lem ; but the contrary is more probable. 
 Paul seems to have taken him with 
 him as a private affair ; but the reason 
 is not mentioned. It may have been to 
 show his Christian liberty, and his 
 sense of what he had a right to do ; or 
 it may have been to furnish a case on 
 the subject of inquiry, and submit the 
 matter to them whether Titus was to be 
 circumcised. He was a Greek ; but he 
 had been converted to Christianity. 
 Paul had not circumcised him ; but had 
 admitted him to the full privileges of 
 the Christian church. Here then was 
 a case in point ,• and it may have been 
 important to have had such a case 
 before them that they might fully under- 
 stand it. This, as Doddridge properly 
 remarks, is the first mention which 
 occurs of Titus. He is not mentioned 
 by Luke in the Acts of the Apostles, 
 and though his name occurs several 
 times in the second epistle to the 
 Corinthians (ii. 13; vii. 6; viii. 6. 16. 23; 
 xii. 18), yet it is to be remembered that 
 that epistle was written a considerable 
 time after this to the Galatians. Titus 
 was a Greek, and was doubtless con- 
 
 tion, and communicated unto 
 
 verted by the labours of Paul, for he 
 calls him his own son. Tit. i. 4. He at- 
 tended Paul frequently in his travels ; 
 was employed by him in important 
 services (see 2 Cor. in the places referred 
 to above) ; was left by him in Crete 
 to set in order the things that were 
 wanting, and to ordain elders there 
 (Tit. i. 5) ; subsequently he went 
 into Dalmatia (2 Tim. iv. 10), and is 
 supposed to have returned again to 
 Crete, whence it is said he propagated 
 the gospel in the neighbouring islands, 
 and died at the age of 94. — Calmet. 
 
 2. And I ivent up by revelation. 
 Not for the purpose of receiving in- 
 struction from the apostles there in 
 regard to the nature of the Christian 
 religion. It is to be remembered that 
 the design for which Paul states this is, 
 to show that he had not received the gos- 
 pel from men. He is careful, therefore, 
 to state that he went up by the express 
 command of God. He did not go up 
 to receive instructions from the apostles 
 there in regard to his own work, or to 
 be confirmed by them in his apostolic 
 office, but he went to submit an im- 
 portant question pertaining to the 
 church at large. In Acts xv. 2, it is 
 said that Paul and Barnabas went up 
 by the appointment of the church at 
 Antioch. But there is no discrepancy 
 between that account and this, for 
 though he was designated by the church 
 there, there is no improbability in sup- 
 posing that he was directed by a special 
 revelation to comply with their request 
 The reason why he says that he went 
 up by direct revelation seems to be, to 
 show that he did not seek instruction 
 from the apostles ; he did not go of his 
 own accord to consult with them as if 
 he were dependent on them ; but even 
 in a case when he went to advise with 
 them he was under the influence of 
 express and direct revelation, proving 
 that he was as much commissioned by 
 God as they were. ^ And communi- 
 cated unto them that gospel, &c. Made 
 them acquainted with the doctrines 
 which he preached among the heathen. 
 
A. D. 58.] CHAPTER II. 
 
 30& 
 
 them that gospel which I preach 
 
 He stated fully the principles on which 
 he acted; the nature of the gospel 
 which he taught ; and his doctrine about 
 the exemption of the Gentiles from the 
 obligations of the law of Moses. He 
 thus satisfied them in regard to his 
 views of the gospel ; and showed them 
 that he understood the system of Chris- 
 tianity which had been revealed. The 
 result was, that they had entire confi- 
 dence in him, and admitted him to 
 entire fellowship with them. ver. 9. 
 "| But privately. Marg. Several!//. 
 Gr. x.ut iSictv. The phrase means that 
 he did it not in a public manner; not 
 before a promiscuous assembly ; not 
 even before all the apostles collected 
 together, but in a private manner to a 
 few of the leaders and chief persons. 
 He made a private explanation of his 
 motives and views, that they might un- 
 derstand it before it became a matter of 
 public discussion. The point on which 
 Paul made this private explanation was 
 not whether the gospel was to be 
 preached to the Gentiles, for on that 
 they had no doubt after the revelation 
 to Peter (Acts x.) ; but whether the 
 rites of the Jews were to be imposed on 
 the Gentile converts. Paul explained 
 his views and his practice on that point, 
 which were that he did not impose those 
 rites on the Gentiles; that he taught 
 that men might be justified without 
 their observance; and that they were 
 not necessary in order to salvation. 
 The reasons why he sought this private 
 interview with the leading men in Jeru- 
 salem he has not stated. But we may 
 suppose that they were something like 
 the following. (1.) The Jews in ge- 
 neral had very strong attachment to 
 their own customs, and this attachment 
 was found in a high, degree among 
 those who were converted from among 
 them to the Christian faith. They 
 would be strongly excited, therefore, by 
 the doctrine that those customs were 
 not necessary to be observed. (2.) If 
 the matter were submitted to a promis- 
 cuous assembly of converts from Juda- 
 26* 
 
 among the Gentiles ; but * pri- 
 
 * or, severally. 
 
 ism, it could not not fail to produce 
 great excitement. They could not be 
 made readily to understand the reasons 
 why Paul acted in this manner; there 
 would be no possibility in an excited 
 assemblage to offer the explanations 
 which might be desirable; and after 
 every explanation which could be given 
 in this manner, they might have been 
 unable to understand all the circum- 
 stances of the case. (3.) If a few of 
 the principal men were made to under- 
 stand it, Paul felt assured that their 
 influence would be such as to prevent 
 any great difficulty. He therefore 
 sought an early opportunity to lay the 
 case before them in private, and to se- 
 cure their favour; and this course con- 
 tributed to the happy issue of the whole 
 affair. See Acts xv. There was indeed 
 much disputation when the question 
 came to be submitted to " the apostles 
 and elders" (Acts xv. 7) ; many of the 
 sect of the Pharisees in that assembly 
 maintained that it was needful to teach 
 the Gentiles that the law of Moses was 
 to be kept (Acts xv. 5) ; and no one 
 can tell what would have been the issue 
 of that discussion among the excitable 
 minds of the converts from Judaism, 
 had not Paul taken the precaution, as 
 he here says, to have submitted the case 
 in private to those who were of " repu- 
 tation," and if Peter and James had not 
 in this manner been satisfied, and had 
 not submitted the views which they did, 
 as recorded in Acts xv. 7 — 21, and 
 which terminated the whole contro- 
 versy. We may just remark here that 
 this fact furnishes an argument such as 
 Paley has dwelt so much on in his 
 Horse PaulintE — though he has not re- 
 ferred to this — of what he calls unde- 
 signed coincidences. The affair in Acts 
 xv. and the course of the debate, looks 
 very much as if Peter and James had 
 had some conference with Paul in pri- 
 vate, and had had an opportunity of 
 understanding fully his views on the 
 subject before the matter came before the 
 " apostles and elders" in public, though 
 
306 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A.D 58. 
 
 vately to them which were of 
 reputation, lest by any means I 
 
 no such private conference is there re- 
 ferred to by Luke. But on turning to 
 the epistle to the Galatians, we find in 
 fact that he had on one occasion be- 
 fore seen the same Peter and James 
 (ch. i. 18. 19) ; and that he had had a 
 private interview with those " of reputa- 
 tion" on these very points, and particu- 
 larly that James, Peter, and John had 
 approved his course, and given to him 
 and Barnabas the right-hand of fellow- 
 ship, ch. ii. 9. Thus understood, the 
 case here referred to was one of the 
 most consummate instances of prudence 
 that occurred in the life of Paul ; and 
 from this case we may learn, (1.) That 
 when a difficulty is to be settled involv- 
 ing great principles, and embracing a 
 great many points, it is better to seek an 
 opportunity of private explanation than 
 to submit it to a promiscuous multitude 
 or to public debate. It is not well to 
 attempt to settle important points when 
 the passions of a promiscuous assembly 
 may be excited, and where prejudices 
 are strong. It is better to do it by pri- 
 vate explanations, when there is an 
 opportunity coolly to ask questions and 
 to state the facts just as they are. (2.) 
 The importance of securing the coun- 
 tenance of influential men in a popular 
 assembly ; of having men in the assem- 
 bly who would understand the whole 
 case. It was moraliy certain that if 
 such men as Peter and James were made 
 to understand the case, there would be 
 little difficulty in arriving at an amica- 
 ble adjustment of the difficulty. (3.) 
 Though this passage does not refer to 
 preaching the gospel in general, since 
 the gospel here submitted to the men of 
 reputation was the question referred to 
 above, yet we may remark, that great 
 prudence should be used in preaching ; 
 in stating truths that may excite preju- 
 dices, or when we have reason to appre- 
 hend prejudices; and that it is often best 
 to preach the gospel to men of reputa- 
 tion {k*t Uijlv) separately, or pri- 
 vately. In this way the truth can be 
 
 a should run, or had run, in 
 vain. 
 
 a Ph. 2. 16. 
 
 made to bear on the conscience ; it may 
 be better adapted to the character of the 
 individual ; he may put himself less in 
 a state of defence, and guard himself 
 less against the proper influences of 
 truth. And especially is this true in 
 conversing with persons on the subject 
 of religion. It should be if possible 
 alone, or privately. Almost any man 
 may be approached on the subject of 
 religion if it be done when he is alone , 
 when he is at leisure, and if it be done 
 in a kind spirit. Almost any man will 
 become irritated if you address him 
 personally in a promiscuous assembly, 
 or even with his family around him. I 
 have never in more than in one or two 
 instances been unkindly treated when I 
 have addressed an individual on the 
 subject of religion if he was alone ; and 
 though a minister should never shrink 
 from stating the truth, and should never 
 be afraid of man, however exalted his 
 rank, or great his talents, or vast his 
 wealth, yet he will probably meet with 
 most success when he discourses pri- 
 vately to " them which are of reputa- 
 tion." ^ To them which were of re- 
 putation. Meaning here the leading 
 men among the apostles. Tindal ren- 
 ders this, " which are counted chefe." 
 Doddridge, " those of greatest note in 
 the church." The Greek is, literally, 
 " those who seem," more fully in ver. G ; 
 "who seem to be something," i. e. 
 who are persons of note, or who are dis- 
 tinguished, t Lest by any means I 
 should run, or had run in vain. Lest 
 the effects of my labours and journeys 
 should be lost Paul feared that if he 
 did not take this method of laying the 
 case before them privately, they would 
 not understand it. Others might mis- 
 represent him, or their prejudices might 
 be excited, and when the case came be- 
 fore the assembled apostles and elders, a 
 decision might be adopted which would 
 go to prove that he had been entirely 
 wrong in his views, or which would 
 lead those whom he had taught, to be- 
 
A.D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 307 
 
 3 But neither Titns, who was 
 with me, being a Greek, was 
 compelled to be circumcised : 
 
 lieve that he was, and which would 
 greatly hinder and embarrass him in 
 his future movements. In order to pre- 
 vent this, therefore, and to secure a just 
 decision, and one which would not 
 hinder his future usefulness, he had 
 sought this private interview, and thus 
 his object was gained. 
 
 3. But neither Titus, who was with 
 me. Paul introduces this case of Titus 
 undoubtedly to show that circumcision 
 was not necessary to salvation. It was 
 a case just in point. He had gone up 
 to Jerusalem with express reference to 
 this question. Here was a man whom 
 he had admitted to the Christian church 
 without circumcising him. He claimed 
 that he had a right to do so ; and that 
 circumcision was not necessary in order 
 to salvation. If it were necessary, it 
 would have been proper that Titus 
 should have been compelled to submit 
 to it. But Paul says this was not de- 
 manded ; or if demanded by any, the 
 point was yielded, and he was not com- 
 pelled to be circumcised. It is to be 
 remembered that this was at Jerusalem ; 
 that it was a case submitted to the apos- 
 tles there ; and that consequently the 
 determination of this case settled the 
 whole controversy about the obligation 
 of the Mosaic laws on the Gentile con- 
 verts. It. is quite evident from the 
 whole statement here, that Paul did not 
 intend that Titus should be circumcised ; 
 that he maintained that it was not neces- 
 sary ; and that he resisted it when it 
 was demanded, ver. 4, 5. Yet on another 
 occasion he himself performed the act 
 of circumcision on Timothy. Acts xvi. 
 3. But there is no inconsistency in 
 his conduct. In the case of Titus it 
 was demanded as a matter of right and 
 as obligatory on him, and he resisted 
 the principle as dangerous. In the 
 case of Timothy, it was a voluntary 
 compliance on his part with the usual 
 customs of the Jews, where it was not 
 pressed as a matter of obligation, and 
 where it would not be understood as 
 
 4 And that because of false 
 a brethren unawares brought in, 
 
 a Ac. 15. 1, 24. 
 
 indispensable to salvation. No danger 
 would follow from compliance with the 
 custom, and it might do much to con- 
 ciliate the favour of the Jews, and he 
 therefore submitted to it. Paul would 
 not have hesitated to have circumcised 
 Titus in the same circumstances in 
 which it was done to Timothy ; but 
 the circumstances were different ; and 
 when it was insisted on as a matter of 
 principle and of obligation, it became a 
 matter of principle and of obligation 
 with him to oppose it. ^ Being a 
 Greek. Born of Gentile parents, of 
 course he had not been circumcised. 
 Probably both his parents were Greeks. 
 The case with Timothy was somewhat 
 different. His mother was a Jewess, 
 but his father was a Greek. Acts xvi. 3. 
 1 Was compelled to be circumcised. I 
 think it is implied here that this was 
 demanded and insisted on by some that 
 he should be circumcised. It is also 
 implied that Paul resisted it, and the 
 point was yielded, thus settling the 
 great and important principle that it 
 was not necessary in order to salvation. 
 See ver. 5. 
 
 4. And that because of false bre- 
 thren. Who these false brethren were 
 is not certainly known, nor is it known 
 whether he refers to those who were at 
 Jerusalem or to those who were at An- 
 tioch. It is probable that he refers to 
 Judaizing Christians, or persons who 
 claimed to be Christians and to have 
 been converted from Judaism. Whether 
 they were dissemblers and hypocrite*, 
 or whether they were so imperfectly 
 acquainted with Christianity, and so 
 obstinate, opinionated, and perverse, 
 though really in some respects good 
 men, that they were conscientious in 
 this, it is not easy to determine. It is 
 clear, however, that they opposed the 
 apostle Paul ; that they regarded him as 
 teaching dangerous doctrines ; that they 
 perverted and misstated his views ; and 
 that they claimed to have clearer views 
 of the nature of the true religion than 
 
308 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 who came in privily to spy out 
 our liberty a which we have in 
 
 ac. 5.1, 13. 
 
 he had. Such adversaries he met every- 
 where (2 Cor. xi. 26) ; and it required 
 ail his tact and skill to meet their plausi- 
 ble representations. It is evident here 
 that Paul is assigning a reason for 
 something which he had done, and that 
 reason was to counteract the influence of 
 the " false brethren" in the case. But 
 what is the thing concerning which he 
 assigns a reason? It is commonly sup- 
 posed to have been on account of the 
 fact that he did not submit to the cir- 
 cumcision of Titus, and that he means 
 to say that he resisted that in order to 
 counteract their influence, and defeat 
 their designs. But I would submit 
 whether ver. 3 is not to be regarded as 
 a parenthesis, and whether the fact for 
 which he assigns a reason is not that he 
 sought a private interview with the 
 leading men among the apostles ] ver. 2. 
 The reason of his doing that would be 
 obvious. In this way he could more 
 easily counteract the influence of the 
 false brethren. He could make a full 
 statement of his doctrines. He could 
 meet their inquiries, and anticipate the 
 objections of his enemies. He could 
 thus secure the influence of the leading 
 apostles in his favour, and effectually 
 prevent all the efforts of the false 
 brethren to impose the Jewish rites on 
 Gentile converts. \ Unawares brought 
 in. The word rendered "unawares 
 (fl-atgyjrcutTsuj) is derived from a verb 
 meaning to lead in by the side of others, 
 to introduce along with others; and 
 then to lead or bring in by stealth, to 
 smuggle in. — Robinson, Lex. The verb 
 occurs nowhere in the New Testament 
 but in 2 Pet. ii. 1, where it is applied 
 to heresies, and is rendered "Who 
 privily shall bring in." Here it refers 
 probably to men who had been artfully 
 introduced into the ministry, who 
 made pretensions to piety, but who 
 were either strangers to it, or who were 
 greatly ignorant of the true nature of the 
 Christian system ; and who were dis- 
 posed to take every advantage, and to 
 
 Christ Jesus, that they might 
 bring us into bondage : h 
 
 6 2 Co. 11.20. c. 4. 3,9. 
 
 impose on others the observance of the 
 peculiar rites of the Mosaic economy. 
 Into what they were brought, the apos- 
 tle does not say. It may have been that 
 they had been introduced into the mi- 
 nistry in this manner {Doddridge) ; or it 
 may be that they were introduced into 
 the " assembly" where the apostles were 
 collected to deliberate on the subject. — 
 Chandler. I think it probable that 
 Paul refers to the occurrences in Jerusa- 
 lem, and that these false brethren had 
 been introduced from Antioch or some 
 other place where Paul had been 
 preaching, or that they were persons 
 whom his adversaries had introduced to 
 demand that Titus should be circum- 
 cised, under the plausible pretence that 
 the laws of Moses required it, but really 
 in order that there might be such proof 
 as they desired that this rite was to 
 be imposed on the Gentile converts. If 
 Paul was compelled to submit to this ; 
 if they could carry this point, it would 
 be just such an instance as they needed, 
 and would settle the whole inquiry, 
 and prove that the Mosaic laws were to 
 be imposed on the Gentile converts. 
 This was the reason why Paul so stre- 
 nuously opposed it. 1 To spy out our 
 liberty which we have in Christ Jesus. 
 In the practice of the Christian religion. 
 The liberty referred to was, doubtless, 
 the liberty from the painful, expensive, 
 and onerous rites of the Jewish religion. 
 See ch. v. 1. Their object in spying 
 out the liberty which Paul and others 
 had, was, undoubtedly, to be witnesses 
 of the fact that they did not observe the 
 peculiar rites of the Mosaic system ; to 
 make report of it; to insist on their 
 complying with those customs, and 
 thus to secure the imposition of those 
 rites on the Gentile converts. Their 
 first object was to satisfy themselves of 
 the fact that Paul did not insist on the 
 observance of their customs ; and then 
 to secure, by the authority of the apos- 
 tles, an injunction or order that Titus 
 should be circumcised, and that Paul 
 
A.D.58.] 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 309 
 
 5 To whom we gave place by 
 subjection, no, not for an hour ; 
 that the truth of the gospel might 
 continue with you. 
 
 and the converts made under his mi- 
 nistry should be required to comply with 
 those laws. % That they might bring 
 us into bondage. Into bondage to the 
 laws of Moses. See Note, Acts xv. 10. 
 5. To whom we gave place by sub- 
 jection, no, not fur an hour. We did 
 not submit to this at all. We did not 
 yield even for the shortest time. We 
 did not waver in our opposition to their 
 demands, or in the slightest degree be- 
 come subject to their wishes. We 
 steadily opposed their claims, in order 
 that the great principle might be forever 
 settled that the laws of Moses were not 
 to be imposed as obligatory on the Gen- 
 tile converts. This I take to be the 
 clear and obvious sense of this passage, 
 though there has been a great variety of 
 opinions on it. A considerable number 
 of MSS. omit the words tit di£\, ' to 
 whom neither' (see Mill, Koppe, and 
 Griesbach), and then the sense would 
 be reversed, that Paul did yield to then; 
 for or after a short time, in order that he 
 might in this way better consult the 
 permanent interests of the gospel. 
 This opinion has been gaining ground 
 for the last century, that the passage 
 here has been corrupted ; but it is by 
 no means confirmed. The ancient ver- 
 sions, the Syriac, the Vulgate, and the 
 Arabic, accord with the usual reading of 
 the text. So also do by far the largest 
 portion of MSS., and such, it seems to 
 me, is the sense demanded by the con- 
 nection. Paul means, in the whole 
 passage, to say, that a great principle 
 was settled. That the question came 
 op fairly whether the Mosaic rites were 
 to be imposed on Gentile converts. 
 That false brethren were introduced 
 who demanded it ; and that he steadily 
 maintained his ground. He did not 
 yield a moment. He felt that a great 
 principle was involved ; and though on 
 all proper occasions he was willing to 
 \\~\A and to become all things to all 
 
 6 But of those who seemed • 
 to be somewhat, whatsoever they 
 were, it maketh no matter tome : 
 
 a c. 6. 3. 
 
 men, yet here he did not court them, or 
 temporize with them in the least. The 
 phrase " by subjection" here means, that 
 he did not suffer himself to be compelled 
 to yield. The phrase "for an hour" is 
 equivalent to the shortest period of 
 time. He did not waver, or yield at all. 
 \ That the truth of the gospel might 
 continue with you. That the great 
 principle of the Christian religion which 
 had been taught you might continue, 
 and that you might enjoy the full bene- 
 fit of the pure gospel, without its being 
 intermingled with any false views. 
 Paul had defended these same views 
 among the Galatians, and he now sought 
 that the same views might be confirmed 
 by the clear decision of the college of 
 apostles at Jerusalem. 
 
 6. But of those who seemed to be 
 somewhat. See ver. 2. This undoubt- 
 edly refers to those who were the most 
 eminent among the apostles at Jerusa- 
 lem. There is an apparent harshness 
 in our common translation which is 
 unnecessary. The word here used 
 (■fiKwvvuiv) denotes those who were 
 thought to be, or who were of reputa- 
 tion ; that is, men who were of note 
 and influence among the apostles. The 
 object of referring to them here is, to 
 show that he had the concurrence and 
 approbation of the most eminent of the 
 apostles to the course which he had 
 pursued, ^ Whatsoever they were, it 
 maketh no matter to me. Tindal ren- 
 ders this, " What they were in time 
 passed, it maketh no matter to me." 
 The idea seems to be this. Paul means 
 to say that whatever was their real 
 rank and standing, it did not in the 
 least affect his authority as an apostle, 
 or his argument. While he rejoiced 
 in their concurrence, and while he 
 sought their approbation, yet he did not 
 admit for a moment that he was in- 
 ferior to them as an apostle, or depend- 
 ent on them for the justness of his 
 
310 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 God a accepteth no man's per- 
 son : for they who seemed to be 
 somewhat, in conference added 
 nothing to me ; 
 
 7 But contrariwise, when they 
 saw that the gospel of the uncir- 
 
 a Ac. 10. 34. Ro. 2. II. 
 
 views. What they were, or what they 
 might be thought to be, was immaterial 
 to his claims as an apostle, and imma- 
 terial to the authority of his own views 
 as an apostle. He had derived his gos- 
 pel from the Lord Jesus; and he had 
 the fullest assurance that his views were 
 just. Paul makes this remark evi- 
 dently in keeping with all that he had 
 said, that he did not regard himself as in 
 any manner dependent on them for his 
 authority. He did not treat them with 
 disrespect ; but he did not regard them 
 as having a right to claim an authority 
 over him. f God accepteth no man's 
 person. See Notes, Acts x. 34. Rom. 
 ii. 11. This is a general truth, that 
 God is not influenced in his judgment 
 by a regard to the rank, or wealth, or 
 external condition of any one. Its 
 particular meaning here is, that the 
 authority of the apostles was not to be 
 measured by their external rank, or by 
 the measure of reputation which they 
 had among men. If, therefore, it were 
 to be admitted that he himself was 
 not in circumstances of so much ex- 
 ternal honour as the other apostles, 
 or that they were esteemed to be of 
 more elevated rank than he was, still 
 he did not admit that this gave them 
 a claim to any higher authority. God 
 was not influenced in his judgment 
 by any such consideration ; and Paul 
 therefore claimed that all the apos- 
 tles were in fact on a level in regard 
 to their authority, t 1> 1 conference. 
 When I conferred with them. ver. 2. 
 They did not then impose on me any 
 new obligations ; they did not com- 
 municate any thing to me of which I 
 was before ignorant 
 
 7. The gospel of the uncircumcision. 
 The duty of preaching the gospel to 
 the uncircumcised part of the world; that 
 
 cumcision was committed unto 
 me, * as the gospel of the cir- 
 cumcision was unto Peter; 
 
 8 (For he that wrought effect- 
 ually in Peter to the apostleship 
 of the circumcision, the same 
 
 b 1 Th. 2. 4. 1 Ti. 2. 7. 
 
 is, to the Gentiles. Paul had received 
 this as his peculiar office when he was 
 converted and called to the ministry 
 (see Acts ix. 15; xxii. 21) ; and they 
 now perceived that he had been specially 
 intrusted with this office, from the re- 
 markable success which had attended 
 his labours. It is evidently not meant 
 here that Paul was to preach only to 
 the Gentiles and Peter only to the 
 Jews, for Paul often preached in the 
 synagogues of the Jews, and Peter was 
 the first who preached to a Gentile 
 (Acts x.) ; but it is meant that it was 
 the main business of Paul to preach to 
 the Gentiles, or that this was especially 
 intrusted to him. ^ As the gospel if 
 the circumcision. As the office of 
 preaching the gospel to the Jews. 
 Tf Was unto Peter. Peter was to 
 preach principally to the circumcised 
 Jews. It is evident that until this time 
 Peter had been principally employed in 
 preaching to the Jews. Paul selects 
 Peter here particularly, doubtless be- 
 cause he was the oldest of the apostles, 
 and in order to show that he was him- 
 self regarded as on a level in regard to 
 the apostleship with the most aged and 
 venerable of those who had been called 
 to the apostolic office by the personal 
 ministry of the Lord Jesus. 
 
 8. For he that wrought effectually 
 in Peter, &c. Or by the means or 
 agency of Peter. The argument here 
 is, that the same effects had been pro- 
 duced under the ministry of Paul 
 among the Gentiles which had been 
 under the preaching of Peter among 
 the Jews. It is inferred, therefore, that 
 God had called both to the apostolic 
 office. See this argument illustrated 
 in the Notes on Acts xi. 17. Tf The 
 same ivas mighty in me. &c. In ena- 
 bling me to work miracles, and in the 
 
A.D.58.] 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 311 
 
 was mighty in me toward the 
 Gentiles;) 
 
 9 And when James, Cephas, 
 and John, who seemed to be pil- 
 lars, a perceived the grace h that 
 
 a Mat. 16. 18. Ep. 2.20. 
 
 success which attended the minis- 
 try. 
 
 9. And when James, Cephas, and 
 John, ivho seemed to be pillars. That 
 is, pillars or supports in the church. 
 The word rendered pillars (o-tvxqi) 
 means properly firm support; then 
 persons of influence and authority, as 
 in a church, or that support a church as 
 a pillar or column does an edifice. In 
 regard to James, see Note on ch. i. 19. 
 Com p. Acts xv. 13. Cephas or Peter 
 was the most aged of the apostles, and 
 regarded as at the head of the apos- 
 tolical college. John was the beloved 
 disciple, and his influence in the church 
 must of necessity have been great. Paul 
 felt that if he had the countenance of 
 these men, it would be an important 
 proof to the churches of Galatia that 
 he had a right to regard himself as an 
 apostle. Their countenance was ex- 
 pressed in the most full and decisive 
 manner, f Perceived the grace that was 
 given unto me. That is, the favour 
 that had been shown to me by the 
 great Head of the church, in so abun- 
 dantly blessing my labours among the 
 Gentiles. ^ They gave unto me. and 
 Barnabas the right-hands of fellow- 
 ship. The right-hand in token of fel- 
 lowship or favour. They thus publicly 
 acknowledged us as fellow-labourers, 
 and expressed the utmost confidence in 
 us. To give the right-hand with us is 
 a token of friendly salutation, and it 
 seems that it was a mode of salutation 
 not unknown in the times of the apos- 
 tles. They were thus recognised as 
 associated with the apostles in the great 
 work of spreading the gospel around 
 the world. Whether this was done in 
 a public manner is not certainly known ; 
 but it was probably in the presence of 
 the church, or possibly at the close of 
 
 was given unto me, they gave 
 to me and Barnabas the right- 
 hands of fellowship ; that we 
 should go unto the heathen, and 
 they unto the circumcision. 
 
 bRo. 1.5. 12.3,6. 
 
 the council referred to in Acts xv. 
 f That we should go unto the heathen. 
 To preach the gospel, and to establish 
 churches. In this way the whole mat- 
 ter was settled, and settled as Paul de- 
 sired it to be. A delightful harmony 
 was produced between Paul and the 
 apostles at Jerusalem ; and the result 
 showed the wisdom of the course which 
 he had adopted. There had been no 
 harsh contention or strife. No jealousies 
 had been suffered to arise. Paul had 
 sought an opportunity of a full state- 
 ment of his views to them in private 
 (ver. 2), and they had been entirely 
 satisfied that God had called him and 
 Barnabas to the work of making known 
 the gospel among the heathen. Instead 
 of being jealous at their success, they 
 had rejoiced in it; and instead of 
 throwing any obstacle in their way, 
 they cordially gave them the right-hand. 
 How easy would it be always to pre- 
 vent jealousies and strifes in the same 
 way ! If there was, on the one hand, 
 the same readiness for a full and frank 
 explanation ; and if, on the other, the 
 same freedom from envy at remarkable 
 success, how many strifes that have dis- 
 graced the church might have been 
 avoided ! The true way to avoid strife is 
 just that which is here proposed. Let 
 there be on both sides perfect frankness ; 
 let there be a willingness to explain and 
 state things just as they are ; and let 
 there be a disposition to rejoice in the 
 talents, and zeal, and success of others, 
 even though it should far outstrip our 
 own, and contention in the church 
 would cease, and every devoted and suc- 
 cessful minister of the gospel would re- 
 ceive the right-hand of fellowship from 
 all — however venerable by age or au- 
 thority — who love the cause of true 
 religion. 
 
312 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 10 Only they would that we 
 should remember the poor ; the 
 
 a Ac. 11.30. Ro. 15.25. 
 
 10. Only they would that we should 
 remember the poor. That is, as I sup- 
 pose, the poor Christians in Judea. It 
 can hardly be supposed that it would be 
 necessary to make this an express stipu- 
 lation in regard to the converts from 
 among the Gentiles, and it would not 
 have been very pertinent to the case 
 before them to have done so. The ob- 
 ject was, to bind together the Chris- 
 tians from among the heathen and from 
 among the Jews, and to prevent aliena- 
 tion and unkind feeling. It might 
 have been alleged that Paul was dis- 
 posed to forget his own countrymen 
 altogether ; that he regarded himself as 
 so entirely the apostle of the Gentiles 
 that he would become wholly alienated 
 from those who were his " kinsmen ac- 
 cording to the flesh," and thus it might 
 be apprehended that unpleasant feelings 
 would be engendered among those who 
 had been converted from among the 
 Jews. Now nothing could be better 
 adapted to allay this than for him to 
 pledge himself to feel a deep interest in 
 the poor saints among the Jewish con- 
 verts ; to remember them in his pray- 
 ers ; and to endeavour to secure con- 
 tributions for their wants. Thus he 
 would show that he was not alienated 
 from his countrymen ; and thus the 
 whole church would be united in the 
 closest bonds. It is probable that the 
 Christians in Judea were at that time 
 suffering the ills of poverty arising 
 either from some public persecution, or 
 from the fact that they were subject to 
 the displeasure of their countrymen. 
 All who know the peculiar feelings of 
 the Jews at that time in regard to Chris- 
 tians, must see at once that many of the 
 followers of Jesus of Nazareth would 
 be subjected to great inconveniences 
 on account of their attachment to him. 
 Many a wife might be disowned by her 
 husband ; many a child disinherited by 
 a parent; many a man might be thrown 
 out of employment by the fact that 
 others would not countenance him; 
 
 same which I ° also was forward 
 to do. 
 
 1 1 But when Peter was come 
 
 and hence many of the Christians 
 would be poor. It became, therefore, 
 an object of special importance to pro- 
 vide for them ; and hence this is so often 
 referred to in the New Testament. In 
 addition to this, the church in Judea 
 was afflicted with famine. Comp. Acts 
 xi. 30. Rom. xv. 25 — 27. 1 Cor. xvi. 
 I, 2. 2 Cor. viii. 1—7. <f The same 
 which I also was forward to do. See 
 the passages just referred to. Paul in- 
 terested himself much in the collection 
 for the poor saints at Jerusalem, and in 
 this way he furnished the fullest evi- 
 dence that he was not alienated from 
 them, but that he felt the deepest inte- 
 rest in those who were his kindred. One 
 of the proper ways of securing union 
 in the church is to have the poor with 
 them and depending on them for sup- 
 port; and hence every church has some 
 poor persons as one of the bonds of 
 union. The best way to unite all Chris- 
 tians, and to prevent alienation, and 
 jealousy, and strife, is to have a great 
 common object of charity, in which all 
 are interested and to which all may con- 
 tribute. Such a common object for all 
 Christians is a sinful world. All who 
 bear the Christian name may unite in 
 promoting its salvation, and nothing 
 would promote union in the now divided 
 and distracted church of Christ like a 
 deep and common interest in the salva- 
 tion of all mankind. 
 
 11. But when Peter was come to 
 Antioch. On the situation of Antioch, 
 see Note, Acts xi. 19. The design for 
 which Paul introduces this statement 
 here is evident. It is to show that he 
 regarded himself as on a level with the 
 chief apostles, and that he did not ac- 
 knowledge his inferiority to any cf 
 them. Peter was the eldest, and proba- 
 bly the most honoured of the apostles. 
 Yet Paul says that he did not hesitate 
 to resist him in a case where Peter was 
 manifestly wrong, and thus showed that 
 he was as an apostle of the same stand- 
 ing as the others. Besides, what he 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 313 
 
 to * Antioch, I withstood him to 
 the face, because he was to be 
 blamed. 
 
 12 For before that certain 
 
 a Ac. 15. JW^ 
 
 said to Peter on that occasion was ex- 
 actly pertinent to the strain of the argu- 
 ment which he was pursuing with the 
 Galatians, and he therefore introduces 
 it (ver. 14 — 2 1 ) to show that he had held 
 the same doctrine all along, and that he 
 had defended it in the presence of Peter, 
 and in a case where Peter did not reply 
 to it. The time of this journey of Pe- 
 ter to Antioch cannot be ascertained ; 
 nor the occasion on which it occurred. 
 I think it is evident that it was after this 
 visit of Paul to Jerusalem, and the occa- 
 sion may have been to inspect the state 
 of the church at Antioch, and to com- 
 pose any differences of opinion which 
 may have existed there. But every 
 thing in regard to this is mere conjec- 
 ture ; and it is of little importance to 
 know when it occurred. 1 I withstood 
 him to the face. I openly opposed him, 
 and reproved him. Paul thus showed 
 that he was equal with Peter in his 
 apostolical authority and dignity. The 
 instance before us, is one of faithful 
 public reproof; and every circumstance 
 in it is worthy of special attention, as it 
 furnishes a most important illustration 
 cf the manner in which such reproof 
 should be conducted. The first thing 
 to be noted is, that it was done openly, 
 and with candour. It was reproof ad- 
 dressed to the offender himself. Paul 
 did not go to others and whisper his 
 suspicions ; he did not seek to under- 
 mine the influence and authority of 
 another by slander ; he did not calum- 
 niate him and then justify himself on 
 the ground that what he had said was 
 no more than true : he went to him at 
 once, and he frankly stated his views 
 and reproved him in a case where he 
 was manifestly wrong. This too was a 
 case so public and well known that 
 Paul made his remarks before the 
 church (ver. 14) because the church 
 was interested in it, and because the 
 conduct of Peter led the church into 
 27 
 
 came from James, he did eat 
 * with the Gentiles : but when 
 they were come, he withdrew 
 and separated himself, fearing 
 &Ac . n. a. 
 
 error. % Because he was to be blamed. 
 The word used here may either mean 
 because he had incurred blame, or be- 
 cause he deserved blame. The essential 
 idea is, that he had done wrong, and 
 that he was by his conduct doing injury 
 to the cause of religion. 
 
 12. For before that certain came. 
 Some of the Jews who had been con- 
 verted to Christianity. They evidently 
 observed in the strictest manner the 
 rites of the Jewish religion. | Came 
 from James. See Note on ch. i. 19. 
 Whether they were sent by James, or 
 whether they came of their own accord, 
 is unknown. It is evident only that 
 they had been intimate with James at 
 Jerusalem, and they doubtless pleaded 
 his authority. James had nothing to do 
 with the course which they pursued; 
 but the sense of the whole passage is, 
 that James was a leading man at Jeru- 
 salem, and that the rites of Moses were 
 observed there. When they came down 
 to Antioch, they of course observed 
 those rites, and insisted that others 
 should do it also. It is very evident 
 that at Jerusalem the peculiar rites of 
 the Jews were observed for a long time 
 by those who became Christian converts. 
 They would not at once cease to observe 
 them, and thus needlessly shock the 
 prejudices of their countrymen. See 
 Notes on Acts xxi. 21—25. t He did 
 eat with the Gentiles. Peter had been 
 taught that in the remarkable vision 
 which he saw as recorded in Acts x. 
 He had learned that God designed to 
 break down the wall of partition between 
 the Jews and the Gentiles, and ho 
 familiarly associated with them, and par- 
 took with them of their food. He evi- 
 dently disregarded the peculiar laws of 
 the Jews about meats and drinks, and 
 partook of the common food which was 
 in use among the Gentiles. Thus he 
 showed his belief that all the race was 
 henceforward to be regarded as on a 
 
314 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58 
 
 them which were of the circum- 
 cision. « 
 
 13 And the other Jews dis- 
 sembled likewise with him ; in- 
 somuch that Barnabas also was 
 
 level, and that the peculiar institutions 
 of the Jews were not to be considered 
 as binding, or to be imposed on others. 
 ^ But when they were come, he with- 
 drew and separated himself. He with- 
 drew from the Gentiles, and probably 
 from the Gentile converts to Chris- 
 tianity. The reason why he did this is 
 stated. He feared those who were of 
 the circumcision, or who had been Jews. 
 Whether they demanded this of him ; 
 whether they encountered him in debate; 
 or whether he silently separated him- 
 self from the Gentiles without their 
 having said any thing to him, is un- 
 known. But he feared the effect of 
 their opposition; he feared their re- 
 proaches; he feared the report wiiich 
 would be made to those at Jerusalem ; 
 and perhaps he apprehended tint a 
 tumult would be excited and a persecu- 
 tion commenced at Antioch by the Jews 
 who resided there. This is a melan- 
 choly illustration of Peter's character- 
 istic trait of mind. We see in this act 
 the same Peter who trembled when he 
 began to sink in the waves ; the same 
 Peter who denied his Lord. Bold, 
 ardent, zealous, and forward ; he was at 
 the same time timid and often irresolute ; 
 and he often had occasion for the deep- 
 est humility, and the most poignant re- 
 grets at the errors of his course. No 
 one can read his history without loving 
 his ardent and sincere attachment to his 
 master; and yet no one can read it 
 without a tear of regret that he was left 
 thus to do injury to his cause. No 
 man loved the Saviour more sincerely 
 than he did, yet his constitutional 
 timidity and irresoluteness of character 
 often led him to courses of life fitted 
 deeply to wound his cause. 
 
 13. And the other Jews. That is, 
 those who had been converted to Chris- 
 tianity. It is probable that they were 
 
 carried away with their dissimu- 
 lation. 
 
 14 But when I saw that they 
 walked not uprightly, according 
 to the truth a of the gospel, I said 
 
 a ver. 5. 
 
 induced to do it by the example of 
 Peter, as they would naturally regard 
 him as a leader, t Dissembled likewise 
 with him. Dissembled or concealed 
 their true sentiments. That is, they 
 attempted to conceal from those who 
 had come down from James the fact that 
 they had been in the habit of associating 
 with tlie Gentiles, and of eating with 
 them. From this it would appear that 
 they intended to conceal this wholly 
 from them, and that they withdrew from 
 the Gentiles before any thing had been 
 said to them by those who came down 
 from James. \ Insomuch that Barna- 
 bas also was carried aivay, <fec. Con- 
 cerning Barnabas, see Note, Actsiv. 36. 
 Barnabas was the intimate friend of 
 Paul. He had been associated with 
 him in very important labours ; and the 
 fact, therefore, that the conduct of Peter 
 was exciting so unhappy an influence 
 as even to lead so worthy and good a 
 man as he was into hypocrisy and error, 
 made it the more proper that Paul should 
 publicly notice and reprove the conduct 
 of Peter. It could not but be a painful 
 duty, but the welfare of the church and 
 the cause of religion demanded it, and 
 Paul did not shrink from what was so 
 obvious a duty. 
 
 14. But when I saw that they walked 
 not uprightly. To walk, in the Scrip- 
 tures, is usually expressive of conduct 
 or deportment ; and the idea here is, that 
 their conduct in this case was not ho- 
 nest, f According to the truth of the 
 gospel. According to the true spirit and 
 design of the gospel. That requires 
 perfect honesty and integrity ; and as 
 that was the rule by which Paul regu- 
 lated his life, and by which he felt that all 
 ought to regulate their conduct, he felt 
 himself called on openly to reprove the 
 principal person who had been in fault 
 The spirit of the world is crafty, cun- 
 
A. D. 58.] CHAPTER II 
 
 unto Peter b before them all, If 
 
 a 1 Ti. 5. 20. 
 
 ning, and crooked. The gospel would 
 correct all that wily policy, and would 
 lead man in a path of entire honesty 
 and truth. ^ I sa id unto Peter before 
 them all. That is, probably, before all 
 the church, or certainly before all who 
 had offended with him in the case. Had 
 this been a private affair, Paul would 
 doubtless have sought a private inter- 
 view with Peter, arid would have remon- 
 strated with him in private on the sub- 
 ject. But it was public. It was a case 
 where many were involved, and where 
 the interests of the church were at stake. 
 It was a case where it was very import- 
 ant to establish some fixed and just 
 principles, and he therefore took occa- 
 sion to remonstrate with him in public 
 on the subject. This might have been 
 at the close of public worship ; or it may 
 have been that the subject came up for 
 debate in some of their public meetings, 
 whether the rites of the Jews were to 
 be imposed on the Gentile converts. 
 This was a question which agitated all 
 the churches where the Jewish and Gen- 
 tile converts were intermingled ; and it 
 would not be strange that it should be 
 the subject of public debate at Antioch. 
 The fact that Paul reproved Peter before 
 "them all," proves, (1.) That he re- 
 garded himself, and was so regarded by 
 the church, as on an equality with Peter, 
 and as having equal authority with him. 
 (2.) That public reproof is right when 
 an offence has been public, and when 
 the church at large is interested, or is in 
 danger of being led into error. Comp. 
 1 Tim. v. 20. " Them that sin rebuke 
 before all, that others also may fear." 
 (3.) That it is a duty to reprove those 
 who err. It is a painful duty, and one 
 much neglected ; still it is a duty often 
 enjoined in the Scriptures, and one that 
 is of the deepest importance to the 
 church. He does a favour to another 
 man who, in a kind spirit, admonishes 
 him of his error, and reclaims him from 
 a course of sin. He does another the 
 deepest injury, who suffers sin unre- 
 
 315 
 
 thou, being a Jew, livest after the 
 manner of Gentiles, and not as do 
 
 buked to lie upon him, and who sees 
 him injuring himself and others, and 
 who is at no pains to admonish him for 
 his faults. (4.) If it is the duty of one 
 Christian to admonish another who is 
 an offender, and to do it in a kind spirit, 
 it is the duty of him who has offended 
 to receive the admonition in a kind spirit, 
 and with thankfulness. Excitable as 
 Peter was by nature, yet there is no evi- 
 dence that he became angry here, or that 
 he did not receive the admonition of his 
 brother Paul with perfect good temper, 
 and with an acknowledgment that Paul 
 was right and that he was wrong. In- 
 deed, the case was so plain, — as it usu- 
 ally is if men would be honest, — that he 
 seems to have felt that it was right, and 
 to have received the rebuke as became a 
 Christian. Peter, unhappily, was ac- 
 customed to rebukes ; and he was at 
 heart too good a man to be offended 
 when he was admonished that he had 
 done wrong. A good man is willing to 
 be reproved when he has erred, and it is 
 usually proof that there is much that is 
 wrong when we become excited and ir- 
 ritable if another admonishes us of our 
 faults. It may be added here, that no- 
 thing should be inferred from this in re- 
 gard to the inspiration or apostolic 
 authority of Peter. The fault was not 
 that he taught error of doctrine, but that 
 he sinned in conduct. Inspiration, 
 though it kept the apostles from teaching 
 error, did not keep them necessarily 
 from sin. A man may always teach the 
 truth, and yet be far from perfection in 
 practice. The case here proves that 
 Peter was not perfect, a fact proved by 
 his whole life ; it proves that he was 
 sometimes timid, and even, for a period, 
 time-serving, but it does not prove that 
 what he wrote for our guidance was 
 false and erroneous. % If thou, being a 
 Jew. A Jew by birth, f Livest after 
 the manner of the Gentiles. In eating, 
 •Sec, as he had done before the Judaizing 
 teachers came from Jerusalem, ver. 12. 
 *{ And not as do the Jews. Observing 
 
BIG 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 A. D. 68. 
 
 the Jews, why compellest thou 
 the Gentiles to live as do the 
 Jews ? 
 
 their peculiar customs, and their distinc- 
 tions of meats and drinks. ^ Why 
 compellest thou the Gentiles, &c. As 
 he would do, if he insisted that they 
 should be circumcised, and observe the 
 peculiar Jewish rites. The charge 
 against him was gross inconsistency in 
 doing this. "Is it not at least as lawful 
 for them to neglect the Jewish observ- 
 ances, as it was for thee to do it but a 
 few days ago?" — Doddridge. The 
 word here rendered "compellest," means 
 here moral compulsion or persuasion. 
 The idea is, that the conduct of Peter 
 was such as to lead the Gentiles to the 
 belief that it was necessary for them to 
 be circumcised in order to be saved. 
 For a similar use of the word, see Matt. 
 xiv. 22. Lukexiv.23. Acts xxviii. 19. 
 15. We who are Jews by nature. It 
 has long been a question whether this 
 and the following verses are to be re- 
 garded as a part of the address of Paul 
 to Peter, or the words of Paul as 
 a part of the epistle to the Galatians. 
 A great variety of opinion has prevailed 
 in regard to this. Grotius says, " Here 
 the narrative of Paul being closed, he 
 pursues his argument to the Galatians." 
 In this opinion Bloomfield and many 
 others concur. Rosenmiiller and many 
 others suppose that the address to Peter 
 is continued to ver. 21. Such seems to 
 be the most obvious interpretation, as 
 there is no break or change in the style, 
 nor any vestige of a transfer of the argu- 
 ment to the Galatians. But, on the 
 other hand, it may be urged, (1.) That 
 Paul in his writings often changes his 
 mode of address without indicating it. — 
 Bloomfield. (2.) That it is rather im- 
 probable that he should have gone into 
 so long a discourse with Peter on the 
 subject of justification. His purpose 
 was answered by the reproof of Peter for 
 his dissimulation ; and there is something 
 incongruous, it is said, in his instruct- 
 ing Peter at such length on the subject 
 of man's j ustification. Still i t appea rs to 
 
 15 We who are Jews by na- 
 ture, and not sinners ° of the Gen- 
 tiles, 
 
 a Ep.2. 3, 12. 
 
 me probable that this is to be regarded 
 as a part of the discourse of Paul to 
 Peter, to the close of ver. 21. The fol- 
 lowing reasons seem to me to require 
 this interpretation : — (1.) It is the most 
 natural and obvious — usually a safe rule 
 of interpretation. The discourse pro- 
 ceeds as if it were an address to Peter. 
 (2.) There r* a change at the beginning 
 of the next chapter, where Paul express- 
 ly addresses himself to the Galatians. 
 (3.) As to the impropriety of Paul's 
 addressing Peter at length on the sub- 
 ject of justification, we are to bear in 
 mind that he did not address him alone. 
 The reproof 'was addressed to Peter par- 
 ticularly, but it was "before them all" 
 (ver. 14) ; that is, before the assembled 
 church, or before the persons who had 
 been led astray by the conduct of Peter, 
 and who were in danger of error on the 
 subject of justification. Nothing, there- 
 fore, was more proper than for Paul to 
 continue his discourse for their benefit, 
 and to state to them fully the doctrine 
 of justification. And nothing was more 
 pertinent or proper for him now than to 
 report this to the Galatians as a part of 
 his argument to them, showing that he 
 had always, since his conversion, held 
 and defended the same doctrine on the 
 subject of the way in which men are to 
 be justified in the sight of God. It is, 
 therefore, I apprehend, to be regarded as 
 an address to Peter and the other Jews 
 who were present. ' We who were born 
 Jews.' 1 By nature. By birth ; or, 
 we were born Jews. We were not born 
 in the condition of the Gentiles. 1 And 
 not sinners of the Gentiles. This can- 
 not mean that Paul did not regard the 
 Jews as sinners, for his views on that 
 subject he has fully expressed in Rom. 
 ii. iii. But it must mean that the Jews 
 were not born under the disadvantages 
 of the Gentiles in regard to the true 
 knowledge of the way of salvation. 
 They were not left wholly in ignorance 
 about the way of justification, as the 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 317 
 
 16 Knowing that a a man is 
 not justified by the works of the 
 law, but by the faith b of Jesus 
 Christ, even we have believed in 
 
 a Ac. 13. 38, 39. Ro. 3. 20. 
 fcRo. 5. 1. c. 3. 11. 24. 
 
 Gentiles were. They knew, or they 
 might know, that men could not be 
 saved by their own works. It was also 
 true that they were under more restraint 
 than the Gentiles were, and though they 
 were sinners, yet they were not aban- 
 doned to so gross and open sensuality 
 as was the heathen world. They were 
 not idolaters, and wholly ignorant of the 
 law of God. 
 
 16. Kit owing. We who are Jews 
 by nature, or by birth. This cannot 
 mean that all the Jews knew this, or 
 that he who was a Jew knew it as a 
 matter of course, for many Jews were 
 ignorant of it, and many opposed it. 
 But it means that the persons here re- 
 ferred to, those who had been born Jews, 
 and who had been converted to Chris- 
 tianity, had had an opportunity to learn 
 and understand this, which the Gentiles 
 had not. This gospel had been preached 
 to them, and they had professedly em- 
 braced it. They were not left to the 
 gross darkness and ignorance on this 
 subject which pervaded the heathen 
 world, and they had had a better oppor- 
 tunity to learn it than the converts from 
 the Gentiles. They ought, therefore, to 
 act in a manner becoming their superior 
 light, and to show in all their conduct that 
 they fully believed that a man could not 
 be justified by obedience to the law of 
 Moses. This rendered the conduct of 
 Peter and the other Jews who " dissem- 
 bled" with him so entirely inexcusable. 
 They could not plead ignorance on this 
 vital subject, and yet they were pursuing 
 a course, the tendency of which was to 
 lead the Gentile converts to believe that 
 it was indispensable to observe the laws 
 of Moses, in order to be justified and 
 saved. J That a man is not justified by 
 the works of the law. See Notes on 
 Rom. i. 17 ; Hi. 20. 26 ; iv. 5. f But by 
 the faith of Jevus Christ. By believ- 
 27* 
 
 Jesus Christ, that we might be 
 justified by the faith of Christ, 
 and not by the works of the law : 
 for c by the works of the law shall 
 no flesh be justified. 
 
 c Ps. 143. 2. He. 7. 18, 19. 
 
 ing on Jesus Christ. See Notes, Mark 
 xvi. 16. Rom. iii. 22. f Even we 
 have believed in Jesus Christ. We are 
 therefore justified. The object of Paul 
 here seems to be to show, that as they 
 had believed in the Lord Jesus, and 
 thus had been justified, there was no 
 necessity of obeying the law of Moses 
 with any view to justification. The 
 thing had been fully done without the 
 deeds of the law, and it was now un- 
 reasonable and unnecessary to insist on 
 the observance of the Mosaic rites. 
 Tf For by the works of the law, Sec. 
 See Notes on Rom. iii. 20. 27. In this 
 verse, the apostle has stated in few words 
 the important doctrine of justification by 
 faith — the doctrine which Luther so 
 justly called, Articulus stantis, vel ca* 
 dent is ecclesise. In the notes referred 
 to above, particularly in the notes on 
 the Epistle to the Romans, I have 
 stated in various places what I con- 
 ceive to be the true doctrine on this 
 important subject. It may be useful, 
 however, to throw together in one con- 
 nected view, as briefly as possible, the 
 leading ideas on the subject of justifica- 
 tion, as it is revealed in the gospel. I. 
 Justification is properly a word applica- 
 ble to courts of justice, but is used in a 
 similar sense in common conversation 
 among men. An illustration will show 
 its nature. A man is charged, e. g. 
 with an act of trespass on his neigh- 
 bour's property. Now there are two 
 ways which he may take to justify him- 
 self, or to meet the charge, so as to be 
 regarded and treated as innocent. He 
 may, (a) Either deny that he performed 
 the act charged on him, or he may, (Z») 
 Admit that the deed was done, and set 
 up as a defence, that he had a right to- 
 do it. In either case, if the point be 
 maJe out, he will be just or innocent in 
 the sight of the law. The law will 
 
318 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 have nothing against him, and he will 
 be regarded and treated in the premises 
 as an innocent man ; or he has justified 
 himself in regard to the charge brought 
 against him. II. Charges of a very 
 serious nature are brought against man 
 by his Maker. He is charged with vio- 
 lating the law of God ; with a want of 
 love to his Maker ; with a corrupt, proud, 
 sensual heart; with being entirely 
 alienated from God by wicked works ; 
 in one word, with being entirely de- 
 praved. This charge extends to all 
 men ; and to the entire life of every 
 unrenewed man. It is not a charge 
 merely affecting the external conduct, 
 nor merely affecting the heart ; it is a 
 charge of entire alienation from God ; 
 a charge, in short, of total depravity. 
 See, especially, Rom. i., ii., hi. That this 
 charge is a very serious one, no one can 
 doubt. That it deeply affects the human 
 character and standing, is as clear. It 
 is a charge brought in the Bible ; and 
 God appeals in proof of it to the history 
 of the world, to every man's conscience, 
 and to the life of every one who has 
 lived; and on these facts, and on his 
 own power in searching the hearts, and 
 in knowing what is in man, he rests the 
 proofs of the charge. III. It is impos- 
 sible for man to vindicate himself from 
 this charge. He can neither show that 
 the thi7>gs charged have not been com' 
 mitted, nor that, having been commit- 
 ted, he had a right to do them. He 
 cannot prove that God is not right in all 
 the charges which he has made against 
 him in his word ; and he cannot prove 
 that it was right for him to do as he has 
 done. The charges against him are 
 facts which are undeniable, and the facts 
 are such as cannot be vindicated. But 
 if he can do neither of these things, then 
 he cannot be justified by the law. The 
 law will not acquit him. It holds him 
 guilty. It condemns him. No argu- 
 ment which he can use will show that 
 he is right, and that God is wrong. No 
 works that he can perform wilf be any 
 compensation for what he has already 
 done. No denial of the existence of 
 the facts charged will alter the case ; and 
 b*A must stand condemned by the law 
 
 of God. In the legal sense he cannot 
 be justified ; and justification, if it ever 
 exist at all, must be in a mode that is a 
 departure from the regular operation of 
 law, and in a mode which the law did 
 not contemplate, for no law makes any 
 provision for the pardon of those who 
 violate it. It must be by some system 
 which is distinct from the law, and in 
 which man may be justified on different 
 principles than those which the law con- 
 templates. IV. This other system of 
 justification is that which is revealed in 
 the gospel by the faith of the Lord 
 Jesus. It does not consist in either of 
 the following things. (1.) It is not 
 a system or plan where the Lord 
 Jesus takes the part of the sinner 
 against the law or against God. He 
 did not come to show that the sinner 
 was right, and that God was wrong. 
 He admitted most fully, and endeavour- 
 ed constantly to show, that God was 
 right, and that the sinner was wrong ; 
 nor can an instance be referred to where 
 the Saviour took the part of the sinner 
 against God in any such sense that he 
 endeavoured to show that the sinner 
 had not done the things charged on 
 him, or that he had a right to do them. 
 (2.) It is not that we are either inno- 
 cent, or are declared to be innocent. 
 God justifies the u ungodly." Rom. iv. 5. 
 We are not innocent ; we never have 
 been ; we never shall be ; and it is not 
 the design of the scheme to declare any 
 such untruth as that we are not person- 
 ally undeserving. It will be always 
 true that the justified sinner has no 
 claims to the mercy and favour of God. 
 (3.) It is not that we cease to be undeserv- 
 ing personally. He that is justified by 
 faith, and that goes to heaven, will go 
 there admitting that he deserves eternal 
 death, and that he is saved wholly by 
 favour and not by desert. (4.) It is 
 not a declaration on the part of God that 
 we have wrought out salvation, or that 
 we have any claim for what the Lord 
 Jesus has done. Such a declaration 
 would not be true, and would not be 
 made. (5.) It is not that the righteous- 
 ness of the Lord Jesus is transferred to 
 his people. Moral character cannot be 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 319 
 
 transferred. It adheres to the moral 
 agent as much as colour does to the 
 rays of light which cause it. It is not 
 true that we died for sin, and it cannot 
 be eo reckoned or imputed. It is not 
 true that we have any merit, or any 
 claim, and it cannot be so reckoned or 
 imputed. All the imputations of God 
 are according to truth; and he will al- 
 ways reckon us to be personally unde- 
 serving and sinful. But if justification 
 be none of these things, it may be 
 asked, what is it 1 I answer — It is the 
 declared purpose of God to regard and 
 treat those sinners who believe in the 
 Lord Jesus Christ as if they had not 
 sinned, on the ground of the merits of 
 the Saviour. It is not mere pardon. 
 The main difference between pardon 
 and justification respects the sinner con- 
 templated in regard to his past conduct, 
 and to God's future dealings with him. 
 Pardon is a free forgiveness of past of- 
 fences. It has reference to those sins as 
 forgiven and blotted out. It is an act 
 of remission on the part of God. Jus- 
 tification has respect to the law, and to 
 God's future dealings with the sinner. 
 It is an act by which God determines to 
 treat him hereafter as a righteous man, 
 or as if he had not sinned. The ground 
 or reason of this is, the merit of the 
 Lord Jesus Christ ; merit such that we 
 can plead it as if it were our own. The 
 rationale of it is, that the Lord Jesus 
 has accomplished by his death the same 
 happy effects in regard to the law and 
 the government of God, which would 
 be accomplished by the death of the 
 sinner himself. In other words, no- 
 thing would be gained to the universe by 
 the everlasting punishment of the offend- 
 er himself, which will not be secured by 
 his salvation on the ground of the death 
 of the Lord Jesus. He has taken our 
 place, and died in our stead; and he 
 has met the descending stroke of justice, 
 which would have fallen on our own 
 head if he had not interposed (see my 
 Notes on Isa. liii.) ; and now the great 
 interests of justice will be as firmly se- 
 cured if we are saved, as they would be 
 if we were lost. The law has been fully 
 obeyed by one who came to save us. 
 
 and as much honour has been done to 
 it by his obedience as could have been 
 by our own ; that is, it as much shows 
 that the law is worthy of obedience to 
 have it perfectly obeyed by the Lord 
 Jesus, as it would if it were obeyed by 
 us. It as much shows that the law of 
 a sovereign is worthy of obedience to 
 have it obeyed by an only son and an 
 heir to the crown, as it does to have it 
 obeyed by his subjects. And it has as 
 much shown the evil of the violation of 
 the law to have the Lord Jesus suffer 
 death on the cross, as it would if the 
 guilty had died themselves. If trans- 
 gression whelm the innocent in calamity; 
 if it extends to those who are perfectly 
 guiltless, and inflicts pain and wo on 
 them, it is as certainly an expression of 
 the evil of transgression as if the guilty 
 themselves suffer. And an impression 
 as deep has been made of the evil of sin 
 by the sufferings of the Lord Jesus in 
 our stead, as if we had suffered our- 
 selves. He endured on the cross as in- 
 tense agony as we can conceive it pos- 
 sible for a sinner ever to endure; and 
 the dignity of the person who suffered, 
 the incarnate Goo, is more than an 
 equivalent for the more lengthened sor- 
 rows which the penalty of the law ex- 
 acts in hell. Besides, from the very 
 dignity of the sufferer in our place, an 
 impression has gone abroad on the uni- 
 verse more deep and important than 
 would have been by the sufferings of 
 the individual himself in the world of 
 wo. The sinner who is lost will be 
 unknown to other worlds. His name 
 may be unheard beyond the gates of 
 the prison of despair. The impression 
 which will be made on distant worlds 
 by his individual sufferings will be as a 
 part of the aggregate of wo, and his 
 individual sorrows may make no im- 
 pression on distant worlds. But not so 
 with him who took our place. He stood 
 in the centre of the universe. The sun 
 grew dark, and the dead arose, and an- 
 gels gazed upon the scene, and from his 
 cross an impression went abroad to the 
 farthest part of the universe, showing 
 the tremendous effects of the violation 
 of law, when not one soul could be 
 
320 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 17 But if, while we seek to be 
 justified by Christ, we ° our- 
 
 o 1 Jno. 3. 9, 10. 
 
 saved from its penalty without such 
 sorrows of the Son of God. In virtue 
 of all this, the offender, by believing on 
 him, may be treated as if he had not 
 sinned; and this constitutes justifica- 
 tion. God admits him to favour as if 
 he had himself obeyed the law, or borne 
 its penalty, since as many good results 
 "ill now follow from his salvation as 
 could be derived from his punishment ; 
 and since all the additional happy results 
 will follow which can be derived from 
 the exercise of pardoning mercy. The 
 character of God is thus revealed. His 
 mercy is shown. His determination to 
 maintain his law is evinced. The truth 
 is maintained ; and yet he shows the 
 fulness of his mercy and the richness of 
 his benevolence. 
 
 17. But if, while we seek to be justi- 
 fied by Christ. The connexion here 
 is not very clear, and the sense of the 
 verse is somewhat obscure. Rosen- 
 muller supposes that this is an objection 
 of a Jew, supposing that where the law 
 of Moses is not observed there is no 
 rule of life, and that therefore there 
 must be sin; and that since the doctrine 
 of justification by faith taught that there 
 was no necessity of obeying the cere- 
 monial law of Moses, therefore Christ, 
 who had introduced that system, must 
 be regarded as the author and encou- 
 rager of sin. To me it seems proba- 
 ble that Paul here has reference to an 
 objection which has in all ages been 
 brought against the doctrine of justifi- 
 cation by faith, and which seems to 
 have existed in his time, that the doc- 
 trine leads to licentiousness. The ob- 
 jections are, that it does not teach the ne- 
 cessity of the observance of the law in 
 order to acceptance with God. That it 
 pronounces a man justified and ac- 
 cepted who is a violator of the law. 
 That his acceptance does not depend on 
 moral character. That it releases him 
 from the obligation of law, and that it 
 teaches that a man may be saved though 
 
 selves also are found sinners, is 
 therefore Christ the minister of 
 sin ? God forbid. 
 
 he does not conform to law. These ob- 
 jections existed early, and have been 
 found everywhere where the doctrine of 
 justification by faith has been preached. 
 I regard this verse, therefore, as refer- 
 ring to these objections, and not as being 
 peculiarly the objection of a Jew. The 
 idea is, ' You seek to be justified by faith 
 without obeying the law. You pro- 
 fessedly reject that, and do not hold that 
 it is necessary to yield obedience to it 
 If now it shall turn out that you are 
 sinners; that your lives are not holy: 
 that you are free from the wholesome re- 
 straint of the law, and are given up to 
 lives of sin, will it not follow that Christ 
 is the cause of it ; that he taught it ; and 
 that the system which he introduced is 
 responsible for it 1 And is not the gospel 
 therefore responsible for introducing a 
 system that frees from the restraint of 
 the law, and introduces universal licen- 
 tiousness V To this Paul replies by 
 stating distinctly that the gospel has no 
 such tendency, and particularly by re- 
 ferring in the following verses to his 
 own case, and to the effect of the doc- 
 trine of justification on his own heart 
 and life, t We ourselves are found 
 sinners. If it turns out that we are sin- 
 ners, or if others discover by undoubted 
 demonstration that we lead lives of sin; 
 if they see us given up to a lawless 
 life, and find us practising all kinds of 
 evil ; if it shall be seen not only that 
 we are not pardoned and made better by 
 the gospel, but are actually made worse, 
 and are freed from all moral restraint. 
 ^ Is therefore Christ the minister of 
 sin P Is it to be traced to him 1 Is it a 
 fair and legitimate conclusion that this 
 is the tendency of the gospel 1 Is it to 
 be charged on him, and on the plan of 
 justification through him, that a lax 
 morality prevails, and that men are 
 freed from the wholesome restraints of 
 law ? H God forbid. It is not so. This 
 is not the proper effect of the gospel of 
 Christ, and of the doctrine of justifica- 
 
A. I). 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 321 
 
 18 For if I build again the 
 things which I destroyed, I 
 make myself a transgressor. 
 
 tion by faith. The system is not fitted 
 to produce such a freedom from restraint, 
 and if such a freedom exists, it is to 
 be traced to something else than the 
 gospel. 
 
 18. For if I build again the things 
 which I destroyed. Paul here uses the 
 first person ; but he evidently intends it 
 as a general proposition, and means 
 that if any one does it he becomes a 
 transgressor. The sense is, that if a 
 man, having removed or destroyed that 
 which was evil, again introduces it or 
 establishes it, he does wrong, and is a 
 transgressor of the law of God. The 
 particular application here, as it seems 
 to me, is to the subject of circumcision 
 and the other rites of the Mosaic law. 
 They had been virtually abolished by the 
 coming of the Redeemer, and by the 
 doctrine of justification by faith. It 
 had been seen that there was no neces- 
 sity for their observance, and of that 
 Peter and the others had been fully 
 aware. Yet they were lending their 
 influence again to establish them or to 
 " build" them up again. They com- 
 plied with them, and they insisted on 
 the necessity of their observance. Their 
 conduct, therefore, was that of building 
 up again that which had once been de- 
 stroyed, destroyed by the ministry, and 
 toils, and death of the Lord Jesus, and 
 by the fair influence of his gospel. To 
 rebuild that again ; to re-establish those 
 customs, was wrong, and now involved 
 the guilt of a transgression of the law 
 of God. Doddridge supposes that this 
 is an address to the Galatians, and that 
 the address to Peter closed at the pre- 
 vious verse. But it is impossible to de- 
 termine this and it seems to me more 
 probable that this is all a part of the ad- 
 dress to Peter; or rather perhaps to the 
 assembly when Peter was present. See 
 Note on ver. 15. 
 
 19. For I through the law. £)n this 
 passage the commentators are by no 
 means agreed. It is agreed that in the 
 
 19 For I ° through the law 
 am dead to the law, that I might 
 live b unto God. 
 
 o Ro. 7. 4, 10; 8. 2. b Ro. 6. 11, 14. 
 
 phrase " am dead to the law," the law 
 of Moses is referred to, and that the 
 meaning is, that Paul had become dead 
 to that as a ground or means of justifi- 
 cation. He acted as though it were not ; 
 or it ceased to have influence over him. 
 A dead man is insensible to all around 
 him. He hears nothing ; sees nothing ; 
 and nothing affects him. So when we 
 are said to be dead to any thing, the 
 meaning is, that it does not have an in- 
 fluence over us. In this sense Paul 
 was dead to the law of Moses. He 
 ceased to observe it as a ground of jus 
 tification. It ceased to be the grand 
 aim and purpose of his life, as it had 
 been formerly, to obey it. He had 
 higher purposes than that, and truly 
 lived to God. See Note, Rom. vi. 2. 
 But on the meaning of the phrase 
 " through the law" (Sia vi/ucu) there has 
 been a great variety of opinion. Bloom- 
 field, Rosenmuller, and some others 
 suppose that he means the Christian re- 
 ligion, and that the meaning is, " by 
 one law, or doctrine, I am dead to 
 another;" that is, the Christian doc- 
 trine has caused me to cast aside the 
 Mosaic religion. Doddridge, Clarke, 
 Chandler, and most others, however, 
 suppose that he here refers to the law 
 of Moses, and that the meaning is, that 
 by contemplating the true character of 
 the law of Moses itself; by considering 
 its nature and design ; by understanding 
 the extent of its requisitions, he had 
 become dead to it ; that is, he had laid 
 aside all expectations of being justified 
 by it. This seems to me to be the cor- 
 rect interpretation. Paul had formerly 
 expected to be justified by the law. 
 He had endeavoured to obey it. It had 
 been the object of his life to comply 
 with all its requisitions in order to be 
 saved by it. Phil. hi. 4 — 6. But all 
 this while he had not fully understood 
 its nature ; and when he was made fully 
 te feel and comprehend its spiritual re- 
 quirements, then all his hopes of justifi 
 
322 
 
 GALAT1ANS, 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 20 I am crucified ° with 
 Christ : nevertheless I live ; yet 
 
 a c. 5. 24 ; 6. 14. 
 
 cation by it died, and he became dead to 
 it. See this sentiment more fully ex- 
 plained in the Note on Rom. vii. 9. 
 1 That I might live unto God. That 
 I might be truly alive, and might be 
 found engaged in his service. He was 
 dead to the law, but not to every thing. 
 He had not become literally inactive 
 and insensible to all things, like a dead 
 man, but he had become truly sensible 
 to the commands and appeals of God, 
 and had consecrated himself to his ser- 
 vice. See Note, Rom. vi. 11. 
 
 20. / am crucified with Christ. In 
 the previous verse, Paul had said that 
 he was dead. In this verse he states 
 what he meant by it, and shows that he 
 did not wish to be understood as saying 
 that he was inactive, or that he was li- 
 terally insensible to the appeals made to 
 him by other beings and objects. In re- 
 spect to one thing he was dead ; to all 
 that was truly great and noble he was 
 alive. To understand the remarkable 
 phrase, " I am crucified with Christ," 
 we may remark, (1.) That this was the 
 way in which Christ was put to death. 
 He suffered on a cross, and thus became 
 literally dead. (2.) In a sense similar 
 to this, Paul became dead to the law, 
 to the world, and to sin. The Re- 
 deemer by the death of the cross be- 
 came insensible to all surrounding ob- 
 jects, as the dead always are. He ceased 
 to see, and hear, and was as though 
 they were not. He was laid in the cold 
 grave, and they did not affect or influ- 
 ence him. So Paul says that he became 
 insensible to the law as a means of jus- 
 tification ; to the world ; to ambition 
 and the love of money ; to the pride 
 and pomp of life, and to the dominion 
 of evil and hateful passions. They 
 lost their power over him ; they ceased 
 to influence him. (3.) This was with \ 
 Christ, or by Christ. It cannot mean 
 I trr ally that he was put to death with 
 him, for that is not true. But it means \ 
 that the effect of the death of Christ on [ 
 the cross was to make him dead to 
 
 not I, but Christ liveth in b me : 
 and the life which I now live in 
 
 b 1 Th. 5. 10. 1 Pe. 4. 2. 
 
 these things, in like manner as he, when 
 he died, became insensible to the things 
 of this busy world. This may include 
 the following things, (a) There was 
 an intimate union between Christ and 
 his people, so that what affected him, 
 affected them. See John xv. 5, 6. (b) 
 The death of the Redeemer on the cross 
 involved as a consequence the death of 
 his people to the world and to sin. See 
 ch. v. 24; vi. 14. It was like a blow at 
 the root of a vine or a tree, which would 
 affect every branch and tendril, or like a 
 blow at the head which effects every 
 member of the body, (c) Paul felt 
 identified with the Lord Jesus ; and he 
 was willing to share in all the ignominy 
 and contempt which was connected 
 with the idea of the crucifixion. He 
 was willing to regard himself as one 
 with the Redeemer. If there was dis» 
 grace attached to the manner in which 
 he died, he was willing to share it with 
 him. He regarded it as a matter to be 
 greatly desired to be made just like 
 Christ in all things, and even in the 
 manner of his death. This idea he has 
 more fully expressed in Phil. iii. 10. 
 " That I may know him, [i. e. I desire 
 earnestly to know him,] and the powei 
 of his resurrection, and the fellowship 
 of his sufferings, being made conforma- 
 ble unto his death." See also Col. i. 24. 
 Comp. 1 Pet. iv. 13. ^ Nevertheless 1 
 live. This expression is added, as in 
 ver. 19, to prevent the possibility of 
 mistake. Paul, though he was cruci* 
 fied with Christ, did not wish to be un- 
 derstood that he felt himself to be dead. 
 He was not inactive ; not insensible, aa 
 the dead are, to the appeals which are 
 made from God, or to the great objecte 
 which ought to interest an immortal 
 mind. He was still actively employed, 
 and the more so from the fact that he 
 was crucified with Christ. The object 
 of all such expressions as this is, to 
 show that it was no design of the gospel 
 to make men inactive, or to annihilate 
 their energies. It was not to cause r*"»s 
 
A.. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 the flesh, I live by the faith 
 of the Son of God, who loved 
 
 «Jno. 10. 11. Ep. 5. 2. 
 
 to do nothing. It was not to paralyze 
 their powers, or stifle their own efforts. 
 Paul, therefore, says, ' I am not dead. I 
 am tiuly alive; and I live a better life 
 than I did before.' Paul was as active 
 efter conversion as he was before. Be- 
 fore, he was engaged in persecution; 
 now, he devoted his great talents with as 
 much energy, and with as untiring zeal, 
 to the cause of the great Redeemer. In- 
 deed the whole narrative would lead us 
 to suppose that he was more active and 
 zealous after his conversion than he 
 was before. The effect of religion is 
 not to make one dead in regard to the 
 putting forth of the energies of the 
 soul. True religion never made one 
 lazy man ; it has converted many a 
 man of indolence, and effeminacy, and 
 self-indulgence to a man actively en- 
 gaged in doing good. If a professor of 
 religion is less active in the service of 
 God than he was in the service of the 
 world ; less laborious, and zealous, and 
 ardent than he was before his supposed 
 conversion, he ought to set it down as 
 full proof that he is an utter stranger 
 to true religion. •( Yet not I. This 
 also is designed to prevent misapprehen- 
 sion. In the previous clause he had 
 said that he lived, or was actively en- 
 gaged. But lest this should be misun- 
 derstood, and it should be inferred that 
 he meant to say it was by his own 
 energy or powers, he guards it, and 
 says it was not at all from himself. It 
 was by no native tendency ; no power 
 of his own ; nothing tbat could be 
 traced to himself. He assumed no 
 credit for any zeal which he had shown 
 in the true life. He was disposed to 
 trace it all to another. He had ample 
 proof in his past experience that there 
 was no tendency in himself to a life of 
 true religion, and he therefore traced it 
 all to another. % Christ lireth in me. 
 Christ was the source of al! the life 
 that he ftad. Of course this cannot be 
 taken literally that Christ had a resi- 
 
 me, 
 me. 
 
 323 
 
 and gave himself a for 
 
 21 I do not frustrate the grace 
 
 dencc in the apostle, but it must mean 
 that his grace resided in him; that his 
 principles actuated him ; and that he 
 derived all his energy, and zeal, and life 
 from his grace, The union between 
 the Lord Jesus and the disciple was so 
 close that it might be said the one lived 
 in the other. So the juices of the 
 vine are in each branch, and leaf, and 
 tendril, and live in them and animate 
 them ; the vital energy of the brain is 
 in each delicate nerve — no matter how 
 small — that is found in any part of the 
 human frame. Christ was in him as it 
 were the vital principle. All his life 
 and energy were derived from him. 
 ^ And the life which I now live in the 
 flesh. As I now live on the earth sur- 
 rounded by the cares and anxieties of 
 this life. I carry the life-giving princi- 
 ples of my religion to all my duties and 
 all my trials. If / live by the faith of 
 the. Son of God. By confidence in the 
 Son of God, looking to him for strength, 
 and trusting in his promises, and in his 
 grace. Who loved me, &c. He felt 
 under the highest obligation to him from 
 the fact that he had loved him, and given 
 himself to the death of the cross in his 
 behalf. The conviction of obligation 
 on this account Paul often expresses. 
 Sse Notes on Rom. vi. 8 — 1 1. Rom. 
 viii. 35—39. 2 Cor. v. 15. There 
 is no higher sense of obligation than 
 that which is felt towards the Saviour ; 
 and Paul felt himself bound, as we 
 should, to live entirely to him who had 
 redeemed him by his blood. 
 
 21. 1 do not frustrate the grace of 
 God. The word rendered "frustrate'* 
 (&$*r&) means properly to displace, 
 abrogate, abolish ; then to make void, 
 to render null. Mark vii. 9. Luke 
 vii. 30. 1 Cor. i. 19. The phrase 
 " the grace of God," here refers to the 
 favour of God manifested in the plan 
 of salvation by the gospel, and is another 
 name for the gospel. The sense is, that 
 Paul would not take any measures or 
 
324 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 of God : for if ° righteousness 
 come by the law, then Christ is 
 dead in vain. 
 
 aHe.7. 11. 
 
 pursue any course that would render 
 that vain or inefficacious. Neither by 
 his own life, by a course of conduct 
 which would show that it had no influ- 
 ence over the heart and conduct, nor by 
 the observance of Jewish rites and cus- 
 toms, would he do any thing to render 
 that inefficacious. The design is to 
 show that he regarded it as a great prin- 
 ciple that the gospel was efficacious in 
 renewing and saving man, and he would 
 do nothing that would tend to prevent 
 that impression on mankind. A life of 
 sin, of open depravity and licentious- 
 ness would do that. And in like man- 
 ner a conformity to the rites of Moses 
 as a ground of justification would tend 
 to frustrate the grace of God, or to ren- 
 der the method of salvation solely by 
 the Redeemer nugatory. This is to be 
 regarded, therefore, as at the same time 
 a reproof of Peter for complying with 
 customs which tended to frustrate the 
 plan, of the gospel, and a declaration 
 that he intended that his own course of 
 life should be such as to confirm the 
 plan, and show its efficacy in pardoning 
 the sinner and rendering him alive in 
 the service of God. % For if ri<rht- 
 eousnesx come by /he laic. If justifica- 
 tion can be secured by the observance 
 of any law — ceremonial or moral — 
 then there was no need of the death of 
 Christ as an atonement. This is plain. 
 If man by conformity to any law could 
 be justified before God, what need was 
 there of an atonement ? The work 
 would then have been wholly in his 
 own power, and the merit would have [ 
 been his. It follows from this, that ! 
 man cannot be justified by his own j 
 molality, or his alms-deeds, or his forms 
 of religion, or his honesty and integrity, j 
 If he can, he needs no .Saviour, he can i 
 save himself. It follows also that when ! 
 men depend on their own amiablencss, 
 and morality, and good works, they 
 would feel no need of a Saviour ; and 
 this is the true reason why the mass of 
 
 O 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 FOOLISH h Galatians, who 
 c hath bewitched you, that 
 
 b Mat. 7. 26. c c. 5. 7. 
 
 men reject the Lord Jesus. They sup- 
 pose they do not deserve to be sent to 
 hell. They have no deep sense of 
 guilt. They confide in their own in- 
 tegrity, and feel that God ought to save 
 them. Hence they feel no need of a 
 Saviour; for why should a man in health 
 employ a physician 1 And confiding in 
 their own righteousness, they reject the 
 grace of God, and despise the plan of 
 justification through the Redeemer. To 
 feel the need of a Saviour it is necessary 
 to feel that we are lost and ruined sin- 
 ners; that we have no merit on which 
 we can rely ; and that we are entirely 
 dependent on the mercy of God for sal- 
 vation. Thus feeling, we shall receive 
 the salvation of the gospel with thank- 
 fulness and joy, and show that in re- 
 gard to us Christ is not "dead in 
 vain." 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 ANALYSIS. 
 
 The address of Paul to Peter, as 1 
 suppose, was closed at the last verse of 
 chapter ii. The apostle in this chapter, 
 in a direct address to the Galatians, 
 pursues the argument on the subject of 
 justification by faith. In the previous 
 chapters he had shown them fully that 
 he had received his views of the gospel 
 directly from the Lord Jesus, and that 
 he had the concurrence of the most emi- 
 nent among the apostles themselves. 
 He proceeds to state more fully what 
 his views were ; to confirm them by the 
 authority of the Old Testament; and to 
 show the necessary effect of an observ- 
 ance of the laws of Moses on the great 
 doctrine of justification by faith. This 
 subject is pursued through this chapter 
 and the following. This chapter com- 
 prises the following subjects. 
 
 (1.) A severe reproof of the Gala- 
 tians for having been so easily seduced 
 by the arts of cunning men from the 
 simplicity of the gospel, ver. 1. He 
 says that Christ had been plainly set 
 forth crucified among them, and it was 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 335 
 
 strange that they had so soon been led 
 astray from the glorious doctrine of sal- 
 vation by faith. 
 
 (2.) He appeals to them to show 
 that the great benefits which they had re- 
 ceived had not been in consequence of 
 the observance of the Mosaic rites, but 
 had come solely by the hearing of the 
 gospel, ver. 2 — 5. Particularly the 
 Holy Spiiit, with all his miraculous 
 and converting and sanctifying influen- 
 ces, had been imparted only in connex- 
 ion with the gospel. This was the 
 most rich and most valuable endowment 
 which they had ever received ; and this 
 was solely by the preaching of Christ 
 and him crucified. 
 
 (3.) In illustration of the doctrine 
 of justification by faith, and in proof 
 of the truth of it, he refers to the case 
 of Abraham, and shows that he was 
 justified in this manner, and that the 
 Scripture had promised that others would 
 be justified in the same way. ver. 
 6—9. 
 
 (4.) He shows that the law pro- 
 nounced a curse on all those who were 
 under it, and that consequently it was 
 impossible to be justified by it. But 
 Christ had redeemed us from that curse, 
 having taken the curse on himself, so 
 that now we might be justified in the 
 sight of God. In this way, says he, the 
 blessing of Abraham might come on the 
 Gentiles, and they all might be saved in 
 the same manner that he was. ver. 
 10—14. 
 
 (5.) This view he confirms by show- 
 ing that the promise made to Abraham 
 was made before the giving of the law. 
 It was a mode of justification in exist- 
 ence before the law of Moses was given. 
 It was of the nature of a solemn com- 
 pact or covenant on the part of God. It 
 referred particularly to the Messiah, and 
 to the mode of justification in him. 
 And as it was of the nature of a cove- 
 nant, it was impossible that the law 
 given many years after could disannul it, 
 or render it void. ver. 15 — 18. 
 
 (6.) It might then be asked, what 
 was the use of the law ? Why was it 
 given \ It was added, Paul says, on ac- 
 count of transgressions, and was de- 
 28 
 
 signed to restrain men from sin, and to 
 show them their guilt. It was, further, 
 not superior to the promise of a Media- 
 tor, or to the Mediator, for it was ap- 
 pointed by the instrumentality of angels, 
 and it was in the hand of the Mediatoi 
 himself, under him, and subject to him. 
 It could not therefore be superior to 
 him, and to the plan of justification 
 through him. ver. 19,20. 
 
 (7.) Yet Paul answers an important 
 I objection here, and a very obnous and 
 J material inquiry. It is, w'aether he 
 ; means to teach that the law of God is 
 ! contradictory to his promises ' Whether 
 the law and the gospel are rival sys- 
 ! terns ? Whether it is necewary, in order 
 I to hold to the excellency of the one to 
 j hold that the other is contradictory, evil, 
 and worthless ? To all this he answers ; 
 | and says, by no means- He says the 
 fault was not in the law. The view 
 which he had taken, and which was re- 
 vealed in the Bible, arose from the na- 
 ture of the case. . The law was as good 
 a law as could be made, and it answered 
 aii the purposes of law. It was so ex 
 cellent, that if it h»l been possible that 
 men could be justified by law at all, 
 that was the law by which it would 
 have been done. But it was not possi- 
 ble. The effect of the law, therefore, 
 was to show that all men were sinners, 
 and to shut them up to the plan 
 of justification by the work of a Re- 
 deemer. It was appointed, therefore, 
 not to justify mon, but to lead them ta 
 the Saviour, ver. 21 — 24. 
 
 (8.) The effect of the plan of justifi- 
 cation by faith in the Lord Jesus was to 
 make the mind free. It was no longer 
 under a schoolmaster. They who are 
 justified in this way become the children 
 of God. They all become one in the 
 Redeemer. There is neither Jew nor 
 Greek, but they constitute one great 
 family, and are the children of Abra- 
 ham and heirs according to the promise, 
 ver. 25—29. 
 
 1. foolish Galatians. That is, 
 foolish for having yielded to the influ- 
 ence of the false teachers, and for hav- 
 ing embraced doctrines that tended to 
 subvert the gospel of the Redeemer 
 
326 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58 
 
 ye should not obey the truth, 
 before whose eyes Jesus Christ 
 
 The original word here used (dvonTct) 
 denotes void of understanding; and 
 they had shown it in a remarkable man- 
 ner in rejecting the doctrine of the 
 apostles, and in embracing the errors 
 into which they had fallen. It will be 
 remembered that this is an expression 
 similar to what was applied to them by 
 others. See the Introduction, § I. Thus 
 Callimachus in his hymns calls them "a 
 foolish people," and Hillary, himself a 
 Gaul, calls them Gallos indocile*, ex- 
 pressions remarkably in accordance with 
 that used here by Paul. It is implied 
 that they were without stability of 
 character. The particular thing to 
 which Paul refers here is, that they 
 wore so easily led astray by the argu- 
 ments of the false teachers. 1 Who 
 hath bewitched you. The word here 
 used (?/3aG-jt4ve) properly means, to prate 
 about any one ; and then to mislead by 
 pretences, as if by magic arts ; to fas- 
 cinate ; to influence by a charm. The 
 idea here is, that they had not been led 
 by reason and by sober judgment, but 
 that there must have been some charm 
 or fascination to have taken them away 
 in this manner from what they had em- 
 braced as true, and what they bad the 
 fullest evidence was true. Paul had 
 sufficient confidence in them to believe 
 that they had not embraced their present 
 views under the unbiassed influence of 
 judgment and reason, but that there 
 must have been some fascination or 
 charm by which it was done. It was 
 in fact accomplished by the arts and 
 the plausible pretences of those who 
 came from among the Jews. % That 
 ye should not obey the truth. The 
 truth of the gospel. That you should 
 yield your minds to falsehood and error. 
 It should be observed, however, that this 
 phrase is wanting in many MSS. It is 
 omitted in the Syriac version ; and 
 many of the most important Greek and 
 Latin Fathers omit it. Mill thinks it 
 should be omitted ; and Gricsbach has 
 omitted it. It is not essential to the 
 passage in order to the sense ; and it 
 
 hath been evidently set forth, 
 crucified among you ? 
 
 conveys no truth which is not elsewhere 
 taught fully. It is apparently added to 
 show what was the effect of their be- 
 ing bewitched or enchanted, t Before 
 whose eyes. In whose very presence. 
 That is, it has been done so clearly that 
 you may be said to have seen it, 
 f Jesus Christ hath been evidently set 
 forth. By the preaching of the gos- 
 pel. He has been so fully and plainly 
 preached that you may be said to hava 
 seen him. The effect of his being 
 preached in the manner in which it has 
 been done, ought to have been as great 
 as if you had seen him crucified before 
 your eyes. The word rendered " hath 
 heen evidently set forth" (rrgce}<>a'<p»), 
 means properly to write before,- and 
 then to announce beforehand in writing ; 
 or to announce by posting up on a 
 tablet. The meaning here is, probably, 
 that Christ had been announced among 
 them crucified, as if the doctrine was 
 set forth in a public written tablet. — 
 Robinson's Lex. There was the ut- 
 most clearness and distinctness of view, 
 so that they need not make any mistake 
 in regard to him. The Syriac renders 
 it, ' Christ has been crucified before 
 your eyes as if he had been represented 
 by painting.' According to this, the 
 idea is, that it was as plain as if there 
 had been a representation of him by a 
 picture. This has been done chiefly by 
 preaching. I see no reason, however, 
 to doubt that Paul means also to include 
 | the celebration of the Lord's supper, in 
 which the Lord Jesus is so clearly ex- 
 hibited as a crucified Saviour, t Cru- 
 cified among you. That is, represented 
 among you as crucified. The words 
 "among you," however, are wanting in 
 many MsS. and obscure the sense. If 
 they are to be retained, the meaning is, 
 that the representations of the Lord 
 ! Jesus as crucified had been as clear and 
 ! impressive among them as if they had 
 I seen him with their own eyes. The 
 ! argument is, that they had so clear a 
 ' representation of the Lord Jesus, and 
 1 of the design of his death, that it was 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 327 
 
 2 This only would I learn of 
 you, Received a ye the Spirit by 
 
 aEp 1. 13. 
 
 strange that they had so soon been per- 
 verted from the belief of it. Had they 
 seen the Saviour crucified ; had they 
 stood by the cross and witnessed his 
 agony in death on account of sin, how 
 could they doubt what was the design of 
 his dying, and how could they be se- 
 duced from faith in his death, or be led 
 to embrace any other method of justifi- 
 cation 1 How could they now do it, 
 when, although they had not seen him 
 die, they had the fullest knowledge of 
 the object for which he gave his precious 
 life 1 The doctrine taught in this verse 
 is, that a faithful exhibition of the suf- 
 ferings and death of the Saviour ought 
 to exert an influence over our minds 
 and hearts as if we had seen him die ; 
 and that they to whom such an exhibi- 
 tion has been made should avoid being 
 led astray by the blandishments of 
 false doctrines, and by the arts of man. 
 Had we seen the Saviour expire, we 
 could never have forgotten the scene. 
 Let us endeavour to cherish a remem- 
 brance of his sufferings and death as if 
 we had seen him die. 
 
 2. This only would I learn of you. 
 I would ask this of you ; retaining still 
 the language of severe reproof. The 
 design here, and in the following verses, 
 is, to prove to them that the views which 
 they had at first embraced were correct, 
 and that the views which they now 
 cherished were false. To show them 
 this, he asks them the simple question, 
 by what means they had obtained the 
 exalted privileges which they enjoyed ] 
 Whether they had obtained them by 
 the simple gospel, or whether by the 
 observance of the law? The word 
 " only" here (/uivov) implies that this 
 was enough to settle the question. The 
 argument to which he was about to ap- 
 peal was enough for his purpose. He 
 did not need to go any further. They 
 had been converted. They had received 
 the Holy Spirit. They had had abun- 
 dant evidence of their acceptance with 
 God, and the simple matter of inquiry 
 
 the works of the law, or b by the 
 hearing: of faith ? 
 
 6Ro. 10. 17. 
 
 now was, whether this had occurred as 
 the regular effect of the gospel, or 
 whether it had been by obeying the 
 law of Moses 1 f Received ye the 
 Spirit. The Holy Spirit. He refers 
 here, doubtless, to all the manifestations 
 of the Spirit which had been made to 
 them, in renewing the heart, in sancti- 
 fying the soul, in comforting them in 
 affliction, and in his miraculous agency 
 among them. The Holy Spirit had 
 been conferred on them at their conver- 
 sion (Comp. Acts x. 44; xi. 17), and 
 this was to them proof of the favour of 
 God, and of their being accepted by 
 him. «| By the worlts of the law. By 
 obeying the law of Moses or of any 
 law. It was in no way connected with 
 their obeying the law. This must have 
 been so clear to them that no one could 
 have any doubt on the subject. The 
 inestimably rich and precious gift of the 
 Holy Spirit had not been conferred on 
 them in consequence of their obeying 
 the law. Tf Or by the hearing of faith. 
 In connexion with hearing the gospel 
 requiring faith as a condition of salva- 
 tion. The Holy Spirit was sent down 
 only in connexion with the preaching 
 of the gospel. It was a matter of truth, 
 and which could not be denied, that 
 those influences had not been imparted 
 under the law, but had been connected 
 with the gospel of the Redeemer. 
 Comp. Acts ii. The doctrine taught 
 in this verse is, that the benefits result- 
 ing to Christians from the gift of the 
 Holy Spirit are enough to prove that 
 the gospel is from God, and therefore 
 true. This was the case with regard to 
 the miraculous endowments communi- 
 cated in the early ages of the church by 
 the Holy Spirit; for the miracles which 
 were wrought, the knowledge of lan- 
 guages imparted, and the conversion of 
 thousands from the error of their ways, 
 proved that the system was from heaven; 
 and it is true now. Every Christian 
 has had ample proof, from the influ- 
 ences of the Spirit on his heart and 
 
328 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 3 Are ye so foolish ? having 
 
 a c. 4. 9. b He. 9. 10. 
 
 around him, that the system which is 
 attended with such benefits is from 
 heaven. His own renewed heart ; his 
 elevated and sanctified affections ; his 
 exalted hopes ; his consolations in trial ; 
 his peace in the prospect of death, and 
 the happy influences of the system 
 around him in the conversion of others, 
 and in the intelligence, order, and purity 
 of the community, are ample proof that 
 the religion is true. Such effects do not 
 come from any attempt to keep the law ; 
 they result from no other system. No 
 system of infidelity produces them; no 
 mere system of infidelity can produce 
 them. It is only by that pure system 
 which proclaims salvation by the grace 
 of God; which announces salvation by 
 the merits of the Lord Jesus, that such 
 effects are produced. The Saviour pro- 
 mised theHoly Spirit todescend after his 
 ascension to heaven to apply his work ; 
 and everywhere, under the faithful 
 preaching of the simple gospel, that 
 Spirit keeps up the evidence of the truth 
 of the system by his influences on the 
 hearts arid lives of men. 
 
 3. Are ye so foolish ? Can it be 
 that you are so unwise 1 The idea 
 is, that Paul hardly thought it credible 
 that they could have pursued such a 
 course. They had so cordially embraced 
 the gospel when he preached to them, 
 they had given such evidences that they 
 were under its influence, that he regard- 
 ed it as hardly possible that they should 
 have so far abandoned it as to embrace 
 such a system as they had done. ^ Hav- 
 ing begun in the Spirit. That is, when 
 the gospel was first preached to them. 
 They had commenced their professedly 
 Christian life under the influence of the 
 Holy Spirit, and with the pure and spi- 
 ritual worship of God. They had 
 known the power and spirituality of the 
 glorious gospel. They had been re- 
 newed by the Spirit ; sanctified in some 
 measure by him ; and had submitted 
 themselves to the spiritual influences 
 of the gospel. f Are ye now made 
 perfect. Tindal renders this, * ye would 
 
 "begun in the Spirit, are ye now 
 made perfect * by the flesh ? 
 
 now end." The word here used 
 (i7rn(Xiu>) means properly, to bring 
 through to an end, to finish ; and the 
 sense here has probably been expressed 
 by Tindal. The idea of perfecting, in 
 the sense in which we now use that 
 word, is not implied in the original. It 
 is that of finishing, ending, completing ; 
 and the sense is : ' You began your 
 Christian career under the elevated and 
 spiritual influences of Christianity, a 
 system so pure and so exalted above the 
 carnal ordinances of the Jews. Having 
 begun thus, can it be that you are finish- 
 ing your Christian course, or carrying 
 it on to completion by the observance 
 of those ordinances, as if they were 
 more pure and elevating than Chris- 
 tianity 1 Can it be that you regard them 
 as an advance on the system of the 
 gospel !' ^ By the flesh. By the ob- 
 servance of the carnal rites of the Jews, 
 for so the word here evidently means. 
 This has not been an uncommon thing. 
 Many have been professedly converted 
 by the Spirit, and have soon fallen into 
 the observance of mere rites and cere- 
 monies, and depended mainly on them 
 for salvation. Many churches have com- 
 menced their career in an elevated and 
 spiritual manner, and have ended in the 
 observance of mere forms. So many 
 Christians begin their course in a spi- 
 ritual manner, and end it " in the flesh" 
 in another sense. They soon conform 
 to the world. They are brought under 
 the influence of worldly appetites and 
 propensities. They forget the spiritual 
 nature of their religion ; and they live 
 for the indulgence of ease, and for the 
 gratification of the senses. They build 
 them houses, and they " plant vine- 
 yards," and they collect around them 
 the instruments of music, and the bowl 
 and the wine is in their feasts, and they 
 surrender themselves to the luxury of 
 living : and it seems as if they intended 
 to perfect their Christianity by drawing 
 around them as much of the world as 
 possible. The beautiful simplicity of 
 their early piety is gone. The blessed- 
 
A. D. 53.] 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 329 
 
 4 Have ye suffered so * many- 
 things in vain? " if it be yet in 
 vain. 
 
 5 He therefore that minister- 
 cth * to you the Spirit, and work- 
 
 * or, great. a 2 Jno. 8. 
 
 b 2 Co. 3. 8. 
 
 ness of those moments when they lived 
 by simple faith has fled. The times 
 when they sought all their consolation 
 in Got! are no more ; and they now 
 seem to differ from the world only in 
 form. I dread to see a Christian inhe- 
 rit much wealth, or even to be thrown 
 into very prosperous business. I see in 
 it a temptation to build himself a splen- 
 did mansion, and to collect around him 
 all that constitutes luxury among the 
 people of the world. How natural for 
 him to feel that if he has wealth like 
 others, he should show it in a similar 
 manner ! And how easy for the most 
 humble and spiritually-minded Chris- 
 tian, in the beginning of his Christian 
 life, to become conformed to the world 
 (such is the weakness of human nature 
 in its test forms) ; and having begun 
 in the spirit, to end in the flesh ! 
 
 4. Have ye suffered so many things 
 in vain ? Paul reminds them of what 
 they had endured on account of their 
 attachment to Christianity. He assures 
 them, that if the opinions on account, of 
 which they had suffered were false, 
 then their sufferings had been in vain. 
 They were of no use to them — for 
 what advantage was it to suffer for a 
 false opinion 1 The opinions for which 
 they had suffered had not been those 
 which they now embraced. They were 
 not those connected with the observance 
 of the Jewish rites. They had suffered 
 on account of their having embraced 
 the gospel, the system of justification by 
 a crucified Redeemer ; and now, if those 
 sentiments were wrong, why, their suf- 
 ferings had been wholly in vain. See 
 this argument pursued at much greater 
 length in 1 Cor. xv. 19, 19. 29—32. 
 ^ If it be yet in vain. That is, ' I trust 
 it is not in vain. I hope you have not 
 so far abandoned the gospel, that all 
 28* 
 
 eth miracles among yon, doeth 
 he it by the works of the law or 
 by the hearing of faith ? 
 
 6 Even as Abraham c believed 
 God, and it was 3 accounted to 
 him for righteousness. 
 
 c Ge. 15. 6. a or, imputed. 
 
 your sufferings in its behalf have been 
 of no avail. I believe the system is 
 true ; and if true, and you are sincere 
 Christians, it will not be in vain that 
 you have suffered in its behalf, though 
 you have gone astray. I trust, that al- 
 though your principles have been shaken, 
 yet they have not been wholly over 
 thrown, and that you will yet reap the 
 reward of your having suffered so much 
 on account of the gospel/ 
 
 5. He therefore that ministereth, 
 &c. This verse contains substantially 
 a repetition of the argument in ver. 2. 
 The argument is, that the gift of the 
 Holy Spirit to them was not imparted 
 in consequence of the observance of the 
 law of Moses, but in connexion with 
 the preaching of the gospel. By the 
 word " he" in this place, Clarke, Dod- 
 dridge, Bioomfield, Chandler, Locke, 
 and many others, suppose that the apos- 
 tle means himself. Bioomfield says, 
 that it is the common opinion of " all 
 the ancient commentators." But this 
 seems to me a strange opinion. The 
 obvious reference, it seems to me, is to 
 God, who had furnished or imparted to 
 them the remarkable influences of the 
 Holy Spirit, and this had been done 
 in connexion with the preaching of the 
 gospel, and not by the observance of the 
 law. If, however, it refers to Paul, it 
 means that he had been made the agent 
 or instrument in imparting to them 
 those remarkable endowments, and that 
 this had been done by one who had not 
 enforced the necessity of obeying the 
 law of Moses, but who had preached to 
 them the simple gospel. 
 
 6. Even as Abraham believed God, 
 &c. See this passage fully explained 
 in the Notes on Rom. iv. 3. The pas- 
 sage is introduced here by the apostle 
 to show that the most eminent of t) 7 - 
 
330 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58 
 
 7 Know ye therefore, that 
 they which are of faith, the same 
 are the children ° of Abraham. 
 
 a Jno. 8. 39. Ro. 4. 11—16. 
 
 patriarchs was not saved by the deeds 
 of the law. He was saved by faith, and 
 this fact showed that it was possible to 
 be saved in that way, and that it was 
 the design of God to save men in this 
 manner. Abraham believed God, and 
 was justified, before the law of Moses 
 was given. It could not, therefore, be 
 pretended that the law was necessary to 
 justification; for if it had been, Abra- 
 ham could not have been saved. But 
 if not necessary in his case, it was in 
 no other ; and this instance demonstrated 
 that the false teachers among the Gala- 
 tians were wrong even according to the 
 Old Testament 
 
 7. Know ye therefore, &c. Learn 
 from this case. It is an inference which 
 follows, that all they who believe are the 
 children of Abraham. \ They which 
 are of faith. Who believe, and who 
 are justified in this manner. ^ Are the 
 children of Abraham. Abraham was 
 the " father of the faithful." The most 
 remarkable trait in his character was his 
 unwavering confidence in God. They 
 who evinced the same tFnit, therefore, 
 were worthy to be called his children. 
 They would be justified in the same 
 way, and in the same manner meet the 
 approbation of God. It is implied here, 
 that it was sufficient for salvation to 
 have a character which would render it 
 proper to say that we are the children 
 of Abraham. If we are like him, if we 
 evince the same spirit and character, we 
 may be sure of salvation. 
 
 8. And the Scripture. The word 
 Scripture refers to the Old Testament. 
 See Note, John v. 39. It is here per- 
 sonified, or spoken of as foreseeing. 
 The idea is, that he by whom the Scrip- 
 tures were inspired, foresaw that. It is 
 agreeable, the meaning is, to the account 
 on the subject in the Old Testament. 
 The Syriac renders this, " Since God 
 foreknew that the Gentiles would be 
 justified by faith, he before announced 
 
 8 And the Scripture, foresee- 
 ing that God would justify b the 
 heathen through faith, preached 
 
 b vet. 22. 
 
 to Abraham, as the Scripture saith, in 
 thee shall all nations be blessed." 
 | Foreseeing. That is, this doctrine is 
 contained in the Old Testament. It 
 was foreseen and predicted that the hea- 
 then would be justified by faith, and not 
 by the works of the law. ^ That God 
 would justify the heathen. Gr. The 
 nations — Td t$v» — the Gentiles. The 
 fact that the heathen, or the Gentiles 
 would be admitted to the privileges of 
 the true religion, and be interested in 
 the benefits of the coming of the Me*, 
 siah, is a fact which is everywhere 
 abundantly predicted in the Old Testa- 
 ment. As an instance, see Isa. xlix. 6. 
 22, 23 ; lx. I do not know that it is 
 anywhere distinctly foretold that the 
 heathen would be justified by faith, nor 
 does the argument of the apostle require 
 us to believe this. He says that the 
 Scriptures, i. e. he who inspired the 
 Scriptures, foresaw that fact, and that 
 the Scriptures were written as if with 
 the knowledge of that fact ; but it is not 
 directly affirmed. The whole structure 
 and frame of the Old Testament, how- 
 ever, proceeds on the supposition that 
 it would be so ; and this is all that the 
 declaration of the apostle requires us to 
 understand. ^ Preached before the gos- 
 pel. This translation does not convey 
 quite the idea to us, which the language 
 of Paul, in the original, would to the 
 people to whom he addressed it. We 
 have affixed a technical sense to the 
 phrase • to preach the gospel.' It is 
 applied to the formal and public annun- 
 ciation of the truths of religion, espe- 
 cially the ' good news' of a Saviour's 
 birth, and of redemption by his blood. 
 But we are not required by the language 
 used here to suppose that this was done 
 to Abraham, or that 'the gospel' was 
 preached to him in the sense in which 
 we all now use that phrase. The ex- 
 pression, in Greek (^ck»»^smWto), 
 means merely, ' the joyful news was 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 331 
 
 before the gospel unto Abraham, 
 saying, a In thee shall all nations 
 be blessed. 
 
 9 So then h they which be of 
 
 oGe. 12.3; 22.18. Ac. 3. 25. 
 b c. 4. 28. 
 
 announced beforehand to Abraham;' 
 soil, that in him should all the nations 
 of the earth be blessed. It was implied, 
 indeed, that it would be by the Messiah ; 
 but the distinct pointof the ' good news' 
 was not the 'gospel' as we understand 
 it, but it was that somehow through 
 him all the nations of the earth would 
 be made happy. Tindal has well trans- 
 lated it, " Showed beforehand glad 
 tidings unto Abraham." This transla- 
 tion should have been adopted in our 
 common version. % In thee shall all 
 nations be blessed. See Notes on Acts 
 iii. 25. Rom. iv. 13. All nations 
 should be made happy in him, or through 
 him. The sense is, that the Messiah 
 was to be descended from him, and the 
 religion of the Messiah, producing peace 
 and salvation, was to be extended to all 
 the nations of the earth. See Gen. xii. 
 3. Comp. Note on ver. 16 of this 
 chapter. 
 
 9. So then they which be of faith. 
 They whose leading characteristic it is 
 that they believe. This was the leading 
 trait in the character of Abraham, and 
 this is the leading thing required of 
 those who embrace the gospel, and in 
 the character of a true Christian. 
 K Are blessed with faithful Abraham. 
 In the same manner they are interested 
 in the promises made to him, and they 
 will be treated as he was. They are 
 justified in the same manner, and ad- 
 mitted to the same privileges on earth 
 and in heaven. 
 
 10. For as many as are of the works 
 of the law. As many as are seeking 
 to be justified by yielding obedience to 
 the law — whether the moral law, or the 
 ceremonial law. The proposition is 
 general; and it is designed to show that, 
 from the nature of the case, it is impos- 
 sible to be justified by the works of the 
 law, since, under all circumstances of 
 
 faith are blessed with faithful 
 Abraham. 
 
 10 For as many as are of the 
 works of the law, are under the 
 curse : for it is written, c Cursed 
 
 c De. 27. 26. 
 
 obedience which we can render, we are 
 still left with its heavy curse resting on 
 us. f Are under the curse. The curse 
 which the law of God denounces. 
 Having failed by all their efforts to 
 yield perfect obedience, they must, of 
 course, be exposed to the curse which 
 the law denounces on the guilty. The 
 word rendered curse (*<.<rag*) means, 
 as with us, properly, imprecation, or 
 cursing. It is used in the Scriptures 
 particularly in the sense of the Hebrew 
 n^N, malediction, or execration (Job 
 xxxi. 30. Jer. xxix. 18. Dan. ix. 11) ; 
 of the word mNO (Mai. ii. 2. Rev. 
 iii. 33) ; and especially of the common 
 Hebrew word n 1 ? 1 ?}, a curse. Gen. xxvii. 
 12, 13. Deut. xi. 26, 28, 29 ; xxiii. 5; 
 xxvii. 13, et ssepe al. It is here used 
 evidently in the sense of devoting to pu- 
 nishment or destruction ; and the idea 
 is, that all who attempt to secure salva- 
 tion by the works of the law, must be 
 exposed to its penalty. It denounces a 
 curse on all who do not yield entire 
 obedience ; and no partial compliance 
 with its demands can save from the pe- 
 nalty, f For it is written. The sub- 
 stance of these words is found in Deut. 
 xxviii. 26 : " Cursed be he that con- 
 firmeth not all the words of this law to 
 do them." It is the solemn close of a 
 series of maledictions, which Moses de- 
 nounces in that chapter on the violators 
 of the law. In this quotation, Paul has 
 given the sense of the passage, but he 
 has quoted literally neither from the 
 Hebrew nor from the Septuagint. The 
 sense, however, is retained. The word 
 " cursed" here means, that the violator 
 of the law shall be devoted to punish- 
 ment or destruction. The phrase " that 
 continueth not," in the Hebrew is " that 
 confirmeth not" — that does not establish 
 or confirm by his life. He would con- 
 firm it by continuing to obey it ; and 
 
332 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 is every one that continueth not 
 
 in all things which are written 
 
 in the book of the law to do them. 
 
 11 But that no man is justified 
 
 a Hab. 2. 4. 
 
 thus the sense in Paul and in Moses is 
 substantially the same. The word "all" 
 is not expressed in the Hebrew in Deu- 
 teronomy, but it is evidently implied, 
 and has been inserted by the English 
 translators. It is found, however, in six 
 MSS. of Kennicott and De Rossi ; in 
 the Samaritan text; in the Septuagint; 
 and in several of the Targums. — Clarke. 
 1[ The book of the law. That is, in 
 the law. This phrase is not found in 
 the passage in Dent The expression 
 there is, M the words of this law." Paul 
 gives it a somewhat larger sense, and 
 applies it to the whole of the law of God. 
 The meaning is, that the whole law must 
 be obeyed, or man cannot be justified 
 by it, or will be exposed to its penalty 
 and its curse. This idea is expressed 
 more fully by James (ii. 10) : " Who- 
 soever shall keep the whole law, and 
 yet offend in one point, he is guilty of 
 all;" that is, he is guilty of breaking 
 the law as a whole, and must be held 
 responsible for such violation. The 
 sentiment here is one that is common 
 to all law, and must be, from the nature 
 of the case. The idea is, that a man 
 who does not yield compliance to a 
 whole law, is subject to its penalty, or 
 to a curse. All law is sustained on this 
 principle. A man who has been honest, 
 and temperate, and industrious, and pa- 
 triotic, if he commits a single act of 
 murder, is subject to the curse of the 
 law, and must meet the penalty. A man 
 who has been honest and honourable in 
 all his dealings, yet if he commit a sin- 
 glo act of forgery, he must meet the 
 curse denounced by the laws of his 
 country, and bear the penalty. So, in 
 all matters pertaining to law : no matter 
 what the integrity of the man ; no mat- 
 ter how upright he has been, yet, for 
 the one offence the law denounces a pe- 
 nalty, and he must bear it. It is out of 
 the question for him to be justified by 
 
 by the law in the sight of God, 
 it is evident : for, The "just shall 
 live by faith. 
 
 12 And the law h is not of 
 
 b Ro. 10. 5, 6. 
 
 it. He cannot plead as a reason why 
 he should not be condemned for the act 
 of murder or forgery, that he has in all 
 other respects obeyed the law, or even 
 that he has been guilty of no such of- 
 fences before. Such is the idea of Paul 
 in the passage before us. It was clear 
 to his view that man had not in all re- 
 spects yielded obedience to the law of 
 God. If he had not done this, it was 
 impossible that he should he jusiified by 
 the law, and he must bear its penalty. 
 
 11. But that no man is justified, 
 &c. The argument which Paul has 
 been pursuing he proceeds to confirm 
 by an express declaration of the Bible. 
 The argument is this : * It is impossible 
 that a man should be justified by the 
 law, because God has appointed another 
 way of justification.' But there cannot 
 be two ways of obtaining life, and as 
 he has appointed faith as the condition 
 on which men shall live, he has pre- 
 cluded from them the possibility of ob- 
 taining salvation in any other mode. 
 ■t Fur, The just shall live by faith. 
 This is quoted from Hab. ii. 4. This 
 passage is also quoted by Paul in Rom. i. 
 17. See it explained in the Note on that 
 verse. The sense here is, that life is 
 promised to man only in connexion with 
 faith. It is not by the works of the law 
 that it is done. The condition of life 
 is faith : and he lives who believes. 
 The meaning is not, I apprehend, that 
 the man who is justified by faith shall 
 live, but that life is promised and exists 
 only in connexion with faith, and that 
 the just or righteous man obtains it only 
 in this way. Of course it cannot be ob- 
 tained by the observance of the law, but 
 must be by some other scheme. 
 
 12. And the law is not of faith. 
 The law is not a matter of faith; it 
 does not relate to faith ; it does not re- 
 quire faith ; it deals in other matters, 
 and it pertains to another system than 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 333 
 
 faith : but, The a man that doeth 
 them shall live in them. 
 
 13 Christ b hath redeemed us 
 
 aLe. 18. 5. Eze. 20. 11. 
 ft 2 Co. 5,21. c. 4. 5. 
 
 to faith. 1f But, The man, &c. This 
 is the language of the law, and this is 
 what the law teaches. It does not make 
 provision for faith, but it requires un- 
 wavering and perpetual obedience, if 
 man would obtain life by it. See this pas- 
 sage explained in the Notes on Rom. x. 5. 
 13. Christ hath redeemed us. The 
 viord used here (t^»yj^<r&) is not that 
 which is usually employed in the New 
 Testament to denote redemption. That 
 word is XfTgcai. The difference between 
 them mainly is, that the word used here 
 more usually relates to a purchase of 
 any kind ; the other is used strictly 
 with reference to a ransom. The word 
 here used is more general in its mean- 
 ing ; the other is strictly appropriated 
 to a ransom. This distinction is 
 not observable here, however, and 
 the word here used is employed in 
 the proper sense of redeem. It occurs 
 in the New Testament only in this 
 place, and in ch. iv. 5. Eph. v. 16. 
 Col. iv. 5. It properly means, to pur- 
 chase, to buy up ; and then to purchase 
 any one, to redeem, to set free. Here 
 it means, that Christ had purchased, or 
 set us free from the curse of the law, by 
 his being made a curse for us. On the 
 meaning of the words redeem and ran- 
 som, see my Notes on Rom. iii. 25, and 
 Isa. xliii. 3. Comp. 2 Cor. v. 21. 
 1 From the curse of the law. The 
 curse which the lawthreatens,"and which 
 the execution of the law would inflict ; 
 the punishment due to sin. This must 
 mean, that he has rescued us from the 
 consequences of transgression in the 
 world of wo ; he has saved us from the 
 punishment which our sins have de- 
 served. The word, " us" here, must 
 refer to all who are redeemed ; that is, 
 to the Gentiles as well as the Jews. 
 The curse of the law is a curse which 
 is due to sin, and cannot be regarded as 
 applied particularly to any one class of 
 men All who violate the law of God, 
 
 from the curse of the law, being 
 made a curse for us : for it is 
 written, c Cursed is every one 
 that hangeth on a tree : 
 
 c De. 21. 23. 
 
 however that law may be made known, 
 are exposed to its penalty. The word 
 " law" here, relates to the law of God 
 in general, to all the laws of God made 
 known to man. The law of God de- 
 nounced death as the wages of sin. It 
 threatened punishment in the future 
 world forever. That would certainly 
 have been inflicted, but for the coming 
 and death of Christ. The world is lying 
 by nature under this curse, and it is 
 sweeping the race on to ruin. T Being 
 made a curse for us. This is an ex- 
 ceedingly important expression. Tindal 
 renders it, " And was made a cursed for 
 us." The Greek word is xato^u., the 
 same word which is used in ver. 10. 
 See Note on that verse. There is 
 scarcely any passage in the New Testa- 
 ment on which it is more important to 
 have correct views than this; and 
 scarcely any one on which more erro- 
 neous opinions have been entertained. 
 In regard to it, we may observe that it 
 does not mean, (1.) That by being 
 made a curse, his character or work 
 were in any sense displeasing to God. 
 He approved always of what the Lord 
 Jesus did, and he regarded his whole 
 character with love and approbation. 
 The passage should never be so inter- 
 preted as to leave the impression that he 
 was in any conceivable sense the object 
 of the divine displeasure. (2.) He was 
 not ill-deserving. He was not blame-wor- 
 thy. He had done no wrong. He was 
 holy, harmless, undefiled. No crime 
 charged upon him was proved ; and 
 there is no clearer doctrine in the Bible 
 than that in all his character and work 
 the Lord Jesus was perfectly holy and 
 pure. (3.) He was not guilty in any 
 proper sense of the word. The word 
 guilty means, properly, to be bound to 
 punishment for crime. It does not 
 mean properly, to be exposed to suffer- 
 ing, but it always, when properly used, 
 implies the notion of personal crime. I 
 
S34 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 know that theologians have used the 
 word in a somewhat different sense, but 
 it is contrary to the common and just 
 apprehensions of men. When we say 
 that a man is guilty, we instinctively 
 think of his having committed a crime, 
 or having done something wrong. When 
 a jury finds a man guilty, it implies that 
 the man has committed a crime, and 
 ought to be punished. But in this 
 sense, and in no conceivable sense, 
 where the word is properly used, was 
 the Lord Jesus guilty. (4.) It cannot 
 be meant that the Lord Jesus properly 
 bore the penalty of the law. His suf- 
 ferings were in the place of the penalty, 
 not the penalty itself. They were a 
 substitution for the penalty, and were, 
 therefore, strictly and properly vicarious, 
 and were not the identical sufferings 
 which the sinner would himself have 
 endured. There are some things in the 
 penalty of the law, which the Lord 
 Jesus did not endure, and which a sul>- 
 stitute or a vicarious victim could not 
 endure. Remorse of conscience is a 
 part of the inflicted penalty of the law, 
 and will be a vital part of the sufferings 
 of the sinner in hell— but the Lord 
 Jesus did not endure that. Eternity 
 of sufferings is an essential part of the 
 penalty of the law — but the Lord Jesus 
 did not suffer forever. Thus there are 
 numerous sorrows connected with the 
 consciousness of personal guilt, which 
 the Lord Jesus did not and cannot en- 
 dure. (5.) He was not sinful, or a 
 sinner, in any sense. He did not so 
 take human guilt upon him, that the 
 words sinful and sinner could with any 
 propriety be applied to him. They are 
 not applied to him in any way in the 
 Bible ; but the language there is unde- 
 viating. It is, that in all senses he was 
 holy and undefiled. And yet language 
 is often used on this subject which is 
 horrible and but little short of blasphe- 
 my, as if he was guilty, and as if he 
 was even the greatest sinner in the uni- 
 verse. I have heard language used 
 which sent a thrill of horror to my heart; 
 and language may be found in the writ- 
 ings of those who hold to the doctrine of 
 imputation in the strictest sense, which 
 
 is but little short of blasphemy. I have 
 hesitated whether I should copy expres- 
 sions here on this subject from one of 
 the greatest and best of men, — I mean 
 Luther, — to show the nature of the 
 views which men sometimes entertain 
 on the subject of the imputation of sin 
 to Christ. But as Luther deliberately 
 published them to the world in his fa- 
 vourite book, which he used to call his 
 " Catharine de Bora," after the name of 
 his wife ; and as similar views are 
 sometimes entertained now ; and as it 
 is important that such views should be 
 held up to universal abhorrence, — no 
 matter how respectable the source from 
 which they emanate, — I will copy a 
 few of his expressions on this subject. 
 " And this, no doubt, all the prophets 
 did foresee in spirit, that Christ should 
 become the greatest transgressor, mur 
 derer, adulterer, thief, rebel, and bias 
 phemer, that ever was or could be 
 in the world. For he being made a 
 sacrifice for the sins of the whole world, is 
 not now an innocent person and without 
 sins ; is not now the Son of God, born of 
 the Virgin Mary; but a sinner which hath 
 and carrieth the sin of Paul, who was a 
 blasphemer, an oppressor, and a perse- 
 cutor; of Peter, which denied Christ; 
 of David, which was an adulterer, a 
 murderer, and caused the Gentiles to 
 blaspheme the name of the Lord ; and, 
 briefly, which hath and beareth all the 
 sins of all men in his body : not that 
 he himself committed them, but for that 
 he received them, being committed or 
 done of us, and laid them upon his own 
 body, that he might make satisfaction 
 for them with his own blood. There- 
 fore, this general sentence of Moses 
 comprehendeth him also (albeit in his 
 own person he was innocent), because 
 it found him amongst sinners and trans- 
 gressors ; like as the magistrate taketh 
 him for a thief, and punisheth him 
 whom he findeth among other thieves 
 and transgressors, though he never cam- 
 mitted any thing worthy of death. 
 When the law, therefore, found him 
 among thieves, it condemned and killed 
 him as a thief." " If thou wilt deny 
 him to be a sinner and accursed, deny, 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 335 
 
 also, that he was crucified and dead." 
 " But if it be not absurd to confess and 
 believe that Christ was crucified between 
 two thieves, then it is not absurd to say 
 that he was accursed, and of am. sis- 
 
 2TERS, THE GREATEST."* " God, OUr 
 
 most merciful Father, sent his only Son 
 into the world, and laid upon him all 
 the sins of all men, saying, be thou Pe- 
 ter, that denier; Paul, that persecutor, 
 olasphemer, and cruel oppressor ; David, 
 that adulterer; that sinner which did 
 eat the apple in Paradise ; that thief 
 which handed upon the cross; and, 
 briefly, be thou the person which hath 
 committed the sins of all men; see, 
 therefore, that thou pay and satisfy for 
 them." — Luther on the Galatians, ch. 
 iii. 13. [pp. 213—215. Ed. Lond. 
 1838.] Luther was a great and holy 
 man. He held, as firmly as any one 
 can, to the personal holiness of the Re- 
 deemer. But this language shows how 
 imperfect and erroneous views may 
 warp the language of holy men ; and 
 how those sentiments led him to 
 use language which is little less than 
 blasphemy. Indeed, we cannot doubt 
 that if Luther had heard this very lan- 
 guage used by one of the numerous 
 enemies of the gospel in his time, as 
 applicable to the Saviour, he would 
 have poured out the full torrent of his 
 burning wrath, and all the stern denun- 
 ciations of his most impassioned elo- 
 quence, on the head of the scoffer and 
 the blasphemer. It is singular, it is one 
 of the remarkable facts in the history 
 of mind, that a man with the New Tes- 
 tament before him, and accustomed to 
 contemplate daily its language, could 
 ever have allowed himself to use ex- 
 pressions like these of the holy and un- 
 spotted Saviour. But what is the 
 meaning of the language of Paul, it 
 will be asked, when he says that he was 
 made a curse for us V* In reply, I 
 
 hangeth on a tree." This passage is 
 found in Deut. xxi. 23. It occurs in a 
 law respecting one who was hanged for 
 a " sin worthy of death." ver. 22. The 
 law was, that he should be buried the 
 same day, and that the body should not 
 remain suspended over the night, and 
 it is added, as a reason for this, that 
 " he that is hanged is accursed of God )" 
 or, as it is in the margin, " the curse of 
 God." The meaning is, that when one 
 was executed for crime in this manner, 
 he was the object of the Divine displea- 
 sure and malediction. Regarded thus 
 as an object accursed of God, there was 
 a propriety that the man who was exe- 
 cuted for crime should be buried as 
 soon as possible, that the offensive ob- 
 ject should be hidden from the view. 
 In quoting this passage, Paul leaves out 
 the words " of God," and simply says, 
 that the one who was hanged on a tree 
 was held accursed. The sense of the 
 passage before us is, therefore, that Jesus 
 was subjected to what was regarded as 
 an accursed death. He was treated in 
 his death as if he had been a criminal. 
 He was put to death in the same man- 
 ner as he would have been if he had 
 himself been guilty of the violation of 
 the law. Had he been a thief or a mur- 
 derer; had he committed the grossest 
 a: id the blackest crimes, this would have 
 been the punishment to which he would 
 have been subjected. This was the 
 mode of punishment adapted to those 
 crimes, and he was treated as if all these 
 had been committed by him. Or, in 
 other words, had he been guilty of all 
 these, or any of these, he could not 
 have been treated in a more shameful 
 and ignominious manner than he was; 
 nor could he have been subjected to a 
 j more cruel death. As has already been 
 I intimated, it does not mean that he was 
 guilty, nor that he was not the object of 
 the approbation and love of God, but 
 
 answer, that the meaning must be as- j that his death was the same that it 
 
 certained from the passage which Paul 1 would have been if he had been the 
 
 quotes in support of his assertion, that 
 
 Christ was " made a curse for us." That 
 
 passage is, " Cursed is every one that j It was by such substituted sorrows that 
 
 vilest of malefactors, and that that death 
 was regarded by the law as accursed. 
 
 * The underscoring ia mine. 
 
 we are saved ; and he consented to die 
 the most shameful and painful death, 
 
$36 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 14 That a the blessing of 
 Abraham might come on the 
 Gentiles through Jesus Christ ; 
 
 a Ro. 4. 9, 16. 
 
 as if he were the vilest malefactor, in 
 order that the most guilty and vile of 
 the human race might be saved. In re- 
 gard to the way in which his death is 
 connected with our justification, see 
 Note on ch. ii. 16. It maybe observed, 
 also, that the punishment of the cross 
 was unknown to the Hebrews in the 
 time of Moses, and that the passage in 
 Deut. xxi. 23, did not refer originally 
 to that. Nor is it known that hang- 
 ing criminals alive was practised among 
 the Hebrews. Those who were guilty 
 of great crimes were first stoned or 
 otherwise put to death, and then their 
 bodies were suspended for a few hours 
 on a gibbet. In many cases, how- 
 ever, merely the head was suspended 
 after it had been severed from the body. 
 Gen. xl. 17—19. Num. xxv. 4, u. 
 Crneifixion was not known in the time 
 or the giving of the law ; but the Jews 
 gave such an extent to the law in Deut. 
 xxi. 23, as to include this mode of pu- 
 nishment. See John xix. 31, seq. 
 The force of the argument here, as 
 used by the apostle Paul, is, that if to 
 be suspended on a gibbet after having 
 been put to death was regarded as a 
 curse, it should not be regarded as a 
 curse in a less degree to be suspended 
 alive on a cross, and to be put to death 
 in this manner. If this interpretation 
 of the passage be correct, then it follows 
 that this should never be used as im- 
 plying, in any sense, that Christ was 
 guilty, or that he was ill-deserving, or 
 that he was an object of the Divine dis- 
 pleasure, or that he poured out on him 
 all his wrath. He was, throughout, an 
 object of the Divine love and approba- 
 tion. God never loved him more, or 
 approved what he did more, than when 
 he gave himself to death on the cross. 
 He had no hatred towards him ; he had 
 no displeasure to express towards him. 
 And it is this which makes the atone- 
 ment so wonderful and so glorious. 
 Had he been displeased with him ; had 
 
 that we might receive the pro- 
 mise b of the Spirit through 
 faith. 
 
 b Is. 44. 3. Eze. 36. 27. Joel 2. 28, 29. 
 
 the Redeemer been properly an object 
 of his wrath ; had he in any sense de- 
 served those sorrows, there would have 
 been no merit in his sufferings; there 
 would have been no atonement. What 
 merit can there be when one suffers 
 only what he deserves! But what 
 made the atonement so wonderful, so glo- 
 rious, so benevolent ; what made it an 
 atonement at all, was, that innocence 
 was treated as if it were guilt ; that the 
 most pure, and holy, and benevolent, 
 and lovely being on earth should consent 
 to be treated, and should be treated by 
 God and man, as if he were the most 
 vile and ill-deserving. This is the mys- 
 tery of the atonement ; this shows the 
 wonders of the Divine benevolence ; 
 this is the nature of substituted sorrow ; 
 and this lays the foundation for the offer 
 of pardon, and for the hope of eternal 
 salvation. 
 
 14. That the blessing of Abraham. 
 The blessing which Abraham enjoyed, 
 to wit, that of being justified by faith. 
 ^ Might come on the Gentiles. As 
 well as on the Jews. Abraham was 
 blessed in this manner before he was 
 circumcised (Rom. iv. 11), and the 
 same blessing might be imparted to 
 others also who are not circumcised. See 
 this argument illustrated in the Notes 
 on Rom. iv. 10—12. f Through 
 Jems Christ. Since he has been made 
 a curse for all, and since he had no ex- 
 clusive reference to the Jews or to any 
 other class of men, all may come and 
 partake alike of the benefits of his sal- 
 vation. 1 That we might receive the 
 promise of the Spirit. That all we 
 who are Christian converts. The pro- 
 mise of the Spirit, or the promised 
 Spirit, is here put for all the blessings 
 connected with the Christian religion. 
 It includes evidently the miraculous 
 agency of the Holy Spirit ; and all his 
 influences in renewing the heart, in 
 sanctifying the soul, and in comforting 
 the people of God. These influences 
 

 A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 337 
 
 15 Brethren, I speak after the 
 manner of men ; Though it be 
 but a man's * covenant, yet if it 
 
 » testament. 
 
 had been obtained in virtue of the suf- 
 ferings and death of the Lord Jesus in 
 the place of sinners, and these influ- 
 ences were the sum of all the blessings 
 promised by the prophets. 
 
 15. Brethren, I speak after the man- 
 ner of men. I draw an illustration from 
 what actually occurs among men. The 
 illustration is, that when a contract or 
 agreement is made by men involving 
 obligations and promises, no one can 
 add to it or take from it. It will remain 
 as it was originally made. So with 
 God. He made a solemn promise to 
 Abraham. That promise pertained to 
 his posterity. The blessing was con- 
 nected with that promise, and it was of 
 the nature of a compact with Abraham. 
 But if so, then this could not be effected 
 by the law which was four hundred 
 years after, and the law must have been 
 given to secure some different object 
 from that designed by the promise made 
 to Abraham, ver, 19. But the promise 
 made to Abraham was designed to se- 
 cure the " inheritance," or the favour of 
 God ; and if so, then the same thing 
 could not be secured by the observance 
 of the law, since there could not be two 
 ways so unlike each other of obtaining 
 the same thing. God cannot have two 
 ways of justifying and saving men; 
 and if he revealed a mode to Abraham, 
 and that mode was by faith, then it 
 could not be by the observance of the 
 law which was given so long after. 
 The main design of the argument and 
 the illustration here (ver. 15, seq.) is 
 *o show that the promise made to Abra- 
 nam was by no means made void by the 
 giving of the law. The law had another 
 design, which did not interfere with the 
 promise made to Abraham. That stood 
 on its own merits, irrespective of the 
 demands and the design of the law. 
 It is possible, as Rosenmuller suggests, 
 that Paul may have had his eye on an 
 objection to his view. The objection 
 may have been that there were import- 
 29 
 
 be confirmed, no man disannul- 
 leth, or addeth thereto. 
 
 16 Now to Abraham ° and his 
 
 aGe. 12.3,7: 17.7. 
 
 ant acts of legislation which succeeded 
 the promise made to Abraham, and that 
 that promise must have been superseded 
 by the giving of the law. To this he 
 replies that the Mosaic law given at a 
 late period could not take away or nullify 
 a solemn promise made to Abraham, 
 but that it was intended for a different 
 object. 1 Though it be but a man's 
 covenant. A compact -or agreement be- 
 tween man and man. Even in such a 
 case no one can add to it or take from 
 it. The argument here is, that such a 
 covenant or agreement must be much 
 less important, than a promise made by 
 God. But even that could not be an- 
 nulled. How much less, therefore, 
 could a covenant made by God be 
 treated as if it were vain. The word 
 covenant here (JuS-™*) is in the 
 margin rendered " Testament ;" i. e. 
 will. So Tindal renders it. Its proper 
 classical signification is will or testa- 
 ment, though in the Septuagint and in 
 the New Testament it is the word 
 which is used to denote a covenant or 
 compact. See Note, Acts ii*i. 25. Here 
 it is used in the proper sense of the 
 word covenant, or compact; a mutual 
 agreement between man and man. 
 The idea is, that where such a cove- 
 nant exists ; where the faith of a man 
 is solemnly pledged in this manner, no 
 change can be made in the agreement. 
 It is ratified, and firm, and final, f If 
 it be confirmed. By a seal or other- 
 wise. \ No man disannulleth, &c. It 
 must stand. No one can change it. 
 No new conditions can be annexed ; 
 nor can there be any drawing back 
 from its terms. It binds the parties to 
 a faithful fulfilment of all the condi- 
 tions. This is well understood among 
 men ; and the apostle says that the 
 same thing must take place in regard 
 to God. 
 
 1 6. Now to Abraham and his seed. 
 To him and his posterity, f Were the 
 promises made. The promise here re- 
 
338 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 seed were the promises made. 
 He saith not, And to seeds, as of 
 
 ferred to was that which is recorded in 
 Gen. xxii. 17, 18: "In blessing I will 
 bless thee, and in multiplying I will 
 multiply thy seed as the stars of heaven, 
 and as the sand which is upon the sea- 
 shore ; and in thy seed shall all the na- 
 tions of the earth be blessed." ^ He 
 saith not, And to seeds, as if many, but 
 as of one, &c. He does not use the 
 plural term, as if the promise extended 
 to many persons, but he speaks in the 
 singular number, as if but one was in- 
 tended; and that one must be the 
 Messiah. Such is Paul's interpretation ; 
 such is evidently the sentiment which 
 he intends to convey, and the argument 
 which he intends to urge. He designs 
 evidently to be understood as affirming 
 that in the use of the singular number 
 ff-7rtpuA (seed), instead of the plural 
 a-7ri^fA*.<rdL (seeds), there is a fair ground 
 of argument to demonstrate that the 
 promise related to Christ or the Mes- 
 siah, and to him primarily if not ex- 
 clusively. Now no one ever probably 
 read this passage without feeling a 
 difficulty, and without asking himself 
 whether this argument is sound, and is 
 worthy a man of candour, and especially 
 of an inspired man. Some of the diffi- 
 culties in the passage are these. (1.) 
 The promise referred to in Genesis 
 seems to have related to the posterity of 
 Abraham at large, without any particu- 
 lar reference to an individual. It is to 
 his seed ; his descendants ; to all his 
 seed or posterity. Such would be the 
 fair and natural interpretation should 
 it be read by hundreds or thousands of 
 persons who had never heard of the 
 interpretation here put upon it by Paul. 
 (2.) The argument of the apostle seems 
 to proceed on the supposition that the 
 word "seed" (inri^fx'j.), i. e. posterity, 
 here cannot refer to more than one per- 
 son. If it had, says he, it would have 
 been in the plural number. But the 
 fact is, that the word is often used to 
 denote posterity at large ; to refer to 
 descendants without limitation, just as 
 the word posterity is with us ; and it is 
 
 many ; but as of one, And to 
 thy seed, which is Christ. 
 
 a fact, moreover, that the word is not 
 used in the plural at all to denote a pos- 
 terity, the singular form being con- 
 stantly employed for that purpose. Any 
 one who will open Tromm's Concord- 
 ance to the Septuagint, or Schmids' 
 on the New Testament, will see the 
 most ample confirmation of this remark. 
 Indeed the plural form of the word is 
 never used except in this place in Gala- 
 tians. The difficulty, therefore, is, that 
 the remark here of Paul appears to be 
 a trick of argument, or a quibble more 
 worthy of a trifling Jewish Rabbi, than 
 of a grave reasoner or an inspired man. 
 I have stated this difficulty freely just 
 as I suppose it has struck hundreds of 
 minds, because I do not wish to shrink 
 from any real difficulty in examining 
 the Bible, but to see whether it can be 
 fairly met. In meeting it, expositor? 
 have resorted to various explanations, 
 most of them, as it seems to me, unsa- 
 tisfactory, and it is not necessary to de- 
 tail them. Bishop Burnet, Doddridge, 
 and some others suppose that the apos- 
 tle means to say that the promises made 
 to Abraham were not only appropriated 
 to one class of his descendants, that is, 
 to those by Isaac, but that they centred 
 in one illustrious person, through whom 
 all the rest are made partakers of the 
 blessings of the Abrahamic covenant. 
 This Doddridge admits the apostle says 
 in u bad Greek," but still he supposes 
 that this is the true exposition. Noessett 
 and Rosenmuller suppose that by the 
 word c-Tj-s^* (seed) here, is not meant 
 the Messiah, but Christians in general ; 
 the body of believers. But this is evi- 
 dently in contradiction of the apostle, 
 who expressly affirms that Christ was 
 intended. It is also liable to another ob- 
 jection that is fatal to the opinion. The 
 very point of the argument of the apos- 
 tle is, that the singular and not the 
 plural form of the word is used, and 
 that therefore, an individual and not a 
 collective body or a number of indivi- 
 duals is intended. But according to this 
 interpretation the reference is, in fact, to 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 339 
 
 a numerous body of individuals, to the 
 whole body of Christians. Jerome af- 
 firms that the apostle made use of a 
 false argument, which, although it might 
 appear well enough to the stupid Gala- 
 tians, would not be approved by wise or 
 learned men. — Chandler. Borger en- 
 deavours to show that this was in ac- 
 cordance with the mode of speaking 
 and writing among the Hebrews, and 
 especially that the Jewish Rabbis were 
 accustomed to draw an argument like 
 this from the singular number, and that 
 the Hebrew word (jn?) seed is often 
 used by them in this manner. See his 
 remarks as quoted by Bloomfield in lac. 
 But the objection to this is, that though 
 this might be common, yet it is not the 
 less a quibble on the word, for certainly 
 the very puerile reasoning of the Jewish 
 Rabbis is no good authority on which 
 to vindicate the authority of an apostle. 
 Locke and Clarke suppose that this re- 
 fers to Christ as the spiritual head of 
 the mystical body, and to all believers 
 in him. Le Clerc supposes that it is an 
 allegorical kind of argument, that was 
 fitted to convince the Jews only, who 
 were accustomed to this kind of reason- 
 ing. I do not know but this solution 
 may be satisfactory to many minds, and 
 that it is capable of vindication, since it 
 is not easy to say how far it is proper to 
 make use of methods of argument used 
 by an adversary in order to convince 
 them. The argumentum ad hominem 
 is certainly allowable to a certain extent, 
 when designed to show the legitimate 
 tendency of the principles advanced by 
 an opponent. But here there is no evi- 
 dence that Paul was reasoning with an 
 adversary. He was showing the Gala- 
 tians, not the Jews, what was the truth, 
 and justice to the character of the apos- 
 tle requires us to suppose that he would 
 make use of only such arguments as 
 are in accordance with the eternal prin- 
 ciples of truth, and such as may be 
 seen to be true in all countries and at 
 all times. The question then is, whether 
 the argument of the apostle here drawn 
 from the use of the singular word 
 a-Tti^fxa {seed), is one that can be seen to 
 be sound ! or is it a mere quibble, as 
 
 Jerome and Le Clerc suppose 1 or is it 
 to be left to be presumed to have had a 
 force which we cannot now trace ; for 
 this is possible. Socrates and Plato may 
 have used arguments of a subtle nature, 
 based on some nice distinctions of words 
 which were perfectly sound, but which 
 we, from our necessary ignorance of 
 the delicate shades of meaning in the 
 language, cannot now understand. Per- 
 haps the following remarks may show 
 that there is real force and propriety in 
 the position which the apostle takes 
 here. If not, then I confess my inabi- 
 lity to explain the passage. (1.) There 
 can be no reasonable objection to th6 
 opinion that the promise originally 
 made to Abraham included the Messiah, 
 and the promised blessings were to de- 
 scend through him. This is so often 
 affirmed in the New Testament, that to 
 deny it would be to deny the repeated 
 declarations of the sacred writers, and 
 to make war on the whole structure of 
 the Bible. See particularly Rom. iv. 
 Comp. John viii. 56. If this general 
 principle be admitted, it will remove 
 much perplexity from the controversy. 
 (2.) The promise made to Abraham 
 (Gen. xxii. 18), "and in thy seed 
 (unta, Sept. w t<o a-Ti^unri <rou, where 
 the words both in Heb. and in Gr. are 
 in the singular number) shall all the 
 nations of the earth be blessed," cannot 
 refer to all the seed or the posterity of 
 Abraham taken collectively. He had 
 two sons,Isaacby Rebecca, and Ishmael 
 by Hagar, besides numerous descend- 
 ants by Keturah. Gen. xxv. I, seq. 
 Through a large part of these no par- 
 ticular blessings descended on the hu- 
 man family, and there is no sense in 
 which all the families of the earth are 
 particularly blessed in them. On any 
 supposition, therefore, there must have 
 been some limitation of the promise ; 
 j or the word " seed" was intended to in- 
 | elude only some portion of his descend- 
 j ants, whether a particular branch or an 
 j individual, does not yet appear. It 
 must have referred to apart only of the 
 j posterity of Abraham, but to what part 
 is to be learned only by subsequent re- 
 I velations. (3.) It was the intention 
 
540 
 
 GALATIANS 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 17 And this I say, That 
 the covenant that was confirmed 
 
 of God to confine the blessing to one 
 branch of the family, to Isaac and his 
 descendants. The peculiar promised 
 blessing was to be through him, and 
 not through the family of Ishmael. 
 This intention is often expressed. Gen. 
 xvii. 19 — 21 ; xxi. 12; xxv. 11. Comp. 
 Rom. ix. 7. Heb. xi. 18. Thus the 
 original promise of a blessing through the 
 posterity of Abraham became somewhat 
 narrowed down, so as to show that there 
 was to be a limitation of the promise to 
 a particular portion of his posterity. 
 (4.) If the promise had referred to the 
 two branches of the family ; if it had 
 been intended to include Ishmael as 
 well as Isaac, then some term would 
 have been used that would have ex- 
 pressed this. So unlike were Isaac and 
 Ishmael; so different in the circum- 
 stances of their birth and their future 
 life; so dissimilar were the prophecies 
 respecting them, that it might be said 
 that their descendants were two races 
 of men ; and in Scripture the race of 
 Ishmael ceased to be spoken of as the 
 descendants or the posterity of Abra- 
 ham. There was a sense in which the 
 posterity of Isaac was regarded as the 
 seed or posterity of Abraham in which 
 the descendants of Ishmael were not ; 
 and the term (ttt^jj.x or " seed" there- 
 fore properly designated the posterity of 
 Isaac. It might be said, then, that the 
 promise "to thy seed" did not refer to the 
 two races, as if he had said <T7rifA.ct.Tx, 
 "seeds," but to one {jr7r'i^<t), ' the seed' 
 of Abraham, by way of eminence. 
 (5.) This promise was subsequently 
 narrowed down still more, so as to in- 
 clude only one portion of the descend- 
 ants of Isaac. Thus it was limited to 
 the posterity of Jacob, Esau being ex- 
 cluded ; subsequently the peculiar bless- 
 ing was promised to the family of 
 Judah, one of the twelve sons of Jacob 
 (Gen. xlix. 10); in subsequent times 
 it was still further narrowed down or 
 limited to the family of Jesse ; then to 
 that of David ; then to that of Solomon, 
 
 before of God in Christ, the 
 law, which a was four hundred 
 
 a Ex. 12. 40, 41 
 
 until it terminated in the Messiah. The 
 original intention of the promise was 
 that there should be a limitation, and 
 that limitation was made from age 
 to age, until it terminated in the Mes- 
 siah, the Lord Jesus Christ. By being 
 thus narrowed down from age to age, 
 and limited by successive revelations, 
 it was shown that the Messiah was emi- 
 nently intended, — which is what Paul 
 says here. The promise was indeed at 
 first general, and the term used was of 
 the most general nature ; but it was 
 shown from time to time that God 
 intended that it should be applied only 
 to one branch or portion of the family 
 of Abraham ; and that limitation was 
 finally so made as to terminate in the 
 Messiah. This I take to be the mean- 
 ing of this very difficult passage of 
 Scripture ; and though it may not be 
 thought that all the perplexities are re- 
 moved by these remarks, yet I trust they 
 will be seen to be so far removed as 
 that it will appear that there is real force 
 in the argument of the apostle, and that 
 it is not a mere trick of argument, or a 
 quibble unworthy of him as an apostle 
 and a man. 
 
 17. The covenant which was con- 
 firmed before of God. By God, in his 
 promise to Abraham. It was confirmed 
 before the giving of the law. The con- 
 firmation was the solemn promise which 
 God made to him. ^ In Christ. 
 With respect to the Messiah ; a cove- 
 nant relating to him, and which pro- 
 mised that he should descend from 
 Abraham. The word " in," in the 
 phrase u in Christ," does not quite ex 
 press the meaning of the Greek lie 
 X^ittcv. That means rather " unto 
 Christ;" or unto the Messiah; that is, 
 the covenant had respect to him. This 
 is a common signification of the propo- 
 sition u'c ^f The law. The law given 
 by God to Moses on mount Sinai. 
 ^ Which was four hundred and thirty 
 years after. In regard to the difficulties 
 which have been felt respecting the 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 341 
 
 and thirty years after, cannot I of the law, it is no more of 
 
 disannul, that it should make 
 the promise of none effect. 
 18 For if ° the inheritance be 
 
 chronology referred to here. See the 
 Note on Acts vii. 6. The exact time 
 here referred to was probably when 
 Abraham was called, and when the pro- 
 mise was first made to him. Assuming 
 that as the time referred to, it is not 
 difficult to make out the period of four 
 hundred and thirty years. That pro- 
 mise was made when Abraham was 
 seventy-five years old. Gen. xii. 3, 4. 
 From that time to the birth of Isaac, 
 when Abraham was a hundred years 
 old, was twenty-five years. Gen. xxi. 5. 
 Isaac was sixty when Jacob was born. 
 Gen. xxv. 26. Jacob went into Egypt 
 when he was one hundred and thirty 
 years old. Gen. xlvii. 9. And the 
 Israelites sojourned there, according to 
 the Septuagint (Ex. xii. 40), two hun- 
 dred and fifteen years, which completes 
 the number. See Doddridge, Whitby, 
 and Bloomfield. This was doubtless 
 the common computation in the time of 
 Paul; and as his argument did not de- 
 pend at all on the exactness of the reck- 
 oning, he took the estimate which was 
 in common use, without pausing or 
 embarrassing himself by an inquiry 
 whether it was strictly accurate or not. 
 Kis argument was the same, whether 
 the law was given four hundred and 
 thirty years after the promise, or only 
 two hundred years. The argument is, 
 that a law given after the solemn pro- 
 mise which had been made and con- 
 firmed, could not make that promise 
 void. It would still be binding accord- 
 ing to the original intention ; and the 
 law must have been given for some pur- 
 pose entirely different from that of the 
 promise. No one can doubt the sound- 
 ness of this argument. The promise 
 to Abraham was of the nature of a 
 compact. But no law given by one of 
 the parties to a treaty or compact can 
 disannul it. Two nations make a 
 treaty of peace, involving solemn pro- 
 pledges, and obligations. No 
 29* 
 
 promise : but God gave it to 
 Abraham by promise. 
 
 a Ro. 4. 14. 
 
 law made afterwards by one of the na- 
 tions can disannul or change that treaty. 
 Two men make a contract with solemn 
 pledges and promises. No act of om 
 of the parties can change that, or alter 
 the conditions. So it was with the 
 covenant between God and Abraham. 
 God made to him solemn promises 
 which could not be affected by a future 
 giving of a law. God would feel him- 
 self to be under the most solemn obli- 
 gation to fulfil all the promises which 
 he had made to him. 
 
 18. For if the inheritance. The 
 inheritance promised to Abraham. The 
 sum of the promise was, that " he 
 should be the heir of the world." See 
 Rom. iv. 13, and the Note on that verse. 
 To that heirship or inheritance Paul 
 refers here, and says that it was an es- 
 sential part of it that it was to be in 
 virtue of the promise made to him, and 
 not by fulfilling the law. \ Be of the 
 law. If it be by observing the law of 
 Moses ; or if it come in any way by 
 the fulfilling of law. This is plain. 
 Yet the Jews contended that the 
 blessings of justification and salvation 
 were to be in virtue of the observance 
 of the law of Moses. But if so, says 
 Paul, then it could not be by the pro- 
 mise made to Abraham, since there 
 could not be two ways of obtaining the 
 same blessing, ^f But God gave it to 
 Abraham by promise. That, says Paul, 
 is a settled point. It is perfectly clear ; 
 and that is to be held as an indisputable 
 fact, that the blessing was given to 
 Abraham by a promise. That promise 
 was confirmed and ratified hundreds of 
 years before the law was given, and 
 the giving of the law could not affect it. 
 But that promise was, that he would be 
 the ancestor of the Messiah, and that hi 
 him all the nations of the earth should* 
 be blessed. Of course, if they were to 
 be blessed in this way, them it was not 
 to be by the observance of the law, and 
 
342 
 
 19 Wherefore then serveth 
 the law ? a It was added because 
 
 a Ro. 5. 20. 
 
 GALATIANS. [A. D. 58. 
 
 of transgressions, till the seed 
 b should come to whom the pro- 
 
 b ver. 16. 
 
 the law must have been given for a dif- 
 ferent purpose. What that was, he 
 states in the following vt'rses. 
 
 19. Wherefore then serveth the law ? 
 This is obviously an objection which 
 might be urged to the reasoning which 
 the apostle had pursued. It was very 
 obvious to ask, if the principles which 
 he had laid down were correct, of what 
 use was the law 1 Why was it given at 
 all? Why were there so many wonderful 
 exhibitions of the Divine power at its pro- 
 mulgation 1 Why were there so many 
 commendations of it in the Scriptures 7 
 And why were there so many injunc- 
 tions to obey it 1 Are all these to be re- 
 garded as nothing ; and is the law to be 
 esteemed as worthless ? To all this, the 
 apostle replies that the law was not use- 
 less, but that it was given by God for 
 great and important purposes, and 
 especially for purposes closely con- 
 nected with the fulfilment of the pro- 
 mise made to Abraham and the work 
 of the Mediator. 1 It was added 
 (T^oa-erid-ti). It was appended to all the 
 previous institutions and promises. It 
 was an additional arrangement on the 
 part of God for great and important 
 purposes. It was an arrangement sub- 
 sequent to the giving of the promise, 
 and was intended to secure important 
 advantages until the superior arrange- 
 ment under the Messiah should be in- 
 troduced, and was with reference to 
 that. \ Because of transgressions. On 
 account of transgressions, or with re- 
 ference to them. The meaning is, that 
 the law was given to show the true na- 
 ture of transgressions, or to show what 
 was sin. It was not to reveal a way of 
 justification, but it was to disclose the 
 true nature of sin ; to deter men from 
 committing it; to declare its penalty ; to 
 convince men of it, and thus to be 
 " ancillary" to, and preparatory to the 
 work of redemption through the Re- 
 deemer. This is the true account of 
 the law of God as given to apostate 
 man, and this use of the law still exists. I 
 
 | This effect of the law is accom- 
 plished, (I.) By showing us what 
 j God requires, and what is duty. It is 
 j the straight rule of what is right ; and 
 ! to depart from that is the measure of 
 i wrong. (2.) It shows us the nature 
 and extent of transgression by showing 
 ! us how far we have departed from it. 
 , (3.) It shows what is the just penalty 
 of transgression, and is thus fitted to re- 
 veal its true nature. (4.) It is fitted to 
 produce conviction for sin, and thus 
 shows how evil and bitter a thing trans- 
 gression is. See Notes on Rom. iv. 15 ; 
 vii. 7 — 11. (5.) It thus shows its own 
 inability to justify and save men, and 
 is a preparatory arrangement to lead 
 men to the cross of the Redeemer. See 
 Note on ver. 24. At the same time, 
 (6.) The law was given with reference 
 to transgressions in order to keep men 
 from transgression. It was designed to 
 restrain and control them by its denun- 
 ciations, and by the fear of its threat- 
 ened penalties. When Paul says that 
 the law was given on account of trans- 
 gressions, we are not to suppose that 
 this was the sole use of the law ; but that 
 this was a main or leading purpose. It 
 may accomplish many other important 
 purposes {Calvin), but this is one lead- 
 ing design. And this design it still 
 accomplishes* It shows men their 
 duty. It reminds them of their guilt. 
 It teaches them how far they have 
 wandered from God. It reveals to them 
 the penalty of disobedience. It shows 
 them that justification by the law is 
 impossible, and that there must be some 
 other way by which men must be saved. 
 And since these advantages are derived 
 from it, it is of importance that that 
 law should be still proclaimed, and that 
 its high demands and its penalties 
 should be constantly held up to the 
 view of men. t Till the seed should 
 come, &.c. The Messiah, to whom the 
 promise particularly applied. See ver. 
 16. It is not implied here that the law 
 would be of no use after that, but that 
 
*L. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER 111. 
 
 343 
 
 mise was made ; and it was 
 
 a Ac. 7. 53. He. 2.2. 
 
 b Ex. 20. 19—22. De. 5. 22—31. 
 
 it would accomplish important purposes 
 before that. A large portion of the 
 laws of Moses would then indeed cease 
 to be binding. They were given to 
 accomplish important purposes among 
 the Jews until the Messiah should come, 
 and then they would give way to the 
 more important institutions of the gos- 
 pel. But the moral law would continue 
 to accomplish valuable objects after his 
 advent, in showing men the nature of 
 transgression and leading them to the 
 cross of Christ. The essential idea of 
 Paul here is, that the whole arrangement 
 of the Mosaic economy, including all 
 his laws, was with reference to the 
 Messiah. It was a part of a great and 
 glorious whole. It was not an inde- 
 pendent thing. It did not stand by 
 itself. It was incomplete and in many 
 respects unintelligible until he came — 
 as one part of a tally is unmeaning and 
 useless until the other is found. In 
 itself it did not justify or save men, 
 but it served to introduce a system by 
 which they could be saved. It con- 
 tained no provisions for justifying men, 
 but it was in the design of God an 
 essential part of a system by which 
 they could be saved. It was not a 
 whole in itself, but it was a part of a 
 glorious whole, and led to the comple- 
 tion and fulfilment of the entire scheme 
 by which the race could be justified 
 and brought to heaven. ^ And it was 
 ordained by angels. That is, the law 
 was ordained by angels. The word 
 ordained nere (JiArzyu;) usually means 
 to arrange ; to dispose in order ; and is 
 commonly used with reference to the 
 marshalling of an army. In regard to 
 the sentiment here that the law was 
 ordained by angels, see the Note on 
 Acts vii. 53. The Old Testament 
 makes no mention of the presence of 
 angels at the giving of the law, but it 
 was a common opinion among the Jews 
 that the law was given by the instru- 
 mentality of angels, and arranged by 
 them ; and Paul speaks in accordance 
 with this opinion. Comp. Heb. ii. 2. 
 
 ordained by angels a in the hand 
 b of a Mediator. 
 
 The sentiment here is that the law was 
 prescribed, ordered, or arranged by the 
 instrumentality of the angels; an opi- 
 nion, certainly, which none can prove 
 not to be true. In itself considered, 
 there is no more absurdity in the opinion 
 that the law of God should be given by 
 the agency of angels, than there is that 
 it should be done by the instrumentality 
 of man. In the Septuagint (Deut. 
 xxxiii. 2) there is an allusion of the 
 same kind. The Hebrew is, " From his 
 right hand went a fiery law for them." 
 The LXX. render this, "His angels 
 with him on his right-hand." Comp. Jo- 
 seph. Ant. xv. 5. 3. That angels were 
 present at the giving of the law is more 
 than implied, it is believed, in two pas- 
 sages of the Old Testament. The one 
 is that which is referred to above, and a 
 part of which the translators of the Sep- 
 tuagint expressly apply to angels. Deut. 
 xxxiii. 2. The Hebrew is, " Jehovah 
 came from Sinai, and rose up from Seir 
 unto them ; he shined forth from mount 
 Paron, and he came [literally] with ten 
 thousands of holiness ;" that is, with his 
 holy ten thousands, or with his holy 
 myriads (tvnp roanD). By the holy 
 myriads here mentioned what can be 
 meant but the angels? The word 
 " holy" in the Scriptures is not given to 
 storms and winds and tempests; and 
 the natural interpretation is, that he was 
 attended with vast hosts of intelligent 
 beings. The same sentiment is found 
 in Ps. Ixviii. 17: "The chariots of 
 God are myriads, thousands repeated; 
 the Lord is in the midst of them, as in 
 Sinai, as in his sanctuary." Does not 
 this evidently imply that when he gave 
 the law on mount Sinai he was sur- 
 rounded by a multitude of angels ? See 
 Stuart on the Hebrews, Excursus viii. 
 pp. 565 — "567. It may be added, that in 
 the fact itself there is no improbability. 
 What is more natural than to suppose 
 that when the law of God was promul- 
 gated in such a solemn manner on 
 mount Sinai to a world, that the angels 
 should be present 1 If any occasion on 
 
344 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58 
 
 earth has ever occurred where their 
 presence was allowable and proper, 
 assuredly that was one. And yet the 
 Scriptures abound with assurances that 
 the angels are interested in human 
 affairs, and that they have had an im- 
 portant agency in the concerns of man. 
 J In the hand. That is, under the 
 direction, or control of. To be in the 
 hand of one is to be under his control ; 
 and the idea is, that while this was done 
 by the ordering of the angels or by 
 their disposition, it was under the con- 
 trol of a Mediator. Rosenmiiller, how- 
 ever, and others suppose that this means 
 simply by {per); that is, that it was 
 done by the instrumentality of a Me- 
 diator. But it seems to me to imply 
 more than this ; that the Mediator here 
 referred to had some jurisdiction or con- 
 trol over the law thus given ; or that it 
 was subject to him, or with reference to 
 him. The interpretation however will 
 be affected by the view which is taken 
 of the meaning of the word Mediator. 
 f Of a Mediator. The word Mediator 
 (Mw/tx?) means properly one who in- 
 tervenes between two parties, either as 
 an interpreter or internuncius, or as an 
 intercessor or reconciler. In the New 
 Testament, in all the places where it 
 occurs, unless the passage before us be 
 an exception, it is applied to the Lord 
 Jesus, the great Mediator between God 
 and man. 1 Tim. ii. 5. Heb. viii. 6 ; 
 ix. 15 ; xii. 24. There has been some 
 difference of opinion as to the reference 
 of the word here. Rosenmiiller, Gro- 
 tius, Doddridge, Bloomfield, Robinson 
 (Lex.), Chandler, and many others sup- 
 pose that it refers to Moses. Calvin 
 and many others suppose that the refer- 
 ence is to Christ. The common senti- 
 ment among expositors undoubtedly is, 
 that the reference is to Moses ; and it is 
 by no means easy to show that that is 
 not the correct opinion. But to me it 
 seems that there are reasons why it 
 should be regarded as having reference 
 to the great Mediator between God and 
 man. Some of the reasons which 
 incline me to this opinion are, (1.) 
 That the name Mediator is not, so far 
 as I know, applied to Moses elsewhere 
 
 in the Scriptures. (2.) The name is 
 appropriated to the Lord Jesus. This 
 is certainly the case in the New Testa- 
 ment, unless the passage before us be an 
 exception ; and the name is not found in 
 the Old Testament. (3.) It is difficult 
 to see the pertinency of the remark 
 here, or the bearing on the argument 
 on the supposition that it refers to 
 Moses. How would it affect the drift 
 and purport of the apostle's reasoning'? 
 How would it bear on the case ] But 
 on the supposition that it refers to the 
 Lord Jesus, that would be a material 
 fact in the argument. It would show 
 that the law was subordinate to the 
 Messiah, and was with reference to him. 
 It was not only subservient by being 
 ordained by angels, but as being under 
 the Mediator, and with reference to him 
 until he, the " promised seed," should 
 come. (4.) It is only by such an 
 interpretation that the following " vexed" 
 verse can be understood. If that be 
 applied to Moses, I see not that any 
 sense can be affixed to it that shall be 
 pertinent or intelligible. These rea- 
 sons may not appear satisfactory to 
 others; and I admit they are not as 
 clear as would be desirable that reasons 
 should he ill the exposition of the Bible, 
 but they may be allowed perhaps to 
 have some weight. If they are of 
 weight, then the sentiment of the pas- 
 sage is, that the law was wholly subor- 
 dinate, and could not make the promise 
 of no effect. For, (1.) It was given 
 hundreds of years after the promise. 
 (2.) It was under the direction of 
 angels, who must themselves be inferior 
 to, and subordinate to the Messiah, the 
 Mediator between God and man. If 
 given by their agency and instrumental- 
 ity, however important it might be, 
 it could not interfere with a direct pro- 
 mise made by God himself, but must be 
 subordinate to that promise. (3.) It 
 was under the Mediator, the promised 
 Messiah. It was in his hand, and sub- 
 ject to him. It was a part of the great 
 plan which was contemplated in the 
 promise, and was tributary to that, and 
 must be so regarded. It was not an 
 independent scheme ; not a thing that 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 345 
 
 20 Now a mediator is not a 
 
 oDe. 6.4. 
 
 stood by itself; but a scheme subordi- 
 nate and tributary, and wholly under 
 the control of the Mediator, and a part 
 of the plan of redemption, and of 
 course to be modified or abrogated just 
 as that plan should require, and to be 
 regarded as wholly tributary to it. This 
 view will accord certainly with the 
 argument of Paul, and with his design 
 in showing that the law could by 
 no means, and in no way, interfere 
 with the promise made to Abraham, but 
 must be regarded as wholly subordinate 
 to the plan of redemption. 
 
 20. Now a mediator is not a mediator 
 of one, &c. This verse has given great 
 perplexity to commentators. " There 
 is, unquestionably," says Bloomfield, 
 u no passage in the New Testament 
 that has so much, and to so little purpose, 
 exercised the learning and ingenuity 
 of commentators as the present, which 
 seems to defy all attempts to elicit any 
 satisfactory sense, except by methods so 
 violent as to be almost the same thing 
 as writing the passage afresh." In re- 
 gard, however, to the truth of the de- 
 clarations here — that " a mediator is not 
 a mediator of one," and that " God is 
 one" — there can be no doubt, and no 
 difficulty. The very idea of a mediator 
 supposes that there are two parties or 
 persons between whom the mediator 
 comes either to reconcile them or to 
 bear some message from the one to the 
 other; and it is abundantly affirmed 
 also in the Old Testament that there is 
 but one God. See Deut. vi. 4. But 
 the difficulty is, to see the pertinency or 
 the bearing of the remark on the argu- 
 ment of the apostle. What does he 
 intend to illustrate by the declaration 1 
 and how do the truths which he states, 
 illustrate the point before him 1 It is not 
 consistent with the design of these 
 Notes to detail the numerous opinions 
 which have been entertained of the 
 passage. They may be found in the 
 larger commentaries, and particularly 
 may be seen in Koppe, Excursus vii. 
 on the Galatians. After referring to a 
 
 mediator of one, b r n God a is 
 one. 
 
 number of works on the passage. 
 Rosenmuller adopts the following inter- 
 pretation, proposed by Noessett, as ex- 
 pressing the true sense. But he (t. e 
 Moses) is not a mediator of one race 
 (to wit the Abrahamic), but God is the 
 same God of them and of the Gentiles. 
 The sense according to this is, that 
 Moses had not reference in his office 
 as mediator or as internuncius to the 
 descendants of Abraham, or to that one 
 seed or race, referred to in the promise. 
 He added the hard conditions of the 
 law ; required its stern and severe ob- 
 servances ; his institutions pertained to 
 the Jews mainly. They indeed might 
 obtain the favour of God, but by com- 
 pliance with the severe laws which he 
 had ordained. But to the one seed, the 
 whole posterity of Abraham, they con- 
 cerning whom the promise was made, 
 the Gentiles as well as the Jews, he 
 had no reference in his institutions: all 
 their favours, therefore, must depend on 
 the fulfilment of the promise made to 
 Abraham. But God is one and the 
 same in reference to all. His promise 
 pertains to all. He is the common God 
 to the Jews and the Gentiles. There is 
 great difficulty in embracing this view 
 of the passage, but it is not necessary 
 for me to state the difficulty, or to 
 attempt to show that the view here pro- 
 posed cannot be defended. Whitby 
 has expressed substantially the same 
 interpretation of this passage. " But 
 this mediator (viz. Moses) was only 
 the mediator of the Jews, and so was 
 only the mediator of one party, to 
 whom belonged the blessing of Abra- 
 ham, ver. 8. 14. But God, who made 
 the promise, 'That in one should all 
 the families of the earth be blessed/ is 
 one ; the God of the other party, the 
 Gentiles as well as the Jews, and so as 
 ready to justify the one as the other." 
 According to this interpretation, the 
 sense is, that Moses was mediator of 
 one part of Abraham's seed, the Israel 
 ites ; but was not the mediator of the 
 other part of that seed, the Gentiles • 
 
346 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 yet there was the same God to both 
 parties, who was equally ready to justify 
 both. Locke has expressed a view of 
 the passage which differs somewhat 
 from this, but which has quite as much 
 plausibility. According to his exposi- 
 tion it means, that God was but one of 
 the parties to the promise. The Jews 
 and the Gentiles made up the other. 
 But at the giving of the law Moses was 
 a mediator ordy between God and the 
 Israelites, and, therefore, could not 
 transact any thing which would tend 
 to the disannulling of the promise 
 which was between God and the Jews 
 and Gentiles together, the other party 
 to the promise. Or in other words, at 
 the covenant made on mount Sinai, 
 there was really present but one of the 
 parties, and consequently nothing could 
 be done that would affect the other. 
 Moses did not appear in behalf of the 
 Gentiles. They had no representative 
 there. He was engaged only for the 
 Jews, for a part ordy of the one party, 
 and that part could not transact any- 
 thing for the whole. The giving of the 
 law, therefore, could not affect the pro- 
 mise which was made to Abraham, and 
 which related to the Jews and the Gen- 
 tiles as together constituting one party. 
 This view is plausible. It has been 
 adopted by Doddridge, and perhaps 
 may be the true interpretation. No 
 one can deny, however, that it is forced, 
 and that it is far from being obvious. 
 It seems to be making a meaning for 
 the apostle, or furnishing him with an 
 argument, rather than explaining the 
 one which he has chosen to use ; and 
 it may be doubted whether Paul would 
 have used an argument that required so 
 much explanation as this before it could 
 be understood. All these expositions 
 proceed on the supposition that the 
 word " mediator" here refers to Moses, 
 and that the transaction here referred to 
 was that on mount Sinai. I would 
 suggest a sense of the passage which I 
 have found in none of the commentaries 
 which I have consulted, and which I 
 would, therefore, propose with diffidence. 
 All that I can claim for it is, that it 
 may possibly be the meaning. Accord- 
 
 ing to the view which I shall submit, the 
 words here are to be regarded as used 
 in their usual signification ; and the 
 simplest interpretation possible is to be 
 given to the propositions in the verse. 
 One proposition is, that a mediator is 
 not appointed with reference to one par- 
 ty, but to two. This proposition is uni- 
 versal. Wherever there is a mediator 
 there are always two parties. The 
 other proposition is, that God is one; 
 that is, that he is the same one God, in 
 whatever form his will may be made 
 known to men, whether by a promise 
 as to Abraham, or by the law as to 
 Moses. The interpretation which I 
 would propose embraces the following 
 particulars. (1.) The design of the 
 apostle is, to show that the giving of 
 the law could not abrogate or affect the 
 promise made to Abraham ; and to 
 show at the same time what is its true 
 object. It could not annul the pro- 
 mises, says Paul. It was given long 
 after, and could not affect them. ver. 17. 
 It was an addition, an appendage, a 
 subsequent enactment for a specific 
 purpose, yet a part of the same general 
 plan, and subordinate to the Mediator, 
 ver. 19. It was to be shown also that 
 the law was not against the promises 
 of God. It was a good law (ver 21) ; 
 and was not designed to be an opposing 
 system, or intended to counteract the 
 promise, or the scheme of salvation by 
 promise, but was a part of the same 
 great plan. (2.) A mediator always 
 supposes two parties. In all the trans- 
 actions, therefore, where a mediator is 
 employed, there is supposed to be two 
 parties. When, therefore, the promise 
 was made to Abraham with reference 
 to the Messiah, the great Mediator ; and 
 when the law was given in the hand 
 of the Mediator, and under his control, 
 there is always supposed to be two 
 parties. (3.) The whole arrangement 
 here referred to is under the Mediator, 
 and with reference to him. The pro- 
 mise made to Abraham had reference 
 to him and to those who should believe 
 on him; and the law given by Moses 
 was also under him, and with reference 
 to him. He was the grand object and 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 347 
 
 21 Is the law then against a the 
 
 a Mat. 5. 17. b c. 2. 21. 
 
 agent of all. He was the Mediator 
 with reference to both. Each transac- 
 tion had reference to him, though in 
 different ways ; the transaction with 
 Abraham relating to him in connexion 
 with a promise ; the transaction at the 
 giving of the law being under his con- 
 trol as Mediator, and being a part of 
 the one great plan. There was an 
 identity of plan ; and the plan had 
 reference to the Messiah, the great 
 Mediator. (4.) God is one and the 
 same. He is throughout one of the 
 parties ; and he does not change. How- 
 ever the arrangements may vary, whether 
 in giving the law or imparting a pro- 
 mise, he is the same. There is but one 
 God in all the transaction ; and he, 
 throughout, constitutes one of the par- 
 ties. The other party is man, at first 
 receiving the promise from this one 
 God with reference to the Mediator 
 through Abraham, and then receiving 
 the law through the same Mediator on 
 mount Sinai. He is still the one party 
 unchanged ; and there is the same Me- 
 diator implying ail-along that there are 
 two parties. (5.) It follows, therefore, 
 agreeably to the argument of the apos- 
 tle, that the law given so long after the 
 promise, could not abrogate it, because 
 they pertained to the same plan, were 
 under the same one God, who was one 
 unchanging party in all this transaction, 
 and had reference to the same Mediator 
 and were alike under his control. It 
 followed, also, that the law was tem- 
 porary (ver. 19); interposed for import- 
 ant purposes until the " seed should 
 come," because it was a part of the 
 same general arrangement, and was 
 under the control of the same Mediator, 
 and directed by the same one God, the 
 unchanging one party in all these 
 transactions. It followed, further, that 
 the one could not be against the other 
 (ver. 21), because they were a part of 
 the same plan, under the control of the 
 same Mediator, and where the same 
 God remained unchanged as the one 
 party. All that is assumed in this 
 
 promises of God? God forbid: 
 for if h there had been a law 
 
 interpretation is, (a) That there was but 
 one plan or arrangement ; or that the 
 transaction with Abraham and with 
 Moses were parts of one great scheme ; 
 and, (b) That the Mediator here referred 
 to was not Moses, but the Messiah, the 
 Son of God. The following paraphrase 
 will express the sense which I have 
 endeavoured to convey. ' The giving 
 of the law could not annul or abrogate 
 the promise made to Abraham. It was 
 long after that, and it was itself sub- 
 servient to that. It was given by the 
 instrumentality of angels, and it was 
 entirely under the control of the Me- 
 diator, the Messiah. The plan was 
 one ; and all the parts of it, in the pro- 
 mise made to Abraham and in the giv- 
 ing of the law, were subordinate to 
 him. A mediator always supposes two 
 parties, and the reference to the media- 
 tor, alike in the promise to Abraham 
 and in the giving of the law, supposes 
 that there were two parties. God is 
 one party, the same unchanging God in 
 all the forms of the promise and of the 
 law. In this state of things, it is 
 impossible that the law should clash 
 with the promise, or that it should 
 supersede or modify it. It was a part 
 of the one great plan ; appointed with 
 reference to the work which the Me- 
 diator came to do ; and in accordance 
 with the promise made to Abraham; 
 and therefore they could not be contra- 
 dictory and inconsistent.' It is assumed 
 in all this that the Messiah was con- 
 templated in the whole arrangement, 
 and that it was entered into with refer- 
 ence to him. That this may be as- 
 sumed no one can deny who believes* 
 the Scriptures. The whole arrange- 
 ment in the Old Testament, it is sup- 
 posed, was designed to be ancillary to 
 redemption ; and the interpretation 
 which has been submitted above is based 
 on that supposition. 
 
 21. Is the law then against the pro- 
 mises of God ? Is the law of Moses to 
 be regarded as opposed to the promises 
 made to Abraham 1 Does this follow 
 
348 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A D. 58. 
 
 given which could have given 
 life, verily righteousness should 
 nave been by the law. 
 
 22 But the Scripture hath con- 
 
 oRo.4. !1, 12, 16. ft Ro. 3. 9, 19, 23. 
 
 from any view which can be taken of 
 the subject ! The object of the apostle 
 in asking this question is, evidently, to 
 take an opportunity to deny in the 
 most positive manner that there can be 
 any such clashing or contradiction. 
 He shows, therefore, what was the de- 
 sign of the law, and declares that the 
 object was to further the plan contem- 
 plated in the pfomise made to Abraham. 
 It was an auxiliary to that. It was as 
 good as a law could be ; and it was de- 
 signed to prepare the way for the fulfil- 
 ment of the promise made to Abraham. 
 f God forbid. It cannot be. It is im- 
 possible. I do not hold such an opinion. 
 Such a sentiment by no means follows 
 from what has been advanced. Comp. 
 Note, Rom. iii. 4. T For if there had 
 been a law given which could have 
 given life. The law of Moses is as 
 good as a law can be. It is pure, and 
 holy, and good. It is not the design to 
 insinuate any thing against the law in 
 itself, or to say that as a law it is de- 
 fective. But law could not give life. 
 It is not its nature ; and man cannot be 
 justified by obedience to it. No man 
 ever has yielded perfect compliance with 
 it, and no man, therefore, can be justi- 
 fied by it. Comp. Notes on ch. ii. 16. 
 iii. 10. T Verily righteousness should 
 have been by the law. Or justification 
 would have been secured by the law. 
 The law of Moses was as well adapted 
 to this as a law could be. No better 
 law could have been originated for this 
 purpose, and if men were to attempt 
 to justify themselves before God by 
 their own works, the law of Moses 
 would be as favourable for such an un- 
 dertaking as any law which could be 
 revealed. It is as reasonable, and equal, 
 and pure. Its demands are as just, 
 and its terms are as favourable as could 
 be any of the terms of mere law. And 
 such a law has been given in part in 
 order to show that justification by the 
 
 eluded all a under sin, that the 
 promise * by faith of Jesus 
 Christ might be given to them 
 that believe. 
 
 23 But before faith came, we 
 
 law is out of the question. If men 
 could not be justified by a law so pure, 
 and equal, and just; so reasonable in all 
 its requirements and so perfect, how 
 could they expect to be justified by 
 conformity to any inferior or less per- 
 fect rule of life ? The fact, therefore, 
 that no one can be justified by the pure 
 law revealed on mount Sinai, forever 
 settles the question about the possibility 
 of being justified by law. 
 
 22. But the Scripture. The Old 
 Testament (Note, John v. 39), contain- 
 ing the law of Moses. % Hath con- 
 cluded all under si?i. Has shut up 
 (<ruviK\ncriv) all under the condemnation 
 of sin ; that is, has declared all men, no 
 matter what their rank and external 
 character, to be sinners. Of course, 
 they cannot be justified by that law 
 which declares them to be guilty, and 
 which condemns them, any more than 
 the law of the land will acquit a mur- 
 derer, and pronounce him innocent, at 
 the same time that it holds him to be 
 guilty. In regard to the meaning of 
 the expression here used, see Note on 
 Rom. xi. 32. Comp. Rom. iii. 9. 19. 
 ^ That the promise by faith of Jesus 
 Christ, &c. That the promise referred 
 to in the transaction with Abraham, the 
 promise of justification and life by faith 
 in the Messiah. Here we see one de- 
 sign of the law. It was to show that 
 they could not be justified by their own 
 works, to hedge up thtir way in regard 
 to justification by their own righteous- 
 ness, and to show them their need of a 
 better righteousness. The law accom- 
 plishes the same end now. It shows 
 men that they are guilty ; and it does it 
 in order that they may be brought under 
 the influence of the pure system of the 
 gospel, and become interested in the 
 promises which are connected with eter- 
 nal salvation. 
 
 23. But before faith came. Tha* 
 is, the system of salvation by faith in 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 349 
 
 were kept under the law, shut up 
 unto the faith which should after- 
 wards be revealed. 
 
 24 Wherefore the law a was 
 
 the Lord Jesus. Faith here denotes the 
 Christian religion, because faith is its 
 distinguishing characteristic. ^ We were 
 kept under the law. We, who were 
 sinners ; we, who have violated the law. 
 It is a general truth, that before the gos- 
 pel was introduced, men were under the 
 condemning sentence of the law. ^ Shut 
 up unto the faith. Enclosed by the law 
 with reference to the full and glorious re- 
 velation of a system of salvation by faith. 
 The design and tendency of the law was 
 to shut us up to that as the only method 
 of salvation. AH other means failed. 
 The law condemned every other mode, 
 and the law condemned all who at- 
 tempted to be justified in any other way. 
 Man, therefore, was shut up to that as 
 his last hope ; and could look only to 
 that for any possible prospect of salva- 
 tion. The word which in this verse is 
 rendered "were kept" (i^gcv^v/uiB-ct) , 
 usually means to guard or watch, as in 
 a castle, or as prisoners are guarded ; 
 and though the word should ""not be 
 pressed too far in the interpretation, yet 
 it implies that there was a rigid scruti- 
 ny observed ; that the law guarded 
 them ; that there was no way of escape ; 
 and that they were shut up, as prisoners 
 under sentence of death, to the only 
 hope, which was that of pardon. 1 Unto 
 the faith, &c. That was the only hope. 
 The law condemned them, and offered 
 no hope of escape. Their only hope 
 was in that system which was to be re- 
 vealed through the Messiah, the system 
 which extended forgiveness on the 
 ground of faith in his atoning blood. 
 
 24. Wherefore the law was ourscliooir 
 master. The word rendered schoolmas- 
 ter (jrctiixyaryk, whence the word peda- 
 gogue), referred originally to a slave or 
 freed man, to whose care boys were com- 
 mitted, and who accompanied them to 
 the public schools. The idea here is 
 not. that of instructor, but there is refer- 
 ence to the office and duty of the pat- 
 30 
 
 our schoolmaster to bring us 
 unto Christ, that we might be 
 justified by faith. 
 
 a Col. 2. 17. He. 9. 9, 10. 
 
 dagogus among the ancients. The of- 
 fice was usually intrusted to slaves or 
 freed men. It is true, that when the 
 paedagogus was properly qualified, he 
 assisted the children committed to his 
 care in preparing their lessons. But 
 still his main duty was not instruction, 
 but it was to watch over the boys; to 
 restrain them from evil and temptation ; 
 and to conduct them to the schools, 
 where they might receive instruction. 
 See, for illustrations of this, Wetstein, 
 Bloomfield, &c. In the passage before 
 us, the proper notion of pedagogue is 
 retained. In our sense of the word 
 schoolmaster, Christ is the schoolmaster, 
 and not the law. The law performs the 
 office of the ancient pedagogue, to lead 
 us to the teacher or the instructor. That 
 teacher or instructor is Christ. The 
 ways in which the law does this may 
 be the following : — (1.) It restrains us 
 and rebukes us, and keeps us as the an- 
 cient pedagogue did his boys. (2.) The 
 whole law was designed to be introduc- 
 tory to Christ. The sacrifices and of 
 ferings were designed to shadow forth 
 the Messiah, and to introduce him to the 
 world. (3.) The moral law — the law 
 of God — shows men their sin and dan- 
 ger, and thus leads them to the Saviour. 
 It condemns them, and thus prepares 
 them to welcome the offer of pardon 
 through a Redeemer. (4.) It still does 
 this. The whole economy of the Jews 
 was designed to do this ; and under the 
 preaching of the gospel it is still done. 
 Men see that they are condemned ; they 
 are convinced by the law that they can- 
 not save themselves, and thus they are 
 led to the Redeemer. The effect of the 
 preached gospel is to show men their 
 sins, and thus to be preparatory to the 
 embracing of the offer of pardon. Hence 
 the importance of preaching the law 
 still; and hence it is needful that men 
 should be made to feel that they are sin- 
 ners, in order that they may be prepared 
 
350 
 
 GALAT1ANS. 
 
 [A, D. 58. 
 
 25 But after that faith is come, 
 we are no longer under a school- 
 master. 
 
 26 For ye are all the children 
 * of God by faith in Christ Jesus. 
 
 a Jno. 1. 12. 1 Jno. 3. 1, 2. 
 
 to embrace the offers of mercy. Comp. 
 Note on Rom. x. 4. 
 
 25. But after that faith is come. 
 The scheme of salvation by faith. After 
 that is revealed. See Note on ver. 23. 
 "i We are no longer under a schoolmas- 
 ter. Under the paedagogus, or peda- 
 gogue. We are not kept in restraint, 
 and under bondage, and led along to 
 another to receive instruction. We are 
 directly under the great Teacher, the 
 Instructor himself; and have a kind of 
 freedom which we were not allowed be- 
 fore. The bondage and servitude have 
 passed away ; and we are free from the 
 burdensome ceremonies and expensive 
 rites (Comp. Note on Acts xv. 10) of 
 the Jewish law, and from the sense of 
 condemnation which it imposes. This 
 was true of the converts from Judaism 
 to Christianity — that they became free 
 from the burdensome rites of the law ; 
 and it is true of all converts to the 
 faith of Christ, that, having been made 
 to see their sin by the law, and having 
 been conducted by it to the cross of the 
 Redeemer, they are now made free. 
 
 26. For ye are all the children of 
 God, &c. All who bear the Christian 
 name — the converts from among the 
 Jews and Gentiles alike. See Note on 
 John i. 12. The idea here is, that they 
 are no longer under tutors and govern- 
 ors ; they are no longer subject to the 
 direction and will of the paedagogus ,• 
 they are arrived at age, and are admitted 
 to the privileges of sons. See Note on 
 ch. iv. 1. The language here is derived 
 from the fact, that until the son arrived 
 at age, he was in many respects not dif- 
 ferent from a servant. He was under 
 laws and restraints ; and subject to the 
 will of another. When of age, he en- 
 tered on the privileges of heirship, and 
 was free to act for himself. Thus, un- 
 der the law, men were under restraints, 
 
 27 For h as many of you as 
 have been baptized into Christ, 
 have put on Christ. 
 
 28 There is c neither Jew nor 
 
 b Ro. 6. 3. 
 
 c Col. 3. 11. 
 
 and subject to heavy exactions. Undei 
 the gospel, they are free, and admitted 
 to the privileges of the sons of God. 
 
 27. For as many of you. Whethei 
 by nature Jews or Gentiles. *J As have 
 been baptized into Christ. Or unto 
 (ei? — the same preposition which in ver 
 24 is rendered unto) Christ. That is< 
 they were baptized with reference to 
 him, or receiving him as the Saviour, 
 See this explained in the Note on Rom. 
 vi. 3. H Have put on Christ. That 
 is, they have put on his sentiments, 
 opinions, characteristic traits, &c, as a 
 man clothes himself. This language 
 was common among the ancient writers. 
 See it explained in the Note on Rom. 
 xiii. 14. 
 
 28. There is neither Jew nor Greek. 
 All are on a level; all are saved in the 
 same way ; all are entitled to the same 
 privileges. There is no favouritism on 
 account of birth, beauty, or blood. All 
 confess that they are sinners ; all are 
 saved by the merits of the same Saviour ; 
 all are admitted to the same privileges 
 as children of God. The wqrd " Greek" 
 here is used to denote the Gentiles gene- 
 rally; since the whole world was di- 
 vided by the Jews into 'Jews and 
 Greeks' — the Greeks being the foreign 
 nation best known to them. The Sy- 
 riac renders it here ' Aramean? — using 
 the word to denote the Gentiles gene- 
 rally. The meaning is, that whatever 
 was the birth, or rank, or nation, or co- 
 lour, or complexion, all under the gospel 
 were on a level. They were admitted 
 to the same privileges, and endowed 
 with the same hopes of eternal life. 
 This does not mean that all the civil 
 distinctions among men are to be disre- 
 garded. It does not mean that no re- 
 spect is to be shown to those in office, 
 or to men in elevated rank. It does not 
 mean that all are on a level in regard to 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 35i 
 
 Greek, there is neither bond nor 
 free, there is neither male nor 
 
 talents, comforts, or wealth; but it 
 means only that all men are on a level 
 in regard to religion. This is the sole 
 point under discussion ; and the inter- 
 pretation should be limited to this. It 
 is not a fact that men are on a level in 
 all things, nor is it a fact that the gos- 
 pel designs to break down all the distinc- 
 tions of society. Paul means to teach 
 that no man has any preference or ad- 
 vantage in the kingdom of God because 
 he is a rich man, or because he is of 
 elevated rank ; no one is under any dis- 
 advantage because he is poor, or because 
 he is ignorant, or a slave. All at the 
 foot of the cross are sinners ; all at the 
 communion table are saved by the same 
 grace ; all who enter into heaven, will 
 enter clothed in the same robes of sal- 
 vation, and arranged, not as princes and 
 nobles, and rich men and poor men, in 
 separate orders and ranks, but mingling 
 together as redeemed by the same blood, 
 and arranged in ranks according to their 
 eminence in holiness. Comp. my Notes 
 on Isa. lvi. 8. ^ There is neither bond 
 nor free. The condition of a free man 
 does not give him any peculiar claims 
 or advantages in regard to religion ; and 
 the condition of a slave does not exclude 
 him from the hope of heaven, or from 
 being regarded as a child of God, on the 
 same terms, and entitled to the same 
 privileges as his master. In regard to 
 religion, they are on the same level. 
 They are alike sinners, and are alike 
 6aved by grace. They sit down at the 
 same communion table ; and they look 
 forward to the same heaven. Chris- 
 tianity does not admit the one to favour 
 because he is free, or exclude the other 
 because he is a slave. Nor, when they 
 are admitted to favour, does it give the 
 one a right to lord it over the other, or 
 to feel that he is of any more value in 
 the eye of the Redeemer, or any nearer 
 to his heart. The essential idea is, that 
 they arc on a level, and that they are 
 admitted to the favour of God without 
 respect to their external condition in so- 
 
 female: for ye are all one in 
 
 Christ Jesus. 
 
 ciety. I do not see any evidence in this 
 passage that the Christian religion de- 
 signed to abolish slavery, any more than 
 I do in the following phrase, " there is 
 neither male nor female," that it was 
 intended to abolish the distinction of 
 the sexes ; nor do I see in this passage 
 any evidence that there should not be 
 proper respect shown by the servant to 
 his master, though both of them are 
 Christians, any more than there is in 
 the following phrase, that suitable re- 
 spect should not be shown in the inter- 
 course with the sexes. Comp. 1 Tim. 
 vi. 1 — 5. But the proof is explicit, that 
 masters and slaves may alike become 
 Christians on the same terms, and are, 
 in regard to their religious privileges 
 and hopes, on a level. No peculiar fa- 
 vour is shown to the one, in the matter 
 of salvation, because he is free, nor is 
 the other excluded because he is a slave. 
 And from this it follows: — (1.) That 
 they should sit down to the same com- 
 munion table. There should be no in- 
 vidious and odious distinctions there. 
 (2.) They should be regarded alike as 
 Christian brethren in the house of God, 
 and should be addressed and treated ac- 
 cordingly. (3.) The slave should ex- 
 cite the interest, and receive the watch- 
 ful care of the pastor, as well as his 
 master. Indeed, he may need it more ; 
 and from his ignorance, and the fewness 
 of his opportunities, it may be proper 
 that special attention should be bestowed 
 on him. In regard to this doctrine of 
 Christianity, that there is neither ' bond 
 nor free' among those who are saved, 
 or that all are on a level in regard to sal- 
 vation, we may remark further, (1.) 
 That it is peculiar to Christianity. All 
 other systems of religion and philosophy 
 make different ranks, and endeavour to 
 promote the distinctions of caste among 
 men. They teach that certain men are 
 the favourites of heaven, in virtue of 
 their birth or their rank in life, or that 
 they have peculiar facilities for salvation. 
 Thus, in India the Brahmin is regarded 
 
352 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58 
 
 as, by his birth, the favourite of heaven, 
 and all others are supposed to be of a 
 degraded rank. The great effort of men, 
 in their systems of religion and philoso- 
 phy, has been to show that there are 
 favoured ranks and classes, and to make 
 permanent distinctions on account of 
 birth and blood. Christianity regards 
 all men as made of one blood to dwell 
 on all the face of the earth (see Note, 
 Acts xvii. 26), and esteems them all to 
 be equal in the matter of salvation ; and 
 whatever notions of equality prevail in 
 the world are to be traced to the influence 
 of the Christian religion. (2.) If men 
 are regarded as equal before God, and 
 as entitled to the same privileges of sal- 
 vation ; if there is in the great work of 
 redemption " neither bond nor free," 
 and those who are in the church are on 
 a level, then such a view will induce a 
 master to treat his slave with kindness, 
 when that relation exists. The master 
 who has any right feelings, will regard 
 his servant as a Christian brother, re- 
 deemed by the same blood as himself, 
 and destined to the same heaven. He 
 will esteem him not as ' a chattel' or ' a 
 thing,' or as a piece ' of property,' but 
 he will regard him as an immortal be- 
 ing, destined with himself to the same 
 heaven, and about to sit down with him 
 in the realms of glory. How can he 
 treat such a brother with unkindness or 
 severity 1 How can he rise from the 
 same communion table with him, and 
 give way to violent feelings against him, 
 and regard him and treat him as if he 
 were a brute 1 And Christianity, by 
 the simple principle that * the slave is a 
 brother in the Lord,' will do more to 
 mitigate the horrors of slavery, than all 
 the enactments that men can make, and 
 all the other views and doctrines which 
 can be made to prevail in society. See 
 Philem. 16. (3.) This doctrine would 
 lead to universal emancipation. All 
 are on a level before God. In the king- 
 dom of Jesus there is neither bond nor 
 free. One is as much an object of favour 
 as another. With this feeling, how 
 can a Christian hold his fellow Chris- 
 tian in bondage 1 How can he regard 
 as • a chattel' or ' a thing,' one who, like 
 
 himself, is an hei/ of glory ? How can 
 he sell him on whom the blood of Jesu3 
 has been sprinkled ? Let him feel that 
 his slave is his equal in the sight of God ; 
 that with himself he is an heir of glory ; 
 that together they are soon to stand on 
 Mount Zion above ; that the slave is an 
 immortal being, and has been redeemed 
 by the blood of Calvary, and how can 
 he hold such a being in bondage, and 
 how can he transfer him from place to 
 place and from hand to hand for gold 1 
 If all masters and all slaves were to be- 
 come Christians, slavery would at once 
 cease ; and the prevalence of the single 
 principle before us would put an end to 
 all the ways in which man oppresses his 
 fellow-man. Accordingly, it is well 
 known that in about three centuries the 
 influence of Christianity banished slave- 
 ry from the Roman empire. ^ There is 
 neither male nor female. Neither the 
 male nor the female have any peculiar 
 advantages for salvation. There are no 
 favours shown on account of sex. Both 
 sexes are, in this respect, on a level. 
 This does not mean, of course, that the 
 sexes are to be regarded as in all respects 
 equal ; nor can it mean that the two 
 sexes may not have peculiar duties and 
 privileges in other respects. It does not 
 prove that one of the sexes may not 
 perform important offices in the church, 
 which would not be proper for the other. 
 It does not prove that the duties of the 
 ministry are to be performed by the fe- 
 male sex, nor that the various duties of 
 domestic life, nor the various offices of 
 society should be performed without 
 any reference to the distinction of sex. 
 The interpretation should be confined 
 to the matter under consideration ; and 
 the passage proves only that in regard 
 to salvation they are on a level. One 
 sex is not to be regarded as peculiarly 
 the favourite of heaven, and the other 
 to be excluded. Christianity thus ele- 
 vates the female sex to an equality with 
 the male, on the most important of all 
 interests ; and it has in this way made 
 most important changes in the world 
 wherever it has prevailed. Everywhere 
 but in connexion with the Christian re- 
 ligion, woman has been degraded. She 
 
\. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 353 
 
 29 And if ye be Christ's, then 
 a are ye Abraham's seed, and 
 heirs h according to the promise. 
 
 a ver. 7. 6 Ro. 8. 17. 
 
 has been kept in ignorance. She has 
 been treated as an inrerior in all respects. 
 She has been doomed to un pitied 
 drudgery, and ignorance, and toil. So 
 she was among the ancient Greeks and 
 Romans ; so she is among the savages 
 of America; so she is in China, and 
 India, and in the islands of the sea ; so 
 she. is regarded in the Koran, and in all 
 Mohammedan countries. It is Chris- 
 tianity alone which nas elevated her; 
 and nowhere on earth does man regard 
 the mother of his children as an intelli- 
 gent companion and friend, except 
 where the influence of the Christian re- 
 ligion has been felt. At the commu- 
 nion table, at the foot of the cross, and 
 in the hopes of heaven, she is on a level 
 with man ; and this fact diffuses a mild, 
 and purifying, and elevating influence 
 over all the relations of life. Woman 
 has been raised from deep degradation 
 by the influence of Christianity; and, 
 let me add, she has everywhere acknow- 
 ledged the debt of gratitude, and devoted 
 herself, as under a deep sense of obli- 
 gation, to lessening the burdens of hu- 
 manity, and to the work of elevating 
 the degraded, instructing the ignorant, 
 and comforting the afflicted, all over the 
 world. Never has a debt been better 
 repaid, or the advantages of elevating 
 one portion of the race Deen more appa- 
 rent. % For ye are all one in Christ 
 Testis. You are all equally accepted 
 through the Lord Jesus Christ ; or you 
 are all on the same level, and entitled to 
 the same privileges in your Christian 
 profession. Bond and free, male and 
 female, Jew and Greek, are admitted to 
 equal privileges, and are equally accept- 
 able before God. And the church of 
 God, no matter what may be the com- 
 plexion, the country, the habits, or the 
 rank of its members, is one. Every man 
 on whom is the image and the blood 
 of Christ, is a brother to every other 
 30* 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 IVpW I say, That the heir, as 
 long as he is a child, differeth 
 nothing from a servant, though 
 he be lord of all ; 
 
 one who bears that image, and should 
 be treated accordingly. What an in- 
 fluence would be excited in the breaking 
 up of the distinctions of rank and caste 
 among men ; what an effect in abolish- 
 ing the prejudice on account of colour 
 and country, if this were universally 
 believed and felt! 
 
 29. And if ye be Christ's. If you 
 belong to the Messiah, and are interest- 
 ed in his work, f Then are ye Abra- 
 ham's seed. The promise made to 
 Abraham related to the Messiah. It 
 was a promise that in him all should be 
 blessed. Abraham believed in that Mes- 
 siah, and was distinguished for his faith 
 in him who was to come. If they be- 
 lieved in Christ, therefore, they showed 
 that they were the spiritual descendants 
 of Abraham. No matter whether they 
 were Jews or Gentiles ; whether they 
 had been circumcised or not, they had 
 the same spirit which he evinced, and 
 were interested in^he promises made to 
 him. \ And heirs according to the pro- 
 mise. See Rom. viii. 17. Are heirs 
 of God. You inherit the blessings pro- 
 mised to Abraham, and partake of the 
 felicity to which he looked forward. 
 You have become truly heirs of God, 
 and this is in accordance with the pro- 
 mise made to Abraham. It is not by 
 the obedience of the law ; it is by faith— 
 in the same way that Abraham pos- 
 sessed the blessing ; — an arrangement 
 before the giving of the law, and there- 
 fore one that may include all, whether 
 Jews or Gentiles. All are on a level ; 
 and all are alike the children of God, 
 and in the same manner, and on the 
 same terms that Abraham was. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 ANALYSIS. 
 
 The design of this chapter is, to 
 show the effect of being under the law, 
 and the inconsistency of that kind of 
 
GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 bondage or servitude with the freedom 
 which is vouchsafed to the true children 
 of God by the gospel. It is, in accord- 
 ance with the whole drift of the epistle, 
 to recall the Galatians to just views of 
 the gospel; and to convince them of their 
 error in returning to the practice of the 
 Mosaic rites and customs. In the pre- 
 vious chapter he had shown them that 
 believers in the gospel were the true 
 children of Abraham; that they had 
 been delivered from the curse of the 
 law ; that the law was a schoolmaster 
 to lead them to Christ, and that they 
 were all the children of God. To illus- 
 trate this further, and to show them the 
 true nature of the freedom which they 
 had as the children of God, is the de- 
 sign of the argument in this chapter. 
 He therefore states: 
 
 (1.) That it was under the gospel 
 only that they received the full advan- 
 tages of freedom, ver. 1-5. Before Christ 
 came, indeed, there were true children 
 of God, and heirs of life. But they 
 were in the condition of minors ,- they 
 had not the privileges of sons. An heir 
 to a great estate, says the apostle (ver. 
 1, 2), is treated substantially as if he 
 were a servant. He is under tutors and 
 governors ; he is not permitted to enter 
 on his inheritance ; he is kept under the 
 restraint of law. So it was with the 
 people of God under the law of Moses. 
 They were under restraints, and were 
 admitted to comparatively few of the 
 privileges of the children of God. But 
 Christ came to redeem those who were 
 under the law, and to place them in the 
 elevated condition of adopted sons. ver. 
 4, 5. They were no longer servants ; 
 and it was as unreasonable that they 
 should conform again to the Mosaic 
 rites and customs, as it would be for the 
 heir of full age, and who has entered 
 on his inheritance, to return to the con- 
 dition of minorship, and to be placed 
 igain under tutors and governors, and 
 © be treated as a servant. 
 
 (2.) As sons of God, God had sent 
 brth the Spirit of his Son into their 
 learts, and they were enabled to cry 
 Abba, Father. They were no longer 
 servants, but heirs of God, and should 
 
 avail themselves of the privileges of 
 heirs, ver. 6, 7. 
 
 (3.) Sustaining this relation, and be- 
 ing admitted to these privileges, the 
 apostle remonstrates with them for re- 
 turning again to the " weak and beg- 
 garly elements" of the former dispensa- 
 tion — the condition of servitude to rites 
 and customs in which they were before 
 they embraced the gospel, ver. 8 — 11. 
 When they were ignorant of God, they 
 served those who were no gods, and 
 there was some excuse for that. ver. 8. 
 But now they had known God, they 
 were acquainted with his laws ; they 
 were admitted to the privileges of his 
 children ; they were made free, and 
 there could be no excuse for returning 
 again to the bondage of those who had 
 no true knowledge of the liberty which 
 the gospel gave. Yet they observed 
 days and times as though these were 
 binding, and they had never been freed 
 from them (ver. 10) ; and the apostle 
 says, that he is afraid that his labours 
 bestowed on them, to make them ac- 
 quainted with the plan of redemption, 
 had been in vain. 
 
 (4.) To bring them to a just sense 
 of their error, he reminds them of their 
 former attachment to him. ver. 1 2 — 20. 
 He had indeed preached to them amidst 
 much infirmity, and much that was 
 fitted to prejudice them against him 
 (ver. 13) ; but they had disregarded that, 
 and had evinced towards him the high- 
 est proofs of attachment — so much so, 
 that they had received him as an angel 
 of God (ver. 14), and had been ready 
 to pluck out their own eyes to give 
 them to him. ver. 15. With great force, 
 therefore, he asks them why they had 
 changed their views towards him so 
 far as to forsake his doctrines 1 Had 
 he become their enemy by telling the 
 truth 1 ver. 16. He tenderly addresses 
 them, therefore, as little children, and 
 says, that he has the deepest solicitude 
 for their welfare, and the deepest anxiety 
 on account of their danger — a solicitude 
 which he compares (ver. 19) with the 
 pains of child-birth. 
 
 (5.) In order to enforce the whole 
 subject, and to show the true nature of 
 
A D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 355 
 
 the conformity to the law compared with 
 the liberty of the gospel, he allegorizes 
 an interesting part of the Mosaic his- 
 tory — the history of the two children of 
 Abraham, ver. 21 — 31. The condition 
 of Hagar — a slave — under the com- 
 mand of a master — harshly treated — cast 
 out and disowned, was an apt illustra- 
 tion of the condition of those who were 
 under the servitude of the law. It 
 would strikingly represent Mount Sinai, 
 and the law that was promulgated there, 
 and the condition of those who were 
 under the law. That, too, was a con- 
 dition of servitude. The law was stern, 
 and showed no mercy. It was like a 
 master of a slave, and would treat those 
 who were under it with a rigidness 
 that might be compared with the condi- 
 tion of Hagar and her son. ver. 24, 25. 
 That same Mount Sinai also was a fair 
 representation of Jerusalem as it was 
 then — a city full of rites and ceremo- 
 nies, where the law reigned with rigour, 
 where there was a burdensome and ex- 
 pensive system of religion, and where 
 there was none of the freedom which 
 the gospel would furnish, ver. 25. On 
 the other hand, the children of the free 
 woman were an apt illustration of those 
 who were made free from the oppressive 
 ceremonies of the law by the gospel, 
 ver. 22. That Jerusalem was free. 
 The new system from heaven was one 
 of liberty and rejoicing, ver. 26, 27. 
 Christians were, like Isaac, the children 
 of promise, and were not slaves to the 
 law. ver. 28. 31. And as there was a 
 command (ver. 30) to cast out the 
 bondwoman and her son, so the com- 
 mand now was to reject all that would 
 bring the mind into ignoble servitude, 
 and prevent its enjoying the full free- 
 dom of the gospel. The whole argu- 
 ment is, that it would be as unreasona- 
 ble for those who were Christians to 
 submit again to the Jewish rites and 
 ceremonies, as it would be for a freeman 
 to sell himself into slavery. And the 
 design of the whole is, to recall them 
 from the conformity to Jewish rites and 
 customs, and from their regarding them 
 as now binding on Christians. 
 
 1. Now I say. He had before said 
 
 (ch. iii. 24, 25) that while they were 
 under the law they were in a state of 
 minority. This sentiment he proceeds 
 further to illustrate by showing the true 
 condition of one who was a minor. 
 1 That the heir. Any heir to an estate, 
 or one who has a prospect of an inhe- 
 ritance. No matter how great is the 
 estate ; no matter how wealthy his fa- 
 ther ; no matter to how elevated a rank 
 he may be raised on the moment that 
 he enters on his inheritance, yet till that 
 time he is in the condition of a servant. 
 *f As long as he is a child. Until he 
 arrives at age. The word rendered 
 "child" (vwV/2?), properly means an in- 
 fant,- literally, one not speaking (y» 
 insep. un, i?ro(), and hence a child, or 
 babe, but without any definite limita- 
 tion. — Rob. It is used as the word in- 
 fant is with us in law, to denote a mi- 
 nor, f Differeth nothing from a ser- 
 vant. That is, he has no more control 
 of his property ; he has it not at his 
 command. This does not mean that he 
 does not differ in any respect, but only 
 that in the matter under consideration 
 he does not differ. He differs in his 
 prospects of inheriting the property, 
 and in the affections of the father, and 
 usually in the advantages of education, 
 and in the respect and attention shown 
 him, but in regard to property, he does 
 not differ, and he is like a servant, under 
 the control and direction of others. 
 H Though he be lord of all. That is, 
 in prospect. He has a prospective right 
 to all the property, which no one else 
 has. The word "lord" here (*yg«?), 
 is used in the same sense in which it is 
 often in the Scriptures, to denote master 
 or owner. The idea which this is de- 
 signed to illustrate is, that the condition 
 of the Jews before the coming of the 
 Messiah was inferior in many respects 
 to what the condition of the friends of 
 God would be under him — as inferior as 
 the condition of an heir was before he 
 was of age, to what it would be when 
 he should enter on his inheritance. 
 The Jews claimed, indeed, that they 
 were the children or the sons of God, 
 a title which the apostle would not with- 
 hold from the pious part of the nation 
 
356 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58 
 
 2 But is under tutors and go- 
 vernors until the time appointed 
 of the father. 
 
 but it was a condition in which they 
 had not entered on the full inheritance, 
 and which was far inferior to that of 
 those who had embraced the Messiah, 
 and who were admitted to the full pri- 
 vileges of sonship. They were indeed 
 heirs. They were interested in the pro- 
 mises. But still they were in a condi- 
 tion of comparative servitude, and could 
 be made free only by the gospel. 
 
 2. But is under. Is subject to their 
 control and direction. If Tutors. The 
 word tutor with us properly means in- 
 structor. But this is not quite the sense 
 of the original. The word itrfoproc 
 properly means a steward, manager, 
 agent. Matt xx. 8. Luke viii. 3. As 
 used here, it refers to one — usually a 
 slave or a freed man — to whose care the 
 boys of a family were committed, who 
 trained them up, accompanied them to 
 school, or sometimes instructed them at 
 home. Comp.' Note on ch. hi. 24. 
 Such a one would have the control of 
 them. Tf And governors. This word 
 (oiKovi/xi;) means a house-manager, an 
 overseer, a steward. It properly refers 
 to one who had authority over the 
 slaves or servants of a family, to assign 
 them their tasks and portions. They 
 generally, also, had the management of 
 the affairs of the household, and of the 
 accounts. They were commonly slaves, 
 who were intrusted with this office as 
 a reward for fidelity ; though sometimes 
 free persons were employed. Luke xvi. 
 1. 3. 8. These persons had also charge 
 of the sons of a family, probably in re- 
 spect to their pecuniary matters, and 
 thus differed from those called tutors. 
 It is not necessary, however, to mark 
 the difference in the words with great 
 accuracy. The general meaning of the 
 apostle is, that the heir was under go- 
 vernment and restraint. 1 Until the 
 time appointed of the father. The 
 time fixed for his entering on the inhe- 
 ritance. The time when he chose to 
 give him his portion of the property. 
 
 3 Even so we, when we were 
 children, were in bondage undei 
 the ' elements of the world : 
 
 i rudiments. Col. 2. 8. 20. 
 
 The law with us fixes the age at twen- 
 ty-one when a son shall be at liberty to 
 manage for himself. Other countries 
 have affixed other times. But still, the 
 time when the son shall inherit his fa- 
 ther's property must be fixed by the fa- 
 ther himself if he is living, or may be 
 fixed by his will if he is deceased. The 
 son cannot claim the property when he 
 comes of age. 
 
 3. Even so we. We who were Jews — 
 for so I think the word here is to be 
 limited, and not extended to the hea- 
 then, as Bloomfield supposes. The 
 reasons for limiting it are, (1.) That 
 the heathens in no sense sustained such 
 a relation to the law and promises of 
 God as is here supposed ; (2.) Such an 
 interpretation would not be pertinent to 
 the design of Paul. He is stating rea- 
 sons why there should not be subjection 
 to the laws of Moses, and his argument 
 is, that that condition was like that of 
 nonage or minorship. f When we were 
 children (rhnui). Minors. See Note 
 on. ver 1. The word is not via, sons ; 
 but the idea is, that they were in a state 
 of nonage ; and though heirs, yet were 
 under severe discipline and regimen. 
 They were under a kind of government 
 that was fitted to that state, and not to the 
 condition of those who had entered on 
 their inheritance. ^ Were in bondage. 
 In a state of servitude. Treated as 
 servants or slaves. *f Under the ele- 
 ments of the world. Marg. Rudiments. 
 The word rendered elements (sing. 
 o-ts/^I/sv), properly means a row or se- 
 ries ; a little step ; a pin or peg, as the 
 gnomon of a dial ; and then any thing 
 elementary, as a sound, a letter. It 
 then denotes the elements or rudiments 
 of any kind of instruction, and in the 
 New Testament is applied to the first 
 lessons or principles of religion. Heb. 
 v. 12. It is applied to the elements or 
 component parts of the physical world, 
 2 Pet. hi. 10. 12. Here the figure is 
 kept up of the reference to the infant 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 357 
 
 4 But when the fulness of the 
 time was come, God sent forth 
 
 (ver. 1. 3) ; and the idea is, that lessons 
 Arere taught under the Jewish system 
 adapted to their nonage — to a state of 
 ehildhood. They were treated as child- 
 ren under tutors and governors. The 
 phrase " the elements of the world," oc- 
 curs also in Col. ii. 8. 20. In ver. 9 of 
 this chapter, Paul speaks of these les- 
 sons as " beggarly elements," referring 
 to the same thing as here. Different 
 opinions have been held as to the reason 
 why the Jewish institutions are here 
 called "the elements of the world." 
 Rosenmiiller supposes it was because 
 many of those rites were common to 
 the Jews and to the heathens — as they 
 also had altars, sacrifices, temples, liba- 
 tions, &c. Doddridge supposes it was 
 because those rites were adapted to the 
 low conceptions of children, who are 
 most affected with sensible objects, and 
 have no taste for spiritual and heavenly 
 things. Locke supposes it was hecause 
 those institutions led them not beyond 
 this world, or into the possession and 
 taste of their heavenly inheritance. It 
 is probable that there is allusion to the 
 Jewish manner of speaking, so common 
 in the Scriptures, where this world is 
 opposed to the kingdom of God, and 
 where it is spoken of as transient and 
 worthless compared with the future 
 glory. The world is fading, unsatis- 
 factory, temporary. In allusion to this 
 common use of the word, the Jewish 
 institutions are called the worldly rudi- 
 ments. It is not that they were in 
 themselves evil — for that is not true ; it 
 is not that they were adapted to foster a 
 worldly spirit — for that is not true ; it is 
 not that they had their origin from this 
 world — for that is not true ; nor is it 
 from the fact that they resembled the 
 institutions of the heathen world — for 
 that is as little true ; but it is, that, like 
 the things of the world, they were tran- 
 sient, temporary, and of little value. 
 They were unsatisfactory in their nature, 
 and were soon to pass away, and to give 
 place to a better system — as the things 
 
 his Son, made of a woman, made 
 under the law, 
 
 of this world are soon to give place to 
 heaven. 
 
 4. But when the fulness of the time 
 was come. The full time appointed by 
 the Father; the completion (filling up, 
 TTxyietou*,) of the designated period 
 for the coming of the Messiah. See 
 Notes on Isa. xlix. 7, 8. 2 Cor. vi. 2. 
 The sense is, that the time which had 
 been predicted, and when it was proper 
 that he should come, was complete. 
 The exact period had arrived when all 
 things were ready for his coming. It 
 is often asked why he did not come 
 sooner, and why mankind did not have 
 the benefit of his incarnation and atone- 
 ment immediately after the fall] Why 
 were four thousand dark and gloomy 
 years allowed to roll on, and the world 
 suffered to sink deeper and deeper in 
 ignorance and sin 1 To these questions 
 perhaps no answer entirely satisfactory 
 can be given. God undoubtedly saw 
 reasons which we cannot see, and 
 reasons which we shall approve if they 
 are disclosed to us. It may be observed, 
 however, that this delay of redemption 
 was in entire accordance with the whole 
 system of divine arrangements, and 
 with all the divine interpositions in 
 favour of men. Men are suffefed long 
 to pine in want, to suffer from disease, 
 to encounter the evils of ignorance, be- 
 fore interposition is granted. On all 
 the subjects connected with human 
 comfort and improvement, the same 
 questions may be asked as on the sub- 
 ject of redemption. Why was the 
 invention of the art of printing so long 
 delayed, and men suffered to remain in 
 ignorance 7 ? Why was the discovery of 
 vaccination delayed so long, and mil- 
 lions suffered to die who might have 
 been saved ! Why was not the bark of 
 Peru sooner known, and why did so 
 many millions die who might have been 
 saved by its use ] So of most of the 
 medicines, and of the arts and inven- 
 tions that go to ward- off disease, and 
 to promote the intelligence, the comfort, 
 
35b 
 
 GALAT1ANS. 
 
 [A. D. 59. 
 
 and the salvation of man. In respect 
 to all of these, it may be true that they 
 are made known at the very bent time, 
 the time that will on the whole most 
 advance the welfare of the race. And 
 so of the incarnation and work of the 
 Saviour. It was seen by God to be the 
 best time, the time when on the whole 
 the race would be most benefited by 
 his coming. Even with our limited 
 and imperfect vision, we can see the 
 following things in regard to its being 
 the most fit and proper time. (1.) It 
 was just the time when all the prophe- 
 cies centred in him, and when there 
 could be no doubt about their fulfilment. 
 It was important that such an event 
 should be predicted in order that there 
 might be full evidence that he came 
 from heaven ; and yet in order that 
 prophecy may be seen to have been 
 uttered by God, it must be so far before 
 the event as to make it impossible to 
 have been the result of mere human 
 conjecture. (2.) It was proper that 
 the world should be brought to see its 
 need of a Saviour, and that a fair and 
 satisfactory opportunity should lie given 
 to men to try all other schemes of salva- 
 tion that they might be prepared to 
 welcome this. This had been done. 
 Four thousand years were sufficient to 
 show to man his own powers, and to 
 give him an opportunity to devise some 
 scheme of salvation. The opportunity 
 had been furnished under every circum- 
 stance that could be deemed favourable. 
 The most profound and splendid talent 
 of the world had been brought to bear 
 on it, especially in Greece and Rome ; 
 and ample opportunity had been given 
 to make a fair trial of the various 
 systems of religion devised on national 
 happiness and individual welfare ; their 
 power to meet and arrest crime; to 
 purify the heart; to promote public 
 morals, and to support man in his 
 trials; their power to conduct him to 
 the true God, and to give him a wel[- 
 founded hope of immortality. All had 
 failed ; and then it was a proper time 
 for the Son of God to come and to 
 reveal a better system. (3.) It was a 
 time when the world was at peace. 
 
 The temple of Janus, closed only in 
 times of peace, was then shut, though 
 it had been but once closed before 
 during the Roman history. What an 
 appropriate time for the " Prince of 
 Peace" to come ! The world was, to a 
 great extent, under the Roman sceptre 
 Communications between different parti 
 of the world were then more rapid and 
 secure than they had been at any 
 former period, and the gospel could bt> 
 more easily propagated. Further, the 
 Jews were scattered in almost all lands, 
 acquainted with the promises, looking 
 for the Messiah, furnishing facilities to 
 their own countrymen the apostles to 
 preach the gospel in numerous syna- 
 gogues, and qualified, if they embraced 
 the Messiah, to become most zealous 
 and devoted missionaries. The same 
 language, the Greek, was, moreover, 
 after the time of Alexander the Great, 
 the common language of no small part 
 of the world, or at least was spoken 
 and understood among a considerable 
 portion of the nations of the earth. At 
 no period before had there been so ex- 
 tensive a use of the same language. 
 (4.) It was a proper period to make 
 the new system known. It accorded 
 with the benevolence of God, that it 
 should be delayed no longer than that 
 the world should be in a suitable state 
 for receiving the Redeemer. When 
 that period, therefore, had arrived, God 
 did not delay, but sent his Son on the 
 great work of the world's redemption. 
 t God sent forth his Son. This im- 
 plies that the Son of God had an ex- 
 istence before his incarnation. See 
 John xvi. 28. The Saviour is often 
 represented as sent into the world, and 
 as coming forth from God. ^ Made of 
 a woman. In human nature; born of 
 a woman. This also implies that he 
 had another nature than that which 
 was derived from the woman. On the 
 supposition that he was a mere man, 
 how unmeaning would this assertion 
 be ! How natural to ask, in what other 
 way could he appear than to be born 
 of a woman 1 Why was he particularly 
 designated as coming into the world 
 in this manner? How strange would it 
 
A, D.58.] 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 5 To redeem them that were ! of his Son into your hearts, cry- 
 
 under the law, that we might re- 
 ceive the adoption of sons. 
 
 6 And because ye are sons, 
 G od hath sent forth the Spirit a 
 
 a Ro. 8. 15, 17. 
 
 sound if it were said, ' In the sixteenth 
 century came Faustus Socinus preach- 
 ing unitarianism, made of a woman /' 
 Or, 'In the eighteenth century came 
 Dr. Joseph Priestley, born of a woman, 
 preaching the doctrines of Socinus !' 
 How else could they appear ? would be 
 the natural inquiry. What was there 
 peculiar in their birth and origin that 
 rendered such language necessary ] 
 The language implies that there were 
 other ways in which the Saviour might 
 have come ; that there was something 
 peculiar in the fact that he was born of 
 a woman ; and that there was some 
 special reason why that fact should be 
 made prominently a matter of record. 
 The promise was (Gen. iii. 15) that 
 the Messiah should be the "seed" or 
 the descendant of woman; and Paul 
 probably here alludes to the fulfilment 
 of that promise. ^ Made wider the 
 law. As one of the human race, par- 
 taking of human nature, he was sub- 
 ject to the law of God. As a man he 
 was bound by its requirements, and 
 subject to its control. He took his 
 place under the law that he might 
 accomplish an important purpose for 
 those who were under it. He made 
 himself subject to it that he might be- 
 come one of them, and secure their re- 
 demption. 
 
 5. To redeem t::them. By his death 
 as an atoning sacrifice. See Note on 
 ch. iii. 13. ^ Them that were under 
 the law. Sinners, who had violated 
 the law, and who were exposed to its 
 dread penalty. % That we might re- 
 ceive the adoption of sons. Be adopted 
 as the sons or the children of God. See 
 Notes, John i. 12. Rom. viii. 15. 
 
 6. And because ye are sons. As a 
 consequence of your being adopted 
 into the family of God, and being re- 
 garded as his sons. It follows as a part 
 
 ing, Abba, Father. 
 
 7 Wherefore thou art no more 
 a servant, but a son ; and if a 
 son, then an heir of God through 
 Christ. 
 
 of his purpose of adoption that his 
 children shall have the spirit of the 
 Lord Jesus. \ The Spirit of his Son. 
 The spirit of the Lord Jesus ; the 
 spirit which animated him, or which he 
 evinced. The idea is, that as the Lord 
 Jesus was enabled to approach God 
 with the language of endearment and 
 love, so they would be. He, being the 
 true and exalted Son of God, had the 
 spirit appropriate to such a relation ; 
 they being adopted, and made like him, 
 have the same spirit. The "spirit" here 
 referred to does not mean, as I suppose, 
 the Holy Spirit as such; nor the 
 miraculous endowments of the Holy 
 Spirit, but the spirit which made them 
 like the Lord Jesus ; the spirit by 
 which they were enabled to approach 
 God as his children, and use the reve- 
 rent, and tender, and affectionate lan- 
 guage of a child addressing a father. It 
 is that language used by Christians 
 when they have evidence of adoption ; 
 the expression of the warm, and elevated, 
 and glowing emotions which they have 
 when they can approach God as their 
 God, and address him as their Father. 
 If Crying. That is, the spirit thus 
 cries, TLvivfA* — Kgdfy. Comp. Notes, 
 Rom. viii. 26, 27. In Rom. viii. 15 it 
 is, " wherewith we cry." If Abba, 
 Father. See Note, Rom. viii. 15. It 
 is said in the Babylonian Gemara, a 
 Jewish work, that it was not permitted 
 slaves to use the title of Abba in ad- 
 dressing the master of the family to 
 which they belonged. If so, then the 
 language which Christians are here 
 represented as using is the language of 
 freemen, and denotes that they are not 
 under the servitude of sin. 
 
 7. Wherefore. In consequence of 
 
 this privilege of addressing God as your 
 
 Father. If Thou art no more. You 
 
 I who are Christians. 1 A servant. In 
 
360 
 
 GALAT1ANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 8 Howbeit then when ye 
 knew not God, ye did service 
 
 the servitude of sin; or treated as a 
 servant by being bound under the op- 
 pressive rites and ceremonies of the 
 law. Com p. Note on ver. 3. f But a 
 son. A child of God, adopted into his 
 family, and to be treated as a son. 
 If And if a son, &c. Entitled to all 
 the privileges of a son, and of course to 
 be regarded as an heir through the 
 Redeemer, and with him. See the 
 sentiment here expressed explained in 
 the Note on Rom. viii. 17. 
 
 8. Howbeit. But, 'AxAd. The ad- 
 dress in this verse and the following is 
 evidently to the portion of the Galatians 
 who had been heathen. This is proba- 
 bly indicated by the particle dxxa, but, 
 denoting a transition. In the previous 
 verses Paul had evidently had the Jewish 
 converts more particularly in his eye, 
 and had described their former condition 
 as one of servitude to the Mosaic rites 
 and customs, and had shown the incon- 
 veniences of that condition, compared 
 with the freedom imparted by the gos- 
 pel. To complete the description, he 
 refers also to the Gentiles, as a condi- 
 tion of worse servitude still, and shows 
 (ver. 9) the absurdity of their turning 
 back to a state of bondage of any 
 kind after the glorious deliverance which 
 they had obtained from the degrading 
 servitude of pagan rites. The sense is, 
 • If the Jews were in such a state of 
 servitude, how much more galling and 
 severe was that of those who had been 
 heathens. Yet from that servitude the 
 gospel had delivered them, and made 
 them freemen. How absurd now to 
 go back to a state of vassalage, and to 
 become servants under the oppressive 
 rites of the Jewish law !' 1 When ye 
 knew not God. In your state of heathen- 
 ism, when you had no knowledge of the 
 true God and of his service. The ob- 
 ject is not to apologize for what they 
 did, because they did not know God ; it 
 is to state the fact that they were in a 
 state of gross and galling servitude. 
 
 unto them which by nature are 
 no gods. 
 
 9 But now, after that ye have 
 
 T Ye did service. This does not ex 
 press the force of the original. The 
 meaning is, ' Ye were slaves to (iJcv- 
 Ki'S<rcLn); you were in a condition of servi- 
 tude, as opposed to the freedom of the 
 gospel.' Comp. ver. 3, where the same 
 word is used to describe the state of the 
 Jews. The drift of the apostle is, to 
 show that the Jews and Gentiles, before 
 their conversion to Christianity, were 
 in a state of vassalage or servitude, and 
 that it was absurd in the highest de- 
 gree to return to that condition again. 
 Tf Unto them which by nature are no 
 gods. Idols, or false gods. The ex- 
 pression " by nature" vvo-u, according 
 to Grotius, means, in fact, reipsa. The 
 sense is, that they really had no pre- 
 tensions to divinity. Many of them 
 were imaginary beings ; many were the 
 objects of creation, as the sun, and 
 winds, and streams; and many were 
 departed heroes that had been exalted 
 to be objects of worship. Yet the 
 servitude was real. It fettered their 
 faculties; controlled their powers ; bound 
 their imagination, and commanded their 
 time and property, and made them 
 slaves. Idolatry is always slavery ; 
 and the servitude of sinners to their 
 passions and appetites; to lust, and 
 gold, and ambition, is not less galling 
 and severe than was the servitude to 
 the pagan gods or the Jewish rites, or 
 than is the servitude of the African 
 now to a harsh and cruel master. Of 
 all Christians it may be said that before 
 their conversion they \ did service,' or 
 were slaves to harsh and cruel masters ; 
 and nothing but the gospel has made 
 them free. It may be added, that the 
 chains of idolatry all over the world are 
 as fast ri vetted and as galling as they 
 were in Galatia, and that nothing but 
 the same gospel which Paul preached 
 there can break those chains and restore 
 man to freedom. 
 
 9. But now, &c. The sense is, 
 that since they had been made free from 
 
A.D.58.] 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 361 
 
 known God, or rather are known 
 of God, how turn ye * again to 
 the weak and beggarly 3 ele- 
 
 » or, back. » rudiments. 
 
 their ignoble servitude in the worship 
 of false gods, and had been admitted to 
 the freedom found in the worship of 
 the true God, it was absurd that they 
 should return again to that which was 
 truly slavery or bondage, the observance 
 of the rites of the Jewish law. ^ That 
 ye have known God. The true God, 
 and the ease and freedom of his service 
 in the gospel, t Or rather are known 
 of God. The sense is, ' Or, to speak 
 more accurately or precisely, are known 
 by God.' The object of this correction 
 is to avoid the impression which might 
 be derived from the former phrase 
 that their acquaintance with God was 
 owing to themselves. He therefore 
 states, that it was rather that they were 
 known of God ; that it was all owing 
 to him that they had been brought 
 to an acquaintance with himself. Per- 
 haps, also, he means to bring into view 
 the idea that it was a favour and privi- 
 lege to be known by God, and that 
 therefore it was the more absurd to turn 
 back to the weak and beggarly ele- 
 ments. | How turn ye again. Marg. 
 Back. l How is it that you are returning 
 to such a bondage V The question im- 
 plies surprise and indignation that they 
 should do it. % To the weak and beg- 
 garly elements. To the rites and cere- 
 monies of the Jewish law, imposing a 
 servitude really not less severe than the 
 customs of paganism. On the word 
 elements, see Note on ver. 3. They 
 are called " weak" because they had no 
 power to save the soul; no power to 
 justify the sinner before God. They 
 are called "beggarly" (Gr. 7rra>%x,poor), 
 because they could not impart spiritual 
 riches. They really could confer few 
 benefits on man. Or it may be, as 
 Locke supposes, because the law kept 
 men in the poor estate of pupils from 
 the full enjoyment of the inheritance, 
 ver. 1 — 3. ^j Whereunto ye desire 
 again to be in bondage. As if you 
 31 
 
 ments, whereunto ye desire again 
 to be in bondage ? 
 
 10 Ye observe days, and 
 months, and times, and years. 
 
 had a wish to be under servitude. The 
 absurdity is as great as it would be for a 
 man who had been freed from slavery to 
 desire again his chains. They had been 
 freed by the gospel from the galling 
 servitude of heathenism, and they now 
 again had sunk into the Jewish obser- 
 vances, as if they preferred slavery 
 t<> frerdom, and were willing to go from 
 one form of it to another. The main 
 idea is, that it is absurd for men who 
 have been made free by the gospel to go 
 back again into any kind of servitude 
 or bondage. We may apply it to 
 Christians now. Many sink into a 
 kind of servitude not less galling than 
 was that to sin before their conversion. 
 Some become the slaves of mere cere- 
 monies and forms in religion. Some 
 are slaves to fashion, and the world yet 
 rules them with the hand of a tyrant. 
 They have escaped, it may be, from the 
 galling chains of ambition, and de- 
 grading vice, and low sensuality ; but 
 they became slaves to the love of mo- 
 ney, or of dress, or of the fashions of 
 the world, as if they loved slavery and 
 chains; and they seem no more able 
 to break loose than the slave is to 
 break the bonds which bind him. And 
 some are slaves to some expensive and 
 foolish habit. Professed Christians and 
 Christian ministers too become slaves 
 to the disgusting and loathsome habit 
 of using tobacco, bound by a servitude 
 as galling and as firm as that which 
 ever shackled the limbs of an African. 
 I grieve to add also that many professed 
 Christians are slaves to the habit of " sit- 
 ting long at the wine" and indulging in 
 it freely. O that such knew the liberty 
 of Christian freedom, and would break 
 away from all such shackles, and show 
 how the gospel frees men from all fool- 
 ish and absurd customs ! 
 
 10. Ye observe. The object of this 
 verse is to specify some of the things 
 to which they had become enslaved, 
 
362 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58 
 
 11 I am afraid of you, lest I 
 have bestowed upon you labour 
 in vain. 
 
 H Days. The days here referred to are 
 doubtless the days of the Jewish fes- 
 tivals. They had numerous days of 
 such observances, and in addition to 
 those specified in the Old Testament, 
 the Jews had added many others as 
 days commemorative of the destruction 
 and rebuilding of the temple, and of 
 other important events in their history. 
 It is not a fair interpretation of this to 
 suppose that the apostle refers to the 
 Sabbath, properly so called, for this was 
 a part of the Decalogue ; and was observ- 
 ed by the Saviour himself, and by the 
 apostles also. It is a fair interpretation 
 to apply it to all those days which are 
 not commanded to be kept holy in the 
 Scriptures ; and hence the passage is as 
 applicable to the observance of saints' 
 days, and days in honour of particular 
 events in sacred history, as to the days 
 observed by the Galatians. There is as 
 real servitude in the observance of the 
 numerous festivals and fasts in the 
 Papal communion and in some Pro- 
 testant churches, as there was in the 
 observance of the days in the Jewish 
 ecclesiastical calendar, and for any thing 
 that I can see, such observances are as 
 inconsistent now with the freedom of 
 the gospel as they were in the time of 
 Paul. We should observe as seasons 
 of holy time what it can be proved God 
 has commanded us, and no more. 
 1 And months. The festivals of the 
 new moon, kept by the Jews. Num. 
 x. 10; xxviii. 11 — 14. On this fes- 
 tival, in addition to the daily sacrifice, 
 two bullocks, a ram, and seven sheep 
 of a year old were offered in sacrifice. 
 The appearance of the new-moon 
 was announced by the sound of trum- 
 pets. See Jahn, Archae. § 352. ^ And 
 times. Seated times; festivals returning 
 periodically, as the Passover, the feast of 
 Pentecost, and the feast of Tabernacles. 
 See Jahn, Archae. ch. Hi. § 346 — 360. 
 "I And years. The sabbatical year, or 
 the year of jubilee. See Jahn as above. 
 
 12 Brethren, I beseech you, 
 be as I am; for I am as ye 
 
 11. I am afraid of you, &c. I have 
 fears respecting you. His fears were 
 that they had no genuine Christian 
 principle. They had been so easily 
 perverted and turned back to the servi- 
 tude of ceremonies and rites, that he 
 was apprehensive that there could be 
 no real Christian principle in the case. 
 What pastor has not often had such 
 fears of his people, when he sees them 
 turn to the weak and beggarly elements 
 of the world, or when, after having 
 " run well," he sees them become the 
 slaves of fashion, or of some habit in- 
 consistent with the simplicity of the 
 gospel ] 
 
 1 2. Brethren, I beseech you, be as 1 
 am, &c. There is great brevity in this 
 passage, and no little obscurity, and a 
 great many different interpretations 
 have been given of it by commenta- 
 tors. The various views expressed 
 may be seen in Bloomfield's Crit. Dig. 
 Locke renders it, " Let you and I be as 
 if we were all one. Think yourselves 
 to be very me ; as I in my own mind 
 put no difference at all between you 
 and myself." Koppe explains it thus : 
 " Imitate my example ; for I, though a 
 Jew by birth, care no more for Jewish 
 rites than you." Rosenmiiller explains 
 it, " Imitate my manner of life, in re- 
 jecting the Jewish rites ; as I, having 
 renounced the Jewish rites, was much 
 like you when I preached the^gospel to 
 you." Other interpretations may be 
 seen in Chandler, Doddridge, Calvin, 
 &c. In our version there seems to be 
 an impropriety of expression ; for if he 
 was as they were it would seem to be a 
 matter of course that thoy would be 
 like him, or would resemble him. The 
 sense of the passage, however, it seems 
 to me cannot be difficult. The refer 
 ence is doubtless to the Jewish rites 
 and customs, and to the question 
 whether they were binding on Chris- 
 tians. Paul's object is to persuade 
 them to abandon them. He appeals to 
 
A. P. 58»] 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 363 
 
 are: ye have not injured me 
 it all. 
 
 13 Ye know how, through a in- 
 
 a 1 Co. 2. 3. 
 
 them, therefore, by his own example. 
 And it means evidently, * Imitate me 
 in this thing. Follow my example, 
 and yield no conformity to those rites 
 and customs.' The ground on which 
 he asks them to imitate him may be 
 either, (1.) That he had abandoned 
 them, or, (2.) Because he asks them to 
 yield a point to him. He had done 
 so in many instances for their welfare, 
 and had made many sacrifices for their 
 salvation, and he now asks them to 
 yield this one point, and to become as 
 he was, and to cease these Jewish ob- 
 servances, as he had done. ^ For I 
 am as ye are. Gr. ' For I as ye.' This 
 means, I suppose, ' For I have conformed 
 to your customs in many things. I 
 have abandoned my own peculiarities ; 
 given up my customs as far as possible; 
 conformed to you as Gentiles as far as I 
 could do, in order to benefit and save 
 you. I have laid aside the peculiarity 
 of the Jew on the principle of becom- 
 ing all things to all men (Notes, 1 Cor. 
 ix. 20 — 22), in order that I might save 
 you. I ask in return only the slight 
 sacrifice that you will now become like 
 me in the matter under consideration.' 
 f Ye have not injured me at all. 
 1 It is not a personal matter. I have no 
 cause of complaint. You have done 
 me no personal wrong. There is no 
 variance between us; no unkind feel- 
 ing ; no injury done as individuals. I 
 may, therefore, with the more freedom, 
 ask you to yield this point, when I 
 assure you that I do not feel personally 
 injured. I have no wrong to complain 
 of, and I ask it on higher grounds 
 than would be an individual request : it 
 is for your good, and the good of the 
 great cause.' When Christians turn 
 away from the truth, and disregard the 
 instructions and exhortations of pastors, 
 and become conformed to the world, it 
 is not a personal matter, or a matter of 
 personal offence to them, painful as it 
 
 firmity of the flesh I preached 
 the gospel unto you at the first : 
 14 And my temptation which 
 was in my flesh ye despised not, 
 
 may be to them. They have no pecu- 
 liar reason to say that they are person- 
 ally injured. It is a higher matter. 
 The cause suffers. The interests of 
 religion are injured. The church at 
 large is offended, and the Saviour is 
 " wounded in the house of his friends." 
 Conformity to the world, or a lapse 
 into some sin is a public offence, and 
 should be regarded as an injury done 
 to the cause of the Redeemer. It shows 
 the magnanimity of Paul that, though 
 they had abandoned his doctrines, and 
 forgotten his love and his toils in their 
 welfare, he did not regard it as a per- 
 sonal offence, and did not consider him- 
 self personally injured. An ambitious 
 man or an impostor would have made 
 that the main, if not the only thing. 
 
 13. Ye know how. To show them 
 the folly of their embracing the new 
 views which they had adopted, he re- 
 minds them of past times, and particu- 
 larly of the strength of the attachment 
 which they had evinced for him in for- 
 mer days. *f Through infirmity of the 
 flesh. Gr.Weakness (u<T&ivu*v). Comp. 
 Notes on 1 Cor. ii. 3. 2 Cor. x. 10 ; 
 xii. 7. 
 
 14. And my temptation. My trial ; 
 the thing which was to me a trial and 
 calamity. The meaning, is, that he 
 was afflicted with various calamities and 
 infirmities, but that this did not hinder 
 their receiving him as an angel from 
 heaven. There is, however, a consider- 
 able variety in the MSS. on this verse. 
 Many MSS., instead of " my tempta- 
 tion," read "your temptation;" and 
 Mill maintains that this is the true read- 
 ing. Griesbach hesitates between the 
 two. But it is not very important to 
 determine which is the true reading. If 
 it should be "your,'" then it means that 
 
 | they were tempted by his infirmities to 
 
 ; reject him ; and so it amounts to about 
 
 the same thing. The general sense is, 
 
 , that he had some bodily infirmity, per- 
 
364 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 nor rejected ; but received me as 
 an angel ° of God, even as Christ 
 b Jesus. 
 
 15 Where * is then the bless- 
 edness ye spake of? for I bear 
 you record, that, if it had been 
 
 a 2 Sa. 19. 27. Mai. 2. 7. 
 
 haps some periodically returning disease, 
 that was a great trial to him, which 
 they bore with with great patience 
 and affection. "What that was, he has 
 not informed us, and conjecture is vain. 
 1 But received me as an angel of God. 
 With the utmost respect, as it' I had 
 been an angel sent from God. ^ Even 
 as Christ Jesus. As you would have 
 done the Redeemer himself. Learn 
 hence, (I.) That the Lord Jesus is su- 
 perior to an angel of God. (2.) That 
 the highest proof of attachment to a mi- 
 nister, is to receive him as the Saviour 
 would be received. (3.) It showed 
 their attachment to the Lord Jesus, that 
 they received his apostle as they would 
 have received the Saviour himself. 
 Comp. Matt. x. 40. 
 
 15. Where is then the blessedness. 
 Marg. ' What was' — in accordance with 
 the Greek. The words " ye spake of" 
 are not in the Greek, and should have 
 been printed in Italic. But they obscure 
 the sense at any rate. This is not to 
 be regarded as a question, asking what 
 had become of the blessedness, imply- 
 ing that it had departed ; but it is rather 
 to be regarded as an exclamation, refer- 
 ring to the happiness of that moment, 
 and their affection and joy when they 
 thus received him. ' What blessedness 
 you had then ! How happy was that 
 moment ! What tenderness of affection ! 
 What overflowing joy !' It was a time 
 full of joy, and love, and affectionate 
 confidence. So Tindal well renders it, 
 "How happy were ye then !" In this 
 interpretation, Doddridge, Rosenmuller, 
 Bloomfield, Koppe, Chandler, and others 
 concur. Locke renders it, " What be- 
 nedictions did you then pour out on 
 me !" Tf For I bear you record. I tes- 
 tify. *f Ye ivould have plucked out 
 yout own eyes, &c. No higher proof 
 
 possible, ye would have plucked 
 out your own eyes, and have 
 given them to me. 
 
 16 Am I therefore becoma 
 your enemy, because I tell you 
 the truth ? 
 
 b Mat. 10. 40. i or, what was. 
 
 of attachment could have been given. 
 They loved him so much, that they 
 would have given to him any thing, 
 however dear; they would have done 
 any thing to contribute to his welfare. 
 How changed, now that they had aban- 
 doned his doctrines, and yielded them- 
 selves to the guidance of those who 
 taught a wholly different doctrine ! 
 
 16. Am I therefore become your ene- 
 my, &c. Is my telling you the truth in 
 regard to the tendency of the doctrines 
 which you have embraced, and the cha- 
 racter of those who have led you astray, 
 and your own error, a proof that I have 
 ceased to be your friend ? How apt 
 are we to feel that the man who tells us 
 of our faults is our enemy ! How apt 
 are we to treat him coldly, and to " cut 
 his acquaintance," and to regard him 
 with dislike ! The reason is, he gives 
 us pain ; and we cannot have pain given 
 us, even by the stone against which we 
 stumble, or by any of the brute creation, 
 without momentary indignation, or re- 
 garding them for a time as our enemies. 
 Besides, we do not like to have another 
 person acquainted with our faults and 
 our follies ; and we naturally avoid the 
 society of those who are thus acquainted 
 with us. Such is human nature ; and 
 it requires no little, grace for us to over- 
 come this, and to regard the man who 
 tells us of our faults, or the faults of our 
 families, as our friend. We love to be 
 flattered, and to have our friends flatter- 
 ed ; and we shrink with pain from any 
 exposure, or any necessity for repent- 
 ance. Hence we become alienated from 
 him who is faithful in reproving us for 
 our faults. Hence men become offend- 
 ed with their ministers when they re- 
 prove them for their sins. Hence they 
 become offended at the truth. Hence 
 they resist the influ of the Holy 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER IV 
 
 17 They zealously affect you, 
 but a not well ; yea, they would 
 
 oRo. 10.2. 
 
 or, us. 
 
 Spirit, whose office it is to bring the 
 truth to the heart, and to reprove men 
 for their sins. There is nothing more 
 difficult than to regard with steady and 
 unwavering affection the man who faith- 
 fully tells us the truth at all times, when 
 that truth is painful. Yet he is our 
 best friend. " Faithful are the wounds 
 of a friend, but the kisses of an enemy 
 are deceitful." Prov. xxvii. 6. If I am 
 in danger of falling down a precipice, 
 he shows to me the purest friendship 
 who tells 1 me of it ; if I am in danger 
 of breathing the air of the pestilence, 
 and it can 'be avoided, he shows to me 
 pure kindness who tells me of it. So 
 still more, if I am indulging in a course 
 of conduct that may ruin me, or cherish- 
 ing error that may endanger my salva- 
 tion, he shows me the purest friend- 
 ship who is most faithful in warning 
 me, and apprizing me of what must be 
 the termination of my course. 
 
 17. They zealously affect you. See 
 1 Cor. xii. 31 (Gr.) ; xiv. 39. The 
 word here used (Zxxoa), means to be 
 zealous towards, i. e. for or against any 
 person or thing ; usually, in a good 
 sense, to be eager for. Here it means, 
 that the false teachers made a show of 
 zeal towards the Galatians, or professed 
 affection for them in order to gain them as 
 their followers. They were full of ardour, 
 and professed an extraordinary concern 
 for their welfare — as men always do 
 who are demagogues, or who seek to 
 gain proselytes. The object of the 
 apostle in this is, probably, to say, 
 that it was not wholly owing to them- 
 selves that they had become alienated 
 from the doctrines which he had taught. 
 Great pains had been taken to do it ; 
 and there had been a show of zeal which 
 would be likely to endanger any person. 
 Tf But not well. Not with good mo- 
 tives, or with good designs, *f Yea, 
 they would exclude you. Marg. Ik. 
 A few printed editions of the New Tes- 
 tament have H/u.uc, us, instead of C/m.5.;, 
 31* 
 
 361 
 
 that ye might af 
 
 exclude * yon 
 feet them. 
 
 18 But it is good to be zeal 
 
 you. — Mill. The word exclude here 
 probably means, that they endeavoured 
 to exclude the Galatians from the love 
 and affection of Paul. They would 
 shut them out from that, in order that 
 they might secure them for their own 
 purposes. If the reading in the mar- 
 gin, however, should be retained, the 
 sense would be clearer. • They wish to 
 exclude us, i. e. me, the apostle, in order 
 that they may have you wholly to them- 
 selves. If they can once get rid of your 
 attachment to me, then they will have 
 no difficulty in securing you for them- 
 selves.' This reading, says Rosenmiil- 
 ler, is found " in many of the best co- 
 dices, and versions, and fathers." It is 
 adopted by Doddridge, Locke, and others. 
 The main idea is clear : Paul stood in 
 the way of their designs. The Gala- 
 tians were truly attached to him, and it 
 was necessary, in order to accomplish 
 their ends, to withdraw their affections 
 from him. When false teachers have 
 designs on a people, they begin by 
 alienating their confidence and affec- 
 tions from their pastors and teachers 
 They can hope for no success until this 
 is done ; and hence the efforts of error- 
 ists, and of infidels, and of scorners, is 
 to undermine the confidence of a people 
 in the ministry, and when this is done 
 there is little difficulty in drawing them 
 over to their own purposes, f That ye 
 might affect them. The same word as 
 in the former part of the verse, — ' that 
 ye might zealously affect them' — i. e 
 that ye might show ardent attachmen 4 
 to them. Their Jirst work is to mani 
 fest special interest for your welfare 
 their second, to alienate you from hirr 
 who had first preached the gospel to you 
 their object, not your salvation, or youi 
 real good, but to secure your zealou? 
 love for themselves. 
 
 18. But it is good to be zealously af- 
 fected. The meaning of this is, ' Under- 
 stand me : I do not speak against zeal. 
 I have not a word to say in its dispa- 
 
3Gt> 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58 
 
 ously affected always ° in a good 
 thing, anr> not only when I am 
 present with you. 
 
 19 My J little children, of 
 whom I travail in birth again un- 
 til Christ be formed in you, 
 
 ragement. In itself, it is good ; and their 
 zeal would be good if it were in a good 
 cause.' Probably, they relied much on 
 their zeal ; perhaps they maintained, as 
 errorists and deceivers are very apt to 
 do, that zeal was sufficient evidence of 
 the goodness of their cause, and that 
 persons who are so very zealous could 
 not possibly be bad men. How often is 
 this plea set up by the friends of errorists 
 and deceivers ! 1 And not only when 
 I am present with you. It seems to me 
 that there is great adroitness and great 
 delicacy of irony in this remark ; and 
 that the apostle intends to remind them 
 as gently as possible, that it would have 
 been as well for them to have shown 
 their zeal in a good cause when he was 
 absent, as well as when he was with 
 them. The sense may be, ' You were 
 exceedingly zealous in a good cause 
 when I was with you. You loved the 
 truth ; you loved me. Since I left you, 
 and as soon almost as I was out of your 
 sight, your zeal died away, and your ar- 
 dent love for me was transferred to 
 others. Suffer me to remind you, that 
 it would be well to be zealous of good 
 when I am away, as well as when I am 
 with you. There is not much true af- 
 fection in that which dies away as soon 
 as a man's back is turned.' The doc- 
 trine is, that true zeal or love will live 
 alike when the object is near and when 
 it is removed ; when our friends are 
 present with us, and when they leave 
 us ; when their eye is upon us, and when 
 it is turned away. 
 
 19. My little children. The lan- 
 guage of tender affection, such as a pa- 
 rent would use towards his own offspring. 
 See Note, 1 Cor. iv. 15. Comp. Matt. 
 xviii. 3. John xiii. 33. 1 John ii. 1. 
 12, 13; iv. 4; v. 21. The idea here 
 is, that Paul felt that he sustained to- 
 
 20 I desire to be present with 
 you now, and to change my 
 voice ; for * I stand in doubt of 
 you. 
 
 2 1 Tell me, ye that desire to 
 
 1 Co. 15. 58. b 1 Co. 4. 15. 
 
 1 or, I am perplexed for you. 
 
 wards them the relation of a father, and 
 he had for them the deep and tender 
 feelings of a parent. 1 Of whom I 
 ' travail in birth again. For whose wel- 
 i fare I am deeply anxious : and for whom 
 j I endure deep anguish. Comp. 1 Cor. 
 iv. 15. His anxiety for them he com- 
 pares to the deepest sufferings which 
 human nature endures; and his lan- 
 guage here is a striking illustration of 
 what ministers of the gospel should 
 feel, and do sometimes feel, in regard to 
 ■ their people, ^ Until Christ be formed 
 I in you. The name Christ is often 
 | used to denote his religion, or the 
 principles of his gospel. See Note 
 on Rom. xiii. 14. He;e it means, until 
 Christ reigns wholly in your hearts ; 
 till you wholly and entirely embrace his 
 doctrines ; and till you become wholly 
 imbued with his spirit. See Ool. i. 27. 
 
 20. 7. desire to be present with you 
 now. They had lost much by his ab- 
 sence ; they had changed their views ; 
 they had in some measure become 
 alienated from him ; and he wishes that 
 
 | he might be again with them, as he was 
 before. He would hope to accomplish 
 ' much more by his personal presence 
 i than he could by letter. ^ And to 
 ! change my voice. That is, from com- 
 plaint and censure, to tones of entire 
 confidence. ^ For 1 stand in doubt 
 J of you. Marg. ' I am perplexed for 
 you.' On the meaning of the word 
 here used, see Note on 2 Cor. iv. 8. 
 I The sense is plain. Paul had much 
 I reason to doubt the sincerity and the 
 solidity of their Christian priaciples, 
 and he was deeply anxious on that ac- 
 count. 
 
 21. Tell me, &c. In order to show 
 fully the nature and the effect of the 
 law, Paul here introduces an illustration 
 
 I from an important fact in the Jewish 
 
A. D. 53.] 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 367 
 
 Be under the law* do ye not hear 
 the law ? 
 
 22 For it is written, That 
 
 history. This allegory has given great 
 perplexity to expositors, and, in some 
 respects, it is attended with real difficul- 
 ty. An examination of the difficulties 
 will be found in the larger commenta- 
 ries. My object, without examining 
 the expositions which have been pro- 
 posed, will be to state, in as few words 
 as possible, the simple meaning and de- 
 sign of the allegory. The dengn it is 
 not difficult to understand. It is to 
 show the effect of being under the bond- 
 age or servitude of the Jewish law, 
 compared with the freedom which the 
 gospel imparts. Paul had addressed the 
 Galatians as having a real desire to be 
 under bondage, or to be servants. Note 
 on ver. 9. He had represented Chris- 
 tianity as a state of freedom, and Chris- 
 tians as the sons of God — not servants, 
 but freemen. To show the difference 
 of the two conditions, he appeals to two 
 cases which would furnish a striking 
 illustration of them. The one was the 
 case of Hagar and her son. The effect 
 of bondage was well illustrated there. 
 She and her son were treated with 
 severity, and were cast out and per- 
 secuted. This was a fair illustration 
 of bondage under the law ; of the servi- 
 tude to the laws of Moses; and was a 
 fit representation of Jerusalem as it was 
 in the time of Paul. The other case 
 was that of Isaac He was the son of 
 a free woman, and was treated accord- 
 ingly. He was regarded as a son, not 
 as a servant. And he was a fair illus- 
 tration of the case of those who were 
 made free by the gospel. They enjoyed 
 a similar freedom and sonship, and 
 should not seek a state of servitude or 
 bondage. The condition of Isaac was 
 a fit illustration of the New Jerusalem ; 
 the heavenly city ; the true kingdom of 
 God. But Paul does not mean to say, 
 as I suppose, that the history of the 
 son of Hagar and of the son of Re- 
 becca was mere allegory, or that the 
 narrative by Moses was designed to 
 
 Abraham had two sons ; the one 
 " by a bond-maid, the other b by 
 a free woman. 
 
 aGe. 16. 15. ft Ge. SI. 1,2. 
 
 represent the different condition of those 
 who were under the law and under the 
 gospel. He uses it simply, as showing 
 the difference between servitude and. 
 freedom, and as a striking illustra- 
 tion of the nature of the bondage to 
 the Jewish law, and of the freedom, of 
 the gospel, just as any one may use a 
 striking historical fact to illustrate a 
 principle. These general remarks will 
 constitute the basis of my interpretation 
 of this celebrated allegory. The expres- 
 sion " tell me," is one of affectionate re- 
 monstrance and reasoning. See Luke 
 vii. 42 : * Tell me, therefore, which of 
 these will love him most?" Comp. Isa. 
 i. 18 : "Come, now, and let us reason 
 together, saith the Lord." 1 Ye that 
 desire to be under the law. Note ver. 9. 
 You who wish to yield obedience to 
 the laws of Moses. You who maintain 
 that conformity to those laws is neces- 
 sary to justification. % Do ye not 
 hear the law ? Do you not understand 
 what the law says 1 Will you not listen 
 to its own admonitions, and the instruc- 
 tion which may be derived from the law 
 on the subject'? The word " law" here 
 refers not to the commands that were 
 uttered on mount Sinai, but to the book 
 of the law. The passage to which re- 
 ference is made is in the Book of 
 Genesis ; but all the five books of Moses 
 were by the Jews classed under the 
 general name of the law. See Note 
 on Luke xxiv. 44. The sense is, ' Will 
 you not listen to a narrative found in 
 one of the books of the law itself, fully 
 illustrating the nature of that servitude 
 which you wish V 
 
 22. For it is written. Gen. xvi. 
 xxi. ^ Abraham had two sons. Ish- 
 mael and Isaac. Abraham subsequently 
 had several sons by Keturah after the 
 death of Sarah. Gen. xxvi. 1 — 6. 
 But the two sons by Hagar and Sarah 
 were the most prominent, and the 
 events of their lives furnished the par- 
 ticular illustration which Paul desired. 
 
3fi8 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A D. 58 
 
 23 But he who was of the I 24 "V^hich things are an alle- 
 ■ bond- worn an was born after) gory: * for these are the two 
 the flesh ; but he of the free wo- 
 man was by promise. 
 
 •J The one by a bond-maid. Ishmael, 
 the son of Hagar. II agar was an 
 Egyptian slave, whom Sarah gave to 
 Abraham in order that he might not be 
 wholly without posterity. Gen. xvi. 3. 
 1 The other by a free woman. Isaac, 
 the son of Sarah. Gen. xxi. 1,2. 
 
 23. But he who was of the bond-wo- 
 man was born after the flesh. In the 
 ordinary course of nature, without any 
 special promise, or any unusual divine 
 interposition, as in the case of Isaac. 
 1 But he of the free woman, &c. The 
 birth of Isaac was in accordance with a 
 special promise, and by a remarkable 
 divine interposition. See Gen. xviii. 
 10; xxi. 1,2. Heb. xi.11,12. Comp. 
 Notes on Rom. iv. 19 — 21. The idea 
 here of Paul is, that the son of the 
 slave was in an humble and inferior con- 
 dition from his very birth. There was 
 no special promise attending him. He 
 was born into a state of inferiority and 
 servitude which attended him through 
 his whole life. Isaac, however, was 
 met with promises as soon as he was 
 born, and was under the benefit of 
 those promises as long as he lived. The 
 object of Paul is, to state the truth in 
 regard to a condition of servitude and 
 slavery. It is attended with evils from 
 beginning to end ; from the birth to the 
 grave. By this illustration he means 
 to show them the folly of becoming the 
 voluntary slaves of the law after they 
 had once been made free. 
 
 24. Which things. The different 
 accounts of Ishmael and Isaac. ^ Are 
 an allegory. May lie regarded alle- 
 gorically, or as illustrating great princi- 
 ples in regard to the condition of slaves 
 and freemen; and may theref>re be 
 used to illustrate the effect of servitude 
 to the law of Moses compared with 
 the freedom of the gospel. He does 
 not mean to say that the historical re- 
 cord of Moses was not true, or was 
 merely allegorical ; nor does he mean 
 
 covenants ; the one from the 
 
 aRo.9.7,8. ft 1 Co. 10. 11. 
 
 » or, testaments. 
 
 to say that Moses meant this to be an 
 allegory, or that he intended that it 
 should be applied to the exact purpose to 
 which Paul applied it. No such design 
 is apparent in the narrative of Moses. 
 and it is evident that he had no such 
 intention. Nor can it be shown that 
 Paul means to be understood as saving 
 that Moses had any such design, or that 
 his account was not a record of a plain 
 historical fact. Paul uses it as he 
 would any other historical fact that 
 would illustrate the same principle, and 
 he makes no more use of it than the 
 Saviour did in his parables of real or 
 fictitious narratives to illustrate an im- 
 portant truth, or than we always do of 
 real history to illustrate an important 
 principle. The word which is here 
 used by Paul (^Knyc^iu) is derived 
 from oaagc, another, and uyo^eSa>, to 
 speak, to speak openly or in public. — 
 Paxioiv. It properly means to speak 
 any thing otherwise than it is under- 
 stood (Passow) ; to speak allegorical ly ; 
 to allegorize. The word does not occur 
 elsewhere in the New Testament, nor is 
 it found in the Septuagint, though it 
 occurs often in the classic writers. An 
 allegory is a continued metaphor. See 
 Blair's Lectures, xv. It is a figurative 
 sentence or discourse, in which the prin- 
 cipal object is described by another sub- 
 ject resembling it in its properties and 
 circumstances. — Webster. Allegories 
 are in words what hieroglyphics are 
 in painting. The distinction between a 
 parable and an allegory is said to be, 
 that a parable is a supposed history 
 to illustrate some important truth, as the 
 parable of the good Samaritan, &c. 
 an allegory is based on real facts. It is 
 not probable, however, that this distinc- 
 tion is always carefully observed. Some- 
 times the allegory is based on the 
 resemblance to some inanimate object, 
 as in the beautiful allegory in the 
 eightieth Psalm. Allegories, parables, 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 369 
 
 mount * Sinai, a which gen- 
 
 i Sina. a De. 33. 2. 
 
 and metaphors abound in the writings 
 of the East. Truth was more easily 
 treasured up in this way, and could be 
 better preserved and transmitted when 
 it was connected with an interesting 
 story. The lively fancy of the people 
 of the East also led them to this mode 
 of communicating truth ; though a love 
 for it is probably founded in human na- 
 ture. The best sustained allegory of 
 any considerable length in the world is, 
 doubtless, Bunyan's Pilgrim's Progress; 
 and yet this is among the most popular 
 of all books. The ancient Jews were 
 exceedingly fond of allegories, and even 
 turned a considerable part of the Old 
 Testament into allegory. The ancient 
 Greek, philosophers also were fond of 
 this mode of teaching. Pythagoras 
 instructed his followers in this manner, 
 and this was common among the 
 Greeks, and was imitated much by the 
 early Christians. — Calmet. Many of 
 the Christian fathers, of the school of 
 Origen, made the Old Testament almost 
 wholly allegorical, and found mysteries 
 in the plainest narratives. The Bible 
 became thus with them a book of 
 enigmas, and exegesis consisted in an 
 ingenious and fanciful accommodation 
 of all the narratives in the Scriptures 
 to events in subsequent times. The 
 most fanciful, and the most ingenious 
 man, on this principle, was the best in- 
 terpreter ; and as any man might attach 
 any hidden mystery which he chose to 
 the Scriptures, they became wholly 
 useless as an infallible guide. Better 
 principles of interpretation now pre- 
 vail ; and the great truth has gone forth, 
 never more to be recalled, that the Bible 
 is to be interpreted on the same princi- 
 ple as all other books; that its language 
 is to be investigated by the same laws 
 as language in all other books ; and 
 that no more liberty is to be taken in 
 allegorizing the Scriptures than may be 
 taken with Herodotus or Livy. It is 
 lawful to use narratives of real events 
 to illustrate important principles always. 
 Such a use is often made of history ; 
 
 dereth to bondage, which is 
 Agar. 
 
 and such a use, I suppose, the apostle 
 Paul makes here of an important fact 
 in the history of the Old Testament. 
 H For these are. These may be used 
 to represent the two covenants. The 
 apostle could not mean that the sons 
 of Sarah and of Hagar were literally 
 the two covenants ,• for this could not 
 be true, and the declaration would be 
 unintelligible. In what sense could 
 Ishmael be called a covenant ? The 
 meaning, therefore, must be, that they 
 furnished an apt illustration or repre- 
 sentation of the two covenants ; they 
 would show what the nature of the two 
 covenants was. The words " are" and 
 " is" are often used in this cense in ths 
 Bible, to denote that one thing repre- 
 sents another. Thus in the institution 
 of the Lord's supper ; " Take, eat, thia 
 is my body" (Matt. xxvi. 26); i. e. 
 this represents my body. The bread 
 was not the living body that was then 
 before them. So in ver. 28. "This is 
 my blood of the new covenant ;" I. e. 
 this represents my blood. The wine in 
 the cup could not be the living blood of 
 the Redeemer that was then flow ing in 
 his veins. See Note on that place. 
 Comp. Gen. xli. 26. % The two cove- 
 nants. Marg. Testaments. The word 
 means, here, covenants or compacts. 
 See Note on 1 Cor. xi. 25. The two 
 covenants here referred to, are the one 
 on mount Sinai made with the Jews, 
 and the other that which is made with the 
 people of God in the gospel. The one 
 resembles the condition of bondage in 
 which Hagar and her son were; the 
 other the condition of freedom in which 
 Sarah and Isaac were. 1 The one from 
 the mount Sinai. Marg. Sina. The 
 Greek is Sina, though the word may be 
 written either way. If Which gender- 
 eth to bondage. Which tends to pro- 
 duce bondage or servitude. That is, 
 the laws are stern and severe ; and the 
 observance of them costly, and onerous 
 like a state of bondage. See Note on 
 Acts xv. 10. f Which is Agar. Which 
 Hagar would appropriately represent 
 
370 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 25 For this Agar is mount 
 Sinai in Arabia, and l answereth 
 to Jerusalem which now is, and 
 
 * or, is in the same rank with. 
 
 The condition of servitude produced by 
 the law had a strong resemblance to her 
 condition as a slave. 
 
 25. For this Agar is mount Sinai. 
 This Hagar well represents the law 
 given on mount Sinai. No one can 
 believe that Paul meant to say that 
 Hagar was literally mount Sinai. A 
 great deal of perplexity has been felt in 
 regard to this passage, and Bentley pro- 
 posed to cancel it altogether as an inter- 
 polation. But there is no good au- 
 thority for this. Several MSS. and 
 versions read it, " For this Sinai is a 
 mountain in Arabia ;" others, " to this 
 Hagar Jerusalem answereth," &c. 
 Griesbach has placed these readings in 
 the margin, and has marked them as 
 not to be rejected as certainly false, but 
 as worthy of a more attentive examina- 
 tion ; as sustained by some plausible ar- 
 guments, though not in the whole satis- 
 factory. The word Hagar in Arabic 
 is said to signify a rock ; and it has been 
 supposed that the name was appropri- 
 ately given to mount Sinai, because it 
 was a pile of rocks, and that Paul had 
 allusion to this meaning of the word 
 here. So Chandler, Rosenmuller, and 
 others interpret it. But I cannot find 
 in Castell or Gesenius that the word 
 Hagar in Arabic has this significa- 
 tion ; still less is there evidence that 
 the name was ever given to mount 
 Sinai by the Arabs, or that such a signi- 
 fication was known to Paul. The 
 plainest and most obvious sense of a 
 passage is generally the true sense ; and 
 the obvious sense here is, that Hagar 
 was a fair representation of mount 
 Sinai, and of the law given there. 
 Tf In Arabia. Mount Sinai is situated 
 in Arabia Petraea, or the Rocky. Ro- 
 senmuller says that this means " in the 
 Arabic language ;" but probably in this 
 interpretation he stands alone. ^ -4wrf 
 answereth to Jerusalem. Marg. Is in 
 the same rank with. The margin is 
 the better translation. The meaning is, 
 
 is in bondage with her child- 
 ren. 
 
 26 But Jerusalem a which is 
 
 a He. 12. 22. Re. 21. 2, 10. 
 
 it is just like it, or corresponds with it. 
 Jerusalem as it is now (i. e. in the days 
 of Paul), is like mount Sinai. It is 
 subject to laws, and rites, and customs ; 
 bound by a state of servitude, and fear, 
 and trembling, such as existed when 
 the law was given on mount Sinai. 
 There is no freedom ; there are no great 
 and liberal views ; there is none of the 
 liberty which the gospel imparts to men. 
 The word a-ua-rci^u, answereth to, 
 means properly to advance in order 
 together ; to go together with, as sol* 
 diers march along in the same rank; 
 and then to correspond to. It means 
 here that mount Sinai and Jerusalem 
 as it then was would be fitted to march 
 together in the same platoon or rank. 
 In marshalling an army, care is taken 
 to place soldiers of the same height, 
 and size, and skill, and courage, if po&. 
 sible, together. So here it means that 
 they were alike. Both were connected 
 with bondage, like Hagar. On the one, 
 a law was given that led to bondage f 
 and the other was in fact under t 
 miserable servitude of- rites and forms. 
 ^ Which now is. As it exists now ; 
 that is, a slave to rites and forms, as it 
 was in fact in the time of Paul. 
 1 And is in bondage. To laws and 
 customs. She was under hard and 
 oppressive rites, like slavery. She was 
 also in bondage to sin (John viii. 33, 
 34) ; but this does not seem to be the 
 idea here, t With her children. Her 
 inhabitants. She is represented as a 
 mother, and her inhabitants, the Jews> 
 are in the condition of the son of 
 Hagar. On this passage comp. Note* 
 on 1 Cor. x. 4. for a more full illustra- 
 tion of the principles involved here. 
 
 26. But Jerusalem which is above. 
 The spiritual Jerusalem ; the true 
 church of God. Jerusalem was the 
 place where God was worshipped, and 
 hence it became synonymous with the 
 word church, or is used to represent 
 the people of God. The word Rendered 
 
A. D. 58.] CHAPTER IV. 
 
 which is the mother 
 
 371 
 
 above is fre 
 of us all. 
 
 27 For it is written, n Rejoice 
 thou barren that bearest not ; 
 
 o Is. 54.1. b Ac. 3.25. c. 3. 29. 
 
 "above," (um) means properly up 
 above, that which is above ; and hence 
 heavenly, celestial. Col. Hi. 1, 2. 
 John viii. 23. Here it means, the 
 heavenly or celestial Jerusalem. Rev. 
 xxi. 2 : " And I John saw the holy 
 city, new Jerusalem, coming down from 
 God, out of heaven." Heb. xii. 22 : 
 " Ye are come unto mount Zion, and 
 unto the city of the living God, the 
 heavenly Jerusalem." Here it is used 
 to denote the church, as being of hea- 
 venly origin. ^ Is free. The spirit of 
 the gospel is that of freedom. It is 
 freedom from sin, freedom from the 
 bondage of rites and customs, and 
 it tends to promote universal freedom. 
 See Note on ver. 7. Comp. John viii. 
 32. 36. Note, 2 Cor. iii. 17. If Which 
 is the mother of us all. Of all who are 
 true Christians, whether we are by birth 
 Jews or Gentiles. We should not, 
 therefore, yield ourselves to any degrad- 
 ing and abasing servitude of any kind. 
 Comp. Note, 1 Cor. vi. 12. 
 
 27. For it is written. This passage 
 is found in Isa. liv. 1. For an exposition 
 of its meaning as it occurs there, see 
 my Notes on Isaiah. The object of the 
 npostle in introducing it here seems to 
 be to prove that the Gentiles as well as 
 the Jews would partake of the privi- 
 leges connected with the heavenly 
 Jerusalem. He had in the previous 
 verse spoken of the Jerusalem from 
 above as the common mother of all 
 true Christians, whether by birth Jews 
 or Gentiles. This might be disputed 
 or doubted by the Jews ; and he there- 
 fore adduces this proof from the Old 
 Testament. Or if it was not doubted, 
 still the quotation was pertinent, and 
 would illcstrate the sentiment which he 
 had just uttered. The mention of 
 Jerusalem as a mother seems to have 
 suggested this text. Isaiah had spoken 
 of Jerusalem as a female that had been 
 
 break forth and cry, thou that 
 travailest not ; for the desolate 
 hath many more children than 
 she, which hath an husband. 
 28 Now we, b brethren, as 
 
 long desolate and childless, now re- 
 joicing by a large accession from the 
 Gentile world, and increased in num- 
 bers like a female who should have 
 more children than one who had been 
 long married. To this Paul appropri- 
 ately refers when he says that the whole 
 church, Jews and Gentiles, were the 
 children of the heavenly Jerusalem, 
 represented here as a rejoicing mother. 
 He has not quoted literally from the 
 Hebrew, but he has used the Septua- 
 gint verskm, and has retained the sense. 
 The sense is, that the accession from 
 the Gentile world would be far more nu- 
 merous than the Jewish people had ever 
 been ; a prophecy that has been already 
 fulfilled. 1 Rejoice thou barren thai 
 bearest not. As a woman who has had 
 no children would rejoice. This repre- 
 sents probably the heathen world, as 
 having been apparently forsaken and 
 abandoned, and with whom there had 
 been none of the true children of God. 
 1 Break forth and cry. Or ' break 
 forth and exclaim ;' i. e. break out into 
 loud and glad exclamations at the re- 
 markable accession. The cry here re- 
 ferred to was to be a joyful cry or shout; 
 the language of exultation. So the 
 Hebrew word in Isa. liv. 1 (*?nx) means. 
 U For the desolate. She who was deso- 
 late and apparently forsaken. It lite- 
 rally refers to a woman who had seemed 
 to be desolate and forsaken, who was 
 unmarried. In Isaiah it may refer to 
 Jerusalem, long forsaken and desolate, 
 or as some suppose to the Gentile world. 
 See my Note on Isa. liv. 1. ^ Than 
 she which hath an husband. Perhaps 
 referring to the Jewish people as in 
 covenant with God, and often spoken 
 of as married to him. Isa. lxii. 4, 5 ; 
 liv. 5. 
 
 28. Now we, brethren. We who are 
 
 Christians. 1 Are the children of the 
 
 I promise. We so far resemble Isaac, 
 
372 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 Isaac was, are the children of 
 promise. 
 
 29 But as then he * that was 
 born after the flesh, persecuted 
 him that was born after the Spi- 
 rit, even so * it is now. 
 
 30 Nevertheless, what saith 
 
 a Ge. 21. 9. b .Trio. 15. 19. 
 
 c Ge. 21. 10, 12. 
 
 that there are great and precious pro- 
 mises made to us. We are not in the 
 condition of Ishmael, to whom no pro- 
 mise was made. 
 
 29. But as then he that was horn af- 
 ter the Jlesh. Ishmael. See ver. 23. 
 U Persecuted him that was born after 
 the Spirit. That is, Isaac. The phrase, 
 " after the Spirit," here, is synonymous 
 with ' according to the promise' in the 
 previous verse. It stands opposed to 
 the phrase • after the flesh,' and means 
 that his birth was by the special or mi- 
 raculous agency of God. See Rom. iv. 
 It was not in the ordinary course of 
 events. The persecution here referred 
 to, was the injurious treatment which 
 Isaac received from Ishmael, or the op- 
 position which subsisted between them. 
 The particular reference of Paul is 
 doubtless to Gen. xxi. 9, where it is said 
 that " Sarah saw the son of 1 1 agar the 
 Egyptian, which she had borne unto 
 Abraham, mocking." It was on ac- 
 count of this, and at the special request 
 of Sarah, that Hagar and her son were 
 expelled from the house of Abraham. 
 Gen. xxi. 10. % Even so it is now. 
 That is, Christians, the children of the 
 promise, are persecuted by the Jews, 
 the inhabitants of Jerusalem, " as it now 
 is," and who are uninterested in the pro- 
 mises, as Ishmael was. For an illus- 
 tration of this, see Paley's Horse Pauli- 
 nas, on this Epistle, No. V. Dr. Paley 
 has remarked that it does not appear 
 that the apostle Paul was ever set upon 
 by the Gentiles, unless they were first 
 stirred up by the Jews, except in two 
 instances. One of these was at Phi- 
 lippi, after the cure of the Pythoness 
 (Acts xvi. 19) ; and the other at Ephe- 
 sus, at the instance of Demetrius. Acts 
 
 c the Scripture ? Cast out the 
 bond-woman and her son : for 
 the son of the bond-woman shall 
 not be heir with the son of the 
 free woman. 
 
 31 So then, brethren, we are 
 not children of the bond-woman, 
 but of the free. 
 
 xix. 24. The persecutions of the Chris- 
 tians arose, therefore, mainly from the 
 Jews, from those who were in bondage 
 to the law, and to rites and customs ; 
 and Paul's allusion here to the case of 
 the persecution which Isaac the free-born 
 son endured, is exceedingly pertinent 
 and happy. 
 
 30. Nevertheless. 13 ut ( 'Aami ). 
 11 What saith the Scripture ? What 
 does the Scripture teach on the subject ? 
 What lesson does it convey in regard 
 to the bondman 1 ^ Cast out the bund- 
 looman and her son. This was the 
 language of Sarah, in an address to 
 Abraham, requesting him to cast out 
 Hagar and Ishmael. Gen. xxi. 10. 
 That was done. Paul uses it here as 
 applicable to the case before him. As 
 used by him, the meaning is, that every 
 thing like servitude in the gospel is to 
 be rejected, as Hagar and Ishmael were 
 driven away. It does not mean, as it 
 seems to me, that they were to expel 
 the Jewish teachers in Galatia, but that 
 they were to reject every thing like ser- 
 vitude and bondage ; they were to ad- 
 here only to that which was free. Paul 
 cannot here mean that the passage in 
 Gen. xxi. 1 0, originally had reference to 
 the gospel, for nothing evidently was 
 farther from the mind of Sarah than any 
 such reference; nor can it be shown 
 that he meant to approve of or vindicate 
 the conduct of Sarah ; but Ire finds a 
 passage applicable to his purpose, and 
 he conveys his ideas in that language as 
 exactly expressing his meanirg. We 
 all use language in that way wherever 
 we find it. 
 
 31. So then, brethren. It follows 
 from all this. Not from the allegory 
 regarded as an argument — for Paul does 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 373 
 
 not use it thus — but from the considera- 
 tions suggested on the whole subject. 
 Since the Christian religion is so supe- 
 rior to the Jewish ; since we are by it 
 freed from degrading servitude, and are 
 not in bondage to rites and ceremonies ; 
 since it was designed to make us truly 
 free, and since by that religion we are 
 admitted to the privileges of sons, and 
 are no longer under laws, and tutors, 
 and governors, as if we were minors; 
 from all this it follows, that we should 
 feel and act, not as if we were children 
 of a bondwoman, and burn in slavery, 
 but as if we were children of a free- 
 woman, and born to liberty. It is the 
 birthright of Christians to think, and 
 feel, and act like freemen, and they 
 should not allow themselves to become 
 the slaves of customs, and rites, and 
 ceremonies, but should feel that they 
 are the adopted children of God. 
 
 Thus closes this celebrated allegory— 
 an allegory that has greatly perplexed 
 most expositors, and most readers of 
 the Bible. In view of it, and of the 
 exposition above, there are a few remarks 
 which may not inappropriately be made. 
 
 (1.) It is by no means affirmed, that 
 the history of Hagar and Sarah in Ge- 
 nesis, had any original reference to the 
 gospel. The account there is a plain 
 historical narrative, not designed to have 
 any such reference. 
 
 (2.) The narrative contains import- 
 ant principles, that may be used as il- 
 lustrating truth, and is so used by the 
 apostle Paul. There are parallel points 
 between the history and the truths of 
 religion, where the one may be illus- 
 trated by the other. 
 
 (3.) The apostle does not use it at all 
 in the way of argument, or as if that 
 proved that the Galatians were not to 
 submit to the Jewish rites and customs. 
 It is an illustration of the comparative 
 nature of servitude and freedom, and 
 would, therefore, illustrate the difference 
 between a servile compliance with Jew- 
 ish rites, and the freedom of the 
 gospel. 
 
 (4.) This use of an historical fact by 
 the apostle does not make it proper for 
 us to turn the Old Testament into alle- 
 32 
 
 gory, or even to make a very free use of 
 this mode of illustrating truth. That 
 an allegory may be used sometimes with 
 advantage, no one can doubt while the 
 " Pilgrim's Progress" shall exist. Nor 
 can any one doubt that Paul has here 
 derived, in this manner, an important 
 and striking illustration of truth from 
 the Old Testament. But no one ac- 
 quainted with the history of interpreta- 
 tion can doubt that vast injury has been 
 done by a fanciful mode of explaining 
 the Old Testament ; by making every 
 fact in its history an allegory ; and 
 every pin and pillar of the tabernacle 
 and the temple a type. Nothing is bet- 
 ter fitted to bring the whole science of 
 interpretation into contempt ; nothing 
 more dishonours the Bible, than to make 
 it a book of enigmas, and religion to 
 consist in puerile conceits. The Bible 
 is a book of sense ; and all the doctrines 
 essential to salvation are plainly reveal- 
 ed. It should be interpreted, not by- 
 mere conceit and by fancy, but by the 
 sober laws according to which are inter- 
 preted other books. It should be ex- 
 plained, not under the influence of a 
 vivid imagination, but under the influ- 
 ence of a heart imbued with a love of 
 truth, and by an understanding disci- 
 plined to investigate the meaning of 
 words and phrases, and capable of ren- 
 dering a reason for the interpretation 
 which is proposed. Men may abun- 
 dantly use the facts in the Old Testa- 
 ment to illustrate human nature, as Paul 
 did ; but far distant be the day, when 
 the principles of Origcn and of Cocceius 
 shall again prevail, and when it shall 
 be assumed, that " the Bible means 
 every thing that it can be made to 
 mean." 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 AX ALT SIS. 
 
 This chapter is, properly, a continua- 
 tion of the argument in the previous 
 chapter, and is designed to induce the 
 Galatians to renounce their conformity 
 to the Jewish law, and to become en- 
 tirely conformed to the gospel. In par- 
 ticular, it seems to be designed to meet 
 a charge that had been brought against 
 him, that he had preached the necessity 
 
374 
 
 S 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 TAND a fast therefore in the 
 1 liberty wherewith Christ 
 
 a Ep. 6. 14. 
 
 b Jno. 8. 32, 36. Ro. 6. 18. Ac. 15. 10. 
 
 of circumcision, or that he had so prac- 
 tised it, as to show that he believed that 
 it was obligatory on others. Under his 
 example, or pleading his authority, it 
 seems the false teachers there had urged 
 the necessity of its observance. See 
 ver. 1 1 . The argument and the exhorta- 
 tion consist of the following parts. 
 
 I. He exhorts them to stand firm in 
 the liberty of Christianity, and not to 
 be brought again under bondage, ver. 1. 
 
 II. He solemnly assures them, that if 
 they depended on circumcision for sal- 
 vation, they could derive no benefit from 
 Christ. They put themselves into a per- 
 fect legal state, and must depend on that 
 alone; and that was equivalent to re- 
 nouncing Christ altogether, or to falling 
 from grace, ver. 2 — 6. 
 
 III. He assures them that their pre- 
 sent belief could not have come from 
 him by whom they were originally 
 brought to the knowledge of the truth ; 
 but must have been from some foreign 
 influence, operating like leaven, ver. 
 7—9. 
 
 IV. He says he had confidence in 
 them, on the whole, that they would 
 obey the truth, and that they would suf- 
 fer him who had troubled them to bear 
 his proper judgment, gently insinuating 
 that he should be disowned or cut off. 
 ver. 10. 12. 
 
 V. He vindicates himself from the 
 charge that he preached the necessity 
 of circumcision. His vindication was, 
 that if he had done that, he would have 
 escaped persecution, for then the of- 
 fence of the cross would have ceased, 
 ver. 11. 
 
 VI. He assures them that they had 
 been called unto liberty ; that the gospel 
 had made them free. Yet Paul felt how 
 easy it was to abuse this doctrine, and to 
 pretend that Christ had freed them from 
 all restraint, and from the bondage of 
 all law. Against this he cautions them. 
 Their liberty was not licentiousness. It 
 
 GALATIANS. [A. D. 58. 
 
 hath made us free, and be not en* 
 tangled again with # the yoke of 
 bondage. 
 
 2 Behold, I Paul say unto you, 
 
 was not freedom from all the restraints 
 of law. It was not that they might give 
 indulgence to the passions of the flesh. 
 It was designed that they should serve 
 one another ; and not fall into the in- 
 dulgence of raging passions, producing 
 strife and mutual hatred, ver. 13 — 15. 
 
 VII. To illustrate this, and to show 
 them the evils of giving indulgence to 
 their appetites under the pretence that 
 they were free, he proceeds to show 
 what were the passions to which carnal 
 indulgence would give rise, or what 
 were the works of the flesh, ver. 16 — SI. 
 
 VIII. On the other hand, the Spirit 
 produces a train of most lovely virtues, 
 feelings, and affections, against which 
 there could be no law. ver. 22, 23. 
 
 IX. They who were Christians had 
 in fact crucified the flesh. They were 
 bound to live after the teachings of the 
 Spirit, and Paul, therefore, exhorts them 
 to lay aside all vain-glory and envy, and 
 to five in peace, ver. 24 — 26. 
 
 1 . Staridfast, therefore. Be firm and 
 unwavering. This verse properly be- 
 longs to the previous chapter, and should 
 not have been separated from it. The 
 sense is, that they were to l>e firm 
 and unyielding in maintaining the great 
 principles of Christian liberty. They 
 had been freed from the bondage of rites 
 and ceremonies ; and they should by no 
 means, and in no form, yield to them 
 again. % In the liberty, &c. Comp. 
 John viii. 32. 36. Rom. vi. 18. Notes, 
 ch. iv. 3 — 5. 1 And be riot entangled 
 again. Tindal renders this, " And wrap 
 not yourselves again." The sense is, 
 do not again allow such a yoke to be 
 put on you ; do not again become slaves 
 to any rites, and customs, and habits. 
 % The yoke of bondage. Of servitude 
 to the Jewish laws. See Note, Acts 
 xv. 10. 
 
 2. Behold, I Paul say unto you. I, 
 who at first preached the gospel to you ; 
 I, too, who have been circumcised, and 
 
A. D. 58 , 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 375 
 
 that if ye be circumcised, Christ 
 shall profit you nothing. 
 
 3 For I testify again to every 
 
 who was formerly a strenuous asserter 
 of the necessity of observing the laws 
 of Moses ; and I, too, who am charged 
 (see ver. 11) with still preaching the ne- 
 cessity of circumcision, now solemnly 
 say to you, that if you are circumcised 
 with a view to being justified by that in 
 whole or in part, it amounts to a rejec- 
 tion of the doctrine of justification by 
 Christ, and an entire apostasy from him. 
 He is to be " a whole Saviour." No one 
 is to share with him in the honour of sav- 
 ing men ; and no rite, no custom, no ob- 
 servance of law, is to divide the honour 
 with his death. The design of Paul is to 
 give them the most solemn assurance on 
 this point ; and by his own authority and 
 experience to guard them from the danger, 
 and to put the matter to rest. % That 
 if ye be circumcised. This must be 
 understood with reference to the subject 
 under consideration. If you are cir- 
 cumcised with such a view as is main- 
 tained by the false teachers that have 
 come among you ; that is, with an idea 
 that it is necessary in order to your jus- 
 tification. He evidently did not mean 
 that if any of them had been circum- 
 cised before their conversion to Chris- 
 tianity ; nor could he mean to say, that 
 circumcision in all cases amounted to 
 a rejection of Christianity, for he had 
 himself procured the circumcision of 
 Timothy. Acts xvi. 3. If it was done, 
 as it was then, for prudential considera- 
 tions, and with a wish not necessarily to 
 irritate the Jews, and to give one a more 
 ready access to them, it was not to be 
 regarded as wrong. But if, as the false 
 teachers in Galatia claimed, as a thing 
 essential to salvation, as indispensable to 
 justification and acceptance with God, 
 then the matter assumed a different as- 
 pect ; and then it became in fact a re- 
 nouncing of Christ as himself sufficient 
 to save us. So with any thing else. 
 Rites and ceremonies in religion may be 
 in themselves well enough, if they are 
 held to be matters not essential ; but the 
 moment they are regarded as vital and 
 
 man that is circumcised, that he 
 
 is a debtor to do the whole law. 
 
 4 Christ is become of no ef- 
 
 essential, that moment they begin to in- 
 fringe on the doctrine of justification by 
 faith alone, and that moment they are 
 to be rejected ; and it is because of the 
 danger that this will be the case, that 
 they are to be used sparingly in the 
 Christian church. Who does not know 
 the danger of depending on prayers, and 
 alms, and the sacraments, and extreme 
 unction, and penance, and empty forms 
 for salvation 1 And who does not know 
 how much in the Papal communion 
 the great doctrine of justification has 
 been obscured by numberless such rites 
 and forms 7 t Christ shall profit you 
 nothing. Will be of no advantage to 
 you. Your dependence on circumcision, 
 in these circumstances, will in fact 
 amount to a rejection of the Saviour, 
 and of the doctrine of justification by 
 him. 
 
 3. For I testify again. Probably he 
 had stated this when he had preached 
 the gospel to them at first, and he now 
 solemnly bears witness to the same thing 
 again. Bloomfield, however, supposes 
 that the word again here (womv) means, 
 on the other hand, or, furthermore,- or, 
 as we would say, * and again.' f That 
 he is a debtor to do the whole law. He 
 binds himself to obey all the law of 
 Moses. Circumcision was the distin- 
 guishing badge of the Jews, as baptism 
 is of Christians. A man, therefore, who 
 became circumcised, became a professor 
 of the Jewish religion, and bound him- 
 self to obey all its peculiar laws. This 
 must be understood, of course, with re- 
 ference to the point under discussion ; 
 and means, if he did it with a view to 
 justification, or as a thing that was ne- 
 cessary and binding. It would not ap- 
 ply to such a case as that of Timothy 
 where it was a matter of mere expe- 
 diency or prudence. See Note on ver. 2. 
 
 4. Christ is become of no effect unto 
 you. You will derive no advantage 
 from Christ. His work in regard to you 
 is needless and vain. If you can be 
 justified in any other way than bv him 
 
376 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. V. bS. 
 
 feet a unto you, whosoever of you 
 are justified by the law : ye are 
 fallen b from grace. 
 
 5 For we through the Spirit 
 
 then of course you do not need him, and 
 your adoption of the other mode is in 
 fact a renunciation of him. Tindal ren- 
 ders this, " Ye are gone quite from 
 Christ." The word here used {ustttt^yim), 
 means, properly, to render inactive, idle, 
 useless ; to do away, to put an end to ; 
 and here it means that they had with- 
 drawn from Christ, if they attetnpted to 
 he justified by the law. They would 
 not need him if they could be thus jus- 
 tified ; and they could derive no benefit 
 from him. A man who can be jus- 
 tified by his own obedience, does not 
 need the aid or the merit of another ; 
 and if it was true, as they seemed to 
 suppose, that they could be justified by 
 the law, it followed that the work of 
 Christ was in vain so far as they were 
 concerned. 1 Whoso'ver of yon are jay- 
 tifitdby the law. On the supposition that 
 any of you are justified by the law ; or if, 
 as you seem to suppose, any are justified 
 by the law. The apostle does not say 
 that this had in fact ever occurred ; but 
 he merely makes a supposition. If such 
 a thing should or could occur, it would 
 follow that you had fallen from grace. 
 t Ye are fallen from grace. That is, 
 this would amount to apostasy from the 
 religion of the Redeemer, and would be 
 in fact a rejection of the grace of the 
 gospel. That this had ever in fact oc- 
 curred among true Christians the apos- 
 tle does not affirm, unless he affirmed 
 that men can in fact be justified by the 
 law, since he makes the falling from 
 grace a consequence of that. But did 
 Paul mean to teach that 1 Did he 
 mean to affirm that any man in fact had 
 been, or could be justified by his own 
 obedience to the law] Let his own 
 writings answer. See, especially, Rom. 
 iii. 20. But unless he held that, then 
 this passage does not prove that any one 
 who has ever been a true Christian has 
 fallen away. The fair interpretation of 
 the passage does not demand that. Its 
 
 wait e for the hope of righteous- 
 ness d by faith. 
 
 6 For in Jesus Christ neither 
 
 a Ro. 9. 31, 32. 
 c Ro. 8. 25. 
 
 b He 12. 15. 
 
 d2Ti. 4. 8. 
 
 simple and obvious meaning is, that if 
 a man who had been a professed Chris- 
 tian should be justified by his own con- 
 formity to the law, and adopt that mode 
 of justification, then that would amount 
 to a rejection of the mode of salvation 
 by Christ, and would he a renouncing 
 of the plan of justification by grace. 
 The two systems cannot be united. The 
 adoption of the one is, in fact, a rejec- 
 tion of the other. Christ will be " a 
 whole Saviour," or none. This passage, 
 therefore, cannot be adduced to prove 
 that any true Christian has in fact fallen 
 away from grace, unless it proves also 
 that man may be justified by the deeds 
 of the law, contrary to the repeated de- 
 clarations of Paul himself. The word 
 " grace" here, does not mean grace in 
 the sense of personal religion, it means 
 the system of salvation by grace, in 
 contradistinction from that by merit or 
 by works — the system of the gospel. 
 
 5. For we. We who are Chris- 
 tians. It is a characteristic of the true 
 Christian. ^ Through the Spirit. 
 The Holy Spirit. We expect salvation 
 only by his aid. *| Wait for. That 
 is, we expect salvation in this way. 
 The main idea is, not that of waiting 
 as if the thing were delayed; it is that 
 of expecting. The sense is, that true 
 Christians have no other hope of salva- 
 tion than by faith in the Lord Jesus. It 
 is not by their own works, nor is it by 
 any conformity to the law. The object 
 of Paul is, to show them the true na- 
 ture of the Christian hope of eternal 
 life, and to recall them from dependence 
 on their conformity to the law. ^ The 
 hope of righteousness. The hope of 
 justification. They had no other hope 
 of justification than by faith in the 
 Redeemer. See Note on Rom. i. 17. 
 
 6. For in Jesus Christ. In the re- 
 ligion which Christ came to establish. 
 ^ Neither circumcision, Sec. It makes 
 no difference whether a man is circum- 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 377 
 
 • circumcision availeth any thing, 
 nor uncircumcision ; but faith 
 which * worketh by love. 
 
 7 Ye did run well ; who did 
 1 hinder you, that ye should not 
 obey the truth? 
 
 cised or not. He is not saved because 
 he is circumcised, nor is he condemned 
 because he is not. The design of Chris- 
 tianity is to abolish these rites and cere- 
 monies, and to introduce a way of sal- 
 vation that shall be applicable to all 
 mankind alike. See Notes on ch. iii. 
 28. 1 Cor. vii. 19. Comp. Rom. ii. 29. 
 f Bat faith which worketh by love. 
 Faith that evinces its existence by love 
 to God, and benevolence to men. It is 
 not a mere intellectual belief, but it is 
 that which reaches the heart, and con- 
 trols the affections. It is not a dead 
 faith, but it is that which is operative, 
 and which is seen in Christian kindness 
 and affection. It is not mere belief of 
 the truth, or mere orthodoxy, but it is 
 that which produces true attachment to 
 others. A mere intellectual assent to 
 the truth may leave the heart cold and 
 unaffected ; mere orthodoxy, however 
 bold, and self-confident, and " sound," 
 may not be inconsistent with conten- 
 tions, and strifes, and logomachies, and 
 divisions. The true faith is that which 
 is seen in benevolence, in love to God, 
 in love to all who bear the Christian 
 name ; in a readiness to do good to all 
 mankind. This shows that the heart 
 is affected by the faith that is held ; and 
 this is the nature and design of all true 
 religion. Tindal renders this, " faith, 
 which by love is mighty in opera- 
 tion." 
 
 7. Ye did run well. The Christian 
 life is often represented as a race. See 
 Notes on 1 Cor. ix. 24—26. Paul 
 means here, that they began the Chris- 
 tian life with ardour and zeal. Comp. 
 ch. iv. 15. 1 Who did hinder you. 
 Marg. Drive you buck. The word 
 used here (*.v*kott&>) means properly 
 to beat or drive back. Hence it means 
 to hinder, check, or retard. Dr. Dod- 
 dridge remarks that this is " an Olympic 
 32* 
 
 8 This persuasion comet h not 
 of him that calleth you. 
 
 9 A little c leaven leaveneth 
 the whole lump. 
 
 a 1 Co. 7. 19. b ITh. 1. 3. Ja. 2. 18—22. 
 
 » or, drive you back. c Mat. 13. 33. 1 Co. 5. 6. 
 
 expression, and properly signifies com- 
 ing across the course while a person is 
 running in it, in such a manner as to 
 jostle, and throw lim out of the way." 
 Paul asks, with empha>is, who it could 
 have been that retarded them in their 
 Christian course, implying that it could 
 have been done only by their own con- 
 sent, or that there was really no cause 
 why they should not have continued as 
 they began, f That ye should not 
 obey the truth. The true system of 
 justification by faith in the Redeemer. 
 That you should have turned aside, and 
 embraced the dangerous errors in re- 
 gard to the necessity of obeying the 
 laws of Moses. 
 
 8. This persuasion. This belief 
 that it is necessary to obey the laws ot 
 Moses, and to intermingle the observ- 
 ance of Jewish rites with the belief of 
 the Christian doctrines in order to be 
 saved. Tf Not of him that calleth you. 
 That is, of God, who had called them 
 into his kingdom. That it refers to 
 God and not to Paul is plain. They 
 knew well erlough that Paul had not 
 persuaded them to it, and it was import- 
 ant now to show them that it could 
 not be traced to God, though they who 
 taught it pretended to be commissioned 
 by him. 
 
 9. A little leaven, &c. This is evi- 
 dently a proverbial expression. See it 
 explained in the Notes on 1 Cor. v. 6. 
 Its meaning here is, that the embracing 
 of the errors which they had adopted 
 was to be traced to some influence ex- 
 isting among themselves, and acting 
 like leaven. It may either mean that 
 there was existing among them from 
 the first a slight tendency to conform to 
 rites and customs, and that this had 
 now like leaven pervaded the mass ; 
 or it may mean that the false teachers 
 there might be compared to leaveo 
 
373 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A, D. 58. 
 
 10 I have confidence irr you 
 through the Lord, that ye will 
 be none otherwise minded : but 
 he that troubleth you shall bear 
 
 whose doctrines, though they were few 
 in number, had pervaded the mass of 
 Christians; or it may mean, as many 
 have supposed, that any conformity to 
 the Jewish law was like leaven. If 
 they practised circumcision, it would 
 not stop there. The tendency to con- 
 form to Jewish rites would spread from 
 that until it would infect all the doc- 
 trines of religion, and they would fall 
 into the observance of all the rites of 
 the Jewish law. It seems to me that 
 the second interpretation referred to 
 above is the correct one ; and that the 
 apostle means to say, that the influence 
 which had brought this change about 
 was at first small and unimportant; 
 that there might have been but a few 
 teachers of that kind, and it might 
 have not been deemed worthy of par- 
 ticular attention or alarm ; but that the 
 doctrines thus infused into the churches, 
 had spread like leaven, until the whole 
 mass had become affected. 
 
 10. / have confidence in you, &c. 
 Though they had been led astray, and 
 had embraced many false opinions, 
 yet, on the whole, Paul had confidence 
 in their piety, and believed they would 
 yet return and embrace the truth. 
 t That ye will be none otherwise 
 minded. That is, than you have been 
 taught by me ; or than I think and teach 
 on the subject. Paul doubtless means 
 to say, that he had full confidence that 
 they would embrace the views which he 
 was inculcating on the subject of justi- 
 fication, and he makes this remark in 
 order to modify the severity of his tone 
 of reprehension, and to show that, not- 
 withstanding all he had said, he had 
 confidence still in their piety. He be- 
 lieved that they would coincide with 
 him in his opinion, alike on the general 
 subject of justification, and in regard to 
 the cause of their alienation from the 
 truth. He, therefore, gently insinuates 
 that it was not to be traced to them- 
 
 his a judgment, whosoever he 
 be. 
 
 11 And I, brethren, if I yet 
 preach circumcision, why do I 
 
 a 2 Co. 10.6. 
 
 selves that they had departed from the 
 truth, but to the " little leaven" that 
 had leavened the mass; and he adds 
 that whoever had done this, should be 
 held to be responsible for it. ^f But he 
 that troubleth you. By leading you 
 into error. 1 Shall bear his judgment 
 Shall be responsible for it, and will re- 
 ceive proper treatment from you. He 
 gently states this general principle, 
 which is so obvious ; states that he doea 
 not believe that the defection is to be 
 traced to themselves; and designs to 
 prepare their minds for a proposition 
 which he intends to submit (ver 12). 
 that the offending person or persona 
 should be disowned and cut off. 
 Tf Whosoever he be. ' I do not know 
 who he is. I mention no names ; 
 accuse no one by name ; and advise no 
 severe measures against any particular 
 individual. I state only the obviouo 
 principle that every man should bear 
 his own burden, and be held responsible 
 for what he has done — no matter who 
 he is.' 
 
 1 1. And J, brethren. Paul here pro- 
 ceeds to vindicate himself from giving 
 countenance to the doctrines which 
 they had advanced there. It is evident 
 that the false teachers in Galatia ap. 
 pealed to Paul himself, and alleged that 
 he insisted on the necessity of circum* 
 cision, and that they were teaching no 
 more than he taught. On what they 
 founded this is unknown. It may 
 have been mere slander ; or it may hava 
 arisen from the fact that he had circum- 
 cised Timothy (Acts xvi. 3), and, pos- 
 sibly, that he may have encouraged 
 circumcision in some other similar 
 cases. Or it may have been inferred 
 from the fact (which was undoubtedly 
 true) that Paul in general complied 
 with the customs of the Jews when he 
 was with them. But his conduct and 
 example had been greatly perverted. 
 He had never enjoined circumasion 
 
A, D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 379 
 
 yet suffer persecution ? ° then | 12 1 would they were even 
 
 is the offence 
 ceased. 
 
 ac. 6. 12. 
 
 of the cross | cut off which trouble you. 
 
 13 For, brethren, ye have 
 been called unto liberty ; only 
 
 6 1 Co. 1.23. 
 
 as necessary to salvation ; and had 
 never complied with Jewish customs | 
 where there war. danger that it would be \ 
 understood that he regarded them as at j 
 all indispensable, or as furnishing a j 
 ground of acceptance with God. ^ If \ 
 I yet preach circumcision. If I preach | 
 it as necessary to salvation ; or if I j 
 enjoin it on those who are converted to ; 
 Christianity. % Why do I yet suffer j 
 persecution ? That is, from the Jews, j 
 ■ Why do they oppose me 1 Circuni- ; 
 cision is the peculiar badge of the 
 Jewish religion ; it implies all the rest 
 (see ver. 2) ; and if I preach the neces- 
 sity of that, it would satisfy the Jews, 
 and save me from persecution. They 
 would never persecute one who did that 
 as they do me ; and the fact that I am 
 thus persecuted by them is full demon- 
 stration that I am not regarded as 
 preaching the necessity of circum- 
 cision.' It is remarkable that Paul 
 does not expressly deny the charge. 
 The reason may be, that his own word 
 would be called in question, or that it 
 might require much explanation to 
 show why he had recommended cir- 
 cumcision in any case, as in the case of 
 Timothy. Acts xvi. 3. But the fact 
 that he was persecuted by the Jews 
 settled the question, and showed that 
 he did not preach the necessity of cir- 
 cumcision in any such sense as to 
 satisfy them, or in any such sense as 
 was claimed by the false teachers in 
 Galatia. In regard to the fact that 
 Paul was persecuted by the Jew», see 
 Acts xiv. 1,2. 19 ; xvii. 4, 5. 13. Comp. 
 Paley, Horse Paulinx, Galat. No. V. 
 Tf Then is the offence of the cross ceased. 
 'For if I should preach the necessity 
 of circumcision, as is alleged, the of- 
 fence of the cross of Christ would be 
 removed. The necessity of depending 
 on the merits of the sacrifice made on 
 the cross would be taken away, since 
 then men could be saved by conformity 
 
 to the laws of Moses. The very thing 
 that I have so much insisted on, and 
 that has been such a stumbling-'alock to 
 the Jews (Note, 1 Cor. i. 23), that con- 
 formity to their rites was of no avail, 
 and that they must be saved only by 
 the merits of a crucified Saviour, would 
 be done away with.' Paul means that 
 if this had been done, he would have 
 saved himself from giving offence, and 
 from the evils of persecution. He 
 would have preached that men could 
 be saved by conformity to Jewish rites, 
 and that would have saved him from 
 all the persecutions which he had en- 
 dured in consequence of preaching the 
 necessity of salvation by the cross. 
 
 12. / would they were even cut off. 
 That is, as I understand it, from the 
 communion of the church. So far am 
 I, s«jys Paul, from agreeing with them, 
 and preaching the necessity of circum- 
 cision as they do, that I sincerely wish 
 they were excluded from the church as 
 Unworthy a place among the children 
 of God. For a very singular and mon- 
 strous interpretation of this passage, 
 though adopted by Chrysostom, Theo- 
 doret, Theophylact, Jerome, Grotius, 
 Rosenmiiller, Koppe, and others, the 
 learned reader may consult Koppe 
 on this verse. To my amazement, I 
 find that this interpretation has also 
 been adopted by Robinson in his Lexi- 
 con, on the word fctomfamm. I will 
 state the opinion in the words of Koppe. 
 Non modo circumcidant se, sed, si 
 velint, etiam mutilant se — ipsa geni- 
 talia resecent. The simple meaning is, 
 I think, that Paul wkhed that the 
 authors of these errors and disturb- 
 ances were excluded from the church. 
 1 Which trouble you. Who pervert 
 the true doctrines of r-alvation, and w.io 
 thus introduce error into the church. 
 Error always sooner or later causes 
 trouble. Comp. Note, 1 Cor. v. 7. 
 
 13. For, brethren, ye have been 
 
380 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D.58. 
 
 use not ° liberty for an occasion 
 to the flesh, but by love serve 
 *one another. 
 
 called unto liberty. Freedom from 
 Jewish rites and ceremonies. See the 
 Notes on ch. iii. 28; iv. 9. 21—31. 
 The meaning here is, that Paul wished 
 the false teachers removed because true 
 Christians had been called unto liberty, 
 and they were abridging and destroying 
 that liberty. They were not in sub- 
 jection to the law of Moses, or to any 
 thing else that savoured of bondage. 
 They were free ; free from the servitude 
 of sin, and free from subjection to ex- 
 pensive and burdensome rites and cus- 
 toms. They were to remember this as 
 a great and settled principle; and so 
 vital a truth was this, and so important 
 that it should be maintained, and so 
 great the evil of forgetting it, that Paul 
 says he earnestly wishes (ver. 12) that 
 all who would reduce them to that 
 state of servitude were cut off from the 
 Christian church. Tf Only use not 
 liberty, &c. The word use here intro- 
 duced by our translators, obscures the 
 sense. The idea is, ' You are called to 
 liberty, but it is not liberty for an occa- 
 sion to the flesh. It is not freedom 
 from virtuous restraints, and from the 
 laws of God. It is liberty from the 
 servitude of sin, and religious rites and 
 ceremonies, not freedom from the neces- 
 sary restraints of virtue.' It was neces- 
 sary to give this caution, because, (I.) 
 There was a strong tendency in all con- 
 v rts from heathenism to relapse again 
 ii to their former habits. Licentious- 
 ness abounded, and where they had 
 been* addicted to it before their conver- 
 sion, and where they were surrounded 
 by it on every hand, they were in con- 
 stant danger of falling into it again. 
 A bare and naked declaration, there- 
 f »re, that they had been called to li- 
 tirty, to freedom from restraint, might 
 have been misunderstood, and some 
 might have supposed that they were 
 free from all restraints. (2.) It is 
 needful to guard the doctrine from 
 abuse at all times. There has been a 
 
 14 For all the law >s ful- 
 filled in one word, even in this, 
 
 a 1 Co. 8. 9. 1 Pe. 2. 16. b 1 Jno. 3. 18. 
 
 strong tendency, as the history of the 
 church has shown, to abuse the doc- 
 trines of grace. The doctrine that 
 Christians are " free ;" that there is 
 liberty to them from restraint, has been 
 perverted always by Antinomians, and 
 been made the occasion of their indulg- 
 ing freely in sin. And the result has 
 shown that nothing was more import- 
 ant than to guard the doctrine of Chris- 
 tian liberty, and to show exactly what 
 Christians are freed from, and what 
 iaws are still binding on them. Paul 
 is, therefore, at great pains to show that 
 the doctrines which he had maintained 
 did not lead to licentiousness, and did 
 not allow the indulgence of sinful and 
 corrupt passions. ^ An occasion. As 
 allowing indulgence to the flesh, or as 
 a furtherance or help to corrupt pas- 
 sions. See the word explained in the 
 Notes on Rom. vii. 8. Tf To the flesh. 
 The word flesh is often used in the 
 writings of Paul to denote corrupt and 
 gross passions and affections. See 
 Notes on Rom. vii. 18; viii. 1. \ But 
 by love serve one another. By the 
 proper manifestation of love one to 
 another strive to promote each other's 
 welfare. To do this will not be incon- 
 sistent with the freedom of the gospel. 
 When there is love there is no servi- 
 tude. Duty is pleasant, and offices 
 of kindness agreeable. Paul does not 
 consider them as freed from all law 
 and all restraint ; but they are to be 
 governed by the law of love. They 
 were not to feel that they were so free 
 that they might lawfully give indulgence 
 to the desires of the flesh, but they 
 were to regard themselves as under the 
 law to love one another; and thus they 
 would fulfil the law of Christian free- 
 dom. 
 
 14. For all the law is fulfilled, &c. 
 That is, this expresses the substance of 
 the whole law ; it embraces and com- 
 prises all. The apostle of course here 
 alludes to the law in regard to our duty 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 chapter V. 
 
 381 
 
 a Thou shalt love thy neighbour 
 as thyself. 
 
 15 But if ye bite and devour 
 one another, take heed that ye 
 be not consumed one of another. 
 
 « Le. 19. 18. Mat. 22. 39, 40. Ja. 2. 8. 
 b Ro. 8. 1, 4, 13. * or, fulfil not. 
 
 to our fellow-men, since that was the 
 point which he particularly enforces. 
 lie is saying that this law would coun- 
 teract all the evil workings of the flesh, 
 and if this were fulfilled, all our duty to 
 others would be discharged. A similar 
 sentiment he has expressed in Rom. 
 xiii. 8 — 10. See Notes on that passage. 
 The turn here in the discussion is wor- 
 thy of particular notice. With great 
 skill he changes the subject from a doc- 
 trinal argument to a strain of practical 
 remark, and furnishes most important 
 lessons for the right mode of overcoming 
 our corrupt and sensual passions, and 
 discharging our duty to others. If Thou 
 shalt love thy neighbour, &c. See this 
 explained in the Note on Matt. xix. 19. 
 
 15. But if ye bite. The word here 
 used (Jaxva>), means, properly, to bite, to 
 sting ; and here seems to be used in the 
 sense of contending and striving — a me- 
 taphor not improbably taken from dogs 
 and wild beasts. ^ And devour one 
 another. As wild beasts do. The sense 
 is, • if you contend with each other ;' 
 and the reference is, probably, to the 
 strifes which would arise between the 
 two parties in the churches — the Jewish 
 and the Gentile converts, ^f Take heed 
 that ye be not consumed, •Sec. As wild 
 beasts contend sometimes until both are 
 slain. Thus, the idea is, in their con- 
 tentions they would destroy the spiritu- 
 ality and happiness of each other ; their 
 characters would be ruined ; and the 
 church be overthrown. The readiest way 
 to destroy the spirituality of a church, 
 and to annihilate the influence of reli- 
 gion, is to excite a spirit of contention. 
 
 16. This / say then. This is the 
 true rule about overcoming the propen- 
 sities of your carnal natures, and of 
 avoiding the evils of strife and conten- 
 tion ( Walk. The Christian life is 
 
 16 This I say then, Walk b in 
 the Spirit, and * ye shall not ful- 
 fil the lust of the flesh. 
 
 17 For c the flesh lusteth 
 against the Spirit, and the Spirit 
 against the flesh : and these are 
 
 c 2 Ro. 7. 21—23. 
 
 often represented as a journey, and the 
 word walk, in the Scripture, is often 
 equivalent to live. Mark vii. 5. Notes, 
 Rom. iv. 12; vi. 4; viii. 1. % In *.he 
 Spirit. Live under the influences of 
 the Holy Spirit ; admit those influences 
 fully into your hearts. Do not resist 
 him, but yield to all his suggestions. 
 See Note, Rom. viii. 1. What the Holy 
 Spirit would produce, Paul states in ver. 
 22, 23. If a man would yield hia heart 
 to those influences, he would be able to 
 overcome all his carnal propensities; 
 and it is because he resists that Spirit, 
 that he is ever overcome by the corrupt 
 passions of his nature. Never was a 
 better, a safer, or a more easy rule 
 given to overcome our corrupt and sen- 
 sual desires than that here furnished. 
 Comp. Notes, Rom. viii. 1 — 13. J And 
 ye shall not fulfil, &c. Marg. Fulfil 
 not — as if it were a command. So Tin- 
 dal renders it. But the more common 
 interpretation, as it is the more signifi 
 cant, is that adopted by our translators. 
 Thus it is not merely a command, it is 
 the statement of an important and deeply 
 interesting truth — that the only way to 
 overcome the corrupt desires and propen- 
 sities of our nature, is by submitting to 
 the influences of the Holy Spirit. It is 
 not by philosophy ; it is not by mere 
 resolutions to resist them ; it is not by 
 the force of education and laws ; it is 
 only by admitting into our souls the in- 
 fluence of religion, and yielding our- 
 selves to the guidance of the Holy Spirit 
 of God. If we live under the influences 
 of that Spirit, we need not fear the power 
 of the sensual and corrupt propensities 
 of our nature. 
 
 1 7. For the fiesh lusteth against the 
 Spirit. The inclinations and desires 
 of the flesh are contrary to those of the 
 Spirit. They draw us away in an op- 
 
382 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 53 
 
 contrary a the one to the other; 
 
 aRo.8.6,7. fcRo. 7. 15, 19. 
 
 posite direction, and while the Spirit of 
 God would lead us one way, our carnal 
 nature would lead us another, and thus 
 produce the painful controversy which 
 exists in our minds. The word " Spi- 
 rit" here refers to the Spirit of God, and 
 to his influences on the heart. ^ And 
 these are contrary, &c. They are op- 
 posite in their nature. They never can 
 harmonize. See Rom. viii. 6, 7. Comp. 
 below ver. 19 — 23. The contrariety 
 Paul has illustrated by showing what 
 each produces ; and they are as opposite 
 as adultery, wrath, strife, murders, 
 drunkenness, &c, are to love, joy, 
 goodness, gentleness, and temperance. 
 U So that ye cannot do the things that 
 ye would. See this sentiment illus- 
 trated in the Notes on Rom. vii. 15 — 19. 
 The expression "cannot do" is stronger 
 by far than the original, and it is doubt- 
 ed whether the original will bear this 
 interpretation. The literal translation 
 would be, • Lest what ye will, those 
 things ye should do' (<V* /u» u uv <Haj>t« 
 tZxjtx ?rui\ri). It is rendered by Dod- 
 dridge, " So that ye do not the things 
 that ye would." By Locke, " You do 
 not the things that you propose to your- 
 selves ;" and Locke remarks on the pas- 
 sage, " Ours is the only translation that 
 I know which renders it cannot." The 
 Vulgate and the Syriac give a literal 
 translation of the Greek, " So that you 
 do not what you would." This is un- 
 doubtedly the true rendering ; and, in 
 the original, there is no declaration 
 about the possibility or the impossi- 
 bility, the ability or the inability to 
 do these things. It h simply a state- 
 ment of a fact, as it is in Rom. vii. 
 15. 19. That statement is, that in the 
 mind of a renewed man there is a con- 
 trariety in the two influences which 
 bear on his soul — the Spirit of God in- 
 clining him in one direction, and the 
 lusts of the flesh in another; that one 
 of these influences is so great as in fact 
 to restrain and control the mind, and 
 prevent its doing what it would other- 
 
 so that * ye cannot do the things 
 that ye would. 
 
 wise do ; that when there is an inclina- 
 tion in one direction, there is a control- 
 ling and overpowering influence in 
 another, producing a conflict, which 
 prevents it, and which finally checks 
 and restrains the mind. There is no 
 reason for interpreting this, moreover, 
 as seems always to be the case, of 
 the overpowering tendency in the mind 
 to evil, as if it taught that the Christian, 
 was desirous of doing good, but could 
 not, on account of his indwelling cor- 
 ruption. So far as the language of Paul 
 or the fact is concerned, it may be un- 
 derstood of just the opposite, and may 
 mean, that such are the restraints and 
 influences of the Holy Spirit on the 
 heart, that the Christian does not the 
 evil which he otherwise would, and to 
 which his corrupt nature inclines him. 
 He (Paul) is exhorting them (ver. 16) 
 to walk in the Spirit, and assures them 
 that thus they would not fulfil the lusta 
 of the flesh. To encourage them to 
 this, he reminds them that there were 
 contrary principles in their minds, the 
 influences of the Spirit of God, and a 
 carnal and downward tendency of the 
 flesh. These are contrary one to the 
 other; and such are, in fact, the influ- 
 ences of the Spirit on the mind, that the 
 Christian does not do the things which 
 he otherwise would. So understood, or 
 understood in any fair interpretation of 
 the original, it makes no assertion about 
 the ability or inability of man to do right 
 or wrong. It affirms as a fact, that 
 where these opposite principles exist, a 
 man does not do the things which other- 
 wise he would do. If a man could not 
 do otherwise than he actually does, he 
 would not be to blame. Whether a 
 Christian could not resist the influences 
 of the Holy Spirit, and yield to the cor- 
 rupt desires of the flesh ; or whether he 
 could not overcome these evil propensi- 
 ties and do right always, are points on 
 which the apostle here makes no affirma- 
 tion. His is the statement of a mere 
 fact, that where these counteracting 
 
A. O. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 383 
 
 18 But if a ye be led of the 
 Spirit, ye are not under the law. 
 
 19 Now the works of the 
 flesh b are manifest ; which are 
 
 a Ro. 6. 14 ; 8. 2. b Mat. 15. 19. Ep. 5. 3- 
 6. C/O.3.5,6. Re. 22. 15. 
 
 
 propensities exist in the mind, there is 
 a conflict, and that the man does not do 
 what he otherwise would do. 
 
 1 8. But if ye be led by the Spirit. 
 It' you submit to the teachings and 
 guidance of the Holy Spirit. K Ye are 
 not under the law. You are under a 
 different dispensation — the dispensation 
 of the Spirit. You are free from the re- 
 straints and control of the Mosaic law,and 
 are under the control of the Spirit of God. 
 
 19. Now the works of the flesh. 
 What the flesh, or what corrupt and 
 unrenewed human nature produces. 
 1 Are manifest. Plain, well-known. 
 The world is full of illustrations of what 
 corrupt human nature produces, and as 
 to the existence and nature of those 
 works, no one can be ignorant. It is 
 evident here that the word <rug, flesh, 
 is used to denote corrupt human na- 
 ture, and not merely the body ; since 
 many of the vices here enumerated are 
 the passions of the mind or the soul, 
 rather than of the body. Such are 
 "wrath," "strife," "heresies," " envy- 
 ings," &c, which cannot be said to have 
 their seat in the body. If the word, 
 therefore, is used to denote human na- 
 ture, the passage furnishes a sad com- 
 mentary on its tendency, and on the 
 character of man. It is closely parallel 
 to the declaration of the Saviour in Matt. 
 xv. 19. Of the nature of most of these 
 sins,or works of the flesh, it is unnecessary 
 to offer any comment. They are not so 
 rare as not to be well known, and the 
 meaning of the words require little ex- 
 position. In regard to the existence of 
 these vices as the result of human na- 
 ture, the Notes on Rom. i. may be ex- 
 amined ; or a single glance at the his- 
 tory of the past, or at the present 
 condition of the heathen and a large 
 part of the Christian world, would furnish 
 an ample and a painful demonstration. 
 
 20. Witchcraft. Pretending to witch- 
 
 these ; Adultery, fornication, un- 
 cleanness, lasciviousness, 
 
 20 Idolatry, witchcraft, hatred, 
 variance, emulations, wrath, strife, 
 seditions, heresies, 
 
 craft. The apostle does not vouch for 
 the actual existence of witchcraft; but 
 he says that what was known as sueh 
 was a proof of the corrupt nature of man, 
 and was one of the fruits of it. No one 
 can doubt it. It was a system of impos- 
 ture and falsehood throughout ; and no- 
 thing is a better demonstration of the 
 depravity of the human heart than an 
 extended and systematized attempt to 
 impose on mankind. The word which 
 is here used (jmmi xmit, whence our 
 word pharmacy, from <pu.g/uMtov, a medi- 
 cine, poison, magic potion) means, pro- 
 perly, the preparing and giving of me- 
 dicine. Then it means also poisoning, 
 and also magic art, or enchantment ; be- 
 cause in savage nations pharmacy oi 
 medicine consisted much in magical in 
 cantations. Thence it means sorcery 
 or enchantment, and it is so used uni- 
 formly in the New Testament. It is 
 used only in Gal. v. 20. Rev. ix. 21 ; 
 xviii. 23 ; xxi. 8. Some have supposed 
 that it means here poisoning, a crime 
 often practised ; but the more correct 
 interpretation is, to refer it to the black 
 art, or to pretensions to witchcraft, and 
 the numerous delusions which have 
 grown out of it, as a striking illustration 
 of the corrupt and depraved nature of 
 man. t Hatred. Gr. Hatreds, in the 
 plural. Antipathies, and want of love, 
 producing contentions and strifes, f Va- 
 riance. Contentions. See Note, Rom. 
 i. 29 t Emulations (£aK.«Y. In a bad 
 sense, meaning heart-burning, or jea- 
 lousy, or perhaps inordinate ambition. 
 The sense is ardour or zeal in a bad 
 cause, leading to strife, &c. % Wrath. 
 This also is plural in the Greek (•S-y / uc/), 
 meaning passions, bursts of ai^er. 
 Note, 2 Cor. xii. 20. If Strife. Also 
 plural in the Greek. See Note, 2 Cor. 
 xii. 20. If Seditions. See Note, Rom. 
 | xvi. 17. 1 Heresies. See Note, Acts 
 1 v. 17. 1 Cor. xi. 19. 
 
384 
 
 GALATIAXS. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 21 Envyings, murders, drunk- 
 enness, revellings, and such like : 
 of the which I tell you before, 
 as I have also told you in time 
 
 21. Envyings. Note, 2 Cor. xii. 20. 
 % Revellings. Notes, 2 Cor. xii. 20. 
 Rom. xiii. 13. ^ And such like. This 
 class of evils, without attempting to spe- 
 cify all. ^ Of which I ttll you before. 
 In regard to which I forewarn you. 
 If As I have also told you in time past. 
 When he was with them, f Shall not 
 inherit the kingdom of God. Cannot 
 possibly be saved. See Notes on 1 Cor. 
 vi. 9 — 11. In regard to this passage, 
 we may remark : (1.) That it furnishes 
 the most striking and unanswerable 
 proof of human depravity. Paul repre- 
 sents these things as " the works of the 
 flesh," th«> works of the unrenewed na- 
 ture of man. They are such as human 
 nature, when left to itself, every when- 
 produces. The world shows that such 
 is the fact ; and we cannot but ask, is a 
 nature producing this to be regarded as 
 pure 1 Is man an unfallen being 1 
 Can he save himself ! Does he need 
 no Saviour 1 (2.) This passage is full of 
 fearful admonition to those who indulge 
 in any or all of these vices. Paul, in- 
 spired of God, has solemnly declared, 
 that such cannot be saved. They can- 
 not enter into the kingdom of heaven 
 as they are. Nor is it desirable that they 
 should. What would heaven be if filled 
 up with adulterers, and fornicators, and 
 idolaters, with the proud and envious, 
 and with murderers and drunkards'! 
 To call such a place heaven, would be 
 an abuse of the word. No one could 
 wish to dwell there; and such men 
 cannot enter into heaven. (3.) The 
 human heart must be changed, or man 
 cannot be saved. This follows of course. 
 If such is its tendency, then there is a 
 necessity for such a change as that in re- 
 generation in order that man n\ay be 
 happy and be saved. (4.) We should 
 rejoice that such men cannot, with their 
 present characters, be admitted to hea- 
 ven. We should rejoice that there is 
 
 past, that they which do such 
 things shall not inherit the king- 
 dom of God. 
 
 22 But the fruit a of the Spirit 
 
 a Jno. 15.5. Ep. 5. 9. 
 
 one world where these vices are un- 
 known, a world of perfect and eternal 
 purity. When we look at the earth ; 
 when we see how these vices prevail ; 
 when we reflect that every land is pol- 
 luted, and that we cannot traverse a 
 continent or an island, visit a nook or 
 corner of the earth, dwell in any city or 
 town, where these vices do not exist, O 
 how refreshing and invigorating is it 
 to look forward to a pure heaven ! How 
 cheering the thought that there is one 
 world where these vices are unknown ; 
 one world, all whose ample plains may be 
 traversed, and the note of blasphemy 
 shall never fall on the ear ; one world, 
 where virtue shall be safe from the arts 
 of the seducer ; one world where we 
 may forever dwell, and not one reeling 
 and staggering drunkard shall ever be 
 seen ; where there shall be not one fa- 
 mily in want and tears from the vice of 
 its unfaithful head ! With what joy 
 should we look forward to that world ! 
 With what ardour should we pant that 
 it may be our own ! 
 
 22. But the fruit of the Spirit. 
 That which the Holy Spirit produces. 
 It is not without design, evidently, that 
 the apostle uses the word " Spirit" here, 
 as denoting that these things do not 
 flow from our own nature. The vices 
 above enumerated are the proper 
 " works" or result of the operations of 
 the human heart ; the virtues which he 
 enumerates are produced by a foreign 
 influence; — the agency of the Holy Spi- 
 rit. Hence Paul does not trace them 
 to our own hearts, even when renewed. 
 He says that they are to be regarded as 
 the proper result of the Spirit's opera- 
 tions on the soul. % Is love. To God 
 and to men. Probably the latter here 
 is particularly intended, as the fruits of 
 the Spirit are placed in contradistinction 
 from those vices which lead to strifes 
 among men. On the meaning of the 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 385 
 
 is love, joy, peace, long-suf- 
 fering-, gentleness, goodness, 
 faith, 
 
 word love, see Notes on 1 Gor. xiii. 1; 
 and for an illustration of its operations 
 and effects, see the Notes on that whole 
 chapter, f Joy. In the love of God ; 
 in the evidences of pardon ; in commu- 
 nion with the Redeemer, and in his ser- 
 vice ; in the duties of religion, in trial, 
 and in the hope of heaven. See Notes, 
 Rom. v. 2. Comp. 1 Pet. i. 8. 
 If Peace. As the result of recon- 
 ciliation with God. See Notes, Rom. 
 v. 1. t Long-suffering. In affliction 
 and trial, and when injured by others. 
 See Note, 1 Cor. xiii. 4. ^ Gentleness. 
 The same word which is translated 
 kindness in 2 Cor. vi. 6. See Note 
 on that place. The word means good- 
 ness, kindness, benignity; and is op- 
 posed to a harsh, crabbed, crooked 
 temper. It is a disposition to be pleased ; 
 it is mildness of temper, calmness of 
 spirit, an unruffled disposition, and a 
 disposition to treat ali with urbanity 
 and politeness. This is one of the 
 regular effects of the Spirit's operations 
 on the heart. Religion makes no one 
 crabbed, and morose, and sour. It 
 sweetens the temper ; corrects an irrita- 
 ble disposition ; makes the heart kind ; 
 disposes us to make all around us as 
 happy as possible. This is true polite- 
 ness ; a kind of politeness which can 
 far better be learned in the school of 
 Christ than in that of Chesterfield ; by 
 the study of the New Testament than 
 under the direction of the dancing-mas- 
 ter, t Goodness. Sec Note on Rom. 
 xv. 14. Here the word seems to be 
 used in the sense of beneficence, or a 
 disposition to do good to others. The 
 sense is, that a Christian must be a 
 good man. f Faith. On the meaning of 
 the word faith, see Note on Mark xvi. 
 16. The word here may be used in the 
 sense of fidelity, and may denote that 
 the Christian will be a faithful man, a 
 man faithful to his word and promises ; j 
 a man who can be trusted or confided 
 in. It is probable that the word is used 
 33 
 
 23 Meekness, temperance : 
 against a such there is no law. 
 
 a 1 Ti. 1. 9. 
 
 in this sense because the object of the 
 apostle is not to speak of the feelings 
 which we have towards God so much 
 as to illustrate the influences of the 
 Spirit in directing and controlling our 
 feelings towards men. True religion 
 makes a man faithful. The Christian 
 is faithful as a man; faithful as a 
 neighbour, friend, father, husband, son. 
 He is faithful to his contracts ; faithful 
 to his promises. No man can be a 
 Christian who is not thus faithful, and 
 all pretensions to being under the influ- 
 ences of the Spirit when such fidelity 
 does not exist, are deceitful and vain. 
 
 23. Meekness. See Note, Matt. v. 5. 
 ^ Temperance. The word here used, 
 (lyx.sa.'ritaL), means properly self-control, 
 continence. It is derived from h and 
 k^wtoc, strength, and has reference to 
 the power or ascendancy which we 
 have over exciting and evil passions of 
 all kinds. It denotes the self-rule which 
 a man has over the evil propensities of 
 his nature. Our word temperance we 
 use now in a much more limited sense, 
 as referring mainly to abstinence from 
 intoxicating drinks. But the word 
 here used is employed in a much more 
 extended signification. It includes the 
 dominion over all evil propensities, and 
 may denote continence, chastity, self- 
 government, moderation in regard to 
 all indulgences as well as abstinence 
 from intoxicating drinks. See the word 
 explained in the Notes on Acts xxiv. 
 25. The sense here is, that the influ- 
 ences of the Holy Spirit on the heart 
 make a man moderate in all indul- 
 gences ; teach him to restrain his pas- 
 sions, and to govern himself; to control 
 his evil propensities, and to subdue all 
 inordinate affection. The Christian 
 will not only abstain from intoxicating 
 drinks, but from all exciting passions ; 
 he will be temperate in his manner of 
 living, and in the government of his 
 temper. This may be applied to tem- 
 perance properly so called with us ; but 
 
386 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 TA..D 58 
 
 24 And they that are Christ's 
 have crucined the rlesh with the 
 1 affections and lusts. 
 
 or, passions. a Ito. 8. 4, 5. 6 Ph. 2. 3. 
 
 it should not be limited to that. A 
 Christian must be a temperate man ; 
 and it the effect of his religion is not 
 to produce this, it is false and vain. 
 Abstinence from intoxicating drinks, as 
 well as from all improper excitement, is 
 demanded by the very genius of his re- 
 ligion, and on this subject there is no 
 danger of drawing the cords too close. 
 No man was ever injured hy the strict- 
 est temperance, by total abstinence from 
 ardent spirits, and from wine as a bever- 
 age ; no man is certainly safe who does 
 not abstain ; no man, it is believed, can 
 be in a proper frame of mind for reli- 
 gious duties who indulges in the habit- 
 ual use of intoxicating drinks. No- 
 thing does more scandal to religion than 
 such indulgences ; and, other things 
 being equal, he is the most under the 
 influence of the Spirit of God who is 
 the most thoroughly a man of temper- 
 ance. 1[ Against such there is no 
 law. That is, there is no law to con- 
 demn such persons. These are not 
 the things which the law denounces. 
 These, therefore, are the true freemen ; 
 free from the condemning sentence of 
 the law, and free in the service of God. 
 Law condemns sin ; and they who 
 evince the spirit here referred to are free 
 from its denunciations. 
 
 24. And they that are ChrisVs. 
 All who are true Christians. T Have 
 crucified the flesh. The corrupt pas- 
 sions of the soul have been put to 
 death ; i. e. destroyed. They are as 
 though they were dead, and have no 
 power over us. See Note, ch. ii. 20. 
 1 With the affections. Marg. Pas- 
 sions. All corrupt desires. ^ And 
 lusts. See Note, Rom. i. 24. 
 
 25. If we live in the Spirit. Note, 
 ver. 16. The sense of this verse pro- 
 bably is, ' We who are Christians profess 
 to be under the influences of the Holy 
 Spirit. By his influences and agency 
 
 25 If a we live in the Spirit 
 let us also walk in the Spirit. 
 
 26 Let h us not be desirous of 
 vain glory, provoking one an- 
 other, envvinp- one another. 
 
 is our spiritual life. We profess not fcj 
 be under the dominion of the flesh; 
 not to be controlled by its appetites and 
 desires. Let us then act in this man- 
 ner, and as if we believed this. Let 
 us yield ourselves to his influences, and 
 show that we are controlled by that 
 Spirit.' It is an earnest exhortation 
 to Christians to yield wholly to the 
 agency of the Holy Spirit on their 
 hearts, and to submit to his guidance. 
 See Notes, Rom. viii. 5. 9. 
 
 26. Let us not be desirous of vain- 
 glory. The word here used (x*o#q£m) 
 means, proud or vain of empty advan- 
 tages, as of birth, property, eloquence, 
 or learning. The reference here is 
 probably to the paltry competitions 
 which arose on account of these sup- 
 posed advantages. It is possible that 
 this might have been one cause of the 
 difficulties existing in the churches of 
 Galatia, and the apostle is anxious 
 wholly to check and remove it. The 
 Jews prided themselves on their birth, 
 and men are everywhere prone to over- 
 value the supposed advantages of birth 
 and blood. The doctrines of Paul are, 
 that in great and most vital respects men 
 are on a level ; that these things con- 
 tribute nothing to salvation (Notes, ch. 
 iii. 28) ; and that Christians should 
 esteem them of little importance, and 
 that they should not be suffered to 
 interfere with th#ir fellowship, or to mar 
 their harmony and peace. 1 Provoking 
 one another. The sense is, that they 
 who are desirous of vainglory, do pro- 
 voke one another. They provoke th->se 
 whom they regard as inferiors by a 
 haughty carriage and a contemptuous 
 manner towards them. They look 
 upon them often with contempt ; pass 
 them by with disdain ; treat them as 
 beneath their notice ; and this provokes 
 on the other hand hard feeling, and 
 hatred, and a disposition to take revenge 
 
A.D. 58.J 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 387 
 
 B 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 RETHREN, J if a man 
 
 be overtaken in a fault, 
 
 When men regard themselves as equal 
 in their great and vital interests; when 
 they feel that they are fellow-heirs of 
 the grace of life ; when they feel that 
 they belong to one great family, and are 
 in their great interests on a level ; deriv- 
 ing no advantage from birth and blood ; 
 oil a level as descendants of the same 
 apostate father ; as being themselves 
 sinners ; on a level at the foot of the 
 cross, at the communion table, on beds 
 of sickness, in the grave, and at the 
 bar of God ; when they feel this, then 
 the consequences here referred to will 
 be avoided. There will be no haughty 
 carriage such as to provoke opposition ; 
 and on the other hand there will be no 
 envy on account of the superior rank 
 of others. *f Envying one another. 
 On account of their superior wealth, 
 rank, talent, learning. The true way 
 to cure envy is to make men feel that 
 in their great and important interests 
 they are on a level. Their great inte- 
 rests are beyond the "grave. The dis- 
 tinctions of this life are temporary, and 
 are comparative trifles. Soon all will 
 be on a level in the grave, and at the 
 bar of God, and in heaven. Wealth, 
 and honour, and rank do not avail 
 there. The poorest man will wear as 
 bright a crown as the rich ; the man of 
 most humble birth will be admitted as 
 near the throne as he who can boast 
 the longest line of illustrious ancestors. 
 Why should a man who is soon to 
 wear a " crown incorruptible and unde- 
 fined and that fadeth not away," envy 
 him who has a ducal coronet here, or a 
 royal diadem — baubles that are soon to 
 be laid aside forever 1 Why should he, 
 though poor here, who is soon to in- 
 herit the treasures of heaven where 
 " moth and rust do not corrupt," envy 
 him who can walk over a few acres as 
 his own, or who has accumulated a 
 glittering pile of dust, soon to be left 
 forever"! Why should he who is soon 
 to wear the robes of salvation, made 
 
 ye which are spiritual restore 
 a such an one in the spirit 
 
 > or, although. a Ja. 5. 19, 20. 
 
 " white in the blood of the Lamb,' 
 envy him who is " clothed in purple 
 and fine linen," or who can adorn him- 
 self and his family in the most gorgeoua 
 attire which art and skill can make, 
 soon to give place to the windmg-shtet _ 
 soon to be succeeded by the simple 
 garb which the most humble wears in 
 the grave ] If men feel that their great 
 interests are beyond the tomb ; that in 
 the important matter of salvation they 
 are on a level ; that soon they are to be 
 undistinguished beneath the clods of 
 the valley, how unimportant compara- 
 tively would it seem to adorn their 
 bodies, to advance their name and rank, 
 and to improve their estates ! The rich 
 and the great would cease to look down 
 with contempt oh those of more hum- 
 ble rank, and the poor would cease to 
 envy those above them, for they are 
 soon to be their equals in the grave; 
 their equals, perhaps their superiors in 
 heaven ! 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 ANALYSIS. 
 
 This chapter is composed entirely 
 of affectionate exhortation, and the ex 
 pression of the apostle's earnest so- 
 licitude in the behalf of the Christians 
 in Galatia. He exhorts them (ver. 1) 
 to bring back to the ways of virtue 
 any one who through the strength of 
 strong temptation had been led astray. 
 He entreats them (ver. 2) to bear one 
 another's burdens, and thus to show 
 that they were true friends of Christ, 
 and governed by his laws. He entreats 
 them not to be lifted up with pride, 
 and not to affix an inordinate estimate 
 to any thing that they possessed, assur- 
 ing them that their true estimate was 
 to be formed from the character of their 
 own works, ver. 3 — 5. He exhorts 
 them to minister to the wants of their 
 public teachers, the preachers of the 
 gospel, ver. 6. In ver. 7 — 10 he re- 
 minds them of the solemn day of 
 judgment, when all will be tried; as* 
 
388 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 53 
 
 of meekness ; considering thy- self, lest thou also be t — A 
 
 sures them that men will be judged 
 and rewarded according to their works ; 
 and entreats them not to be weary in 
 well-doing, but to labour on patiently 
 in doing good, with the assurance that 
 they should reap in due season. In 
 Ver. 11 he shows them the interest 
 Which he felt in them by his having 
 done what was unusual for him, and 
 what perhaps he had done in no other 
 instance — writing an entire letter in 
 his own hand. He then states the 
 true reason why others wished them to 
 be circumcised. It was the dread of 
 persecution, and not any real love to the 
 cause of religion. They did not them- 
 selves keep the law, and they only de- 
 sired to glory in the number of con- 
 verts to their views, ver. 12, 13. But 
 Paul says that he would glory in 
 nothing but in the cross of Christ. By 
 that he had been crucified to the world, 
 and the world had been crucified to him 
 (ver. 14) ; and he repeats the solemn 
 assurance that in the Christian religion 
 neither circumcision nor uncircumcision 
 was of any importance whatever, ver. 
 15. This was the true rule of life, 
 and on as many as walked according to 
 this principle, he invokes the blessing 
 of God. ver. 16. He closes the epistle 
 by entreating them to give him no 
 more trouble. He bore in his body 
 already the marks or sufferings which 
 he had received in the cause of the 
 Lord Jesus. His trials already were 
 sufficient; and he entreats them to 
 spare him from future molestation 
 (ver. 17), and closes with the benedic- 
 tion, ver. 18. 
 
 1. Brethren, if a man be overtaken. 
 Marg. Although. It is a case which 
 the apostle supposes might happen. 
 Christians were not perfect; and it was 
 possible that they who were true Chris- 
 tians might be surprised by temptation, 
 and fall into sin. The word rendered be 
 overtaken (;r<>o?j)pS-jj, from 7r^o\Aju0dm), 
 means properly to take before another, 
 to anticipate (1 Cor. xi. 21) ; then to 
 be before taken or caught; and may 
 here mean either that one had been 
 
 formerly guilty of sin, or had been re- 
 cently hurried on by his passions or by 
 temptations to commit a fault. It is 
 probable that the latter here is the 
 true sense, and that it means, if a man 
 is found to be overtaken by any sin ; if 
 his passions, or if temptation get the 
 better of him. Tindal renders it, " If 
 any man be fallen by chance into any 
 fault." It refers to cases of surprise, 
 or of sudden temptation. Christians 
 do not commit sin deliberately, and 
 as a part of the plan of life ; but they 
 may be surprised by sudden temptation, 
 or urged on by impetuous and head- 
 strong passion, as David and Peter 
 were. Paul does not speak of the pos- 
 sibility of restoring one who delibe- 
 rately forms the plan of sinning; he 
 does not suppose that such a man 
 could be a Christian, and that it would 
 be proper to speak of restoring such a 
 man. If Ye which are spiritual. Who 
 are under the influences of the Holy 
 Spirit. See Note on ch. v. 22, 23. 
 The apostle, in this verse, refers evi- 
 dently to those who have fallen into 
 some sensual indulgence (ch. v. 19 — 
 21), and says that they who have es- 
 caped these temptations, and who are 
 under the influences of the Spirit, should 
 recover such persons. It is a very 
 important qualification for those who 
 would recover others from sin, that 
 they should not be guilty of the same 
 sin themselves. Reformers should be 
 holy men ; men who exercise discipline 
 in the church should be "spiritual" 
 men — men in whom implicit confidence 
 may be properly reposed. % Restore 
 such an one. On the meaning of the 
 word here used, see Note on 2 Cor. 
 xiii. 11. Here it means, not to restore 
 him to the church after he has been 
 excluded, but set him right, bring him 
 back, recover him from his errors and 
 his faults. The apostle does not say in 
 what manner this is to be done ; but it 
 is usually to be done doubtless by 
 affectionate admonition, by faithful in 
 struction, and by prayer. Discipline 
 or punishment should not be resorted to 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 389 
 
 2 Bear a ye one another's 
 burdens, and so fulfil the law of 
 Christ. 
 
 until the other methods are tried in 
 vain. Matt, xviii. 15 — 17. % In the 
 spirit of meekness. With a kind, for- 
 bearing, and forgiving spirit. Note, 
 Matt. v. 5. Not with anger ; not with 
 a lordly and overbearing mind; not 
 with a love of finding others in fault, 
 and with a desire for inflicting the dis- 
 cipline of the church ; not with a harsh 
 and unforgiving temper, but with love, 
 and gentleness, and humility, and pa- 
 tience, and with a readiness to forgive 
 when wrong has been done. This is 
 an essential qualification for restoring 
 and recovering an offending brother. 
 No man should attempt to rebuke or 
 admonish another who cannot do it in 
 the spirit of meekness ; no man should 
 engage in any way in the work of re- 
 form who has not such a temper of 
 mind. % Considering thyself, &c. 
 Remembering how liable you are your- 
 self to err; and how much kindness 
 and indulgence should therefore be 
 shown to others You are to act as if 
 you felt it possible that you might also 
 be overtaken with a fault; and you 
 should act as you would wish that 
 others should do towards you. Pliny 
 (Epis. viii. 22) has expressed a similar 
 sentiment in the following beautiful 
 language. Atque ego optimum et 
 emendatissimum existimo, qui caeteris ita 
 ignoscit, tanquam ipse quotidie peccet ; 
 ita peccatis abstinet, tanquam nemini 
 ignoscat. Proinde hoc domi, hoc foris, 
 hoc in omni vitae genere teneamus, 
 ut nobis implacabiles simus, exorabiles 
 istis etiam, qui dare veniam nisi sibi 
 nesciunt. The doctrine taught by Paul 
 is, that such is human infirmity, and 
 such the strength of human depravity 
 that no one knows into what sins he 
 may himself fall. He may be tempted 
 to commit the same sins which he en- 
 deavours to amend in others ; he may 
 be left to commit even worse sins. 
 If this is the case, we should be tender 
 while we are firm ; forgiving while we 
 33* 
 
 3 For if a man think him- 
 self to be something, when 
 
 a Ro. 15. 1. 
 
 set our faces against evil ; prayerful 
 while we rebuke ; and compassionate 
 when we are compelled to inflict ov 
 others the discipline of the church 
 Every man who has any proper feelings, 
 when he attempts to recover an erring 
 brother should pray for him and for 
 himself also ; and will regard his duty 
 as only half done, and that very im- 
 perfectly, if he does not " consider also 
 that he himself may be tempted." 
 
 2. Bear ye one another's burdens. 
 See Note, Rom. xv. 1. Bear with each 
 other ; help each other in the divine life. 
 The sense is, that every man has peculiar 
 temptations and easily besetting sins, 
 which constitute a heavy burden. We 
 should aid each other in regard to these, 
 and help one another to overcome them. 
 t And so fulfil the law of Christ 
 The peculiar law of Christ, requiring 
 us to love one another. See Note on 
 John xiii. 34. This was the distinguish- 
 ing law of the Redeemer ; and they could 
 in no way better fulfil it than by aiding 
 each other in the divine life. The law 
 of Christ would not allow us to reproach 
 the offender, or to taunt him, or to re- 
 joice in his fall. We should help him 
 to take up his load of infirmities, and 
 sustain him by our counsels, our exhort- 
 ations, and our prayers. Christians, 
 conscious of their infirmities, have a 
 right to the sympathy and the prayers 
 of their brethren. They should not be 
 cast off to a cold and heartless world ; 
 a world rejoicing over their fall, and 
 ready to brand them as hypocrites. 
 They should be pressed to the warm 
 bosom of brotherly kindness ; and prayer 
 should be made to ascend without ceas- 
 ing around an erring and a fallen bro- 
 ther. Is this the case in regard to all 
 who bear the Christian name? 
 
 3. For if a man think himself to be 
 something, &c. See ch. v. 26. This 
 is designed, evidently, to be another 
 reason why we should be kind and ten- 
 der to those who have erred. It is, that 
 
390 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 he is nothing, he deceiveth him- 
 self. 
 
 4 But let every man prove 
 
 a 2 Co. 13. 5. 
 
 even those who are most confident may 
 fall. They who feel secure, and think 
 it impossible that they should sin, are 
 not safe. They may be wholly de- 
 ceived, and may be nothing, when they 
 have the highest estimate of themselves. 
 They may themselves fall into sin, and 
 have need of all the sympathy and 
 kindness of their brethren, f When 
 he is nothing. When he has no 
 strength, and no moral worth. When 
 he is not such as he apprehends, but is 
 lifted up with vain self-conceit, ^f He 
 deceiveth himself. He understands not 
 his own character. " The worst part 
 of the fraud falls on his own head." — 
 Doddridge. He does not accomplish 
 what he expected to ; and instead of 
 acquiring reputation from others, as he 
 expected, he renders himself contempti- 
 ble in their sight. 
 
 4. But let every man prove. That 
 is, try or examine in a proper manner. 
 Let him form a proper estimate of what 
 is due to himself, according to his real 
 character. Let him compare himself 
 with the word of God, and the infallible 
 rule which he has given, and by which 
 we are to be judged in the last great 
 day. Comp. Note, Rom. xii. 3. 1 
 Cor. xi. 28. 2 Cor. xiii. 5. ^ His own 
 work. What he does. Let him form 
 a fair and impartial estimate of his own 
 character. T And then shall he have 
 rejoicing. That is, he will be appro- 
 priately rewarded, and will meet with 
 no disappointment. The man who 
 forms an improper estimate of his own 
 character will be sure to be disappoint- 
 ed. The man who examines himself, 
 and who forms no extravagant expecta- 
 tion in regard to what is due to himself, 
 will be appropriately rewarded, and will 
 be made happy. If, by the careful ex- 
 amination of himself, he finds his life to 
 be virtuous, and his course of conduct 
 pure ; if he has done no wrong to 
 otheis, and if he finds evidence that he 
 is a child of God, then he will have 
 
 a his own work, and then shall 
 he have rejoicing in himself 
 b alone, and not in another : 
 
 b Pr. 14. 14. 
 
 cause of rejoicing. ^ In himself alone. 
 Comp. Prov. xiv. 14 : "A good man 
 shall be satisfied from himself." The 
 sentiment is, that he will find in himself 
 a source of pure joy. He will not be 
 dependent on the applause of others for 
 happiness. In an approving conscience ; 
 in the evidence of the favour of God ; 
 in an honest effort to lead a pure and 
 holy life, he will have happiness. The 
 source of his joys will be within ; and 
 he will not be dependent, as the man of 
 ambition, and the man who thinks of 
 himself more highly than he ought, will, 
 on the favours of a capricious multitude, 
 and on the breath of popular applause. 
 1 And not in another. He will not be 
 dependent on others for happiness. 
 Here is the true secret of happiness. It 
 consists, (1.) In not forming an im- 
 proper estimate of ourselves ; in know- 
 ing just what we are, and what is due 
 to us ; in not thinking ourselves to be 
 something, when we are nothing. (2.) 
 In leading such a life that it may be ex- 
 amined to the core, that we may know 
 exactly what we are without being dis- 
 tressed or pained. That is, in having a 
 good conscience, and in the honest and 
 faithful discharge of our duty to God 
 and man. (3.) In not being dependent 
 on the fickle applause of the world tor 
 our comfort. The man who has no in- 
 ternal resources, and who has no approv- 
 ing conscience ; who is happy only when 
 others smile, and miserable when they 
 frown, is a man who can have no secu- 
 rity for enjoyment. The man who has 
 a good conscience, and who enjoys the. 
 favour of God, and the hope of heaven, 
 carries with him the source of perpe.ual 
 joy. He cannot be deprived of it. His 
 purse may be taken, and his house rob- 
 bed, but the highwayman cannot rob 
 him of his coniforts. He carries with 
 him an unfailing source of happiness 
 when abroad, and the same source, of 
 happiness abides with him at home ; he 
 bears it into society, and it remains with 
 

 *.. D. 58] 
 
 5 For every man shall 
 his own burden. 
 
 6 Let a htm that is taught in 
 
 a 1 Co. 9. 11— 14. 
 
 CHAPTER VI 
 
 bear 
 
 391 
 
 him in solitude ; it is his companion 
 wben in health, -and when surrounded 
 by his friends, and it is no less his 
 companion when his friends leave him, 
 and when he lies upon a hed of death. 
 
 5. For every man shall bear his own 
 burden. This seems to be a kind of 
 proverbial saying; and it means here, 
 every man shall have his proper reward. 
 If he is a virtuous man, he will be hap- 
 py ; if a vicious man, he will be misera- 
 ble. If a virtuous man, he will have 
 the source of happiness in himself; 
 if a sinner, he must bear the proper pe- 
 nalty of his sin. In the great day 
 every man shall be properly rewarded. 
 Knowing this, we should be little anx- 
 ious about the sentiments of others, and 
 should seek to maintain a good con- 
 science towards God and man. The 
 design of this passage is, to prevent 
 men from forming an improper estimate 
 of themselves, and of the opinions of 
 others. Let a man feel that he is soon 
 to stand at the judgment seat, and it 
 will do much to keep him from an im- 
 proper estimate of his own importance ; 
 let him feel that he must give an account 
 to God, and that his great interests are 
 to be determined by the estimate which 
 God will affix to his character, and it 
 will teach him that the opinion of the 
 world is of little value. This will re- 
 strain his vanity and ambition. This 
 will show him that th ■ great business of 
 life is to secure the favour of God, and 
 to be prepared to give up his account; 
 and there is noway so effectual of check- 
 ing ambition, and subduing vanity and 
 the love of applause, as to feel that we arc 
 soon to stand at the awful bar of God. 
 
 6. Let him that is taught in the word. 
 In the word of God; i. e. the gospel. 
 ^ Communicate unto him. Let him 
 share with him who teaches ; let there 
 be a common participation of all good 
 things. U In all good things. In 
 every thing that is needful for their 
 
 the word communicate unto him 
 that teacheth in all good things. 
 7 Be not deceived; God is not 
 mocked : for whatsoever a man 
 
 comfortable subsistence. On the duty 
 here enjoined, see Notes on 1 Cor. ix 
 11—13. 
 
 7. Be not deceived. That is, in re 
 gard to your character, and your hopes 
 for eternity. This is a formula of in- 
 troduction to some admonition that is 
 peculiarly weighty and important. It 
 implies that there was danger that they 
 would be deceived in reference to theii 
 character. The sources of the danger 
 were the corruption of their own 
 hearts, the difficulty of knowing their 
 true character, the instructions of false 
 teachers, &c. See Note on 1 Cor. vi. 
 9. ^ God is not mocked. He can- 
 not be imposed on, or mocked. He 
 knows what our real character is, and 
 he will judge us accordingly. The 
 word rendered mocked (/uiucth^w), 
 means, properly, to turn up the nose in 
 scorn ; hence to mock, or deride, or in- 
 sult. The sense is, that God could not 
 be imposed on, or could not be insulted 
 with impunity, or successfully. To 
 mock is, properly, (1.) To imitate, to 
 mimic; to imitate in contempt or deri- 
 sion. (2.) To deride, to laugh at, to 
 ridicule. (3.) To defeat, or to illude, 
 or to disappoint. (4.) To fool, to tan- 
 talize. — Webster. Here it cannot mean 
 to imitate, or to mimic, but it refers to 
 the principles of the divine administra- 
 tion, and must mean that they could 
 not be treated with contempt, or suc- 
 cessfully evaded. They could not 
 hope to illude or impose on God. His 
 principles of government were set- 
 tled, and they could not jmpose on him. 
 To what the reference is here, is not 
 perfectly plain. In the connexion in 
 which it stands, it seems to refer to the 
 support of the ministers of the gospel ; 
 and Paul introduces the general princi- 
 ple, that as a man sows he will re-ip, to 
 show them what will be the effect of a 
 liberal and proper use of their property. 
 If they made a proper use of it ; if they 
 
392 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58 
 
 soweth, that shall he also reap, corruption ; but he that soweth 
 
 8 For he that soweth to his 
 • flesh shall of the flesh reap 
 
 a Job. 4. 8. Pr. 22. 8. Ho. 8. 7. 
 
 employed it for benevolent purposes ; if 
 they appropriated what they should to 
 the support of religion, they would reap 
 accordingly. God could not be imposed 
 on in regard to this. They could not 
 make him think that they had true re- 
 ligion when they were sowing to the 
 flesh, and when they were spending 
 their money in purchasing pleasure, and 
 in luxury and vanity. No zeal, how- 
 ever ardent ; no prayers, however fervent 
 or long ; no professions, however loud, 
 would impose on God. And to make 
 such prayers, and to manifest such zeal 
 and such strong professions, while the 
 heart was with the world, and they 
 were spending their money for every 
 thing else but religion, was mocking 
 God. Alas, how much mockery of God 
 like this still prevails ! How much, 
 when men seem disposed to make God 
 believe that they are exceedingly zealous 
 and devoted, while their heart is truly 
 with the world! How many long 
 prayers are offered ; how much zeal is 
 shown; how many warm professions 
 are made, as if to make God and man 
 believe that the heart was truly engaged 
 in the cause of religion, while little or 
 nothing is given in the cause of benevo- 
 lence ; while the ministers of religion 
 are suffered to starve ; and while the 
 " loud professor" rolls in wealth, and is 
 distinguished for luxury of living, for 
 gayety of apparel, for splendour of equip- 
 age, and for extravagance in parties of 
 pleasure ! Such professors attempt to 
 mock God. They are really sowing to 
 the flesh ; and of the flesh they must 
 reap corruption. % For whatsoever a 
 man soweth, &c. See Note, 2 Cor. ix. 
 6. This figure is taken from agriculture. 
 A man who sows wheat, shall reap 
 wheat ; he who sows barley, shall reap 
 barley ; he who sows cockle, shall reap 
 cockle. Every kind of grain will pro- 
 duce grain like itself. So it is in regard 
 to our works. He who is liberal, shall 
 be dealt with liberally ; he who is right- 
 
 to the Spirit, b shall of the Spirit 
 reap life everlasting. 
 
 b Pr. II. 18. Ja. 3. 18. 
 
 eous, shall be rewarded ; he who is 
 a sinner, shall reap according to his 
 deeds. 
 
 8. For he that soweth to his Jiesh. 
 That makes provision for the indulgence 
 of fleshly appetites and passions. See 
 Notes on ch. v. 19 — 21. "He who 
 makes use of his property to give indul- 
 gence to licentiousness, intemperance, 
 and vanity. ^ Shall of the flesh. 
 From the flesh, or as that which indul- 
 gence in fleshly appetites properly pro- 
 duces. Punishment, under the divine 
 government, is commonly in the line 
 of offences. The punishment of licen- 
 tiousness and intemperance in this life 
 is commonly loathsome and offensive 
 disease ; and, when long indulged, the 
 sensualist becomes haggard, and bloated, 
 and corrupted, and sinks into the grave. 
 Such, also, is often the punishment of 
 luxurious living, of a pampered appetite, 
 of gluttony, as well as of intemperate 
 drinking. But if the punishment does 
 not follow in this life, it will be sure to 
 overtake the sensualist in the world to 
 come. There he shall reap ruin final 
 and everlasting. % Corruption. (1.) 
 By disease. (2.) In the grave — the 
 home to which the sensualist rapidly 
 travels. (3.) In the world of wo. 
 There all shall be corrupt. His virtue- 
 even the semblance of virtue, shall all be 
 gone. His understanding, will, fancy — 
 his whole soul shall be debased and cor- 
 rupt. No virtue will linger and live on 
 the plains of ruin, but all shall be de- 
 pravity and wo. Every thing in hell 
 is debased and corrupt ; and the whole 
 harvest of sensuality in this world and 
 the world to come, is degradation and 
 defilement. If But he that soweth to 
 the Spirit. He who follows the lead- 
 ings and cultivates the affections which 
 the Holy Spirit would produce. See 
 Notes on ch. v. 22, 23. J Shall of the 
 Spirit. As the result of following the 
 leadings of the Spirit. 1 Reap life 
 everlasting. See Note on Rom. ii. 7. 
 
A. D. 53.] 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 393 
 
 9 And let* us not be weary in 
 well-doing ; for in due season we 
 shall reap, if * we faint not. 
 
 a 1 Co. 15. 58. b He. 10. 36. Re. 2. 10. 
 
 9. And let us not be weary in well- 
 doing. See Note on 1 Cor. xv. 58. 
 The reference here is particularly to the 
 support of the ministers of religion (ver. 
 6), but the apostle makes the exhortation 
 general. Christians sometimes become 
 weary. There is so much opposition to 
 the best plans for doing good ; there is 
 so much to be done ; there are so many 
 calls on their time and their charities ; 
 and there is often so much ingratitude 
 among those whom they endeavour to 
 benelit, that they become disheartened. 
 Such Paul addresses, and exhorts them 
 not to give over, but to persevere. 
 *J For in due season. At the day of 
 judgment Then we shall receive the 
 full reward of all our self-denials and 
 charities, f We shall reap, if we faint 
 not. If we do not give over, exhausted 
 and disheartened. It is implied here, 
 that unless a man perseveres in doing 
 good to the end of life, he can hope for 
 no reward. He who becomes disheart- 
 ened, and who gives over his efforts ; he 
 that is appalled by obstacles, and that 
 faints on account of the embarrassments 
 thrown in his way ; he that pines for 
 ease, and withdraws from the field of 
 benevolence, shows that he has no true 
 attachment to the cause, and that his 
 heart has never been truly in the work 
 of religion. He who becomes a true 
 Christian, becomes such for eternity. 
 He has enlisted, never to withdraw. 
 He becomes pledged to do good and to 
 serve God always. No obstacles are to 
 deter, no embarrassments are to drive 
 him from the field. With the vigour 
 of his youth, and the wisdom and influ- 
 ence of his riper years ; with his re- 
 maining powers when enfeebled by age; 
 with the last pulsation of life here, and 
 with his immortal energies in a higher 
 world, he is to do good. For that he is 
 to live. In that he is to die ; and when 
 he awakes in the resurrection witn re- 
 novated powers, he is to awake to an 
 everlasting service of doing good, as far 
 
 10 As we have therefore op- 
 portunity, a tet us do good unto 
 all b men, especially to them 
 
 a Ec. 9. 10. b Mat. 5. 43. Tit. 3. 8. 
 
 as he may have opportunity, in the 
 kingdom of God. 
 
 10. As we have therefore opportuni- 
 ty, let us do good unto all men. This is 
 the true rule about doing good. " The 
 opportunity to do good," says Cotton 
 Mather, " imposes the obligation to do 
 it." The simple rule is, that we are fa- 
 voured with the opportunity, and that 
 we have the power. It is not that we 
 are to do it when it is convenient ; or 
 when it will advance the interest of a 
 party ; or when it may contribute to our 
 fame ; the rule is, that we are to do it 
 when we have the opportunity. No 
 matter how often that occurs ; no mat- 
 ter how many objects of benevolencu 
 are presented — the more the better ; no 
 matter how much self-denial it may cost 
 us ; no matter how little fame we may 
 get by it ; still, if we have the opportu 
 nity to do good, we are to do it, and 
 should be thankful for the privilege. 
 And it is to be done to all men. Not 
 to our family only ; not to our party ; 
 not to our neighbours ; not to those of 
 our own colour ; not to those who live 
 in the same land with us, but to all 
 mankind. If we can reach and benefit 
 a man who lives on the other side of 
 the globe, whom we have never seen, 
 and shall never see in this world or in 
 the world to come, still we are to do 
 him good. Such is Christianity. And 
 in this, as in all other respects, it differs 
 from the narrow and selfish spirit of 
 clanship which prevails all over the 
 world. H Especially. On the same 
 principle that a man is bound particularly 
 to benefit his own family and friends. In 
 his large and expansive zeal for the world 
 at large, he is not to forget or neglect 
 them. He is to feel that they have pe- 
 culiar claims on him. They are near 
 him. They are bound to hirn by ten- 
 der ties. They may be particularly de- 
 pendent on him. Christianity does not 
 relax the ties which bind us to our 
 country, our family, and our friend* 
 
394 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A D. 58 
 
 ■ who are of the 
 faith. 
 
 household of j have written unto you with mine 
 own hand. 
 
 11 Ye see how large a letter I 
 
 a 1 Jno. 3. 14. 
 
 It makes them more close and tender, 
 and excites us more faithfully to dis- 
 charge the duties which grow out of 
 these relations. But, in addition to that, 
 it excites us to do good to all men, and 
 to bless the stranger as well as the 
 friend ; the man who has a different 
 colour from our own, as well as he who 
 has the same ; the man who lives in 
 another clime, as well as he who was 
 born in the same country in which we 
 live. % Of the household of faith. 
 Christians are distinguished from other 
 men primarily by their believing the gos- 
 pel, and by its influence on their lives. 
 
 11. Ye see. This might be rendered 
 see, in the imperative. So Tindal ren- 
 ders it, " Behold." But it is more com- 
 monly supposed that it should be ren- 
 dered in the indicative. The sense is 
 not materially different whichever trans- 
 lation is adopted. The object of the 
 apostle is, to direct their attention to the 
 special proof of his love, which he had 
 mani tested in writing such a letter. 
 1 How large a ktter. Considerable 
 variety has existed in regard to the in- 
 terpretation of this phrase. The word 
 here used and translated how large 
 (mixinoc), means, properly, how great. 
 Some have supposed that it refers to the 
 size of the letters which Paul made in 
 writing the epistle — the length and 
 crudeness of the characters which he 
 used. Such interpreters suppose that 
 he was not well versed in writing 
 Creek, and that he used large letters, 
 and those somewhat rudely made, like 
 tne Hebrew. So Doddridge and Whit- 
 by interpret it ; and so Theodoret, Je- 
 rome, Theophylact, and some others. 
 He might not, says Doddridge, have 
 been well versed in the Greek charac- 
 ters; or " this inaccuracy of his writings 
 might have been owing to the infirmity 
 or weakness of his nerves, which he had 
 hinted at before." Jerome savs, that 
 Paul was a Hebrew, and that he was 
 
 12 As many as desire to make 
 a fair show in the flesh, th v 
 
 unacquainted with the mode of writing 
 Greek letters ; and that because neces- 
 sity demanded that he should write a 
 letter in his own hand, contrary to his 
 usual custom, he was obliged to form 
 his characters in this crude manner. 
 According to this interpretation, it was, 
 (1.) A pledge to the Galatians that the 
 epistle was genuine, since it bore the 
 marks of his own handwriting; and, 
 (2.) It was proof of special affection for 
 them that he was willing to undergo 
 this labour on their account. Others 
 suppose that he means to refer to the 
 size of the epistle which he had written. 
 Such is the interpretation of Grotius, 
 Koppe, Bloomfield, Clarke, Locke, 
 Chandler, and is, indeed, the common 
 interpretation, as it is the obvious one. 
 According to this, it was proof of special 
 interest in them, and regard for them, 
 that he had written to them a whole 
 letter with his own hand. Usually he 
 employed an amanuensis, and added his 
 name, with a brief benediction or remark 
 at the close. See Notes, Rom. xvi. 22. 
 1 Cor. xvi. 21. What induced him to 
 depart from his usual custom here is 
 unknown. Jerome supposes that he 
 refers here to what f "flows from this 
 verse to the end of the epistle, as that 
 which he had written with his own 
 hand, but the word i^ga^*, says Rosen- 
 miiller, refers rather to what he had 
 written, than to that which he intended 
 to write. On this verse, the reader may 
 consult with advantage, Tholuck on the 
 Life and Writings of Paul. German Se- 
 lections, by Edwards and Park, Ando- 
 ver, 1839, pp. 35. 04. 65. 
 
 12. As many as desire to make c 
 
 fair show in the flesh. To be distin 
 
 guished for their conformity to external 
 
 rites and customs. To be known lor 
 
 | their zeal in this cause. They sought 
 
 j to show their zeal by making converts 
 
 | and by inducing others also to conform 
 
 I to those customs. Paul here refers 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 395 
 
 eonstrain you to be circum- 
 cised ; only lest they should suf- 
 fer persecution for the cross of 
 Christ. 
 
 doubtless to the Jewish teachers, and he 
 says that their main object was to evince 
 their zeal in the observance of rites and 
 ceremonies. *[ They constrain you. 
 You who arc Gentiles. They insist on 
 circumcision as indispensable to salva- 
 tion. 1 Only lest they should suffer 
 persecution. It is not from any true 
 love for the cause of religion. It is, 
 that they may avoid persecution from 
 ihe Jews. If they should renounce 
 the doctrine which taught that circum- 
 cision was indispensable, they would be 
 exposed to the rage of the Jews, and 
 would suffer persecution. Rather than 
 do this, they make a show of great 
 zeal in inducing others to be circum- 
 cised. \ For the cross of Christ. 
 From attachment to the cause of a 
 crucified Saviour. If they insisted on 
 entire dependence on the merits of his 
 blood, and renounced all dependance 
 on rites and ceremonies, they would 
 suffer persecution. This verse shows 
 the true cause of the zeal which the 
 Judaizing teachers evinced. It was 
 the fear of persecution. It was the 
 want of independence and boldness in 
 maintaining the doctrine that men 
 were to be saved only by the merits of 
 the Lord Jesus. By attempting to 
 blend together the doctrines of Judaism 
 and Christianity ; by maintaining that 
 the observance of the Jewish rites was 
 necessary, and yet that Jesus was the 
 Messiah, they endeavoured to keep in 
 with both parties ; and thus to escape 
 the opposition of the Jews. It was an 
 unhallowed compromise. It was an 
 attempt to blend things together which 
 could not be united. One must really 
 displace the other. If men depended 
 on the rites of Moses, they had no need 
 of dependence on the Messiah ; if they 
 professed to depend on him, then to 
 rely on any thing else was in fact to 
 disown and reject him. Embracing 
 
 13 For neither they them- 
 selves who are circumcised keep 
 the law ; but desire to have you 
 circumcised, that they may glory 
 in your flesh. 
 
 the one system was in fact renouncing 
 the other. Such is the argument of 
 Paul ; and such his solemn remon- 
 strance against embracing any doctrine 
 which would obscure the glory of 
 simple dependence on the cross of 
 Christ. 
 
 13. For neither they themselves who 
 are circumcised. The Jewish teachers, 
 or perhaps all Jews. It was true in 
 general that the Jews did not wholly 
 and entirely obey the law of Moses, 
 but it is probable that the apostle refers 
 particularly here to the Judaizing 
 teachers in Galatia. If Keep the law. 
 The law of Moses, or the law of God. 
 Paul's idea is, that if they were circum- 
 cised they brought themselves under 
 obligation to keep the whole law of 
 God. See Note, ch. v. 3. But they 
 did not do it. (1.) No man perfectly 
 observes the whole law of God. (2^ 
 The Jewish nation as such were very far 
 from doing it. (3.) It is probable that 
 these persons did not pretend even to 
 keep the whole law of Moses. Paul 
 insists on it that if they were circum- 
 cised, and depended on that for salva- 
 tion, they were under obligation to 
 keep the whole law. But they did 
 not. Probably they did not offer sacri- 
 fice, or join in any of the numerous 
 observances of the Jewish nation, ex- 
 cept some of the more prominent, such 
 as circumcision. This, says Paul, is 
 inconsistent in the highest degree ; and 
 they thus show their insincerity and 
 hypocrisy. % That th p y may glory in 
 your flesh. In having you as converts, 
 and in persuading you to be circum- 
 cised, that they may show their zeal 
 for the law and thus escape persecu- 
 tion. The phrase '* in your flesh" 
 here, is equivalent to ' in your circum- 
 cision ;' making use of your circum- 
 cision to promote their own importance, 
 and to save themselves from persecution, 
 
J96 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 59 
 
 14 But a God forbid that I j whom the world is crucified 
 should glory, save in the cross b unto me, and I unto the world. 
 
 of our Lord Jesus Christ, * by 
 
 14. But God forbid. Note, Rom. 
 iii. 4. * For me it is not to glory ex- 
 cept in the cross of Christ.' The 
 object of Paul here is evidently to 
 place himself in contrast with the 
 Judaizing teachers, and to show his de- 
 termined purpose to glory in nothing 
 else but the cross of Christ. Well 
 they knew that he had as much occa- 
 sion for glorying in the things pertain- 
 ing to the flesh, or in the observance of 
 external rites and customs, as any of 
 them. He had been circumcised. He 
 had had all the advantages of accurate 
 training in the knowledge of the Jewish 
 law. He had entered on life with un- 
 common advantages. He had evinced 
 a zeal that was not surpassed by any of 
 them ; and his life, so far as conformity 
 to the religion in which he had been 
 trained was concerned, was blameless. 
 Phil. iii. 4 — 8. This must have been 
 to a great extent known to the Gala- 
 tians ; and by placing his own conduct 
 in strong contrast with that of the 
 Judaizing teachers, and showing that 
 he had no ground of confidence in him- 
 self, he designed to bring back the 
 minds of the Galatians to simple de- 
 pendence on the cross. ^ That I 
 should glory. That I should boast ; 
 or that I should rely on any thing else. 
 Others glory in their conformity to the 
 laws of Moses ; others in their zeal, or 
 their talents, or their learning, or their 
 orthodoxy ; others in their wealth, or 
 their accomplishments ; others in their 
 family alliances, and their birth ; but 
 the supreme boast and glorying of a 
 Christian is in the cross of Christ. 
 % In the cross of our Lord Jesus Christ. 
 In Jesus the crucified Messiah. It is a 
 subject of rejoicing and glorying that 
 we have such a Saviour. The world 
 looked upon him with contempt ; and 
 the cross was a stumbling block to the 
 Jew, and folly to the Greek. Notes, 
 1 Cor. i. 23. But to the Christian, that 
 cross is the subject of glorying. It is so 
 
 . 3. 3, 7, 
 
 or, whereby. b c. 2. 
 
 because, (1.) Of the love of him who 
 suffered there ; (2.) Of the purity and 
 holiness of his character, for the inno- 
 cent died there for the guilty ; (3.) Of 
 the honour there put on the law of God 
 by his dying to maintain it unsullied ; 
 (4.) Of the reconciliation there made 
 for sin, accomplishing what could, be 
 done by no other oblation, and by no 
 power of man ; (5.) Of the pardon there 
 procured for the guilty ; (6) Of the 
 fact that through it we become dead to 
 the world, and are made alive to God ; 
 (7.) Of the support and consolation 
 which goes from that cross to sustain 
 us in trial ; and, (8.) Of the fact that it 
 procured for us admission into heaven, 
 a title to the world of glory. All is 
 glory around the cross. It was a glo- 
 rious Saviour who died ; it was glorious 
 love that led Lim to die ; it was a glo- 
 rious object to redeem a world ; and ii 
 is unspeakable glory to which he will 
 raise lost and ruined sinners by his 
 death. O who would not glory in such 
 a Saviour! compared with this, what 
 trifles are all the objects in which men 
 usually boast ! And what a lesson is 
 here furnished to the true Christian ! 
 Let us not boast of our wealth. It 
 will soon leave us, or we shall be taken 
 from it, and it can aid us little in the 
 great matters that are before us. It will 
 not ward off disease ; it will not enable 
 us to bear pain ; it will not smooth the 
 couch of death; it will not save the 
 soul. Let us not glory in our strength, 
 for it will soon fail ; in our beauty, for 
 we shall soon be undistinguished in 
 the corruptions of the tomb; in our 
 accomplishments, for they will not save 
 us ; in our learning, for it is not that by 
 which we can be brought to heaven. 
 But let us glory that we have for a 
 Saviour the eternal Son of God — that 
 glorious Being who was adored by the 
 inhabitants of heaven ; who made the 
 worlds; who is pure, and lovely, and 
 most holv and who has undertaken 
 
A. D. 58.] 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 397 
 
 1 5 For ° in Christ Jesus nei- 
 ther circumcision availeth any 
 thing, nor uncircumcision, but a 
 * new creature. 
 
 ac. 5. 6. 6 2 Co. 5. 17. c Ps. 125. 5. 
 
 our cause and died to save us. I de- 
 sire no higher honour than to be saved 
 by the Son of God. It is the exaltation 
 of my nature, and shows me more 
 than any thing else its true dignity, 
 that one so great and glorious sought 
 my redemption. That cannot be an 
 object of temporary value which he 
 sought by coming from heaven, and 
 if there is any object of real magnitude 
 in this world, it is the soul which the 
 eternal Sou of God died to redeem. 
 
 1 By whom the world is crucified unto 
 me, &c. See Notes on ch. ii. 20. 
 
 15. For in Christ Jesus. In his re- 
 ligion. See Note on ch. v. 6. 1 But 
 a new creature. The fact that a man 
 is created anew, or born again, consti- 
 tutes the real difference between him 
 and other men. This is what Christ 
 requires ; this is the distinction which 
 he designs to make. It is not by con- 
 formity to certain rites and customs 
 that a man is to be accepted ; it is not 
 by elevated rank, or by wealth, or 
 beauty, or blood ; it is not by the colour 
 of the complexion ; but. the grand in- 
 quiry is, whether a man is born again, 
 and is in fact a new creature in Christ 
 Jesus. See Note on 2 Cor. v. 17, for 
 an explanation of the phrase " a new 
 creature." 
 
 16. And as many as walk. As 
 many as live, for so the word walk is 
 used in the Scriptures. % According 
 to this rule. Gr. This canon. See 
 the word explained in the Notes on 
 
 2 Cor. x. 13. ^ Peace be on them. 
 See Note, Rom. xv. 33. ^ And upon 
 the. Israel of God. The true church 
 of God ; all who are his true worship- 
 pers. See Notes on Rom. ii. 28, 29 ; 
 ix. 6. 
 
 17. From henceforth. For the re- 
 maining time ; that is, during the re- 
 mainder of my life. % Let no man 
 trouble me. This implies that he had 
 
 34 
 
 16 And as many as walk ac- 
 cording to this rule, peace e be 
 on them, and mercy, and upon 
 the Israel of God. 
 
 17 From henceforth let no 
 
 had trouble of some kind, and he earn- 
 estly desires that he may have no more. 
 What particular trouble he here refers 
 to, is not certainly known, and com- 
 mentators have not been agreed. It 
 seems to me that the connexion re- 
 quires us to understand it of the mo- 
 lestation which he had had in regard to 
 his call to the apostolic office, and his 
 authority to explain and defend the 
 religion of the Redeemer. This had 
 been one principal subject of this epis- 
 tle. His authority had been called in 
 question. He had felt it necessary to 
 go into a vindication of it. His in- 
 structions had been departed from on 
 the ground that he was not one of the 
 original apostles, and that he differed 
 from others. See ch. i. 11. Hence 
 all the anxiety and trouble which he 
 had had in regard to their departure 
 from the doctrines which he had taught 
 them. He closes the whole subject of 
 the epistle by this tender and affecting 
 language, the sense of which has been 
 well expressed by Crellius. 'I have 
 shown my apostolic authority, and 
 proved that I am commissioned by the 
 Lord Jesus. I have stated and vindi- 
 cated the great doctrine of justification 
 by faith, and shown that the Mosaic 
 law is not necessarily binding. On 
 these points may I have no more trou- 
 ble. I have enough for my nature 
 to bear of other kinds. I bear in my 
 body the impressive proofs that I am 
 an apostle, and the sufferings that re- 
 quire all my fortitude to sustain them. 
 These marks, received in the service of 
 the Lord Jesus, and so strongly re- 
 sembling those which he himself re- 
 ceived, prove that I am truly engaged 
 in his cause, and am commissioned by 
 him. These wounds and sorrows are 
 so many, that I have need of the kind- 
 ness and prayers of Christians rather 
 than to be compelled to vindicate my- 
 
398 
 
 GALATIANS. 
 
 [A. D. 58. 
 
 man trouble me ; for ° I bear 
 in my body the marks of the 
 Lord Jesus. 
 
 a Col. 1.24. 
 
 &2Ti. 4.22. Phil. 8. 25. 
 
 self, and to rebuke them for their own 
 wanderings.' t For I bear in my body 
 the marks of the Lord Jesus. The 
 word here rendered "marks" (rriy- 
 fAwmy, means properly the marks or 
 brand* which are pricked or burnt in 
 upon the body. So slaves were some- 
 times branded by their masters to pre- 
 vent their escape; and so devotees to 
 an idol god sometimes caused to be im- 
 pressed on themselves the name or 
 imago of the divinity which they adored. 
 Herodotus (ii. 113) mentions a temple 
 of Hercules in Egypt in which if any 
 slave took refuge, and bad the sacred 
 brands or marks impressed on him 
 (o-ti^itu) he thereby devoted bimsclf 
 to the god, and it was not lawful for 
 any one to injure him. Many have 
 supposed that Paul here says, in allu- 
 sion to such a custom, that he had the 
 name of the Redeemer impressed on 
 his body, and that he regarded himself 
 as devoted to him and his cause. It 
 seems to me that by these marks or 
 brands he refers to the weals which he 
 had received in his body ; the marks of 
 stripes and sufferings which he en- 
 dured in the service of the Redeemer. 
 Comp. 2 Cor. xi. 24, 25. He had re- 
 peatedly been scourged. He bore the 
 marks of that on his person now. 
 They were the evidences that he was 
 devoted to the Saviour. He had re- 
 ceived them in his cause ; and they 
 were the proofs that he belonged to 
 the Lord Jesus. He had suffered for 
 him, and had suffered much. Having 
 thus suffered, and having thus the evi- 
 dence that he belonged to the Saviour, 
 and having by his sufferings given 
 ample proof of that to others, he asks 
 to be freed from further molestation. 
 Some had in their body the marks of 
 circumcision, the evidence that they 
 were disciples of the law of Moses; 
 others had perhaps in their persons the 
 image and name of an idol to which 
 
 18 Brethren, the » pracs of 
 our Lord Jesus Christ be with 
 your spirit. Amen. 
 
 Unto the Galatians, written 
 from Rome. 
 
 they were devoted ; but the marks 
 which he bore were the weals which 
 he had received by being again and 
 again whipped publicly in the cause 
 of the Redeemer. To that Redeemer, 
 therefore, he felt himself united, and 
 from that attachment he would not 
 allow himself to be diverted. How 
 often has an old soldier shown his scars 
 with pride and exultation as a proof 
 of his attachment to his country ! 
 Numerous scars; the loss of an arm, 
 an eye-, or a leg, are thus the much- 
 valued and vaunted pledges of attach- 
 ment to liberty, and a passport to 
 the confidence of every man who loves 
 his country. ' I prize this wound/ 
 said Lafayette, when struck in the foot 
 by a musket ball at Germantown, ' as 
 among the most valued of mv honours.' 
 So Paul felt in regard to the scourges 
 which he had received in the cause of 
 the Lord Jesus. They were his boast 
 and his glory ; the pledge that he had 
 been engaged in the cause o.f the Sa- 
 viour, and a passport to all who loved 
 the Son of God. Christians now are 
 not subjected to such stripes and 
 scourgings. But let us have some 
 marks of our attachment to the Lord 
 Jesus. By a holy life ; by self-denial ; 
 by subdued animal affections; by zeal 
 in the cause of truth ; by an imitation 
 of the Lord Jesus ; and by the marks 
 of suffering in our body, if we should 
 be called to it, let us have some evi- 
 dence that we are his, and be able to 
 say when we look on death and eter- 
 nity, ' we bear with us the evidence 
 that we belong to the Son of God.' 
 To us that will be of more value than 
 any ribbon or star indicating elevated 
 rank; more valuable than a ducal coro- 
 net : more valuable than the brightest 
 jewel that ever sparkled on the brow of 
 royalty. 
 
 18. Brethren, the grace, &c. Se© 
 Note. Rom. xvi. 20. 
 
Barnes' Notes on tlje Nero Testament, 
 
 FOR FAMILIES AND SUNDAY SCHOOLS. 
 
 In Ten Volumes, with Maps and Engravings, 12mo, Muslin, 75 cents per 
 
 Volume, any of which may be obtained separately. 
 
 tietpagntf 
 
 <mm8&'& 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Vols. I., II. The Four Gospels.— III. The Acts of the Apostles.— IV. The Epistle 
 to the Romans. —V. The First Epistle to the Corinthians.— VI. The Second 
 Epistle to the Corinthians, and the Epistle to the Gai.atians.— VII. The 
 Epistles to the Ephesians, the Colossians, and the Philippians— VIII. The 
 Epistles to the Thessalonians, Timothy, Titus, and Philemon.— IX. The Epistle 
 to the Hebrews.— X. The General Epistles of James, Peter, John, and Jude. 
 
 QUESTIONS on the Above, 18mo, 15 cents per Volume. As follows : 
 Vol. I. Matthew.— II. Mark and Luke.— III. John.— IV. Acts.— V. Romans.— VI. First 
 Corinthians.— VII. Hebrews. 
 
 Testimonials from Distinguished British Clergymen. 
 
 From the Hon. and Rev. Baptist W. Noel, M.A. 
 I heartily wish success to the Commentary of Mr A. Barnes. Coming after so many excel- 
 lent expositors, he has derived advantage from their writings. He has more learning than 
 Scott; more critical decision than Henry; more spiritual discernment than Whitby; more 
 copiousness than Benson ; and more judgment than Gill. He affords precisely the aid which 
 an English reader requires when seeking to ascertain the exact sense of obscure passages ; 
 and these " Notes" will, in my opinion, render essential service to the cause of religion. 
 
 From the Rev. Alexander Fletcher, Finsbury Chapel. 
 I have consulted Barnes' Commentary on Corinthians with much satisfaction, and am 
 pleased to find that it exemplifies the same piety, talent, research, and liveliness, furnished 
 by the preceding Commentaries on the books of the New Testament, which have been prepar- 
 
 ed bv the same eminent divine. 
 
 GPd^A </4^L, 
 
I TESTIMONIALS TO BARNES NOTES. 
 
 From the Rev. Richard Alliott, LL.D., Lambeth. 
 I have great pleasure in recommending Barnes' " Notes" to the Christian public 
 
 ^ 
 
 *+*~cC 
 
 SUMr. 
 
 From the Rev. Ralph Wardlaw, D.D. 
 I have examined the " Notes" of the Rev. Albert Barnes on a considerable variety of testing 
 passages ; and, so far as my examination has gone, I feel confident in pronouncing them to be 
 characterized, in no ordinary degree, by discriminative judgment, sound theology, unostenta- 
 tious learning, practical wisdom, and evangelical piety. A boon of greater benefit to the pub- 
 lic can not be bestowed than, along with correct and cheap Bibles, to give wide circulation, 
 by cheap editions, to Commentaries on the Bible such as this ; and especially in times when 
 the exclusive authority of Holy Scripture, in all matters of faith and practice, requires to be 
 ■o firmly maintained and universally inculcated. 
 
 From the Rev. J. W. Massie, D.D., Manchester. 
 I had often consulted Barnes' " Notes" on parts of the Sacred Volume, and found them re- 
 plete with profitable and suggestive matter. I wish every village pastor and Sunday school 
 teacher in Britain had a complete copy of them. They would afford valuable assistance to 
 many in more exalted spheres. 
 
 /fcsMySie- 
 
 From Sir Culling E. Eardlev, Bart. 
 I have much pleasure in expressing my admiration of Barnes' " Notes." Independently of 
 the merit of the work itself, from its simplicity and clearness to even the humblest intelli- 
 gence, it is well got up ; the maps are very good ; and its moderate price places it within the 
 reach of most classes. You have my best wishes in the publication. 
 
 From the Rev. W. Lyndsay Alexander, D.D., Edinburgh. 
 I have long regarded the " Notes" of the Rev. Albert Barnes on the Gospels and Epistles 
 as the best commentary for popular use extant on the New Testament. They are, for tho 
 most part, simple, clear, concise, and accurate ; embodying the results of much reading, with- 
 out any offensive parade of learning. It would be well that they were in the hands of all who 
 read the New Testament. 
 
NOTES. 8 
 
 From the Rev. T. W. Jenkyn, D.D., F.G.S., Coward College, London. 
 
 For the last twenty years I have been a reader of the various works of the Rev. Albert 
 fiarr.es. From my strong attachment to his sound and manly theology, I hailed with delight 
 the first appearance of his " Notes on the New Testament." I have read every volume as it 
 came forth in the American edition, and consider all of them as rich in sober, clear, faithful, 
 and learned exposition of "the mind of the Spirit" in the Divine Word. 
 
 In these modest volumes, Mr. Barnes supplies his readers with all the results of modern 
 criticism, without making- any parade of his learning in Hebrew and Syriac quotations. Oc 
 casional slips in Greek criticism have escaped some of the best and most diligent interpreters 
 but Mr. Barnes has as few of them as any commentator that I know. For comprehensive 
 views in theology, for the application of doctrines to the affairs of every-day life, and for a 
 tendency to produce and to vindicate revivals of religion in the churches of Christ, the English 
 language has not an exposition equal to it. 
 
 fftSJh fe^Xy^ 
 
 From the Rev. J. A. James, Carres Lane Chapel, Birmingham. 
 Barnes is, in my judgment, the best popular expositor of the Scriptures of his day. His 
 judgment is sound, and his discrimination accurate. He is concise without being obscure ; 
 and yet sufficiently explicit without being tedious. I sometimes differ from him, but never 
 till I have well considered his views as well as my own. 
 
 S*J* 
 
 S&&4? 
 
 From the Rev. j. Sherman, Surrey Chapel. 
 Your edition of Barnes' " Notes" appears to me both carefully and well got up, and must 
 be of great use to Sunday school teachers and others whose means will not allow them to have 
 more expensive and elaborate commentaries. Without subscribing to every sentiment of the 
 author, there can be no doubt the "Notes" are valuable, judicious, and evangelical. Tou 
 aave my sincere wish for their extensive circulation. 
 
 ^Sjt*M~6/ /%6<&*zc<!M<^ 
 
 From the Rev. Edward Steane, D.D., Camberwell. 
 Barnes' " Notes on the New Testament" are a valuable addition to the commentaries we 
 already possess on the Word of God. 
 
 f^0w£f^£> 
 
 From the Rev. John Harris, D.D., Cheshunt College. 
 Barnes' "Exposition" is undoubtedly the best work of its kind. Besides showing an exten- 
 sive acquaintance with the writings of other expositors, it is pervaded by an evangelical spirit, 
 ■written in a clear, natural, and vigorous style, and is replete with good sense. 
 
 Sp<-*is-~z*~z^? 
 
TESTIMONIALS TO BARNES NOTES. 
 
 From the Rev. Jabez Burns, D.D., JEnon Chapel, St. Marylebone. 
 am delighted with Barnes' " Note* ;" I wish they had a place in every family in the land 
 
 S\yw& 
 
 From the Rev. George Clayton, Walworth. 
 Having made myself acquainted with Albert Barnes' New Testament, I cordially concur 
 with others of my brethren in giving the work my warmest recommendation. 
 
 From the Rev. Adam Thomson, D.D., Coldstream. 
 Since the days of Matthew Henry, no commentator that I know of has appeared, who, for 
 general usefulness, and particularly for affording to ministers of the Gospel the best sort of 
 assistance, can be compared with Albert Barnes. 
 
 From the Rev. E. Bickersteth, M.A., Rector of Watton, Herts. 
 I have been in the habit of occasionally consulting Mr. Barnes' "Exposition." I think high* 
 ly of his industry and piety, and believe that he has gathered much useful illustration of that 
 glorious One Book, which must ever be the chief study of the Christian. 
 
 z w^yrfU^&ffir 
 
 Extracts from Critical Opinions of the Press. 
 
 The author of this valuable work is so well known as one of the ablest Biblical commenta- 
 tors in this country, that any extended commendation is needless. The best commendation, 
 perhaps, which we can make, is to say that nearly 80,000 copies of his M Notes on the Gospels 
 and the Epistles" have been sold since their first publication. These works are valuable to 
 Sunday-school teachers, as well as useful to Christians generally in assisting them to under- 
 stand the Word of God. — Evangelist. 
 
 These valuable commentaries combine a just proportion of the devotional with the critical. 
 — Commercial Advertiser. 
 
 The first rank among Biblical critics has been assigned to this able commentator. — New 
 York Evening Gazette. 
 
 "1 know of no commentary," says the Rev. Dr. Cumming, of England, "so succinct, full, 
 and impartial. It is fitted to instruct the preacher no less than the Sunday-school teacher. 
 It seems to be his grand effort to unveil solely what 'the Spirit saith to the Churches.' I 
 venture to predict that his faithful and lucid comments will find a response in the minds, 
 hearts, and consciences of most Christian readers." 
 
 The fame of Albert Barnes, of Philadelphia, has become European. As a writer, he has 
 few competitors in his own land, and not many in ours.— London Church Examiner. 
 
 Harper and Brothers, Publishers, New York. 
 

 i 
 
- 
 

■ 
 
YB 27982 
 
 33 b" 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY